JP2023173043A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve an interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine which can execute a game on the basis of a satisfaction of a predetermined condition and can generate a state advantageous for a player, includes performance control means which controls a performance of a game. The performance control means can execute a result deriving performance which derives either a first result or a second result, in a state advantageous for the player. In the result deriving performance, a selection performance, selected from multiple types, can be executed. In each of the selection performances, a degree of reliability indicating a level of a possibility of deriving the first result is set. When a selection performance, having a predetermined degree of reliability, of the multiple types of selection performances is executed, and a specific derivation mode in which the first result is derived is brought about, the level of the possibility of deriving the first result is high in the result deriving performance to be subsequently executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6-38

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can execute a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

Conventionally, a pachinko machine is a typical example of a gaming machine. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of pieces of identification information (such as patterns, symbols, etc. ) is started, and if the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state is entered in which a special variable winning device is opened, and the player wins a profit. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform effects to increase a player's expectations (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-181255 Publication

However, it has not been possible to sufficiently improve the interest of the game. An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of gaming.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1,
In a gaming machine that can execute a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generate a situation advantageous to the player,
Equipped with performance control means for controlling the performance of the game,
The performance control means is
It is possible to perform a result derivation for deriving either the first result or the second result in a state advantageous to the player,
It is possible to perform a selection performance selected from a plurality of types in the result derivation performance,
A reliability level is set for each of the selection effects, which is a high probability that the first result will be derived;
If the selected effect having the predetermined reliability among the plurality of types of selected effects is executed and a specific derivation mode is reached in which the first result is derived, in the result derivation performed later, the selected effect is It is characterized by a high possibility that the first result will be derived.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention viewed from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control system of a gaming machine. It is a diagram showing an example of the distribution rate of the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol, the regular figure probability, and the number of games reaching the ceiling. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of gaming states. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure start opening switch common processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure reservation information judgment processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure normal processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 variation start processing and special figure 2 variation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining time saving end setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. 3 is a flowchart illustrating fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining support operation setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating specific area switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing of the production control device. 3 is a flowchart illustrating received command check processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating received command analysis processing. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of an image. It is a figure explaining an example of selection display. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention viewed from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control system of a gaming machine. It is a diagram showing an example of the distribution rate of the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol, the regular figure probability, and the number of games reaching the ceiling. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of gaming states. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure start opening switch common processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure reservation information judgment processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure normal processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 variation start processing and special figure 2 variation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining time saving end setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. 3 is a flowchart illustrating fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining support operation setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating specific area switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing of the production control device. 3 is a flowchart illustrating received command check processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating received command analysis processing. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining the execution mode of the game in a specific game state, and the execution mode of a 2nd special game state. It is a figure explaining another example of the execution mode of the game in a specific game state. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an output mode of external information. It is a front view of the game board in a 1st modification. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention viewed from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control system of a gaming machine. It is a diagram showing an example of the distribution rate of the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol, the number of games reaching the ceiling, and the end condition of the specific game state. It is a figure explaining the operation mode at the time of a small hit. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a general figure fluctuation display game. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of gaming states. It is a figure explaining the handling when time saving overlaps, and the display of a batch display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating information output to the outside of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating information output to the outside of the gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure start opening switch common processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure reservation information judgment processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure normal processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 variation start processing and special figure 2 variation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining time saving end setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. 3 is a flowchart illustrating fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining support operation setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating specific area switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing of the production control device. 3 is a flowchart illustrating received command check processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating received command analysis processing. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention viewed from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control system of a gaming machine. It is a diagram showing an example of the distribution rate of the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol, the number of games reaching the ceiling, and the end condition of the specific game state. It is a figure explaining the operation mode at the time of a small hit. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a general figure fluctuation display game. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of gaming states. It is a figure explaining the handling when time saving overlaps, and the display of a batch display device. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating information output to the outside of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating information output to the outside of the gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure start opening switch common processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure reservation information judgment processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure normal processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 variation start processing and special figure 2 variation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining time saving end setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. 3 is a flowchart illustrating fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining support operation setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating specific area switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing of the production control device. 3 is a flowchart illustrating received command check processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating received command analysis processing. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a time chart showing the display of a specific image and the transition timing of the presentation mode. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a time chart showing the display of a specific image and the transition timing of the presentation mode. It is a perspective view of the gaming machine seen from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a production control system of a gaming machine. 2 is a flowchart (part 1) showing the procedure of main processing. 12 is a flowchart (part 2) showing the procedure of main processing. 12 is a flowchart (part 3) showing the procedure of main processing. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of a gaming microcomputer. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of safety device information initialization processing. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of performance display editing processing. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the procedure of output processing. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of winning a prize opening switch/state monitoring process. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of fraud & winning monitoring processing. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of winning number counter update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of gaming machine state check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a probability setting change/confirmation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a starting port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure start opening switch common processing. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of specific area switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure usual processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of jackpot flag 1 setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of jackpot flag 2 setting processing. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of jackpot determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of small hit determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of support hit determination processing. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure information setting processing. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of a variation pattern setting process. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of 2-byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a time-saving end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of production mode information check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of special figure display processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter part of the special figure display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of support operation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of accessory game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of accessory normal processing. It is a flowchart showing the procedure of jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of jackpot end setting process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of jackpot end setting process 2. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a common figure game process. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of general electricity prize switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal figure normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process transition setting process during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during normal figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during normal map display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing in a normal figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of normal power operation transition setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of general electric field remaining bulb processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the end process per common figure. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first half of external information editing processing. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the latter half of external information editing processing. 3 is a time chart showing how external information or test signals are transmitted. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of safety device related processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an extra-region integration process. 3 is a flowchart showing the procedure of performance display device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of difference ball confirmation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a safety device operation monitoring process. It is a flowchart showing the main processing of the production control device. 7 is a flowchart showing received command check processing. 3 is a flowchart showing received command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart showing one-shot command processing. It is a flowchart showing prefetch symbol type command processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating prefetch variable command processing. It is a flowchart showing symbol-related command processing. 3 is a flowchart showing variable command processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hit system command process. This is a table showing aspects of performance-related devices depending on the state of the safety device. It is an example (Example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of a display device in chronological order. It is an example (Example 1) of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of a display device in chronological order. It is another example (example 2) of the screen transition diagram which shows the display screen of a display device in chronological order. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of an operation notice display when not waiting for a customer. It is a diagram illustrating an operation notice display before and after the reach during a variable display other than when waiting for a customer. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an operation notice display while waiting for a customer. The display screen of the display device in a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is illustrated. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example (example 1) of a specific model display that is displayed as something other than a video. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example (Example 2) of a specific model display displayed in a manner other than a video. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a menu screen and an item screen corresponding to an item selected on the menu screen. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of the relationship between the operation of a safety device, a menu screen, and an item screen corresponding to an item selected on the menu screen. It is a timing chart explaining an example of the relationship between the operation of the safety device, the display, and the effect button. It is a figure explaining an example of the relationship between operation of a safety device, a display, and a presentation button. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of the relationship between the operation of a safety device and a menu screen. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of the relationship between the operation of a safety device and an item screen corresponding to an item selected on a menu screen. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of the relationship between the operation of a safety device and an item screen corresponding to an item selected on a menu screen. 12 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the relationship between the operation of a safety device and an item screen corresponding to an item selected on a menu screen. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of the relationship between an operation movie and a menu screen. It is a figure explaining the modification of a menu screen. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of an in-operation display. 5 is a timing chart illustrating an example of the relationship between the operation of a safety device and an external signal. It is a flowchart explaining an example of initial operation setting processing performed by the production control device. It is a flowchart explaining an example of power saving mode processing performed by the game control device. It is a flowchart explaining an example of power saving function setting processing performed by the production control device. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a perspective view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention viewed from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a control system of a gaming machine. It is a figure showing an example of the distribution rate of the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the distribution rate of the jackpot symbol, the small prize symbol, the regular symbol probability, and the number of games reaching the ceiling. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of gaming states. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure start opening switch common processing. It is a flow chart explaining special figure reservation information judgment processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure normal processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 variation start processing and special figure 2 variation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining time saving end setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. 3 is a flowchart illustrating fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1; It is a flowchart explaining support operation setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting process 1 and jackpot end setting process 2. 3 is a flowchart illustrating specific area switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing of the production control device. 3 is a flowchart illustrating received command check processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating received command analysis processing. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating selectable patterns and reliability. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. It is a figure explaining an example of presentation. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating selectable patterns and reliability.

<First embodiment>
FIG. 1-1 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, and FIG. 1-2 is a front perspective view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 1-1 and 1-2, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be rotatable in opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIGS. 1-3) is stored in a storage section (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 including a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

A display board 350 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is provided on the glass frame 15 at a position behind the cover glass 14. The display board 350 can see through the game board 30 and can display a predetermined display. Although the game machine of this embodiment is configured with a light guide plate that makes an image appear by introducing light from the side edge, it may also be configured with a transparent liquid crystal display device or an EL display device.
When the display board 350 is not displaying a predetermined display, it is transparent and does not obstruct the visibility of the game board 30 at the rear. Then, when a predetermined display is displayed on the display board 350,
The visibility of the rear game board 30 is reduced in the predetermined display portion. In this state, the rear game board 30 may be visible through the predetermined display, or the rear game board 30 may be invisible due to the predetermined display.

At the top of the glass frame 15, a model name display section 16 for displaying the model name of the gaming machine 10, etc. is provided.
In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration, presentation, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are set in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15. Furthermore, when an abnormality occurs, the content of the abnormality is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a lamp for reporting an abnormality in dispensing may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the bottom of the glass frame 15, there is an upper tray (storage tray) 21 for supplying game balls to a batted ball firing device (not shown), and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. An upper plate ball outlet 22 and the like are provided for outflow. Further, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, there is provided a performance button 25 that includes a performance button switch 25a (see FIGS. 1-5) for accepting press operation input from the player. The production button 25 also has a built-in drive source that vibrates the production button 25. That is, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has a vibration function that makes a predetermined notification by vibrating the performance button 25. In addition, the production button 25 can be converted from a normal state (the state shown in FIGS. 1-1 and 1-2) to a protruding state (a state in which the top surface (pressing surface) of the production button 25 is higher than in the normal state). It may be configured as follows.

At the lower part of the front frame 12, there are provided a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls put out when the upper tray 21 is full, a handle 24 of a batted ball firing device, and the like. Furthermore, front frame 1
A keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15.

Further, on the right side of the production button 25, there is a lending button (ball lending button) 27a that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a lending button 27a for ejecting a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A return button (ejection button) 27b that is operated to operate the balance, a balance display device (balance display section) 27c that displays the balance of the prepaid card, and an upper tray operation lever that is operated to cause the game balls in the upper tray 21 to flow down to the lower tray 23. 27d, a mobile terminal holder 28 for placing a mobile terminal such as a smartphone owned by a player is provided. Further, to the left of the production button 25, a volume adjustment button 27e, a cross key 29, etc. are provided.
In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 24, the ball firing device fires game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. . Furthermore, when the player operates the production button 25 or the cross key 29, the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 1-3). You can perform performances, etc.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be explained using FIGS. 1-3. FIG. 1-3 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 1-3, the game board 30 includes a flat game board body that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front side of the game board body is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. A gaming area 32 is provided. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball firing device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the direction of the game balls flowing down, and the fired game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case 40 is attached that forms a window that becomes a display area for a variable display game. A display device 41 serving as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is arranged behind a window portion formed in the center case 40.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured of a device having a display screen, such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area (display area) where images can be displayed on the display screen, still images and videos can be displayed as performance images, such as multiple identification information (special symbols), characters for special symbol variation display games, etc. Information regarding the game, such as a background image that enhances the presentation effect, is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special symbol variable display game corresponding to the special symbol variable display game is played. Furthermore, images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

The center case 40 includes a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 into the center case 40, and a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 into the center case 40, and a warp flow path forming member 614 that allows the game balls that have passed through the warp flow path to roll. A possible stage section 620 is provided. Since the stage part 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize opening 36, the game balls rolling on the stage part 620 can easily win in the starting winning opening 36.
Further, the upper and lower parts of the center case 40 are provided with a board presentation device 44 that performs a game effect by operating. The lower presentation device 44a provided at the lower part of the center case 40 is operable between a lower position of the center case 40 and a position closer to the center of the display device 41 than this position.
The upper presentation device 44b provided at the upper part of the center case 40 is operable between the upper position of the center case 40 and a position closer to the center of the display device 41 than this position. Moreover, the above-mentioned presentation device 44b includes a rotating operating member 44c imitating a propeller.
It is possible to perform effects also by the movement of the movement member 44c.
That is, the lower presentation device 44a constitutes a first movable accessory having an operable first movable member,
The upper performance device 44b constitutes a second movable accessory having a second movable member that can be operated.

In the gaming area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (common symbol starting gate) 34 is provided. A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 1-4) is provided inside the normal pattern starting gate 34 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the regular figure starting gate 34, the regular figure variation display game is executed.

Three general winning holes 35 are arranged in the gaming area 32 on the lower left of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the gaming area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Winning of game balls into these general winning holes 35 is detected by a winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 1-4) provided in the general winning hole 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a starting prize opening 36 (first starting prize area) is provided which provides a starting condition for the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game). The game ball that has won the starting prize opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 1-4).

On the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) is provided that provides starting conditions for the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game). The winning game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 1-4).
The normal variable prize winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b, and this movable member 37b normally maintains a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which game balls cannot enter. When the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a predetermined result, the general variable prize winning device is operated in an inverted “C” shape by the general electric solenoid 37c (see Fig. 1-4) as a driving device. 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which game balls can easily flow into the player.
It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 allows the game ball to win even when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, and may be in a state where it is more difficult to win the game ball in the closed state than in the open state.

In the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40, there is provided a special variable prize winning device (big prize opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variable display game. There is. The special variable prize winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening/closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, and when opened, game balls can flow into the upper prize winning opening. Convert to state. The special variable winning device 38 converts the grand prize opening from a closed state to an open state depending on the result of the special figure variable display game, and facilitates the flow of game balls into the grand prize opening, thereby providing a reward to the player. A predetermined gaming value (prize ball) is given. The game ball that won the special variable winning device 38 is detected by the big winning opening switch (counting switch) 38a (see FIG. 1-4).

Inside the grand prize opening (winning area), there is a specific area where game balls can flow into, and a lever solenoid 38f (Figure 1-4 A lever member is provided which is actuated by (see). A specific area switch 38d (see Figure 1-4) that can detect the inflow of game balls is provided in the specific area, and based on the detection of game balls by the specific area switch 38d, an advantageous area for the player is displayed. A state occurs (in this embodiment, a special game state occurs). The game balls that have flowed into the specific area are discharged to the outside of the special variable prize winning device 38.

Further, inside the big prize opening, there is provided a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 1-4) that detects game balls that are discharged to the outside of the special variable prize winning device 38 without flowing into a specific area. There is. The number of game balls detected by the big winning hole switch 38a provided inside the big winning hole (the number of game balls flowing into the big winning hole) and the game detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball outlet switch 38e By matching the number of balls (the number of game balls ejected from the grand prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper prize winning hole have been ejected, and basically until this confirmation is completed, new The grand prize opening will no longer be opened.

In the gaming area 32 below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a is provided for collecting game balls that do not win the winning opening or the like. Also, outside the gaming area 32, the gaming board main body 80
In the lower right corner of is the special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game)
Also provided is a collective display device 50 that executes a general figure fluctuation display game.

The batch display device 50 is a special figure 1 display device (first special figure variation display section) for the special figure 1 variation display game.
51 and special figure 2 variable display special figure 2 display device for the game (second special figure variable display section) 52, and special figure 1
It is provided with a special figure 1 pending display 53 for informing the starting memory number of the variable display game and a special figure 2 pending display 54 for informing the starting memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game.

The collective display device 50 also includes a round display section 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a jackpot (the number of times the special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed), and a gaming state display section 5 that displays the gaming state of the gaming machine 10.
6. This game state display section 56 includes a first game state display section 56a that informs the player of the way of hitting that is advantageous to the player (the way of hitting that corresponds to the game state) between hitting to the left (normal hitting) and hitting to the right.
, a second gaming state display section 56b that notifies that the time saving state is in effect (when the variable time saving function is activated).
A third gaming state display section 56c is provided to notify that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the special symbol probability is always constant, the third gaming state display section 56c is not used.
Furthermore, the collective display device 50 includes a regular figure display 57 for the regular figure fluctuation display game, and a regular figure pending display 58 for informing the starting memory number of the regular figure fluctuation display game.

FIG. 1-4 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, which is a main control device (main board) that centrally controls the game, and has a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110, the input section 120, and the output section 130. .

The CPU section 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that includes an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator and generates a reference clock for a CPU operating clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are powered by DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC-DC generator that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power source.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a converter or a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from a DC32V voltage, and a gaming microcomputer 1.
a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 11 in the event of a power outage;
It has a power outage monitoring circuit and includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power outage.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the gaming control device 100, but the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are configured on a separate board or integrated with the gaming control device 100, that is, the main It may also be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when changing models, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board separate from the power supply device 400 or the main board, as in this embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to remove it from the target of replacement and reduce costs.

The backup power supply section 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is provided by the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is maintained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. That is, the gaming control device 100 can store and retain information regarding the game even if a power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and after the power is restored, the game can be resumed based on the stored information. It serves as a game information storage and holding means.
The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops to 17V or less, detects the occurrence of a power outage, changes the power outage monitoring signal, and generates a reset signal after a predetermined time. Output. Also, when the power is turned on or when a power failure is recovered, a reset signal is output after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the gaming control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. will be held. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and an RA that can be read and written at any time.
M (random access memory) 111C is provided.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores unchanging information for game control (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.), and the RAM 111C serves as a work area for the CPU 111A and a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the performance, whether or not a ready-to-win state occurs, etc. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a loss fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second-half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as a second-half fluctuation group table and second-half fluctuation pattern selection table), and tables for determining the fluctuation pattern before reaching the reach state. It includes tables (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining first half variation patterns, which are patterns.

Here, reach (ready-to-reach state) refers to a display device that has a display state that can change, and that display device derives and displays multiple display results at different times, and that the multiple display results are predetermined. A gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous to the player when a special result mode occurs (special gaming state)
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed,
This is a display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device has progressed to the stage before the display results are derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode have not been met. This refers to the display mode that does not exist. For example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result aspect is complete (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Furthermore, the reach state is the display state at the point when the display control of the display device has progressed to the stage before the display results are derived and displayed, and is determined before the display results are derived and displayed. A display state in which at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, a decorative special figure variable display game displayed on a display device in response to a special figure variable display game may vary a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the variable display is to be stopped in the left, right, and middle order to display the result mode, the left and right variable display areas will display a state where the conditions for the special result mode are met (for example, The state in which the variable display stops with the same identification information is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas meet the conditions for special result mode (for example, the same The state of identification information,
However, it is also possible to make the remaining variable display area (excluding the special result mode) into a ready-to-reach state, and to display the remaining variable display area in a variable manner from this ready-to-reach state.

This reach state includes multiple reach performances, and the reach performances with different possibilities of deriving special results (different expected values) include normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 Reach) and Premier Reach are set. The expected values are: No reach < Normal reach < Special 1 reach < Special 2 reach < Special 3 reach <
The prices increase in order of premier reach. Moreover, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in the special symbol variable display game (when it becomes a jackpot). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when the result is a loss). Therefore, a state in which a ready-to-win state occurs is a state in which there is a higher possibility of a jackpot than in a case in which a ready-to-reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the performance control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and display device to operate the game machine. Controls the entire 10. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 uses a jackpot random number for determining the hit in the special pattern fluctuation display game, a special pattern pattern random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a fluctuation pattern ( Random number generation to generate variable pattern random numbers to determine the execution time of variable display games in various reach and non-reach variable displays), random number to generate winning random numbers to determine hits in general figure variable display games, etc. circuit, and a clock generator that generates a clock that provides a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111A uses the ROM 111B in processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game.
Any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the memory is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A calculates the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit, small hit, or miss), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state), Based on the starting memory number and the like, one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. Here, CPU111A
constitutes fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

The payout control device 200 is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit according to the prize ball payout command (command and data) from the game control device 100 to release the prize balls. Performs control for dispensing. Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit to pay out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, The winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, the big winning opening switch 38a in the special variable winning device 38, the gate switch 34a in the normal figure starting gate 34, the specific area switch 38d arranged in the special variable winning device 38 and remaining bulb outlet switch 38
e. It is connected to an out ball detection switch 32a that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 11V. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided which inputs a negative logic signal such as 7V and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V to 5V. Proximity I
/F121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the sensor or proximity switch lead wires may be improperly shorted, the sensor or switch may be removed from the connector, or the lead wires may be cut and left floating. It is configured to be able to detect such abnormal conditions and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, third input port 124, or fourth input port 126, and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switch 38a, and the gate switch 34a are input to the second input port 123. . Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, detection signals from the specific area switch 38d, remaining ball outlet switch 38e, and out ball detection switch 32a are input to the fourth input port 126. Also, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121,
A detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality in a sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 .

The third input port 124 also includes a detection signal from a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, a detection signal from a vibration sensor 65 for detecting vibrations of the gaming machine 10,
A detection signal from a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the gaming machine 10 and a detection signal from a main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 etc. of the gaming machine 10 are also input. It has become so.

Further, a signal from a setting key switch 152 that detects an operation of the setting key operation unit is input to the third input port 124 . The setting key operation section has a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted.
The configuration is such that the corresponding setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect when it is turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is turned to the second position, and turns on when it is not turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation section are operation sections for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values of special results in the special figure fluctuation display game are assigned, and these operation sections are operated. By doing this, you can select a probability setting value that is assigned a probability value that will result in a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value will be used in the game. There is. Here, six probability setting values, "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", are prepared.

When selecting the probability setting value, turn the setting key on the setting key operation section to the second position and press R.
By turning on the power of the gaming machine while operating (pressing) the AM initialization switch 112, the probability setting value change mode is enabled in which the probability setting value can be changed. You can change the probability setting value by pressing (press). The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and accessory ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays information on the probability setting value while performing operations related to the probability setting value (while in the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode); The calculated base value and accessory ratio are now displayed.

Also, the setting key of the setting key operation section is turned to the second position (RAM initialization switch 11
By turning on the power of the gaming machine in step 2 (no operation), the currently selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153, but the probability setting value confirmation mode is entered in which the probability setting value cannot be changed. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation section cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is in an open state.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and is adapted to display the probability setting value as a number from 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that allows the probability setting value to be recognized may be used. In addition, other types of display devices such as liquid crystal display devices may be used,
The probability setting value may be indicated by the lighting mode or emitted color of one or more LEDs.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the outputs to the second input port 123 and the outputs to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out-ball detection switch 32a) are connected to the main board 100.
The light is also supplied from the relay board 70 to a test firing test device (not shown). Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37
The detection signal a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12V is supplied to the proximity I/F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is transmitted to the enable signal CE by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122, which will be described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave fraud signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided in the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave), a payout busy signal (a signal output from the payout control device A signal indicating whether or not 200 is in a state where it can accept commands), a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (full)), a touch switch signal (based on the input of a touch switch provided on the handle 24) A first input port 122 is provided that takes in a signal (signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111, etc., and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has the function of removing noise from.
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In other words, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
The signal is input directly to the reset terminal provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130. Furthermore, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the sight-fire test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the sight-fire test device is turned off. It is configured as follows. Further, the configuration may be such that the reset signal RESET can be output to the sight test equipment via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is applied to each port 122, 123,
124 and 126 are not supplied. The data set in each port of the output section 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent system malfunction. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the production control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that this is one-way communication in which signals cannot be input from the production control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to a data bus 140 and sends data to inform a test shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown) of special symbol information of a variable display game, a signal indicating a probability state of a jackpot, etc. via a relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced and sold product) installed in a game parlor. Note that the detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a starting port switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor 61, panel radio sensor 62, and vibration sensor 65 that cannot be directly supplied to the test firing test device are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, such as the The signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test device via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the machine cannot control the game. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the sight test equipment, and a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal without going through the buffer. There is. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test device.

Further, the output section 130 is provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140. The second output port 134 is used to open the special variable winning device 38, the large winning hole solenoid (big winning hole solenoid 1) 38b, the lever solenoid 38f, which operates the lever member in the special variable winning device 38, and the normal variable winning device 37. Opening general electric solenoid 37
This is a port for outputting the operation data of c and the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the currently selected probability setting value.
Further, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting on/off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50; Turn on/off the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting off data.

The output unit 130 also outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 7.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for output to 1. The external information terminal board 71 is equipped with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device installed at a game parlor (an information collection terminal, a game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and can transmit information about the game machine 10. It is now possible to supply it to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 includes a first driver ( Drive circuit) 138a, third output port 1
A second driver 138b outputs an on/off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 outputted from the fourth output port 136, and a collective display device 5 outputted from the fourth output port 136.
A third driver 138c outputs an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of 0.
, a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71, and a display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134. a fifth driver 138e that receives the signal, generates a drive signal, and outputs the drive signal.
is provided. Note that data is transmitted from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e by serial communication.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that it can drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. The fifth driver 138e has a power supply voltage of D to be able to drive the performance display device 153 that operates at 5V.
C5V is supplied from power supply device 400.
Further, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50 includes DC1
2V is supplied. The third driver 138c that drives the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to display data with a current, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal via the segment line, thereby achieving a dynamic drive system. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are turned on.
The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.
In addition, the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the gaming control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. Photo coupler 13
Reference numeral 9 is configured to enable mutual communication between the gaming microcomputer 111 and the inspection device 500 so that data can be sent and received by serial communication. In addition, since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 like a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, 124, and 126 are not provided. do not have.

Note that, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting prize opening 36,
The starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switch 38a, and the gate switch 34a in the normal variable winning device 37 are equipped with magnetic detection coils to detect the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when metal comes close to the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (
(hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the gaming machine 10 and the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 etc. are microswitches having mechanical contacts. can be used.

Next, the configuration of the production control device 300 will be explained using FIGS. 1-5.
The performance control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 made of an amusement chip (IC) like the gaming microcomputer 111, and a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. It is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls the output of sound to reproduce various melodies, sound effects, etc. from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of ROM (programmable read only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe memory that can retain memory contents even when power is not supplied during a power outage.
A RAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338, which serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.), are connected. Note that a RAM providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the performance, and
It executes processes such as instructing the content of the output video to the DP 312, instructing the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lighting decorative lamps, controlling the drive of motors and solenoids, and managing performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 that stores character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read out from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYN is sent from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 for synchronizing the image on the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30.
C. A synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
The main control microcomputer 311 receives interrupt signals INT0 to INT0 to notify processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait signal to indicate that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. Signals such as WAIT are also input.

The production control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 using the LVDS (low amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the audio source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. Also, an interrupt signal INT is sent from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
is now entered. The production control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is outputted from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the production control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives commands transmitted from the game control device 100. Via this command I/F 331, a production control command signal (production command ). Gaming microcomputer 111 of gaming control device 100
operates at DC5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the production control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, so the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

The production control device 300 also includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 including the display board 350) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided therein, is provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). The board presentation device 44 (
For example, a board performance movable body control circuit 334 is provided that drives and controls a movable accessory that enhances the performance effect in cooperation with the performance display on the display device 41. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340. Note that even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device equipped with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates a device for effect), and a frame effect movable body control circuit is provided to drive and control the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, a cross key 29 provided in the glass frame 15, and an initial position of the motor in the board production device 44. Performance accessory switch 47 (performance motor switch) that detects etc.
A function that detects the on/off state of the controller and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a function that detects the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 and sends a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311. A switch input circuit 336 having the function of inputting is provided.

The normal power supply section 410 of the power supply device 400 is the production control device 300 having the above configuration.
In order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by it, 32V DC to drive the motor and solenoids, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, 12V DC to drive the motor and LEDs, DC5 which becomes the power supply voltage of command I/F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Furthermore, as the main control microcomputer 311, 3.3V or 1.2V
When using an LSI that operates at low voltage such as
The production control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating 1.2V and 1.2V. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. In addition, in the form of output from the main control microcomputer 311, VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), sound source LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the production control device 300 includes a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
When N45 is connected and the production control device 300 is powered on, the cooling FAN 45 is driven.

In the following description, if the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they will simply be referred to as the special figure variable display game. In addition, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the decorative special figure variable display game. In addition, if you do not distinguish between a jackpot (first special result) and a small hit (second special result), simply hit (special result).
It is called. In addition, when the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a jackpot, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small winning, are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as special gaming states.

Note that a jackpot is a special result (first special result) that involves the operation of a conditional device, and a small hit is a special result (second special result) that does not involve the operation of a conditional device. The condition device is activated when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol fluctuation display game (the jackpot symbol stops displaying).When the condition device is activated, for example, a jackpot condition occurs and a special electric accessory is activated. Variable winning device 38
This means that a specific flag is set for continuously operating the accessory (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). When the conditional device is not activated, it means that the aforementioned flag is not set, as in the case of winning a small lottery, for example. Note that the "condition device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be a hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. Also,
"Condition device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the continuous operation of electric accessories, and it has the same meaning in this specification. It is used as a term with

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by firing game balls (pachinko balls) from a ball launcher toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing its rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, and other direction changing members placed at various locations within the game area 32, and passes through the game starting gate 34 and the general prize opening 35. , the starting prize opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, or flowing into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and being discharged from the gaming area 32. Then, when game balls win in the general winning hole 35, starting winning hole 36, normal variable winning device 37, or special variable winning device 38, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning hole that won is distributed to the payout control device 200 ( 1-4), the liquid is discharged onto the upper tray 21 or lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and fires the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left-handed hitting), so that the player can enter the starting prize opening 36 or the left side of the starting winning opening 36. You can aim to win in the general winning opening 35 provided, and by firing the game ball into the right side gaming area (so-called right-handed hitting), you can enter the regular winning gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38. , it is possible to aim for a prize in the general prize opening 35.

A gate switch 34a consisting of a non-contact switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general figure starting gate 34 is provided in the normal figure starting gate 34, and
When the game ball hit inside passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern starting gate 34, the number of normal pattern starting memory is set to the upper limit number (for example, 4 balls). ), add the number of normal figures starting memory (+1
) and store one general pattern start memory in the RAM 111C. The number of memorized numbers of starting prizes for common symbols is displayed on the common symbol pending display 58 of the collective display device 50. In addition, the normal figure starting memory stores a random value for determining a hit (random hit value) for determining the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a. It is supposed to be done.

Then, if there is a normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern fluctuation display game can be started, that is, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not being executed, and the normal pattern fluctuation display game wins and the normal pattern fluctuation winning device 37 is changed to the open state. If it is not in a winning state, the random number value for hit determination stored in the first stored normal pattern starting memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine whether the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit or a miss. Then, a process is performed to start the normal figure fluctuation display game. When this random value for determining a hit matches the determination value, the general pattern fluctuation display game becomes a win and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100 presets a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns on the general pattern display 57 provided in the collective display device 50 over a predetermined variable time as a process for executing the normal pattern fluctuation display game. After performing a display during normal pattern fluctuation that is repeatedly displayed in the given order, a process is performed to display a normal pattern fluctuation display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed.
Note that the ordinary figure display 57 is constituted by the display device 41, and the ordinary identification information includes, for example, numbers, symbols,
It is also possible to use a character pattern or the like, and after displaying it in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, the display may be stopped and the result displayed.

When the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a win, the normal figure display 57 stops displaying a lighting pattern that is a special result mode, and the general electric solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37. Control is performed to open the switch for a predetermined period of time (for example, 24 ms or 1648 ms). That is, the game control device 100 constitutes conversion control execution means that performs conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In addition, when the result of the ordinary figure fluctuation display game is a loss, control is performed to display a lighting pattern that corresponds to the result of a loss on the ordinary figure display 57.

In addition, the winning balls into the starting winning hole 36 and the winning balls into the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside, respectively.
The CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 stores the first starting memory, which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory), based on winnings in the starting winning hole 36, to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4
A predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces) is stored in a second starting memory which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on winnings to the normal variable winning device 37. Based on the winnings in the starting winning hole 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, jackpot random numbers, special symbol random numbers, and each fluctuating pattern random number are extracted as starting memory information, respectively. The random number value is stored in the RAM 111C as a first starting memory or a second starting memory. The stored number of starting memories is displayed on the special drawing 1 pending display 53 and special drawing 2 pending display 54 for informing the number of starting winnings of the batch display device 50, as well as on the display device 41 of the center case 40. It is also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variable display device) based on the first starting memory, and performs the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 (first variable display device) based on the second starting memory. A special figure 2 variable display game is played on the second variable display device). When both the first starting memory and the second starting memory are stored, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 controls the special figure 1 variable display game ( In addition to controlling the execution of the first special figure variation display game), the special figure 2 variation is performed based on the second starting memory stored in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area). It serves as an execution control means for controlling the execution of the display game (second special figure variation display game). Then, in a state where the first starting memory and the second starting memory are stored, the execution control means is configured to change the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory from the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first starting memory. is also configured to be executed with priority.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing a variable display, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a jackpot, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes the special result mode (jackpot result mode) corresponding to the first special result. This results in a jackpot, resulting in a first special gaming state (so-called jackpot state).
In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is a special result mode (small hit result mode) corresponding to the second special result. This results in a small win, resulting in a second special game state (so-called small win state). In other words, special map 1
The display device 51 constitutes a first variable display means capable of displaying a first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on winning of a game ball to the starting winning hole 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 constitutes a second variable display means capable of displaying a second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on winning of game balls to the normal variable winning device 37.

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a jackpot game state (first special game state).
After the end of the game, control is executed to generate a gaming state (specific gaming state) in which the player can proceed with the game in a situation more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (high probability of winning, presence of general electricity support). It is possible to do so. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 constitutes a specific game state generation means.

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the display device 41
A decorative special figure variable display game is executed in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner. The decorative special figure 1 variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. and these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, a variable display is performed as the corresponding special figure variable display game changes, and a display corresponding to the result is performed as the result mode in the corresponding special figure variable display game is derived.

That is, the display device 41 plays an ornamental variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) in which the ornament identification information is variably displayed in response to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The present invention serves as a decorative variable display means capable of displaying a decorative special figure variable display game. Note that separate display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. In addition, gaming machine 1
The special figure fluctuation display game may be executed only with the display device 41 without providing the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

FIG. 1-6 shows an example of the distribution rate in this embodiment.
FIG. 1-6(a) is an example of the distribution rate of the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 1-6(a), there are four types of results of the special figure fluctuation display game: jackpot, small hit, support hit, and loss. In this embodiment, the distribution rate of the jackpot is common between the special chart 1 and the special chart 2, but it may be different between the special chart 1 and the special chart 2. In addition, in Figure 1-6 (a), the distribution rate of the jackpot is the same when the probability setting value is “Setting 1”, “Setting 2”, and “Setting 3”. However, it may be different. In addition, in Figure 1-6 (a), the distribution rate of the jackpot is the same when the probability setting value is "Setting 4", "Setting 5", and "Setting 6". However, it may be different.

Furthermore, in FIG. 1-6(a), the distribution rates for small hits and support hits are the same regardless of the probability setting value, but they may be different. That is, in this embodiment, only the winning probability of the jackpot is changed by changing the probability setting value, and the probability of the small winning and the support winning is not changed.
In addition, regarding the small winnings, the distribution rate of special map 2 is higher than that of special map 1. As a result, there is a higher possibility of a small hit with special figure 2, and if it becomes a small hit, it will enter the first special gaming state (jackpot) due to the flow into the specific area, so special figure 2 is more likely to result in a small hit. This is a special figure fluctuation display game that is advantageous for the player.

Figure 1-6(b) is an example of the distribution ratio of jackpot types. For a jackpot, for example, as shown in Figure 1-6(b), the 5R jackpot A symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol (jackpot result mode), and the 5R jackpot B symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol (jackpot result mode). There are four types: jackpot B, 10R jackpot A in which the 10R jackpot A symbol is stopped and displayed, and 10R jackpot B in which the 10R jackpot B symbol is stopped and displayed.
In 5R jackpot A, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is 5 rounds, and after the special gaming state ends, the normal power support state (specific gaming state) of support A is entered. In 5R jackpot B, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is 5 rounds, and after the special gaming state ends, the normal power support state of support B is entered. In 10R jackpot A, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is 10 rounds, and after the special gaming state ends, the normal power support state of support B is entered. In 10R jackpot B, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is 10, and after the special gaming state ends, the normal power support state of support C is entered.
Supports A to C have different conditions for ending the general power support state, and the general power support state ends when the conditions shown in FIG. 1-6(e) are met.

In Figure 1-6(b), the distribution rate of jackpot types differs depending on the gaming state in which the special figure fluctuation display game is executed, and in the normal gaming state, 5R jackpot A and 10R jackpot A can be selected. be. In the case of a specific gaming state, 5R jackpot B, 10R jackpot A, and 10R jackpot B can be selected.
In addition, regarding a jackpot that occurs due to a game ball flowing into a specific area of the special variable prize winning device 38 in the second special game state based on a small hit, the game state in which the special figure variable display game that resulted in a small win was executed Based on this, the jackpot type is selected as described above. Note that the selection rates may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

FIG. 1-6(c) is an example of a general pattern fluctuation display game. The winning probability and fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are constant regardless of the game state. In addition, when the general figure fluctuation display game becomes a hit, the opening time of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is the opening time when general electric power is supported (1648 ms), and the opening time when general electric power is not supported (24 ms). ), making it easier to win. In addition, the maximum count for the general public is 1, and when one game ball enters the normal variable winning device 37, the normal variable winning device 37 is closed even before the opening time has elapsed. .
It should be noted that it is only necessary that it is easier to win a prize in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the state of general power support (second state) than in the state of non-general power support (first state), and the probability, fluctuation time, opening time Alternatively, one or more of the general electric power maximum count numbers may be changed.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with a so-called ceiling function as shown in FIG. 1-6(d). That is, when the number of times the game has been executed reaches the ceiling number of times (500 in this case), the special game state is not generated and the normal power support state of support C is entered. The number of times the game is executed is always counted regardless of the presence or absence of general power support when the probability is low, and the counting is interrupted when the probability is high. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the special symbol probability is always constant, it is constantly counted. In addition, the number of times the game is executed is the sum of the number of times the special figure 1 variable display game is executed and the number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

The timing to clear the counting result of the number of times the game has been executed is when the general power support state is triggered by reaching the ceiling number of times, and when the condition device is activated (first special game state). Note that the timing for clearing the counting result of the number of game executions can be changed as appropriate, for example, when clearing the number of game executions is selected when operating the RAM initialization switch 112, or when the power is turned off instead of when clearing the RAM. It can also be used at the time of injection.

Further, when clearing the RAM, the measurement of the number of game executions may be cleared when the RAM is cleared without setting changes, and the measurement of the number of game executions may not be cleared when the RAM is cleared with setting changes. When the RAM is cleared without changing settings, for example, the power is turned on while the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on without turning on the setting key switch 152. In this manner, by not clearing the measurement of the number of game executions when clearing the RAM accompanied by a setting change, it is possible to make it difficult to determine that a setting change has been made.

FIG. 1-6(e) shows the conditions for ending the general power support state (specific gaming state).
In support A's general power support state, the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game is 1, or the total number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is 6 times. The power supply support state ends when either one of the following conditions is met: a small hit occurs once in the variable display game shown in FIG. Similarly, the general power support states of Support B and Support C are terminated by playing the number of games shown in FIG. 1-6(e).

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
First, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be explained. FIG. 1-7 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in this embodiment.
The gaming states include a normal gaming state ST1, a first special gaming state ST2 based on the first special result (big hit), a second special gaming state ST3 based on the second special result (small hit), a specific gaming state ST4, and a remaining hold. There is a digestive state ST5.
In each game state, there is a performance mode that is controlled by the performance control device 300 and determines the performance mode of the game, a main starting area that is the starting area that should be mainly aimed at in the game state, and a type of special figure fluctuation display game that should be mainly executed. A certain main variable special figure and the firing direction of the game ball are determined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the starting winning hole 36 by hitting the left hand, and it is possible to aim to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 by hitting the right. In other words, it is possible for the player to select the target starting area according to his/her will. In addition, each game state is designed with the assumption that the game will be played mainly in either the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, and the player will play the game according to this design. As the game progresses, it is constructed so that it is more advantageous for the player to play the game mainly with one of the special figure variable display games that is determined to be the main one in the design. In addition, in this specification, one special figure variation display game determined as the main one in each gaming state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the normal game state ST1, there is no general power support that improves the open time per unit time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 and makes it easier to win, and shortens the variable time of the special figure variable display game and the regular figure variable display game. There is no shortage of time. The main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, and the main starting area is the starting winning hole 36, and in order to aim at this starting winning hole 36, the firing direction is set to the left. Further, the performance mode that defines the performance mode is a normal stage.

The first special game state ST2 is a state in which there is no general power support and no time saving. In addition, the performance mode that defines the performance mode is the jackpot mode. In this first special game state ST2, the special variable winning device 38 is opened, so that the firing direction is right-handed.
In the second special game state ST3, the power supply support and time saving may or may not be present in order to take over the state at the time of winning the small hit. In addition, the performance mode that defines the performance mode is the small hit mode. In this second special game state ST3, the special variable winning device 38 is opened, so that the firing direction is right-handed.

The specific gaming state ST4 is a state that stays for a specified number of games after the first special gaming state ST2, and there is a general power support that improves the open time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. state.
If you have public power support, you can also save time by shortening the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game. In addition, the main variable special figure is a special figure 2 variable display game, and the main starting area is the normal variable prize winning device 37.
In order to aim at this normal variable winning device 37, the firing direction is set to the right. The specific gaming state ST4 is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state ST1 because it mainly executes the special symbol 2 variable display game in which there is general power support and small wins occur frequently. It is what you do.

The remaining pending state ST5 is a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory remaining when the specific game state ST4 ends can be executed.
In this remaining pending state ST5, there is no general power support, but there is a time saving that shortens the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display game. Since there is no power supply support, the firing direction is set to be left-handed so as to aim at the starting prize opening 36, but since it is a short period following the specific game state ST4, there is no need to clearly instruct left-handed firing. . Further, the average of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game in the remaining pending consumption state ST5 is shorter than the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display game in the specific game state ST4.
The remaining hold consumption state ST5 mainly executes the special symbol 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory that mainly occurs in the specific game state ST4, so it is a state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST1. It is a state.

The transition of the game state is the derivation of the first special result (big win), the derivation of the second special result (small win), the derivation of the support hit, the end of the first special game state, the end of the second special game state, and the regulation game. This is done by digesting numbers and reaching the ceiling.
When a jackpot is achieved in the normal gaming state ST1, the game shifts to a first special gaming state ST2. After the first special gaming state ST2 ends, the state is such that there is power support and time saving for a period until the conditions shown in FIG. 1-6(e) are satisfied, and the state shifts to the specific gaming state ST4.
When a jackpot is achieved in the specific gaming state ST4 or the remaining pending state ST5, the game also moves to the first special gaming state ST2, and then changes to the specific gaming state ST4.
Further, if the support is won or the ceiling is reached, the specific gaming state ST4 is entered without passing through the first specific gaming state ST2.

In the specific game state ST4, the normal power supply support makes it easier for game balls to win in the normal variable winning device 37, so that the second starting memory can be generated, and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed. If the conditions shown in Figure 1-6(e) are satisfied in this specific gaming state ST4, the general power support ends, and if there is a remaining hold that is the second start memory that occurred in the specific gaming state ST4, the remaining hold is The game enters the digested state ST5, and if there is no remaining reservation, the state shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the second starting memory is given priority over the first starting memory, but especially when a jackpot is achieved in the normal gaming state ST1, the second starting memory remains immediately after the start of the specific gaming state ST4. There is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game will be executed based on the first starting memory. This makes it possible to secure time for accumulating the second startup memory. In particular, the fluctuation time of the first special figure fluctuation display game in the specific game state ST4 is set to be a longer fluctuation time (for example, 100 s) than the second and subsequent fluctuation times, to ensure time for accumulating the second starting memory. I'm trying to do that.
In addition, as shown in Figure 1-6(e), when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in the specific gaming state ST4, the specified time is 5 games longer than when only the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. It becomes possible to stay in the gaming state ST4. This number of times is greater than the upper limit number of 4 for the first starting memory, and even if the special figure 1 variable display game is executed based on the first starting memory remaining at the start of the specific game state ST4, it is disadvantageous for the player. It won't happen.

It is possible to stay in the remaining pending state ST5 until the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory, which is the remaining pending, ends. In this remaining pending consumption state ST5, the specific game state ST
It is designed to perform a series of performances that are continuous with 4. After the remaining reservation consumption state ST5 ends, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1.

If a small win occurs in the normal gaming state ST1, specific gaming state ST4, or remaining hold extinguishment state ST5, a transition is made to the second special gaming state ST3.
If a game ball flows into a specific area in the second special gaming state ST3 (V winning), the first
A transition is made to the special gaming state ST2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, when a game ball flows into the special variable winning device 38, it almost certainly flows into a specific area. Therefore, in the case of a small hit, it is almost certainly possible to move to the first special game state ST2, and it is advantageous for the player to play many special figure 2 variable display games where the probability of a small win is high. It will happen. Of course, the probability of entry into a specific area may be controlled by a lever member provided inside the special variable winning device 38.

Further, if the game ball does not flow into the specific area in the second special gaming state ST3, the state shifts to the specific gaming state ST4, the remaining reservation extinguishing state ST5, or the normal gaming state ST1.
When a small win is achieved in the special figure 1 variable display game, if the number of games shown in FIG. 1-6(e) has not been played, the game moves to a specific game state ST4. In addition, if the number of games shown in Figure 1-6(e) has been used up, but there is a remaining hold that is the second starting memory that occurred in the specific game state ST4, the process shifts to the remaining hold extinguished state ST5. . Further, if the number of games shown in FIG. 1-6(e) has been played and there are no remaining pending games, the game shifts to the normal gaming state ST1.

In the case of a small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game, if there is a remaining hold which is the second starting memory that occurred in the specific game state ST4, the state shifts to a remaining hold extinguished state ST5. Since the termination condition for the general power support state includes the occurrence of a small hit in the special map 2 variable display game, if the specific game state ST4 is selected, the number of games shown in Figure 1-6 (e) is Even if it has not been used up, the general power support state ends and the remaining pending use state ST5 is entered. Further, if there is no remaining reservation, the game shifts to the normal gaming state ST1.

Control of a gaming machine that plays such a game will be explained below. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be explained. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of the main processing shown in FIGS. 1-8 and 1-9, and the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 1-10, which is performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. The main processing starts when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in Figures 1-8 and 1-9, the process of disabling interrupts (step Stack pointer setting processing (step X2) is performed to set a stack pointer that is the start address of the stack pointer. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (eg, D register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h or 01h taken as the upper one, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and firing of game balls is prohibited.

Thereafter, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and processing for setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, the game control device
A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from 00 to start normally.
is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the gaming control device 100 starts up first and sends a command to the sub-control device before the sub-control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) starts up, the sub-control device can avoid missing commands. That is, when the game control device 100 turns on the power, there is a predetermined delay for starting the main control means (the game control device 100) and waiting for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the performance control device 300, etc.). It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

Furthermore, the power-on delay timer measures time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (such as a RAM area or register that is not subject to validity determination). Thereby, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (step X8), and if a power outage has occurred (step wait until it is blocked.
Specifically, in step Determine if there is. If the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the set number of checks. If the power failure monitoring signal does not remain on for the number of checks, the process returns to determining whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, if the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of times of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54, which will be described later. In this way, by determining that a power outage has occurred if the power outage monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power outage due to noise, etc., and to appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power outage monitoring means that monitors the occurrence of a power outage during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power outage that occurs during a period in which the startup of the game control device 100 serving as the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the memory contents from the previous power cut are still retained, so backup processing will be performed in the event of a power outage. There's no need. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden on control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if a power outage has not occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10).
If the timer value is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power outage has occurred (step X8). Furthermore, if the timer value is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, if the waiting time has ended,
Access to readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM is permitted (step X11), and off data is output (set to no output state) to all output ports (step X12).

Next, set the serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) (step X13), and A process (step X14) of activating a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the clock generator 111 (clock generator) is performed. Note that the CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator within the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113.
11A is provided with a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that provides a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to a random number generation circuit.
Next, a RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, the RAM abnormality flag is once set in a predetermined register on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM, regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure test area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure test area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X16), and if it is normal (step X16; Y),
Power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) where the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal
(Step X17). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), a checksum calculation process (step It is determined whether the checksums match (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y)
Since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20) and the process moves to step X21.

Further, if it is determined that the check data in the power outage inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), and if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step X19; N), Based on the state read in step X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the on state (step X21). If at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (step device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). When the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), a main abnormal error notification command is sent to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag set here is the probability setting flag that was set before the power outage occurred. In other words, if the power to the gaming machine is cut off and restarted while changing the probability setting value,
Since the operation of the gaming control device 100 is stopped, the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X25). After that, output the ON data of the security signal and output the OFF data of the signals other than the security signal (step X26).
, return to step X25.

Furthermore, if both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the on state (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). Then, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step
;N), a probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). This shifts to probability setting value change mode. Thereafter, a command for changing the probability setting is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X30), and the process moves to step X31. The production control device 300 controls the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, and the speaker 1 based on receiving the command for changing the probability setting.
A notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is made by outputting audio from 9a and 19b.
On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), a process of clearing the probability setting value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the probability setting value area in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes "setting 1." After that, step X29,
After processing X30, the process moves to step X31.

Further, if at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N) and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (steps X22; N and step ;N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the on state based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). If the setting key switch 152 is not in the on state (step X35; N
), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the on state based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

When it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the on state (step X43; N)
That is, if both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the OFF state, the process moves to step X41 to perform processing in the case of normal recovery from a power outage.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the on state (step
;Y), the process moves to step X44 and initialization processing is performed. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 constitutes an initialization operation section that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation section. act as a means of change.

Further, when the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state (step X35; Y), a probability setting confirmation flag is set (step X36). This shifts to probability setting value confirmation mode. After that, the command for checking the probability setting is sent to the production control board (production control device 300)
(Step X37). In the production control device 300, based on receiving the command for checking the probability setting, the display on the display device 41, the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 are changed.
, the operation of the board presentation device 44, the output of audio from the speakers 19a and 19b, etc.
Notify that the probability setting value is being confirmed.

Then, in order to guarantee output of the security signal for 50 msec or more, a value corresponding to 128 msec is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change/confirmation process (step It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, 12
If the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 8 m seconds, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. In other words, even if the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 m seconds, the security signal will not be output for 128 m seconds after transitioning to the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode. Ru. Note that the value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 msec. However, after switching to probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode,
Since it is necessary to output a security signal for 0 msec, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 msec or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33). In step X33, the determination is not made based on the state read in step ). If it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the off state, the probability setting value is determined.
If the setting key switch 152 is not in the off state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (step Returning, if a power outage has occurred (step X34; Y), the process moves to step X55. If it is determined that a power outage has occurred in step In step X23, it is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, if the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33; Y), a process for prohibiting interrupts (step X38) is performed. From the time the interrupt is enabled (step X32) until the time the interrupt is disabled (steps X38, It will be done. In the timer interrupt processing, probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X122), which is processing regarding probability setting values, is performed. In other words, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability setting value is completed (or until a power outage occurs).
Next, a command to end the notification is sent to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X39). The production control device 300 ends the notification being executed (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification that the probability setting value is being confirmed) based on receiving the notification termination command. .

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, if the probability setting checking flag is set. is the area to be initialized (e.g. power outage inspection area,
A power outage recovery process (step X41) is performed in which the initial value at the time of power outage recovery is saved in the checksum area and the area related to error/fraud monitoring. The probability setting confirmation flag is cleared in step X41.
Thereafter, a command at the time of power outage recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X42), and the process moves to step X47. In the case of this embodiment, in step Send a command. The command for specifying the screen can be used when both Tokuzu 1 and Tokuzu 2 are in normal processing (described later), that is, when they are waiting for a customer and are not in the execution of the Tokuzu variable display game or in the special game state. Sends the command for the customer waiting demo screen, and in other cases sends the command for the recovery screen. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high probability number information command or the like may also be transmitted.

On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). In step Instead, the RAM area for game control (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared in step X44. Note that in step X44,
You may or may not clear the stack area and unused area.

Then, save the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (step X45)
. The areas to be initialized here are the customer waiting demonstration area and the area related to the setting of the performance mode. Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X46). In the case of this embodiment, in step A demonstration screen is displayed, and a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization using light and sound for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands,
It also transmits a performance number information command and a support number information command, which is information on the number of executions of the special symbol variable display game with public power support.

Next, a process of activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. A bit transposition pattern is a method of replacing the bit arrangement of extracted random numbers (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). This is the pattern that defines the By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Alternatively, the settings may be set arbitrarily by the user.

After that, the specified registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on.
The value of is extracted, and the initial value (start) of the corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the special pattern random number that determines the winning pattern of the special pattern, the random number that determines the winning pattern of the regular pattern (hit random number)) value) in a predetermined area of RWM (step X48), and then enables interrupts (step
49). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, so this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to obtain illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, initial value random number updating processing (step X50) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number, special symbol random number, and hit random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or faster than the CPU operating clock, and the special symbol random number and hit random number are the same as the timer interrupt processing, which is the processing unit of the program. The CTC output that becomes the period (
This is a "low speed counter" that is updated based on a CTC (CTC2) that is different from the CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing. In addition, for the special pattern random numbers and the hit random numbers, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the starting value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random numbers go around. Note that each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter type by +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random type in which all values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the special pattern random number and hit random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.
In addition, in this embodiment, since there is no random number (winning pattern random number) that determines the winning pattern of the normal pattern, there is only one type of winning pattern of the normal pattern, but by providing a winning pattern random number, the winning pattern of the normal pattern may be selected from among multiple types.

After the initial value random number update processing in step X50, processing to disable interrupts (step X51)
and performs performance display editing processing (step X52). After performing processing to permit interrupts (step X53), it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (step X54), and if a power outage has not occurred (step (Step X5
Return to 0). That is, when a power outage has not occurred, initial value random number updating processing, performance display editing processing, and power outage monitoring are repeatedly performed. By enabling interrupts (step X49) before initial value random number update processing (step It is possible to avoid stressing the interrupt processing by having to wait for the initial value random number update processing.

Note that the initial value random number update process in step In order to avoid random number update processing from being executed, when performing initial value random number update processing in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts before updating and canceling interrupts.
If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in this embodiment, but only in the main process, there will be no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage that main processing is simplified.

On the other hand, if a power outage has occurred (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting off data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57).
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58).
Furthermore, after performing checksum calculation processing (step
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step X61), the game waits until the gaming machine is powered off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power failure, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power failure has been correctly backed up. This can be determined at the time of re-input.

From the above, there is a main control means (gaming control device 100) that controls games in an integrated manner, and slave control means (payout control device 200, performance control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. ), the main control means includes a standby means (game control device) that sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the start-up of the main control means and waiting for the start-up of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100), and a power outage monitoring means (gaming control device 100) that monitors the occurrence of a power outage during the predetermined standby time.
Furthermore, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power outage monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power outage, and the power outage monitoring means (gaming control device 100) , it is determined that a power outage has occurred if the power outage monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (gaming control device 100) includes a RAM 111C that can store data,
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit.
A gaming control device 100) is provided, and the operating state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.
In addition, the main control means (gaming control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started at predetermined intervals. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 1-10 is started.

When timer interrupt processing starts, register bank 1 is specified (step X1).
01). Switching to register bank 1 is equivalent to register saving processing in which the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in main processing) is transferred to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (eg, D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same process as step X4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step X103) is performed to receive inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, to read the status of each input port.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and if the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y), , probability setting change/confirmation process (step X122)
and completes the timer interrupt processing.
On the other hand, if both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirmation flag are not set (step Output processing (step X105) is performed to control the drive of actuators such as the solenoid 38f and general electric solenoid 37c). Note that when a firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main process, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the dispensing control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the firing permission signal is the first signal indicating the firing permission state as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (firing permission signal) indicating the firing permission state as seen from the payout control device is also a payout control signal. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two firing permission signals are output to the firing control device, and when both of them are permission to fire, the game ball is configured to be in a state where it can be fired.

Next, a payout command sending process (step
Random number update processing 2 (step X108) is performed. In the random number update process 1 (step X107), the initial values (start values) of the special symbol random numbers and hit random numbers that are the targets of the initial value random number update process are updated. After that, it is monitored whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a, setting the prize ball, and adjusting the front frame and glass frame. Winning port switch/state monitoring processing (step X109
)I do.

Next, it is determined whether abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that in the special variable winning device 38, the number of game balls ejected from the special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball ejection port switch 38e) 38 (the number of game balls detected by the big prize opening switch 38a). Note that if abnormal discharge is occurring, an abnormal discharge flag is set. If abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process moves to step X116. In other words, the game is prevented from proceeding.

On the other hand, if abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), special pattern game processing (step X114) and performs segment LED editing processing (step X115) that drives the segment LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 that display the special figure fluctuation display game and various information related to the game to display desired content. conduct.

Next, a magnet tampering monitoring process (step board radio wave fraud monitoring processing (step Abnormal discharge monitoring processing (step X119) is performed. Furthermore, external information editing processing (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and performance display monitor control processing (step X121) for controlling the performance display device 153 are performed, and the timer interrupt processing is ended. do.

In this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (i.e., the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (i.e., the process of designating register bank 0) are performed on interrupt returns. (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines may require an instruction to execute a process for restoring an interrupt-disabled state or a process for restoring register bank designation.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (step X112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be explained. In the special figure game process, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 3
It monitors the input of step 7a, controls the entire processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game, and sets the display of special figures.

As shown in FIG. 1-11, in the special figure game process, first, starting port switch monitoring processing (step A1) is performed to monitor winnings of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a. In the starting port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 37 that serves as the starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as jackpot random numbers) are extracted and a special prize based on the winning is extracted. A game result preliminary determination is performed to determine the game result based on winnings in advance at a stage before the start of the figure variation display game.

Next, the big prize opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning a prize opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball in the big winning a prize opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed. Then, a specific area switch monitoring process is performed to monitor the detection of game balls in the specific area 38h (step A3).

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step A4). Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A5). The value of the special figure game processing timer is “
0" (Step A5; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already expired, register the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. is set (step A6), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the table (step A7).
Then, a subroutine call is made in accordance with the special figure game processing number (step A8).

In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of variation of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the setting of the change of the special figure variation display game are performed. Special figure normal processing (step A9) is performed to set information necessary for processing.
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "1", special figure fluctuation processing is performed to set the stop display time of the special figure and the information necessary to perform the process during special figure display. (Step A
10).

In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variable display game is a jackpot, fanfare commands are set according to the type of jackpot, and the jackpot for each jackpot is set. Special figure display processing (step A11) that sets the fanfare time according to the opening pattern and the information necessary to perform the fanfare/interval processing.
)I do.

In step A8, if the special drawing game processing number is "3", set the opening time of the grand prize opening, update the number of openings, and set the information necessary to perform the process during the opening of the grand prize opening. Fanfare/interval processing (step A12) is performed.
In step A8, if the special drawing game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if it is the final round, an ending command is set, or a jackpot remaining slot is set. A big prize opening opening process (step A13) is performed to set information necessary for performing ball processing.

In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is the final round, the processing to set the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be ejected and the jackpot end processing are performed. Big winning hole remaining ball processing (step A14) that sets the information necessary for the process.
I do.
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "6", a jackpot end process (step A15) is performed in which information necessary for performing the special figure normal process is set.

In step A8, if the special game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small winning process. Small win fanfare processing (step A16) is performed to set necessary information.
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hit process (step A
17).
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "9", processing to set the time for the remaining balls that won in the big prize opening to be ejected during the small winning process, and small winning ending processing. A small hit remaining ball process (step A18) is performed to set the information necessary to perform the process.
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "10", a small hit end process (step A19) is performed in which information necessary for performing the special figure normal process is set.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A
20) Perform a symbol fluctuation control process (step A21) related to controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special symbol 1 display 51. After preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 display 52 (step A22), a symbol fluctuation control process related to controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special symbol 2 display 52 is performed (step A23). . Thereafter, a lever solenoid control process (step A24) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed, and the special figure game process is ended. On the other hand, in step A5, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A5;
N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process moves to step A20 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common process performed in the above-mentioned starting port switch monitoring process will be explained. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input to the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

As shown in FIG. 1-12, in the special figure starting switch common process, first, information regarding the number of winnings to the monitored starting opening switch of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is transmitted to the gaming machine. Loads the starting port signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external management device of No. 10 (step A131), updates the loaded value by +1 (step A132), and determines whether the output count overflows (step A131). Step A133). If the output count does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM starting port signal output count area (step A134), and the process moves to step A135. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process moves to step A135. In this embodiment, values from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. If the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by updating by +1, and it is determined that the number of outputs has overflowed.

Next, out of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether the number of special symbols pending (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch is less than the upper limit value (step A135). If the number of reserved special drawings to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N
) ends the special figure starting port switch common processing.

In addition, if the number of reserved special figures to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of reserved special figures to be updated (the number of reserved special figures 1 or the number of reserved special figures 2) is updated by +1 ( Step A13
6) Save the target starting opening winning flag (step A137). Next, calculate the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the monitored start switch and the number of reserved special drawings (step A138), and save the jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process to the RWM jackpot random number storage area. (Step A139).

Next, extract the special symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored and prepare it (Step A1
40), save in the RWM special pattern random number storage area (step A141).
Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A145), and special figure reservation information determination processing (step A146) is performed.
Next, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting gate switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations (step A147), perform production command setting processing (step A148),
Finish the special figure starting port switch common processing.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the starting area of the starting prize opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, and extracts a predetermined random number, which becomes the right to execute the variable display game. It constitutes a start-up storage means that stores a predetermined number of items as a memory. In addition, the starting storage means (gaming control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on winnings of game balls into the first starting winning hole (starting winning hole 36) up to a predetermined number as the first starting memory. Various random numbers are stored and extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37).
A predetermined number is stored as a second startup memory up to an upper limit.

[Special figure reservation information determination process]
Next, special figure reservation information determination processing (step A14) in the above-mentioned starting gate switch common processing
6) will be explained in detail. The special figure pending information determination process is a prefetch process that determines result-related information corresponding to the corresponding starting memory before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding starting memory.

As shown in FIG. 1-13, first, a jackpot determination process (step A154) is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. Then, if the determination result is a jackpot (step A155; Y), set a jackpot special symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (step A156), and step The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number prepared in A140 is acquired (step A157), and the process moves to step A168.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a jackpot (step A155; N), a small hit determination process (step A159) is performed to determine whether or not it is a small hit based on whether the jackpot random value matches the small hit determination value. conduct. Then, when the judgment result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a special symbol random number check table for small hit is set (step A161), and prepared in step A140 of the special symbol start switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (step A162), and the process moves to step A168.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), a support hit determination process (
Step A163) is performed. Then, if the determination result is not a support hit (step A164
;N) sets the stop symbol information of a miss (step A167), and moves to the process of step A168.
In addition, when the determination result is a support hit (step A164; Y), a special symbol random number check table for support hit is set (step A165), and prepared in step A140 of the special symbol start opening switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (step A166), and the process moves to step A168.

Then, a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and production command setting processing is performed (step A169). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A170) is performed to set special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, and a variation pattern setting process is performed to set a variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step A170). A171).
Thereafter, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A172), and the production command setting process is performed. (Step A173), the special figure reservation information determination process is ended. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A170 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A171 are similar to the process executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure normal process.

Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command containing the result of the special pattern variation display game based on the starting memory of the prefetch target and a prefetching variation pattern command containing information on the variation pattern in the special pattern variation display game based on the starting memory are prepared. and transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (pre-reading result) of the result-related information (whether it is a jackpot or not and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory is controlled before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. It is possible to inform the device 300, and in particular, by changing the decorative special symbol start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result-related information can be provided to the player before the start timing of the special symbol variation display game. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting memory means (game controlling device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (for example, whether or not it will result in a special result). etc.) serves as a preliminary determination means. Furthermore, the timing to determine in advance the random value stored corresponding to the starting memory is not only at the time of starting winning when the starting memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be explained. As shown in FIG. 1-14, in the special figure normal process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 pending number (second starting memory number) is "0" (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 pending number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 pending number (first starting memory number) is "0" (step A305). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings 1 is "0" (step A305; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (step A309), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (step A309;N) sets a customer waiting demonstration flag in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A311), and a production command setting process (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A313), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A314). Then, the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316).
), the special figure normal processing ends. That is, when the special figure fluctuation display game can be started but the starting conditions are not met, the production control device 300 issues a customer waiting demonstration command that is waiting information.
It will be sent to you.
On the other hand, in step A309, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A309;
Y) moves to the process of step A313 without performing the processes of steps A310 to A312.

Also, in step A301, if the number of reserved special drawings 2 is not "0" (step A301;
N) prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the number of special figures 2 reservation (step A302
). Next, the production command setting process (step A303) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (
Step A304) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.
In addition, in step A305, if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is not "0" (step A305;
N) prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations (step A306
). Next, the production command setting process (step A307) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (
Step A308) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A308) in the above-mentioned special figure normal process will be explained. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 1-15(a), first, a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321). . Next, loss information and jackpot information are set in the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether the first special figure fluctuation display game is a jackpot by determining the jackpot random number, and the first special figure fluctuation display game is A process of setting loss information and small hit information in the small hit flag to determine whether it is a small hit or not, and a support hit to determine whether the first special symbol fluctuation display game is a support hit or not. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) is performed to set losing information and support hit information to the flag.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information)
323), special figure information setting processing (step A324) is performed to set special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern. As parameters, the game state, the number of pending games, the stopped symbol pattern number, the remaining number of general power support times, etc. are used. Next, a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table is prepared, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set (step A325).
). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) is performed to set a variation pattern that is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, and a variation start information setting process is performed to set information on the start of variation in the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure fluctuation processing is set as the processing number (step A328).
, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal related to the start of variation of special symbol 1 (for example, special symbol 1 fluctuating signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1 display 5
Set the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the flashing cycle timer (step A33).
3). Next, the initial value (here "0") is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure normal process will be explained. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is similar to the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 1-15(a). This is done for the 2-start memory.

As shown in FIG. 1-15(b), first, a special symbol 2 variation flag indicating the type of special symbol variation display game to be executed (here, special symbol 2) is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341). . Next, loss information and jackpot information are set in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether the second special figure fluctuation display game is a jackpot by determining the jackpot random number, and the second special figure fluctuation display game is A process of setting loss information and small hit information in the small hit flag to determine whether it is a small hit or not, and a support hit to determine whether the second special symbol fluctuation display game is a support hit or not. A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed to set losing information and support hit information to the flag.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information)
343), special figure information setting processing (step A344) is performed to set special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern. As parameters, the game state, the number of pending games, the stopped symbol pattern number, the remaining number of general power support times, etc. are used. Next, a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table is prepared, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set (step A345).
). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) is performed to set a variation pattern that is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, and a variation start information setting process is performed to set information on the start of variation in the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure fluctuation processing is set as the processing number (step A348).
, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal related to the start of variation of special symbol 2 (for example, special symbol 2 fluctuating signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2 display 5
Set the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the flashing cycle timer (Step A35).
3). Next, the initial value (here "0") is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a special figure variable display game execution control means that executes the special figure variable display game based on the starting memory stored in the starting memory means. The special figure fluctuation display game execution control means executes the first special figure fluctuation display game as the special figure fluctuation display game based on the first start memory, and executes the second special figure change display game as the special figure change display game based on the second start memory. A figure fluctuation display game will be executed.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 1-16 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of this embodiment.
In this special pattern 1 stop pattern setting process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A431), and if it is a jackpot (step A431; Y), the special pattern 1 special pattern random number storage area (reserved number Load the special pattern random number from 1) (step A432). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step A433), and a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A434). This process selects the jackpot type.

After that, a special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A435), and a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 display 51) and the halt symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437), the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is obtained, and the time reduction judgment data is obtained. The area is saved (step A438), and production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting a variation pattern scenario, which is information regarding the execution mode of the special gaming state, the performance mode after the special gaming state ends, and the transition of the variable selection table group after the special gaming state ends. . Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A455).

On the other hand, if the jackpot 1 flag is not a jackpot (step A431; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A440), and if it is a small hit (step A44).
0; Y) loads the special pattern random number from the special pattern 1 special pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A441). Next, set the special figure 1 small winning symbol table (step A442).
, acquire the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number and save it in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A443). Through this process, the type of small win is selected. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A444), the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A445), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A444). Prepare the corresponding decorative special command (Step A)
455).

In addition, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A440; N), it is determined whether the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (step A446), and if it is a support hit (step A44).
6; Y) loads the special pattern random number from the special pattern 1 special pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step A447). Next, set the symbol table per special figure 1 support (step A448
), acquires the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number and saves it in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A449). This process selects the support type.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A450), and the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction judgment data area (step A450). Step A451), the production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A452), and a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A455).
In addition, if the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (step A446; N), the stop symbol number at the time of miss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A453), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. (Step A454), and prepare a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (Step A455). Through the above processing,
A stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is set.

After that, save the decorative special figure command in the decorative special figure command area (step A456),
Performance command setting processing (step A457) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the production control device 300. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (step A458), clear the special symbol 1 special symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (step A459), The special figure 1 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 1-17 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of this embodiment. Note that the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, but is performed for the special figure 2.
In this special pattern 2 stop pattern setting process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A471), and if it is a jackpot (step A471; Y), the special pattern 2 special pattern random number storage area (reserved number Load the special pattern random number from 1) (step A472). Next, a special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step A473), and a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A474). This process selects the jackpot type.

After that, the special figure 2 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A475), and the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A476). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 2 display 52) and the halt symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A477), the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is obtained, and the time reduction judgment data is obtained. area (step A478), and save production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and probability state (step A479). These pieces of information are for setting a variation pattern scenario, which is information regarding the execution mode of the special gaming state, the performance mode after the special gaming state ends, and the transition of the variable selection table group after the special gaming state ends. . Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A495).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A471; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A480), and if it is a small hit (step A48
0; Y) loads the special pattern random number from the special pattern 2 special pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A481). Next, set the special pattern 2 small winning symbol table (step A482).
, acquire the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number and save it in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A483). Through this process, the type of small win is selected. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A484), the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A485), and the stop symbol pattern is saved. Prepare the corresponding decorative special command (Step A)
495).

Further, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A480; N), it is determined whether the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A486), and if it is a support hit (step A48
6; Y) loads the special pattern random number from the special pattern 2 special pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A487). Next, set the special pattern 2 support symbol table (step A488
), acquires the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number and saves it in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A489). This process selects the support type.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A490), and the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction judgment data area (step A490). Step A491), saves production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (Step A492), and prepares a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (Step A495).
In addition, if the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (step A486; N), the stop symbol number at the time of miss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A493), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. (Step A494), and prepare a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (Step A495). Through the above processing,
A stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is set.

After that, save the decorative special figure command in the decorative special figure command area (step A496),
Performance command setting processing (step A497) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the production control device 300. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (step A498), clear the special symbol 2 special symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (step A499), The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process ends.
In this way, when setting the stop symbols for each result, by using a common special symbol random number regardless of the result, the types of random numbers required can be reduced, and the specifications and programs of the gaming machine can be simplified. This reduces the burden of control.

[Special figure fluctuation processing]
FIG. 1-18 shows the special symbol fluctuation processing (step A10) in the special symbol game processing of this embodiment.
In this special symbol fluctuation process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag is prepared (step A601), and a production command setting process (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special pattern game processing timer area (step A604). That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a stop display time setting means for setting a stop display time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Next, it is determined whether general electricity support is in progress (step A605), and if general electricity support is not in progress (step A605; N), the process moves to step A612. In addition, if general electricity support is in progress (step A605; Y), it is determined whether it is a change in special map 1 (step A6
06).
If it is a variation of special figure 1 (step A606; Y), the process moves to step A609.
In addition, if it is not a variation of special drawing 1 (step A606; N), update the time reduction variation number 2 in the time reduction variation number 2 area by -1 (step A607), and check whether the time reduction variation number 2 has become 0. Determination is made (step A608).

When the number of time reduction fluctuations 2 is 0 (step A608; Y), a time reduction end setting process is performed to end general electricity support (step A611), and the process moves to step A612. Furthermore, if the time reduction variation number 2 is not 0 (step A608; N), the time reduction variation number 1 in the time reduction variation number 1 area is updated by -1 (step A509), and the time reduction variation number 1 becomes 0. It is determined whether the amount is high (step A610).
If the time reduction variation number 1 is 0 (step A610; Y), a time reduction end setting process is performed to end general power support (step A611), and the process moves to step A612. Further, if the time reduction variation number 1 is not 0 (step A610; N), step A6
12.

In other words, in the case of the special figure 1 variation display game, only the time reduction variation number 1 is subtracted, and the special figure 2
In the case of a variable display game, both the time reduction variation number 1 and the time reduction variation number 2 are subtracted.
Then, when either the time reduction variation number 1 or the time reduction variation number 2 becomes 0, the general electricity support is terminated.

After performing the production mode information check process (step A612), it is determined whether the remaining pending consumption state has ended (step A613). Here, the term "remaining hold extinguished state has ended" includes not only the case where the termination condition of the remaining hold extinguished state ST5 is satisfied, but also the case where there is no remaining hold at the end of the specific gaming state ST4.
If the remaining pending consumption state has not ended (step A613; N), step A616
to move to. Further, when the remaining pending consumption state has ended (step A613; Y), it is determined whether the result is a failure (step A614).
If the result is not a failure (step A614; N), the process moves to step A616.
If the result is a failure (step A614; Y), a signal regarding time-saving termination (for example,
The jackpot 2 signal is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A615), and the process moves to step A616.

In step A616, "2" related to the process during special figure display is set as the process number (step A616), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A61).
7). Furthermore, a signal related to the end of the variation of special symbol 1 (for example, a signal during special symbol 1 variation is turned off)
) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A618), and a signal related to the end of variation of special symbol 2 (for example, turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A619). A control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) is saved in the symbol confirmation number signal control timer area related to the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game to be output to the external information terminal (step A620). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the stoppage of fluctuation on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A621 ), as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the stoppage of fluctuation on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A622), the special figure changing process ends.

[Time-saving end setting process]
FIG. 1-19 shows the time saving end setting process (step A611) in the special figure fluctuation process. In this time saving end setting process, first, signals related to the end of time saving (for example, special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal OFF, special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, normal Symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, normal electric accessory 1 opening extension state signal OFF) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A632).

Next, save the number with no time saving in the game state display number area (step A633), and save the low probability & no time saving flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A63).
4) Save the special pattern low probability & no time saving flag in the special pattern game mode flag area (step A635).
Then, the time reduction variation number 1 area is cleared (step A636), and the time reduction variation number 2 area is cleared (step A637).
Thereafter, a signal related to the left-handed batting instruction (for example, firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A638), and a right-handed batting indication LED (for example, the first
In order to turn off the gaming state display section 56a), the number indicating the left-handed game is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A639), and the normal base state information is saved in the normal base state determination area (step A640). ), the time reduction variation number update process ends.

[Special figure display processing]
1-20 and 1-21 show the special figure display process (step A11) in the special figure game process of this embodiment.
In this special figure display process, first, the support hit flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the support hit flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A701). , clears the support hit flag 1 area and the support hit flag 2 area of RWM (step A702).
Next, the small hit flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the small hit flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A703), and the small win flag 1 area of the RWM is loaded. and clears the small hit flag 2 area (step A704).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A705), and the jackpot flag 1 area and jackpot flag of the RWM are loaded. 2 areas are cleared (step A706). Then, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A707), and if it is a jackpot (step A707; Y), it is a jackpot of the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 jackpot).
Test signals related to the start of (for example, condition device operation signal turned ON, accessory continuous operation device operation signal turned ON, special symbol 2 hit signal turned ON) are saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A710). ), a round number upper limit value table is set (step A711).

On the other hand, if jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A707; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A708), and if it is a jackpot (step A708; Y), the first special Test signals related to the start of the jackpot (special symbol 1 jackpot) in the figure fluctuation display game (for example, turn on the condition device operating signal, turn on the accessory continuous operation device operating signal, turn on the special symbol 1 hit signal) of RWM. Save it in the test signal output data area (step A
709), and sets a round number upper limit value table (step A711).

Next, the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of this embodiment, “1
0" or "5") and save it in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A7).
12). Next, obtain the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information, and
It is saved in the round LED pointer area of the WM (step A713).

Next, a decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM and prepared (step A714), and a production command setting process (step A715) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command related to information that sets the probability of a winning result in a normal pattern fluctuation display game and a special pattern fluctuation display game to a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A716), and a production command setting process is performed. (Step A717) is performed. Next, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A718), and the production command setting process (step A719). This fanfare command constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the performance control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the big winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the regular symbol fluctuation display game and the special symbol fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A720). In the case of this embodiment, in step A720, the jackpot 2 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are saved as signals corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the probability state. In addition, each ON/OFF is determined by the big prize opening opening information and the probability state. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is O if it is a jackpot with a ball coming out (the jackpot opening information is other than jackpot opening information 1).
N, jackpot with no balls coming out (so-called sudden jackpot, etc.) Big winning opening opening information is Big winning opening opening information 1
), it will be ON if there is a jackpot in the time saving state, and OFF otherwise.
Further, the jackpot 3 signal is turned ON when it is a jackpot with a ball being rolled out, and turned OFF when it is a jackpot with no balls put out. In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, all jackpots have a payout.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the general pattern fluctuation display game and the special pattern fluctuation display game is set (step A721).
), the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A722). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A723). As a result, information on the probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the production mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, clear the area of the number of illegal winnings of the big winning hole of the big winning hole that corresponds to the big winning hole opening information (
Step A724), a flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area of the big winning opening corresponding to the big winning opening opening information (step A725). Thereafter, fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A726) for shifting to fanfare/interval processing is performed, and the special figure display processing is ended. That is, a special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variable prize winning device 38 into an open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variable display game or the second special figure variable display game. It constitutes a special game state generating means that generates a state.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A708; N), it is determined whether the probability state of the special symbol variation display game is a high probability state (step A727). In the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the special symbol probability is always constant, it is determined that it is not always in a high probability state (step A
727; N), it is determined whether there is a ceiling reached flag (step A728).
If there is a flag indicating that the ceiling has been reached (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A732 without performing processing related to starting general power support based on reaching the ceiling. The ceiling reached flag is set based on reaching the ceiling, and is cleared based on the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereby, when general power support is started based on reaching the ceiling, it is possible to prevent general power support based on reaching a new ceiling from being started until after the jackpot has passed.

If there is no ceiling reached flag (step A728; N), the value of the ceiling counter area is updated by +1 (step A729), and it is determined whether the ceiling has been reached (step A730).
If the ceiling has not been reached (step A730; N), the process moves to step A732.
If the ceiling has been reached (step A730; Y), the ceiling time reduction activation flag and the ceiling reached flag are set (step A731), and the process moves to step A732.

In step A732, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A732), and if it is a small hit (step A732; Y), it is determined that the small hit of the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure Turn on the test signal (for example, the special symbol 2-bit win signal) regarding the start of the 2-bit win)
) in the RWM test signal output data area (step A735), and step A7
36.
Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A732; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A733), and if it is a small hit (step A733; Y). saves the test signal (for example, turning on the special symbol 1 small hit signal) related to the start of the small hit (special symbol 1 small win) of the first special symbol fluctuation display game in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A734), the process moves to step A736.

Next, it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state (step A
736). In the game machine of this embodiment, since the special figure probability is always constant, it is determined that the probability is not always high (step A736; N), and the decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area and prepared ( Step A737) and effect command setting processing (step A738) are performed. Next, a small win fanfare command is prepared (step A739), an effect command setting process (step A740) is performed, and the process moves to step A741. This small win fanfare command also constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the performance control device 300 at the start of the special game state.
Then, a small win fanfare medium process transition setting process (step A741) for transitioning to the small win fanfare medium process is performed, and the special figure display process is ended.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A733; N), it is determined whether there is a ceiling time saving activation flag (step A742). If there is a ceiling time reduction activation flag (step A742; Y), the initial value of the ceiling time reduction number is saved in time reduction variation number area 1 and time reduction variation number area 2 (step A743), and the support activation setting process (step A747) is performed. ).
Here, 255 is saved as an end condition based on the total number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game in the time reduction variation number area 1, and the special figure 2 variation display is saved in the time reduction variation number area 2. Save 250 as an end condition based on the number of times the game has been executed.

If there is no ceiling time saving activation flag (step A742; N), it is determined whether the loaded support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A744). If there is no support hit (step A744; N), it is determined whether the loaded support hit flag 1 indicates a support hit (step A745). If it is not a support hit (step A745; N), a special figure normal process transition setting process (step A748) for moving to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure displaying process is ended.

On the other hand, if the support hit flag 2 indicates a support hit (step A744; Y) or if the support hit flag 1 indicates a support hit (step A745; Y), the initial value corresponding to the time reduction judgment data is changed to the time reduction variation. Save in number area 1 and time reduction variation number area 2 (step A
746), the process moves to support operation setting processing (step A747).
Here, 12 is saved as an end condition based on the total number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game in the time reduction variation number area 1, and the special figure 2 variation display is saved in the time reduction variation number area 2. Save 7 as the termination condition based on the number of times the game has been executed.
After carrying out the support operation setting process (step A747), a special figure normal process transition setting process (step A748) for shifting to the special figure normal process is carried out, and the special figure displaying process is ended.

In the above process, the determination of whether or not the ceiling has been reached is made at the end of the special figure fluctuation display game (steps A727 to A731), and the special figure fluctuation display game in which winning the support and reaching the ceiling are the same. If this occurs, conditions for ending the specific gaming state ST4 are set based on reaching the ceiling (steps A742 to A747).
As a result, if winning a support hit and reaching the ceiling occur in the same special figure fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern and result pattern based on the support hit will be selected at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game. The ending condition of the specific game state ST4 given at the end of the special figure variable display game is not based on the support hit but the ending condition based on reaching the ceiling.

It is rare for reaching the ceiling and winning a support prize to occur in the same special symbol variable display game, and it would be a waste of control to always check this at the start of the special symbol variable display game. Therefore, by implementing the present embodiment, such wasteful processing becomes unnecessary, and control at the start of the special figure variation display game can be simplified.
In addition, while the variation pattern and result mode are selected according to the support hit, there is a contradiction in that the ending condition of the given specific gaming state ST4 is the ending condition based on reaching the ceiling. The player will not feel dissatisfied because there is no change in the transition to the specific gaming state ST4. In particular, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the ending condition based on reaching the ceiling is more advantageous for the player, so the player will not be dissatisfied.

If there is enough control at the start of the special figure variation display game, it is determined at the start of the special figure variation display game whether reaching the ceiling and winning the support hit occur in the same special figure variation display game. You can do it like this. If reaching the ceiling and winning a support prize occur in the same special figure variation display game, the variation pattern or result pattern of the special figure variation display game may be different from the one corresponding to the missed result or the one corresponding to reaching the ceiling. By making it the same, it is possible to avoid contradictions.

[Fanfare/interval processing transition setting process 1]
FIG. 1-22 shows the fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1 (step A726) in the above-described special figure display process. In this fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1, first, "3", which is the process number related to fanfare/interval process, is set (step A791), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A792).

Next, save the signals related to the start of the jackpot (special gaming state) (for example, turn on the jackpot 1 signal (output for jackpot + small hit), turn on the jackpot 4 signal (output for jackpot)) in the external information output data area. (Step A793), signals related to the end of high probability & time saving (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, special symbol 2 Save the fluctuation time reduction state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal OFF, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal OFF) in the test signal output data area. (Step A794). After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step A795), and the number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A79).
6) Save the normal pattern low probability & no time saving flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A797).

Then, the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the high probability is set in order to turn off the gaming state display LED (for example, the third gaming state display section 56c) provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. The notification flag area is cleared (step A799), and the special pattern low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special pattern game mode flag area (step A800). Next, save the probability information command (low probability) in the power outage recovery transmission command area that saves the command output to the production control device 300 when the power outage is restored (step A801), and display special figure fluctuations that can be executed in a time-saving state. The time reduction variation number 1 area and the time reduction variation number 2 area for managing the number of games are cleared (steps A802 and A803). This ends the general power support and time saving state. Furthermore, the ceiling counter area is cleared (step A80).
4) Clear the ceiling time reduction activation flag area (step A805), and clear the ceiling reached flag area (step A806).

After that, save the production mode 1 number in the production mode number area (step A807),
Clear the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A808) and save the no-update code in the next mode transition information area (step A809). Then, the signal related to the right-handed batting instruction (for example, firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A810).
), in order to light up the right-handed game display LED (for example, the first game status display section 56a), the number indicating the right-handed game status is saved in the game status display number 2 area (step A811), and during the fanfare/interval. The process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Support operation processing]
FIG. 1-23 shows the support activation process (step A747) in the above-described special figure display process.
In this support operation setting process, first, a signal related to the start of time saving (for example, jackpot 2 signal and jackpot 3 signal are turned on) is saved in the external information output data area (step A821).
Next, the timer initial value is saved in the time saving signal control timer area (step A822). Here, 128 ms is saved as the timer initial value. As a result, among the signals related to the start of time saving, the three jackpot signals are output for only a short time.

Next, turn on the signal related to the start of time reduction (for example, turn on the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal,
Special symbol 2 Turn on the fluctuation time reduction state signal, Normal symbol 1 Turn on the high probability state signal, Normal symbol 1
The fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned ON and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned ON) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A823).

Furthermore, the number with time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A824), and the high probability of normal drawings & flag with time saving is saved in the normal drawing gate mode flag area (step A82).
5) In order to maintain the probability status flag and set time saving, a special figure time saving flag is synthesized in the special figure game mode flag area (step A826).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed hitting instruction (for example, firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A827), and the right-handed hitting indication LED (for example, the first game status display section 56a) is turned on. In order to turn on the light, the number in the right-handed game state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A828). Then, a performance mode information address table is set (step A829), and the address of the table corresponding to the performance mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A830). By acquiring the address of the corresponding table based on the performance mode transition information, a variable pattern scenario, which is information regarding the transition of the variable selection table group, is also acquired.

Next, as a process for saving information necessary for managing the production mode in the game control device 100, first, the production mode number of the production mode that will be set after the end of the special symbol fluctuation display game that has won the support is acquired. , is saved in the production mode number area (step A831). Furthermore, the number of rotations remaining in the performance of the production mode that is set after the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that became a support hit is acquired, and saved in the effect remaining rotation number area (step A832), and the special figure that became a support hit is obtained. The next mode transition information of the production mode set after the end of the variable display game is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A833). Based on the information saved here, the production mode and variable selection table group will change based on running the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times after the end of the special figure variation display game that won the support. .

After that, prepare a probability information command corresponding to the production mode number (step A834),
The command is saved in the power outage recovery transmission command area (step A835), and the production command setting process (step A836) is performed. Next, a production rotation number command corresponding to the newly set production remaining rotation number is prepared (step A837), a production command setting process (step A838) is performed, and a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number is prepared. After preparation (step A839), production command setting processing (step A840) is performed.
Then, the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A841), the production mode transition information area is cleared (step A842), and the support operation setting process is ended.

[Jackpot end processing]
FIG. 1-24 shows the jackpot end process (step A15) in the special figure game process of this embodiment.
In this jackpot end process, first, the signal related to the start of time saving (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is
N) in the external information output data area (step A901). Since the signal regarding the start of time saving is output during the jackpot, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area. Next, signals related to the start of low probability & time saving (for example, turn on the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, turn on the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and turn on the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal
N, Normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is ON, Normal electric accessories 1 open extension state signal is ON)
is saved in the test signal output data area (step A902).

Next, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step A903), and save the high probability of high probability & time saving flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A90).
4) Save the special figure time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A90)
5). Thereafter, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area (step A906). Here, initial values are saved in the time reduction variation number 1 area and the time reduction variation number 2 area. Through the above processing, after the special game state ends, the time saving state is entered. Further, by setting the initial value of the number of times of time-saving fluctuations in the number of time-saving fluctuations area, the time-saving state is ended by executing the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times. That is, after the end of the special gaming state, the gaming control device 100 can generate a specific gaming state (time saving state, general electricity support state) that puts the normal variable winning device 37 in a state where winning is easy for a predetermined period of time after the special gaming state ends. It constitutes a specific game state generation control means.

After that, save the probability information command in the power outage recovery transmission command area (step A9).
10) Perform production command setting processing (step A911). Here, as probability information commands, there are a plurality of commands that further include information on the production mode in either "with time saving" or "without time saving". Next, a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number 1 is prepared (step A914), and a production command setting process (step A915) is performed.

Next, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A918), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A917).
After that, signals related to the end of the jackpot (for example, jackpot 1 signal OFF, jackpot 3 signal OFF, jackpot 4 signal OFF) are saved in the external information output data area (step A9).
18), Signals related to the end of the jackpot (for example, turn off the condition device operation signal, turn off the accessory continuous operation device operation signal, turn off the special symbol 1 hit signal, turn off the special symbol 2 hit signal
) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A919). Next, the information in the probability fluctuation determination data area is cleared (step A920), the information in the round LED pointer area indicating the number of rounds of jackpot is cleared (step A921), and the information in the performance mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A922). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A923), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A924), and the jackpot termination process is ended.

[Specific area switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 1-25 shows the specific area switch monitoring process (step A3) in the special figure game process. In this specific area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether a small hit is occurring (step A41). The term "during a small hit" here refers to a period during which small hit processing and small hit remaining ball processing are performed. If this small hit is not occurring (step A41; N), the specific area switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the specific area switch 38d is valid only during the period when the small hit process and the small hit remaining ball process are being performed. Further, if a small hit is in progress (step A41; Y), it is determined whether the condition device is in operation (step A42).

If the conditional device is in operation (step A42; Y), the specific area switch monitoring process ends. If the conditional device is not in operation (step A42; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43). If there is no input to the specific area switch (step A43; N), the specific area switch monitoring process ends. If there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43; Y), a specific area pass flag is set (step A44), and the specific area switch monitoring process is ended. Later, based on the existence of this specific area passage flag, processing for generating a first special game state will be performed.

[Small hit remaining ball processing]
FIG. 1-26 shows the process shown in FIG. 1-26 in the small hit remaining ball process (step A18) in the special figure game process. In this small hit remaining ball process, first, it is determined whether a remaining ball error is occurring (step A861). If a remaining ball error is occurring (step A861; Y), the process moves to step A863. If a remaining ball error is not occurring (step A861; N), it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A862; N), the small winning remaining ball process is ended. Moreover, when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862; Y), the process for ending the small winning from step A863 is performed.

That is, the process for ending the small win is performed after all remaining balls in the special variable winning device 38 are ejected. However, if there is a remaining ball error in which the ejection cannot be confirmed even after a predetermined time has passed since the last game ball entered the special variable prize winning device 38, it is assumed that the time required for ejection has passed and the The process moves on to end the win. Of course, if there is a remaining ball error, the process may not proceed to end the small hit. Therefore, the process of step A861 may not be performed.

In the process for ending the small hit, first, it is determined whether the specific area has been passed (step A863). When a game ball enters and passes through the specific area 38h, the specific area switch 3
8d, and a specific area passing flag is set. Here, it is determined whether or not a specific area has been passed based on the presence or absence of this specific area passing flag. If the specific area has been passed (step A863; Y), the process moves to step A870 and a process for generating a special gaming state is performed. Further, if there is no passing through the specific area (step A863; N), the process moves to step A864 to end the second special game state and perform processing to enable execution of the special figure fluctuation display game.

In the process for ending the second special game state after step A864 and making it possible to execute the special figure fluctuation display game, 10, which is related to the small hit ending process, is set as the process number (step A
864), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A865). Next, save the small winning ending time in the special figure game processing timer area (step A866).
, Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the University of Japan winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (Step A
867). Then, the large winning opening count area is cleared (step A868), the small winning control pointer area is cleared (step A869), and the small winning remaining ball processing is completed.

On the other hand, if there is a passage through a specific area (step A863; Y) and the process of generating the first special game state after step A870 is performed, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area and prepared (step A870), Performance command setting processing is performed (step A871).
Next, a V jackpot fanfare command is prepared (step A872), and production command setting processing is performed (step A873).

After that, save the signal regarding the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) in the external information output data area (
Step A874), Test signal output data area for test signals related to the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) (for example, condition device operating signal ON, accessory continuous operating device operating signal ON, special symbol 2 hit signal ON) (Step A875).

Then, save the jackpot number in the gaming status display number area (step A876), set the round number upper limit value table (step A877), and set the round number upper limit value (3 or 10) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information. ) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area (step A878). Furthermore, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step A879), and the initial value (here, 1) is saved in the round number area (step A880). The upper limit for the number of rounds is set to 3 or 10 rounds, but since the small winning action corresponds to the 1st round, by setting 1 as the initial number of rounds, the upper limit for the number of rounds will be 2 rounds or 9 rounds in the special game state. We are trying to make sure that the number of people is released.

Thereafter, 3, which corresponds to the fanfare/interval process, is set as the process number (step A881), and saved in the special figure game process number area (step A882). moreover,
Save the V jackpot fanfare time in the special game processing timer area (step A883
), performs the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (step A884),
The process moves to step A868.

[Small winning end processing]
FIG. 1-27 shows the small hit ending process (step A19) in the special figure game process of this embodiment.
In this small hit ending process, first, it is determined whether general electricity support is in progress (step A93).
1). If general power is not supported (step A931; N), save the signal related to the left-handed firing instruction (for example, turn off firing position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (step A932), and turn on the right-handed firing indication LED. In order to turn off the light (for example, the first gaming state display section 56a), the number in the left-handed playing state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A933).
), the process moves to step A937.

Moreover, when it is in general power support (step A931; Y), it is determined whether it is a small hit of the special figure 2 (step A934). If it is not a small hit on special drawing 2 (step A934; N
) moves to step A937. Also, if it is a small hit of special drawing 2 (step A93
4; Y) performs the time-saving end setting process (step A935), and saves the signal related to the time-saving end (for example, turning off the jackpot 2 signal) in the external information output data area (step A936).
), the process moves to step A937. That is, if a small hit of the special figure 2 occurs while the general electricity support is in progress, the general electricity support is ended when the small winning gaming state ends.

Next, it is determined whether there is a ceiling time reduction activation flag (step A937). If there is no ceiling time reduction activation flag (step A937; N), the process moves to step A940. If there is a ceiling time reduction activation flag (step A937; Y), the initial value of the ceiling time reduction number is saved in the time reduction variation number 1 area and the time reduction variation number 2 area (step A938). Here, 255 is set as the first time reduction variation number in the time reduction variation number 1 area, and 250 is set as the time reduction variation number 2 in the time reduction variation number 2 area. Then, support operation setting processing is performed (step A939), and the process moves to step A940.

Thereafter, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A940), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A941).
Furthermore, a signal regarding the end of the small hit (for example, turning off the special symbol 1 small hit signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A942), and a signal regarding the end of the small winning (for example, turning off the special symbol 1 small winning signal, Special symbol 2 small hit signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A943).
Subsequently, the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A944), the performance mode transition information area is cleared (step A945), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A946), the small winning ending process is ended.

Next, control by the production control device 300 will be explained. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the production control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 1-28 and a timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 1-28, in the main processing, the processing at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3) and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program from steps C1 to C7, loop processing is performed as main loop processing. In this loop process, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, an input signal (
A production button input process (step C9) is performed to create input information from the rising edge). Reading of inputs from the production button 25 and cross key 29 is performed within the timer interrupt process, and in this production button input process, processing for changing the content of the production, etc. is performed when there is an input from the production button 25 or cross key 29. .

Then, you can set the range of changes such as the brightness of the LED and LCD, the volume, etc., and the LED
A hall/player setting mode process is performed in which operations such as changing the screen, brightness of the liquid crystal display, and volume are accepted (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game.

Next, a received command check process (step C12) is performed to analyze and respond to the command from the game control device 100, and a performance display editing process (step C13) is performed to edit settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the performance. ) to set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the content to be drawn, and finally the drawing data is set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn is prepared within 0 seconds (approximately 33.3 milliseconds), the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether it is frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds), a V blank interrupt (1/6
0 second) is entered twice, it is determined that it is frame switching timing. Note that the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) at 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frame switching) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (switching) may also be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process in step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of audio from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and controls the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 including the panel decoration device 46 and the display board 350, etc. Decoration control processing (step C18), movable body control processing (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoids of the board presentation device 44, and board presentation setting processing (step C20) for controlling presentation are performed to clear the WDT. The process returns to step C8.

[Received command check processing]
FIG. 1-29 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this received command check process, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of commands received (step C201), It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. Further, if it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of commands received (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204).
), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether the copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206).
In this way, in this embodiment, commands are not directly analyzed in the received command buffer;
The content of the received command buffer is copied to a command area (RAM area for analysis), and command analysis is performed in the command area. As a result, in case a command is sent from the gaming control device 100 while the command is being analyzed, the command (data)
You can move it to make room. In addition, command analysis can be performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copying of commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. Furthermore, if it is determined that the copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands equal to the number of received commands has been completed (step C210). Then, if it is determined that the analysis of commands for the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N),
The process returns to step C207. Further, if it is determined that the analysis of commands equal to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is ended. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are analyzed all at once. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 1-30 shows the received command analysis process in the above-described received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated into MODE and the lower byte is separated into ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). If it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

Also, if it is determined in steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C2
34;N), the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
In step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of variable commands (step C235). The variation command is a command that instructs the variation pattern of the special figure. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of variable commands (step C235
;Y), variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Also, if it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of variable commands (
In step C235;N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237). The jackpot commands are commands that command operations related to the jackpot performance (such as displaying a fanfare screen and round screen), and commands that command operations related to the small win performance (displaying the fanfare screen and end screen, etc.). And M.O.
If it is determined that DE is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237; Y), jackpot command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Further, when it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of symbol commands (step C239). The symbol-related command is a command that instructs information regarding the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to use as the stop symbol of the special symbol). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of symbol-related commands (step C239; Y), symbol-related command processing (
Step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

In addition, if it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol-related commands (
In step C239;N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as pending number commands and error commands (step C241). Single-shot commands are commands that stand alone, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands. These single-shot commands include a customer waiting demonstration command, a pending number command, a pattern stop command, a probability information command, an error/invalidity command, and a model specification command. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C24
1; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Also, if it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (
In step C241;N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (step C243; Y), the prefetch symbol type command processing (step C2
44) to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of prefetch symbol-related commands (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch variable commands (step C245). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the read-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), read-ahead variable command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends. Also, in step C245,
When it is determined that MODE is not within the range of look-ahead variable commands (step C245; N)
Then, the received command analysis process ends.

Note that the prefetch variation type command and the prefetch symbol type command are commands that include information necessary to execute the prefetch effect. A look-ahead performance (also called a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice performance) is whether or not a special figure change display game will be a jackpot when the special figure change display game corresponding to the unexecuted starting memory (pending) is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of the fluctuation pattern (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined degree of reliability, the display device 41 may display a decorative special symbol start memory display in a different manner from normal. This is a performance such as displaying a performance display on the screen. The prefetching commands (prefetching variation commands and prefetching symbol commands) are commands that inform you in advance of the fluctuation patterns and stop symbols that correspond to the starting memory that is the target of the prefetching effect, and are sent from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the production control device 300. Note that normal variable commands and symbol-related commands that are not pre-reading are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 at the start of the special figure variable display game.

Next, the effects of the game will be explained.
FIG. 1-31 shows an example of the performance on the normal stage in the normal game state ST1. Although the display contents are basically the same in other game states, it is also possible to not display some of the display contents depending on the game state. Further, the player can determine whether the normal gaming state ST1 or each other gaming state is present based on the displayed content.

As shown in FIG. 1-31(a), a first decorative game display section 81 is provided in the center of the display area of the display device 41 to display a first decorative game among the decorative special figure variable display games. In the first decorative game display section 81, the identification information is displayed in a variable manner in each of the variable display areas of the left variable display area 81a, the middle variable display area 81b, and the right variable display area 81c, and then stopped and displayed, thereby displaying the decorative special figure variable. Show games.

At the upper right of the display area of the display device 41, a second decorative game display section 82 for displaying a second decorative game of the decorative special figure variable display games is provided. Similarly to the first decorative game displayed on the first decorative game display section 81, the second decorative game displayed on the second decorative game display section 82 has identification information in each of the left area, middle area, and right area. After displaying the variable, stop and display the result. The second decorative game display section 82 displays identification information (small symbols) that is relatively smaller than the identification information (large symbols) displayed on the first decorative game display section 81 .

Further, at the lower right part of the display area of the display device 41, a standby memory display section 83 is provided that displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory.
The standby memory display section 83 displays decorative special figure starting memory displays corresponding to the first starting memory and the second starting memory. In the normal game state ST1, since the game mainly proceeds with the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory, the standby memory display section 83 displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory.
The decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the standby memory display section 83 has a one-to-one correspondence with the starting memory, and the leftmost decorative special figure starting memory display is the decorative special figure corresponding to the starting memory stored first. They are displayed in the order of memory so that they are displayed as a starting memory display, and each time they are used, they shift to the left. In addition, in the standby memory display section 83, there is a decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory (first starting memory) which is the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game, and the right to execute the special figure 2 variable display game. It is also possible to display both the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory (second starting memory).
Furthermore, in the standby memory display section 83, the pre-read results such as the result of the special figure variation display game and the variation pattern based on the starting memory can be suggested by the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory. It is possible.

On the left side of the standby memory display section 83, there is provided an active memory display section 84 that displays information regarding the starting memory corresponding to the special symbol variation display game that is currently being executed. The decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is transferred to the running memory display unit 84 at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game. Furthermore, in the running memory display section 84, the results and fluctuation patterns of the special figure variation display game currently being executed can be suggested by the display mode of the running memory display displayed on the running memory display section 84. It is possible.
At the upper left of the display area of the display device 41, there is a first starting memory number display section 85a that displays the first starting memory number (special figure 1 pending number) and a second starting memory number (special figure 2 pending number). A second starting memory number display section 85b for display is provided.
Further, at the upper center of the display area of the display device 41, a game state display 86 indicating the game state is displayed, and here it is shown that the game is in the normal game state ST1.

When a new special figure fluctuation display game is started, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the waiting memory display section 83 shifts to the running memory display section 84, as shown in FIG. 1-31(b). At the same time as the performance is executed, the decorative special figure start memory display located other than the left end of the waiting memory display section 83 moves to the left within the waiting memory display section 83. Furthermore, the numerical value on the first starting memory number display section 85a changes. Further, the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 start varying display of the identification information.

Depending on the selected variation pattern, as the special figure variation display game progresses, the same identification information becomes temporarily stopped in the left variation display area 81a and the right variation display area 81c, as shown in FIG. 1-31(c). Sometimes. The production may further develop and become SP reach.
When the predetermined variation time ends, the result mode is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 1-31(d). Here, the result is a jackpot, and a special result mode is displayed as the result mode. If the result is a small hit, a miss, or a support hit, the corresponding result format will be displayed.
When the predetermined stop display time for displaying the result mode has elapsed, the special figure fluctuation display game ends, and the running memory display displayed on the running memory display section 84 is erased.

Since the result here was a jackpot, the first special game state ST2 is started with the end of the special symbol variation display game, and a fanfare effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 1-31(e) and (f). In this fanfare performance, as an image instructing to aim at the special variable prize winning device 38 located at the lower right side of the gaming area 32, a right-hand hitting instruction display 90 is used to instruct to hit the right hand, and a right-hand hitting instruction display 90 is used to indicate the spot to aim at. An explanatory image 91 showing the special variable prize winning device 38 is displayed as a predetermined location of the gaming machine. In the explanatory image 91 here, in addition to the special variable winning device 38 in an open state, the surrounding components such as the normal variable winning device 37, the center case 40, and the integrated display device 50 are shown as seen from the front of the gaming machine. Displayed from the front. Further, the display position of the explanation image 91 is arranged to be displayed on the lower right side of the display area in accordance with the special variable prize winning device 38 located on the lower right side of the gaming area 32. Also, in the case of a small hit, a right hit instruction display 90 and an explanation image 91 as shown in FIG. 1-31(f) are displayed.

Thereafter, a round effect is performed as shown in FIG. 1-31(g).
In the first special gaming state ST2, a consecutive game jackpot number display 87 is displayed, which is the number of consecutive game jackpots, which is the number of jackpots for the first time jackpot and subsequent consecutive game jackpots.
A display 88 of the number of game balls obtained is performed by adding up the number of game balls obtained in the special game state for the first jackpot and the consecutive jackpots that follow. Here, since the jackpot was in the normal gaming state ST1, it is the first jackpot and the number of successive jackpots is the first. Further, the number of acquired game balls is updated every time a prize is won in the special variable winning device 38. In addition, when a jackpot is achieved via a small win, the first special game state ST2 is also entered, and the same effect is performed.
Furthermore, in the first special game state ST2, it is possible to execute a series of performances in which the performance progresses (the story progresses) each time the number of successive jackpots increases over a plurality of first special game states ST2.
Here, the number of successive jackpots is the first, and the first stage performance in which the first character appears is being performed.

When the first special gaming state ST2 ends, a specific gaming state ST4 is entered. At the start of the specific gaming state ST4, a start effect is performed to notify the start of the specific gaming state ST4, which is an advantageous state, as shown in FIG. 1-31(h). Further, in the specific gaming state ST4, as shown in FIG. 1-32(a), a "chance stage" is displayed on the gaming state display 86 to indicate that the specific gaming state ST4 is present.
In the specific game state ST4, the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory is mainly executed, so the standby memory display section 83 also displays a display corresponding to the second starting memory. The standby memory display section 83 corresponding to the second starting memory is displayed on the left side of the running memory display section 84, and the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed here has a one-to-one correspondence with the starting memory, and the decoration on the right end The special figure starting memory displays are arranged and displayed in the order of memory so that the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponds to the earliest stored starting memory, and is shifted to the right every time it is consumed. In addition, specific gaming state S
At T4, the standby storage display section 83 and the running storage display section 84 may not be displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1-32(a), as an image instructing to aim at the normal variable prize winning device 37 located on the right side of the gaming area 32, there is also a right-hand hitting instruction display 90 that instructs to hit the right hand. , an explanatory image 91 showing a predetermined location on the gaming machine is displayed to indicate the location to aim for. In the explanatory image 91 here, in addition to the normal variable winning device 37 in an open state, the surrounding components such as the special variable winning device 38, the center case 40, and the integrated display device 50 are shown as seen from the front of the gaming machine. Displayed from the front. Further, the display position of the explanation image 91 is arranged to be displayed on the right side of the display area in accordance with the normal variable prize winning device 37 located on the right side of the game area 32. Since the normal variable winning device 37 is located above the special variable winning device 38, compared to the position of the explanatory image 91 of the special variable winning device 38 shown in FIG. 1-31(f), the position in FIG. 1-32 ( The explanatory image 91 shown in a) is displayed in an upper position.

FIG. 1-32(b) and below show an example of the effect when support A is selected as the end condition of the specific game state ST4.
This performance is a series of performances from the final game in the specific game state ST4 to the special figure 2 variable display game based on the remaining reservation. It has become.
In the specific game state ST4 where the end condition is support A, the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game is 1, or the total number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is 6 times. The general power support state ends when either of the following conditions is met: or one small hit occurs in the special map 2 variable display game. Therefore, the specific game state ST4
The final game is either the 6th game of the special figure 1 variable display game or the 1st game of the special figure 2 variable display game.

As the game progresses to the final game in the specific game state ST4, at a predetermined timing, a performance that requests the player to operate the performance button 25 forming the operation section is started, as shown in FIG. 1-32(b). A remaining time display 94 is displayed to indicate the time until the end. Further, the right-hand hitting instruction display 90 and the explanatory image 91 are continued to instruct the player to generate up to the upper limit number of second start memories within the remaining time.

Furthermore, on the left side of the display area, a standby display 92 indicating that a request for operation of the production button 25 is being waited for, and a star-shaped standby notice display 93 indicating that the standby display 92 may be displayed are lined up. Is displayed. This shows that four more standby displays 92 can be displayed. The standby display 92 is a display imitating the performance button 25, and only the unit of the performance button 25 is displayed in a perspective view.
In this embodiment, each standby display 92 is associated with each special figure fluctuation display game, and the standby display 92 at the lowest position corresponds to the special figure fluctuation display game in progress, and the lowermost standby display 92 corresponds to the special figure fluctuation display game in progress. The 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th standby displays 92 correspond to the special chart 2 variable display game based on the 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th second starting memories in the order of consumption, respectively. It has become.
At the stage of FIG. 1-32(b), the second starting memory does not exist, and one standby display 92 corresponding to the special symbol variation display game being executed is displayed. Note that the standby display 92 and the special figure fluctuation display game may not be associated with each other.

As shown in FIG. 1-32(c), when a new second start memory occurs, the standby display 92 increases by one. After that, as shown in FIG. 1-32(d), two more second start memories occur and the number of standby displays 92 increases by two.
There are a plurality of display modes for the standby display 92, and each display mode has a different expectation level, which is the probability of a special result being suggested or notified. That is,
The standby display 92 is a suggestive display indicating a high possibility of a special result. Here, the display mode of the third standby display 92 from the bottom is a white display mode indicating the lowest level of expectation, and the display mode of the fourth standby display 92 from the bottom has a higher level of expectation than these. The display format is a diagonal line indicating that the price is high. The fourth standby display 92 from the bottom corresponds to the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory to be consumed third, and here the special figure based on the second starting memory to be consumed third. It has been suggested or reported that the two-variable display game is highly anticipated. The result of the special symbol variation display game based on the second starting memory is determined based on the preliminary determination result.

If the second starting memory reaches the upper limit before the performance that requests the player to operate the performance button 25 is started, a standby notice display 93 is displayed as shown in FIG. 1-32(e). A standby display 92 is displayed at all locations. In addition, a message "Ready completed!!" is displayed to indicate that the upper limit has been reached.
Thereafter, when the remaining time displayed on the remaining time display 94 runs out, an effect that requests the player to operate the effect button 25 is started as shown in FIG. 1-32(f). As shown in FIG. 1-32(g), in this performance, a meter display 95 is displayed, and when the value of the meter display 95 reaches the upper limit, a special result is indicated.
The value of the meter display 95 is increased by the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 25. First, the standby display 92 at the lowest position moves to the center of the display area and the request display 9 is displayed.
6, and requests the player to operate the performance button 25. The request display 96 is the production button 25
This is a display that imitates , and only the unit of the effect button 25 is displayed in a perspective view. Also,
A meter display 96a adjacent to the lower side of the request display 96 indicates the time when the operation of the operation section is valid.
will also be held at the same time.

When the player operates the performance button 25 in accordance with the request display 96, a point display 97 that displays the points acquired as a corresponding performance is displayed as shown in FIG. 1-32 (h), and a meter is displayed for the acquired points. Display 95 increases. If the time period during which the operation of the operation section is valid has elapsed without the player operating the performance button 25, the corresponding performance may not be performed, or the corresponding performance may be performed. .
Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 1-33(a) to (d), the standby display 92 at the lower position sequentially moves to the center of the display area and becomes a request display 96, and the player presses the production button according to the request display 96. 25, a point display 97 that displays the acquired points is displayed, and the meter display 95 increases by the amount of acquired points.

As shown in FIG. 1-33(c), when the standby display 92 shown in a highly anticipated display mode moves to the center of the display area and becomes the request display 96, the request display 96 also displays the standby display 92. It is displayed by taking over the display mode of . Note that the display mode may change when the request display 96 is displayed. Here, the display mode does not change after the request display 96 is displayed, and the display mode in this request display 96 becomes the final display mode and indicates the level of expectation. In other words, the request display 96 provides a suggestion display indicating a high possibility of a special result.
Then, as shown in FIG. 1-33(d), the meter display 95 reaches the upper limit by acquiring points. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 1-33(e), a notification effect is started in response to the meter display 95 reaching the upper limit value.

In this example, the second starting memory to be consumed thirdly is a special result, and as shown in FIG. 1-33(f), it is the final game of the specific game state ST4 during the execution of the notification effect. The special figure fluctuation display game ends with a wrong result. As a result, the specific gaming state ST4 is ended and the remaining pending state ST5 is entered, but no special performance indicating that the specific gaming state ST4 has ended is performed here.
Then, as shown in Figure 1-33 (g), the second starting memory that is digested in the first and second memory is digested as a result of failure, and as shown in Figure 1-33 (h), the second startup memory is digested in the third memory as shown in Figure 1-33 (h). A special result is derived upon completion of the second starting memory being consumed.
1-33 (e The effects similar to those shown in ) to (h) are performed, and it is difficult to visually determine which special symbol variation display game resulted in a special result.

By performing a plurality of special figure variation display games in a series of effects in this way, the second special figure variation display based on up to four second starting memories in the final game of the specific game state ST4 and the remaining pending consumption state ST5 is performed. The game can be made to look like a single special figure variable display game.
By including multiple special symbol fluctuation display games in a series of performances, the possibility of a special result in this series of performances increases, so it is possible to create an impression that there is a high possibility of a special result at the end of the specific gaming state ST4. This can effectively improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 1-34 shows another example of the display mode of the standby display 92 and the request display 96.
The display mode of the standby display 92 and request display 96 in FIGS. 1-32 and 1-33 is displayed only in a single display mode without changing the display mode, and the display mode is the final display mode. It's supposed to be.
For example, the standby display 92 that started to be displayed in FIG. 1-32(b) is displayed in a white display mode, and then the request display 92 as shown in FIG. 1-32(g) is displayed without changing the display mode. It becomes. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 1-32(g), when the request display 96 is reached, the display mode is white, and this display mode is maintained thereafter, and the white display mode is This is the final display mode.

FIG. 1-34 shows an example of a case where the standby display 92 and the request display 96 undergo a specific display process to reach the final display mode.
As shown in FIG. 1-34(a), in this example, the fourth standby display 92 from the bottom undergoes a specific display process. In this particular display process, the display mode changes sequentially from the start of display of the standby display 92 to white, horizontal lines, diagonal lines, hatching, white, and so on. Note that the display modes that change sequentially include those that become the final display mode, and in a particular display process, the display mode that becomes the final display mode is temporarily changed during the process in which the display mode changes sequentially. It can also be said that the image is displayed in another display mode, and then becomes the final display mode again.

Also, "?" is displayed to indicate that the display mode has changed and the final display mode is unknown.
It is now marked with the characters . When changing the display mode, the display mode is changed so that a plurality of display modes are not displayed at the same time, and the display mode is different from a rainbow-colored display in which multiple colors are displayed at the same time.
This change in display mode continues over the period during which the standby display 92 is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 1-34(b) to 1-34(d).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 1-34(e), when the standby display 92 shifts to the request display 96, the specific display process continues in the request display 96 as well.
When a specific display process continues, the display imitating the production button 25 of the request display 96 is pressed as the player operates the operation unit, as shown in FIG. 1-34(f). At the same time, the change in the display mode is completed and the first display mode is displayed as the final display mode. Here, the shaded display mode indicates the final display mode. This allows the player to clearly understand the final display mode. The effect showing the final display mode as shown in Figure 1-34(f) is not performed unless a specific display process is performed, but even if the specific display process is not performed, the final display mode is It may be performed as a performance to show.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 1-34(g), a point display 97 is displayed that displays the points earned as an effect corresponding to the operation. At this time, the display mode of the point display 97 is set to the final display mode shown in the request display 96, and here it is a hatched display mode. In this way, by showing the final display mode even in the performance corresponding to the operation, it becomes possible for the player to understand the final display mode more clearly. This effect may also be performed as an effect indicating the final display mode when a specific display process is not performed.

FIG. 1-34(h) shows an example of the display mode and expectation level of the standby display 92 and request display 96. There are four display modes: white, horizontal lines, diagonal lines, and hatching. In addition, in the figure, the display mode of the standby display 92 and the request display 96 is expressed in white, horizontal lines, diagonal lines, and shading, but in an actual gaming machine, it may be expressed by different display colors. good. For example, the display mode of white in the figure is the display mode of white display color, the display mode of horizontal lines in the figure is the display mode of green display color, and the display mode of diagonal lines in the figure is the display mode of red display color. In addition, the shaded display mode in the figure may be a gold display color display mode.

For each display mode, the degree of expectation is determined when the final display mode, which is the display mode when the player operates the operation unit, is reached.
This level of expectation is different depending on whether the specific display process is not used or when the specific display process is used. is set to be high. In particular, in this embodiment, the expected level of the display mode is one step higher. For example, the display mode of diagonal lines after going through a specific display process is the same as the display mode of hatching when the specific display process is not performed. I try to maintain expectations. This makes it possible to give the impression that each display mode has been upgraded in rank, and it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the game.
In this way, by making the expectations for each display mode different depending on whether or not a specific display process is carried out, it is possible to increase the patterns of effects without increasing the variation of display modes.
It is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of RAM, and to provide a variety of performances that are easy for players to understand.

Note that for each display mode, the order of expectations when a specific display process is not performed and the order of expectations when a specific display process is performed may be different. For example, if a specific display process is not performed, white color has the lowest expectation level, but if a specific display process is performed, white color has the highest expectation level. Furthermore, there may be a display mode that appears only when a specific display process is performed, and this display mode may have a higher degree of expectation than other display modes.

In addition, the order in which the display mode changes in a specific display process is white, horizontal line, diagonal line, hatching,
White, etc., and the expectations are changed from low to high, but this order can be set arbitrarily and may be changed randomly.
Further, although all display modes are displayed sequentially, only some display modes may be displayed sequentially. Further, display modes selected from among a plurality of display modes may be sequentially displayed. In this case, the level of expectation for the final display mode may be suggested or reported based on the average value of the expectation level for the selected display mode.
In addition, as shown in Figures 1-34(f) and (g), although the final display mode is clearly shown, other effects may be used to indicate the final display mode. Also good. For example, at the timing shown in Figure 1-34(f), an effect display may be displayed in the display area corresponding to the final display mode, or a character may be displayed corresponding to the final display mode. It's okay.

In addition, as the final display mode when going through a specific display process, we have made it possible to select all the display modes that can be selected without going through a specific display process, but we have made it possible to select only some display modes. Also good. For example, when going through a specific display process, the white display mode with the lowest level of expectation may not be selected, and the display mode with the highest level of expectation and which can be expected will be selected.
Furthermore, a specific display process is started from the time when the standby display 92 starts displaying, but only a single display mode is displayed at the time when the standby display 92 starts displaying, and the specific The display process may be started.

In addition, when a specific display process is set in the standby display 92, a specific display process is also set in the request display 96, but when the standby display 92 is set as a specific display process and the request display 96 is reached, the change is stopped. The request display 96 may be a single display. Conversely, the standby display 92 may be used as a single display, and when the request display 96 is reached, a specific display process may be started. Further, a specific display process may be started or ended at an arbitrary timing using the standby display 92 or the request display 96. The expectation level in these cases is preferably the expectation level when a specific display process is performed, but may be the expectation level when the specific display process is not performed.

In addition, as a specific display process, the display mode changed cyclically or randomly, and the display mode that was displayed once could be displayed again in the process of change. It may also include a unidirectional change display mode that is not displayed again during the process.
Further, the specific display process is not limited to the display mode shown here, and may be another display process. For example, a specific display such as a character may be added, or the size or shape may be different.
In addition, although the case where the standby display 92 and the request display 96 go through a specific display process has been described,
When suggesting or informing the level of expectation based on the display mode in other displays, the level of expectation for the same display mode may be made different depending on whether a specific display process is performed or not. Other display modes include the display mode of the decorative special symbol start memory display on the standby memory display section 83, the running memory display on the running memory display section 84, the display of specific parts displayed in the production, and the character display. , effect display, background display, etc.

Based on the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, effect control that controls the effect of the game. means (effect control device 300) and display means (display device 41) capable of displaying the effect of the game, and the effect control means displays a suggestive display indicating a high possibility of a special result on the display means. can be displayed, and the final display mode differs depending on whether the final display mode is achieved through a specific display process in the suggestion display or the final display mode is achieved without going through a specific display process. If they are the same, it is possible to make the suggested special result different in probability.
Therefore, the variety of effects can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, it is provided with an operation section (performance button 25) that can be operated by the player, and the performance control means can execute an operation request performance that requests the operation of the operation section, and in the operation request performance, the display means shows the operation of the operation section. It is possible to perform a request display requesting , and it is possible to display a suggestion display in the request display.
Therefore, it is possible to make suggestions at points that the player pays attention to, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the effect control means cyclically displays a plurality of display modes as a specific display process, and displays the final display mode in accordance with the operation of the operating section.
Therefore, the final display mode is displayed based on the player's operation, and it is possible to make it appear as if the final display mode was selected by the player's will, thereby improving the interest of the game. I can do it.

Moreover, as a specific display process, the effect control means sets the display mode to be the final display mode, then sets it to another display mode, and then sets it to the final display mode again.
Therefore, the display mode that has been displayed once may be displayed again, and it is possible to improve the interest in the process of obtaining the final display mode.

Furthermore, when the final display mode is selected through a specific display process, the effect control means does not select the display mode that has the lowest possibility of producing a special result.
Therefore, the sense of anticipation for a particular display process increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

FIG. 1-35 shows an example of a performance that enables operations other than those requested in the performances shown in FIGS. 1-32 to 1-34.
FIG. 1-35(a) shows the timing shown in FIG. 1-33(c). In this example, when the request display 96 requests the operation of the production button 25, the player presses the center button 29a of the cross key 29, which is an operation section separate from the production button 25. Here, the operation of the cross key 29 is also considered to be a valid operation, and in conjunction with the operation, the effect shown in FIG. 1-35(b) is displayed instead of the effect shown in FIG. 1-33(d) when the effect button 25 is pressed. The performance shown will be performed.

The performance shown in Figure 1-35(b) is a guaranteed hit performance in which the points earned are very high and the value of the meter display 95 reaches the upper limit with one hit. This is a special effect that can only occur when you operate the control panel.
Note that the effects performed when an operation other than the requested operation is performed are not limited to those described above. It is preferable that the effect performed when a requested operation is performed and the effect performed when an operation other than the requested operation is performed are different, but the same effect may be performed in some cases.

In the series of performances shown in FIGS. 1-32 to 1-34, operations other than the requested operations are valid only during the period when the request display 96 is displayed and when multiple requests are made. Among the display opportunities of the display 96, only predetermined display opportunities are provided.
For example, as shown in FIG. 1-35(a), it is valid only when the display mode of the request display 96 is a predetermined display mode, and is invalid at other display occasions of the request display 96. Of course, it may be valid on all display occasions of the request display 96. In particular, the interest of the game can be improved by validating operations other than those requested in the case of a special result and performing a win confirmation effect as shown in FIG. 1-35(b).

In this way, when a predetermined operation is requested, by making it possible to perform a performance corresponding to the operation based on the fact that an operation other than the requested operation is performed, a different style of performance can be performed.
The interest in playing games can be effectively improved.
In addition, in the case of a performance that enables operation of other operation parts during a period when the request display 96 is not displayed, only some players who know the specifications of the gaming machine in question can perform the operation. First, the effect of improving interest is limited, but by enabling operations other than the requested operation during the period in which the request display 96 is displayed as described above, it is possible to indicate that it is an opportunity to perform some operation. Since the player is aware of this, he or she is more likely to try other operations, and even players who are unfamiliar with the game are more likely to be able to see special effects, which can effectively improve the interest of the game. can.

Note that if an operation other than the requested operation is invalid and an operation other than the requested operation is performed, a notification may be provided to the effect that the operation is invalid.
In addition, in the above example, a different effect can be executed when a cross key 29 other than the effect button 25 that is requested to be operated is operated, but if a specific operation is performed on the effect button 25 that is requested to be operated. Additionally, it may be possible to perform a different effect than when no specific operation is performed. For example, when an operation to press the effect button 25 once is requested, different effects may be performed depending on whether the effect button 25 is pressed once or multiple times. That is, if an operation different from the requested operation is performed, an effect corresponding to the operation may be performed.

In addition, although the effects shown in FIGS. 1-32 to 1-35 are performed when support A is selected as the end condition of the specific game state ST4, support B or support C is selected as the end condition of the specific game state ST4. It is also possible to execute when is selected.
Further, the same effect can be performed not only when a jackpot is derived as a special result, but also when a small hit or a support hit is obtained.
Alternatively, the above-mentioned effect may be performed from before a predetermined game in which the player reaches the ceiling to in a game in which the player reaches the ceiling, and when the meter display 95 reaches the upper limit, it may be notified that the player has reached the ceiling. In this case, even if the ceiling is not reached, a similar effect may be performed so that the meter display 95 ends before reaching the upper limit.

FIGS. 1-36 and 1-37 show other examples of effects that request operation of the operating section.
As shown in FIG. 1-36(a), when a predetermined timing is reached in a state where the identification information is being displayed in a variable manner in each variable display area of the decorative special figure variable display game display section 81, as shown in FIG. 1-36(b). As shown in the figure, a request display 96 requesting pressing of the effect button 25 is displayed in each variable display area.

When the player presses the performance button 25, the variable display in the left variable display area 81a is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 1-36(c). Subsequently, when the player presses the effect button 25, the variable display in the medium variable display area 81b is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 1-36(d). Furthermore, when the player presses the production button 25, the variable display in the right variable display area 81c temporarily stops as shown in FIG. 1-36(e), and then changes as shown in FIG. 1-36(f). The display ends.

Here, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a special result, so it will stop in the special result mode, but if the result of the special figure change display game is a loss, it will stop in the lose result mode. It has become. Even in the case of a miss, the player's sense of anticipation can be maintained by setting the winning state at the time shown in FIG. 1-36(d). Of course, it is also possible to indicate that the player is not in the reach state at the time shown in FIG. 1-36(d) and is out. In addition, although the order of stopping in response to the operation of the production button 25 is set to the left fluctuation display area 81a, the middle fluctuation display area 81b, and the right fluctuation display area 81c, the order of stopping is not limited to this, and the stopping order can be set arbitrarily. It is.

In such a performance, the performance can be advanced by operations other than the requested operation.
As shown in FIG. 1-37(a), when the right button 29c of the cross key 29 is pressed while the request display 96 requesting the operation of the effect button 25 is displayed in each variable display area, as shown in FIG. As shown in b), the variable display in the right variable display area 81c corresponding to the right button 29c is temporarily stopped. Next, when the left button 29e of the cross key 29 is pressed, the variable display in the left variable display area 81a corresponding to the left button 29e is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 1-37(c). Further, when the center button 29a of the cross key 29 is pressed, the variable display in the medium variable display area 81b corresponding to the center button 29a is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 1-37(d).

Here, the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a special result, so it will stop in the special result mode, but if the result of the special figure change display game is a loss, it will stop in the lose result mode. It has become. If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a loss, it will be in the reach state at the time of Figure 1-37 (c), but at the time of Figure 1-37 (d), the identification symbol different from the identification symbol that constitutes the reach is displayed. It will temporarily stop and the result of failure will be displayed. Of course, it is also possible to indicate that the player is not in the reach state at the time shown in FIG. 1-37(c) and is out.

In this way, by operating the button of the cross key 29 corresponding to each variable display area, it is possible to temporarily stop the variable display of the corresponding variable display area. The operation order shown in FIG. 1-37 is an example, and by selecting a button on the cross key 29, the player can arbitrarily select a variable display area in which to temporarily stop. This makes it possible to stop the variable display area selected by the player like in a slot machine, and it is possible to provide new game characteristics and improve the interest of the game.

Note that it is also possible to use both stopping the variable display by operating the production button 25 as shown in Figure 1-36 and stopping the variable display by operating the cross key 29 as shown in Figure 1-37. It is.
For example, if the left button 29e of the cross key 29 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 29c, the variable display in the right variable display area 81c is temporarily stopped, and when the center button 29a of the cross key 29 is pressed, the variable display in the middle variable display area 81b is temporarily stopped.
Further, when the effect button 25 is pressed from the state shown in FIG. 1-37(b), the variable display in the left variable display area 81a is temporarily stopped. When the production button 25 is pressed, the priority order for temporary stop is the left variable display area 81a, the middle variable display area 81b, and the right variable display area 81c. If the variable display area is temporarily stopped, the variable display area to be temporarily stopped is selected from among the variable display areas that have not been temporarily stopped in accordance with the above priority order.

As described above, two types of operation modes can be provided for one performance that requires operation of the operation section, and the interest of the game can be effectively improved. Since the performance itself is one performance, compared to the case where two types of performances are provided, the consumption of the capacity of a RAM for storing performance information can be suppressed, and an increase in development cost and period can be suppressed.

Note that although the performance button 25 and the cross key 29 are used as the operation section, parts other than these that can be operated by the player may be used as the operation section. For example, the lending button 27a, the return button 27b, the upper tray operation lever 27d, the volume adjustment button 27e, the ball removal lever of the lower tray 23, the handle 24, etc. are included. Further, although not provided in the game machine of this embodiment, the game machine may include a lever, a stick, a touch panel, a call button for calling a store clerk, etc. that can be operated by the player.

Furthermore, it may be possible to temporarily stop any variable display area by performing a specific operation on the operation unit that is requested to operate. For example, pressing the effect button 25 once will temporarily stop the left variable display area 81a, quickly pressing the effect button 25 twice will temporarily stop the medium variable display area 81b, and quickly pressing the effect button 25 three times will cause the right variable display area to temporarily stop. The display area 81c may be temporarily stopped. In other words, by operating the operation unit in which the operation is requested in a different operation mode, an effect corresponding to the operation may be performed.

Furthermore, in the performances shown in FIGS. 1-36 and 1-37, the degree of expectation may be suggested or notified by the display mode of the request display 96.
Further, although the performance is performed in the normal game state ST1 here, the same performance is possible in other game states.

Furthermore, in FIGS. 1-32 to 1-37, examples are shown in which an operation other than the requested operation is performed in an operation request presentation that requests an operation on the operation section. If an operation is performed in a state where no request has been made, it may be possible to perform a performance corresponding to the operation.
For example, in the effects shown in FIGS. 1-32 to 1-35, when the operation section is operated while the request display 96 is not displayed, the effect corresponding to the operation may be executed. The target operation unit in this case may be any other operation unit other than the performance button 25 that is the target of the standby display 92 or the request display 96, or may include the performance button 25. The effect corresponding to this operation may be an effect in which the point display 97 is displayed and the meter display 95 increases to indicate that points can be earned in the same way as when operating the effect button 25 in accordance with the request display 96, or a character appears. It can also be used as a performance such as

Furthermore, in the effects shown in FIGS. 1-36 and 1-37, when the operation unit is operated while the request display 96 is not displayed, the effect corresponding to the operation may be executed.
For example, as shown in FIG. 1-36(a), when the performance button 25 is pressed in a state where the request display 96 is not displayed, the variable display in the variable display area may be temporarily stopped. In this case, one press may temporarily stop the variable display of all the variable display areas, or one press may temporarily stop the variable display of one variable display area.
Further, as shown in FIG. 1-36(a), if the right button 29c of the cross key 29 is pressed while the request display 96 is not displayed, the variable display in the right variable display area 81c is temporarily stopped, and the The variable display in the left variable display area 81a may be temporarily stopped when the left button 29e is pressed, and the variable display in the middle variable display area 81b may be temporarily stopped when the center button 29a of the cross key 29 is pressed.

In addition to the example given here, when the operation unit is operated while the request display 96 is not displayed, it may be possible to execute a performance corresponding to the operation, and a specific display may be executed as the performance corresponding to the operation. Examples include doing something, outputting a specific sound, causing a specific LED to emit light, and making a specific accessory move.

From the above, in a gaming machine that can execute a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, there is a performance control means (performance control device 300) that controls the performance of the game, and an operation unit that can be operated by the player (performance button 25, A cross key 29) is provided, and the production control means is capable of executing an operation request production that requests an operation of the operation section, and when the requested operation is performed, is capable of executing a production corresponding to the operation. If an unrequested operation is performed, the performance corresponding to the operation can be executed.
Therefore, the variety of effects can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

Moreover, in the operation request performance that requests an operation of the operating section, when an operation other than the requested operation is performed, the performance control means can execute the performance corresponding to the operation.
Therefore, the variety of effects can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, it is equipped with multiple operation parts, and in the operation request performance, the operation of a predetermined operation part among the plurality of operation parts is requested, and the performance corresponding to the operation is executed based on the operation of the operation part that requested the operation. This means that even if an operation unit other than the operation unit that requested the operation is operated, the performance corresponding to the operation can be executed.
Therefore, the variety of effects can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, when executing the operation requesting effect, the effect control means can set whether or not to execute the effect corresponding to the operation when an operation other than the requested operation is performed.
Therefore, the corresponding performance may or may not be executed, increasing the variety of performances and improving the interest of the game.

In addition, the performance control means can provide multiple opportunities to operate the operation unit in one operation request performance, and a predetermined operation among the multiple operation units can be operated at any of the multiple operation opportunities. It is now possible to execute a performance corresponding to the relevant operation based on the operation, and for operations other than the predetermined operation, it is now possible to perform a performance corresponding to the relevant operation based on the operation at a specific operation opportunity among multiple operation opportunities. That's what I did.
Therefore, the corresponding performance may or may not be executed, increasing the variety of performances and improving the interest of the game.

In addition, the production control means includes at least three or more operation units as the operation units, and the production control means requests operation of one operation unit in the operation request production, and controls the operation units other than the operation unit requested to be operated. This means that an operation section that executes a performance corresponding to the operation based on the operation and an operation section that does not perform the performance corresponding to the operation even if it is operated are set.
Therefore, the corresponding performance may or may not be executed, increasing the variety of performances and improving the interest of the game.

The display means (display device 41) capable of displaying the effects of the game is provided, and the effect control means stops the display means after variably displaying a plurality of pieces of identification information as a game in a plurality of variable display areas. It is configured to present the result of the game based on a combination of identification information that is stopped and displayed in the display area, and as an operation request performance in one game, an operation part corresponding to each variable display area is determined, and the corresponding operation part is It is possible to perform an effect that makes it appear that the fluctuating display of the corresponding fluctuating display area stops by operating it, and among the multiple operation parts,
This means that a predetermined operation section corresponds to any of the variable display areas, and for operation sections other than the predetermined operation section, a separate operation section corresponds to each of the plurality of variable display areas. .
Therefore, the corresponding performance may or may not be executed, increasing the variety of performances and improving the interest of the game.

FIG. 1-38 shows an example of the effect when support B or support C is selected as the end condition of the specific gaming state ST4.
This effect is started in the final game of the specific gaming state ST4, and is based on the special figure fluctuation display game that is the final game of the specific gaming state ST4 being executed, and the second starting memory that existed in the final game. Based on the special figure fluctuation display game. The special figure variation display game whose result is to be notified by this performance is the special figure variation display game which is the final game of the specific game state ST4 being executed, and the special figure variation display game which is the final game of the specific game state ST4 that is being executed, and the special figure variation display game that is based on the second start memory that existed in the final game. It is a picture-changing display game. The result of the special symbol variation display game based on the second starting memory is determined based on the preliminary determination result.

As shown in FIG. 1-38(a), when a predetermined timing is reached while the final game of the specific game state ST4 is being executed, an effect is started as shown in FIG. 1-38(b). In this performance, a meter display 85 is displayed in the display area, and when the value of the meter display 85 reaches the upper limit, it is shown that a special result will be obtained. The value of the meter display 85 normally increases based on winnings to the variable winning device 37.
Further, in the display area, a right hit instruction display 90 instructing the user to hit right to aim at the normal variable winning device 37 is displayed, and a promotion display 98 that prompts the player to win the normal variable winning device 37 is displayed. Note that an explanatory image 91 showing the normal variable prize winning device 37 as shown in FIG. 1-32(a) may be displayed.

When a prize is won in the normal variable winning device 37, an effect display 99 is displayed at the right end of the display area near the normal variable winning device 37, as shown in FIG. 1-38(c), and the effect display 99 moves to the meter display 85, and the value of the meter display 85 increases.
As shown in FIG. 1-38(d), when the second starting memory reaches the upper limit value, a remaining time display 89 indicating the remaining time of the period in which the value is added to the meter display 85 is displayed. Even if the second starting memory reaches the upper limit, the value on the meter display 85 does not reach the upper limit, and the promotion display 98 and the right-hand drive instruction display 90 are continued, and the remaining time display 89 is displayed. It is possible to prevent the player from stopping the game, and it is possible to prevent the operating rate of the gaming machine from decreasing.

Here, it is clear from the preliminary judgment result that the result of the second starting memory to be digested thirdly is a special result, and as shown in FIG. 1-38(e), the meter display 85 reaches the upper limit, As shown in FIGS. 1-38(f) and (g), an effect corresponding to the meter display 85 reaching the upper limit is started. During execution of the effect corresponding to the meter display 85 reaching the upper limit, the special figure fluctuation display game in which the result is a miss is completed, and the third one is completed as shown in Figure 1-38 (h). A special result is finally derived at the end of the special symbol variation display game based on the second starting memory.

FIG. 1-39 shows a case where the meter display 85 does not reach the upper limit. As shown in Figure 1-39(a), when the period for adding values to the meter display 85 ends without the meter display 85 reaching the upper limit, as shown in Figures 1-39(b) and (c), An effect corresponding to the fact that the meter display 85 does not reach the upper limit is started. In this performance, notification is made that the specific game state ST4 ends.

If there is no special result in the target special figure fluctuation display game, all the second starting memories are digested during the execution of this effect as shown in Figure 1-39 (d), and As shown in (e), a transition is made to the normal gaming state ST1.
On the other hand, if there is a special result in the target special figure fluctuation display game, the specific game state ST4 will end as shown in FIG. 1-39(f) from the state in FIG. 1-39(c). The special result is finally derived as shown in FIG. 1-39(g) after the notification of the special symbol is stopped and the special symbol fluctuation display game in which the result is a failure is played.

By performing a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games in a series of effects in this way, the specific game state ST4
The final game and the second special symbol variation display game based on the maximum of four second starting memories in the remaining pending state ST5 can be made to appear as if they were one special symbol variation display game. By including multiple special symbol fluctuation display games in a series of performances, the possibility of a special result in this series of performances increases, so it is possible to create an impression that there is a high possibility of a special result at the end of the specific gaming state ST4. This can effectively improve the interest of the game.

Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 1-38 and 1-39 are performed when support B or support C is selected as the ending condition of the specific gaming state ST4, but support A is selected as the ending condition of the specific gaming state ST4. It is also possible to execute when is selected.
Further, the same effect can be performed not only when a jackpot is derived as a special result, but also when a small hit or a support hit is obtained.
Alternatively, the above-mentioned effect may be performed from before a predetermined game in which the player reaches the ceiling to in a game in which the player reaches the ceiling, and when the meter display 85 reaches the upper limit, the player may be notified that the player has reached the ceiling. In this case, even if the ceiling is not reached, a similar effect may be performed so that the meter display 85 ends before reaching the upper limit.

Next, an image showing a predetermined location of the gaming machine displayed on the display device 41 will be explained.
The display device 41 can display an image showing a predetermined location of the gaming machine in order to encourage the player to operate the game ball or win a prize with the game ball. For example, as shown in FIG. 1-31(f), it is possible to display an explanation image 91 that is an image showing the special variable winning device 38 in order to encourage the player to win the special variable winning device 38. Further, as shown in FIG. 1-32(b), it is possible to display an explanatory image 91 which is an image showing the normal variable winning device 37 in order to encourage the player to win the normal variable winning device 37. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 1-32(g), a request display 96 and a standby display 92, which are images showing the performance button 25, can be displayed to prompt the user to operate the performance button 25. These images are displayed in a display mode determined according to a predetermined location of the gaming machine where they are displayed.

FIG. 1-40(a) shows the explanatory image 91 shown in FIG. 1-31(f), FIG. 1-40(b) shows the explanatory image 91 shown in FIG. 1-32(b), FIG. 1-40 shows the request display 96 shown in FIG. 1-32(g). Note that the standby display 92 is the same display as the request display 96, except for the size. All of the images shown in FIGS. 1-40 are images displayed on the display device 41, and for the sake of explanation, corresponding symbols are attached to corresponding members in the images.

In this embodiment, the image showing a predetermined location on the game board 30 is displayed as a front view image. That is, as shown in FIGS. 1-40(a) and (b), the explanatory image 91 showing the special variable winning device 38 and the normal variable winning device 37 provided on the game board 30 is displayed as a front-view image. It has become.
In addition to the above, the predetermined locations on the game board 30 include specific areas within the board presentation devices 44 such as the lower presentation device 44a and the upper presentation device 44b, the general pattern start gate 34, the starting prize opening 36, and the special variable prize winning device 38. (V winning opening) etc.

On the other hand, the image showing a predetermined location on the front frame 12 that holds the game board 30 is displayed as a perspective image. That is, as shown in FIG. 1-40(c), the image of the request display 96 indicating the performance button 25 provided on the front frame 12 is displayed as a perspective image. It is preferable that the angle of strabismus is close to the player's appearance, but the angle is not limited to this.
Predetermined locations on the front frame 12 include the cross key 29, the lending button 27a, and the return button 27b.
, balance display 27c, upper tray operation lever 27d, volume adjustment button 27e, mobile terminal holder 28, frame decoration device 18, speaker 19, upper tray 21, lower tray 23, lever for removing balls from the lower tray 23, handle 24, etc. Although not provided in the gaming machine of this embodiment,
The front frame 12 may be provided with a lever, a stick, a touch panel, a call button for calling a store clerk, etc. that can be operated by the player.

The game board 30 is located in front of the player's viewpoint, and most of the front frame 12 is not located in front of the player's viewpoint. That is, when looking at a predetermined location on the gaming machine from the player's perspective, the degree of strabismus is greater at the predetermined location on the front frame 12 than at the predetermined location on the game board 30.
For this reason, an image showing a predetermined location on the game board 30 is better viewed from the front because the display is closer to the player's appearance, making it easier to understand, and an image showing a predetermined location on the front frame 12 is viewed from a perspective view. This makes the display more similar to what the player sees, making it easier to understand.

Furthermore, the image showing a predetermined location on the game board 30 is designed to display not only the target member but also other surrounding members. For example, in the image showing the special variable winning device 38 shown in FIG. 1-40(a), the surrounding normal variable winning device 37, center case 40, and collective display device 50 are also displayed. Further, in the image showing the normal variable winning device 37 shown in FIG. 1-40(b), the surrounding special variable winning device 38, center case 40, and collective display device 50 are also displayed. Other members around the target member are members that exhibit a function different from that of the target member. For example, in an image showing the special variable winning device 38 as a target member, the normal variable winning device 37, center case 40, and collective display device 50 have different functions from the special variable winning device 38, so they are different from other components. Become.

In contrast, the image showing a predetermined location on the front frame 12 displays only the target member. In other words, the display does not include any member that performs a function different from that of the target member. For example, in the request display 96 shown in FIG. 1-40(c), only the performance button 25 is displayed.
Furthermore, the range to be displayed by the image showing the predetermined location on the front frame 12 is narrower than the range to be displayed by the image showing the predetermined location on the game board 30.

Since many members of the game board 30 are arranged in a narrow range, by displaying not only the target member but also surrounding members, it becomes easier for the player to find the target member. Moreover, since each member is arranged in a narrow range, even if surrounding members are displayed in addition to the target member, the target member will not be displayed small.
On the other hand, since the front frame 12 is larger than the game board 30, there are many components that are placed apart from each other, and if the surrounding components are displayed in addition to the target component, a wide area will be displayed in a small image. The target member is displayed small and difficult to understand. Further, since each member is arranged apart from each other, the player can easily find the target member even if only the target member is displayed.

Further, an image indicating a predetermined location on the game board 30 is displayed at a position close to the target member. For example, in the image showing the special variable winning device 38 as shown in FIG. 1-31(f), it is displayed on the lower right side of the display area. Further, as shown in FIG. 1-32(b), in the image showing the normal variable prize winning device 37, it is displayed on the right side of the display area.
On the other hand, an image showing a predetermined location on the front frame 12 is displayed regardless of the position of the target member. For example, as shown in FIG. 1-32(g), the request display 96 is displayed in the center of the display area, and the standby display 92 is displayed on the left side of the display area.

Since the game board 30 has a display device 41 as the center and each component is arranged adjacent to the periphery, the distance between the display device 41 and the target component is short, and the image can be displayed near the target component. The effect of making it easier to find the target member based on the display position is enhanced.
On the other hand, since each member of the front frame 12 is located at a longer distance from the display device 41 than each member of the game board 30, the effect of discovering the target member based on the display position is not so high.
By giving priority to the layout of the presentation display, the decorativeness is enhanced, and as a result, the display can be made more interesting.

Note that whether the image is viewed from the front or from a perspective is determined depending on whether the target member is on the game board 30 or the front frame 12, but this is not limiting and other factors may also be considered. It may also be divided based on.
For example, a time limit display may be displayed in a perspective view, and a time limit display may not be displayed in a front view. In the above example, the request display 96 shown in FIG. 1-32(g) is displayed in a perspective view since it also includes a meter display indicating the time limit for the operation. In addition, the image showing the special variable winning device 38 shown in FIG. 31(e) and the image showing the normal variable winning device 37 shown in FIG. 1-32(b) do not display the winning time limit, so they cannot be viewed from the front. indicate.

For items with time limits, by displaying them in a way similar to how they appear to the player, it becomes easier for the player to find the target member and take action within the time limit. If there is no time limit displayed, there is no need to deal with it in a hurry, and it is possible for people other than the player to intuitively understand what is happening and where it is being shown. can.

Furthermore, whether the image is viewed from the front or from a perspective may be determined depending on the position of the target member. For example, assuming a player's viewpoint, an object located at a position where the visual angle from the viewpoint falls within a predetermined range may be viewed from the front, and an object located at a position outside the predetermined range may be viewed from the perspective. In this case, it is assumed that the player's viewpoint is approximately at the center of the game board, and the members located in the range from the upper end to the lower end of the gaming area 32 are viewed from the front, and the components located above the upper end of the gaming area 32 or in the gaming area 32 are viewed from the front. A member located below the lower end may be viewed in perspective. By doing this, it is possible to create an image that is close to how it looks from the player's perspective.

Further, an image showing a part that cannot be operated by the player may be displayed in a front view, and an image showing a part which can be operated by the player may be displayed in a perspective view. For example, the special variable winning device 38 and the normal variable winning device 37 cannot be operated by the player, so they are displayed in front view, and the performance button 25 is operable by the player, so it is displayed in perspective.

Further, in the case of an image showing a predetermined location on the glass frame 15, since the glass frame 15 is a part of the front frame 12, it may be viewed in perspective according to the display mode of the front frame 12. Since the glass frame is located substantially in front of the player, it may be viewed from the front in accordance with the display mode of the game board 30. Further, among the predetermined parts of the glass frame 15, the members located in the range from the upper end to the lower end of the gaming area 32 are viewed from the front, and are located above the upper end of the gaming area 32 or below the lower end of the gaming area 32. The member may be viewed in perspective.

Furthermore, although the display modes are divided into front view and oblique view, they may be divided into moving images and still images. In this case, following the above-mentioned division method, a front view may be used as a still image, and a perspective view may be used as a moving image. Furthermore, for example, images showing moving parts such as the production button 25, special variable winning device 38, and normal variable winning device 37 are displayed as moving images, and images showing non-moving members such as the general pattern starting gate 34 are displayed. may be displayed as a still image.
By doing so, the actions can also be shown, making it easier for the player to understand.

From the above, in a gaming machine that can execute a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a display means (display device 41) capable of displaying information, a performance control means (performance control device 300) that controls the display means, The performance control means is capable of displaying an image showing a predetermined location of the gaming machine on the display means, and is capable of displaying an image in a display mode determined according to the predetermined location.
Therefore, the display can be easily understood by the player, and the progress of the game can be made smoother, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The game board 30 includes a game area 32 through which game balls flow, and a front frame 12 that holds the game board 30. The image will be displayed as an image, and the image showing the predetermined portion of the front frame 12 will be displayed as a perspective image.
Therefore, the display can be made similar to the player's appearance and can be easily understood by the player, and the game progresses smoothly and the game becomes more interesting.

Further, the effect control means displays an image showing a predetermined part that cannot be operated by the player as a front view image, and displays an image showing a predetermined part that can be operated by the player as a perspective view image.
Therefore, the display can be easily understood by the player, and the progress of the game can be made smoother, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Next, the manner of selecting items that can be selected by the player will be explained.
In gaming machines, items such as volume, brightness, and various settings are set that can be selected by the player. These selections are made by the player operating an operation section such as a cross key 29. These selectable items and selection modes are set based on the gaming state.

FIG. 1-41 shows an example of the selection mode. During the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game in the first period, when the player presses the cross key 29, a selection image 79 for selecting the volume and brightness is displayed as shown in FIG. 1-41(a). You can select the volume and brightness. Here, the volume can be increased by operating the right button 29c of the cross key 29, and it is possible to decrease the volume by operating the left button 29e of the cross key 29. Furthermore, by operating the upper button 29b of the cross key 29, it is possible to increase the brightness, and by operating the lower button 29d of the cross key 29, it is possible to decrease the brightness.

In this first period selection mode, when the volume is at maximum, press the right button 29 of the cross key 29.
Even if you operate c, the volume does not change and the volume does not shift to the minimum state. Further, even if the left button 29e of the cross key 29 is operated when the volume is at the minimum, the volume does not change and the volume does not shift to the maximum state. In other words, the choices are not looped.
Further, even if the upper button 29b of the cross key 29 is operated when the brightness is at its highest level, the brightness will not change and the brightness will not shift to its lowest level. Furthermore, even if the lower button 29d of the cross key 29 is operated when the brightness is at its lowest level, the brightness will not change and the brightness will not shift to its maximum level. In other words, the choices are not looped.
If the options do not loop, a triangular display 79a shown in the selection image 79 for explaining the operation of the cross key 29 is displayed in white. For items such as volume and brightness that require selection of large or small values, the options are not looped to prevent the selection from changing to an unintended value and to ensure a reliable selection.

When the player presses the cross key 29 in the special gaming state ST4 that constitutes the second period, a selection image 79 for selecting the volume and music is displayed as shown in FIG. 41(b), and the selection of the volume and music is displayed. It becomes possible. Here, the volume can be increased by operating the right button 29c of the cross key 29, and it is possible to decrease the volume by operating the left button 29e of the cross key 29. Furthermore, by operating the upper button 29b of the cross key 29, the cursor for selecting a song moves upward, and by operating the lower button 29d of the cross key 29, the cursor for selecting a song moves downward.

In this second period selection mode, the right button 29 of the cross key 29 is pressed when the volume is at maximum.
Even if you operate c, the volume does not change and the volume does not shift to the minimum state. Further, even if the left button 29e of the cross key 29 is operated when the volume is at the minimum, the volume does not change and the volume does not shift to the maximum state. In other words, the choices are not looped.
Further, when the upper button 29b of the cross key 29 is operated while the cursor for selecting a song is at the upper end (song A), the cursor moves to the lower end (song C). Further, when the lower button 29d of the cross key 29 is operated while the cursor for selecting a song is at the lower end (song C), the cursor moves to the upper end (song A). In other words, the choices are looped. When the options are looped, a triangular display 79a shown in the selection image 79 for explaining the operation of the cross key 29 is displayed in black.
For items that do not involve selecting large or small values, such as selecting a song, you can make the selection easier by looping the options, and you can also press and hold the button to move the cursor sequentially to make the selection at any time. Random selection is also possible by releasing the button.

When the player presses the cross key 29 while waiting for a customer in the third period, a selection image 79 for selecting various settings is displayed as shown in Figure 1-41(c), and various settings can be selected. becomes. Here, by operating the right button 29c of the cross key 29, the cursor for selecting the item to be set displayed at the top of the display area moves to the right, and by operating the left button 29e of the cross key 29, the cursor for selecting the item to be set is moved to the right. The cursor that selects the item to perform moves to the left. Also, by operating the upper button 29b of the cross key 29, the cursor for selecting detailed setting items displayed at the lower right of the display area moves upwards, and by operating the lower button 29d of the cross key 29, the cursor for selecting detailed setting items is moved upward. The cursor for selecting a setting item moves down.

In the selection mode of the third period, when the cursor for selecting the item to be set is at the rightmost position (brightness) and the right button 29c of the cross key 29 is operated, the cursor moves to the leftmost position (character selection). do. Further, when the left button 29e of the cross key 29 is operated while the cursor for selecting an item to be set is at the leftmost position (character selection), the cursor moves to the rightmost position (brightness). In other words, the choices are arranged in a loop.
Also, if you operate the upper button 29b of the cross key 29 when the cursor for selecting detailed setting items is at the upper end (Character A), the cursor does not move, but moves to the lower end (end). There's nothing to do. Also, if you operate the lower button 29d of the cross key 29 when the cursor for selecting detailed setting items is at the lower end (end) position, the cursor does not move, but moves to the upper end (character A). There's nothing to do. In other words, the choices are not looped. This detailed setting item allows you to confirm the selected item and finish the selection.
By not looping through the options, it is possible to ensure that the user selects "End".

As described above, the selection mode differs depending on the selection period. Regarding the upper button 29b and lower button 29d of the cross key 29, the options do not loop in the first period, the options loop in the second period, and the options do not loop in the third period. Regarding the right button 29c and left button 29e of the cross key 29, the options do not loop in the first period and the second period, but the options loop in the third period.
Note that it is also possible to display a display mode in which only some of the selectable items are displayed without displaying all the selectable items at the same time, and the displayed items change sequentially in response to operations on the operation unit. When using such a display mode, the options may be looped.
Furthermore, as shown here, displaying the selected image 79 by pressing the cross key 29 is an effect that corresponds to the operation when the cross key 29 is operated without a request. It can also be said that the selected image 79 is displayed.

<Second embodiment>
The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2-1 to 2-37. Note that the configuration other than those described below may be the same as in the first embodiment. Furthermore, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for components that perform the same functions as those in the first embodiment.

FIG. 2-1 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, and FIG. 2-2 is a front perspective view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 2-1 and 2-2, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be rotatable in opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIGS. 2-3) is stored in a storage section (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 including a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

A display board 350 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is provided on the glass frame 15 at a position behind the cover glass 14. The display board 350 can see through the game board 30 and can display a predetermined display. Although the game machine of this embodiment is configured with a light guide plate that makes an image appear by introducing light from the side edge, it may also be configured with a transparent liquid crystal display device or an EL display device.
When the display board 350 is not displaying a predetermined display, it is transparent and does not obstruct the visibility of the game board 30 at the rear. Then, when a predetermined display is displayed on the display board 350,
The visibility of the rear game board 30 is reduced in the predetermined display portion. In this state, the rear game board 30 may be visible through the predetermined display, or the rear game board 30 may be invisible due to the predetermined display.

At the top of the glass frame 15, a model name display section 16 for displaying the model name of the gaming machine 10, etc. is provided.
In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration, presentation, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are set in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15. Furthermore, when an abnormality occurs, the content of the abnormality is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a lamp for reporting an abnormality in dispensing may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the bottom of the glass frame 15, there is an upper tray (storage tray) 21 for supplying game balls to a batted ball firing device (not shown), and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. An upper plate ball outlet 22 and the like are provided for outflow. Further, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, there is provided a production button 25 which includes a production button switch 25a (see FIG. 2-5) for receiving a press operation input from a player. The production button 25 also has a built-in drive source that vibrates the production button 25. That is, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has a vibration function that makes a predetermined notification by vibrating the performance button 25. Note that the production button 25 can be converted from a normal state (the state shown in FIGS. 2-1 and 2-2) to a protruding state (a state in which the top surface (pressing surface) of the production button 25 is higher than in the normal state). It may be configured as follows.

At the lower part of the front frame 12, there are provided a lower tray (receiver) 23 for storing the game balls put out when the upper tray 21 is full, a handle 24 of the batted ball firing device, and the like. Furthermore, front frame 1
A keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the frame 2 .

Further, on the right side of the production button 25, there is a lending button (ball lending button) 27a that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a lending button 27a for ejecting a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A return button (ejection button) 27b that is operated to operate the balance, a balance display device (balance display section) 27c that displays the balance of the prepaid card, and an upper tray operation lever that is operated to cause the game balls in the upper tray 21 to flow down to the lower tray 23. 27d, a mobile terminal holder 28 for placing a mobile terminal such as a smartphone owned by a player is provided. Further, to the left of the production button 25, a volume adjustment button 27e, a cross key 29, etc. are provided.
In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 24, the ball firing device fires game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. . Furthermore, when the player operates the production button 25 or the cross key 29, the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2-3). You can perform performances, etc.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be explained using FIGS. 2-3. FIG. 2-3 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 2-3, the game board 30 includes a flat game board body that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front side of the game board body is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. A gaming area 32 is provided. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball firing device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the direction of the game balls flowing down, and the fired game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case 40 is attached that forms a window that serves as a display area for a variable display game. A display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is arranged behind a window portion formed in the center case 40.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured of a device having a display screen, such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode ray tube). The area on the display screen where images can be displayed (display area) can display still images and videos as performance images, such as characters that produce multiple identification information (special symbols) or a special symbol variation display game. Information regarding the game, such as a background image that enhances the presentation effect, is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special symbol variable display game corresponding to the special symbol variable display game is played. Furthermore, images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

The center case 40 includes a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 into the center case 40, and a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 into the center case 40, and a warp flow path forming member 614 that allows the game balls that have passed through the warp flow path to roll. A possible stage section 620 is provided. Since the stage part 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize opening 36, the game balls rolling on the stage part 620 can easily win in the starting winning opening 36.
Further, the upper and lower parts of the center case 40 are provided with a board presentation device 44 that performs a game presentation by operating. The lower presentation device 44a provided at the lower part of the center case 40 is operable between the lower part of the center case 40 and a position closer to the center of the display device 41 than this position.
The upper presentation device 44b provided at the upper part of the center case 40 is operable between the upper position of the center case 40 and a position closer to the center of the display device 41 than this position. Moreover, the above-mentioned presentation device 44b includes a rotating operating member 44c imitating a propeller.
It is possible to perform effects also by the movement of the movement member 44c.
That is, the lower presentation device 44a constitutes a first movable accessory having an operable first movable member,
The upper performance device 44b constitutes a second movable accessory having a second movable member that can be operated.

In the gaming area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (common symbol starting gate) 34 is provided. A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 2-4) is provided inside the regular figure starting gate 34 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the regular figure starting gate 34. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the regular figure starting gate 34, the regular figure fluctuation display game is executed.

Three general winning holes 35 are arranged in the gaming area 32 on the lower left of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the gaming area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Winning of game balls into these general winning holes 35 is detected by a winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 2-4) provided in the general winning hole 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a starting prize opening 36 (first starting prize area) is provided which provides a starting condition for the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game). The game ball that has won the starting prize opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 2-4).

On the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) is provided that provides starting conditions for the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game). The winning game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 2-4).
The normal variable prize winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b, and this movable member 37b normally maintains a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which game balls cannot enter. When the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a predetermined result, the general variable prize winning device is operated in an inverted “C” shape by the general electric solenoid 37c (see Figure 2-4) as a driving device. 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which game balls can easily flow into the player.
It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 allows the game ball to win even when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, and may be in a state where it is more difficult to win the game ball in the closed state than in the open state.

In the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40, there is provided a special variable prize winning device (big prize opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variable display game. There is. The special variable prize winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening/closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, and when opened, game balls can flow into the upper prize winning opening. Convert to state. The special variable winning device 38 converts the grand prize opening from a closed state to an open state depending on the result of the special figure variable display game, and facilitates the flow of game balls into the grand prize opening, thereby providing a reward to the player. A predetermined gaming value (prize ball) is given. A game ball that has won a prize in the special variable winning device 38 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 2-4).

Inside the grand prize opening (winning area), there is a specific area into which game balls can flow, and a lever solenoid 38f (Figure 2-4 A lever member is provided which is actuated by (see). A specific area switch 38d (see Figure 2-4) that can detect the inflow of game balls is provided in the specific area, and based on the detection of game balls by the specific area switch 38d, an advantageous area for the player is displayed. A state occurs (in this embodiment, a special game state occurs). The game balls that have flowed into the specific area are discharged to the outside of the special variable prize winning device 38.

Furthermore, a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 2-4) is provided inside the big winning port to detect game balls that are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning device 38 without flowing into a specific area. There is. The number of game balls detected by the big winning hole switch 38a provided inside the big winning hole (the number of game balls flowing into the big winning hole) and the game detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball outlet switch 38e By matching the number of balls (the number of game balls ejected from the grand prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper prize winning hole have been ejected, and basically until this confirmation is completed, new The grand prize opening will no longer be opened.

In the gaming area 32 below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a is provided for collecting game balls that do not win the winning opening or the like. Also, outside the gaming area 32 and at the lower right corner of the game board main body 80, special pattern fluctuation display games (special pattern 1 fluctuation display game, special pattern 2 fluctuation display game) and regular pattern fluctuation display games are executed. A collective display device 50 is provided.

The batch display device 50 is a special figure 1 display device (first special figure variation display section) for the special figure 1 variation display game.
51 and special figure 2 variable display special figure 2 display device for the game (second special figure variable display section) 52, and special figure 1
It is provided with a special figure 1 pending display 53 for informing the starting memory number of the variable display game and a special figure 2 pending display 54 for informing the starting memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game.

The collective display device 50 also includes a round display section 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a jackpot (the number of times the special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed), and a gaming state display section 5 that displays the gaming state of the gaming machine 10.
6. This game state display section 56 includes a first game state display section 56a that informs the player of the way of hitting that is advantageous to the player (the way of hitting that corresponds to the game state) between hitting to the left (normal hitting) and hitting to the right.
, a second gaming state display section 56b that notifies that the time saving state is in effect (when the variable time saving function is activated).
A third gaming state display section 56c is provided to notify that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the special symbol probability is always constant, the third gaming state display section 56c is not used.
Furthermore, the collective display device 50 includes a regular figure display 57 for the regular figure fluctuation display game, and a regular figure pending display 58 for informing the starting memory number of the regular figure fluctuation display game.

FIG. 2-4 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, which is a main control device (main board) that centrally controls the game, and has a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110, the input section 120, and the output section 130. .

The CPU section 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that includes an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator and generates a reference clock for a CPU operating clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are powered by DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC-DC generator that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power source.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a converter or a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from a DC32V voltage, and a gaming microcomputer 1.
a backup power supply section 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 11 in the event of a power outage;
It has a power outage monitoring circuit, and includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power outage.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the gaming control device 100, but the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are configured on a separate board or integrated with the gaming control device 100, that is, the main It may also be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when changing models, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board separate from the power supply device 400 or the main board, as in this embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to remove it from the target of replacement and reduce costs.

The backup power supply section 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is provided by the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is maintained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. That is, the gaming control device 100 can store and retain information regarding the game even if a power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and after the power is restored, the game can be resumed based on the stored information. It serves as a game information storage and holding means.
The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops to 17V or less, detects the occurrence of a power outage, changes the power outage monitoring signal, and generates a reset signal after a predetermined time. Output. Also, when the power is turned on or when a power failure is recovered, a reset signal is output after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the gaming control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. will be held. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and an RA that can be read and written at any time.
M (random access memory) 111C is provided.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores unchanging information for game control (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.), and the RAM 111C serves as a work area for the CPU 111A and a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the performance, whether or not a ready-to-win state occurs, etc. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a loss fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second-half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as a second-half fluctuation group table and second-half fluctuation pattern selection table), and tables for determining the fluctuation pattern before reaching the reach state. It includes tables (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining first half variation patterns, which are patterns.

Here, reach (ready-to-reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays multiple display results at different times, and the multiple display results are predetermined. A gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous to the player when a special result mode occurs (special gaming state)
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed,
This is a display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device has progressed to the stage before the display results are derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode have not been met. This refers to the display mode that does not exist. For example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result aspect is complete (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Furthermore, the reach state is the display state at the point when the display control of the display device has progressed to the stage before the display results are derived and displayed, and is determined before the display results are derived and displayed. A display state in which at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, a decorative special figure variation display game displayed on a display device in response to a special figure variation display game may vary a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined period of time in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the variable display is to be stopped in the left, right, and middle order to display the result mode, the left and right variable display areas will display a state where the conditions for the special result mode are met (for example, The state in which the variable display stops with the same identification information is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas meet the conditions for the special result mode (for example, the same The state of identification information,
However, special result modes may be excluded) in a ready-to-reach state, and the remaining variable display area may be displayed in a variable manner from this ready-to-reach state.

This reach state includes multiple reach performances, and the reach performances with different possibilities of deriving special results (different expected values) include normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 Reach) and Premier Reach are set. The expected values are: No reach < Normal reach < Special 1 reach < Special 2 reach < Special 3 reach <
The prices increase in order of premier reach. Moreover, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in the special symbol variable display game (when it becomes a jackpot). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when the result is a loss). Therefore, a state in which a ready-to-win state occurs is a state in which there is a higher possibility of a jackpot than in a case in which a ready-to-reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the production control device 300, generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and display device, and operates the game machine. Controls the entire 10. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining the hit in the special pattern fluctuation display game, a special pattern pattern random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a fluctuation pattern ( Random number generation to generate variable pattern random numbers to determine the execution time of variable display games in various reach and non-reach variable displays), random number to generate winning random numbers to determine hits in general figure variable display games, etc. circuit, and a clock generator that generates a clock that provides a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111A uses the ROM 111B in processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game.
Any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the memory is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A calculates the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit, small hit, or miss), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state), Based on the starting memory number and the like, one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. Here, CPU111A
constitutes fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

The payout control device 200 is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with the prize ball payout command (command and data) from the game control device 100, and dispenses the prize balls. Performs control for dispensing. Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit to pay out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, A winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, a big winning opening switch 38a in the special variable winning device 38, a gate switch 34a in the general figure starting gate 34, a specific area switch 38d arranged in the special variable winning device 38 and remaining bulb outlet switch 38
e. It is connected to an out ball detection switch 32a that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 11V. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided which inputs a negative logic signal such as 7V and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V to 5V. Proximity I
/F121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the sensor or proximity switch lead wires may be improperly shorted, the sensor or switch may be removed from the connector, or the lead wires may be cut and left floating. It is configured to be able to detect such abnormal conditions and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, third input port 124, or fourth input port 126, and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switch 38a, and the gate switch 34a are input to the second input port 123. . Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, detection signals from the specific area switch 38d, remaining ball outlet switch 38e, and out ball detection switch 32a are input to the fourth input port 126. Also, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121,
A detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality in a sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 .

The third input port 124 also includes a detection signal from a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 etc. of the gaming machine 10, a detection signal from a vibration sensor 65 for detecting vibrations of the gaming machine 10,
A detection signal from a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the gaming machine 10 and a detection signal from a main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 etc. of the gaming machine 10 are also input. It has become so.

Further, a signal from a setting key switch 152 that detects an operation of the setting key operation unit is input to the third input port 124 . The setting key operation section has a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted.
The configuration is such that the corresponding setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect when it is turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is turned to the second position, and turns on when it is not turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation section are operation sections for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values of special results in the special figure fluctuation display game are assigned, and these operation sections are operated. By doing this, you can select a probability setting value that is assigned a probability value that will result in a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value will be used in the game. There is. Here, six probability setting values, "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", are prepared.

When selecting the probability setting value, turn the setting key on the setting key operation section to the second position and press R.
By turning on the power of the gaming machine while operating (pressing) the AM initialization switch 112, the probability setting value change mode is enabled in which the probability setting value can be changed. You can change the probability setting value by pressing (press). The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and accessory ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays information on the probability setting value while performing operations related to the probability setting value (while in the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode); The calculated base value and accessory ratio are now displayed.

In addition, the setting key of the setting key operation section is turned to the second position (RAM initialization switch 11
By turning on the power of the gaming machine in step 2 (no operation), the currently selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153, but the probability setting value confirmation mode is entered in which the probability setting value cannot be changed. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation section cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is in an open state.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and is adapted to display the probability setting value as a number from 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that allows the probability setting value to be recognized may be used. In addition, other types of display devices such as liquid crystal display devices may be used,
The probability setting value may be indicated by the lighting mode, emitted light color, etc. of one or more LEDs.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the outputs to the second input port 123 and the outputs to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out-ball detection switch 32a) are connected to the main board 100.
The light is also supplied from the relay board 70 to a test firing test device (not shown). Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37
The detection signal a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12V is supplied to the proximity I/F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is transmitted to the enable signal CE by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122, which will be described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave fraud signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided in the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave), a payout busy signal (a signal output from the payout control device A signal indicating whether or not 200 is in a state where it can accept commands), a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (full)), a touch switch signal (based on the input of a touch switch provided on the handle 24) A first input port 122 is provided that takes in a signal (signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has the function of removing noise from.
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In other words, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
The signal is input directly to the reset terminal provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130. Furthermore, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the sight-fire test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the sight-fire test device is turned off. It is configured as follows. Further, the configuration may be such that the reset signal RESET can be output to the sight test equipment via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is applied to each port 122, 123,
124 and 126 are not supplied. The data set in each port of the output section 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent system malfunction. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the performance control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that this is one-way communication in which signals cannot be input from the production control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to a data bus 140 and sends data to inform a test shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown) of special symbol information of a variable display game, a signal indicating a probability state of a jackpot, etc. via a relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced and sold product) installed in a game parlor. Note that the detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a starting port switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor 61, panel radio sensor 62, and vibration sensor 65 that cannot be directly supplied to the test firing test device are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, such as those detected by the gaming microcomputer 111. The signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test device via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the machine cannot control the game. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the sight test equipment, and a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal without going through the buffer. There is. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test device.

Further, the output section 130 is provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140. The second output port 134 is used to open the special variable winning device 38, the large winning hole solenoid (large winning hole solenoid 1) 38b, the lever solenoid 38f, which operates the lever member in the special variable winning device 38, and the normal variable winning device 37. Opening general electric solenoid 37
This is a port for outputting the operation data of c and the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the currently selected probability setting value.
Further, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting on/off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50; Turn on/off the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting off data.

The output unit 130 also outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 7.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for output to 1. The external information terminal board 71 is equipped with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device installed in a game parlor (an information collection terminal, a game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and can transmit information regarding the game machine 10. It is now possible to supply it to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 includes a first driver ( Drive circuit) 138a, third output port 1
A second driver 138b outputs an on/off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 outputted from the fourth output port 136, and a collective display device 5 outputted from the fourth output port 136.
A third driver 138c outputs an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of 0.
, a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71, and a display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134. a fifth driver 138e that receives the signal, generates a drive signal, and outputs the drive signal.
is provided. Note that data is transmitted from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e by serial communication.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that it can drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. The fifth driver 138e has a power supply voltage of D to drive the performance display device 153 that operates at 5V.
C5V is supplied from power supply device 400.
Further, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50 includes DC1
2V is supplied. The third driver 138c that drives the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data with a current, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal via the segment line, thereby creating a dynamic drive system. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are turned on.
The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.
In addition, the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the gaming control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. Photo coupler 13
Reference numeral 9 is configured to enable mutual communication between the gaming microcomputer 111 and the inspection device 500 so that data can be sent and received by serial communication. In addition, since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 like a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, 124, and 126 are not provided. do not have.

Note that, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36,
The starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switch 38a, and the gate switch 34a in the normal variable winning device 37 are equipped with magnetic detection coils to detect the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when metal comes close to the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (
(hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the gaming machine 10 and the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 etc. are microswitches having mechanical contacts. can be used.

Next, the configuration of the production control device 300 will be explained using FIG. 2-5.
The production control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, uses an amusement chip (IC).
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying video on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melodies, sound effects, etc. from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It is equipped with

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of ROM (programmable read only memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe memory that can retain memory contents even when power is not supplied during a power outage.
A RAM 323 and an RTC (real-time clock) 338, which serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.), are connected. Note that a RAM providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the performance, and
It executes processes such as instructing the content of the output video to the DP 312, instructing the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lighting decorative lamps, controlling the drive of motors and solenoids, and managing performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 that stores character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read out from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYN is sent from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 for synchronizing the image on the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30.
C. A synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
The main control microcomputer 311 receives interrupt signals INT0 to INT0 to notify processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait signal to indicate that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. Signals such as WAIT are also input.

The production control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 using the LVDS (low amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the audio source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. In addition, an interrupt signal INT is sent from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
is now entered. The production control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is outputted from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the production control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives commands transmitted from the game control device 100. Via this command I/F 331, a production control command signal (production command ). Gaming microcomputer 111 of gaming control device 100
operates at DC5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the production control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, so the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

The production control device 300 also includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 including the display board 350) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided therein, is provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). The board presentation device 44 (
For example, a board performance movable body control circuit 334 is provided that drives and controls a movable accessory that enhances the performance effect in cooperation with the performance display on the display device 41. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340. Note that even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device equipped with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates a device for effect), and a frame effect movable body control circuit is provided to drive and control the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, a cross key 29 provided in the glass frame 15, and an initial position of the motor in the board production device 44. Performance accessory switch 47 (performance motor switch) that detects etc.
A function that detects the on/off state of and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a function that detects the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 and sends a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311. A switch input circuit 336 having the function of inputting is provided.

The normal power supply section 410 of the power supply device 400 is the production control device 300 having the above configuration.
In order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by it, 32V DC to drive the motor and solenoids, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, 12V DC to drive the motor and LEDs, DC5 which becomes the power supply voltage of command I/F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Furthermore, as the main control microcomputer 311, 3.3V or 1.2V
When using an LSI that operates at low voltage such as
The production control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating 1.2V and 1.2V. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. In addition, in the form of output from the main control microcomputer 311, VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), sound source LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the production control device 300 includes a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
When N45 is connected and the production control device 300 is powered on, the cooling FAN 45 is driven.

In the following description, if the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they will simply be referred to as the special figure variable display game. In addition, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the decorative special figure variable display game. In addition, if you do not distinguish between a jackpot (first special result) and a small hit (second special result), simply hit (special result).
It is called. In addition, when the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a jackpot, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small winning, are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as special gaming states.

Note that a jackpot is a special result (first special result) that involves the operation of a conditional device, and a small hit is a special result (second special result) that does not involve the operation of a conditional device. The condition device is activated when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol fluctuation display game (stop display of the jackpot symbol).When the condition device is activated, for example, a jackpot condition occurs and a special electric accessory is activated. Variable winning device 38
A specific flag is set for continuously operating the accessory (meaning that the accessory continuous operating device is activated). When the conditional device is not activated, it means that the aforementioned flag is not set, as in the case of winning a small lottery, for example. Note that the "condition device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Also,
"Condition device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the continuous operation of electric accessories, and it has the same meaning in this specification. It is used as a term with

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by firing game balls (pachinko balls) from a ball launcher toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing its rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, and other direction changing members placed at various locations within the game area 32, and passes through the game starting gate 34 and the general prize opening 35. , the starting prize opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, or flowing into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and being discharged from the gaming area 32. Then, when game balls win in the general winning hole 35, starting winning hole 36, normal variable winning device 37, or special variable winning device 38, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning hole that won is distributed to the payout control device 200 ( 2-4), the liquid is discharged onto the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and fires the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left-handed hitting), so that the player can enter the starting prize opening 36 or the left side of the starting winning opening 36. You can aim to win in the general winning opening 35 provided, and by firing the game ball into the right side gaming area (so-called right-handed hitting), you can enter the regular winning gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38. , it is possible to aim for a prize in the general prize opening 35.

A gate switch 34a consisting of a non-contact switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general figure starting gate 34 is provided in the normal figure starting gate 34, and
When the game ball hit inside passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern starting gate 34, the number of normal pattern starting memory is set to the upper limit number (for example, 4 balls). ), add the number of normal figures starting memory (+1
) and store one general pattern start memory in the RAM 111C. The stored number of starting prizes for common symbols is displayed on the common symbol pending display 58 of the collective display device 50. In addition, the normal figure starting memory stores a random value for determining a hit (random hit value) for determining the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a. It is now possible to do so.

Then, if there is a normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern fluctuation display game can be started, that is, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not being executed, and the normal pattern fluctuation display game wins and the normal pattern fluctuation winning device 37 is changed to the open state. If it is not in a winning state, the random number value for hit determination stored in the first stored normal pattern starting memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine whether the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit or a miss. Then, a process is performed to start the normal figure fluctuation display game. When this random value for determining a win matches the determination value, the general pattern fluctuation display game becomes a win and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100 presets a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns on the general pattern display 57 provided in the collective display device 50 over a predetermined variable time as a process for executing the normal pattern fluctuation display game. After performing a display during normal pattern fluctuation that is repeatedly displayed in the given order, a process is performed to display a normal pattern fluctuation display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed.
Note that the ordinary figure display 57 is constituted by the display device 41, and the ordinary identification information includes, for example, numbers, symbols,
It is also possible to use a character pattern or the like, and after displaying it in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, the display may be stopped and the result displayed.

When the result of the ordinary figure fluctuation display game is a win, the ordinary figure display 57 stops displaying a lighting pattern that is a special result mode, and the ordinary electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is activated. Control is performed to open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 24 ms or 1648 ms). That is, the game control device 100 constitutes conversion control execution means that performs conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In addition, when the result of the ordinary figure fluctuation display game is a loss, control is performed to display a lighting pattern that corresponds to the result of a loss on the ordinary figure display 57.

In addition, the winning balls into the starting winning hole 36 and the winning balls into the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside, respectively.
The CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 stores the first starting memory, which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory), based on winnings in the starting winning hole 36, to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4
A predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4 pieces) is stored in a second starting memory which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on winnings to the normal variable winning device 37. Based on the winnings in the starting winning hole 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, jackpot random numbers, special symbol random numbers, and each fluctuating pattern random number are extracted as starting memory information, respectively. The random number value is stored in the RAM 111C as a first starting memory and a second starting memory. The stored number of starting memories is displayed on the special drawing 1 pending display 53 and special drawing 2 pending display 54 for informing the number of starting winnings of the batch display device 50, as well as on the display device 41 of the center case 40. It is also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variable display device) based on the first starting memory, and performs the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 (first variable display device) based on the second starting memory. A special figure 2 variable display game is played on the second variable display device). When both the first starting memory and the second starting memory are stored, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 controls the special figure 1 variable display game ( In addition to controlling the execution of the first special figure variation display game), the special figure 2 variation is performed based on the second starting memory stored in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area). It serves as an execution control means for controlling the execution of the display game (second special figure variation display game). Then, in a state where the first starting memory and the second starting memory are stored, the execution control means is configured to change the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory from the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first starting memory. is also configured to be executed with priority.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing a variable display, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a jackpot, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes the special result mode (jackpot result mode) corresponding to the first special result. This results in a jackpot, resulting in a first special gaming state (so-called jackpot state).
In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is a special result mode (small hit result mode) corresponding to the second special result. This results in a small win, resulting in a second special game state (so-called small win state). In other words, special map 1
The display device 51 constitutes a first variable display means capable of displaying a first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on winning of a game ball to the starting winning hole 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 constitutes a second variable display means capable of displaying a second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on winning of game balls to the normal variable winning device 37.

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a jackpot game state (first special game state).
After the end of the game, control is performed to generate a gaming state (specific gaming state) in which the player can proceed with the game in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (high probability of winning, presence of public electricity support). It is possible to do so. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 constitutes a specific game state generation means.

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the display device 41
A decorative special figure variable display game is executed in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner. The decorative special figure 1 variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. and these are displayed in separate display areas. Then, a variable display is performed as the corresponding special figure variable display game changes, and a display corresponding to the result is performed as the result mode in the corresponding special figure variable display game is derived.

That is, the display device 41 plays an ornamental variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) in which the ornament identification information is variably displayed in response to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The present invention serves as a decorative variable display means capable of displaying a decorative special figure variable display game. Note that separate display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. In addition, gaming machine 1
0 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only with the display device 41.

FIG. 2-6 shows an example of the distribution rate in this embodiment.
FIG. 2-6(a) is an example of the distribution rate of the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 2-6(a), there are four types of results of the special figure fluctuation display game: jackpot, small hit, support hit, and loss. In this embodiment, the distribution rate of the jackpot is common between the special chart 1 and the special chart 2, but it may be different between the special chart 1 and the special chart 2. In addition, in Figure 2-6 (a), the distribution rate of the jackpot is the same when the probability setting value is “Setting 1”, “Setting 2”, and “Setting 3”. However, it may be different. In addition, in Figure 2-6 (a), the distribution rate of the jackpot is the same when the probability setting value is “Setting 4”, “Setting 5”, and “Setting 6”. However, it may be different.

Furthermore, in FIG. 2-6(a), the distribution rates for small hits and support hits are the same regardless of the probability setting value, but they may be different. That is, in this embodiment, only the winning probability of the jackpot is changed by changing the probability setting value, and the probability of the small winning and the support winning is not changed.
In addition, regarding small winnings, the distribution rate of special drawing 2 is higher than that of special drawing 1. As a result, there is a higher possibility that special drawing 2 will result in a small hit, and if it becomes a small hit, there is a high possibility that it will become the first special gaming state (jackpot) due to the flow into the specific area, so the special The special figure variation display game in FIG. 2 is more advantageous for the player.

Figure 2-6(b) is an example of the distribution ratio of jackpot types. For a jackpot, for example, as shown in Figure 2-6(b), the 5R jackpot A symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol (jackpot result mode), and the 5R jackpot B symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol (jackpot result mode). There are four types: jackpot B, 10R jackpot A in which the 10R jackpot A symbol is stopped and displayed, and 10R jackpot B in which the 10R jackpot B symbol is stopped and displayed.
In 5R jackpot A, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is 5 rounds, and after the special gaming state ends, the normal power support state (specific gaming state) of support A is entered. In 5R jackpot B, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is 5 rounds, and after the special gaming state ends, the normal power support state of support B is entered. In 10R jackpot A, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is 10 rounds, and after the special gaming state ends, the normal power support state of support B is entered. In 10R jackpot B, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is 10, and after the special gaming state ends, the normal power support state of support C is entered.
Supports A to C have different conditions for ending the general power support state, and the general power support state ends when the conditions shown in FIG. 2-6(f) are satisfied.

In Figure 2-6(b), the distribution rate of jackpot types differs depending on the gaming state in which the special figure fluctuation display game is executed, and in the normal gaming state, 5R jackpot A and 10R jackpot A can be selected. be. In the case of a specific gaming state, 5R jackpot B, 10R jackpot A, and 10R jackpot B can be selected. Note that the selection rates may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Figure 2-6(c) shows the distribution ratio of small winning types. Small win A has the highest distribution ratio, and small win B and small win C have lower distribution ratios in that order.
Further, regarding a jackpot that occurs when a game ball flows into a specific area of the special variable prize winning device 38 in the second special game state based on a small win, the jackpot type is selected based on the type of the small win. When a game ball flows into a specific area in the second special game state based on the small win A, the general power support state of support A is entered after the first special game state ends. If a game ball flows into a specific area in the second special game state based on small win B, the general power support state of support B will be entered after the first special game state ends. When a game ball flows into a specific area in the second special game state based on the small win C, the general power support state of support C is entered after the first special game state ends. In addition, the distribution ratio may be different between the special map 1 and the special map 2.

FIG. 2-6(d) is an example of a general pattern fluctuation display game. The winning probability and fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation display game are constant regardless of the game state. In addition, when the general figure fluctuation display game becomes a hit, the opening time of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is the opening time when general electric power is supported (1648 ms), and the opening time when general electric power is not supported (24 ms). ), making it easier to win. In addition, the maximum count for the general public is 1, and when one game ball enters the normal variable winning device 37, the normal variable winning device 37 is closed even before the opening time has elapsed. .
It should be noted that it is only necessary that it is easier to win a prize in the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the state of general power support (second state) than in the state of non-general power support (first state), and the probability, fluctuation time, opening time Alternatively, one or more of the general electric power maximum count numbers may be changed.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with a so-called ceiling function as shown in FIG. 2-6(e). That is, when the number of times the game has been executed reaches the ceiling number (600 in this case), the special game state is not generated and the normal power support state of support C is entered. The number of times the game is executed is always counted regardless of the presence or absence of general power support when the probability is low, and the counting is interrupted when the probability is high. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the special symbol probability is always constant, it is constantly counted. Further, the number of times the game is executed is the total number of times the special figure 1 variable display game is executed and the number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

The timing to clear the counting result of the number of times the game has been executed is when the general power support state is triggered by reaching the ceiling number of times, and when the condition device is activated (first special game state). Note that the timing for clearing the counting result of the number of game executions can be changed as appropriate, for example, when clearing the number of game executions is selected when operating the RAM initialization switch 112, or when the power is turned off instead of when clearing the RAM. It can also be used at the time of injection.

Further, when clearing the RAM, the measurement of the number of game executions may be cleared when the RAM is cleared without setting changes, and the measurement of the number of game executions may not be cleared when the RAM is cleared with setting changes. When the RAM is cleared without changing settings, for example, the power is turned on while the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on without turning on the setting key switch 152. In this manner, by not clearing the measurement of the number of game executions when clearing the RAM accompanied by a setting change, it is possible to make it difficult to determine that a setting change has been made.

FIG. 2-6(f) shows the conditions for ending the general power support state (specific gaming state).
In the general power support state of support A, the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game will be 10 times, the total number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game will be 15 times, or The general power support state will now end when one of the following conditions is met: win A is derived 3 times, small win B is derived once, or small win B is derived once. ing. Similarly, for support B and support C, the general power support state ends by playing the number of games shown in Figure 2-6(f) or by deriving a predetermined number of small wins. It looks like this.

In this way, it is possible to individually determine the number of derivations that serve as the ending condition for each of the multiple types of small wins, so that players are interested not only in the derivation of small wins but also in the types. This can improve the interest of the game.
Further, in support C, the termination condition is 500 derivations for small win A, but it is difficult to achieve this number of derivations. In other words, by setting the number of derivations that serve as the ending condition, it is also possible to set a small winning type such as small winning A in which the ending condition is not substantially satisfied, and small winnings such as small winnings as shown in Figure 2-6(c). Since it is possible to set a variety of ending conditions that are not limited only to the distribution rate of the winning type, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
First, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be explained. FIG. 2-7 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in this embodiment.
The gaming states include a normal gaming state ST1, a first special gaming state ST2 based on the first special result (big hit), a second special gaming state ST3 based on the second special result (small hit), and a specific gaming state ST.
4. There is a remaining pending digestion state ST5.
In each game state, there is a performance mode that is controlled by the performance control device 300 and determines the performance mode of the game, a main starting area that is the starting area that should be aimed mainly in the game state, and a type of special figure fluctuation display game that should be mainly executed. A certain main variable special figure and the firing direction of the game ball are determined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the starting winning hole 36 by hitting the left hand, and it is possible to aim to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 by hitting the right. In other words, it is possible for the player to select the target starting area according to his/her will. In addition, each game state is designed with the assumption that the game will be played mainly in either the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, and the player will play the game according to this design. As the game progresses, it is constructed so that it is more advantageous for the player to play the game mainly with one of the special figure variable display games that is determined to be the main one in the design. In addition, in this specification, one special figure variation display game determined as the main one in each gaming state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the normal game state ST1, there is no general power support that improves the open time per unit time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 and makes it easier to win, and shortens the variable time of the special figure variable display game and the regular figure variable display game. There is no shortage of time. The main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, and the main starting area is the starting winning hole 36, and in order to aim at this starting winning hole 36, the firing direction is set to the left. Furthermore, the performance mode that defines the performance mode is a normal stage.

The first special game state ST2 is a state in which there is no general electricity support and no time saving. In addition, the performance mode that defines the performance mode is the jackpot mode. In this first special game state ST2, the special variable winning device 38 is opened, so that the firing direction is set to the right.
In the second special game state ST3, power supply support and time saving may or may not be provided depending on the situation at the time of deriving the small hit. Basically, the state at the time of the small hit derivation is carried over, but when the small win is derived when the end conditions of the specific game state ST4 are met, the small win becomes a small hit.Due to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game, the general power support and time saving will end. Therefore, in this case, there will be no general electricity support or time saving. In addition, the performance mode that defines the performance mode is the small hit mode. In this second special game state ST3, the special variable winning device 38 is opened, so that the firing direction is set to the right.

The specific gaming state ST4 is a state that stays for a specified number of games after the first special gaming state ST2, and there is a general power support that improves the open time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 and makes winning easier. state.
If you have public power support, you can also save time by shortening the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game. In addition, the main variable special figure is a special figure 2 variable display game, and the main starting area is the normal variable prize winning device 37.
In order to aim at this normal variable winning device 37, the firing direction is set to the right. The specific gaming state ST4 is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state ST1 because it mainly executes the special symbol 2 variable display game in which there is general power support and small wins occur frequently. It is what you do.

The remaining pending state ST5 is a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory remaining when the specific game state ST4 ends can be executed.
In this remaining pending state ST5, there is no general power support, but there is a time saving that shortens the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display game. Since there is no power supply support, the firing direction is set to be left-handed so as to aim at the starting prize opening 36, but since it is a short period following the specific game state ST4, there is no need to clearly instruct left-handed firing. . Further, the average of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game in the remaining pending consumption state ST5 is shorter than the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display game in the specific game state ST4.
The remaining hold consumption state ST5 mainly executes the special symbol 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory that mainly occurs in the specific game state ST4, so it is a state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST1. It is a state.

The transition of the gaming state is the derivation of the first special result (big hit), the derivation of the second special result (small hit),
This is done by deriving the support hit, ending the first special game state, ending the second special game state, playing the specified number of games, and reaching the ceiling.
When a jackpot is achieved in the normal gaming state ST1, the game shifts to a first special gaming state ST2. After the first special game state ST2 ends, the state is such that there is general electricity support and time saving for a period until the conditions shown in FIG. 2-6(f) are satisfied, and the state shifts to the specific game state ST4.
When a jackpot is achieved in the specific gaming state ST4 or the remaining pending state ST5, the game also moves to the first special gaming state ST2, and then changes to the specific gaming state ST4.
Furthermore, if the support is won or the ceiling is reached, the game enters the specific game state ST4 without passing through the first special game state ST2.

In the specific game state ST4, the normal power supply support makes it easier for game balls to win in the normal variable winning device 37, so that the second starting memory can be generated, and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed. If the conditions shown in Figure 2-6(f) are satisfied in this specific gaming state ST4, the general power support ends, and if there is a remaining hold that is the second start memory that occurred in the specific gaming state ST4, the remaining hold is The game enters the digested state ST5, and if there is no remaining reservation, the state shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the second starting memory is given priority over the first starting memory, but especially when a jackpot is achieved in the normal gaming state ST1, the second starting memory remains immediately after the start of the specific gaming state ST4. There is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game will be executed based on the first starting memory. This makes it possible to secure time for accumulating the second startup memory. In particular, specific gaming state S
The fluctuation time of the first special figure fluctuation display game at T4 is set to be a longer fluctuation time (for example, 100 s) than the second and subsequent fluctuation times, so that time for accumulating the second starting memory can be secured. ing.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 2-6(f), when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in the specific gaming state ST4, the specified time is 5 games longer than when only the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. It becomes possible to stay in the gaming state ST4. This number of times is greater than the upper limit number of 4 for the first starting memory, and even if the special figure 1 variable display game is executed based on the first starting memory remaining at the start of the specific game state ST4, it is disadvantageous for the player. It won't happen.

It is possible to stay in the remaining pending state ST5 until the special symbol 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory, which is the remaining pending, ends. In this remaining pending consumption state ST5, the specific game state ST
It is designed to perform a series of performances that are continuous with 4. After the remaining reservation consumption state ST5 ends, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1.

If a small win occurs in the normal gaming state ST1, specific gaming state ST4, or remaining hold extinguishment state ST5, a transition is made to the second special gaming state ST3.
If a game ball flows into a specific area in the second special gaming state ST3 (V winning), the first
A transition is made to the special gaming state ST2. When game balls flow into the special variable winning device 38, there is a possibility that they may flow into a specific area, and it is advantageous for the player to play many special figure 2 variable display games with a high probability of small winnings. Become. The probability of the game ball flowing into the specific area is determined by operating a lever member provided inside the special variable prize winning device 38 that can control the inflow of game balls into the specific area using a lever solenoid 38f. Control is performed by switching between a state where the inflow of game balls into a specific area is allowed and a state where the inflow of game balls into a specific area is disabled.

Further, if the game ball does not flow into the specific area in the second special gaming state ST3, the state shifts to the specific gaming state ST4, the remaining reservation extinguishing state ST5, or the normal gaming state ST1.
If the end condition of the specific gaming state ST4 is not satisfied, the process moves to the specific gaming state ST4. In addition, if the termination condition of the specific gaming state ST4 is satisfied and there is a remaining hold that is the second starting memory that occurred in the specific gaming state ST4, the state shifts to the remaining holding extinguishing state ST5. Also,
If the end conditions of the specific gaming state ST4 are satisfied and there is no remaining reservation, the game shifts to the normal gaming state ST1.

Control of a gaming machine that plays such a game will be explained below. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be explained. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of the main processing shown in FIGS. 2-8 and 2-9, and the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 2-10, which is performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. The main processing starts when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in Figures 2-8 and 2-9, the process of disabling interrupts (step Stack pointer setting processing (step X2) is performed to set a stack pointer that is the start address of the stack pointer. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (eg, D register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h or 01h as the upper one, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and firing of game balls is prohibited.

Thereafter, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and processing for setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, the game control device
A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from 00 to start normally.
is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the gaming control device 100 starts up first and sends a command to the sub-control device before the sub-control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) starts up, the sub-control device can avoid missing commands. That is, when the game control device 100 turns on the power, there is a predetermined delay for starting the main control means (the game control device 100) and waiting for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the performance control device 300, etc.). It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

Furthermore, the power-on delay timer measures time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (such as a RAM area or register that is not subject to validity determination). Thereby, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (step X8), and if a power outage has occurred (step wait until it is blocked.
Specifically, in step Determine if there is. If the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the set number of checks. If the power failure monitoring signal does not remain on for the number of checks, the process returns to determining whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, if the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of times of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54, which will be described later. In this way, by determining that a power outage has occurred if the power outage monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power outage due to noise, etc., and to appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power outage monitoring means that monitors the occurrence of a power outage during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power outage that occurs during a period in which the startup of the game control device 100 serving as the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the memory contents from the previous power cut are still retained, so backup processing will be performed in the event of a power outage. There's no need. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden on control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if a power outage has not occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10).
If the timer value is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power outage has occurred (step X8). Furthermore, if the timer value is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, if the waiting time has ended,
Access to readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM is permitted (step X11), and off data is output (set to no output state) to all output ports (step X12).

Next, set the serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) (step X13), and A process (step X14) of activating a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the clock generator 111 (clock generator) is performed. Note that the CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator within the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113.
11A is provided with a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that provides a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to a random number generation circuit.
Next, a RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, the RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM, regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure test area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure test area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X16), and if it is normal (step X16; Y),
Power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) where the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal
(Step X17). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), checksum calculation processing (step It is determined whether the checksums match (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y)
Since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20) and the process moves to step X21.

Further, if it is determined that the check data in the power outage inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), and if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step X19; N), step Based on the state read in step X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the on state (step X21). If at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (step device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). When the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), a main abnormal error notification command is sent to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag set here is the probability setting flag that was set before the power outage occurred. In other words, if the power to the gaming machine is cut off and restarted while changing the probability setting value,
Since the operation of the gaming control device 100 is stopped, the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X25). After that, output the ON data of the security signal and output the OFF data of the signals other than the security signal (step X26).
, return to step X25.

Furthermore, if both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the on state (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). Then, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step
;N), a probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). This shifts to probability setting value change mode. Thereafter, a command for changing the probability setting is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X30), and the process moves to step X31. The production control device 300 controls the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, and the speaker 1 based on receiving the command for changing the probability setting.
A notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is made by outputting audio from 9a and 19b.
On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), a process of clearing the probability setting value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the probability setting value area in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes "setting 1." After that, step X29,
After processing X30, the process moves to step X31.

Further, if at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (steps X22; N and ;N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the on state based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). If the setting key switch 152 is not in the on state (step X35; N
), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

When it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the on state (step X43; N)
That is, if both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the OFF state, the process moves to step X41 to perform processing in the case of normal recovery from a power outage.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the on state (step
;Y), the process moves to step X44 and initialization processing is performed. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 constitutes an initialization operation section that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation section. act as a means of change.

Further, when the setting key switch 152 is in the on state (step X35; Y), a probability setting confirmation flag is set (step X36). This shifts to probability setting value confirmation mode. After that, the command for checking the probability setting is sent to the production control board (production control device 300)
(Step X37). In the production control device 300, based on receiving the command for checking the probability setting, the display on the display device 41, the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 are changed.
, the operation of the board presentation device 44, the output of audio from the speakers 19a and 19b, etc.
Notify that the probability setting value is being confirmed.

Then, in order to guarantee output of the security signal for 50 msec or more, a value corresponding to 128 msec is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change/confirmation process (step It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, 12
If the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 8 m seconds, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. In other words, even if the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 m seconds, the security signal will not be output for 128 m seconds after transitioning to the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode. Ru. Note that the value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 msec. However, after switching to probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode,
Since it is necessary to output a security signal for 0 msec, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 msec or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33). In step X33, the determination is not made based on the state read in step ). If it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the off state, the probability setting value is determined.
If the setting key switch 152 is not in the off state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (step Returning, if a power outage has occurred (step X34; Y), the process moves to step X55. If it is determined that a power outage has occurred in step In step X23, it is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, if the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33; Y), a process for prohibiting interrupts (step X38) is performed. From the time the interrupt is enabled (step It will be done. In the timer interrupt processing, probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X122), which is processing regarding probability setting values, is performed. In other words, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability setting value is completed (or until a power outage occurs).
Next, a command to end the notification is sent to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X39). In the production control device 300, based on receiving the notification end command,
The notification in progress (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification that the probability setting value is being confirmed) is ended.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, if the probability setting checking flag is set. is the area to be initialized (e.g. power outage inspection area,
A power outage recovery process (step X41) is performed in which the initial value at the time of power outage recovery is saved in the checksum area and the area related to error/fraud monitoring. The probability setting confirmation flag is cleared in step X41.
Thereafter, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X42), and the process moves to step X47. In the case of this embodiment, in step Send a command. The command for specifying the screen is when both Tokuzu 1 and Tokuzu 2 are in normal processing (described later), that is, when they are waiting for a customer and are not in the execution of the Tokuzu variable display game and are not in a special game state. Sends the command for the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise sends the command for the recovery screen. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high probability number information command or the like may also be transmitted.

On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). In step Instead, the RAM area for game control (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared in step X44. Note that in step X44,
You may or may not clear the stack area and unused area.

Then, save the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (step X45)
. The areas to be initialized here are the customer waiting demonstration area and the area related to the setting of the presentation mode. Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X46). In the case of this embodiment, in step A demonstration screen is displayed, and a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization using light and sound for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands,
It also transmits a performance number information command and a support number information command, which is information on the number of executions of the special symbol variable display game with public power support.

Next, a process of activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. A bit transposition pattern is a method of replacing the bit arrangement of extracted random numbers (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). This is a pattern that determines the By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken, and the secrecy of the random number can be improved. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Alternatively, the settings may be set arbitrarily by the user.

After that, the specified registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on.
The initial value (start) of the corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the special pattern random number that determines the winning pattern of the special pattern, the random number that determines the winning pattern of the regular pattern (hit random number)) value) in a predetermined area of RWM (step X48), and then enables interrupts (step
49). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, so this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to obtain illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, initial value random number updating processing (step X50) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number, special symbol random number, and hit random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or faster than the CPU operating clock, and the special symbol random number and hit random number are the same as the timer interrupt processing, which is the processing unit of the program. The CTC output that becomes the period (
This is a "low speed counter" that is updated based on a CTC (CTC2) that is different from the CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing. In addition, for the special pattern random numbers and the hit random numbers, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the starting value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random numbers go around. Note that each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter type by +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random type in which all values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the special pattern random number and hit random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.
In addition, in this embodiment, since there is no random number (winning pattern random number) that determines the winning pattern of the normal pattern, there is only one type of winning pattern of the normal pattern, but by providing a winning pattern random number, the winning pattern of the normal pattern may be selected from among multiple types.

After the initial value random number update processing in step X50, processing to disable interrupts (step X51)
and performs performance display editing processing (step X52). After performing processing to permit interrupts (step X53), it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (step X54), and if a power outage has not occurred (step (Step X5
Return to 0). That is, when a power outage has not occurred, initial value random number updating processing, performance display editing processing, and power outage monitoring are repeatedly performed. By enabling interrupts (step X49) before the initial value random number update process (step It is possible to avoid stressing the interrupt processing by having to wait for the initial value random number update processing.

Note that the initial value random number update processing at step In order to avoid random number update processing from being executed, when performing initial value random number update processing in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts before updating and canceling interrupts.
If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in this embodiment, but only in the main process, there will be no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage that main processing is simplified.

On the other hand, if a power outage has occurred (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting off data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57).
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58).
Furthermore, after performing checksum calculation processing (step
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step X61), the game waits until the gaming machine is powered off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power failure, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power failure has been correctly backed up. This can be determined at the time of re-input.

From the above, there is a main control means (gaming control device 100) that controls games in an integrated manner, and slave control means (payout control device 200, performance control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. ), the main control means includes a standby means (game control device) that sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the start-up of the main control means and waiting for the start-up of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100), and a power outage monitoring means (gaming control device 100) that monitors the occurrence of a power outage during the predetermined standby time.
Furthermore, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power outage monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power outage, and the power outage monitoring means (gaming control device 100) , it is determined that a power outage has occurred if the power outage monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (gaming control device 100) includes a RAM 111C that can store data,
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit.
A gaming control device 100) is provided, and the operating state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.
In addition, the main control means (gaming control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started at predetermined intervals. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 2-10 is started.

When timer interrupt processing starts, register bank 1 is specified (step X1).
01). Switching to register bank 1 is equivalent to register saving processing in which the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in main processing) is transferred to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (eg, D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same process as step X4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step X103) is performed to receive inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, to read the status of each input port.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and if the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y), , probability setting change/confirmation process (step X122)
and completes the timer interrupt processing.
On the other hand, if both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirmation flag are not set (step Output processing (step X105) is performed to control the drive of actuators such as the solenoid 38f and general electric solenoid 37c). Note that when a firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main process, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the dispensing control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the firing permission signal is the first signal indicating the firing permission state as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (firing permission signal) indicating the firing permission state as seen from the payout control device is also a payout control signal. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two firing permission signals are output to the firing control device, and when both of them are permission to fire, the game ball is configured to be in a state where it can be fired.

Next, a payout command sending process (step
Random number update processing 2 (step X108) is performed. In the random number update process 1 (step X107), the initial values (start values) of the special symbol random numbers and hit random numbers that are the targets of the initial value random number update process are updated. After that, it is monitored whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a, setting the prize ball, and adjusting the front frame and glass frame. Winning port switch/state monitoring processing (step X109
)I do.

Next, it is determined whether abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that in the special variable winning device 38, the number of game balls ejected from the special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball ejection port switch 38e) 38 (the number of game balls detected by the big prize opening switch 38a). Note that if abnormal discharge is occurring, an abnormal discharge flag is set. If abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process moves to step X116. In other words, the game is prevented from proceeding.

On the other hand, if abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), special pattern game processing (step X114) and performs segment LED editing processing (step X115) that drives the segment LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 that display the special figure fluctuation display game and various information related to the game to display desired content. conduct.

Next, a magnet fraud monitoring process (step X116) in which the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 is checked to determine whether there is an abnormality, and a process to check the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality. board radio wave fraud monitoring processing (step Abnormal discharge monitoring processing (step X119) is performed. Furthermore, external information editing processing (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and performance display monitor control processing (step X121) for controlling the performance display device 153 are performed, and the timer interrupt processing is ended. do.

In this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (i.e., the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (i.e., the process of designating register bank 0) are performed on interrupt returns. (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines may require an instruction to execute a process for restoring an interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring register bank designation.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (step X112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be explained. In the special figure game process, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 3
It monitors the input of 7a, controls the entire processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game, and sets the display of special figures.

As shown in FIG. 2-11, in the special figure game process, first, starting port switch monitoring processing (step A1) is performed to monitor winnings of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a. In the starting port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 37 that serves as the starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as jackpot random numbers) are extracted and a special prize based on the winning is extracted. A game result preliminary determination is performed to determine the game result based on winnings in advance at a stage before the start of the figure variation display game.

Next, the big prize opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning a prize opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball in the big winning a prize opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed. Then, a specific area switch monitoring process is performed to monitor the detection of game balls in the specific area 38h (step A3).

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step A4). Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A5). The value of the special figure game processing timer is “
0" (step A5; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already expired, register the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. is set (step A6), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the table (step A7).
Then, a subroutine call is made in accordance with the special figure game processing number (step A8).

In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of variation of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the setting of the variation during the special figure variation display game are performed. Special figure normal processing (step A9) is performed to set information necessary for processing.
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "1", special figure fluctuation processing is performed to set the stop display time of the special figure and the information necessary to perform the process during special figure display. (Step A
10).

In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variable display game is a jackpot, fanfare commands are set according to the type of jackpot, and the jackpot for each jackpot is set. Special figure display processing (step A11) that sets the fanfare time according to the opening pattern and the information necessary to perform the fanfare/interval processing.
)I do.

In step A8, if the special drawing game processing number is "3", set the opening time of the grand prize opening, update the number of openings, and set the information necessary to perform the process during the opening of the grand prize opening. Fanfare/interval processing (step A12) is performed.
In step A8, if the special drawing game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if it is the final round, an ending command is set, or a jackpot remaining slot is set. A big prize opening opening process (step A13) is performed to set information necessary for performing ball processing.

In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is the final round, the processing to set the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be ejected and the jackpot end processing are performed. Big winning hole remaining ball processing (step A14) that sets the information necessary for the process.
I do.
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "6", a jackpot end process (step A15) is performed in which information necessary for performing the special figure normal process is set.

In step A8, if the special game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small winning process. Small win fanfare processing (step A16) is performed to set necessary information.
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hit process (step A
17).
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "9", there is a process to set the time for the remaining balls that won in the big prize opening to be discharged during the small hit process, and a small hit end process. A small hit remaining ball process (step A18) is performed to set the information necessary to perform the process.
In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "10", a small hit end process (step A19) is performed in which information necessary for performing the special figure normal process is set.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A
20) Perform a symbol fluctuation control process (step A21) related to controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special symbol 1 display 51. After preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 display 52 (step A22), a symbol fluctuation control process related to controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special symbol 2 display 52 is performed (step A23). . Thereafter, a lever solenoid control process (step A24) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed, and the special figure game process is ended. On the other hand, in step A5, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A5;
N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process moves to step A20 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common process performed in the above-mentioned starting port switch monitoring process will be explained. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input to the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

As shown in FIG. 2-12, in the special figure starting switch common process, first, information regarding the number of winnings to the monitored starting opening switch of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is transmitted to the gaming machine. Loads the starting port signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external management device of No. 10 (step A131), updates the loaded value by +1 (step A132), and determines whether the output count overflows (step A131). Step A133). If the output count does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM starting port signal output count area (step A134), and the process moves to step A135. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process moves to step A135. In this embodiment, values from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. If the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by updating by +1, and it is determined that the number of outputs has overflowed.

Next, out of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether the number of special symbols pending (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch is less than the upper limit value (step A135). If the number of reserved special drawings to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N
) ends the special figure starting port switch common processing.

In addition, if the number of reserved special figures to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of reserved special figures to be updated (the number of reserved special figures 1 or the number of reserved special figures 2) is updated by +1 ( Step A13
6) Save the target starting opening winning flag (step A137). Next, calculate the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the monitored start switch and the number of reserved special drawings (step A138), and save the jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process to the RWM jackpot random number storage area. (Step A139).

Next, extract the special symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored and prepare it (Step A1
40), save in the RWM special pattern random number storage area (step A141).
Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A145), and special figure reservation information determination processing (step A146) is performed.
Next, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting gate switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations (step A147), perform production command setting processing (step A148),
Finish the special figure starting port switch common processing.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the starting area of the starting prize opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, and extracts a predetermined random number, which becomes the right to execute the variable display game. It constitutes a start-up storage means that stores a predetermined number of items as a memory. In addition, the starting storage means (gaming control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on winnings of game balls in the first starting winning hole (starting winning hole 36) up to a predetermined number as the first starting memory. Various random numbers are memorized and extracted based on winnings of game balls to the second starting prize opening (normal variable winning device 37).
A predetermined number is stored as a second startup memory up to an upper limit.

[Special figure reservation information determination process]
Next, special figure reservation information determination processing (step A14) in the above-mentioned starting gate switch common processing
6) will be explained in detail. The special figure pending information determination process is a prefetch process that determines result-related information corresponding to the corresponding starting memory before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding starting memory.

As shown in FIG. 2-13, first, a jackpot determination process (step A154) is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. Then, if the determination result is a jackpot (step A155; Y), set a jackpot special symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (step A156), and step The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number prepared in A140 is acquired (step A157), and the process moves to step A168.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a jackpot (step A155; N), a small hit determination process (step A159) is performed to determine whether or not it is a small hit based on whether the jackpot random value matches the small hit determination value. conduct. Then, when the judgment result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a special symbol random number check table for small hit is set (step A161), and prepared in step A140 of the special symbol start switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (step A162), and the process moves to step A168.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), a support hit determination process (
Step A163) is performed. Then, if the determination result is not a support hit (step A164
;N) sets the stop symbol information of a miss (step A167), and moves to the process of step A168.
In addition, when the determination result is a support hit (step A164; Y), a special symbol random number check table for support hit is set (step A165), and prepared in step A140 of the special symbol start opening switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (step A166), and the process moves to step A168.

Then, a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and performance command setting processing is performed (step A169). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A170) is performed to set special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, and a variation pattern setting process is performed to set a variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step A170). A171).
Thereafter, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to a first half variation number indicating a first half variation pattern and a second half variation number indicating a second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A172), and production command setting processing is performed. (Step A173), the special figure reservation information determination process is ended. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A170 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A171 are similar to the process executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure normal process.

Through the above processing, a pre-read symbol command containing the result of the special pattern variation display game based on the starting memory of the pre-read target and a pre-reading variation pattern command containing information on the variation pattern in the special pattern variation display game based on the starting memory are prepared. and transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (pre-reading result) of the result-related information (whether it is a jackpot or not and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory is controlled in advance before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, and in particular, by changing the decorative special symbol start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result-related information is provided to the player before the start timing of the special symbol variation display game. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting memory means (game controlling device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (for example, whether or not it will result in a special result). etc.) serves as a preliminary determination means. Furthermore, the timing to determine in advance the random value stored corresponding to the starting memory is not only at the time of starting winning when the starting memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be explained. As shown in FIG. 2-14, in the special figure normal process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 pending number (second starting memory number) is "0" (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 pending number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 pending number (first starting memory number) is "0" (step A305). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings 1 is "0" (step A305; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (step A309), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (step A309;N) sets a customer waiting demonstration flag in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A311), and a production command setting process (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A313), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A314). Then, the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316).
), the special figure normal processing ends. That is, when the special figure fluctuation display game can be started but the starting conditions are not met, the production control device 300 issues a customer waiting demonstration command that is waiting information.
It will be sent to you.
On the other hand, in step A309, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A309;
Y) moves to the process of step A313 without performing the processes of steps A310 to A312.

Also, in step A301, if the number of reserved special drawings 2 is not "0" (step A301;
N) prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the number of special figures 2 reservation (step A302
). Next, the production command setting process (step A303) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (
Step A304) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.
In addition, in step A305, if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is not "0" (step A305;
N) prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations (step A306
). Next, the production command setting process (step A307) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (
Step A308) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A308) in the above-mentioned special figure normal process will be explained. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 2-15(a), first, a special symbol 1 variation flag indicating the type of special symbol variation display game to be executed (here, special symbol 1) is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321). . Next, loss information and jackpot information are set in jackpot flag 1 for determining whether the first special figure fluctuation display game is a jackpot by determining the jackpot random number, and the first special figure fluctuation display game is A process of setting loss information and small hit information in the small hit flag to determine whether it is a small hit or not, and a support hit to determine whether the first special symbol fluctuation display game is a support hit or not. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) is performed to set losing information and support hit information to the flag.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information)
323), special figure information setting processing (step A324) is performed to set special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern. As parameters, the game state, the number of pending games, the stopped symbol pattern number, the remaining number of general power support times, etc. are used. Next, a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table is prepared, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set (step A325).
). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) is performed to set a variation pattern that is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, and a variation start information setting process is performed to set information on the start of variation in the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure fluctuation processing is set as the processing number (step A328).
, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal related to the start of variation of special symbol 1 (for example, special symbol 1 fluctuating signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1 display 5
Set the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the flashing cycle timer (step A33).
3). Next, the initial value (here "0") is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure normal process will be explained. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is similar to the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 2-15(a). This is done for the 2-start memory.

As shown in FIG. 2-15(b), first, a special symbol 2 variation flag indicating the type of special symbol variation display game to be executed (here, special symbol 2) is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341). . Next, loss information and jackpot information are set in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether the second special figure fluctuation display game is a jackpot by determining the jackpot random number, and the second special figure fluctuation display game is A process of setting loss information and small hit information in the small hit flag to determine whether it is a small hit or not, and a support hit to determine whether the second special symbol fluctuation display game is a support hit or not. A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed to set losing information and support hit information to the flag.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information)
343), special figure information setting processing (step A344) is performed to set special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern. As parameters, the game state, the number of pending games, the stopped symbol pattern number, the remaining number of general power support times, etc. are used. Next, a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table is prepared, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set (step A345).
). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) is performed to set a variation pattern that is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, and a variation start information setting process is performed to set information on the start of variation in the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure fluctuation processing is set as the processing number (step A348).
, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal related to the start of variation of special symbol 2 (for example, special symbol 2 fluctuating signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2 display 5
Set the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the flashing cycle timer (Step A35).
3). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a special figure variable display game execution control means that executes the special figure variable display game based on the starting memory stored in the starting memory means. The special figure fluctuation display game execution control means executes the first special figure fluctuation display game as the special figure fluctuation display game based on the first start memory, and executes the second special figure change display game as the special figure change display game based on the second start memory. A figure fluctuation display game will be executed.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 2-16 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of this embodiment.
In this special pattern 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A431), and if it is a jackpot (step A431; Y), the special pattern 1 special pattern random number storage area (reserved number Load the special pattern random number from 1) (step A432). Next, special map 1
A jackpot symbol table is set (step A433), and a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A434). This process selects the jackpot type.

After that, a special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A435), and a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 display 51) and the halt symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437), the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is obtained, and the time reduction judgment data is obtained. The area is saved (step A438), and production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting a variation pattern scenario, which is information regarding the execution mode of the special gaming state, the performance mode after the special gaming state ends, and the transition of the variable selection table group after the special gaming state ends. . Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A455).

On the other hand, if the jackpot 1 flag is not a jackpot (step A431; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A440), and if it is a small hit (step A44).
0; Y) loads the special pattern random number from the special pattern 1 special pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A441). Next, set the special figure 1 small winning symbol table (step A442).
, acquire the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number and save it in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A443). Through this process, the type of small win is selected. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A444), the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A445), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A444). Prepare the corresponding decorative special command (Step A)
455).

In addition, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A440; N), it is determined whether the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (step A446), and if it is a support hit (step A44).
6; Y) loads the special pattern random number from the special pattern 1 special pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step A447). Next, set the symbol table per special figure support (step A448
), acquires the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number and saves it in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A449). This process selects the support type.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A450), and the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction judgment data area (step A450). Step A451), the production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A452), and a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A455).
In addition, if the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (step A446; N), the stop symbol number at the time of miss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A453), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. (Step A454), and prepare a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (Step A455). With the above processing,
A stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is set.

After that, save the decorative special figure command in the decorative special figure command area (step A456),
Performance command setting processing (step A457) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the production control device 300. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (step A458), clear the special symbol 1 special symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (step A459), The special figure 1 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 2-17 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of this embodiment. Note that the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, but is performed for the special figure 2.
In this special pattern 2 stop pattern setting process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A471), and if it is a jackpot (step A471; Y), the special pattern 2 special pattern random number storage area (reserved number Load the special symbol random number from (for 1) (step A472). Next, special map 2
A jackpot symbol table is set (step A473), and a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A474). This process selects the jackpot type.

After that, the special figure 2 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A475), and the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A476). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 2 display 52) and the halt symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A477), the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction judgment data is obtained. The area is saved (step A478), and production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and probability state is saved (step A479). These pieces of information are for setting a variation pattern scenario, which is information regarding the execution mode of the special gaming state, the performance mode after the special gaming state ends, and the transition of the variable selection table group after the special gaming state ends. . Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A495).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A471; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A480), and if it is a small hit (step A48
0; Y) loads the special pattern random number from the special pattern 2 special pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A481). Next, set the special pattern 2 small winning symbol table (step A482).
, acquire the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number and save it in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A483). Through this process, the type of small win is selected. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A484), the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A485), and the stop symbol pattern is saved. Prepare the corresponding decorative special command (Step A)
495).

Further, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A480; N), it is determined whether the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A486), and if it is a support hit (step A48
6; Y) loads the special pattern random number from the special pattern 2 special pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A487). Next, set the special pattern 2 support symbol table (step A488
), acquires the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number and saves it in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A489). This process selects the support type.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A490), and the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the time reduction judgment data area (step A490). Step A491), saves production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A492), and prepares a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A495).
In addition, if the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (step A486; N), the stop symbol number at the time of miss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A493), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. (Step A494), and prepare a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (Step A495). Through the above processing,
A stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is set.

After that, save the decorative special figure command in the decorative special figure command area (step A496),
Performance command setting processing (step A497) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the production control device 300. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (step A498), clear the special symbol 2 special symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (step A499), The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process ends.
In this way, when setting the stop symbols for each result, by using a common special symbol random number regardless of the result, the types of random numbers required can be reduced, and the specifications and programs of the gaming machine can be simplified. This reduces the burden of control.

[Special figure fluctuation processing]
FIG. 2-18 shows the special symbol fluctuation processing (step A10) in the special symbol game processing of this embodiment.
In this special symbol fluctuation processing, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag is prepared (step A601), and production command setting processing (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special pattern game processing timer area (step A604). That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a stop display time setting means for setting a stop display time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Next, it is determined whether general electricity support is in progress (step A605), and if general electricity support is not in progress (step A605; N), the process moves to step A612. In addition, if general electricity support is in progress (step A605; Y), it is determined whether it is a change in special map 1 (step A6
06).
If it is a variation of special figure 1 (step A606; Y), the process moves to step A609.
In addition, if it is not the change of special figure 1 (step A606; N), update the time reduction variation number 2 in the time reduction variation number 2 area by -1 (step A607), and check whether the time reduction variation number 2 has become 0. Determination is made (step A608).

When the number of time reduction fluctuations 2 is 0 (step A608; Y), a time reduction end setting process is performed to end general electricity support (step A611), and the process moves to step A612. Furthermore, if the time reduction variation number 2 is not 0 (step A608; N), the time reduction variation number 1 in the time reduction variation number 1 area is updated by -1 (step A509), and the time reduction variation number 1 becomes 0. It is determined whether the height is high (step A610).
If the time reduction variation number 1 is 0 (step A610; Y), a time reduction end setting process is performed to end general power support (step A611), and the process moves to step A612. Further, if the time reduction variation number 1 is not 0 (step A610; N), step A6
12.

In other words, in the case of the special figure 1 variation display game, only the time reduction variation number 1 is subtracted, and the special figure 2
In the case of a variable display game, both the time reduction variation number 1 and the time reduction variation number 2 are subtracted.
Then, when either the time reduction variation number 1 or the time reduction variation number 2 becomes 0, the general electricity support is terminated.

After performing the production mode information check process (step A612), it is determined whether the remaining pending consumption state has ended (step A613). Here, the term "remaining hold extinguished state has ended" includes not only the case where the termination condition of the remaining hold extinguished state ST5 is satisfied, but also the case where there is no remaining hold at the end of the specific gaming state ST4.
If the remaining pending consumption state has not ended (step A613; N), step A616
to move to. Further, when the remaining pending consumption state has ended (step A613; Y), it is determined whether the result is a failure (step A614).
If the result is not a failure (step A614; N), the process moves to step A616.
If the result is a failure (step A614; Y), a signal regarding time-saving termination (for example,
The jackpot 2 signal is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A615), and the process moves to step A616.

In step A616, "2" related to the process during special figure display is set as the process number (step A616), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A61).
7). Furthermore, a signal related to the end of the variation of special symbol 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuating signal is turned off)
) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A618), and a signal related to the end of variation of special symbol 2 (for example, turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A619). A control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) is saved in the symbol confirmation number signal control timer area related to the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game to be output to the external information terminal (step A620). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the stoppage of fluctuation on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A621 ), as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the stoppage of fluctuation on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A622), the special figure changing process ends.

[Time-saving end setting process]
FIG. 2-19 shows the time saving end setting process (step A611) in the special figure fluctuation process. In this time saving end setting process, first, signals related to the end of time saving (for example, special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal OFF, special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, normal Symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, normal electric accessory 1 opening extension state signal OFF) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A632).

Next, save the number with no time saving in the game state display number area (step A633), and save the low probability of low probability & no time saving flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A63).
4) Save the special pattern low probability & no time saving flag in the special pattern game mode flag area (step A635).
Then, the time reduction variation number 1 area is cleared (step A636), and the time reduction variation number 2 area is cleared (step A637). In addition, the number of derivations set for each type of small win, which is a condition for ending the specific gaming state ST4, is cleared, and the counter that adds up the number of derivations for each type of small win in the specific gaming state ST4 is cleared to 0. It's okay.
Thereafter, a signal related to the left-handed batting instruction (for example, firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A638), and a right-handed batting indication LED (for example, the first
In order to turn off the gaming state display section 56a), the number indicating the left-handed game is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A639), and the normal base state information is saved in the normal base state determination area (step A640). ), the time reduction variation number update process ends.

[Special figure display processing]
2-20 and 2-21 show the special figure displaying process (step A11) in the special figure game process of this embodiment.
In this special figure display process, first, the support hit flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the support hit flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A701). , clears the support hit flag 1 area and the support hit flag 2 area of RWM (step A702).
Next, the small hit flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the small hit flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A703), and the small win flag 1 area of the RWM is loaded. and clears the small hit flag 2 area (step A704).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A705), and the jackpot flag 1 area and the jackpot flag of the RWM are loaded. 2 areas are cleared (step A706). Then, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A707), and if it is a jackpot (step A707; Y), it is a jackpot of the second special pattern fluctuation display game (special pattern 2 jackpot).
Test signals related to the start of (for example, condition device operation signal turned ON, accessory continuous operation device operation signal turned ON, special symbol 2 hit signal turned ON) are saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A710). ), a round number upper limit value table is set (step A711).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A707; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A708), and if it is a jackpot (step A708; Y), the first special Test signals related to the start of the jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) in the figure fluctuation display game (for example, turning on the condition device operation signal, turning on the accessory continuous operation device operation signal, and turning on the special symbol 1 hit signal) of the RWM. Save it in the test signal output data area (step A
709), and sets a round number upper limit value table (step A711).

Next, the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of this embodiment, “1
0" or "5") and save it in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A7).
12). Next, obtain the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information, and
It is saved in the round LED pointer area of the WM (step A713).

Next, a decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM and prepared (step A714), and a production command setting process (step A715) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command related to information that sets the probability of a winning result in the regular pattern fluctuation display game and the special pattern fluctuation display game to a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A716), and a production command setting process is performed. (Step A717) is performed. Next, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A718), and the production command setting process (step A719). This fanfare command constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the performance control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the big winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the regular symbol fluctuation display game and the special symbol fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A720). In the case of this embodiment, in step A720, the jackpot 2 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are saved as signals corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the probability state. In addition, each ON/OFF is determined by the big prize opening opening information and the probability state. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is O if it is a jackpot with a ball coming out (the jackpot opening information is other than jackpot opening information 1).
N, jackpot with no balls coming out (so-called sudden jackpot, etc.) Big winning opening opening information is Big winning opening opening information 1
), it will be ON if there is a jackpot in the time saving state, and OFF otherwise.
Further, the jackpot 3 signal is turned ON when it is a jackpot with a ball being rolled out, and turned OFF when it is a jackpot with no balls put out. In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, all jackpots have a payout.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the general pattern fluctuation display game and the special pattern fluctuation display game is set (step A721).
), the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A722). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A723). As a result, information on the probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the production mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, clear the area of the number of illegal winnings of the big winning hole of the big winning hole that corresponds to the big winning hole opening information (
Step A724), a flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area of the big winning opening corresponding to the big winning opening opening information (step A725). Thereafter, the fanfare/interval processing transition setting process 1 (step A726) for transitioning to the fanfare/interval processing is performed, and the special figure display processing is ended. That is, a special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variable prize winning device 38 into an open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variable display game or the second special figure variable display game. It constitutes a special game state generating means that generates a state.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A708; N), it is determined whether the probability state of the special symbol variation display game is a high probability state (step A727). In the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the special symbol probability is always constant, it is determined that it is not always in a high probability state (step A
727; N), it is determined whether there is a ceiling reached flag (step A728).
If there is a flag indicating that the ceiling has been reached (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A732 without performing processing related to starting general power support based on reaching the ceiling. The ceiling reached flag is set based on reaching the ceiling, and is cleared based on the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereby, when general power support is started based on reaching the ceiling, it is possible to prevent general power support based on reaching a new ceiling from being started until after the jackpot has passed.

If there is no ceiling reached flag (step A728; N), the value of the ceiling counter area is updated by +1 (step A729), and it is determined whether the ceiling has been reached (step A730).
If the ceiling has not been reached (step A730; N), the process moves to step A732.
If the ceiling has been reached (step A730; Y), the ceiling time reduction activation flag and the ceiling reached flag are set (step A731), and the process moves to step A732.

In step A732, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A732), and if it is a small hit (step A732; Y), it is determined that the small hit of the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure Turn on the test signal (for example, the special symbol 2-bit win signal) regarding the start of the 2-bit win)
) in the RWM test signal output data area (step A735), and step A7
36.
Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A732; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A733), and if it is a small hit (step A733; Y). saves the test signal (for example, turning on the special symbol 1 small hit signal) related to the start of the small hit (special symbol 1 small win) of the first special symbol fluctuation display game in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A734), the process moves to step A736.

Next, it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state (step A
736). In the game machine of this embodiment, since the special figure probability is always constant, it is determined that the probability is not always high (step A736; N), and the decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area and prepared ( Step A737) and effect command setting processing (step A738) are performed. Next, a small win fanfare command is prepared (step A739), an effect command setting process (step A740) is performed, and the process moves to step A741. This small win fanfare command also constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the performance control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Then, it is determined whether general electricity support is in progress (step A741), and if general electricity support is not in progress (step A741; N), small win fanfare medium process transition setting process (for transitioning to small win fanfare medium process) ( Step A746) is performed to end the special figure display process.
In addition, if general electricity support is in progress (step A741; Y), the number of derivations for each type of small win is accumulated (step A742), and it is determined whether the termination condition for general electricity support is satisfied (step A743). . The number of derivations accumulated for each type of small win is determined by the specific gaming state ST4.
It is cleared to 0 at the start of ST4, and the accumulation is continued until the end of the specific game state ST4.

If the general electricity support termination condition is not satisfied (step A743; N), the process of step A746 is performed and the special figure display process is ended. Furthermore, if the conditions for ending general electricity support are met (step A743; Y), a time-saving termination setting process is performed to terminate general electricity support (step A744), and a signal regarding the time-saving termination is sent to the external information output data area. It is saved (step A745), and the process of step A746 is performed to end the special figure display process. As a result, the specific game state ST4 comes to end when the number of small wins derived satisfies the condition shown in FIG. 2-6(f).

On the other hand, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A733; N), it is determined whether there is a ceiling time saving activation flag (step A751). If there is a ceiling time reduction activation flag (step A751; Y), the initial value of the ceiling time reduction number is saved in time reduction variation number area 1 and time reduction variation number area 2 (step A752), and the support operation setting process (step A756) is performed. ).
Here, 505 is saved as an end condition based on the total number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game in the time reduction variation number area 1, and the special figure 2 variation display is saved in the time reduction variation number area 2. Save 500 as an end condition based on the number of times the game has been executed. Further, the number of derivations serving as an end condition for each type of small win is set, and a counter for accumulating the number of derivations for each type of small win is cleared to zero.

Further, if there is no ceiling time saving activation flag (step A751; N), it is determined whether the loaded support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A753). If it is not a support hit (step A753; N), it is determined whether the loaded support hit flag 1 indicates a support hit (step A754). If it is not a support hit (step A754; N), a special figure normal process transition setting process (step A757) for moving to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure displaying process is ended.

On the other hand, if the support hit flag 2 indicates a support hit (step A753; Y) or if the support hit flag 1 indicates a support hit (step A754; Y), the initial value corresponding to the time reduction judgment data is changed to the time reduction variation. Save in number area 1 and time reduction variation number area 2 (step A
755), the process moves to support operation setting processing (step A756).
Here, 20 is saved as an end condition based on the total number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game in the time reduction variation number area 1, and the special figure 2 variation display is saved in the time reduction variation number area 2. 15 is saved as the termination condition based on the number of times the game has been executed. Further, the number of derivations serving as an end condition for each type of small win is set, and a counter for accumulating the number of times of derivation for each type of small win is cleared to zero.
After carrying out the support operation setting process (step A756), a special figure normal process transition setting process (step A757) for moving to the special figure normal process is carried out, and the special figure displaying process is ended.

In the above process, the determination of whether or not the ceiling has been reached is made at the end of the special figure fluctuation display game (steps A727 to A731), and the special figure fluctuation display game in which winning the support and reaching the ceiling are the same. If this occurs, conditions for ending the specific gaming state ST4 are set based on reaching the ceiling (steps A751 to A756).

It is rare for reaching the ceiling and winning a support prize to occur in the same special symbol variable display game, and it would be a waste of control to always check this at the start of the special symbol variable display game. Therefore, by implementing the present embodiment, such wasteful processing becomes unnecessary, and the control at the start of the special figure variation display game can be simplified.

In addition, if you set a specific fluctuation pattern or result format based on winning the support or reaching the ceiling, if the winning of the support and reaching the ceiling occur in the same special pattern fluctuation display game, In this special figure variation display game, the variation pattern and result mode based on the support hit are selected at the start, but the specific game state ST4 is given at the end of the special figure variation display game.
The ending condition is not based on hitting the support, but on reaching the ceiling.
While the variation pattern and result mode are selected according to the support hit, there is a contradiction that the end condition of the given specific game state ST4 is based on reaching the ceiling. Since there is no change in the transition to state ST4, the player will not feel dissatisfied. In particular, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the ending condition based on reaching the ceiling is more advantageous for the player, so the player will not be dissatisfied.

If there is enough control at the start of the special figure variation display game, it is determined at the start of the special figure variation display game whether reaching the ceiling and winning the support hit occur in the same special figure variation display game. You can do it like this. If reaching the ceiling and winning a support prize occur in the same special figure variation display game, the variation pattern or result pattern of the special figure variation display game may be different from the one corresponding to the missed result or the one corresponding to reaching the ceiling. By making it a thing, you can avoid contradictions. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, such a contradiction does not occur because a specific fluctuation pattern or result pattern is not set based on hitting a support or reaching a ceiling.

[Fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 2-22 shows the fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1 (step A726) in the above-described special figure display process. In this fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1, first, "3", which is the process number related to the fanfare/interval process, is set (step A791), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A792).

Next, save the signals related to the start of the jackpot (special gaming state) (for example, turn on the jackpot 1 signal (output for jackpot + small hit), turn on the jackpot 4 signal (output for jackpot)) in the external information output data area. (Step A793), signals related to the end of high probability & time saving (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, special symbol 2 Save the fluctuation time reduction state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal OFF, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal OFF) in the test signal output data area. (Step A794). After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step A795), and the number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A79).
6) Save the normal pattern low probability & no time saving flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A797).

Then, the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the high probability is set in order to turn off the gaming state display LED (for example, the third gaming state display section 56c) provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. The notification flag area is cleared (step A799), and the special pattern low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special pattern game mode flag area (step A800). Next, save the probability information command (low probability) in the power outage recovery transmission command area that saves the command output to the production control device 300 when the power outage is restored (step A801), and display special figure fluctuations that can be executed in a time-saving state. The time reduction variation number 1 area and the time reduction variation number 2 area for managing the number of games are cleared (steps A802 and A803). This ends the general power support and time saving state. Furthermore, the ceiling counter area is cleared (step A80).
4) Clear the ceiling time reduction activation flag area (step A805), and clear the ceiling reached flag area (step A806). In addition, the number of derivations set for each type of small win, which is a condition for ending the specific gaming state ST4, is cleared, and the counter that adds up the number of derivations for each type of small win in the specific gaming state ST4 is cleared to 0. It's okay.

After that, save the number of production mode 1 in the production mode number area (step A807),
Clear the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A808) and save the no-update code in the next mode transition information area (step A809). Then, the signal related to the right-handed batting instruction (for example, firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A810).
), in order to light up the right-handed game display LED (for example, the first game status display section 56a), the number indicating the right-handed game status is saved in the game status display number 2 area (step A811), and during the fanfare/interval. The process transition setting process 1 ends.

[Support operation processing]
FIG. 2-23 shows the support activation process (step A756) in the above-described special figure display process.
In this support operation setting process, first, a signal related to the start of time saving (for example, jackpot 2 signal and jackpot 3 signal are turned on) is saved in the external information output data area (step A821). Next, the timer initial value is saved in the time saving signal control timer area (step A822). Here, 128 ms is saved as the timer initial value. As a result, among the signals related to the start of time saving, the three jackpot signals are output for only a short time.

Next, turn on the signal related to the start of time reduction (for example, turn on the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal,
Special symbol 2 Turn on the fluctuation time shortening state signal, Normal symbol 1 Turn on the high probability state signal, Normal symbol 1
The fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned ON and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned ON) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A823).

Furthermore, the number with time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A824), and the high probability of normal drawings & flag with time saving is saved in the normal drawing gate mode flag area (step A82).
5) In order to maintain the probability state flag and make it possible to save time, a special figure time-saving flag is synthesized in the special figure game mode flag area (step A826).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed hitting instruction (for example, firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A827), and the right-handed hitting indication LED (for example, the first game status display section 56a) is turned on. In order to turn on the light, the number in the right-handed game state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A828). Then, a performance mode information address table is set (step A829), and the address of the table corresponding to the performance mode transition information set at the start of variation (when setting a stop symbol) is acquired (step A830). By acquiring the address of the corresponding table based on the performance mode transition information, a variable pattern scenario, which is information regarding the transition of the variable selection table group, is also acquired.

Next, as a process for saving information necessary for managing the production mode in the game control device 100, first, the production mode number of the production mode that will be set after the end of the special symbol fluctuation display game that has won the support is acquired. , is saved in the production mode number area (step A831). Furthermore, the number of remaining rotations of the performance of the production mode set after the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that became a support hit is acquired, and is saved in the effect remaining rotation number area (step A832), and the special figure that became a support hit is obtained. The next mode transition information of the production mode set after the end of the variable display game is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A833). Based on the information saved here, the production mode and variable selection table group will change based on running the special figure variable display game a predetermined number of times after the end of the special figure variable display game that won the support. .

After that, prepare a probability information command corresponding to the production mode number (step A834),
The command is saved in the power outage recovery transmission command area (step A835), and the production command setting process (step A836) is performed. Next, a production rotation number command corresponding to the newly set production remaining rotation number is prepared (step A837), a production command setting process (step A838) is performed, and a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number is prepared. After preparation (step A839), production command setting processing (step A840) is performed.
Then, the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A841), the production mode transition information area is cleared (step A842), and the support operation setting process is ended.

[Jackpot end process]
FIG. 2-24 shows the jackpot end process (step A15) in the special figure game process of this embodiment.
In this jackpot end process, first, the signal related to the start of time saving (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is
N) in the external information output data area (step A901). Since the signal regarding the start of time saving is output during the jackpot, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area. Next, signals related to the start of low probability & time saving (for example, turn on the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, turn on the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal, and turn on the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal
N, Normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is ON, Normal electric accessories 1 open extension state signal is ON)
is saved in the test signal output data area (step A902).

Next, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step A903), and save the high probability of high probability & time saving flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A90).
4) Save the special figure time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A90)
5). Thereafter, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area (step A906). Here, initial values corresponding to the end conditions are saved in the time reduction variation number 1 area and the time reduction variation number 2 area. Further, the number of derivations serving as an end condition for each type of small win is set, and a counter for accumulating the number of derivations for each type of small win is cleared to zero. Through the above processing, after the special game state ends, the general power support state and time saving state are entered. In addition, by setting the initial value of the number of time-saving fluctuations and the number of derivation times that are the end conditions for each type of small hit in the time-saving fluctuation number area, you can execute the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times and derive the small hit a predetermined number of times. The general power support state and time saving state will end. That is, the game control device 100,
After the end of the special gaming state, for a predetermined period of time, a specific gaming state generation control means is provided that can generate a specific gaming state (time saving state, general power support state) that puts the normal variable winning device 37 in a state where it is easy to win a prize. Eggplant.

After that, save the probability information command in the power outage recovery transmission command area (step A9).
10) Perform production command setting processing (step A911). Here, as probability information commands, there are a plurality of commands that further include information on the production mode in either "with time saving" or "without time saving". Next, a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number 1 is prepared (step A914), and a production command setting process (step A915) is performed.

Next, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A918), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A917).
After that, signals related to the end of the jackpot (for example, jackpot 1 signal OFF, jackpot 3 signal OFF, jackpot 4 signal OFF) are saved in the external information output data area (step A9).
18), Signals related to the end of the jackpot (for example, turn off the condition device operation signal, turn off the accessory continuous operation device operation signal, turn off the special symbol 1 hit signal, turn off the special symbol 2 hit signal
) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A919). Next, the information in the probability fluctuation determination data area is cleared (step A920), the information in the round LED pointer area indicating the number of rounds of jackpot is cleared (step A921), and the information in the performance mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A922). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A923), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A924), and the jackpot termination process is ended.

[Specific area switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 2-25 shows the specific area switch monitoring process (step A3) in the special figure game process. In this specific area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether a small hit is occurring (step A41). The term "during a small hit" here refers to a period during which small hit processing and small hit remaining ball processing are performed. If this small hit is not occurring (step A41; N), the specific area switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the specific area switch 38d is valid only during the period when the small hit process and the small hit remaining ball process are being performed. Further, if a small hit is in progress (step A41; Y), it is determined whether the condition device is in operation (step A42).

If the conditional device is in operation (step A42; Y), the specific area switch monitoring process ends. If the conditional device is not in operation (step A42; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43). If there is no input to the specific area switch (step A43; N), the specific area switch monitoring process ends. If there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43; Y), a specific area pass flag is set (step A44), and the specific area switch monitoring process is ended. Later, based on the presence of this specific area passage flag, processing for generating a first special game state will be performed.

[Small hit remaining ball processing]
FIG. 2-26 shows the small hit remaining ball process (step A18) in the special figure game process. In this small hit remaining ball process, first, it is determined whether a remaining ball error is occurring (step A861). If a remaining ball error is occurring (step A861; Y), the process moves to step A863. If a remaining ball error is not occurring (step A861; N), it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A862; N), the small winning remaining ball process is ended. Moreover, when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862; Y), the process for ending the small winning from step A863 is performed.

That is, the process for ending the small win is performed after all remaining balls in the special variable winning device 38 are ejected. However, if there is a remaining ball error in which the ejection cannot be confirmed even after a predetermined time has passed since the last game ball entered the special variable prize winning device 38, it is assumed that the time required for ejection has passed and the The process moves on to end the win. Of course, if there is a remaining ball error, the process may not proceed to end the small hit. Therefore, the process of step A861 may not be performed.

In the process for ending the small hit, first, it is determined whether the specific area has been passed (step A863). When the game ball enters and passes through the specific area 38h, the specific area switch 3
8d, and a specific area passing flag is set. Here, it is determined whether or not a specific area has been passed based on the presence or absence of this specific area passing flag. If the specific area has been passed (step A863; Y), the process moves to step A870 and a process for generating a special gaming state is performed. Further, if there is no passing through the specific area (step A863; N), the process moves to step A864 to end the second special game state and perform processing to enable execution of the special figure fluctuation display game.

In the process for ending the second special game state after step A864 and making it possible to execute the special figure fluctuation display game, 10, which is related to the small hit ending process, is set as the process number (step A
864), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A865). Next, save the small winning ending time in the special figure game processing timer area (step A866).
, Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the University of Japan winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (Step A
867). Then, the large winning opening count area is cleared (step A868), the small winning control pointer area is cleared (step A869), and the small winning remaining ball processing is completed.

On the other hand, if the specific area is passed (step A863; Y) and the process of generating the first special game state after step A870 is to be performed, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area and prepared (step A870), Performance command setting processing is performed (step A871).
Next, a V jackpot fanfare command is prepared (step A872), and production command setting processing is performed (step A873).

After that, save the signal regarding the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) in the external information output data area (
Step A874), the test signal regarding the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 2 hit signal is ON) is output to the test signal output data area. (Step A875).

Then, save the jackpot number in the gaming status display number area (step A876), set the round number upper limit value table (step A877), and set the round number upper limit value (5 or 10) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information. ) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area (step A878). Furthermore, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step A879), and the initial value (here, 1) is saved in the round number area (step A880). The upper limit for the number of rounds is set to 5 or 10 rounds, but since the small winning action corresponds to the 1st round, by setting 1 as the initial number of rounds, the upper limit for the number of rounds will be 4 rounds or 9 rounds in the special game state. We are trying to make sure that the number of people is released.

Thereafter, 3, which corresponds to the fanfare/interval process, is set as the process number (step A881), and saved in the special figure game process number area (step A882). moreover,
Save the V jackpot fanfare time in the special game processing timer area (step A883
), performs the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (step A884),
The process moves to step A868.

[Small winning end processing]
FIG. 2-27 shows the small hit ending process (step A19) in the special figure game process of this embodiment.
In this small hit ending process, first, it is determined whether general electricity support is in progress (step A93).
1). If general electricity support is in progress (step A931; Y), the process moves to step A937. If general power is not supported (step A931; N), save the signal related to the left-handed firing instruction (for example, turn off firing position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (step A932), and turn on the right-handed firing indication LED. In order to turn off the light (for example, the first gaming state display section 56a), the number in the left-handed playing state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A933).
), the process moves to step A937.

Next, it is determined whether there is a ceiling time reduction activation flag (step A937). If there is no ceiling time reduction activation flag (step A937; N), the process moves to step A940. If there is a ceiling time reduction activation flag (step A937; Y), the initial value of the ceiling time reduction number is saved in the time reduction variation number 1 area and the time reduction variation number 2 area (step A938). Here, 505 is set as the number 1 of time reduction fluctuations in the number 1 area of time reduction fluctuations, and 500 is set as the number 2 of time reduction fluctuations in the number 2 area of time reduction fluctuations. Further, the number of derivations serving as an end condition for each type of small win is set, and a counter for accumulating the number of derivations for each type of small win is cleared to zero.
Then, support operation setting processing is performed (step A939), and the process moves to step A940.

Thereafter, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A940), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A941).
Furthermore, a signal regarding the end of the small hit (for example, turning off the special symbol 1 small hit signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A942), and a signal regarding the end of the small winning (for example, turning off the special symbol 1 small winning signal, Special symbol 2 small hit signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A943).
Subsequently, the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A944), the performance mode transition information area is cleared (step A945), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A946), the small winning ending process is ended.

Next, control by the production control device 300 will be explained. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the production control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 2-28 and a timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 2-28, in the main processing, the processing at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3) and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program from steps C1 to C7, loop processing is performed as main loop processing. In this loop process, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, an input signal (
A production button input process (step C9) is performed to create input information from the rising edge). Reading of inputs from the production button 25 and cross key 29 is performed within the timer interrupt process, and in this production button input process, processing for changing the content of the production, etc. is performed when there is an input from the production button 25 or cross key 29. .

Then, you can set the range of changes such as the brightness of the LED and LCD, the volume, etc., and the LED
A hall/player setting mode process is performed in which operations such as changing the screen, brightness of the liquid crystal display, and volume are accepted (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game.

Next, a received command check process (step C12) is performed to analyze and respond to the command from the gaming control device 100, and a performance display editing process (step C13) is performed to edit settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the performance. ) to set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the content to be drawn, and finally the drawing data is set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn is prepared within 0 seconds (approximately 33.3 milliseconds), the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether it is frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds), a V blank interrupt (1/6
0 second) is entered twice, it is determined that it is frame switching timing. Note that the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) at 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frame switching) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. (switching) may also be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process in step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of audio from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and controls the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 including the panel decoration device 46 and the display board 350, etc. Decoration control processing (step C18), movable body control processing (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoids of the board presentation device 44, and board presentation setting processing (step C20) for controlling presentation are performed to clear the WDT. The process returns to step C8.

[Received command check processing]
FIG. 2-29 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this received command check process, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of commands received (step C201), It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of commands received is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. Further, if it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of commands received (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204).
), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether the copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206).
In this way, in this embodiment, commands are not directly analyzed in the received command buffer;
The content of the received command buffer is copied to a command area (RAM area for analysis), and command analysis is performed in the command area. As a result, in case a command is sent from the gaming control device 100 while the command is being analyzed, the command (data)
You can move it to make room. In addition, command analysis can be performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copying of commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. Furthermore, if it is determined that the copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands equal to the number of received commands has been completed (step C210). Then, if it is determined that the analysis of commands for the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N),
The process returns to step C207. Further, if it is determined that the analysis of commands equal to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is ended. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are analyzed all at once. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 2-30 shows the received command analysis process in the above-mentioned received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated into MODE and the lower byte is separated into ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). If it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

Further, if it is determined in step C232 and step C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C2
34;N), the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
In step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of variable commands (step C235). The variation command is a command that instructs the variation pattern of the special figure. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of variable commands (step C235
;Y), variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Also, if it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of variable commands (
In step C235;N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237). The jackpot commands are commands that command operations related to the jackpot performance (such as displaying a fanfare screen and round screen), and commands that command operations related to the small win performance (displaying the fanfare screen and end screen, etc.). And M.O.
When it is determined that DE is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237; Y), jackpot command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Further, when it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of symbol commands (step C239). The symbol-related command is a command that instructs information regarding the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to use as the stop symbol of the special symbol). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of symbol-related commands (step C239; Y), symbol-related command processing (
Step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

In addition, if it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol-related commands (
In step C239;N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as pending number commands and error commands (step C241). Single-shot commands are commands that stand alone, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands. These single-shot commands include a customer waiting demonstration command, a pending number command, a pattern stop command, a probability information command, an error/invalidity command, and a model specification command. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C24
1; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Also, if it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (
In step C241;N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (step C243; Y), the prefetch symbol type command processing (step C2
44) to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of prefetch symbol-related commands (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch variable commands (step C245). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the read-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), read-ahead variable command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends. Also, in step C245,
When it is determined that MODE is not within the range of look-ahead variable commands (step C245; N)
Then, the received command analysis process ends.

Note that the prefetch variation type command and the prefetch symbol type command are commands that include information necessary to execute the prefetch effect. A look-ahead performance (also called a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice performance) is whether or not a special figure change display game will be a jackpot when the special figure change display game corresponding to the starting memory (pending) where the special figure change display game has not yet been executed is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of the fluctuation pattern (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined degree of reliability, the display device 41 may display a decorative special symbol start memory display in a different manner from normal. This is a performance such as displaying a performance display on the screen. The prefetching commands (prefetching variation commands and prefetching symbol commands) are commands that notify in advance the fluctuation patterns and stop symbols corresponding to the starting memory that is the target of the prefetching effect, and are sent from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the production control device 300. Note that normal variable commands and symbol-related commands that are not pre-reading are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 at the start of the special figure variable display game.

Next, the effects of the game will be explained.
FIG. 2-31 shows an example of the performance on the normal stage in the normal game state ST1. Although the display contents are basically the same in other game states, it is also possible to not display some of the display contents depending on the game state. Further, the player can determine whether the normal gaming state ST1 or each other gaming state is present based on the displayed content.

As shown in FIG. 2-31(a), in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a first decorative game display section 81 for displaying a first decorative game among the decorative special figure variable display games is provided. In the first decorative game display section 81, the identification information is displayed in a variable manner in each of the variable display areas of the left variable display area 81a, the middle variable display area 81b, and the right variable display area 81c, and then stopped and displayed, thereby displaying the decorative special figure variable. Show games.

At the upper right of the display area of the display device 41, a second decorative game display section 82 for displaying a second decorative game of the decorative special figure variable display games is provided. Similarly to the first decorative game displayed on the first decorative game display section 81, the second decorative game displayed on the second decorative game display section 82 has identification information in each of the left area, middle area, and right area. After displaying the variable, stop and display the result. The second decorative game display section 82 displays identification information (small symbols) that is relatively smaller than the identification information (large symbols) displayed on the first decorative game display section 81 .

Further, at the lower right part of the display area of the display device 41, a standby memory display section 83 is provided that displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory.
The standby memory display section 83 displays decorative special figure starting memory displays corresponding to the first starting memory and the second starting memory. In the normal game state ST1, since the game mainly proceeds with the special figure fluctuation display game based on the first start memory, the standby memory display section 83 displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory.
The decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the standby memory display section 83 has a one-to-one correspondence with the starting memory, and the leftmost decorative special figure starting memory display is the decorative special figure corresponding to the starting memory stored first. They are displayed in the order of memory so that they are displayed as a starting memory display, and each time they are used, they shift to the left. In addition, in the standby memory display section 83, there is a decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory (first starting memory) which is the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game, and the right to execute the special figure 2 variable display game. It is also possible to display both the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory (second starting memory).
Furthermore, in the standby memory display section 83, the pre-read results such as the result of the special figure variation display game and the variation pattern based on the starting memory can be suggested by the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory. It is possible.

On the left side of the standby memory display section 83, there is provided an active memory display section 84 that displays information regarding the starting memory corresponding to the special symbol variation display game that is currently being executed. The decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is transferred to the running memory display unit 84 at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game. Furthermore, in the running memory display section 84, the result or variation pattern of the special figure variation display game currently being executed can be suggested by the display mode of the running memory display displayed on the running memory display section 84. It is possible.
At the upper left of the display area of the display device 41, there is a first starting memory number display section 85a that displays the first starting memory number (special figure 1 pending number) and a second starting memory number (special figure 2 pending number). A second starting memory number display section 85b for display is provided.

Further, at the upper center of the display area of the display device 41, a game state display 86 indicating the game state is displayed, and here it is shown that the game is in the normal game state ST1.
Further, at the lower left part of the display area, there is provided a number of executions display section 90 that displays the number of times the special symbol variable display game has been executed. This number of executions display section 90 is a display imitating a treasure box, and is capable of giving suggestions or notifications regarding the game when the number of executions of the special figure variable display game reaches a predetermined number of times. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the number of executions is double digits such as "11" and "88", regular numbers such as "123", "345", and "432", "222" and " 3
The predetermined number of times is a set of three such as ``33'' and a complete number such as ``100'' or ``300.'' Of course, the number of times of execution other than this may be set as the predetermined number of times.

In this embodiment, the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game is shown, which is counted starting from the end of the first special game state ST2. The start timing of this counting coincides with the timing to start counting the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in order to manage reaching the ceiling. It is possible to know the number of remaining executions.
Of course, the number of executions of the special figure variation display game from a start timing other than this may be displayed.

When a new special figure fluctuation display game is started, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the waiting memory display section 83 moves to the running memory display section 84, as shown in FIG. 2-31(b). At the same time as the performance is executed, the decorative special figure start memory display located other than the left end of the waiting memory display section 83 moves to the left within the waiting memory display section 83. Furthermore, the numerical value on the first starting memory number display section 85a changes. Further, the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 start varying display of the identification information.

When the predetermined variation time ends, the result mode is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 2-31(c). Here, the result is a failure, and the failure result form is displayed as the result form. If the result is a jackpot or a small win, the corresponding result format will be displayed. Further, if the result is a hit, a losing result is displayed, but a result corresponding to a win may be displayed.
When the predetermined stop display time for displaying the result mode has elapsed, the special figure variation display game ends, and the running memory display displayed on the running memory display section 84 is erased. Further, as the special figure variation display game ends, the number of executions displayed on the execution count display section 90 increases, and here it is shown that the special figure variation display game has been executed 600 times.

After the next special figure variation display game starts as shown in FIG. 2-31(d), the number of execution display section 90 imitating a treasure box opens as shown in FIG. 2-31(e), and An effect is performed in which a suggestion display 93 with the word "play" written on it pops out. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, if the special symbol fluctuation display game is executed 600 times without a jackpot after the end of the first special gaming state, the ceiling is reached and the specific gaming state ST4 is reached. There is. The specific game state ST4 that starts when the ceiling is reached is called a play time, and the arrival at the ceiling is notified by the appearance of a suggestion display 93 with the word "play" indicating this play time. are doing.

Then, as shown in FIG. 2-31(f), a notification display 94 of "Enter play time!!" indicating that the specific game state ST4 based on reaching the ceiling has started is performed, and FIG. 2-31(g) ), a "chance stage" is displayed on the game state display 86 indicating that the game is in the specific game state ST4.
Further, in the specific game state ST4, since the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory is mainly executed, the standby memory display section 83 also displays a display corresponding to the second starting memory. The standby memory display section 83 corresponding to the second start memory is displayed in the same way as the standby memory display section 83 corresponding to the first start memory was displayed in the normal gaming state ST1. Further, the standby memory display section 83 corresponding to the first start memory is displayed in a small size above the standby memory display section 83 corresponding to the second start memory. Note that in the specific game state ST4, the standby memory display section 83 and the running memory display section 84 may not be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 2-31(h), when the special figure variation display game ends, the number of executions displayed on the number of executions display section 90 increases. The number of executions displayed on the number of executions display section 90 continues counting until the next jackpot occurs even if the number of executions reaches the ceiling.
In this way, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the reaching of the ceiling is notified by the execution count display section 90, and the variation pattern and result aspect of the decorative special figure variation display game are not related to whether or not the ceiling is reached. It is assumed that it has been selected. Thereby, there is no need to change the variation pattern or result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game to a specific variation pattern or result mode as the ceiling is reached, and the burden on control can be reduced. Of course, the variation pattern and result format of the decorative special figure variation display game may be a specific variation pattern and result format that indicate reaching the ceiling.

Note that the execution count display section 90 may end the display when the ceiling is reached, and start displaying the display when the first special game state ST2 based on the next jackpot ends. Further, when the ceiling is reached, only the display of the number of executions may be terminated, and the display imitating a treasure box may remain displayed.
Further, the number of executions display section 90 may start displaying at the timing when the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the first special game state ST2 ends. In addition, although the display imitating a treasure box is displayed upon the end of the first special game state ST2, the number of times of execution is not displayed at this point, and the number of times of execution is displayed for a predetermined number of times after the end of the first special game state ST2. The display may be started from the timing when the special figure fluctuation display game is executed.

Further, the execution count display section 90 is not limited to a display imitating a treasure box, but may be any display. The special figure variation display may be a display that changes as the number of executions of the game increases, for example,
As the number of executions of the special figure variation display game increases, the display may gradually swell from a bud and bloom to indicate that the special figure has reached the ceiling. Furthermore, as the number of executions of the special figure variable display game increases, the decoration or color of the treasure box may change to indicate that the treasure box has reached the ceiling.
In addition, the number of executions in the execution number display section 90 is displayed in a count-up manner in which the number of executions increases as the special figure variation display game ends, but the ceiling is reached as the special figure variation display game ends. It is also possible to display a countdown method in which the remaining number of executions until the end of the process decreases.

Furthermore, the notification by the execution count display section 90 as shown in FIG. It can be executed based on a certain number of times.
For example, as shown in FIG. 2-31(i), the notification can be executed based on the number of executions being 111 times, which is a set of three. An effect is performed in which a suggestion display 93 with the characters "SP Reach" written on it pops out, informing that the special figure variation display game being executed will be SP Reach.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 2-31(j), notification can be executed based on the number of executions reaching 123, and here, the execution number display section 90 resembling a treasure box opens, and from inside An effect is performed in which a suggestion display 93 with the words "Very Hot" written on it pops out, and it is announced that the special symbol variation display game being executed has a very high possibility of becoming a jackpot.
Further, the suggestion or notification may be made not for the special figure variation display game that is being executed, but for the starting memory.
The above-mentioned notification can be executed based on the number of executions being a specific number of double digits, sequential numbers, triples, round numbers, etc., but it must be done at a specific number of times. Alternatively, the notification may not be performed even after a specific number of times.

FIG. 2-32 shows another example of suggestion or notification by the execution count display section 90. This example is an example where the notification can be executed regardless of whether the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game is a specific number of times, such as double digits, regular numbers, triples, finished numbers, etc. .
The examples shown in FIGS. 2-32(a) to 2-32(d) are examples in which suggestions or notifications are given regarding the special symbol variation display game that is being executed. As shown in FIG. 2-32(a), the number of executions displayed on the execution number display section 90 is "114", and the number of executions is ``114'', such as double digit, regular, triple, round number, etc. It is not a specific number of times.
In this way, the notification can be executed even if the number of times is not a specific number, and in this case, first, as shown in FIG. Changes to This specific display 92 suggests that a number of executions display section 90 shaped like a treasure box will open and a suggestion or notification will be made. Here, since the special figure variable display game that is being executed is targeted, the memory display during execution has changed to the specific display 92. Then, as shown in FIG. 2-32(c), the execution count display section 90 resembling a treasure box opens, and a suggestion display 93 with the word "Reach" written on it pops out from inside, indicating that it is a reach. This is announced and the reach state is entered as shown in Figure 2-32(d).

The examples shown in FIGS. 2-32(e) to 2-32(h) are examples in which a preliminary determination result regarding starting memory is suggested or notified. As shown in FIG. 2-32(e), the number of executions displayed on the execution number display section 90 is "126", and the number of executions is ``126'', such as double digit, regular, triple, round number, etc. It is not a specific number of times. During the execution of this special figure variable display game, the decorative special figure start memory display of the standby memory display section 83 changes to a specific display 92 imitating a key, as shown in FIG. 2-32(f). The decorative special figure starting memory display that changes to the specific display 92 is a decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory to be suggested or notified.
Then, as shown in FIG. 2-32(g), the execution count display section 90 shaped like a treasure box opens, and a suggestion display 93 with the word "heat" written on it pops out from inside, which is stored in the startup memory. It is notified that there is a starting memory that has a high possibility of becoming a jackpot, and the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display changes as shown in FIG. 2-32(h).

Suggestions or announcements made using the number of executions display section 90 are not limited to those mentioned above, and may include anything such as becoming a jackpot, small hit, or SP reach, or acquiring points or items that can be used in a performance. It may be something. In addition, it may be possible to notify that a support hit will occur, and in this case, the fluctuation pattern and result form of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game will depend on the presence or absence of a support hit, as shown in Figure 2-31. It is also possible to reduce the control burden by making it unnecessary to change the variation pattern and result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game to a specific variation pattern and result mode.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 2-32, the running memory display and decorative special figure starting memory display, which are the targets of notification, are changed to the specific display 92, but the same applies to the example shown in FIG. 2-31. The execution memory display and decorative special figure start memory display to be notified may be changed to the specific display 92 at the same time.
In addition, as shown in Figure 2-31, there is a notification based on the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game reaching a specific number, and as shown in Figure 2-32, the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game. It may be possible to perform both the notification that is performed regardless of whether or not the number of times is a specific number, and the notification that is performed regardless of whether or not the number of times is a specific number, respectively, in one special figure fluctuation display game.
In addition, as shown in Figure 2-31, there is a notification based on the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game reaching a specific number, and as shown in Figure 2-32, the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game. If it is selected to perform both the notification that is performed regardless of whether it is a specific number of times or not in one special figure fluctuation display game, one of the notifications is given priority and Only one of the notifications may be notified. For example, priority may be given to the notification shown in Figure 2-31 because it is a specific number of times, or priority may be given to the notification shown in Figure 2-32, which is performed based on the fact that there is a target to be notified. It's okay.

Further, the suggestion or notification may be made using the number of execution display section 90 not only during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game but also during the execution of the special game state. For example, the conditions for ending the specific gaming state ST4 after the end of the special gaming state may be suggested or announced. Furthermore, in the case of a gaming machine that can control the probability of winning a jackpot at either a high probability or a low probability, the probability after the end of the special gaming state may be suggested or notified.

During execution of the special game state, the number of rounds may be displayed on the execution count display section 90, or the number of game balls acquired may be displayed, and these values become predetermined values. The suggestion display 93 may be made to appear depending on the case, or the suggestion display 93 may be made to appear regardless of the value. In addition, when displaying the number of acquired game balls, the normal game state ST
The number of game balls acquired during the so-called consecutive game period, which is the period from the derivation of the jackpot in step 1 until the return to the normal game state ST1, may be displayed. Further, the number of successive games, which is the number of jackpots in the consecutive game period, may be displayed on the execution count display section 90, and when this value reaches a predetermined value, a suggestion or notification regarding the game may be made.

Furthermore, in the above example, the number-of-execution display section 90 resembling a treasure box opens at a predetermined timing, but the number-of-execution display section 90 resembling a treasure box opens based on the player's operation of the performance button 25 or the like. Suggestion or notification may also be provided. Further, a number-of-executions display section 90 imitating a plurality of treasure chests may be displayed, and a treasure chest to be opened may be selected based on the player's operation of the performance button 25 or the like.

In addition, the number of executions displayed on the execution number display section 90 is the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game from the end of the first special game state ST2, but it is the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game from an arbitrary timing, When this value reaches a predetermined value, a suggestion or notification regarding the game may be made. For example, it may be possible to generate a specific production mode when a predetermined condition is met, and display the number of executions of the special figure variation display game since the start of the production mode.
In addition, instead of the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game, the number of points earned through the performance of the game is displayed on the execution number display section 90, and suggestions or notifications regarding the game are made based on the points reaching a predetermined value. You can also do it. Further, the elapsed time from an arbitrary timing may be displayed on the execution count display section 90, and a suggestion or notification regarding the game may be made based on the elapsed time reaching a predetermined value.

Further, the number of derivations of a specific result pattern from an arbitrary timing may be displayed on the execution number display section 90, and a suggestion or notification regarding the game may be made based on the number of derivations reaching a predetermined value. The specific result may be the number of times a small win is derived, or may be a specific type of small win (for example, small win A). In particular, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the number of derivations that satisfy the end condition is determined for each type of small win in the specific gaming state ST4, and the number of derivations for each type of small win from the start of the specific gaming state ST4 is determined. By displaying the information, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the possibility that the end condition of the specific gaming state ST4 is met.
Regarding small wins, the results of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game are made to differ depending on the type so that the type of small win can be determined. The type of small win derived from the above may be notified. In addition, the result form of the small hit in the decorative special figure variable display game is set as a common result form regardless of the type of small win, and the small win derived from the suggestion display 93 that appears from the execution number display section 90 imitating a treasure box. The type of information may be notified.

In addition, the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed since the start of the specific game state ST4 is displayed on the execution number display section 90, and the possibility that the end condition of the specific game state ST4 is satisfied based on the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed is displayed. It may be made visible to the player. Furthermore, when this value reaches a predetermined value, a suggestion or notification regarding the game may be made.
Further, based on the information from the RTC 338, date and time information may be displayed on the execution count display section 90, and when this value reaches a predetermined value, a suggestion or notification regarding the game may be made.

In addition, as described above, when displaying a value other than the number of executions of the special figure variation display game since the end of the first special gaming state ST2, the special figure variation display game from the end of the first special gaming state ST2 is displayed. The number of executions may also be displayed. In addition, during the period in which a value other than the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game from the end of the first special game state ST2 is displayed, the first
The number of times the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed since the end of the special game state ST2 is not displayed, and the display of values other than the number of times the special figure change display game has been executed since the end of the first special game state ST2 has ended. The display of the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed since the end of the first special game state ST2 may be restarted later.

Figure 2-33 shows another example of a reach-suggestion production that suggests reaching the ceiling.
As shown in FIGS. 2-33(a) and (b), the special figure variable display game is executed, and the remaining number of executions until reaching the ceiling is 50 games. Along with this, a reaching suggestion effect that suggests reaching the ceiling is started from the next special figure variation display game.
In this reaching suggestion performance, first, as shown in FIG. 2-33(c), a notification display 95 is performed to notify that the reaching suggestion performance is starting, and as shown in FIG. 2-33(d), a notification display 95 is displayed in the display area. A status display section 96 indicating the possibility of reaching the ceiling is displayed at the lower right corner.

The status display section 96 can display a smiling face as shown in FIG. 2-33(d) and a skull as shown in FIG. 2-33(e).
The condition for reaching the ceiling is to run the special pattern fluctuation display game a specified number of times without hitting the jackpot, and if a jackpot occurs before running the special pattern fluctuation display game a specified number of times, the accumulated special pattern The number of executions of the variable display game is reset. The status display section 96 indicates whether the ceiling can be reached in a short period of time, and if the special figure variation display game being executed and the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory do not result in a jackpot. teeth,
Since there is a possibility that the player will reach the ceiling soon, a smiling face is displayed because it is advantageous for the player.

In addition, if the special figure variation display game that is currently being executed or the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory becomes a jackpot, the accumulated number of executions of the special figure variation display game will be reset and it will be farther from reaching the ceiling. Therefore, a skull is displayed as a disadvantage to the player.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 2-6, it is more advantageous for the player to hit the jackpot in the specific gaming state ST4 than to hit the jackpot in the normal gaming state ST1, and the player is not far from reaching the ceiling. In this situation, it is better to hit the jackpot after reaching the ceiling than to hit the jackpot before reaching the ceiling, so the skull is displayed because it is disadvantageous for the player to hit the jackpot during this period. It is said that

In addition, as shown in Figure 2-33(f), in a situation where the special figure variation display game in progress and the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory reach the ceiling upon completion, the special figure variation display in progress If it becomes clear from the preliminary determination result that the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game based on the game and starting memory is not a jackpot and reaching the ceiling is confirmed, "Play" is displayed on the status display section 96. It is possible to notify that it has reached the ceiling.
By displaying various displays on the status display section 96 as described above, the interest of the player who is expecting to reach the ceiling is increased.

Further, during execution of the reaching suggestion performance that displays the status display section 96, the player can select the execution mode of the performance by operating the performance button 25 or the like.
In addition to the normal performance execution mode shown in Figure 2-33(d), the execution mode of the effects that can be selected includes the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, as shown in Figure 2-33(g) There is an execution mode in which a series of effect images are displayed for the entire period of the arrival suggestion effect regardless of the stop, etc., or in the effect regardless of the start or stop of the variation of the special figure variation display game, as shown in Figure 2-33 (h). An example of an execution mode is to display a subgame in which usable items are collected.

In the performance execution modes shown in FIGS. 2-33 (g) and (h), the performance display and sub-games are mainly displayed rather than the decorative special figure fluctuation display game, and the execution and results of the special figure fluctuation display game are used in the game. It is designed to prevent people from becoming aware of it. Note that even in the execution mode of the production shown in FIGS. It is possible to grasp the execution status of the special figure fluctuation display game by indicating that the target has been reached.

In normal games, players have expectations for winning the jackpot, so performances that encourage the occurrence of jackpots, such as the generation of reach, are effective performances that increase the expectations of the players. However, in situations where the player is close to reaching the ceiling, the player has expectations that the jackpot will not be hit, so effects that encourage the occurrence of a jackpot, such as the occurrence of reach, will increase the player's sense of anxiety and have the opposite effect. Become. Therefore, by implementing the performance as shown in Figures 2-33 (g) and (h), it is possible to avoid performances that encourage the occurrence of jackpots such as reaching, and to make players feel anxious. By avoiding this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Although the status display section 96 displays a smiling face indicating that the ceiling can be reached and a skull indicating that the ceiling cannot be reached, other displays may be displayed. For example, it may be possible to display one of three or more multiple displays, each indicating a different probability of reaching the ceiling, to suggest the degree of expectation of reaching the ceiling. .
Further, the status display section 96 may provide suggestions or notifications regarding games other than matters related to reaching the ceiling, and the status display section 96 may provide suggestions or notifications regarding games other than matters related to reaching the ceiling. You can also do it.
Further, the suggestion or notification that was performed by the status display section 96 may be performed by the suggestion display 93 that appears from the execution count display section 90.

From the above, a gaming machine that can execute a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is equipped with a performance control means (performance control device 300) that controls the performance of the game, and the performance control means changes as the game progresses. Based on the value reaching a predetermined value, it is possible to make suggestions or notifications regarding the game.
Therefore, as the game progresses, suggestions or notifications regarding the game will be given, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the display means (display device 41) for displaying the effect of the game is provided, and the effect control means is capable of giving a suggestion or notification regarding the game based on the number of times the game has been executed reaching a predetermined number of times. This means that the number of executions can be displayed on the display means.
Therefore, the player can grasp the execution timing of the performance, and can improve the interest of the game.

In addition, there is a game control means (game control device 100) that centrally controls the game, and the right to execute the game is generated by winning a game ball, and the game ball can be in an open state where winning is possible and a closed state where winning is not possible. A variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37) that can be converted into a variable winning device (normal variable winning device 37), and the game control means sets a special gaming state advantageous to the player (first special gaming state ST2 ), and the operating state of the variable winning device is divided into a first state (without power supply support) and a second state (with power supply support) in which it is easier to win a game ball than in the first state. The first state can be changed from the first state to the second state based on the number of times the game has been executed since the end of the special game state reaches a predetermined specific number of times.
The performance control means is capable of displaying the number of times the game has been executed since the end of the special gaming state on the display means, and makes a suggestion or notification regarding the game based on the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number. becomes.
Therefore, various information will be suggested or announced while indicating that the ceiling has been reached.
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the progress of the game in the specific game state ST4 will be explained.
FIG. 2-34(a) shows an example of the progress of the game in the specific game state ST4. In this example, the case where the end condition of the specific gaming state ST4 is support A or support B is shown.
When the release of the special variable prize winning device 38 ends in the first special game state ST2 (t11), the ending period begins (t11-t12), and when the ending period ends, the first special game state ST2 ends and the specific game state ST4 begins. This results in a state where general electricity support is available (t12).
Also, with the end of the first special game state ST2, the special figure variable display game is started (t12), and after a variable time (t12 to t13) in which the identification information is displayed in a variable manner, a stop display time is reached in which the result is stopped and displayed ( t13-t14). When the stop display time ends, the special figure variable display game ends (t14).

Here, the result is a small win A, and the second special game state ST3 is entered as the stop display time ends (t14). This derivation of the small hit A is the first derivation of the small hit A in the specific gaming state ST4, and since it is the first special figure fluctuation display game in the specific gaming state ST4, the specific gaming state S
The termination condition for T4 is not satisfied. In the second special game state ST3 based on the derivation of a small win in which the end condition is not met in this way, the state with general power support, which is the state when the result is derived, is maintained.

In the second special game state ST3, first there is a fanfare period (t14-t15), then there is an open period in which the special variable prize winning device 38 is opened (t15-t16), and there is an ending period (t16-t17). The special game state ST3 ends. Here the second
In the special gaming state ST3, the game ball does not flow into the specific area, and the second special gaming state ST
3, the next special figure fluctuation display game is started (t17).
Also in this special figure variable display game, the variable time (t17 to t1) for displaying the identification information in a variable manner
8) After the stop display time (t18 to t19) in which the results are stopped and displayed, the special figure fluctuation display game ends (t19). Here, the result is a loss, and since this special figure fluctuation display game is the second special figure fluctuation display game in the specific gaming state ST4, the end conditions of the specific gaming state ST4 are not satisfied, and Fuden support The next special figure variation display game is started while the state of presence is maintained (t19).

Also in this special figure fluctuation display game, the fluctuation time (t19 to t2
0), the special figure fluctuation display game ends (t21) after a stop display time (t20 to t21) in which the results are stopped and displayed. Here, the result is a small win A, and as the stop display time ends, the second special game state ST3 is entered (t21 to t24). The derivation of this small win A is in specific gaming state ST4
Since this is the second derivation of the small win A and the third special symbol fluctuation display game in the specific gaming state ST4, the conditions for ending the specific gaming state ST4 are not satisfied. In the second special game state ST3 based on the derivation of a small win in which the end condition is not satisfied, the state with general electricity support, which is the state when the result is derived, is maintained.
Here, the game balls have not flowed into the specific area in the second special game state ST3, and the next special figure fluctuation display game is started with the end of the second special game state ST3 (t24).

In the next special figure variable display game, the special figure variable display game ends (t26) after a variable time (t24 to t25) in which the identification information is displayed in a variable manner and a stop display time (t25 to t26) in which the result is stopped and displayed. Here, the result is a small win A, and the second special game state ST3 is entered as the stop display time ends (t26 to t29). This derivation of the small win A is the third derivation of the small win A in the specific gaming state ST4, and thereby the conditions for ending the specific gaming state ST4 are satisfied.

When a small win is derived that satisfies the end conditions of the specific game state ST4, the general power support ends with the end of the stop display time of the special symbol fluctuation display game (t26).
As a result, the second special game state ST3 based on the small hit will be performed without general power support. Here, the game ball is flowing into the specific area in the second special gaming state ST3, and the first special gaming state ST2 is entered as the second special gaming state ST3 ends (t29).
.

FIG. 2-34(b) shows the operation of the lever solenoid 38f in the second special game state ST3 and the execution mode of the second special game state ST3.
The lever solenoid 38f operates a lever member that can control the inflow of game balls into a specific area, and when the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member opens the specific area to allow the inflow of game balls. When the lever solenoid 38f is OFF, the lever member closes the specific area, making it impossible for game balls to enter.

The upper row shows the first operation mode, which is the operation mode of the second special game state ST3, which is carried out in a state with general power support. In this first operation mode, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on during the fanfare period (t41 to t44) before the special variable prize winning device 38 is opened, and the game ball is allowed to flow into the specific area. (t43-t44). After that, during the opening period in which the special variable winning device 38 is opened (t44 to t46), the lever solenoid 38f is turned off.
The FF state is maintained and the game ball is not allowed to enter the specific area. After the opening period ends, even during the ending period (t46 to t47) after the special variable prize winning device 38 is closed, the lever solenoid 38f is maintained in the OFF state and remains in a state in which it is impossible for game balls to flow into the specific area. , the second special game state ST3 ends.

That is, in the first operation mode, before the special variable winning device 38 is opened, the state in which game balls are allowed to flow into the specific area has ended, and during the opening period when the special variable winning device 38 is released, the specific area is not allowed to flow into the specific area. The game ball will not be able to flow into the player. Therefore, even if the game balls flow into the special variable winning device 38 when the special variable winning device 38 is opened, they cannot flow into the specific area.
It becomes difficult for the first special game state ST3 to occur.

On the other hand, in the second operation mode, which is the operation mode of the second special game state ST3 shown in the lower row, which is carried out in a state without general power support, the fanfare period (t41 to t42) before the special variable winning device 38 is opened. An opening period (t42 to t4) in which the special variable prize winning device 38 is opened after
In 4), the lever solenoid 38f is turned on to allow the game balls to enter the specific area (t43 to t44). After that, the ending period (t44~
t45), the second special game state ST3 ends.
That is, in the second operation mode, the game balls are allowed to flow into the specific area while the special variable winning device 38 is open, so when the game balls flow into the special variable winning device 38, they are allowed to flow into the specific area. There is a possibility that the first special game state ST3 will occur.

In the example of FIG. 2-34(a), in the case of the second special gaming state ST3 based on a small win in which the end condition of the specific gaming state ST4 is not satisfied (t14 to t17, t21 to t24), the second special gaming state ST3 Since this will be carried out in a state with general power support, it will be the first operation mode shown in the upper part of FIG. First, it is difficult to generate the first special game state ST2.
On the other hand, in the case of the second special gaming state ST3 (t26 to t29) based on a small win in which the end condition of the specific gaming state ST4 is satisfied, the second special gaming state ST3 is performed without general power support. Therefore, the second operation mode is shown in the lower part of FIG. 2-34(b), and if a game ball flows into the special variable winning device 38, the game ball can flow into the specific area, and the first special game state ST3 is activated. This may occur.

In this way, the execution mode of the second special game state ST3 is changed depending on the presence or absence of general power support,
By making it possible for the first special gaming state ST3 to occur only when the termination condition of the specific gaming state ST4 is satisfied by deriving the small winning, a specified number of small winnings can be generated in the specific gaming state ST4. It is possible to provide a new game property with the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

Furthermore, by varying the ending conditions of the specific gaming state ST4 that is set thereafter depending on the type of small winning, and by varying the number of times the ending condition is satisfied for each type of small winning in the ending condition of the specific gaming state ST4. , it is possible to differentiate the value of the types of small wins and the termination conditions, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in Figure 2-6(c), the ending conditions of the specific gaming state ST4 given differ depending on the type of small win, with support A being given for small win A and support B being given for small win B. A small win C is given a support C. Supports A to C have different advantages for the player, and small wins A to C have different advantages for the player.

Regarding the ending conditions of the specific gaming state ST4 shown in FIG. 2-6(f), support B is a more advantageous ending condition for the player than support A. Both conditions have the same number of small winnings that the specific gaming state ST4 ends with, but differ in the number of games that can be executed. The larger the number of executable games, the higher the possibility that the specific game state ST4 will end due to the derivation of a small win, so support B is a more advantageous ending condition for the player than support A.
Furthermore, support C is a more advantageous ending condition for the player than support B. Since the number of executable games in support B is not so large, there is a high possibility that the specific game state ST4 will end when the number of executable games reaches the upper limit. However, support C has a very large number of games that can be executed, and in most cases, the special game state ST4 ends due to the derivation of the small win, and there is a high possibility of moving to the first special game state ST2.

Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to end the specific gaming state ST4 by deriving the small win B, which gives support B, than to end the specific gaming state ST4 by deriving small win A, which gives support B. be. Furthermore, it is more advantageous for the player to end the specific gaming state ST4 by deriving a small win C which gives support C than to end the specific gaming state ST4 by deriving a small win C which gives support C. . Note that the most disadvantageous case is when the specific game state ST4 ends because the number of executable games reaches the upper limit.

In the case of support A and support B, the end condition is satisfied when the small hit A is derived three times, the small hit B is derived once, and the small hit C is derived once, so the small hit A to C It is designed so that the termination condition may be satisfied in either case. Further, since the number of games that can be executed is small, the end condition is often satisfied because the number of games reaches the upper limit before the end condition is satisfied by deriving a small win.

On the other hand, in the case of support C, small hit A is derived 500 times, small hit B is derived 10 times,
Since the end condition is made to be satisfied by deriving the small win C once, the end condition is almost never satisfied by deriving the small win A. In addition, since there are many games that can be executed, in most cases, the termination condition is satisfied by deriving a small win before the termination condition is satisfied by the number of games. Therefore, the end condition is substantially satisfied by deriving the small win B or the small win C, and in particular, it is highly likely that the end condition is satisfied by deriving the small win C.
In other words, support C has a higher possibility of ending the specific gaming state ST4 with ending conditions that are more advantageous to the player than supports A and B, and is very advantageous compared to supports A and B.

In this way, by varying the number of small wins that satisfy the ending conditions of the specific gaming state ST4 depending on the type of small winning, the probability of transitioning to the first special gaming state ST2 and the specific game that will be awarded can be adjusted. It is possible to have different termination conditions for the state ST4.
In addition, depending on the number of small wins that are set, it is possible to limit the small wins for which the ending condition is actually met, and for each type of small winning that meets the ending condition, each small winning that is set on the gaming machine. It is possible to create a bias that cannot be achieved only by the selection probabilities of types, thereby increasing the interest of the game. For example, as shown in Figure 2-6(b), the selection probability of the type of small win is the highest for small win A, and decreases in the order of small win B and small win C, but the end condition is support C. Contrary to the order of the selection probabilities mentioned above, the probability of this being realized is the lowest for small win A, and increases in the order of small win B and small hit C, which is opposite to the selection probability of the small win type. Therefore, it is possible to arbitrarily set the probability that the end condition will be satisfied without changing the selection probability itself of the type of small win.

In addition, when the specific game state ST4 ends due to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game reaching the upper limit and becomes the remaining pending consumption state ST5, if a small hit is derived in the remaining pending consumption state ST5. There are two possible cases in which the operation mode in the second special game state ST2 is the first operation mode shown in the upper row of FIG. 2-34(b), and the case where the operation mode is the second operation mode shown in the lower row.

Since the remaining pending state ST5 is a state in which there is no power support, the second operation mode shown in the lower part of Figure 2-34(b) is adopted accordingly, and a small hit is derived in the remaining pending state ST5. It may also be possible to create a possibility of winning a jackpot. In this case, it may be suggested or notified that there is a possibility of a small win based on the preliminary determination result of the second starting memory that will be left pending at the end of the specific gaming state ST4.
Furthermore, the process from the end of the specific game state ST4 to the end of the remaining pending state ST5 may be made a series of effects so that the player is not aware that the state has shifted to the remaining pending state ST5. By doing this, it is possible to create an impression as if a small win has been derived in the specific gaming state ST4, resulting in a jackpot.
Furthermore, by making the last special symbol variation display game in the specific gaming state ST4 and the special symbol variation display game in the remaining pending state ST5 appear as one special symbol variation display game as a series of effects, the special symbol variation display game in the specific gaming state ST4 In the special figure variable display game at the end of , small wins are derived and it is possible to give the impression that a jackpot is likely to occur, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when a small hit is derived in the remaining pending consumption state ST5, the first operation mode shown in the upper part of FIG. Even if it is derived, it may not be a jackpot. In this way, it is possible to facilitate the flow of game balls into the specific area only when the specific gaming state ST4 ends when the ending condition is satisfied due to the derivation of a small hit, and the specific gaming state ST4 It is possible to give value to the occurrence of small wins a specified number of times.

In addition, when the specific gaming state ST4 ends when the number of games that can be executed reaches the upper limit, if the result of the last special figure fluctuation display game in the specific gaming state ST4 is a small win that does not satisfy the ending conditions. , the operation mode in the second special game state ST2 may be the first operation mode shown in the upper row of FIG. 2-34(b), or the second operation mode shown in the lower row.

If the specific game state ST4 ends when the number of games that can be executed reaches the upper limit, the public power support will end with the end of the last special symbol fluctuation display game, so the last special symbol fluctuation display game will be terminated. When a small hit is derived, the second special game state ST3 based on the small win becomes a state in which there is no general power support. Accordingly, the operation mode in the second special game state ST3 may be the second operation mode shown in the lower part of FIG. 2-34(b).
By doing this, if a small hit is derived in the last special figure fluctuation display game, it is possible to have a possibility of a jackpot even if the ending condition based on the number of times the small win is derived is not met, and the specific game It is possible to provide a structure that relieves players who are discouraged by the end of state ST4, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Further, it is also possible to provide a game feature in which a small win is derived in the final special symbol variation display game of the specific game state ST4, resulting in a jackpot.

In the case of such a configuration, instead of setting the ending condition of the specific gaming state ST4 based on the number of small wins derived, the ending condition of the specific gaming state ST4 is set only based on the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game. It's okay. For example, if the only condition for ending the specific gaming state ST4 is to execute the special figure variation display game 100 times, it becomes possible to execute the special figure variation display game 100 times in the specific gaming state ST4. , the first special game state ST2 can be obtained by deriving a small win in the final special figure variable display game, thereby improving the interest of the game.

On the other hand, when the specific game state ST4 ends when the number of executable games reaches the upper limit, the second special game state ST3 is started based on the small hit derived in the last special symbol fluctuation display game. The operation mode may be the first operation mode shown in the upper part of FIG. 2-34(b).
By doing this, it is possible to prevent a jackpot from occurring if the number of times a small win is derived does not satisfy the end condition, and it is possible to give value to satisfying the end condition by the number of times a small win is derived. .

In addition, if the result of the last special figure fluctuation display game in specific gaming state ST4 is a small win that does not meet the ending conditions, the general power support will not end with the end of the last special figure fluctuation display game. , the general power support is provided until the end of the second special game state ST3, and the operation mode of the second special game state ST3 is made to depend on the presence or absence of the general power support, as shown in FIG. 2-34(b). The first operation mode shown in the upper row may be adopted.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2-35, the end timing of the specific game state ST4 is set in two cases: when the end condition is satisfied by the number of executions reaching the upper limit, and when the end condition is satisfied by the number of small wins derived. It may be made to differ.
If the end condition is satisfied when the number of executions reaches the upper limit, the stop display time is changed in the last special figure fluctuation display game (t51 to t53) in the specific game state ST4, as shown in Figure 2-35(a). At the end timing (t53), the general power support is ended and the specific game state ST4 is ended.
In addition, if the termination condition is satisfied based on the number of small wins, as shown in Figure 2-35 (b), even if the special figure fluctuation display game (t61 to t63) that results in a small win ends, the general power support is not available. Then, at the timing (t66) when the second special game state ST2 (t63 to t66) ends, the general power support is ended and the specific game state ST4 is ended.
Furthermore, the operation mode in the second special gaming state ST3 is set depending on the presence or absence of general power support at the start of the second special gaming state ST3, as shown in FIG. 2-34(b).

By doing this, a jackpot can be achieved only when the end condition is satisfied when the number of executions reaches the upper limit, and a small hit is derived in the last special figure fluctuation display game of specific gaming state ST4. It can be given gender. In other words, if you complete the specific gaming state ST4 and derive a small hit at the end, you will win a jackpot, and if the end condition is satisfied depending on the number of times you derive a small win before you complete the specific gaming state ST4, you will not win a jackpot. It is possible to provide a game feature in which the specific game state ST4 ends.

The example shown in FIG. 2-35(c) is an example in which the end condition is satisfied when the number of executions reaches the upper limit, and a small hit is derived in the last special figure fluctuation display game in the specific game state ST4. .
In this example, a special figure variation display game (t71 to t73) is being executed in which the number of executions does not reach the upper limit in the specific game state ST4, and the result of the special figure variation display game is a small win. The derivation of this small hit does not satisfy the termination condition, and the second special game state ST3 (t73 to t76) based on the small win is set to a state with general power support, as shown in the upper row of Figure 2-34(b). This is the first operation mode, and the game ball cannot flow into the specific area, resulting in no jackpot.

After the second special game state ST3 ends, the next special figure variation display game is executed (t76 to t78). This special figure variable display game is a special figure variable display game whose number of executions reaches the upper limit, and with the end of this special figure variable display game, the general electric power support ends and the specific game state ST4 ends (t78). This special figure fluctuation display game results in a small win, and in the second special game state ST3 based on the small win, there is no general power support. In this second special game state ST3, the second operation mode is shown in the lower part of FIG. 2-34(b), and the game ball flows into the specific area and the first special game state is started (t81).
In this way, if the end condition is satisfied when the number of executions reaches the upper limit, and a small hit is derived in the last special figure fluctuation display game of the specific game state ST4, game balls will flow into the specific area. There is a possibility that you will hit the jackpot.

The example shown in FIG. 2-35(d) is an example in which the termination condition is satisfied by deriving a small hit before the number of executions reaches the upper limit.
In this example, a special figure variation display game (t91 to t93) is being executed in which the number of executions does not reach the upper limit in the specific game state ST4, and the result of the special figure variation display game is a small win. The derivation of this small hit does not satisfy the termination condition, and the second special game state ST3 (t93 to t96) based on the small win is set to a state with general power support, and the upper row of FIG. 2-34(b) This is the first operation mode, and the game ball cannot flow into the specific area, resulting in no jackpot.

After the second special game state ST3 ends, the next special figure fluctuation display game is executed (t96 to t98). This special figure variable display game is a special figure variable display game in which the number of executions does not reach the upper limit, and the state with general power support is maintained.
After this special figure variation display game ends, the next special figure variation display game is executed (t98 to t100). This special figure variable display game is a special figure variable display game in which the number of executions does not reach the upper limit, but the result is a small win, and the termination condition is satisfied by deriving this small win. In this case, the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game has not reached the upper limit, so even if the special figure fluctuation display game ends, the state with general power support is maintained, and the second special game state ST3 (from t100 to t103) is executed in a state where general electricity support is available. For this reason, the first operation mode shown in the upper row of FIG. 2-34(b) is achieved, and the game ball cannot flow into the specific area, resulting in no jackpot. Then, with the end of the second special game state ST3, the general power support ends and the specific game state ST4 ends (t103).

In this way, if the termination condition is satisfied by deriving a small hit before the number of executions reaches the upper limit, the specific gaming state ST4 ends without a jackpot. For this reason, the player expects that a small hit will not be derived in the middle of the specific game state ST4, and expects that a small win will be derived in the special figure fluctuation display game where the number of executions of the specific game state ST4 reaches the upper limit. This can increase the interest in small wins and improve the interest of the game.

Even in such a game configuration, it is possible to vary the value of the ending conditions by making the ending conditions different, as shown in FIG. 2-6(f). For example, support A and support B have the same ending condition based on the derivation of the small hit, but since support A has a smaller upper limit on the number of executions, the upper limit on the number of executions before the ending condition is reached due to the derivation of the small hit. There is a high possibility that this will be reached, making this a more favorable exit condition than Support B. In addition, since the upper limit of the number of executions for support A and support B is not so large, it is not very likely that the result of the special figure fluctuation display game will be a jackpot in the specific game state ST4, and the upper limit of the number of executions will be reached. The gameplay is as expected.

In addition, since there is almost no possibility that support C will meet the termination condition by deriving small hit A,
If the small win A is derived, the player feels at ease, but becomes wary of the small win B or C being derived. Furthermore, since the upper limit of the number of executions is large, the possibility of reaching the upper limit is not so high, and there is a high possibility that the specific gaming state ST4 will end by deriving the small win B or the small win C. Therefore, the gameplay is such that a so-called fall occurs in which the specific game state ST4 ends midway, and the player plays the game while being concerned about which will occur first: the occurrence of a fall or the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game becoming a jackpot. This provides a gameplay experience that is different from Support A and Support B.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the execution mode of the second special game state ST3 was made to differ depending on the presence or absence of general power support, but it may be made to differ regardless of the presence or absence of general power support.
For example, the execution mode of the second special game state ST3 may be made to differ depending on the type of small win. The second special gaming state ST3 based on the small winning B has a higher possibility of inflow into the specific area than the second special gaming state ST3 based on the small winning A, and the second special gaming state based on the small winning B The second special gaming state ST3 based on the small win C may have a higher possibility of inflow into the specific area than ST3.

Furthermore, the manner of execution of the second special game state ST3 may be varied depending on the number of times the special symbol variation display game is performed in the specific game state ST4.
When the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in the specific gaming state ST4 is more than the predetermined number of times than when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the specific gaming state ST4 is less than the predetermined number of times, it is possible to move to the specific area. The possibility of inflow may be made high.

Further, in the termination conditions based on the derivation of small wins, all types of small wins constitute termination conditions, but there may be some types of small wins that do not constitute termination conditions. For example, the small win A may not constitute the end condition, and the end condition may not be satisfied no matter how many times the small win A is derived.
Further, in the termination condition based on the derivation of a small win, the number of times a single type of small win is derived is a predetermined number, but the number of times a plurality of types of small wins are derived may be a predetermined number. For example, the end condition may be satisfied by deriving the small win A three times and deriving the small win B once.
Furthermore, the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game and the number of times of derivation of small winnings may be combined as the ending condition. For example, the termination condition may be to derive the small win A three times and to execute the special figure fluctuation display game 20 times. By doing so, the specific game state ST4 is maintained until the special symbol variation display game is executed at least 20 times, and it is possible to prevent jackpots from occurring consecutively in a short period of time.

In addition, in the above explanation, the number of derivations is determined for each of the plurality of types of small wins, and when this is satisfied, the specific gaming state ST4 is ended. However, similar conditions other than the ending conditions of the specific gaming state ST4 can be used.
For example, in the normal gaming state ST1, by deriving the small win A three times, deriving the small win B once, or deriving the small win C once, a preliminary judgment regarding the starting memory is made as a suggestion or notification regarding the game. The results may be suggested or announced. In addition, normal game state ST1
It may be possible to obtain items that can be used in the game by deriving "246" three times, "135" twice, or "456" twice as a failure result. In addition, the number of wins for each of the multiple general winning holes 35 is accumulated, and the general winning hole 3
A specific performance may be executed by satisfying a predetermined number of prizes for every 5.

In other words, for cases where there are multiple types of events that occur, such as the result of small hits, special figure fluctuation display games, and winnings in multiple winning openings, the number of occurrences of some or all of the events is accumulated, and the cumulative result is calculated. Any type of processing may be used as long as it performs the corresponding processing based on satisfying the conditions defined for each type.
Furthermore, the configuration of the gaming machine is not limited to the so-called 1 type + 2 type as described above, but may be a 1 type or 2 type gaming machine.

From the above, a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is equipped with a control means (game control device 100, performance control device 300) for controlling the game, and the control means is configured to control the occurrence of multiple types of events. The number of times is accumulated for each event, and the corresponding process is performed based on the result of the accumulation satisfying a predetermined condition determined for each event.
Therefore, instead of simply expecting an event to occur, the user now expects that each of multiple types of events will occur in a manner that satisfies the specified conditions, creating a sense of anticipation that was not previously possible. can improve the interest of

Further, the control means is configured to accumulate the number of times of derivation for each type of game result, using the game result derived in a specific gaming state as an event, and to calculate the result of the accumulation to a predetermined number determined for each type of game result. This means that the specific game state is ended as a corresponding process based on the satisfaction of the conditions.
Therefore, the result of the special figure variable display game is also related to the end of the game state, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a variable winning device (
The control means includes a special variable winning device 38), and the control means includes a plurality of types of specific results (small wins) in the game results, and converts the variable winning device into an open state when the specific result is derived. The number of times a specific result has been derived in a specific gaming state is accumulated for each type, and based on the result of the accumulation meeting a predetermined condition determined for each type of specific result, the number of times a specific result is derived in a specific gaming state (specific The operation mode of the variable prize winning device is configured to end the gaming state ST4), and is based on the derivation of a specific result that does not satisfy a predetermined condition in a specific gaming state, and based on the derivation of a specific result that satisfies the predetermined condition. This means that the operating mode of the variable prize winning device is made to be different.
Therefore, since the operating mode of the variable prize winning device differs depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the variable winning device includes a specific area into which winning game balls can flow, and a control member capable of controlling whether or not the game balls can flow into the specific area, and the control means controls a plurality of types of game results. When the specific result is derived, the variable prize winning device is converted to an open state, and a special gaming state can be generated based on the inflow of game balls into a specific area, and in a specific gaming state. The system is configured to accumulate the number of times a specific result has been derived for each type, and to terminate a specific gaming state based on the result of the accumulation satisfying a predetermined condition determined for each type of specific result. In the gaming state, it is easier for game balls to flow into a specific area when a specific result that satisfies a predetermined condition is derived than when a specific result that does not meet the predetermined condition is derived. This means that we tried to do so.
Therefore, the ease with which players can enter a specific area differs depending on whether or not a predetermined condition is met, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of predetermined conditions and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, the right to execute the game can be generated by winning a prize. , a normal variable winning device 37 that can be converted into an open state in which the game ball can win a prize and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot win based on the fact that the result of the game is a special result. A special variable winning device 38 that can convert from a state to an open state in which a prize can be won is provided, and the special results include a jackpot accompanied by the operation of a conditional device and a small win not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device,
The special gaming states include a first special gaming state ST2 based on a jackpot and a second special gaming state ST3 based on a small winning. , it is possible to set either the first state (no power supply support) or the second state (with power supply support) in which it is easier to win a game ball than the first state, and the second special game state ST3
This means that the manner of execution of is made different between the first state and the second state.
Therefore, there is a change in the execution mode of the second special game state ST3, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the special variable winning device 38 is provided with a specific area into which winning game balls can flow, and the control means is capable of generating a first special gaming state ST2 based on the flow of game balls into the specific area, This means that the ease of winning a prize in the specific area in the second special gaming state ST3 is made different depending on whether the player is in the first state or the second state.
Therefore, the probability that the first special gaming state ST2 will occur is different between the first state and the second state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the control means satisfies either a first condition that is satisfied when the game is executed a predetermined number of times, or a second condition that is satisfied when a predetermined result is derived as a result of the game a predetermined number of times. configured to transition from the second state to the first state based on
This means that the timing of transitioning from the second state to the first state based on the satisfaction of the first condition is different from the timing of transitioning from the second state to the first state based on the fulfillment of the second condition.
Therefore, the transition occurs at different timings depending on the conditions that have been established, which brings about changes in the game and improves the interest of the game.

Next, an explanation will be given of an external information signal output to an external device such as a hall computer outside the gaming machine.
The game control device 100 can output a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, and a jackpot 4 signal as external information signals regarding the special gaming state.
The jackpot 1 signal is in the ON state in the first special gaming state ST2 and the second special gaming state ST3, and is OFF in other cases.
The jackpot 2 signal is generated in the first special gaming state ST2 based on a jackpot with a ball played, and in the first special gaming state ST2 based on a jackpot with no balls played in the specific gaming state ST4 or the remaining pending state ST5. It is turned ON in certain cases and in the specific game state ST4 or the remaining pending state ST5, and it is turned OFF in other cases. In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, since all jackpots involve a ball being rolled out, it is turned ON in the first special game state ST2, specific game state ST4, and remaining reservation extinguishment state ST5, and turned OFF in other cases. Note that the first special gaming state ST2 based on a jackpot without a ball that occurs in the remaining pending state ST5 and the period in the remaining pending state ST5 may be OFF.

The jackpot 3 signal is O in the case of the first special gaming state ST2 based on a jackpot with a ball.
N, if the first special game state ST2 is based on a jackpot with no balls, the state is OFF. In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, since all jackpots involve balls being rolled out, the first special gaming state ST
When it is 2, it becomes ON. In addition, the specific game state ST based on hitting the support and reaching the ceiling
It is turned ON for a short time at the start of step 4. Otherwise, it is OFF.
The jackpot 4 signal is turned ON in the first special game state ST2, and turned OFF in other cases.

Here, the output modes of the jackpot 2 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are two cases: when a jackpot occurs and the state goes through the first special gaming state ST2 to a specific gaming state ST4 (state with general power support), and when the jackpot reaches the ceiling or when the support This is different from the case where the specific game state ST4 is entered without passing through the first special game state ST2 due to the derivation of a hit (time saving symbol per).
When the special game state ST4 is entered through the first special game state ST2 due to the occurrence of a jackpot, the jackpot 2 signal is kept in the ON state in the first special game state ST2 and the specific game state ST4. Further, the jackpot 3 signal is turned ON in the first special game state ST2, and turned OFF when the first special game state ST2 ends and the specific game state ST4 starts.

If the normal gaming state ST1 changes to the specific gaming state ST4 without going through the first special gaming state ST2 due to reaching the ceiling or hitting a support, the jackpot 2 signal will be in the OFF state as shown in Figure 2-36(a). The state changes from the state to the ON state with the start of the specific gaming state ST4. Further, the jackpot 3 signal is output as a pulse signal that is turned on for a short period of time (for example, 128 ms) with the start of the specific game state ST4 from an off state.
In addition, when a new specific gaming state ST4 starts from the specific gaming state ST4 without going through the first special gaming state ST2, the pulse of the jackpot 3 signal is output while the jackpot 2 signal continues to be in the ON state. It will be done.

With this configuration, detailed information can be reported to the outside. That is, depending on whether or not the external device receives the pulse signal (ON pulse of the jackpot 3 signal) together with the jackpot 2 signal, the specific gaming state ST4 to be started becomes the specific gaming state ST4 that has passed through the first special gaming state ST2, It becomes possible to determine which of the following is the specific gaming state ST4, which does not pass through the first special gaming state ST2.

In this configuration, the jackpot 2 signal + pulse signal is the specific game state S based on reaching the ceiling.
It can be said that it is an external information signal that can specify the start of a specific gaming state ST4 based on T4 or support winning.
In addition, this configuration can also be applied to a gaming machine that has a ceiling function and has no support hit in the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. In that case, the jackpot 2 signal + pulse signal will not reach the ceiling. It can be said that this is an external information signal that can specify that the specific gaming state ST4 based on the start of the specific gaming state ST4 is started.
In addition, this configuration can also be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a ceiling function and has a support hit, and in that case, the jackpot 2 signal + pulse signal is the specific gaming state ST4 based on the support hit. This can be said to be an external information signal that can identify the start of the event.

Furthermore, the pulse signal (ON pulse of the jackpot signal) that is output together with the jackpot 2 signal is different between when the specific gaming state ST4 is entered based on reaching the ceiling and when the specific gaming state ST4 is entered based on the support hit. It's okay.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2-36(b), for example, at the start of the specific game state ST4 based on reaching the ceiling, the ON pulses of the jackpot 2 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are sent as signals related to the start of time saving. In addition, at the start of the specific game state ST4 based on the support win, the ON pulse of the jackpot 2 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be output as signals related to the start of time saving.

With this configuration, more detailed information can be reported to the outside. That is, the external device can determine whether or not the specific gaming state ST4 to start has passed through the first special gaming state ST2, depending on whether or not the external device has received the pulse signal together with the jackpot 2 signal. Depending on the type of pulse signal received together with the 2 signal (Jackpot 3 signal or Jackpot 4 signal), the specific game state ST4 to be started may be a specific game state ST4 based on reaching the ceiling.
4 or a specific gaming state ST4 based on support winnings.

Note that the type of pulse signal that is output together with the jackpot 2 signal is not different between the case where the specific gaming state ST4 is entered based on reaching the ceiling and the case where the specific gaming state ST4 is entered based on the support hit. The number of times the pulse signal is output together with the signal may be varied.
Specifically, for example, at the start of the specific gaming state ST4 based on reaching the ceiling, two jackpot signals and one pulse signal (ON pulse of the jackpot 3 signal) are output, and the specific gaming state ST4 based on the support hit is output. At the start of the game, there are 2 jackpot signals and 2 pulse signals (3 jackpot signals)
It is also possible to configure the device to output a signal (ON pulse).

From the above, the game control means (game control device 100) changes the state of the normal variable prize winning device 37 into the first state (state with no power support) and the second state where it is easier to win than the first state. The second state can be started based on the number of executions of the game reaching a predetermined number of times (ceiling number of times). , to be configured so that an external information signal (for example, jackpot 2 signal + pulse signal (ON pulse of jackpot 3 signal)) that can identify the occurrence of the second state can be output to the outside of the gaming machine. I can do it.

With this configuration, the second state occurs when the number of times the game has been executed reaches a predetermined number, so a new transition different from the conventional game state transition is possible, which improves the interest of the game. be able to. Further, an external information signal is output when the number of times the game is executed reaches a predetermined number, and the external information signal specifies that the second state is activated based on the number of times the game is executed reaches the predetermined number. Since this is a possible signal, the gaming status can be accurately notified to the outside of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the game control means (game control device 100) can start the second state based on the result of the game being a specific result (win support, win time saving symbol) different from the special result, and can also start the second state. The gaming machine is configured to be able to output an external information signal (for example, jackpot 2 signal + pulse signal (ON pulse of jackpot 3 signal or jackpot 4 signal)) that can identify the occurrence of 2 states to the outside of the gaming machine. can do.

With this configuration, the second state occurs when the game results in a specific result, so a new transition that is different from the conventional game state transition is possible, which improves the interest of the game. I can do it. Further, an external information signal is output when the result of the game is a specific result, and the external information signal is a signal that can specify that the second state is activated based on the specific result of the game. Therefore, the gaming status can be accurately notified to the outside of the gaming machine.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be explained. Furthermore, basically,
It has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, parts having the same configuration will be given the same reference numerals and explanations will be omitted, and different parts will be mainly explained. The gaming machine of this modification differs in the configuration of the normal variable prize winning device 37.

As shown in FIG. 2-37, the normal variable winning device 37 of this modification has a winning opening that opens upward, and a plate-shaped movable member 37b is provided above the winning opening. The plate-shaped movable member 37b can be converted into a closed state in which the winning opening is closed and an open state in which the winning opening is opened by rotating downward or sliding backward from the closed state. In addition, when it is in the closed state, the game ball can roll on the upper surface of the movable member 37b, and by making the game ball flowing down toward the left meander back and forth, the movable member 37b An obstacle member (not shown) is provided on the top, which can extend the time the game balls stay there.

The game ball launched to the right area of the game board 30 is guided to the right by the game nail as shown by the dotted arrow, passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34 and reaches the right end of the normal variable winning device 37. .
When the normal variable winning device 37 is in the closed state, it flows down to the left over the movable member 37b, and flows down from the right end of the normal variable winning device 37 toward the special variable winning device 38 below. That is, all the game balls fired to the right area of the game board 30 are directed to the special variable winning device 38 via the normal variable winning device 37.

In a state where there is a general power support that makes it easy to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37, the movable member 37b is converted to the open state at a time interval shorter than the time the game ball stays on the movable member 37b, so the firing is not possible. Most of the game balls played win a prize in the normal variable prize winning device 37. As a result, the game ball does not reach the special variable prize winning device 38 in the state with power supply support,
Even if the special variable winning device 38 is released, the game ball will not win.
In addition, in a state where there is no general power support where it is difficult to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37, the movable member 37b is converted to the open state at a time interval longer than the time the game ball stays on the movable member 37b. Most of the fired game balls normally do not win in the variable prize winning device 37 and flow downward. As a result, in the state without general power support, the special variable prize winning device 38
The game ball can reach , and if the special variable winning device 38 is opened, the game ball can win.

In addition, in a state with general power support that makes it easy to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37, the movable member 3
It is sufficient if 7b is converted to an open state. That is, in the state with the power supply support, the movable member 37b does not necessarily have to be converted to the open state at a time interval shorter than the time during which the game ball stays on the movable member 37b. In the state with general power support, special variable prize winning device 38
The number of game balls flowing down to the special variable winning device 38 should be smaller than the state without power supply support, and even if some game balls flow down to the special variable winning device 38, there is a possibility that they will enter the special variable winning device 38 and flow into a specific area. is low, so there is no problem.

With such a configuration, the operation mode in the second special game state ST3 does not differ as shown in FIG. 2-34(b), and is always the same as the second operation mode in the lower row of FIG. 2-34(b). By doing so, it is possible to create a possibility that the first special gaming state ST3 will occur if the end condition of the specific gaming state ST4 is satisfied by deriving the small win as described above.
That is, in the second special game state ST3 (t14 to t17, t21 to t24) performed in the state with power supply support in FIG. Since the player does not enter the special variable winning device 38 and cannot enter the specific area, it is possible to make it difficult for the first special gaming state ST3 to occur.
In addition, in the second special game state ST3 (t26 to t29), which is performed without general power support in FIG. Since it becomes possible to win a prize in the winning device 38 and to flow into a specific area, it is possible to make it possible for the first special gaming state ST3 to occur.

Based on the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of predetermined conditions and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, the right to execute the game by winning a prize. The normal variable winning device 37 is capable of converting the game ball into an open state in which it can win a prize and a closed state in which it cannot win a prize, and a normal variable winning device 37 that can generate a winning state in which the game ball cannot win a prize based on the result of the game being a special result. A special variable prize winning device 38 that can be converted from a closed state in which a prize is possible to an open state in which a prize can be won;
The normal variable winning device 37 is provided upstream of the special variable winning device 38, and the game ball is configured to reach the special variable winning device 38 via the part where the normal variable winning device 37 is provided. There will be.
Therefore, when the normal variable winning device 37 is in the open state, the special variable winning device 38 can be modified to prevent game balls from flowing down, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In addition, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is configured to convert between an open state and a closed state by operating a movable member 37b, and in the closed state, a game ball can roll on the upper surface of the movable member 37b, and when it is opened, The game ball rolling on the movable member 37b is configured to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 by converting to the state, and the control means (game control device 100) changes the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37. , it is possible to set either the first state (without power supply support) or the second state (with power supply support) in which it is easier to win the game ball than in the first state, and in the second state, the closed state and It is possible to make the time for this to be shorter than the time for the game ball to stay on the upper surface of the movable member 37b.
Therefore, in the second state, it is possible to prevent the game ball from reaching the special variable winning device 38, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Third embodiment>
The third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 3-1 to 3-39. Note that the configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to second embodiments. Furthermore, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for components that perform the same functions as those in the first to second embodiments.

FIG. 3-1 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, and FIG. 3-2 is a front perspective view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 3-1 and 3-2, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be rotatable in opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 3-3) is stored in a storage section (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 including a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

A display board 350 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is provided on the glass frame 15 at a position behind the cover glass 14. The display board 350 can see through the game board 30 and can display a predetermined display. Although the game machine of this embodiment is configured with a light guide plate that makes an image appear by introducing light from the side edge, it may also be configured with a transparent liquid crystal display device or an EL display device.
When the display board 350 is not displaying a predetermined display, it is transparent and does not obstruct the visibility of the game board 30 at the rear. Then, when a predetermined display is displayed on the display board 350,
The visibility of the rear game board 30 is reduced in the predetermined display portion. In this state, the rear game board 30 may be visible through the predetermined display, or the rear game board 30 may be invisible due to the predetermined display.

At the top of the glass frame 15, a model name display section 16 for displaying the model name, etc. of the gaming machine 10 is provided.
In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration, presentation, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are set in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15. Furthermore, when an abnormality occurs, the content of the abnormality is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a lamp for reporting an abnormality in dispensing may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the bottom of the glass frame 15, there is an upper tray (storage tray) 21 for supplying game balls to a batted ball firing device (not shown), and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. An upper plate ball outlet 22 and the like are provided for outflow. Further, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, there is provided a production button 25 which includes a production button switch 25a (see FIG. 3-5) for receiving a press operation input from a player. The production button 25 also has a built-in drive source that vibrates the production button 25. That is, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has a vibration function that makes a predetermined notification by vibrating the performance button 25. Note that the production button 25 can be converted from a normal state (the state shown in FIGS. 3-1 and 3-2) to a protruding state (a state in which the top surface (pressing surface) of the production button 25 is higher than in the normal state). It may be configured as follows.

At the lower part of the front frame 12, there are provided a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls put out when the upper tray 21 is full, a handle 24 of a batted ball firing device, and the like. Furthermore, front frame 1
A keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15.

Further, on the right side of the production button 25, there is a lending button (ball lending button) 27a that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a lending button 27a for ejecting a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A return button (ejection button) 27b that is operated to operate the balance, a balance display device (balance display section) 27c that displays the balance of the prepaid card, and an upper tray operation lever that is operated to cause the game balls in the upper tray 21 to flow down to the lower tray 23. 27d, a mobile terminal holder 28 for placing a mobile terminal such as a smartphone owned by a player is provided. Further, to the left of the production button 25, a volume adjustment button 27e, a cross key 29, etc. are provided.
In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 24, the ball firing device fires game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. . Furthermore, by the player operating the production button 25 or the cross key 29, the player's operation can be intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 3-3). You can perform performances, etc.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be explained using FIG. 3-3. FIG. 3-3 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 3-3, the game board 30 includes a flat game board body that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front side of the game board body is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. A gaming area 32 is provided. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball firing device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the direction of the game balls flowing down, and the fired game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case 40 is attached that forms a window that serves as a display area for a variable display game. A display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is arranged behind a window portion formed in the center case 40.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured of a device having a display screen, such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area (display area) where images can be displayed on the display screen, still images and videos can be displayed as performance images, such as multiple identification information (special symbols), characters for special symbol variation display games, etc. Information regarding the game, such as a background image that enhances the presentation effect, is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special symbol variable display game corresponding to the special symbol variable display game is played. Furthermore, images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

The center case 40 includes a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 into the center case 40, and a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 into the center case 40, and a warp flow path forming member 614 that allows the game balls that have passed through the warp flow path to roll. A possible stage section 620 is provided. Since the stage part 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize opening 36, the game balls rolling on the stage part 620 can easily win in the starting winning opening 36.
Further, the upper and lower parts of the center case 40 are provided with a board presentation device 44 that performs a game presentation by operating. The lower presentation device 44a provided at the lower part of the center case 40 is operable between the lower part of the center case 40 and a position closer to the center of the display device 41 than this position.
The upper presentation device 44b provided at the upper part of the center case 40 is operable between the upper position of the center case 40 and a position closer to the center of the display device 41 than this position. Moreover, the above-mentioned presentation device 44b includes a rotating operating member 44c imitating a propeller.
It is possible to perform effects also by the movement of the movement member 44c.
That is, the lower presentation device 44a constitutes a first movable accessory having an operable first movable member,
The upper performance device 44b constitutes a second movable accessory having a second movable member that can be operated.

In the gaming area 32 on the right and lower side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (normal symbol starting gate) 34 is provided. A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3-4) is provided inside the regular figure starting gate 34 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the regular figure starting gate 34. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the regular figure starting gate 34, the regular figure variation display game is executed.

Three general winning holes 35 are arranged in the gaming area 32 on the lower left of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the gaming area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. Winning of game balls into these general winning holes 35 is detected by a winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 3-4) provided in the general winning hole 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a starting prize opening 36 (first starting prize area) is provided which provides a starting condition for the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game). The game ball that has entered the starting prize opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3-4).

On the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) is provided that provides starting conditions for the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game). The winning game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3-4).
The normal variable prize winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b, and this movable member 37b normally maintains a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which game balls cannot enter. When the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a predetermined result, the general variable prize winning device is operated in an inverted “C” shape by the general electric solenoid 37c (see Fig. 3-4) as a driving device. 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which game balls can easily flow into the player.
It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 allows the game ball to win even when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, and may be in a state where it is more difficult to win the game ball in the closed state than in the open state.

In the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40, there is provided a special variable prize winning device (big prize opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variable display game. There is. The special variable prize winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening/closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, and when opened, game balls can flow into the upper prize winning opening. Convert to state. The special variable winning device 38 converts the grand prize opening from a closed state to an open state depending on the result of the special figure variable display game, and facilitates the flow of game balls into the grand prize opening, thereby providing a reward to the player. A predetermined gaming value (prize ball) is given. The game ball that won the special variable winning device 38 is detected by the big winning opening switch (counting switch) 38a (see FIG. 3-4).

Inside the grand prize opening (winning area), a specific area into which game balls can flow is provided, and a lever solenoid 38f (Figure 3-4 A lever member is provided which is actuated by (see). A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 3-4) that can detect the inflow of game balls is provided in the specific area, and based on the detection of game balls by the specific area switch 38d, an advantageous area for the player is displayed. A state occurs (in this embodiment, a special game state occurs). The game balls that have flowed into the specific area are discharged to the outside of the special variable prize winning device 38.

Furthermore, inside the big prize opening, a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 3-4) is provided to detect game balls that are discharged to the outside of the special variable prize winning device 38 without flowing into a specific area. There is. The number of game balls detected by the big winning hole switch 38a provided inside the big winning hole (the number of game balls flowing into the big winning hole) and the game detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball outlet switch 38e By matching the number of balls (the number of game balls ejected from the grand prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper prize winning hole have been ejected, and basically until this confirmation is completed, new The grand prize opening will no longer be opened.

In the gaming area 32 below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a is provided for collecting game balls that do not win the winning opening or the like. Also, outside the gaming area 32, the gaming board main body 80
In the lower right corner of is the special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game)
Also provided is a collective display device 50 that executes a general figure fluctuation display game.

The batch display device 50 is a special figure 1 display device (first special figure variation display section) for the special figure 1 variation display game.
51 and special figure 2 variable display special figure 2 display device for the game (second special figure variable display section) 52, and special figure 1
It is provided with a special figure 1 pending display 53 for informing the starting memory number of the variable display game and a special figure 2 pending display 54 for informing the starting memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game.

The collective display device 50 also includes a round display section 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a jackpot (the number of times the special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed), and a gaming state display section 5 that displays the gaming state of the gaming machine 10.
6. This game state display section 56 includes a first game state display section 56a that informs the player of the left-handed (normal) and right-handed batting methods (the batting method that corresponds to the gaming state).
, a second gaming state display section 56b that notifies that the time saving state is in effect (when the variable time saving function is activated).
A third gaming state display section 56c is provided to notify that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the special symbol probability is always constant, the third gaming state display section 56c is not used.
Furthermore, the collective display device 50 is provided with a regular figure display 57 for the regular figure fluctuation display game, and a regular figure pending display 58 for informing the starting memory number of the regular figure fluctuation display game.

FIG. 3-4 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, which is a main control device (main board) that centrally controls the game, and has a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110, the input section 120, and the output section 130. .

The CPU section 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that includes an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator and generates a reference clock for a CPU operating clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC-DC generator that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power source.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a converter or a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from a DC32V voltage, and a gaming microcomputer 1.
a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 11 in the event of a power outage;
It has a power outage monitoring circuit, and includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power outage.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the gaming control device 100, but the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are configured on a separate board or integrated with the gaming control device 100, that is, the main It may also be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when changing models, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board separate from the power supply device 400 or the main board, as in this embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to remove it from replacement and reduce costs.

The backup power supply section 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is provided by the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is maintained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. That is, the gaming control device 100 can store and retain information regarding the game even if a power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and after the power is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It serves as a game information storage and holding means.
The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops to 17V or less, detects the occurrence of a power outage, changes the power outage monitoring signal, and generates a reset signal after a predetermined time. Output. Also, when the power is turned on or when a power failure is recovered, a reset signal is output after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the gaming control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. will be held. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and an RA that can be read and written at any time.
M (random access memory) 111C is provided.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores unchanging information for game control (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.), and the RAM 111C serves as a work area for the CPU 111A and a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the performance, the presence or absence of a ready-to-reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table used by the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory. Further, the variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table that is selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot variation pattern table that is selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and tables for determining the fluctuation pattern before reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.). It includes tables (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining first half variation patterns, which are patterns.

Here, reach (ready-to-reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays multiple display results at different times, and the multiple display results are predetermined. A gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous to the player when a special result mode occurs (special gaming state)
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device has progressed to the stage before the display results are derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode have not been met. This refers to the display mode that does not exist. For example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result aspect is complete (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Furthermore, the reach state is the display state at the point when the display control of the display device has progressed to the stage before the display results are derived and displayed, and is determined before the display results are derived and displayed. A display state in which at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, a decorative special figure variable display game displayed on a display device in response to a special figure variable display game may vary a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the variable display is to be stopped in the left, right, and middle order to display the result mode, the left and right variable display areas will display a state where the conditions for the special result mode are met (for example, The state in which the variable display stops with the same identification information is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas meet the conditions for special result mode (for example, the same The state of identification information,
However, it is also possible to make the remaining variable display area (excluding the special result mode) into a ready-to-reach state, and to display the remaining variable display area in a variable manner from this ready-to-reach state.

This reach state includes multiple reach performances, and the reach performances with different possibilities of deriving special results (different expected values) include normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 Reach) and Premier Reach are set. The expected values are: No reach < Normal reach < Special 1 reach < Special 2 reach < Special 3 reach <
The prices increase in order of premier reach. Moreover, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in the special symbol variable display game (when it becomes a jackpot). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when the result is a loss). Therefore, a state in which a ready-to-win state occurs is a state in which there is a higher possibility of a jackpot than in a case in which a ready-to-reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the production control device 300, generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and display device, and operates the game machine. Controls the entire 10. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining the hit in the special pattern fluctuation display game, a special pattern pattern random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a fluctuation pattern ( Random number generation to generate variable pattern random numbers to determine the execution time of variable display games in various reach and non-reach variable displays), random number to generate winning random numbers to determine hits in general figure variable display games, etc. circuit, and a clock generator that generates a clock that provides a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111A uses the ROM 111B in processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game.
Any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the memory is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A calculates the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit, small hit, or miss), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state), Based on the starting memory number and the like, one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. Here, CPU111A
constitutes fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

The payout control device 200 is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit according to the prize ball payout command (command and data) from the game control device 100 to release the prize balls. Performs control for dispensing. Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit to pay out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, The winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, the big winning opening switch 38a in the special variable winning device 38, the gate switch 34a in the normal figure starting gate 34, the specific area switch 38d arranged in the special variable winning device 38 and remaining bulb outlet switch 38
e. It is connected to an out ball detection switch 32a that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 11V. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided which inputs a negative logic signal such as 7V and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V to 5V. Proximity I
/F121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the sensor or proximity switch lead wires may be improperly shorted, the sensor or switch may be removed from the connector, or the lead wires may be cut and left floating. It is configured to be able to detect such abnormal conditions and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, third input port 124, or fourth input port 126, and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switch 38a, and the gate switch 34a are input to the second input port 123. . Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, detection signals from the specific area switch 38d, remaining ball outlet switch 38e, and out ball detection switch 32a are input to the fourth input port 126. Also, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121,
A detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality in a sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 .

The third input port 124 also includes a detection signal from a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 etc. of the gaming machine 10, a detection signal from a vibration sensor 65 for detecting vibrations of the gaming machine 10,
A detection signal from a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the gaming machine 10 and a detection signal from a main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 etc. of the gaming machine 10 are also input. It has become so.

Further, a signal from a setting key switch 152 that detects an operation of the setting key operation unit is input to the third input port 124 . The setting key operation section has a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted.
The configuration is such that the corresponding setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect when it is turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is turned to the second position, and turns on when it is not turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation section are operation sections for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values of special results in the special figure fluctuation display game are assigned, and these operation sections are operated. By doing this, you can select a probability setting value that is assigned a probability value that will result in a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value will be used in the game. There is. Here, six probability setting values, "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", are prepared.

When selecting the probability setting value, turn the setting key on the setting key operation section to the second position and press R.
By turning on the power of the gaming machine while operating (pressing) the AM initialization switch 112, the probability setting value change mode is enabled in which the probability setting value can be changed. You can change the probability setting value by pressing (press). The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and accessory ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays information on the probability setting value while performing operations related to the probability setting value (while in the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode); The calculated base value and accessory ratio are now displayed.

In addition, the setting key of the setting key operation section is turned to the second position (RAM initialization switch 11
By turning on the power of the gaming machine in step 2 (no operation), the currently selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153, but the probability setting value confirmation mode is entered in which the probability setting value cannot be changed. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation section cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is in an open state.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and is adapted to display the probability setting value as a number from 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that allows the probability setting value to be recognized may be used. In addition, other types of display devices such as liquid crystal display devices may be used,
The probability setting value may be indicated by the lighting mode, emitted light color, etc. of one or more LEDs.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the outputs to the second input port 123 and the outputs to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out-ball detection switch 32a) are connected to the main board 100.
The light is also supplied from the relay board 70 to a test firing test device (not shown). Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37
The detection signal a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12V is supplied to the proximity I/F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is transmitted to the enable signal CE by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122, which will be described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave fraud signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided in the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave), a payout busy signal (a signal output from the payout control device A signal indicating whether or not 200 is in a state where it can accept commands), a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (full)), a touch switch signal (based on the input of a touch switch provided on the handle 24) A first input port 122 is provided that takes in a signal (signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has the function of removing noise from.
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In other words, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
The signal is input directly to the reset terminal provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130. Furthermore, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the sight-fire test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the sight-fire test device is turned off. It is configured as follows. Further, the configuration may be such that the reset signal RESET can be output to the sight test equipment via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is applied to each port 122, 123,
124 and 126 are not supplied. The data set in each port of the output section 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent system malfunction. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the performance control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that this is one-way communication in which signals cannot be input from the production control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to a data bus 140 and sends data to inform a test shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown) of special symbol information of a variable display game, a signal indicating a probability state of a jackpot, etc. via a relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced and sold product) installed in a game parlor. Note that the detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a starting port switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor 61, panel radio sensor 62, and vibration sensor 65 that cannot be directly supplied to the test firing test device are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, such as the The signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test device via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the machine cannot control the game. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the sight test equipment, and a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal without going through the buffer. There is. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test device.

Further, the output section 130 is provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140. The second output port 134 is used to open the special variable winning device 38, the large winning hole solenoid (big winning hole solenoid 1) 38b, the lever solenoid 38f, which operates the lever member in the special variable winning device 38, and the normal variable winning device 37. Opening general electric solenoid 37
This is a port for outputting the operation data of c and the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the currently selected probability setting value.
Further, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting on/off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50; Turn on/off the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting off data.

The output unit 130 also outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 7.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for output to 1. The external information terminal board 71 is equipped with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device installed in a game parlor (an information collection terminal, a game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and can transmit information regarding the game machine 10. It is now possible to supply it to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 includes a first driver ( Drive circuit) 138a, third output port 1
A second driver 138b outputs an on/off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 outputted from the fourth output port 136, and a collective display device 5 outputted from the fourth output port 136.
A third driver 138c outputs an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of 0.
, a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71, and a display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134. a fifth driver 138e that receives the signal, generates a drive signal, and outputs the drive signal.
is provided. Note that data is transmitted from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e by serial communication.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that it can drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. The fifth driver 138e has a power supply voltage of D to drive the performance display device 153 that operates at 5V.
C5V is supplied from power supply device 400.
Further, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50 includes DC1
2V is supplied. The third driver 138c that drives the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data with a current, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal via the segment line, thereby achieving a dynamic drive system. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are turned on.
The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.
In addition, the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the gaming control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. Photo coupler 13
Reference numeral 9 is configured to enable mutual communication between the gaming microcomputer 111 and the inspection device 500 so that data can be sent and received by serial communication. In addition, since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 like a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, 124, and 126 are not provided. do not have.

Note that, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting prize opening 36,
The starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switch 38a, and the gate switch 34a in the normal variable winning device 37 are equipped with magnetic detection coils to detect the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when metal comes close to the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (
(hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the gaming machine 10 and the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 etc. are microswitches having mechanical contacts. can be used.

Next, the configuration of the production control device 300 will be explained using FIG. 3-5.
The production control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, uses an amusement chip (IC).
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying video on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melodies, sound effects, etc. from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It is equipped with

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of ROM (Programmable Read Only Memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe memory that can retain memory contents even when power is not supplied during a power outage.
The RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.). Note that a RAM providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the commands from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the performance, and
It executes processes such as instructing the content of the output video to the DP 312, instructing the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lighting decorative lamps, controlling the drive of motors and solenoids, and managing performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 that stores character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read out from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYN is sent from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 for synchronizing the image on the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30.
C. A synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
The main control microcomputer 311 receives interrupt signals INT0 to INT0 to notify processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait signal to indicate that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal WAIT and the like are also input.

The production control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 using the LVDS (low amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the audio source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. Also, an interrupt signal INT is sent from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
is now entered. The production control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is outputted from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the production control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives commands transmitted from the game control device 100. Via this command I/F 331, a production control command signal (production command ). Gaming microcomputer 111 of gaming control device 100
operates at DC5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the production control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, so the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

The production control device 300 also includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 including the display board 350) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided therein, is provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). The board presentation device 44 (
For example, a board performance movable body control circuit 334 is provided that drives and controls a movable accessory that enhances the performance effect in cooperation with the performance display on the display device 41. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340. Note that even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device equipped with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates a device for effect), and a frame effect movable body control circuit is provided to drive and control the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, a cross key 29 provided in the glass frame 15, and an initial position of the motor in the board production device 44. Performance accessory switch 47 (performance motor switch) that detects etc.
A function that detects the on/off state of the controller and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a function that detects the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 and sends a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311. A switch input circuit 336 having the function of inputting is provided.

The normal power supply section 410 of the power supply device 400 is the production control device 300 having the above configuration.
In order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by it, 32V DC to drive the motor and solenoids, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, 12V DC to drive the motor and LEDs, DC5 which becomes the power supply voltage of command I/F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Furthermore, as the main control microcomputer 311, 3.3V or 1.2V
When using an LSI that operates at low voltage such as
The production control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating 1.2V and 1.2V. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. In addition, in the form of output from the main control microcomputer 311, VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), sound source LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the production control device 300 includes a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
When N45 is connected and the production control device 300 is powered on, the cooling FAN 45 is driven.

In the following description, if the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they will simply be referred to as the special figure variable display game. In addition, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the decorative special figure variable display game. In addition, if you do not distinguish between a jackpot (first special result) and a small hit (second special result), simply hit (special result).
It is called. In addition, when the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a jackpot, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small winning, are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as special gaming states.

Note that a jackpot is a special result (first special result) that involves the operation of a conditional device, and a small hit is a special result (second special result) that does not involve the operation of a conditional device. The condition device is activated when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol fluctuation display game (stop display of the jackpot symbol).When the condition device is activated, for example, a jackpot condition occurs and a special electric accessory is activated. Variable winning device 38
A specific flag is set for continuously operating the accessory (meaning that the accessory continuous operating device is activated). When the conditional device is not activated, it means that the aforementioned flag is not set, as in the case of winning a small lottery, for example. Note that the "condition device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Also,
"Condition device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the continuous operation of electric accessories, and it has the same meaning in this specification. It is used as a term with

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by firing game balls (pachinko balls) from a ball launcher toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing its rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, and other direction changing members placed at various locations within the game area 32, and passes through the game starting gate 34 and the general prize opening 35. , the starting prize opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, or flowing into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and being discharged from the gaming area 32. Then, when game balls win in the general winning hole 35, starting winning hole 36, normal variable winning device 37, or special variable winning device 38, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning hole that won is distributed to the payout control device 200 ( 3-4), the liquid is discharged onto the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player adjusts the firing force and fires the game ball to the left side gaming area (so-called left-handed hitting), the starting prize opening 36, the general figure starting gate 34, the starting winning opening You can aim to win a prize in the general prize opening 35 arranged on the left side of 36, and by firing a game ball into the right side game area (so-called right-handed hitting), you can aim to win a prize in the general prize opening 35 located on the left side of 36.
, special variable winning device 38, and general winning slot 35.

A gate switch 34a consisting of a non-contact switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general figure starting gate 34 is provided in the normal figure starting gate 34, and
When the game ball hit inside passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern starting gate 34, the number of normal pattern starting memory is set to the upper limit number (for example, 4 balls). ), add the number of normal figures starting memory (+1
) and store one general pattern start memory in the RAM 111C. The stored number of starting prizes for common symbols is displayed on the common symbol pending display 58 of the collective display device 50. In addition, the normal figure starting memory stores a random value for determining a hit (random hit value) for determining the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a. It is supposed to be done.

Then, if there is a normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern fluctuation display game can be started, that is, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not being executed, and the normal pattern fluctuation display game wins and the normal pattern fluctuation winning device 37 is changed to the open state. If it is not in a winning state, the random number value for hit determination stored in the first stored normal pattern starting memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine whether the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit or a miss. Then, a process is performed to start the normal figure fluctuation display game. When this random value for determining a hit matches the determination value, the general pattern fluctuation display game becomes a win and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100 presets a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns on the general pattern display 57 provided in the collective display device 50 over a predetermined variable time as a process for executing the normal pattern fluctuation display game. After performing a display during normal pattern fluctuation that is repeatedly displayed in the given order, a process is performed to display a normal pattern fluctuation display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed.
Note that the ordinary figure display 57 is constituted by the display device 41, and the ordinary identification information includes, for example, numbers, symbols,
It is also possible to use a character pattern or the like, and after displaying it in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, the display may be stopped and the result displayed.

When the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a win, the normal figure display 57 stops displaying a lighting pattern that is a special result mode, and the general electric solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37. Performs control to open for a predetermined time. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes conversion control execution means that performs conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In addition, when the result of the ordinary figure fluctuation display game is a loss, control is performed to display a lighting pattern that corresponds to the result of a loss on the ordinary figure display 57.

In addition, the winning balls into the starting winning hole 36 and the winning balls into the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside, respectively.
The CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 stores the first starting memory, which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory), based on winnings in the starting winning hole 36, to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4
A predetermined upper limit number (for example, 1 piece) is stored in a second starting memory which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on winnings to the normal variable winning device 37. Based on the winnings in the starting winning hole 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, the jackpot random number, special symbol random number, and each variation pattern random number are extracted as starting memory information, respectively. The random number value is stored in the RAM 111C as a first starting memory or a second starting memory. The stored number of starting memories is displayed on the special drawing 1 holding display 53 and special drawing 2 holding display 54 for informing the starting winning number of the batch display device 50, and on the display device 41 of the center case 40. It is also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variable display device) based on the first starting memory, and performs the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 (first variable display device) based on the second starting memory. A special figure 2 variable display game is played on the second variable display device). When both the first starting memory and the second starting memory are stored, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 controls the special figure 1 variable display game ( In addition to controlling the execution of the first special figure variation display game), the special figure 2 variation is performed based on the second starting memory stored in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area). It serves as an execution control means for controlling the execution of the display game (second special figure variation display game). Then, in a state where the first starting memory and the second starting memory are stored, the execution control means is configured to change the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory from the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first starting memory. is also configured to be executed with priority.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing a variable display, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a jackpot, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes the special result mode (jackpot result mode) corresponding to the first special result. This results in a jackpot, resulting in a first special gaming state (so-called jackpot state).
In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is a special result mode (small hit result mode) corresponding to the second special result. This results in a small win, resulting in a second special game state (so-called small win state). In other words, special map 1
The display device 51 constitutes a first variable display means capable of displaying a first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on winning of a game ball to the starting winning hole 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 constitutes a second variable display means capable of displaying a second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on winning of game balls to the normal variable winning device 37.

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a jackpot game state (first special game state).
After the end of the game, control is performed to generate a gaming state (specific gaming state) in which the player can proceed with the game in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (high probability of winning, presence of public electricity support). It is possible to do so. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 constitutes a specific game state generation means.

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the display device 41
A decorative special figure variable display game is executed in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner. The decorative special figure 1 variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. be. Then, a variable display is performed as the corresponding special figure variable display game changes, and a display corresponding to the result is performed as the result mode in the corresponding special figure variable display game is derived.

That is, the display device 41 plays an ornamental variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) in which the ornament identification information is variably displayed in response to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The present invention serves as a decorative variable display means capable of displaying a decorative special figure variable display game. In addition, separate display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed, or the decorative special figure 2 variable display game may be displayed. The 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game may be displayed in separate display areas, or the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game may be displayed in the same display area. Also good.
Moreover, the special figure fluctuation display game may be executed only with the display device 41 without providing the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 in the gaming machine 10.

FIG. 3-6 shows an example of the distribution rate in this embodiment.
FIG. 3-6(a) is an example of the distribution rate of the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 3-6(a), there are four types of results of the special figure fluctuation display game: jackpot, small hit, support hit, and loss. In this embodiment, the distribution rate of the jackpot is common between the special chart 1 and the special chart 2, but it may be different between the special chart 1 and the special chart 2. In addition, in Figure 3-6 (a), the distribution rate of the jackpot is the same when the probability setting value is “Setting 1”, “Setting 2”, and “Setting 3”. However, it may be different. In addition, in Figure 3-6 (a), the distribution rate of the jackpot is the same when the probability setting value is "Setting 4", "Setting 5", and "Setting 6". However, it may be different.

Further, in FIG. 3-6(a), the distribution rates for small hits and support hits are the same regardless of the probability setting value, but they may be different. That is, in this embodiment, only the winning probability of the jackpot is changed by changing the probability setting value, and the probability of the small winning and the support winning is not changed.
In addition, the support hit can only be derived in the first specific game state where the general power support state is support A or B, which will be described later, in the special figure 1 variable display game. Since a support hit has the same derivation probability as a jackpot, it can give the impression that the probability of winning has doubled.
In addition, regarding small winnings, the distribution rate of special drawing 2 is higher than that of special drawing 1. As a result, there is a higher possibility that special drawing 2 will result in a small hit, and if it becomes a small hit, there is a high possibility that it will become the first special gaming state (jackpot) due to the flow into the specific area, so the special The special figure variation display game in FIG. 2 is more advantageous for the player.

Figure 3-6(b) is an example of the distribution ratio of jackpot types. For a jackpot, for example, as shown in Figure 3-6(b), the 3R jackpot A symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol (jackpot result mode), and the 3R jackpot B symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol (jackpot result mode). There are four types: jackpot B, 3R jackpot C in which the 3R jackpot C symbol is stopped and displayed, and 10R jackpot in which the 10R jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed.
In 3R jackpot A, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is 3, and after the special gaming state ends, the general power support state (specific gaming state) of support A is entered. In 3R jackpot B, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is 3, and after the special gaming state ends, the normal power support state of support B is entered. In 3R jackpot C, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is 3, and after the special gaming state ends, the normal power support state of support C is entered. In the 10R jackpot, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is 10 rounds, and after the special gaming state ends, the normal power support state of support C is entered.
Supports A to C have different conditions for ending the general power support state, and the general power support state ends when the conditions shown in FIG. 3-6(e) are met.

In Figure 3-6(b), the distribution rate of the jackpot type of the special figure 1 variable display game differs depending on the gaming state in which the special figure variable display game is executed, and in the case of the normal gaming state, 3R jackpot A ~ C is selectable. In the case of a specific gaming state in which general electricity support is provided, 3R jackpots B and C can be selected. Regarding the special figure 2 variable display game, only the 10R jackpot can be selected regardless of the gaming state. Note that the selection rates may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Figure 3-6(c) shows the distribution ratio of small winning types. Regarding the jackpot that occurs when a game ball flows into a specific area of the special variable winning device 38 (V winning) in the second special game state based on the small winning, the jackpot type is selected based on the type of the small winning.
If a game ball flows into a specific area in the second special game state based on 3R small win A, the normal power support state of support B will be entered after the first special game state of the second round ends. If a game ball flows into a specific area in the second special game state based on the 10R small win, the normal power support state of support C will be entered after the end of the first special game state of 9 rounds. When a game ball flows into a specific area in the second special game state based on 3R small hit B, the normal power support state of support C is entered after the first special game state of the second round ends. If a game ball flows into a specific area in the second special game state based on the 3R small win C, the state will become a state where there is no general power support after the first special game state of the second round ends.
In the special figure 1 variable display game, only 3R small hit A can be selected, and in the special figure 2 variable display game, 10R small hit, 3R small hit B and C can be selected. In addition, the distribution ratio may be different between the special map 1 and the special map 2.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with a so-called ceiling function as shown in FIG. 3-6(d). That is, when the number of times the game has been executed reaches the ceiling number (600 in this case), the special game state is not generated and the normal power support state of support C is entered. The number of times the game is executed is always counted regardless of the presence or absence of general power support when the probability is low, and the counting is interrupted when the probability is high. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the special symbol probability is always constant, it is constantly counted. In addition, the number of times the game is executed is the sum of the number of times the special figure 1 variable display game is executed and the number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

The timing to clear the counting result of the number of times the game has been executed is when the general power support state is triggered by reaching the ceiling number of times, and when the condition device is activated (first special game state). Note that the timing for clearing the count result of the number of game executions can be changed as appropriate, for example, when clearing the number of game executions is selected when operating the RAM initialization switch 112, or when the power is turned off instead of when clearing the RAM. It can also be used at the time of injection.

Further, when clearing the RAM, the measurement of the number of game executions may be cleared when the RAM is cleared without setting changes, and the measurement of the number of game executions may not be cleared when the RAM is cleared with setting changes. When the RAM is cleared without changing settings, for example, the power is turned on while the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on without turning on the setting key switch 152. In this manner, by not clearing the measurement of the number of game executions when clearing the RAM accompanied by a setting change, it is possible to make it difficult to determine that a setting change has been made.

FIG. 3-6(e) shows the conditions for ending the general power support state (specific gaming state).
In support A's general power support state, whether the number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game is 15 times, the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game is 15 times, or the number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure The general power support state will end when either of the following conditions is met: the total number of times the 2 variable display game has been executed is 15 times, or one small hit has been derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. It has become. Similarly, regarding the support B and support C general power support states, the general power support state can be changed by executing the number of games shown in Figure 3-6(e) or by deriving a small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game. The state is set to end.
In addition, support C requires the execution of the special symbol fluctuation display game 250 times, but in most cases a jackpot or small hit is derived before this number of derivations is achieved, and in effect the next jackpot is It can be said that public electricity support will continue until then.

FIG. 3-7 shows the operation mode of the special variable prize winning device 38 in the second special game state based on the small win. FIG. 3-7(a) shows the operation mode of the special variable prize winning device 38 in the second special game state based on the small winnings derived in the special figure 2 variable display game.
With the start of the second special gaming state (t11), the special variable winning device 38 is opened for 48ms (t11-t12) and then closed for 2960ms (t12-t14)
. After that, 48ms of opening is performed 19 times with 424ms of closing time in between (t14 to t16).
), the opening of the special variable prize winning device 38 is ended. In addition, when there is a specified number of prizes, the opening of the special variable prize winning device 38 ends at that point.
When the opening of the special variable winning device 38 is completed (t16), it becomes the remaining ball processing time for processing the game balls remaining in the special variable winning device 38 (t16 to t17). The remaining ball processing time is set to 1900 ms, but if there are remaining balls even after this time, the remaining ball processing time continues until the remaining balls disappear.
Thereafter, the ending period (t17 to t18) begins and the second special game state ends.
At the start of the ending period, an ending command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300.

A lever solenoid 3 that operates a lever member that changes the probability of a game ball flowing into a specific area.
8f is OFF for 100ms from the OFF state with the start of the second special gaming state (t11).
The state is set to N and the lever member is in a state that allows the flow into the specific area (t11 to t13).
.
Then, after the lever member is in the OFF state for 2900ms, making it difficult for the lever member to flow into the specific area (t13 to t15), it is turned ON again, and the lever member is in a state that allows the lever member to flow into the specific area. (t15).
Thereafter, when the remaining ball processing time ends and there are no remaining balls, the lever member is turned off and becomes in a state where it is difficult for the lever member to flow into the specific area (t17).
Regarding the specific area switch 38d that detects game balls that have flowed into the specific area, the detection of game balls that have flowed into the specific area is enabled with the start of the second special game state (t11), and the remaining ball processing time has ended. When there are no remaining balls, the detection of incoming game balls becomes invalid (t17).

In the second special game state based on the small winnings derived in this special figure 2 variable display game, the game balls can easily flow into the special variable winning device 38, and the game balls that have flowed into the special variable winning device 38 can be identified. It is also easy to enter the area, and it is possible to generate the first special gaming state in most cases.

FIG. 3-7(b) shows the operation mode of the special variable prize winning device 38 in the second special game state based on the small win derived in the special figure 1 variable display game.
With the start of the second special game state (t21), the special variable winning device 38 is opened for 1000ms (t21 to t23), and the opening of the special variable winning device 38 ends.
When the opening of the special variable winning device 38 is completed (t23), it becomes the remaining ball processing time for processing the game balls remaining in the special variable winning device 38 (t23 to t24). The remaining ball processing time is set to 1900 ms, but if there are remaining balls even after this time, the remaining ball processing time continues until the remaining balls disappear.
Thereafter, the ending period (t24-t25) begins and the second special game state ends.
At the start of the ending period, an ending command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300.

A lever solenoid 3 that operates a lever member that changes the probability of a game ball flowing into a specific area.
8f is turned off for 100ms from the OFF state with the start of the second special gaming state (t21).
The state is set to N and the lever member is in a state of allowing inflow into a specific area (t21 to t22).
, after that, it is turned off and the lever member becomes in a state that makes it difficult to flow into the specific area (t
22).
Regarding the specific area switch 38d that detects game balls that have flowed into the specific area, the detection of game balls that have flowed into the specific area is enabled with the start of the second special game state (t21), and the remaining ball processing time has ended. When there are no remaining balls, the detection of incoming game balls becomes invalid (t24).

In the second special game state based on the small winnings derived in this special figure 1 variable display game, it is difficult for game balls to flow into the special variable winning device 38, and the game balls that have flowed into the special variable winning device 38 are identified. It is also difficult to enter the area, and in most cases it is impossible to generate the first special gaming state.

Figure 3-8 shows a general figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 3-8(a), the probability of winning in the normal pattern fluctuation display game is constant regardless of the game state. The fluctuation time of the general figure fluctuation display game is 5000ms when there is no support for general electric power, and when there is support for general electric power, the fluctuation time is shorter than this, 4900ms for support A and B, and 4900ms for support C. In some cases, it is set to 200ms. In addition, the maximum count number of general electric power is set to 5, and if 5 game balls win by opening the normal variable winning device 37 based on a hit, the normal variable winning device 37 will be activated even before the opening time has elapsed. It's set to close.

As shown in FIG. 3-8(b), there are four types of results in the normal pattern fluctuation display game: a loss and a hit 1 to 3. The distribution of winning symbols is such that out of 65,521 random numbers, 1 is 65,321, 2 is 100, and 3 is 100, and the probability that 1 is selected is high. Further, the general figure display 57 of the collective display device 50 displays the result mode by turning on or off the three light emitters D4, D5, and D6.

The opening pattern of the normal variable winning device 37 when the normal figure variable display game becomes a hit is as follows:
There are three types of patterns H1 to H3, which are selected depending on the winning result and gaming status.
In a game state where there is no general power support, any of the winnings from 1 to 3 becomes the open pattern of pattern H1. When the general electricity support is support A or B, if there is a hit of 1, the opening pattern is pattern H1, and if there is a hit of 2 or 3, the opening pattern is pattern H2. If the general power support is support C, any of the hits 1 to 3 will be the open pattern of pattern H3.

Each opening pattern is shown in FIGS. 3-8(c) to (e).
As shown in FIG. 3-8(c), in the opening pattern of pattern H1, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is opened at the start of the winning state (t31), and closed after 36 ms have elapsed (t32). Thereafter, the winning state ends when 704 ms, which is the sum of the remaining ball processing time for processing the game balls remaining in the normal variable winning device 37, the ending period, and the return time, has elapsed (t33).
As shown in FIG. 3-8(d), in the opening pattern of pattern H2, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is opened at the start of the winning state (t41), and closed after 36 ms have elapsed (t42). Then, the closing time is 3000ms (t42 to t43), and the normal variable winning device 37 is opened again (t43). Thereafter, when the opening time of 1624 ms has passed, the normal variable winning device 37 is closed (t44), and the winning state ends when 704 ms, which is the sum of the remaining ball processing time, ending period, and return time, has elapsed (t45).
As shown in FIG. 3-8(e), in the opening pattern of pattern H3, the normal variable winning device 37 is opened at the start of the winning state (t51), and closed after 2800 ms have passed (t52). Thereafter, the winning state ends when 704 ms, which is the sum of the remaining ball processing time, ending period, and return time, has elapsed (t53).

Among such open patterns, pattern H3 is the most likely to win in the normal variable winning device 37, pattern H2 is next most likely to win, and pattern H1 is hardly likely to win.
Therefore, by allocating the open pattern as shown in Figure 3-8(b), support C is the most likely to win in the normal variable winning device 37, followed by supports A and B. It's easy to win, and without support, you can hardly hope to win.
It should be noted that it is only necessary that it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 in the state of general power support (second state, third state) than in the state of non-general power support (first state), and the probability, fluctuation It may be possible to change one or more of the time, the open time, and the maximum count number of general electricity.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be explained. FIG. 3-9 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in this embodiment.
The gaming states include a normal gaming state ST1, a first special gaming state ST2 based on the first special result (big hit), a second special gaming state ST3 based on the second special result (small hit), and a specific gaming state ST.
4. There is a remaining pending digestion state ST5.
In each game state, there is a performance mode that determines the performance mode of the game controlled by the performance control device 300, a main starting area that is the starting area that should be aimed mainly in the game state, and a type of special figure fluctuation display game that should be mainly executed. A certain main variable special figure and the firing direction of the game ball are determined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the starting winning hole 36 by hitting the left hand, and it is possible to aim to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 by hitting the right. In other words, it is possible for the player to select the target starting area according to his/her will. In addition, each game state is designed with the assumption that the game will be played mainly in either the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, and the player will play the game according to this design. As the game progresses, it is constructed so that it is more advantageous for the player to play the game mainly with one of the special figure variable display games that is determined to be the main one in the design. In addition, in this specification, one special figure variation display game determined as the main one in each gaming state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the normal game state ST1, there is no general power support that improves the open time per unit time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 and makes it easier to win, and shortens the variable time of the special figure variable display game and the regular figure variable display game. There is no shortage of time. The main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, and the main starting area is the starting winning hole 36, and in order to aim at this starting winning hole 36, the firing direction is left-handed. Furthermore, the performance mode that defines the performance mode is a normal stage.

The first special game state ST2 is a state in which there is no general electricity support and no time saving. In addition, the performance mode that defines the performance mode is the jackpot mode. In this first special game state ST2, the special variable winning device 38 is opened, so that the firing direction is right-handed.
In the second special game state ST3, power supply support and time saving may or may not be provided depending on the situation at the time of deriving the small hit. Basically, the state at the time of the small hit derivation is carried over, but when the special game state ST4 ending condition is met and the small win is derived, it becomes a small win.The general power support and time saving will end with the end of the special symbol fluctuation display game. Therefore, in this case, there will be no general electricity support or time saving. In addition, the performance mode that defines the performance mode is the small hit mode. In this second special game state ST3, since the special variable winning device 38 is opened, the firing direction is set to be right-handed, but right-handed firing may not be explicitly instructed.

The specific gaming state ST4 is a state that remains for a specified number of games after the first special gaming state ST2, after a support hit, or when the ceiling is reached, and improves the open time per unit time of the normal variable prize winning device 37. There is a state where there is public electricity support. If you have public power support, you can also save time by shortening the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game.

This specific gaming state ST4 includes a first specific gaming state ST41 in which the state of general power support is support A or B, and a second specific gaming state ST42 in which the state of general power support is support C, There is.
In the first specific game state ST41, the main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, the main starting area is the starting prize opening 36, and the firing direction is set to the left in order to aim at this starting winning opening 36. There is. As shown in FIG. 3-3, it is possible to cause the game ball to flow into the normal pattern starting gate 34 even when the ball is played left-handed, and the normal pattern fluctuation display game can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 3-8, if the result of the normal pattern variable display game is 1, the pattern H1 will be opened, so it is difficult to make a winning to the normal variable winning device 37. In this case, the display device 41 Instructions to hit right-handed are not given. However, a small right-handed instruction may be provided at the edge of the display area so that it is difficult for the player to recognize.
Further, when the winning number in the regular pattern fluctuation display game is 2 or 3, the opening pattern becomes pattern H2, and opening is performed as shown in FIG. 3-8(d). In this pattern H2 opening, a short opening is followed by a 3000 ms closing period, followed by a long opening, and during the 3000 ms closing period, the display device 41 notifies the user to change to right-handed batting. It has become so. As a result, it is possible to change the firing direction to right-handed shot until it is opened for a long time, and it is possible to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37.

That is, the first specific gaming state ST41 is a state in which it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than in the normal gaming state ST1 because there is an opening pattern of pattern H2, and as shown in FIG. 3-8(a). In this way, the execution time of the regular figure fluctuation display game is also shorter than in the normal game state ST1. Although it is easy to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 in this way, there is a gaming state in which the game is played by firing a game ball into an area different from the area where the normal variable winning device 37 is installed. be.

In the second specific game state ST42, the main variable special figure is the special figure 2 variable display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at this normal variable winning device 37. has been done. Since the second specific gaming state ST42 is an open pattern of pattern H3, it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than in the normal gaming state ST1 or the first specific gaming state ST41. As shown in a), the execution time of the regular figure fluctuation display game is also shorter than that of the normal game state ST1 and the first specific game state ST41. This is a game state in which a game is played by shooting game balls into the area where the normal variable prize winning device 37 is provided.

The specific gaming state ST4 described above is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state ST1 because there is general power support and it is possible to execute the special symbol 2 variable display game in which small wins occur frequently. This is an advantageous situation.
Also, since it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 in the second specific gaming state ST42 than in the first specific gaming state ST41, the second specific gaming state ST42 is better than the first specific gaming state ST41. is in an advantageous situation.
In other words, regarding the ease of winning in the normal variable winning device 37, there are two states: the first state, which is the normal gaming state ST1, and the second state, which is the first specific gaming state ST41, in which winning is easier than the normal gaming state ST1. It is configured to be controlled in one of the following states: the third state, which is the second specific gaming state ST42, in which winning is easier than the first specific gaming state ST41.

The remaining pending state ST5 is a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory remaining when the specific game state ST4 ends can be executed.
In this remaining pending state ST5, there is no general power support, but there is a time saving that shortens the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display game. Since there is no power supply support, the firing direction is set to be left-handed so as to aim at the starting prize opening 36, but since it is a short period following the specific game state ST4, there is no need to clearly instruct left-handed firing. . Further, the average of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game in the remaining pending consumption state ST5 is shorter than the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display game in the specific game state ST4.
The remaining hold consumption state ST5 mainly executes the special symbol 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory that mainly occurs in the specific game state ST4, so it is a state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST1. It is a state.

The transition of the gaming state is the derivation of the first special result (big hit), the derivation of the second special result (small hit),
This is done by deriving the support hit, ending the first special game state, ending the second special game state, playing the specified number of games, and reaching the ceiling.
When a jackpot is achieved in the normal gaming state ST1, the game shifts to a first special gaming state ST2. Further, when a jackpot is achieved in the specific gaming state ST4 or the remaining pending use state ST5, the game also shifts to the first special gaming state ST2.
After the first special gaming state ST2 ends, in the case of a jackpot with general power support, the general power support and time reduction will continue for a period until the conditions shown in Figure 3-6 (e) are met, and the specific game Transition to state ST4. The type of specific gaming state ST4 to be transitioned to differs depending on the type of jackpot; if the jackpot type is support A or B, the transition is to the first specific gaming state ST41, and if the jackpot type is support C, the transition is to the second specific gaming state The process moves to ST42.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot without general power support, if there is a second starting memory that is a remaining hold, it will move to the remaining hold extinguishing state ST5, and if there is no second starting memory that is a remaining hold, it will move to the normal gaming state ST5.
Move to 1. Incidentally, a jackpot without general power support is a jackpot based on 3R small hit C, and other jackpots are jackpots with general power support. That is, if the 3R small win C is derived, there is a high possibility that the advantageous state for the player will end.
Furthermore, when the ceiling is reached, the specific gaming state ST4 is entered without passing through the first special gaming state ST2.
Further, in the first specific gaming state ST41, it is possible to derive a support hit, and when a support win is derived, the game moves to a second specific gaming state ST42 without passing through the first special gaming state ST2.

In the specific game state ST4, the normal power supply support makes it easier for game balls to win in the normal variable winning device 37, so that the second starting memory can be generated, and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed. If the conditions shown in FIG. 3-6(e) are satisfied in this specific gaming state ST4, the general power support ends, and if there is a remaining hold that is the second start memory that occurred in the specific gaming state ST4, the remaining hold is The game enters the digested state ST5, and if there is no remaining reservation, the state shifts to the normal game state ST1.
In the case of the second specific game state ST42, the number of games that can be executed is large, and pattern H3 is opened in all winning types of the normal pattern variable display game, so it is easy to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37, The possibility that a jackpot or small win will be derived is higher than the possibility that the specified number of games will be played, and the possibility that the specific gaming state ST41 will continue after the first special gaming state ST2 is high.
On the other hand, in the case of the first specific gaming state ST41, the number of games that can be executed is small, and winnings in the normal variable prize winning device 37 can only be expected when pattern H2 is released, so there is a possibility that the specified number of games will be played. is higher than the possibility that a jackpot or small win will be derived in the first specific gaming state ST41, and there is a high possibility that the first specific gaming state ST41 will end and shift to the normal gaming state ST1.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the second starting memory is given priority over the first starting memory, but especially when a jackpot is achieved in the normal gaming state ST1, the second starting memory remains immediately after the start of the specific gaming state ST4. There is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game will be executed based on the first starting memory. This makes it possible to secure time for accumulating the second startup memory. In particular, specific gaming state S
The fluctuation time of the first special figure fluctuation display game at T4 is set to be a longer fluctuation time (for example, 100 s) than the fluctuation time of the second and subsequent times, so that time for accumulating the second starting memory can be secured. ing.

It is possible to stay in the remaining pending state ST5 until the special symbol 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory, which is the remaining pending, ends. After the remaining pending state ST5 ends, the state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the upper limit number of the second start memory is 1, the maximum number of remaining reservations is 1.
What is executed in the remaining pending consumption state ST5 is a special figure 2 variable display game in which the probability of winning a small win is higher than that of the special figure 1 variable display game, and again in the specific game state ST4 or the first special game state ST2.
This is a state in which there is a higher possibility of returning to a state advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state ST1.
The remaining pending state ST5 is a state in which the player feels discouraged immediately after a state advantageous to the player, such as the specific gaming state ST4 or the first special gaming state ST2, has ended, and the player is in a state where the player feels disappointed. A player can have a sense of expectation by performing a performance in which he is given a chance to execute one special figure variation display game with a high possibility of returning.

If a small win occurs in the normal gaming state ST1, specific gaming state ST4, or remaining hold extinguishment state ST5, a transition is made to the second special gaming state ST3.
When a game ball flows into a specific area in the second special gaming state ST3 (V winning), the state shifts to the first special gaming state ST2. When game balls flow into the special variable prize winning device 38, there is a possibility that they may flow into a specific area, and it is advantageous for the player to play many special figure 2 variable display games with a high probability of small winnings. Become. As shown in FIG. 3-7, the probability of the game balls flowing into a specific area is determined by using a lever member provided inside the special variable prize winning device 38 that can control the flow of game balls into the specific area. 38f, the control is performed by switching between a state in which the game balls are allowed to flow into the specific area and a state in which the game balls are not allowed to flow into the specific area.

In the special figure 1 variable display game, the probability of a small win being derived is low, and in the second specific game state ST3, it is difficult to enter the special variable prize winning device 38 or enter the specific area, so the first The possibility of transitioning to special gaming state ST2 is low.
In the special figure 2 variable display game, there is a high probability that a small win will be derived, and in the second specific game state ST3, the operation mode is such that it is easy to enter the special variable prize winning device 38 or enter the specific area. There is a high possibility of transitioning to special gaming state ST2.

Further, if the game ball does not flow into the specific area in the second special gaming state ST3, the state shifts to the specific gaming state ST4, the remaining reservation extinguishing state ST5, or the normal gaming state ST1.
If the end condition of the specific gaming state ST4 is not satisfied, the process moves to the specific gaming state ST4. In addition, if the end condition of the specific gaming state ST4 is satisfied and there is a remaining hold that is the second starting memory that occurred in the specific gaming state ST4, the state shifts to the remaining holding extinguishing state ST5. Also,
In the case of a small win in the normal gaming state ST1, or when the end conditions of the specific gaming state ST4 are satisfied and there is no remaining reservation, the game shifts to the normal gaming state ST1.

FIG. 3-10(a) shows the response when a new time saving (specific gaming state ST4) activation trigger occurs in each gaming state.
Here, a time saver, b time saver, and c time saver are all specific game states ST4, but a time saver is the specific game state ST4 after passing through the first special game state ST2, and b time saver is the one that has reached the specific game state ST4 through the first special game state ST2. By reaching , the player enters the specific gaming state ST4 without passing through the first special gaming state ST2, and c time saving means that the player enters the specific gaming state ST4 without passing through the first special gaming state ST2 due to support. It is.

In the normal game state ST1, when an opportunity to activate the time saver a occurs due to a jackpot or a small win resulting in a V prize, the time saver a is activated. In the normal game state ST1, if an opportunity to activate b time saving occurs due to reaching the ceiling, b time saving is activated. Normal gaming state ST
In No. 1, since the support hit is not derived, there is no trigger for c time-saving operation, and the operation is disabled.

a By winning a jackpot or winning a small prize in the time-saving specific game state ST4, a
When a time saving activation trigger occurs, a new time saving is activated. a Time-saving specific game state ST
If an opportunity to activate b time saving occurs due to reaching the ceiling in step 4, the operation is switched to b time saving. When an opportunity to activate c time saving occurs as a result of the support hit being derived in the specific game state ST4 of a time saving, the operation is switched to c time saving. Note that the support hit can be derived only when the support is A or B.

b. By winning a jackpot or winning a small prize in the time-saving specific game state ST4, a.
When a time saving operation trigger occurs, the system switches to a new time saving mode and activates it. Since reaching the ceiling cannot occur in the b time saving specific game state ST4, b time saving in this case cannot be operated. In the specific game state ST4 of b time saving, the support hit is not derived, so the activation trigger of c time saving does not occur and it is disabled.

c By winning a jackpot or winning a small prize in the time-saving specific game state ST4, a.
When a time saving operation trigger occurs, the system switches to a new time saving mode and activates it. In the c time saving specific game state ST4, when the trigger for b time saving is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the b time saving is switched to and activated. In the c time saving specific game state ST4, the support hit is not derived, so the c time saving activation opportunity does not occur and the operation is disabled.

FIG. 3-10(b) shows the display mode of the game status display section 56 provided in the collective display device 50.
As described above, the game state display section 56 includes a first game state display section 56a that informs the player of the hitting method that is advantageous to the player (the hitting method that corresponds to the game state) between left-handed hitting (normal hitting) and right-handed hitting. and,
There is a second gaming state display section 56b that notifies you that you are in a time saving state (when the variable time reduction function is activated). The first game state display section 56a displays the firing direction by lighting or extinguishing the light emitters C6 and C7, and the second game state display section 56b displays the presence or absence of time saving by lighting or extinguishing the light emitter D7. It is supposed to be done.

In the normal gaming state ST1, the light emitters C6 and C7 are turned off to indicate that the player is playing left-handed.
The light emitter D7 is turned off to indicate that it is not in a time saving state.
In supports A and B which are the first specific gaming state ST41 of the specific gaming state ST4, the light emitting body C
6. Turn off C7 to indicate left-handed batting, and turn on light emitter D7 to indicate time saving mode.
In the first specific gaming state ST41 of the specific gaming state ST4, when supports A and B are in the normal winning state, the light emitters C6 and C7 are lit to indicate that the player is hitting right, and the light emitter D is turned on.
7 is lit to indicate the time saving state. However, the winning result is 1 and the pattern H1
In the case of an open pattern, the probability of winning is low, so the display device 41 does not clearly instruct the player to hit the ball to the right. If the winning result is 2 or 3 and the opening pattern is pattern H2, the display device 41 clearly instructs the player to hit the ball to the right.

In the support C which is the second specific gaming state ST42 of the specific gaming state ST4, the light emitting body C6,
C7 is lit to indicate that the player is in a right-handed batting state, and light emitter D7 is lit to indicate that the player is in a time saving state.
In the first special game state ST2 and the second special game state ST3, the light emitters C6 and C7 are lit to indicate that the player is hitting right, and the light emitter D7 is turned off to indicate that the player is not in the time saving state. In addition,
If a small hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game before the number of executions of the game reaches the specified number in the specific gaming state ST4, the time saving state will remain in the second special gaming state ST3, so the light emitting body D7 is lit to indicate the time saving state.
In addition, when a small hit is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal gaming state ST1 or the first specific gaming state ST41, the display device 41 clearly indicates the right-hand hit because the probability of winning is low. Not performed.

FIG. 3-11 shows an example of a mode of outputting a signal to the outside of the gaming machine.
As shown in FIG. 3-11(a), in the normal game state ST1, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal indicating whether the normal symbol fluctuation display game has a high probability is turned OFF. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, since there is no probability variation in the normal symbol variation display game, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is always OFF.
The normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal indicating that the open time of the normal variable winning device 37 is extended is turned OFF, indicating that the open time of the normal variable winning device 37 is not extended. Further, the normal symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal indicating that the normal symbol variation display game is in the time saving state is turned OFF, indicating that the normal symbol variation display game is not in the time reduction state.
The winning easy state determination signal indicating the start of general electricity support is turned OFF, and the winning easy state signal indicating the state of general electricity support is undefined, indicating that it is not general electricity support.

Support A, which is the first specific gaming state ST41 of the specific gaming state ST4 from the normal gaming state;
When B starts (t61), the normal electric accessory 1 opening extension state signal is turned ON, indicating that the opening time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is extended, and the normal symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal is also turned on. It is turned ON, indicating that the time saving state of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is in progress.
In addition, the winning easy state confirmation signal is kept ON for a certain period (for example, 32 ms) (t6
1 to t62), indicating that the winning easy state has started. In addition, the winning easy status signal is 01H
is output, indicating support A or B.
When the specific game state ST4 ends and returns to the normal game state ST1 (t63), the normal electric accessory 1 opening extension state signal is turned OFF, and the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned OFF. Further, the winning easy state signal is undefined.

The value of the easy-to-win state signal is indicated by a combination of on/off (hexadecimal) of four signals 1 to 4. For example, in this case, the winning easy state signal 1 is turned on and the winning easy state signals 2 to 4 are turned off, so that a signal of 01H is output. The other signals shown in Figure 3-11, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, the normal electric accessory 1 open extended state signal, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the winning easy state confirmation signal, are one signal. Information is output by turning it on and off.

FIG. 3-11(b) shows a case where support C, which is the second specific gaming state ST42 of the specific gaming state ST4, is started from the normal gaming state ST1. It is basically the same as FIG. 3-11(a), but the only difference is that 00H is output as the easy-to-win state signal, indicating support C.
In other words, it is possible to determine whether the game is in the first specific gaming state ST41 (support A or B) or the second specific gaming state ST42 (support C) using an external device.

FIG. 3-12 shows an example of a mode of outputting a signal to the outside of the gaming machine.
As shown in FIG. 3-12(a), among the winning states in which the normal pattern variable display game is a win and the normal variable winning device 37 is opened, in the case of pattern H1, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON. The firing position designation signal 2 is turned off, and left-handed firing is designated for the external device. In the case of pattern H1, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 is short and winning is hardly expected, so left-handed hitting is specified. Note that, as described above, the first gaming state display section 56a of the collective display device 50 indicates that the player is playing right-handed.
Further, in the case of pattern H2, firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned ON, and right-handed firing is designated to the external device.
As shown in FIG. 3-12(b), if it is support C which is the second specific gaming state ST42, if it is the second special gaming state ST3, and if it is the first special gaming state ST2, the firing Position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned on, and right-handed hitting is designated to the external device.

Figures 3-12(c) to (h) show the output mode of the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 when the small hit and the regular hit overlap.
FIG. 3-12(c) shows a case where the second special game state ST3 is started in a winning state in pattern H1. With the start of the hit state, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON, but the firing position designation signal 2 is kept OFF (t81). Thereafter, with the start of the second special game state ST3, the firing position designation signal 2 is turned ON (t82). Even after the winning state ends, the second special game state ST3 continues, so the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 remain ON (t83). Thereafter, with the end of the second special game state ST3, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned OFF (t84).

FIG. 3-12(d) shows a case where the second special game state ST3 is started in a winning state in pattern H2. With the start of the hit state, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned ON (t91). Even if the second special game state ST3 is started, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 remain ON (t92), and even if the winning state ends, the firing position is specified because the second special game state ST3 continues. Signals 1 and 2 remain ON (t93). Thereafter, with the end of the second special game state ST3, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned off (t94).

FIG. 3-12(e) shows a case where the winning state in pattern H1 is executed during the execution of the second special game state ST3. With the start of the second special game state ST3, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned ON (t101). Even if the winning state of pattern H1 is started, the second special game state ST3 continues, so the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 remain ON (t102). Even after the winning state ends, the second special game state ST3 continues, so the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 remain ON (t103). Thereafter, with the end of the second special game state ST3, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned off (t104).

FIG. 3-12(f) shows a case where the winning state in pattern H2 is executed during the execution of the second special game state ST3. With the start of the second special game state ST3, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned ON (t111), and even if the winning state of pattern H2 starts, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 remain ON ( t112). Even after the winning state ends, the second special game state ST3 continues, so the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 remain ON (t113). Thereafter, with the end of the second special game state ST3, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned off (t114).

FIG. 3-12(g) shows a case where a winning state in pattern H1 is started during execution of the second special gaming state ST3, and the winning state ends after the end of the second special gaming state ST3. With the start of the second special game state ST3, firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned ON (t121), and even if the winning state of pattern H1 has started, the second special game state ST3 continues, so the firing position is designated. Signals 1 and 2 remain ON (t122). When the second special game state ST3 ends, the firing position designation signal 1 is maintained in the ON state, but the firing position designation signal 2 is turned OFF, based on the fact that the winning state of the pattern H1 continues (t123). Thereafter, as the hit state ends, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off (t124).

FIG. 3-12(h) shows a case where a winning state in pattern H2 is started during execution of the second special gaming state ST3, and the winning state ends after the end of the second special gaming state ST3. With the start of the second special game state ST3, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned ON (t131), and even if the winning state of pattern H2 starts, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 remain ON ( t132). Since the winning state of pattern H2 continues even after the second special game state ST3 ends, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 remain ON (t133). Thereafter, as the hit state ends, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned off (t134).

Control of a gaming machine that plays such a game will be explained below. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be explained. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of the main processing shown in FIGS. 3-13 and 3-14, and the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 3-15, which is performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. The main processing starts when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in Figures 3-13 and 3-14, the process of disabling interrupts (step Stack pointer setting processing (step X2) is performed to set a stack pointer that is the start address of the stack pointer. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (eg, D register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h or 01h as the upper one, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and firing of game balls is prohibited.

Thereafter, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and processing for setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, the game control device
A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from 00 to start normally.
is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the gaming control device 100 starts up first and sends a command to the sub-control device before the sub-control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) starts up, the sub-control device can avoid missing commands. That is, when the game control device 100 turns on the power, there is a predetermined delay for starting the main control means (the game control device 100) and waiting for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the performance control device 300, etc.). It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

Furthermore, the power-on delay timer measures time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (such as a RAM area or register that is not subject to validity determination). Thereby, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (step X8), and if a power outage has occurred (step wait until it is blocked.
Specifically, in step Determine if there is. If the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the set number of checks. If the power failure monitoring signal does not remain on for the number of checks, the process returns to determining whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, if the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of times of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54, which will be described later. In this way, by determining that a power outage has occurred if the power outage monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power outage due to noise, etc., and to appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power outage monitoring means that monitors the occurrence of a power outage during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power outage that occurs during a period in which the startup of the game control device 100 serving as the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the memory contents from the previous power cut are still retained, so backup processing will be performed in the event of a power outage. There's no need. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden on control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if a power outage has not occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10).
If the timer value is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power outage has occurred (step X8). Furthermore, if the timer value is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, if the waiting time has ended,
Access to readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM is permitted (step X11), and off data is output (set to no output state) to all output ports (step X12).

Next, set the serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) (step X13), and A process (step X14) of activating a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the clock generator 111 (clock generator) is performed. Note that the CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator within the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113.
11A is provided with a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that provides a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to a random number generation circuit.
Next, a RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, the RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM, regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure test area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure test area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X16), and if it is normal (step X16; Y),
Power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) where the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal
(Step X17). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), a checksum calculation process (step It is determined whether the checksums match (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y)
Since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20) and the process moves to step X21.

Further, if it is determined that the check data in the power outage inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), and if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step X19; N), Based on the state read in step X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the on state (step X21). If at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (step device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). When the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), a main abnormal error notification command is sent to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag set here is the probability setting flag that was set before the power outage occurred. In other words, if the power to the gaming machine is cut off and restarted while changing the probability setting value,
Since the operation of the gaming control device 100 is stopped, the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X25). After that, output the ON data of the security signal and output the OFF data of the signals other than the security signal (step X26).
, return to step X25.

Furthermore, if both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the on state (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). Then, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step
;N), a probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). This shifts to probability setting value change mode. Thereafter, a command for changing the probability setting is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X30), and the process moves to step X31. The production control device 300 controls the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, and the speaker 1 based on receiving the command for changing the probability setting.
A notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is made by outputting audio from 9a and 19b.
On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), a process of clearing the probability setting value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the probability setting value area in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes "setting 1." After that, step X29,
After processing X30, the process moves to step X31.

Further, if at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (steps X22; N and ;N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the on state based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). Then, if the setting key switch 152 is not in the on state (step
), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

When it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the on state (step X43; N)
That is, if both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the OFF state, the process moves to step X41 to perform processing in the case of normal recovery from a power outage.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the on state (step
;Y), the process moves to step X44 and initialization processing is performed. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 constitutes an initialization operation section that can be operated from the outside, and the gaming control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation section. act as a means of change.

Further, when the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state (step X35; Y), a probability setting confirmation flag is set (step X36). This shifts to probability setting value confirmation mode. After that, the command for checking the probability setting is sent to the production control board (production control device 300)
(Step X37). In the production control device 300, based on receiving the command for checking the probability setting, the display on the display device 41, the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 are changed.
, the operation of the board presentation device 44, the output of audio from the speakers 19a and 19b, etc.
Notify that the probability setting value is being checked.

Then, in order to guarantee output of the security signal for 50 msec or more, a value corresponding to 128 msec is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change/confirmation process (step It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, 12
If the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 8 m seconds, the security signal is continuously output by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. In other words, even if the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 m seconds, the security signal will not be output for 128 m seconds after transitioning to the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode. Ru. Note that the value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 msec. However, after switching to probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode,
Since it is necessary to output a security signal for 0 msec, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 msec or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33). In step X33, the determination is not made based on the state read in step ). If it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the off state, the probability setting value is determined.
If the setting key switch 152 is not in the off state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (step Returning, if a power outage has occurred (step X34; Y), the process moves to step X55. If it is determined that a power outage has occurred in step In step X23, it is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, if the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33; Y), a process for prohibiting interrupts (step X38) is performed. From the time the interrupt is enabled (step It will be done. In the timer interrupt processing, probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X122), which is processing regarding probability setting values, is performed. In other words, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability setting value is completed (or until a power outage occurs).
Next, a command to end the notification is sent to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X39). The production control device 300 ends the notification being executed (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification that the probability setting value is being confirmed) based on receiving the notification termination command. .

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, if the probability setting checking flag is set. is the area to be initialized (e.g. power outage inspection area,
A power outage recovery process (step X41) is performed in which the initial value at the time of power outage recovery is saved in the checksum area and the area related to error/fraud monitoring. The probability setting confirmation flag is cleared in step X41.
Thereafter, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X42), and the process moves to step X47. In the case of this embodiment, in step Send a command. The command for specifying the screen is when both Tokuzu 1 and Tokuzu 2 are in normal processing (described later), that is, when they are waiting for a customer and are not in the execution of the Tokuzu variable display game and are not in a special game state. Sends the command for the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise sends the command for the recovery screen. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high probability number information command or the like may also be transmitted.

On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). In step Instead, the RAM area for game control (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared in step X44. Note that in step X44,
You may or may not clear the stack area and unused area.

Then, save the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (step X45)
. The areas to be initialized here are the customer waiting demonstration area and the area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X46). In the case of this embodiment, in step A demonstration screen is displayed, and a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization using light and sound for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands,
It also transmits a performance number information command and a support number information command, which is information on the number of executions of the special symbol variable display game with public power support.

Next, a process of activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. A bit transposition pattern is a method of replacing the bit arrangement of extracted random numbers (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). This is a pattern that determines the By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Alternatively, the settings may be set arbitrarily by the user.

After that, the specified registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on.
The value of is extracted, and the corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the special pattern random number that determines the winning pattern of the special pattern, the random number (hit random number) that determines the winning pattern of the standard pattern, the winning pattern of the standard pattern) After saving it in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of the general pattern random number that determines the , (step X48), interrupts are permitted (step X49). CPU111A used in this embodiment
The random number generation circuit in the software is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, so by using this value as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers, it is possible to generate them by software. It is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers that are generated, making it difficult for players to obtain fraudulent random numbers.

Subsequently, initial value random number updating processing (step X50) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number, special symbol random number, hit random number, and common symbol random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. has been done. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock, and the special pattern random number, hit random number, and general pattern random number are the processing units of the program. CTC output that has the same cycle as timer interrupt processing (CTC (CTC0) different from timer interrupt processing CTC (CTC0))
This is a "low speed counter" that is updated based on CTC2)). In addition, for special pattern random numbers, winning random numbers, and regular pattern random numbers, we adopt the so-called "initial value change method" that changes the starting value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random numbers go around. are doing. Note that each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter type by +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random type in which all values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the special pattern random number, hit random number, and regular pattern random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update processing in step X50, processing to disable interrupts (step X51)
and performs performance display editing processing (step X52). After performing processing to permit interrupts (step X53), it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (step X54), and if a power outage has not occurred (step (Step X5
Return to 0). That is, when a power outage has not occurred, initial value random number updating processing, performance display editing processing, and power outage monitoring are repeatedly performed. By enabling interrupts (step X49) before initial value random number update processing (step It is possible to avoid stressing the interrupt processing by having to wait for the initial value random number update processing.

Note that the initial value random number update process in step In order to avoid random number update processing from being executed, when performing initial value random number update processing in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts before updating and canceling interrupts.
If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in this embodiment, but only in the main process, there will be no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage that main processing is simplified.

On the other hand, if a power outage has occurred (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting off data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, save the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57).
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58).
Furthermore, after performing checksum calculation processing (step
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step X61), the game machine waits for the power to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power failure, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power failure has been correctly backed up. This can be determined at the time of re-input.

From the above, there is a main control means (gaming control device 100) that controls games in an integrated manner, and slave control means (payout control device 200, performance control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. ), the main control means includes a standby means (game control device) that sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the start-up of the main control means and waiting for the start-up of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100), and a power outage monitoring means (gaming control device 100) that monitors the occurrence of a power outage during the predetermined standby time.
Furthermore, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power outage monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power outage, and the power outage monitoring means (gaming control device 100) , it is determined that a power outage has occurred if the power outage monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (gaming control device 100) includes a RAM 111C that can store data,
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit.
A gaming control device 100) is provided, and the operating state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.
In addition, the main control means (gaming control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started at predetermined intervals. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 3-15 is started.

When timer interrupt processing starts, register bank 1 is specified (step X1).
01). Switching to register bank 1 is equivalent to register saving processing in which the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in main processing) is transferred to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (eg, D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same process as step X4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step X103) is performed to receive inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, to read the status of each input port.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and if the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y), , probability setting change/confirmation process (step X122)
and completes the timer interrupt processing.
On the other hand, if both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirmation flag are not set (step Output processing (step X105) is performed to control the drive of actuators such as the solenoid 38f and general electric solenoid 37c). Note that when a firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main process, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the dispensing control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the firing permission signal is the first signal indicating the firing permission state as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (firing permission signal) indicating the firing permission state as seen from the payout control device is also a payout control signal. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two firing permission signals are output to the firing control device, and when both of them are permission to fire, the game ball is configured to be in a state where it can be fired.

Next, a payout command sending process (step
Random number update processing 2 (step X108) is performed. In the random number update process 1 (step X107), the initial values (start values) of the special pattern random numbers, hit random numbers, and regular pattern random numbers that are the targets of the initial value random number update process are updated. After that, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 3
7a, Monitoring whether or not normal signals are input from the winning opening switch 35a and the big winning opening switch 38a, setting prize balls, opening the front frame and glass frame, normal variable winning device 37, special variable winning A prize opening switch/state monitoring process (step X109) is performed to monitor errors such as unauthorized winnings to the device 38.

Next, it is determined whether abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that in the special variable winning device 38, the number of game balls ejected from the special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball ejection port switch 38e) 38 (the number of game balls detected by the big prize opening switch 38a). Note that if abnormal discharge is occurring, an abnormal discharge flag is set. If abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process moves to step X116. In other words, the game is prevented from proceeding.

On the other hand, if abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), special pattern game processing (step X114) and performs segment LED editing processing (step X115) that drives the segment LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 that display the special figure fluctuation display game and various information related to the game to display desired content. conduct.

Next, a magnet tampering monitoring process (step board radio wave fraud monitoring processing (step Abnormal discharge monitoring processing (step X119) is performed. Furthermore, external information editing processing (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and performance display monitor control processing (step X121) for controlling the performance display device 153 are performed, and the timer interrupt processing is ended. do.

In this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (i.e., the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (i.e., the process of designating register bank 0) are performed on interrupt returns. (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines may require an instruction to execute a process for restoring an interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring register bank designation.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (step X112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be explained. In the special figure game process, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 3
It monitors the input of step 7a, controls the entire processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game, and sets the display of special figures.

As shown in FIG. 3-16, in the special figure game process, first, starting port switch monitoring processing (step A1) is performed to monitor winnings of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a. In the starting port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 37 that serves as the starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as jackpot random numbers) are extracted and a special prize based on the winning is extracted. A game result preliminary determination is performed to determine the game result based on winnings in advance at a stage before the start of the figure variation display game.

Next, a big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning a prize opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball in the big winning a prize opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed. Then, a specific area switch monitoring process is performed to monitor the detection of game balls in the specific area 38h (step A3).

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step A4). Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A5). The value of the special figure game processing timer is “
0" (Step A5; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already expired, register the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. is set (step A6), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the table (step A7).
Then, a subroutine call is made in accordance with the special figure game processing number (step A8).

In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of variation of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the setting of the variation during the special figure variation display game are performed. Special figure normal processing (step A9) is performed to set information necessary for processing.
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "1", special figure fluctuation processing is performed to set the stop display time of the special figure and the information necessary to perform the process during special figure display. (Step A
10).

In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variable display game is a jackpot, fanfare commands are set according to the type of jackpot, and the jackpot for each jackpot is set. Special figure display processing (step A11) that sets the fanfare time according to the opening pattern and the information necessary to perform the fanfare/interval processing.
)I do.

In step A8, if the special drawing game processing number is "3", set the opening time of the grand prize opening, update the number of openings, and set the information necessary to perform the process during the opening of the grand prize opening. Fanfare/interval processing (step A12) is performed.
In step A8, if the special drawing game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if it is the final round, an ending command is set, or a jackpot remaining slot is set. A big prize opening opening process (step A13) is performed to set information necessary for performing ball processing.

In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is the final round, the processing to set the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be ejected and the jackpot end processing are performed. Big winning hole remaining ball processing (step A14) to set the information necessary for the process.
I do.
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "6", a jackpot end process (step A15) is performed in which information necessary for performing the special figure normal process is set.

In step A8, if the special game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small winning process. Small win fanfare processing (step A16) is performed to set necessary information.
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hit process (step A
17).
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "9", processing to set the time for the remaining balls that won in the big prize opening to be ejected during the small winning process, and small winning ending processing. A small hit remaining ball process (step A18) is performed to set the information necessary to carry out the process.
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "10", a small hit end process (step A19) is performed in which information necessary for performing the special figure normal process is set.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A
20) Perform a symbol fluctuation control process (step A21) related to controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special symbol 1 display 51. After preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 display 52 (step A22), a symbol fluctuation control process related to controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special symbol 2 display 52 is performed (step A23). . Thereafter, a lever solenoid control process (step A24) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed, and the special figure game process is ended. On the other hand, in step A5, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A5;
N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process moves to step A20 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common process performed in the above-mentioned starting port switch monitoring process will be explained. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input to the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

As shown in FIG. 3-17, in the special figure starting switch common process, first, information regarding the number of winnings to the monitored starting opening switch of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is transmitted to the gaming machine. Loads the starting port signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external management device of No. 10 (step A131), updates the loaded value by +1 (step A132), and determines whether the output count overflows (step A131). Step A133). If the output count does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM starting port signal output count area (step A134), and the process moves to step A135. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process moves to step A135. In this embodiment, values from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. If the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by updating by +1, and it is determined that the number of outputs has overflowed.

Next, out of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether the number of special symbols pending (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch is less than the upper limit value (step A135). If the number of reserved special drawings to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N
) ends the special figure starting port switch common processing.

In addition, if the number of reserved special figures to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of reserved special figures to be updated (the number of reserved special figures 1 or the number of reserved special figures 2) is updated by +1 ( Step A13
6) Save the target starting opening winning flag (step A137). Next, calculate the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the monitored start switch and the number of reserved special drawings (step A138), and save the jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process to the RWM jackpot random number storage area. (Step A139).

Next, extract the special symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored and prepare it (Step A1
40), save in the RWM special pattern random number storage area (step A141).
Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A145), and special figure reservation information determination processing (step A146) is performed.
Next, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting gate switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations (step A147), perform production command setting processing (step A148),
Finish the special figure starting port switch common processing.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the starting area of the starting prize opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, and extracts a predetermined random number, which becomes the right to execute the variable display game. It constitutes a start-up storage means that stores a predetermined number of items as a memory. In addition, the starting storage means (gaming control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on winnings of game balls into the first starting winning hole (starting winning hole 36) up to a predetermined number as the first starting memory. Various random numbers are memorized and extracted based on winnings of game balls to the second starting prize opening (normal variable winning device 37).
A predetermined number is stored as a second startup memory up to an upper limit.

[Special figure reservation information determination process]
Next, special figure reservation information determination processing (step A14) in the above-mentioned starting gate switch common processing
6) will be explained in detail. The special figure pending information determination process is a prefetch process that determines result-related information corresponding to the corresponding starting memory before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding starting memory.

As shown in FIG. 3-18, first, a jackpot determination process (step A154) is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. Then, if the determination result is a jackpot (step A155; Y), set a jackpot special symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (step A156), and step The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number prepared in A140 is acquired (step A157), and the process moves to step A168.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a jackpot (step A155; N), a small hit determination process (step A159) is performed to determine whether or not it is a small hit based on whether the jackpot random value matches the small hit determination value. conduct. Then, when the judgment result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a special symbol random number check table for small hit is set (step A161), and prepared in step A140 of the special symbol start switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (step A162), and the process moves to step A168.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), a support hit determination process (
Step A163) is performed. Then, if the determination result is not a support hit (step A164
;N) sets the stop symbol information of a miss (step A167), and moves to the process of step A168.
In addition, when the determination result is a support hit (step A164; Y), a special symbol random number check table for support hit is set (step A165), and prepared in step A140 of the special symbol start opening switch common processing. The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (step A166), and the process moves to step A168.
Incidentally, the support hit can be derived only when the gaming state is the first specific gaming state ST41, and here, the determination is made in consideration of the gaming state in which the special symbol variation display game based on the starting memory is executed.

Then, a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and performance command setting processing is performed (step A169). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A170) is performed to set special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, and a variation pattern setting process is performed to set a variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step A170). A171).
Thereafter, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to a first half variation number indicating a first half variation pattern and a second half variation number indicating a second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A172), and production command setting processing is performed. (Step A173), the special figure reservation information determination process is ended. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A170 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A171 are similar to the process executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure normal process.

Through the above processing, a pre-read symbol command containing the result of the special pattern variation display game based on the starting memory of the pre-read target and a pre-reading variation pattern command containing information on the variation pattern in the special pattern variation display game based on the starting memory are prepared. and transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (pre-reading result) of the result-related information (whether it is a jackpot or not and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory is controlled in advance before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, and in particular, by changing the decorative special symbol start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result-related information is provided to the player before the start timing of the special symbol variation display game. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting memory means (game controlling device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (for example, whether or not it will result in a special result). etc.) serves as a preliminary determination means. Furthermore, the timing to determine in advance the random value stored corresponding to the starting memory is not only at the time of winning the starting prize when the starting memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be explained. As shown in FIG. 3-19, in the special figure normal process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 pending number (second starting memory number) is "0" (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 pending number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 pending number (first starting memory number) is "0" (step A305). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings 1 is "0" (step A305; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (step A309), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (step A309;N) sets a customer waiting demonstration flag in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A311), and a production command setting process (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A313), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A314). Then, the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316).
), the special figure normal processing ends. That is, when the special figure fluctuation display game can be started but the starting conditions are not met, the production control device 300 issues a customer waiting demonstration command that is waiting information.
It will be sent to you.
On the other hand, in step A309, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A309;
Y) moves to the process of step A313 without performing the processes of steps A310 to A312.

Also, in step A301, if the number of reserved special drawings 2 is not "0" (step A301;
N) prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the number of special figures 2 reservation (step A302
). Next, the production command setting process (step A303) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (
Step A304) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.
In addition, in step A305, if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is not "0" (step A305;
N) prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations (step A306
). Next, the production command setting process (step A307) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (
Step A308) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A308) in the above-mentioned special figure normal process will be explained. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 3-20(a), first, a special symbol 1 variation flag indicating the type of special symbol variation display game to be executed (here, special symbol 1) is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321). . Next, loss information and jackpot information are set in the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether the first special figure fluctuation display game is a jackpot by determining the jackpot random number, and the first special figure fluctuation display game is A process of setting loss information and small hit information in the small hit flag to determine whether it is a small hit or not, and a support hit to determine whether the first special symbol fluctuation display game is a support hit or not. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) is performed to set losing information and support hit information to the flag.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information)
323), special figure information setting processing (step A324) is performed to set special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern. As parameters, the game state, the number of pending games, the stopped symbol pattern number, the remaining number of general power support times, etc. are used. Next, a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table is prepared, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set (step A325).
). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) is performed to set a variation pattern that is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, and a variation start information setting process is performed to set information on the start of variation in the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure fluctuation processing is set as the processing number (step A328).
, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal related to the start of variation of special symbol 1 (for example, special symbol 1 fluctuating signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1 display 5
Set the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the flashing cycle timer (step A33).
3). Next, the initial value (here "0") is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure normal process will be explained. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is similar to the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 3-20(a). This is done for the 2-start memory.

As shown in FIG. 3-20(b), first, a special symbol 2 variation flag indicating the type of special symbol variation display game to be executed (here, special symbol 2) is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341). . Next, loss information and jackpot information are set in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether the second special figure fluctuation display game is a jackpot by determining the jackpot random number, and the second special figure fluctuation display game is A process of setting loss information and small hit information in the small hit flag to determine whether it is a small hit or not, and a support hit to determine whether the second special symbol fluctuation display game is a support hit or not. A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed to set losing information and support hit information to the flag.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information)
343), special figure information setting processing (step A344) is performed to set special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern. As parameters, the game state, the number of pending games, the stopped symbol pattern number, the remaining number of general power support times, etc. are used. Next, a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table is prepared, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set (step A345).
). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) is performed to set a variation pattern that is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, and a variation start information setting process is performed to set information on the start of variation in the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure fluctuation processing is set as the processing number (step A348).
, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal related to the start of variation of special symbol 2 (for example, special symbol 2 fluctuating signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2 display 5
Set the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the flashing cycle timer (Step A35).
3). Next, the initial value (here "0") is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a special figure variable display game execution control means that executes the special figure variable display game based on the starting memory stored in the starting memory means. The special figure fluctuation display game execution control means executes the first special figure fluctuation display game as the special figure fluctuation display game based on the first start memory, and executes the second special figure change display game as the special figure change display game based on the second start memory. A figure fluctuation display game will be executed.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 3-21 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of this embodiment.
In this special pattern 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A431), and if it is a jackpot (step A431; Y), the special pattern 1 special pattern random number storage area (reserved number Load the special pattern random number from 1) (step A432). Next, special map 1
A jackpot symbol table is set (step A433), and a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A434). This process selects the jackpot type.

After that, a special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A435), and a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 display 51) and the halt symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437), the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is obtained, and the time reduction judgment data is obtained. The area is saved (step A438), and production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting a variation pattern scenario, which is information regarding the execution mode of the special gaming state, the performance mode after the special gaming state ends, and the transition of the variable selection table group after the special gaming state ends. . Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A455).

On the other hand, if the jackpot 1 flag is not a jackpot (step A431; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A440), and if it is a small hit (step A44).
0; Y) loads the special pattern random number from the special pattern 1 special pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A441). Next, set the special figure 1 small winning symbol table (step A442).
, acquire the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number and save it in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A443). Through this process, the type of small win is selected. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A444), the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A445), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A444). Prepare the corresponding decorative special command (Step A)
455).

Further, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A440; N), it is determined whether the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (step A446), and if it is a support hit (step A44).
6; Y) loads the special pattern random number from the special pattern 1 special pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step A447). Next, set the symbol table per special figure 1 support (step A448
), acquires the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number and saves it in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A449). This process selects the support type.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A450), and the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction judgment data area (step A450). Step A451), the production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A452), and a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A455).
In addition, if the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (step A446; N), the stop symbol number at the time of miss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A453), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. (Step A454), and prepare a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (Step A455). Through the above processing,
A stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is set.
Note that the support win can be derived only when the gaming state is the first specific gaming state ST41, so steps A446 to A4 are performed only when the gaming state is the first specific gaming state ST41.
52 processing may be performed.

After that, save the decorative special figure command in the decorative special figure command area (step A456),
Performance command setting processing (step A457) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the production control device 300. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (step A458), clear the special symbol 1 special symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (step A459), The special figure 1 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 3-22 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of this embodiment. Note that the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, but is performed for the special figure 2.
In this special pattern 2 stop pattern setting process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A471), and if it is a jackpot (step A471; Y), the special pattern 2 special pattern random number storage area (reserved number Load the special pattern random number from 1) (step A472). Next, special map 2
A jackpot symbol table is set (step A473), and a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is obtained and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A474). This process selects the jackpot type.

After that, the special figure 2 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A475), and the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A476). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 2 display 52) and the halt symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A477), the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is obtained, and the time reduction judgment data is obtained. area (step A478), and save production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and probability state (step A479). These pieces of information are for setting a variation pattern scenario, which is information regarding the execution mode of the special gaming state, the performance mode after the special gaming state ends, and the transition of the variable selection table group after the special gaming state ends. . Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A495).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A471; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A480), and if it is a small hit (step A48
0; Y) loads the special pattern random number from the special pattern 2 special pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A481). Next, set the special pattern 2 small winning symbol table (step A482).
, acquire the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number and save it in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A483). Through this process, the type of small win is selected. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A484), the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A485), and the stop symbol pattern is saved. Prepare the corresponding decorative special command (Step A)
495).

In addition, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A480; N), the stop symbol number at the time of miss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A493), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. (Step A494), and prepare a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (Step A495). Through the above processing, the stop symbols corresponding to the results of the special symbol variable display game are set.

After that, save the decorative special figure command in the decorative special figure command area (step A496),
Performance command setting processing (step A497) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the production control device 300. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (step A498), clear the special symbol 2 special symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (step A499), The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process ends.
In this way, when setting the stop symbols for each result, by using a common special symbol random number regardless of the result, the types of random numbers required can be reduced, and the specifications and programs of the gaming machine can be simplified. This reduces the burden of control.

[Special figure fluctuation processing]
FIG. 3-23 shows the special symbol fluctuation processing (step A10) in the special symbol game processing of this embodiment.
In this special symbol fluctuation process, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag is prepared (step A601), and a production command setting process (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special pattern game processing timer area (step A604). That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a stop display time setting means for setting a stop display time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Next, it is determined whether general electricity support is in progress (step A605), and if general electricity support is not in progress (step A605; N), the process moves to step A612. In addition, if general electricity support is in progress (step A605; Y), the time reduction variation number 1 in the time reduction variation number 1 area is updated by -1 (step A609), and it is checked whether the time reduction variation number 1 has become 0. Determination is made (step A610).
If the time reduction variation number 1 is 0 (step A610; Y), a time reduction end setting process is performed to end general power support (step A611), and the process moves to step A612. Further, if the time reduction variation number 1 is not 0 (step A610; N), step A6
12.
That is, when the number of time reduction fluctuations 1 becomes 0, general electricity support is terminated. In addition, the number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game, the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the total number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 1 variable display game are counted, and The general electricity support may be terminated when the number of calls reaches a predetermined number of times.

After performing the production mode information check process (step A612), it is determined whether the remaining pending consumption state has ended (step A613). Here, the term "remaining hold extinguished state has ended" includes not only the case where the termination condition of the remaining hold extinguished state ST5 is satisfied, but also the case where there is no remaining hold at the end of the specific gaming state ST4.
If the remaining pending consumption state has not ended (step A613; N), step A616
to move to. Further, when the remaining pending consumption state has ended (step A613; Y), it is determined whether the result is a failure (step A614).
If the result is not a failure (step A614; N), the process moves to step A616.
If the result is a failure (step A614; Y), a signal regarding time-saving termination (for example,
The jackpot 2 signal is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A615), and the process moves to step A616.

In step A616, "2" related to the process during special figure display is set as the process number (step A616), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A61).
7). Furthermore, a signal related to the end of the variation of special symbol 1 (for example, a signal during special symbol 1 variation is turned off)
) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A618), and a signal related to the end of variation of special symbol 2 (for example, turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A619). A control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) is saved in the symbol confirmation number signal control timer area related to the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game to be output to the external information terminal (step A620). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the stoppage of fluctuation on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A621 ), as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the stoppage of fluctuation on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A622), the special figure changing process ends.

[Time-saving end setting process]
FIG. 3-24 shows the time saving end setting process (step A611) in the special figure fluctuation process. In this time saving end setting process, first, signals related to the end of time saving (for example, special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal OFF, special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, normal Symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, normal electric accessory 1 opening extension state signal OFF) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A632).

Next, save the number with no time saving in the game state display number area (step A633), and save the low probability & no time saving flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A63).
4) Save the special pattern low probability & no time saving flag in the special pattern game mode flag area (step A635).
Then, the time reduction variation number 1 area is cleared (step A636).
Thereafter, a signal related to the left-handed hitting instruction (for example, firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A638), and a right-handed hitting indication LED (for example, the first game status display section 56a ), save the number in the left-handed game state display number 2 area (step A639), save the normal base state information in the normal base state determination area (step A640), and set the time-saving end. Finish the process.

[Special figure display processing]
3-25 and 3-26 show the special figure display process (step A11) in the special figure game process of this embodiment.
In this special figure display process, first, the support hit flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the support hit flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A701). , clears the support hit flag 1 area and the support hit flag 2 area of RWM (step A702).
Next, the small hit flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the small hit flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A703), and the small win flag 1 area of the RWM is loaded. and clears the small hit flag 2 area (step A704).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A705), and the jackpot flag 1 area and jackpot flag of the RWM are loaded. 2 areas are cleared (step A706). Then, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A707), and if it is a jackpot (step A707; Y), it is a jackpot of the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 jackpot).
Test signals related to the start of (for example, condition device operation signal turned ON, accessory continuous operation device operation signal turned ON, special symbol 2 hit signal turned ON) are saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A710). ), a round number upper limit value table is set (step A711).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A707; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A708), and if it is a jackpot (step A708; Y), the first special Test signals related to the start of the jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) in the figure fluctuation display game (for example, turning on the condition device operation signal, turning on the accessory continuous operation device operation signal, and turning on the special symbol 1 hit signal) of the RWM. Save it in the test signal output data area (step A
709), and sets a round number upper limit value table (step A711).

Next, the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of this embodiment, “1
0" or "3") and save it in the RWM round number upper limit value area (step A7
12). Next, obtain the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information, and
It is saved in the round LED pointer area of the WM (step A713).

Next, a decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM and prepared (step A714), and a production command setting process (step A715) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command related to information that sets the probability of a winning result in a normal pattern fluctuation display game and a special pattern fluctuation display game to a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A716), and a production command setting process is performed. (Step A717) is performed. Next, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A718), and the production command setting process (step A719). This fanfare command constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the performance control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the big winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the regular symbol fluctuation display game and the special symbol fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A720). In the case of this embodiment, in step A720, the jackpot 2 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are saved as signals corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the probability state. In addition, each ON/OFF is determined by the big prize opening opening information and the probability state. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is O if it is a jackpot with a ball coming out (the jackpot opening information is other than jackpot opening information 1).
N, jackpot with no balls coming out (so-called sudden jackpot, etc.) Big winning opening opening information is Big winning opening opening information 1
), it will be ON if there is a jackpot in the time saving state, and OFF otherwise.
Further, the jackpot 3 signal is turned ON when it is a jackpot with a ball being rolled out, and turned OFF when it is a jackpot with no balls put out. In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, all jackpots have a payout.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the general pattern fluctuation display game and the special pattern fluctuation display game is set (step A721).
), the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A722). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A723). As a result, information on the probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the production mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, clear the area of the number of illegal winnings of the big winning hole of the big winning hole that corresponds to the big winning hole opening information (
Step A724), a flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area of the big winning opening corresponding to the big winning opening opening information (step A725). Thereafter, fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A726) for shifting to fanfare/interval processing is performed, and the special figure display processing is ended. That is, a special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variable prize winning device 38 into an open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variable display game or the second special figure variable display game. It constitutes a special game state generating means that generates a state.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A708; N), it is determined whether the probability state of the special symbol variation display game is a high probability state (step A727). In the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the special symbol probability is always constant, it is determined that it is not always in a high probability state (step A
727; N), it is determined whether there is a ceiling reached flag (step A728).
If there is a flag indicating that the ceiling has been reached (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A732 without performing processing related to starting general power support based on reaching the ceiling. The ceiling reached flag is set based on reaching the ceiling, and is cleared based on the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereby, when general power support is started based on reaching the ceiling, it is possible to prevent general power support based on reaching a new ceiling from being started until after the jackpot has passed.

If there is no ceiling reached flag (step A728; N), the value of the ceiling counter area is updated by +1 (step A729), and it is determined whether the ceiling has been reached (step A730).
If the ceiling has not been reached (step A730; N), the process moves to step A732.
If the ceiling has been reached (step A730; Y), the ceiling time reduction activation flag and the ceiling reached flag are set (step A731), and the process moves to step A732.

In step A732, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A732), and if it is a small hit (step A732; Y), it is determined that the small hit of the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure Turn on the test signal (for example, the special symbol 2-bit win signal) regarding the start of the 2-bit win)
) in the RWM test signal output data area (step A735), and step A7
36.
Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A732; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A733), and if it is a small hit (step A733; Y). saves the test signal (for example, turning on the special symbol 1 small hit signal) related to the start of the small hit (special symbol 1 small win) of the first special symbol fluctuation display game in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A734), the process moves to step A736.

Next, it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state (step A
736). In the game machine of this embodiment, since the special pattern probability is always constant, it is determined that the probability is not always high (step A736; N), and the decorative special pattern command is loaded from the decorative special pattern command area and prepared ( Step A737) and effect command setting processing (step A738) are performed. Next, a small win fanfare command is prepared (step A739), an effect command setting process (step A740) is performed, and the process moves to step A741. This small win fanfare command also constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the performance control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Then, it is determined whether general electricity support is in progress (step A741), and if general electricity support is not in progress (step A741; N), small win fanfare medium process transition setting process ( Step A746) is performed to end the special figure display process.
If general power support is in progress (step A741; Y), it is determined whether the conditions for ending general power support are satisfied (step A743). In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the termination condition is that a small hit is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game.
If the general electricity support termination condition is not satisfied (step A743; N), the process of step A746 is performed and the special figure display process is ended. Furthermore, if the conditions for ending general electricity support are met (step A743; Y), a time-saving termination setting process is performed to terminate general electricity support (step A744), and a signal regarding the time-saving termination is sent to the external information output data area. It is saved (step A745), and the process of step A746 is performed to end the special figure display process.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A733; N), it is determined whether there is a ceiling time saving activation flag (step A751). If there is a ceiling time reduction activation flag (step A751; Y), the initial value of the ceiling time reduction number is saved in the time reduction variation number area 1 (step A752), and the process moves to support operation setting processing (step A756).
Here, 250 is saved in the time reduction variation number area 1 as an end condition based on the total number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.

If there is no ceiling time saving activation flag (step A751; N), it is determined whether the loaded support hit flag 1 is a support hit (step A754). If it is not a support hit (step A754; N), a special figure normal process transition setting process (step A757) for moving to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure displaying process is ended.

On the other hand, if the support hit flag 1 indicates support hit (step A754; Y), the initial value corresponding to the time reduction judgment data is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area 1 (step A755).
, the process moves to support operation setting processing (step A756).
Here, 250 is saved in the time reduction variation number area 1 as an end condition based on the total number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.
After carrying out the support operation setting process (step A756), a special figure normal process transition setting process (step A757) for moving to the special figure normal process is carried out, and the special figure displaying process is ended.

Note that the support win can be derived only when the gaming state is the first specific gaming state ST41, so steps A754 to A7 are performed only when the gaming state is the first specific gaming state ST41.
56 processes may be performed.
In addition, in the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322), a support hit may be determined only when the gaming state is the first specific gaming state ST41, or in the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) determines support hit without considering the game state, and performs general power support setting processing based on support hit only when the game state is the first specific game state ST41 in the special figure display process. Also good.

In the above process, the determination of whether or not the ceiling has been reached is made at the end of the special figure fluctuation display game (steps A727 to A731), and the special figure fluctuation display game in which winning the support and reaching the ceiling are the same. If this occurs, conditions for ending the specific gaming state ST4 are set based on reaching the ceiling (steps A751 to A756).

It is rare for reaching the ceiling and winning a support prize to occur in the same special symbol variable display game, and it would be a waste of control to always check this at the start of the special symbol variable display game. Therefore, by implementing the present embodiment, such wasteful processing becomes unnecessary, and the control at the start of the special figure variation display game can be simplified.

In addition, if you set a specific fluctuation pattern or result format based on winning the support or reaching the ceiling, if the winning of the support and reaching the ceiling occur in the same special pattern fluctuation display game, In this special figure variation display game, the variation pattern and result mode based on the support hit are selected at the start, but the specific game state ST4 is given at the end of the special figure variation display game.
The ending condition is not based on hitting the support, but on reaching the ceiling.
While the variation pattern and result mode are selected according to the support hit, there is a contradiction that the end condition of the given specific game state ST4 is based on reaching the ceiling. Since there is no change in the transition to state ST4, the player will not feel dissatisfied.

If there is sufficient control at the start of the special figure variation display game, it is determined at the start of the special figure variation display game whether reaching the ceiling and winning the support hit occur in the same special figure variation display game. You can do it like this. If reaching the ceiling and winning a support prize occur in the same special figure variation display game, the variation pattern or result pattern of the special figure variation display game may be different from the one corresponding to the missed result or the one corresponding to reaching the ceiling. By making it a thing, you can avoid contradictions.

[Fanfare/interval processing transition setting process 1]
FIG. 3-27 shows the fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1 (step A726) in the special figure display process described above. In this fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1, first, "3", which is the process number related to fanfare/interval process, is set (step A791), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A792).

Next, save the signals related to the start of the jackpot (special gaming state) (for example, turn on the jackpot 1 signal (output for jackpot + small hit), turn on the jackpot 4 signal (output for jackpot)) in the external information output data area. (Step A793), signals related to the end of high probability & time saving (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, special symbol 2 Save the fluctuation time reduction state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal OFF, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal OFF) in the test signal output data area. (Step A794). After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step A795), and the number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A79).
6) Save the normal pattern low probability & no time saving flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A797).

Then, the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the high probability is set in order to turn off the gaming state display LED (for example, the third gaming state display section 56c) provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. The notification flag area is cleared (step A799), and the special pattern low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special pattern game mode flag area (step A800). Next, save the probability information command (low probability) in the power outage recovery transmission command area that saves the command output to the production control device 300 when the power outage is restored (step A801), and display special figure fluctuations that can be executed in a time-saving state. The time reduction variation number 1 area for managing the number of games is cleared (step A802). This ends the general power support and time saving state. Furthermore, the ceiling counter area is cleared (step A804), the ceiling time reduction activation flag area is cleared (step A805), and the ceiling reached flag area is cleared (step A806).
.

After that, save the number of production mode 1 in the production mode number area (step A807),
Clear the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A808) and save the no-update code in the next mode transition information area (step A809). Then, the signal related to the right-handed batting instruction (for example, firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A
810), in order to light up the LED indicating that the player is playing right-handed (for example, the first gaming state display section 56a), the number indicating that the player is playing right-handed is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A811);
The fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1 ends.

[Support operation processing]
FIG. 3-28 shows the support activation process (step A756) in the above-mentioned special figure display process.
In this support operation setting process, first, a signal related to the start of time saving (for example, jackpot 2 signal and jackpot 3 signal are turned on) is saved in the external information output data area (step A821). Next, the timer initial value is saved in the time saving signal control timer area (step A822). Here, 128 ms is saved as the timer initial value. As a result, among the signals related to the start of time saving, the three jackpot signals are output for only a short time.

Next, turn on the signal related to the start of time reduction (for example, turn on the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal,
Special symbol 2 Turn on the fluctuation time reduction state signal, Normal symbol 1 Turn on the high probability state signal, Normal symbol 1
The fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned ON and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned ON) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A823).

Furthermore, the number with time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A824), and the high probability of normal drawings & flag with time saving is saved in the normal drawing gate mode flag area (step A82).
5) In order to maintain the probability state flag and make it possible to save time, a special figure time-saving flag is synthesized in the special figure game mode flag area (step A826).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed batting instruction (for example, firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A827), and a right-handed batting indication LED (for example,
In order to light up the first gaming state display section 56a), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A828). Then, a performance mode information address table is set (step A829), and the address of the table corresponding to the performance mode transition information set at the start of variation (when setting a stop symbol) is acquired (step A830). By acquiring the address of the corresponding table based on the performance mode transition information, a variable pattern scenario, which is information regarding the transition of the variable selection table group, is also acquired.

Next, as a process for saving information necessary for managing the production mode in the game control device 100, first, the production mode number of the production mode that will be set after the end of the special symbol fluctuation display game that has won the support is acquired. , is saved in the production mode number area (step A831). Furthermore, the number of remaining rotations of the performance of the production mode set after the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that became a support hit is acquired, and is saved in the effect remaining rotation number area (step A832), and the special figure that became a support hit is obtained. The next mode transition information of the production mode set after the end of the variable display game is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A833). Based on the information saved here, the production mode and variable selection table group will change based on running the special figure variable display game a predetermined number of times after the end of the special figure variable display game that won the support. .

After that, prepare a probability information command corresponding to the production mode number (step A834),
The command is saved in the power outage recovery transmission command area (step A835), and the production command setting process (step A836) is performed. Next, a production rotation number command corresponding to the newly set production remaining rotation number is prepared (step A837), a production command setting process (step A838) is performed, and a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number is prepared. Prepare (step A839), and perform production command setting processing (step A840).
Then, the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A841), the production mode transition information area is cleared (step A842), and the support operation setting process is ended.

[Jackpot end processing]
FIG. 3-29 shows the jackpot end process (step A15) in the special figure game process of this embodiment.
In this jackpot ending process, first, it is determined whether it is a jackpot with no time saving (step A90).
0). A jackpot without time saving is a jackpot that shifts to the normal gaming state ST1 after the end of the first special gaming state ST2, and corresponds to a jackpot based on the 3R small win C.
If it is a jackpot with no time saving (step A900; Y), the process moves to step A916. In addition, if it is not a jackpot without time saving (step A900; N), a signal related to the start of time saving (for example, turning on the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A
901). Since the signal regarding the start of time saving is output during the jackpot, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area. Next, a signal regarding the start of low probability & time saving (for example, turn on the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, turn on the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal,
Normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is ON, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is ON) are saved in the test signal output data area (Step A90)
2).

Next, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step A903), and save the high probability of high probability & time saving flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A90).
4) Save the special figure time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A90)
5). Thereafter, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area (step A906). Here, the initial value according to the termination condition is saved in the time reduction variation number 1 area. Through the above processing, after the special game state ends, the general power support state and time saving state are entered. Further, by setting the initial value of the number of time saving fluctuations in the time saving fluctuation number area, the general power support state and the time saving state are ended by executing the special symbol fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times. That is,
After the special game state ends, the game control device 100 sets the normal variable prize winning device 37 in a state where it is easy to win for a predetermined period of time (time saving state, general electricity support state).
It constitutes a specific game state generation control means that can generate.

After that, save the probability information command in the power outage recovery transmission command area (step A9).
10) Perform production command setting processing (step A911). Here, as probability information commands, there are a plurality of commands that further include information on production mode in either "with time saving" or "without time saving". Next, a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number 1 is prepared (step A914), and a production command setting process (step A915) is performed.

Next, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A918), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A917).
After that, signals related to the end of the jackpot (for example, jackpot 1 signal OFF, jackpot 3 signal OFF, jackpot 4 signal OFF) are saved in the external information output data area (step A9).
18), Signals related to the end of the jackpot (for example, turn off the condition device operation signal, turn off the accessory continuous operation device operation signal, turn off the special symbol 1 hit signal, turn off the special symbol 2 hit signal
) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A919). Next, the information in the probability fluctuation determination data area is cleared (step A920), the information in the round LED pointer area indicating the number of rounds of jackpot is cleared (step A921), and the information in the performance mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A922). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A923), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A924), and the jackpot termination process is ended.

[Specific area switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 3-30 shows the specific area switch monitoring process (step A3) in the special figure game process. In this specific area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether a small hit is occurring (step A41). The term "during a small hit" here refers to a period during which small hit processing and small hit remaining ball processing are performed. If this small hit is not occurring (step A41; N), the specific area switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the specific area switch 38d is valid only during the period when the small hit process and the small hit remaining ball process are being performed. Further, if a small hit is in progress (step A41; Y), it is determined whether the condition device is in operation (step A42).

If the conditional device is in operation (step A42; Y), the specific area switch monitoring process ends. If the conditional device is not in operation (step A42; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43). If there is no input to the specific area switch (step A43; N), the specific area switch monitoring process ends. Further, if there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43; Y), it is determined whether the detection valid period is such that detection by the specific area switch is treated as valid (step A44). If it is not the detection valid period (step A44; N), the specific area switch monitoring process ends. Also,
If the detection is valid (step A44; Y), a specific area passing flag is set (step A45), and the specific area switch monitoring process is ended. Later, based on the existence of this specific area passage flag, processing for generating a first special game state will be performed.

[Small hit remaining ball processing]
FIG. 3-31 shows the process shown in FIG. 3-31 in the small hit remaining ball process (step A18) in the special figure game process. In this small hit remaining ball process, first, it is determined whether a remaining ball error is occurring (step A861). If a remaining ball error is occurring (step A861; Y), the process moves to step A863. If a remaining ball error is not occurring (step A861; N), it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A862; N), the small winning remaining ball process is ended. Moreover, when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862; Y), the process for ending the small winning from step A863 is performed.

That is, the process for ending the small win is performed after all remaining balls in the special variable winning device 38 are ejected. However, if there is a remaining ball error in which the ejection cannot be confirmed even after a predetermined time has passed since the last game ball entered the special variable prize winning device 38, it is assumed that the time required for ejection has passed and the The process moves on to end the win. Of course, if there is a remaining ball error, the process may not proceed to end the small hit. Therefore, the process of step A861 may not be performed.

In the process for ending the small hit, first, it is determined whether the specific area has been passed (step A863). When a game ball enters and passes through the specific area 38h, the specific area switch 3
8d, and a specific area passage flag is set. Here, it is determined whether or not a specific area has been passed based on the presence or absence of this specific area passing flag. If the specific area has been passed (step A863; Y), the process moves to step A870 and a process for generating a special gaming state is performed. Further, if there is no passing through the specific area (step A863; N), the process moves to step A864 to end the second special game state and perform processing to enable execution of the special figure fluctuation display game.

In the process for ending the second special game state after step A864 and making it possible to execute the special figure fluctuation display game, 10, which is related to the small hit ending process, is set as the process number (step A
864), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A865). Next, save the small winning ending time in the special figure game processing timer area (step A866).
, Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the University of Japan winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (Step A
867). Then, the large winning opening count area is cleared (step A868), the small winning control pointer area is cleared (step A869), and the small winning remaining ball processing is completed.

On the other hand, if the specific area is passed (step A863; Y) and the process of generating the first special game state after step A870 is to be performed, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area and prepared (step A870), Performance command setting processing is performed (step A871).
Next, a V jackpot fanfare command is prepared (step A872), and production command setting processing is performed (step A873).

After that, save the signal regarding the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) in the external information output data area (
Step A874), the test signal regarding the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 2 hit signal is ON) is output to the test signal output data area. (Step A875).

Then, save the jackpot number in the gaming status display number area (step A876), set the round number upper limit value table (step A877), and set the round number upper limit value (5 or 10) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information. ) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area (step A878). Furthermore, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step A879), and the initial value (here, 1) is saved in the round number area (step A880). The upper limit for the number of rounds is set to 5 or 10 rounds, but since the small winning action corresponds to the 1st round, by setting 1 as the initial number of rounds, the upper limit for the number of rounds will be 4 rounds or 9 rounds in the special game state. We are trying to make sure that the number of people is released.

Thereafter, 3, which corresponds to the fanfare/interval process, is set as the process number (step A881), and saved in the special figure game process number area (step A882). moreover,
Save the V jackpot fanfare time in the special figure game processing timer area (step A883
), performs the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (step A884),
The process moves to step A868.

[Small winning end processing]
FIG. 3-32 shows the small hit ending process (step A19) in the special figure game process of this embodiment.
In this small winning ending process, first, it is determined whether support C, which is the second specific gaming state ST42, is in progress (step A930). If support C is in progress (step A930; Y)
If so, the process moves to step A937. If it is not in support C (step A930; N), it is determined whether it is in the normal pattern hit state (step A931). If it is not in the normal hit state (step A931; N), the signal related to the left-handed shot instruction (for example, firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A932), and the signal related to the left-handed shot instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A932). In order to turn off the display LED (for example, the first gaming state display section 56a), the number in the left-handed playing state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A933), and the process moves to step A937.

On the other hand, if the normal pattern is in the winning state (step A931; Y), it is determined whether the opening pattern is pattern H1 (step A934). If the opening pattern is not pattern H1 (step A934; N), the process moves to step A937. If the opening pattern is pattern H1 (step A934; Y), the OFF state of the firing position designation signal 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A935), and the process moves to step A937.

Next, it is determined whether there is a ceiling time reduction activation flag (step A937). If there is no ceiling time reduction activation flag (step A937; N), the process moves to step A940. If there is a ceiling time reduction activation flag (step A937; Y), the initial value of the ceiling time reduction number is saved in the time reduction variation number 1 area (step A938). Here, 250 is set in the time reduction variation number 1 area as the time reduction variation number 1.
Then, support operation setting processing is performed (step A939), and the process moves to step A940.

Thereafter, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A940), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A941).
Furthermore, a signal regarding the end of the small hit (for example, turning off the special symbol 1 small hit signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A942), and a signal regarding the end of the small winning (for example, turning off the special symbol 1 small winning signal, Special symbol 2 small hit signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A943).
Subsequently, the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A944), the performance mode transition information area is cleared (step A945), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A946), the small winning ending process is ended.

Next, control by the production control device 300 will be explained. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the production control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 3-33 and a timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 3-33, in the main processing, the processing at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3) and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program from steps C1 to C7, loop processing is performed as main loop processing. In this loop process, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, an input signal (
A production button input process (step C9) is performed to create input information from the rising edge). Reading of inputs from the production button 25 and cross key 29 is performed within the timer interrupt process, and in this production button input process, processing for changing the content of the production, etc. is performed when there is an input from the production button 25 or cross key 29. .

Then, you can set the range of changes such as the brightness of the LED and LCD, the volume, etc., and the LED
A hall/player setting mode process is performed in which operations such as changing the screen, brightness of the liquid crystal display, and volume are accepted (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game.

Next, a received command check process (step C12) is performed to analyze and respond to the command from the gaming control device 100, and a performance display editing process (step C13) is performed to edit settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the performance. ) to set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the content to be drawn, and finally the drawing data is set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn is prepared within 0 seconds (approximately 33.3 milliseconds), the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether it is frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds), a V blank interrupt (1/6
0 second) is entered twice, it is determined that it is frame switching timing. Note that the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) at 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frame switching) at a timing later than 1/60 second. (switching) may also be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process in step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of audio from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and controls the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 including the panel decoration device 46 and the display board 350, etc. Decoration control processing (step C18), movable body control processing (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoids of the board presentation device 44, and board presentation setting processing (step C20) for controlling presentation are performed to clear the WDT. The process returns to step C8.

[Received command check processing]
FIG. 3-34 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this received command check process, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of commands received (step C201), It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of commands received is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. Further, if it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of commands received (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204).
), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether the copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206).
In this way, in this embodiment, commands are not directly analyzed in the received command buffer;
The content of the received command buffer is copied to a command area (RAM area for analysis), and command analysis is performed in the command area. As a result, in case a command is sent from the gaming control device 100 while the command is being analyzed, the command (data)
You can move it to make room. In addition, command analysis can be performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copying of commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. Furthermore, if it is determined that the copying of commands for the number of commands received has been completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands equal to the number of received commands has been completed (step C210). Then, if it is determined that the analysis of commands for the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N),
The process returns to step C207. Further, if it is determined that the analysis of commands equal to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is ended. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are analyzed all at once. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 3-35 shows the received command analysis process in the above-described received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated into MODE and the lower byte is separated into ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). If it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

Further, if it is determined in steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C2
34;N), the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
In step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of variable commands (step C235). The variation command is a command that instructs the variation pattern of the special figure. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of variable commands (step C235
;Y), variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Also, if it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of variable commands (
In step C235;N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237). The jackpot commands are commands that command operations related to the jackpot performance (such as displaying a fanfare screen and round screen), and commands that command operations related to the small win performance (displaying the fanfare screen and end screen, etc.). And M.O.
If it is determined that DE is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237; Y), jackpot command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Further, when it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of symbol commands (step C239). The symbol-related command is a command that instructs information regarding the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to use as the stop symbol of the special symbol). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of symbol-related commands (step C239; Y), symbol-related command processing (
Step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

In addition, if it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol-related commands (
In step C239;N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as pending number commands and error commands (step C241). Single-shot commands are commands that stand alone, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands. These one-shot type commands include a customer waiting demonstration command, a pending number command, a pattern stop command, a probability information type command, an error/invalid type command, a model specification command, etc. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C24
1; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Also, if it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (
In step C241;N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (step C243; Y), the prefetch symbol type command processing (step C2
44) to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of prefetch symbol-related commands (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch variable commands (step C245). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the read-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), read-ahead variable command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends. Also, in step C245,
When it is determined that MODE is not within the range of look-ahead variable commands (step C245; N)
Then, the received command analysis process ends.

Note that the prefetch variation type command and the prefetch symbol type command are commands that include information necessary to execute the prefetch effect. A look-ahead performance (also called a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice performance) is whether or not a special figure change display game will be a jackpot when the special figure change display game corresponding to the unexecuted starting memory (pending) is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of the fluctuation pattern (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined degree of reliability, the display device 41 may display a decorative special symbol start memory display in a different manner from normal. This is a performance such as displaying a performance display. The prefetching commands (prefetching variation commands and prefetching symbol commands) are commands that inform you in advance of the fluctuation patterns and stop symbols that correspond to the starting memory that is the target of the prefetching effect, and are sent from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the production control device 300. Note that normal variable commands and symbol-related commands that are not pre-reading are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 at the start of the special figure variable display game.

Next, the effects of the game will be explained.
FIG. 3-36 shows an example of the performance in the normal game state ST1. Although the display contents are basically the same in other game states, it is also possible to not display some of the display contents depending on the game state. Further, the player can determine whether the normal gaming state ST1 is in effect or each of the other gaming states based on the displayed content.

As shown in FIG. 3-36(a), in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a first decorative game display section 81 for displaying a first decorative game among the decorative special figure variable display games is provided. In the first decorative game display section 81, the identification information is displayed in a variable manner in each of the variable display areas of the left variable display area 81a, the middle variable display area 81b, and the right variable display area 81c, and then stopped and displayed, thereby displaying the decorative special figure variable. Show games.

At the upper right of the display area of the display device 41, a second decorative game display section 82 for displaying a second decorative game of the decorative special figure variable display games is provided. Similarly to the first decorative game displayed on the first decorative game display section 81, the second decorative game displayed on the second decorative game display section 82 has identification information in each of the left area, middle area, and right area. After displaying the variable, stop and display the result. The second decorative game display section 82 displays identification information (small symbols) that is relatively smaller than the identification information (large symbols) displayed on the first decorative game display section 81 .

As shown in FIG. 3-36(g), the identification information used in the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 are numbers 1 to 7, and colors are associated with each number. . In addition, although different patterns are attached in the figure for the sake of explanation, the patterns may be the same and only the colors may be different, or the patterns in addition to the colors may also be different. Identification information 1 and 5 are associated with the color indicated by diagonal lines (for example, green), identification information 2 and 6 are associated with the color indicated by horizontal line (for example, blue), and identification information 3 and 7 are associated with the color indicated by diagonal lines (for example, blue). A shaded color (for example, red) is associated with the identification information 4, and a vertical lined color (for example, pink) is associated with the identification information 4.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3-36(a), a standby memory display section 83 is provided at the lower right of the display area of the display device 41 to display a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory.
The standby memory display section 83 displays decorative special figure starting memory displays corresponding to the first starting memory and the second starting memory. In the normal game state ST1, since the game mainly proceeds with the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory, the standby memory display section 83 displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory.
The decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the standby memory display section 83 has a one-to-one correspondence with the starting memory, and the leftmost decorative special figure starting memory display is the decorative special figure corresponding to the starting memory stored first. They are displayed in the order of memory so that they are displayed as a starting memory display, and are moved to the left each time they are used. In addition, in the standby memory display section 83, there is a decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory (first starting memory) which is the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game, and the right to execute the special figure 2 variable display game. It is also possible to display both the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory (second starting memory).
Furthermore, in the standby memory display section 83, the pre-read results such as the result of the special figure variation display game and the variation pattern based on the starting memory can be suggested by the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory. It is possible.

On the left side of the standby memory display section 83, there is provided an active memory display section 84 that displays information regarding the starting memory corresponding to the special symbol variation display game that is currently being executed. The decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is transferred to the running memory display unit 84 at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game. Furthermore, in the running memory display section 84, the results and fluctuation patterns of the special figure variation display game currently being executed can be suggested by the display mode of the running memory display displayed on the running memory display section 84. It is possible.
At the upper left of the display area of the display device 41, there is a first starting memory number display section 85a that displays the first starting memory number (special figure 1 pending number) and a second starting memory number (special figure 2 pending number). A second starting memory number display section 85b for display is provided.
Further, at the upper center of the display area of the display device 41, a game state display 86 indicating the game state is displayed, and here it is shown that the game is in the normal game state ST1.

When a new special figure fluctuation display game is started, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the waiting memory display section 83 shifts to the running memory display section 84, as shown in FIG. 3-36(b). At the same time as the performance is executed, the decorative special figure start memory display located other than the left end of the waiting memory display section 83 moves to the left within the waiting memory display section 83. Furthermore, the numerical value on the first starting memory number display section 85a changes. Further, the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 start varying display of the identification information.

Depending on the selected variation pattern, as the special figure variation display game progresses, the same identification information becomes temporarily stopped in the left variation display area 81a and the right variation display area 81c, as shown in FIG. 3-36(c). Sometimes. The production may further develop and become SP reach.
When the predetermined variation time ends, the result mode is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 3-36(d). Here, the result is a jackpot, and a special result mode is displayed as the result mode. If the result is a small hit, a miss, or a support hit, the corresponding result format will be displayed.
When the predetermined stop display time for displaying the result mode has elapsed, the special figure variation display game ends, and the running memory display displayed on the running memory display section 84 is erased.

Since the result here was a jackpot, the first special game state ST2 is started upon completion of the special symbol variation display game, and a fanfare effect is performed as shown in FIG. 3-36(e). In this fanfare performance, a right-hitting instruction display 90 is displayed as an image instructing the player to aim at the special variable prize winning device 38 located on the lower right side of the gaming area 32, instructing the player to hit right.

Thereafter, a round effect is performed as shown in FIG. 3-36(f).
In the first special gaming state ST2, a consecutive game jackpot number display 87 is displayed which indicates the number of consecutive game jackpots, which is the number of jackpots for the first time jackpot and subsequent consecutive game jackpots, as well as the first time jackpot and subsequent consecutive game jackpots. The number of acquired game balls is displayed 88 by adding up the number of acquired game balls in the special game state for consecutive game jackpots. Here, since the jackpot was in the normal gaming state ST1, it is the first jackpot and the number of successive jackpots is the first. Further, the number of acquired game balls is updated every time a prize is won in the special variable winning device 38. In addition, when a jackpot is achieved via a small win, the first special game state ST2 is also entered, and the same effect is performed.
Further, in the first special game state ST2, it is possible to execute a series of performances in which the performance progresses (the story progresses) each time the number of successive jackpots increases over a plurality of first special game states ST2.
Here, the number of successive jackpots is the first, and the first stage performance in which the first character appears is being performed.

FIG. 3-37 shows a case where support A or B, which is the first specific gaming state ST41, is reached after the first special gaming state ST2 ends.
As shown in FIG. 3-37(a), an ending effect is performed in the first special gaming state ST2, and the first special gaming state ST2 ends, and as shown in FIG. 3-37(b), the ending effect is performed in the first special gaming state ST2. At ST41, variable display is started.
Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 3-37(c), on the first decorative game display section 81, the identification information is displayed rotating at a low speed along a circle so that all of the identification information is visible. At this time, in order to prevent the player from misperceiving that it is a so-called full rotation reach, not only identical symbols but also different symbols are displayed in a horizontal row so that they are not aligned.

After being displayed in a rotating manner for a certain period of time, as shown in FIG. 3-37(d), an effect display 95 is displayed on even-numbered identification information, and a different effect display 96 is also displayed on identification information 1 and 5, As shown in FIG. 3-37(e), even-numbered identification information is erased and the colors of identification information 1 and 5 are changed to the same colors as the colors of identification information 3 and 7. At this time, the board presentation device 44 is also operated to decorate the change in the identification information. Furthermore, the background image may also be changed to decorate the change in the identification information. Further, the identification information is rotated for a certain period of time in the state shown in FIG. 3-37(e) so that the player is aware that the identification information has changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 3-37(f), as an explanation of the performance in the first specific game state ST41, if an ally character and an enemy character fight and the ally character wins, the RUSH mode (second specific game state ST42) is entered. A message indicating that the migration will be performed will be displayed.
As shown in FIG. 3-37(g), a first decorative game display section 81, a standby memory display section 83, an active memory display section 84, a first starting memory number display section 85a, a second starting memory number display section A display section 85b, a game state display 86, and a remaining number of times display section 91 showing the remaining number of games that can be executed in the specific game state ST4 are displayed.
In the standby memory display section 83, a display section is provided on the left side of the running memory display section 84 for displaying a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of second start memories is one, so the corresponding display section is also one. 1st specific gaming state S
In T41, the special figure 1 variable display game is mainly executed, but sometimes it is possible to win to the normal variable prize winning device 37, and the special figure 2 variable display game is also executed, so it corresponds to the second starting memory. A display section is provided to display the information.
Note that in the specific game state ST4, the standby memory display section 83 and the running memory display section 84 may not be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 3-37(h), when the variation time ends, the result mode is stopped and displayed. When the identification information is stopped in each fluctuation display area, the identification information is stopped and displayed from a high-speed fluctuation in which identification information is difficult to recognize, to a slow fluctuation in which identification information can be recognized, but during the period of slow fluctuation, the number of identification information decreases. The game is made longer than the special figure variation display game in which the game is not played, and each piece of identification information is shown to the player so that the player can recognize that the number of pieces of identification information is decreasing.
In this way, the state in which the number of identification information on the first decorative game display section 81 has decreased and the color has changed is maintained until the first specific game state ST41 ends.

Furthermore, the identification information on the second decorative game display section 82 is displayed in its original color without being changed. Further, the number of identification information is not reduced, and even identification information is still included. In addition, regarding the second decorative game display section 82, the colors of identification information 1 and 5 may be changed to the same colors as the colors of identification information 3 and 7. In addition, the even number identification information may be deleted, and in this case, the result format may be displayed using only the odd number identification information, or even number identification information may be displayed only when displaying the result format. Also good.

Further, the game state display 86 displays a "double chance stage" indicating the first specific game state ST41. In the first specific gaming state ST41, it is possible to derive the support hit,
Since the probability of winning the support is the same as the probability of winning the jackpot, it can be said that the probability of winning is essentially doubled.
In addition, if a support win occurs, the system moves to the second specific gaming state ST42 of support C without passing through the first special gaming state ST2, but this second specific gaming state ST42 is a second specific gaming state ST42 with a high probability of deriving a small win.
This is a game state in which the special figure variable display game is mainly executed, and furthermore, in the second special game state ST3 based on the small hit, it is easy to win the special variable winning device 38 and win the specific area, so the first special The transition to gaming state ST2 is almost certain. In other words, it can be said that winning the support is equivalent to hitting the jackpot, and from this it can be said that the probability of winning is essentially doubled.
In order to clearly show this situation to the player, the mode is named "Double Chance".

Furthermore, by reducing the number of identification information, it is possible to give the impression that it is easier to hit, and by unifying the color of the identification information, it is possible to give the impression that there is hope no matter which identification information is available. As will be described later, in the first specific game state ST41, the first decorative game display section 8
If the result pattern of matching numbers with the same identification information is derived in 1, the first special gaming state ST2
This is the case of a 3R jackpot C or a 10R jackpot, which becomes the second specific gaming state ST42 of support C after the end of the game, and the next jackpot is almost certain no matter which identification information is collected. This shows that if the colors of identification information are unified, expectations can be held no matter which identification information is available.
In particular, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, in the case of a 10R jackpot with the highest gaming value, the identification information is set to 7, and by unifying the identification information with the same color, expectations are raised. I try to have it.

In addition, in the above example, the number of pieces of identification information and the display mode are different in the case of the first specific game state ST41 than in the case of other game states, but the number of pieces of identification information and the display mode are different in each game state. The display mode may also be set. The number of pieces of identification information in each gaming state may be made smaller or larger than the number of pieces of identification information in the normal gaming state ST1.

FIG. 3-38 shows an example where a support win, which is a specific result different from the special result, is derived in the first specific gaming state ST41.
The same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left variable display area 81a and the right variable display area 81c as shown in FIG. 3-38(b) from the state where the variable display is being performed as shown in FIG. 3-38(a). , it becomes a reach state.
Then, as shown in Figure 3-38(c), a battle between the ally character and the enemy character is performed, and after the result in which the ally character wins is shown as shown in Figure 3-38(d), As shown in -38(e), the results of each support are displayed in a stopped state. After this, the second specific gaming state ST42 is started without going through the first special gaming state ST2.

In the result mode of the support win on the first decorative game display section 81, the symbol "V", which is specific identification information that is not displayed during the variable display, stops in the medium variable display area 81b. In addition, in the result mode of the support win on the second decorative game display section 82, the symbol "〇", which is specific identification information that is not displayed during the variable display, stops in the middle area. In this way, by stopping the symbols that are not displayed during the fluctuating display, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that it is a support win.

After such a result mode is displayed, the second specific gaming state ST42 is started. In the second specific gaming state ST42, a display indicating that the second specific gaming state ST42 is in effect (for example, "chance mode") is made on the gaming state display 86, and the background display etc. also becomes a display indicating the second specific gaming state ST42. . Further, a right-handed batting instruction display 90 is displayed to clearly indicate that the player will bat right-handed, and the number and color of the identification information are also returned to their original state as shown in FIG. 3-36(g).

FIGS. 3-38(f) to (j) show an example of a case where a result mode other than a support win is derived in the first specific gaming state ST41.
Among the cases where the result is a jackpot in the special figure 1 variable display game, if a 3R jackpot C that becomes the second specific gaming state ST42 of support C after the end of the first special gaming state ST2 is derived, the result is shown in Figure 3-38. After the result in which the ally character won is displayed as shown in (d), the result of the jackpot corresponding to the 3R jackpot C is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 3-38 (f). The results of the jackpot corresponding to 3R jackpot C are odd-numbered squares “111,” “333,” and “555,” and are the same in the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82. Results are shown.

In addition, when a 10R jackpot is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game, the jackpot result pattern corresponding to the 10R jackpot shown in Fig. 3-38 (g) stops after the display in Fig. 3-38 (f). Is displayed. The jackpot result format corresponding to the 10R jackpot is "777", and the same result format is shown on the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82. Note that the result format shown in FIG. 3-38(g) may be directly displayed without going through the display format shown in FIG. 3-38(f).
After the result mode shown in FIG. 3-38(f) or (g) is shown, the effect of the first special game state ST2 as shown in FIGS. 3-36(e) and (f) is performed.

The support hit, 3R jackpot C, and 10R jackpot are all result modes that result in support C, which is the second specific gaming state ST42, and since the next jackpot can also be expected, an effect in which the ally character wins is performed. This indicates that the situation will be advantageous for the player. In addition, in the case of 3R jackpot C and 10R jackpot, the second specific gaming state ST42 is entered after passing through the first special gaming state ST2, and since the result is more advantageous for the player than the support hit, the result pattern is different. It is said to be a black eye.

In addition, among the cases where the result is a jackpot in the special figure 1 variable display game, if a 3R jackpot B that becomes the first specific gaming state ST41 of support B after the end of the first special gaming state ST2 is derived, FIG. After the result in which the ally character lost is displayed as shown in -38(h), the result of 3R jackpot B is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 3-38(i). In addition, in the first specific gaming state ST41, the 3R jackpot A that becomes the first specific gaming state ST41 of support A after the end of the first special gaming state ST2 is not derived.
The result format of the jackpot corresponding to the 3R jackpot B is different between the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game. In the first decorative game display section 81, the left variable display area 81a and the right variable display area 81c have the same identification information, and the medium variable display area 81b has different identification information, resulting in a so-called out-of-reach result mode. . In addition, the second decorative game display section 82
, the even numbers are ``222,''``444,'' and ``666.''

In the normal gaming state ST1, this even numbered row is a result mode corresponding to the 3R jackpot A or B which becomes the first specific gaming state ST41 of support A or B after the end of the first special gaming state ST2. In the normal gaming state ST1, in the case of 3R jackpot A or B, even-numbered squares are stopped and displayed on the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82, but the first
In the specific game state ST41, the result mode as described above is stopped and displayed.
That is, in the first specific gaming state ST41, in the case of 3R jackpot B, which is a predetermined result, a result mode different from that in the normal gaming state ST1 is stopped and displayed in the first decorative game display section 81, but in the second In the decorative game display section 82, the same result pattern as in the normal game state ST1 is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the first special gaming state ST2 based on 3R jackpot B, the first specific gaming state ST41 returns after the end of the first special gaming state ST2, so as shown in FIGS. 3-36(e) and (f) The effect of the first special game state ST2 is not performed, but the effect that the first specific game state ST41 continues is performed as shown in FIG. 3-38(j).

In addition, in the above example, in the case of a support hit, "V", which is the specific identification information that is not displayed during the fluctuation display, is stopped and displayed in the medium fluctuation display area 81b, but the specific identification information is also displayed in the other fluctuation display areas. It is also possible to stop and display the . For example, the result format for support may be set to "VVV" consisting only of specific identification information.
Further, although only "V" is used as the specific identification information, a plurality of specific identification information may exist. For example, if any of the specific identification information stops in the medium fluctuation display area 81b from the reach state, it may become a support hit result mode. In addition, we have set up not only support C as a specific gaming state that can be transitioned to when the support is won, but also cases where it can transition to support A or B.
A plurality of specific identification information may be associated with each specific gaming state, and the type of specific gaming state to be transitioned to may be suggested or notified based on the specific identification information that has stopped.

Furthermore, although the display color and pattern of the specific identification information are the same as the display colors and patterns of other identification information, they may be different from the display colors and patterns of other identification information. Furthermore, in the case where a plurality of pieces of specific identification information are provided, a plurality of pieces of specific identification information may be provided that have the same pattern but differ only in display color and pattern.
Furthermore, the result format including specific identification information may be displayed not only in the case of a support hit but also in the case of other results, and results including specific identification information even in gaming states other than the first specific gaming state ST41. The mode may also be displayed. Further, the result form of the small win may include the specific identification information, and the 3R small wins A to C may be suggested or notified based on the type of the specific identification information.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, A game control means (game control device 100) that centrally controls the game, a display device (display device 41) that can display effects related to the game, and a performance control means (effect control device 300) that controls the display of the display means. A normal variable prize winning device 3 which can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and an open state in which the game ball can win a prize, and can generate the right to execute a game by winning a prize.
7, the game control means controls the ease of winning a game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 in a first state (state with no power support) and a second state in which winning is easier than the first state. 2 state (first specific gaming state ST41), and a third state (second specific gaming state ST41) in which winning is easier than the second state.
42), and if the game result is a specific result (support win) in the second state, the third state is controlled without going through the special gaming state. The production control means can display a decoration game corresponding to the game on the display means, and when displaying a result pattern corresponding to a specific result in the decoration game, during the fluctuating display, This means that specific identification information, which is identification information that is not displayed, can be included in the result format.
Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize the support win, which is different from the jackpot, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the performance control means can display a first decorative game and a second decorative game as decorative games, and can specifically identify both the first decorative game and the second decorative game in a result mode corresponding to a specific result. It will contain information.
Therefore, in both the first decoration game and the second decoration game, it becomes easier to recognize the support win, which is different from the jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Moreover, the performance control means displays the specific identification information of the first decorative game and the specific identification information of the second decorative game differently.
Therefore, in each of the first decoration game and the second decoration game, it becomes easier to recognize the support win, which is different from the jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the game control means sets a first specific gaming state ST41 as a specific gaming state in which the state of the normal variable winning device 37 is the second state, and a winning state of the normal variable winning device 37 from the first specific gaming state ST41. It is possible to generate a second specific gaming state ST42 in which it is easy to do so, and a specific result can be derived only in the first specific gaming state ST41.
Therefore, the game conditions can be varied and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the performance control means can vary the number of pieces of identification information depending on the gaming state.
Moreover, the performance control means is configured to reduce the number of pieces of identification information when the game is in the first specific game state ST41 than when it is in other game states.
Therefore, it is possible to give the impression that the specific result is more likely to be derived,
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Furthermore, the taste of the decorative game differs depending on the playing state, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the performance control means reduces the number of pieces of identification information of the first decorative game when the first specific game state ST41 is set than when the case of other game states, but the number of pieces of identification information of the second decoration game Therefore, in the second decoration game, the results can be displayed in the same way as in other game states, and the display is easy for players to understand. It can be done.

Further, the performance control means can change the display mode of the identification information depending on the gaming state.
In addition, the performance control means makes the display mode of the identification information in the first specific gaming state ST41 different from the display mode in other gaming states.
In addition, the production control means sets the display mode of the identification information in the case of the first specific gaming state ST41 to a common display with the identification information constituting the result mode corresponding to the result with the highest gaming value given to the player. This means that it has been made as a mode.
The display mode of the identification information includes color, pattern, shape, size, etc. of the identification information.
Further, the order in which the identification information is displayed in the variable display in one variable display area may be different.
Therefore, it is possible to give the impression that the specific result is more likely to be derived,
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.
Furthermore, the taste of the decorative game differs depending on the playing state, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, a look-ahead effect for the special figure variable display game will be explained. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is possible to suggest or notify the result of the special figure fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern, etc. by the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby memory display section 83. ing. FIG. 3-39 shows an example of a performance that suggests the operation of the board performance device 44 as an example of such a pre-read performance.

As shown in FIG. 3-39(a), the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory to be consumed in the standby memory display section 83 changes to a display mode imitating a ship. ing.
In the game machine of this embodiment, the display mode imitating a ship is used as a display that suggests or informs the operation of the board presentation device 44.
As shown in FIG. 3-39(b), when the running special symbol fluctuation display game ends and as shown in FIG. 3-39(c), the special symbol fluctuation display game based on the starting memory starts, The decorative special figure starting memory display that has changed to a display mode simulating a ship moves to the running memory display section 84, and a performance display 92 simulating an aircraft taking off from a ship is performed.

After the plurality of effect displays 92 are once assembled in the center of the display area to show the player that the effect display 92 is being displayed, they are displayed in all directions in the display area, as shown in FIG. 3-39(d). It appears to be flying around. At this time, the layer displaying the effect display 92 is the frontmost layer, and the effect display 92 is displayed in front of other displays. Further, the effect display 92 is displayed on the front side of the second decorative game display section 82 so as not to overlap, so that the progress of the special figure variation display game can be reliably viewed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 3-39(e), one of the effect displays 92 is enlarged compared to the state shown in FIG. 3-39(d), and a state of flying upward at a low speed is shown. At this time, the effect display 92 is emphasized by darkening the display other than the effect display 92.
As shown in Figure 3-39(f), when the upward flying effect display 92 reaches the top of the display area, an effect display 93 is displayed to make it look like a collision, and the screen appears as shown in Figure 3-39(g). The upper presentation device 44b, which is the presentation device 44, moves downward.

In this way, it is possible to suggest or notify the operation of the board production device 44 depending on the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display. Further, the operation of the board presentation device 44 can be suggested or notified by the operation of the presentation display 92 displayed on the display device 41. Furthermore, it is possible to suggest or notify the timing at which the board presentation device 44 operates by the operation of the presentation display 92 displayed on the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 3-39(e).
It can also be said that the board presentation device 44 is operated by the decorative special figure start memory display acting on the board presentation device 44. In the above example, the decorative special figure start memory display acts on the board effect device 44 via the effect display 92, but the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the execution memory display section 84 directly acts on the board effect display 92. The board presentation device 44 may be operated by operating in the direction in which the presentation device 44 is located.

In the above example, the effect display 92 collides with the position of the upper effect device 44b and the upper effect device 44b operates, but the effect display 92 collides with the position where the effect display 92 collides with the board effect device 4 that operates.
It may or may not be related to position 4. That is, the board effect device 44 located at the position where the effect display 92 collided may be operated, or, for example, the effect display 92 may be operated.
may collide upward and the lower presentation device 44a may operate. Furthermore, a plurality of board presentation devices 44 may be activated by the collision of one presentation display 92.

In addition, the decorative special figure start memory display is a display that imitates a ship, and the performance display 92 is a display that imitates an aircraft launched from a ship, so that there is a relationship between the two displays, but there is no relationship between the two displays. Alternatively, the effect display 92 may not appear from the decorative special figure start memory display, but the effect display 92 may appear from a position other than the decorative special figure start memory display. Also,
Although the decorative special figure start memory display and the performance display 92 have different shapes, they may have the same shape.

In addition, although the decorative special figure start memory display that suggests or informs the operation of the board effect device 44 is a display imitating a ship, it may have a shape other than this, or may have a plurality of types of shapes. for example,
There may be a first display mode that resembles a ship and a second display mode that resembles a submarine, both of which may suggest or notify the operation of the board presentation device 44. Furthermore, the first display mode and the second display mode may be displayed at different timings. For example, the first display mode may be displayed from the time of winning a prize, and the second display mode may be displayed from the time of winning a prize. The display mode may be different from time to time (the normal display mode indicated by a white circle in the figure or another display mode) and may be changed at a predetermined timing.
Further, although the effect display 92 is shown as a display imitating an aircraft, it may have a shape other than this, and may have a plurality of types of shapes. In addition, a plurality of types of effect displays 92 may be displayed in a mixed manner, and depending on the types of effect displays 92 included, not only the operation of the board effect device 44 is suggested or notified, but also the operation of the effect display device 44. 44 types, movement patterns, movement timings,
It is also possible to suggest or notify more detailed information such as the number of operations.

In addition, the display mode such as the number, operation, size, color, type, etc. of the production display 92, the display mode such as the operation, size, color, type, etc. of the decorative special figure start memory display, and the operation of the board production device 44. It may be related.
For example, the display mode of the effect display 92 or the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display may or may not be related to the number of operations of the board effect device 44. For example, when three effect displays 92 are displayed as shown in FIG. 3-39(d), it may suggest or notify that there will be three operations of the board effect device 44, or it may indicate that there will be three operations of the board effect device 44. The type and operation pattern of the board production device 44 that operates each time may be suggested or notified.
Further, the high possibility of operation of the board presentation device 44 may be suggested or notified by the display mode of the effect display 92 or the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display. For example, the performance display 9
It may be arranged such that the more 2 there is, the higher the possibility that the board presentation device 44 will operate.

Further, the type of operating board effect device 44 may be suggested or notified by the display mode of the effect display 92 or the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display. For example, it may be configured such that the more effect displays 92 there are, the higher the possibility that the upper effect device 44b will operate.
Further, the operation mode of the board production device 44 may be suggested or notified by the display mode of the production display 92 or the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display. For example, it may be configured such that the more effect displays 92 there are, the higher the possibility that the range in which the upper effect device 44b will descend will increase, or which of the plurality of operation patterns of the board effect device 44 will be selected. It may be suggested or announced.

Furthermore, there may be a case where the state shown in FIG. 3-39(e) returns to the state shown in FIG. 3-39(d) without changing to the state shown in FIG. 3-39(f) as a feint effect. Further, there may be a case where the effect display 92 is displayed but disappears and the board effect device 44 does not operate.
Furthermore, the display on the running memory display section 84 may be erased after the effect display 92 is displayed.

In addition, there is also a decorative special figure starting memory display which is a normal display mode such as the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the second starting memory to be digested in Figure 3-39 (a), and a display mode imitating a ship. Depending on the decorative special figure start memory display that has changed from the normal display mode, the period of stay from when it is displayed on the running memory display section 84 until it is erased may be different. For example, the decorative special figure start memory display that has changed from the normal display mode may have a longer stay period than the decorative special figure start memory display that has the normal display mode. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. Of course, the length of stay may be shortened or the length of stay may be the same.

In addition, the operation in the running memory display section 84 is different between the normal display mode, the decorative special figure start memory display, and the decorative special figure start memory display, which is changed from the normal display mode such as a display mode imitating a ship. It's okay to be different. For example, the decorative special figure start memory display which is a normal display mode is not operated in the running memory display section 84, and the decorative special figure start memory display which has changed from the normal display mode is operated in the running memory display section 84. You can do it like this.

Further, in the case shown in FIG. 3-39(e), the visibility of the effect display 92 is made higher than the visibility of other displays, but the visibility of the effect display 92 is higher than that of other displays also in other cases. It may be set higher than the display value.
For example, as shown in FIG. 3-39(d), when the identification information is displayed in the first decorative game display section 81 in a rapidly changing manner, the performance display 92 is displayed faster than the identification information on the first decorative game display section 81. The visibility may be increased.
Further, when the first decorative game display section 81 is in a ready-to-win state, the visibility of the identification information of the first decorative game display section 81 and the effect display 92 may be made to be the same level.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3-39(d), the effect display 92 is configured to move in all directions, but it may also be configured to move in a fixed direction.
For example, it may be moved along a straight line or may be moved along a circle. Further, the movement may be made to move in parallel to the vertical direction that is the variable display direction of the first decorative game display section 81, or in the direction that intersects with the vertical direction that is the variable display direction of the first decorative game display section 81. You may also do so.

Further, the player may be allowed to select whether or not to display the effect display 92. In this case, the selection may be made by calling a menu screen in a state where the special figure variation display game is not being executed, or the player may press the effect button in the special figure variation display game in which the effect display 92 is displayed. It may also be possible to select whether to display or not by operating 25 or the like. Since the effect display 92 can be displayed overlapping with the display of the first decorative game display section 81, visibility may be reduced due to the effect display 92, but by choosing not to display it, the decrease in visibility can be prevented. can do.

Further, in addition to suggesting or notifying the operation of the board presentation device 44, the operation of other devices may be suggested or notified.
For example, it may be possible to suggest or notify the effects of light-emitting members such as the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and to indicate the color of the light, the mode of light emission such as blinking, the type of light-emitting member that emits light, the timing of light emission, etc. It is possible to suggest or inform.
Further, when the effect button 25 is set to operate, the operation and timing of the effect button 25 may be suggested or notified.

In addition, although the decorative special figure start memory display and the effect display 92 are used to suggest or notify the operation of the board effect device 44 in the special figure variation display game that is being executed, the operation of the board effect device 44 in the special figure variation display game that is being executed is The operation of the board production device 44 in the special figure variation display game may be suggested or notified.
For example, when a decorative special figure starting memory display imitating a ship is displayed on the running memory display section 84, it suggests that there is an operation of the board production device 44 in a special figure variation display game based on the starting memory that exists when the display resembles a ship. Alternatively, the information may be notified.
In addition, the effect display 92 is displayed while the special figure variation display game is being executed, and the special figure variation display game ends with the effect display 92 still being displayed, and even in the next special figure variation display game. By continuously displaying the effect display 92, it is suggested or notified that there will be an operation of the board effect device 44 in a special figure variation display game after the special figure variation display game in which the display of the effect display 92 was started. You can do it like this.

In addition, the decorative special figure start memory display and the effect display 92 not only suggest or inform the operation of the board effect device 44 in the special figure fluctuation display game, but also indicate the operation of the board effect device 44 during the special game state.
The operation may be suggested or announced.
For example, in the first special gaming state ST2, the so-called promotion effect indicates that the special result is more advantageous to the player than the special result notified at the start of the first special gaming state ST2 with the operation of the board effect device 44. By making it possible to execute, and by suggesting or notifying the operation of the board production device 44 in the first special game state ST2 by the decorative special figure start memory display and the production display 92,
It may be suggested or announced that a promotion performance will be performed.

Based on the above, a game that centrally controls the game in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates an advantageous situation for the player when the result of the game is a special result. A control means (game control device 100), a performance control device (performance control device 300) that controls the performance of the game, and a movable performance device (board performance device 44) that can operate in connection with the performance of the game.
, a display means (display device 41) for displaying the performance of the game, and a starting memory that becomes the right to execute the game based on the winning of the game ball in the starting winning area (starting winning hole 36, normal variable winning device 37). A starting storage means (gaming control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number, and a preliminary determination means for determining the starting memory before a game corresponding to the starting memory stored in the starting memory is executed. (Game control device 100), the performance control means is capable of displaying a starting memory display (ornamental special figure starting memory display) corresponding to the starting memory on the display means, and can make a preliminary determination based on the display mode of the starting memory display. It is possible to perform a pre-reading effect that suggests or informs the determination result by the means, and in the pre-reading effect, it is possible to suggest or inform the operation of the movable effect device.
Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation due to the operation of the movable presentation device, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the effect control means causes the movable effect device to operate by performing a effect in which the start memory display acts on the movable effect device.
Therefore, it becomes possible to visually recognize that the movable presentation device is operating, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control means causes the movable effect device to operate by performing a effect in which the start memory display acts on the movable effect device.
Therefore, it becomes possible to visually recognize that the movable presentation device is operating, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Fourth embodiment>
The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 4-1 to 4-44. Note that the configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to third embodiments. Furthermore, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for components that perform the same functions as those in the first to third embodiments.

FIG. 4-1 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, and FIG. 4-2 is a front perspective view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 4-1 and 4-2, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be rotatable in opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 4-3) is stored in a storage section (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 including a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

A display board 350 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is provided on the glass frame 15 at a position behind the cover glass 14. The display board 350 can see through the game board 30 and can display a predetermined display. Although the game machine of this embodiment is configured with a light guide plate on which an image appears by introducing light from the side edge, it may also be configured with a transparent liquid crystal display device or an EL display device.
When the display board 350 is not displaying a predetermined display, it is transparent and does not obstruct the visibility of the game board 30 at the rear. Then, when a predetermined display is displayed on the display board 350,
The visibility of the rear game board 30 is reduced in the predetermined display portion. In this state, the rear game board 30 may be visible through the predetermined display, or the rear game board 30 may be invisible due to the predetermined display.

At the top of the glass frame 15, a model name display section 16 for displaying the model name of the gaming machine 10, etc. is provided.
In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration, presentation, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are set in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15. Furthermore, when an abnormality occurs, the content of the abnormality is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a lamp for reporting an abnormality in dispensing may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the bottom of the glass frame 15, there is an upper tray (storage tray) 21 for supplying game balls to a batted ball firing device (not shown), and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. An upper plate ball outlet 22 and the like are provided for outflow. Further, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, there is provided a performance button 25 that includes a performance button switch 25a (see FIGS. 4-5) for accepting press operation input from the player. The production button 25 also has a built-in drive source that vibrates the production button 25. That is, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has a vibration function that makes a predetermined notification by vibrating the performance button 25. The production button 25 can be converted from a normal state (the state shown in FIGS. 4-1 and 4-2) to a protruding state (a state in which the top surface (pressing surface) of the production button 25 is higher than in the normal state). It may be configured as follows.

At the lower part of the front frame 12, there are provided a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls put out when the upper tray 21 is full, a handle 24 of a batted ball firing device, and the like. Furthermore, front frame 1
A keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15.

Further, on the right side of the production button 25, there is a lending button (ball lending button) 27a that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a lending button 27a for ejecting a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A return button (ejection button) 27b that is operated to operate the balance, a balance display device (balance display section) 27c that displays the balance of the prepaid card, and an upper tray operation lever that is operated to cause the game balls in the upper tray 21 to flow down to the lower tray 23. 27d, a mobile terminal holder 28 for placing a mobile terminal such as a smartphone owned by a player is provided. Further, to the left of the production button 25, a volume adjustment button 27e, a cross key 29, etc. are provided.
In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 24, the ball firing device fires game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. . Furthermore, when the player operates the production button 25 or the cross key 29, the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 4-3). You can perform performances, etc.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be explained using FIG. 4-3. FIG. 4-3 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 4-3, the game board 30 includes a flat game board body that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front side of the game board body is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. A gaming area 32 is provided. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball firing device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the direction of the game balls flowing down, and the fired game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case 40 is attached that forms a window that serves as a display area for a variable display game. A display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is arranged behind a window portion formed in the center case 40.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured of a device having a display screen, such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area (display area) where images can be displayed on the display screen, still images and videos can be displayed as performance images, such as multiple identification information (special symbols), characters for special symbol variation display games, etc. Information regarding the game, such as a background image that enhances the presentation effect, is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special symbol variable display game corresponding to the special symbol variable display game is played. Furthermore, images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

The center case 40 includes a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 into the center case 40, and a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 into the center case 40, and a warp flow path forming member 614 that allows the game balls that have passed through the warp flow path to roll. A possible stage section 620 is provided. Since the stage part 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize opening 36, the game balls rolling on the stage part 620 can easily win in the starting winning opening 36.
Further, the upper and lower parts of the center case 40 are provided with a board presentation device 44 that performs a game presentation by operating. The lower presentation device 44a provided at the lower part of the center case 40 is operable between the lower part of the center case 40 and a position closer to the center of the display device 41 than this position.
The upper presentation device 44b provided at the upper part of the center case 40 is operable between the upper position of the center case 40 and a position closer to the center of the display device 41 than this position. Moreover, the above-mentioned presentation device 44b includes a rotating operating member 44c imitating a propeller.
It is possible to perform effects also by the movement of the movement member 44c.
That is, the lower presentation device 44a constitutes a first movable accessory having an operable first movable member,
The upper performance device 44b constitutes a second movable accessory having a second movable member that can be operated.

In the gaming area 32 on the right and lower side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (normal symbol starting gate) 34 is provided. A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 4-4) is provided inside the regular figure starting gate 34 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the regular figure starting gate 34. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the regular figure starting gate 34, the regular figure fluctuation display game is executed.

Three general winning holes 35 are arranged in the gaming area 32 on the lower left of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the gaming area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. The winning of game balls into these general winning holes 35 is detected by the winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 4-4) provided in the general winning hole 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a starting prize opening 36 (first starting prize area) is provided which provides a starting condition for the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game). The game ball that has won the starting prize opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 4-4).

On the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) is provided that provides starting conditions for the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game). The winning game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 4-4).
The normal variable prize winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b, and this movable member 37b normally maintains a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which game balls cannot enter. When the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a predetermined result, the general variable prize winning device is operated in an inverted “C” shape by the general electric solenoid 37c (see Fig. 4-4) as a driving device. 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which game balls can easily flow into the player.
It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 allows the game ball to win even when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, and may be in a state where it is more difficult to win the game ball in the closed state than in the open state.

In the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40, there is provided a special variable prize winning device (big prize opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variable display game. There is. The special variable prize winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening/closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, and when opened, game balls can flow into the upper prize winning opening. Convert to state. The special variable winning device 38 converts the grand prize opening from a closed state to an open state depending on the result of the special figure variable display game, and facilitates the flow of game balls into the grand prize opening, thereby providing a reward to the player. A predetermined gaming value (prize ball) is given. A game ball that has won a prize in the special variable winning device 38 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 4-4).

Inside the grand prize opening (winning area), there is a specific area where game balls can flow into, and a lever solenoid 38f (Figure 4-4 A lever member is provided which is actuated by (see). A specific area switch 38d (see FIG. 4-4) that can detect the inflow of game balls is provided in the specific area, and based on the detection of game balls by the specific area switch 38d, an advantageous area for the player is displayed. A state occurs (in this embodiment, a special game state occurs). The game balls that have flowed into the specific area are discharged to the outside of the special variable prize winning device 38.

Furthermore, a remaining ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 4-4) is provided inside the big winning hole to detect game balls that are discharged to the outside of the special variable winning device 38 without flowing into a specific area. There is. The number of game balls detected by the big winning hole switch 38a provided inside the big winning hole (the number of game balls flowing into the big winning hole) and the game detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball outlet switch 38e By matching the number of balls (the number of game balls ejected from the grand prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper prize winning hole have been ejected, and basically until this confirmation is completed, new The grand prize opening will no longer be opened.

In the gaming area 32 below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a is provided for collecting game balls that do not win the winning opening or the like. Also, outside the gaming area 32, the gaming board main body 80
In the lower right corner of is the special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game)
Also provided is a collective display device 50 that executes a general figure fluctuation display game.

The batch display device 50 is a special figure 1 display device (first special figure variation display section) for the special figure 1 variation display game.
51 and special figure 2 variable display special figure 2 display device for the game (second special figure variable display section) 52, and special figure 1
It is provided with a special figure 1 pending display 53 for informing the starting memory number of the variable display game and a special figure 2 pending display 54 for informing the starting memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game.

The collective display device 50 also includes a round display section 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a jackpot (the number of times the special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed), and a gaming state display section 5 that displays the gaming state of the gaming machine 10.
6. This game state display section 56 includes a first game state display section 56a that informs the player of the way of hitting that is advantageous to the player (the way of hitting that corresponds to the game state) between hitting to the left (normal hitting) and hitting to the right.
, a second gaming state display section 56b that notifies that the time saving state is in effect (when the variable time saving function is activated).
A third gaming state display section 56c is provided to notify that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the special symbol probability is always constant, the third gaming state display section 56c is not used.
Furthermore, the collective display device 50 includes a regular figure display 57 for the regular figure fluctuation display game, and a regular figure pending display 58 for informing the starting memory number of the regular figure fluctuation display game.

FIG. 4-4 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, which is a main control device (main board) that centrally controls the game, and has a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110, the input section 120, and the output section 130. .

The CPU section 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that includes an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator and generates a reference clock for a CPU operating clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are powered by DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC-DC generator that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power source.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a converter or a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from a DC32V voltage, and a gaming microcomputer 1.
a backup power supply section 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 11 in the event of a power outage;
It has a power outage monitoring circuit, and includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power outage.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the gaming control device 100, but the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are configured on a separate board or integrated with the gaming control device 100, that is, the main It may also be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are subject to replacement when changing models, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board separate from the power supply device 400 or the main board, as in this embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to remove it from the target of replacement and reduce costs.

The backup power supply section 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is provided by the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is maintained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. That is, the gaming control device 100 can store and retain information regarding the game even if a power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and after the power is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It serves as a game information storage and holding means.
The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops to 17V or less, detects the occurrence of a power outage, changes the power outage monitoring signal, and generates a reset signal after a predetermined time. Output. Also, when the power is turned on or when a power failure is recovered, a reset signal is output after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the gaming control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. will be held. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and an RA that can be read and written at any time.
M (random access memory) 111C is provided.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores unchanging information for game control (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.), and the RAM 111C serves as a work area for the CPU 111A and a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the performance, the presence or absence of a ready-to-reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table used by the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory. Further, the variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table that is selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot variation pattern table that is selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and tables for determining the fluctuation pattern before reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.). It includes tables (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining first half variation patterns, which are patterns.

Here, reach (ready-to-reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays multiple display results at different times, and the multiple display results are predetermined. A gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous to the player when a special result mode occurs (special gaming state)
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device has progressed to the stage before the display results are derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode have not been met. This refers to the display mode that does not exist. For example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result aspect is complete (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Furthermore, the reach state is the display state at the point when the display control of the display device has progressed to the stage before the display results are derived and displayed, and is determined before the display results are derived and displayed. A display state in which at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, a decorative special figure variable display game displayed on a display device in response to a special figure variable display game may vary a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the variable display is to be stopped in the left, right, and middle order to display the result mode, the left and right variable display areas will display a state where the conditions for the special result mode are met (for example, The state in which the variable display stops with the same identification information is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas meet the conditions for special result mode (for example, the same The state of identification information,
However, it is also possible to make the remaining variable display area (excluding the special result mode) into a ready-to-reach state, and to display the remaining variable display area in a variable manner from this ready-to-reach state.

This reach state includes multiple reach performances, and the reach performances with different possibilities of deriving special results (different expected values) include normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 Reach) and Premier Reach are set. The expected values are: No reach < Normal reach < Special 1 reach < Special 2 reach < Special 3 reach <
The prices increase in order of premier reach. Moreover, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in the special symbol variable display game (when it becomes a jackpot). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when the result is a loss). Therefore, a state in which a ready-to-win state occurs is a state in which there is a higher possibility of a jackpot than in a case in which a ready-to-reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the performance control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and display device to operate the game machine. Controls the entire 10. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 uses a jackpot random number for determining the hit in the special pattern fluctuation display game, a special pattern pattern random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a fluctuation pattern ( Random number generation to generate variable pattern random numbers to determine the execution time of variable display games in various reach and non-reach variable displays), random number to generate winning random numbers to determine hits in general figure variable display games, etc. circuit, and a clock generator that generates a clock that provides a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111A uses the ROM 111B in processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game.
Any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the memory is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A calculates the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit, small hit, or miss), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state), Based on the starting memory number and the like, one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. Here, CPU111A
constitutes fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

The payout control device 200 is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with the prize ball payout command (command and data) from the game control device 100, and dispenses the prize balls. Performs control for dispensing. Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit to pay out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, The winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, the big winning opening switch 38a in the special variable winning device 38, the gate switch 34a in the normal figure starting gate 34, the specific area switch 38d arranged in the special variable winning device 38 and remaining bulb outlet switch 38
e. It is connected to an out ball detection switch 32a that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 11V. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided which inputs a negative logic signal such as 7V and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V to 5V. Proximity I
/F121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the sensor or proximity switch lead wires may be improperly shorted, the sensor or switch may be removed from the connector, or the lead wires may be cut and left floating. It is configured to be able to detect such abnormal conditions and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, third input port 124, or fourth input port 126, and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switch 38a, and the gate switch 34a are input to the second input port 123. . Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, detection signals from the specific area switch 38d, remaining ball outlet switch 38e, and out ball detection switch 32a are input to the fourth input port 126. Also, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121,
A detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality in a sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 .

The third input port 124 also includes a detection signal from a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, a detection signal from a vibration sensor 65 for detecting vibrations of the gaming machine 10,
A detection signal from a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the gaming machine 10 and a detection signal from a main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 etc. of the gaming machine 10 are also input. It has become so.

Further, the third input port 124 receives a signal from the setting key switch 152 that detects the operation of the setting key operation section. The setting key operation section has a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted.
The configuration is such that the corresponding setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect when it is turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is turned to the second position, and turns on when it is not turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation section are operation sections for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values of special results in the special figure fluctuation display game are assigned, and these operation sections are operated. By doing so, you can select a probability setting value that is assigned a probability value that will result in a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value will be used in the game. There is. Here, six probability setting values, "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", are prepared.

When selecting the probability setting value, turn the setting key on the setting key operation section to the second position and press R.
By turning on the power of the gaming machine while operating (pressing) the AM initialization switch 112, the probability setting value change mode is enabled in which the probability setting value can be changed. You can change the probability setting value by pressing (press). The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and accessory ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays information on the probability setting value while performing operations related to the probability setting value (while in the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode); The calculated base value and accessory ratio are now displayed.

In addition, the setting key of the setting key operation section is turned to the second position (RAM initialization switch 11
By turning on the power of the gaming machine in step 2 (no operation), the currently selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153, but the probability setting value confirmation mode is entered in which the probability setting value cannot be changed. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation section cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is in an open state.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and is adapted to display the probability setting value as a number from 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that allows the probability setting value to be recognized may be used. In addition, other types of display devices such as liquid crystal display devices may be used,
The probability setting value may be indicated by the lighting mode, emitted light color, etc. of one or more LEDs.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the outputs to the second input port 123 and the outputs to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out-ball detection switch 32a) are connected to the main board 100.
The light is also supplied from the relay board 70 to a test firing test device (not shown). Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37
The detection signal a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12V is supplied to the proximity I/F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is transmitted to the enable signal CE by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122, which will be described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave fraud signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided in the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave), a payout busy signal (a signal output from the payout control device A signal indicating whether or not 200 is in a state where it can accept commands), a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (full)), a touch switch signal (based on the input of a touch switch provided on the handle 24) A first input port 122 is provided for taking in signals (signals) and supplying them to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has the function of removing noise from.
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In other words, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
The signal is input directly to the reset terminal provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130. Furthermore, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the sight-fire test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the sight-fire test device is turned off. It is configured as follows. Further, the configuration may be such that the reset signal RESET can be output to the sight test equipment via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is applied to each port 122, 123,
124 and 126 are not supplied. The data set in each port of the output section 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent system malfunction. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the production control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that this is one-way communication in which signals cannot be input from the production control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to a data bus 140 and sends data to inform a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) of special symbol information of a variable display game, a signal indicating a jackpot probability state, etc. via a relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine that is an actual machine (mass-produced and sold product) installed in a game parlor. Note that a detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a starting port switch, outputted from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor 61, panel radio sensor 62, and vibration sensor 65 that cannot be directly supplied to the test firing test device are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, such as those detected by the gaming microcomputer 111. The signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test device via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the machine cannot control the game. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the sight test equipment, and a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal without going through the buffer. There is. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test device.

Further, the output section 130 is provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140. The second output port 134 is used to open the special variable winning device 38, the large winning hole solenoid (large winning hole solenoid 1) 38b, the lever solenoid 38f, which operates the lever member in the special variable winning device 38, and the normal variable winning device 37. Opening general electric solenoid 37
This is a port for outputting the operation data of c and the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the currently selected probability setting value.
Further, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting on/off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50; Turn on/off the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting off data.

The output unit 130 also outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 7.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for output to 1. The external information terminal board 71 is equipped with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device installed in a game parlor (an information collection terminal, a game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and can transmit information regarding the game machine 10. It is now possible to supply it to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 includes a first driver ( Drive circuit) 138a, third output port 1
A second driver 138b outputs an on/off driving signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 outputted from the fourth output port 136, and a collective display device 5 outputted from the fourth output port 136.
A third driver 138c outputs an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of 0.
, a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71, and a display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134. a fifth driver 138e that receives the signal, generates a drive signal, and outputs the drive signal.
is provided. Note that data is transmitted from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e by serial communication.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that it can drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. The fifth driver 138e has a power supply voltage of D to be able to drive the performance display device 153 that operates at 5V.
C5V is supplied from power supply device 400.
Further, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50 includes DC1
2V is supplied. The third driver 138c that drives the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to display data with a current, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal via the segment line, thereby achieving a dynamic drive system. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are turned on.
The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.
In addition, the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the gaming control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. Photo coupler 13
Reference numeral 9 is configured to enable mutual communication between the gaming microcomputer 111 and the inspection device 500 so that data can be sent and received by serial communication. In addition, since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 like a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, 124, and 126 are not provided. do not have.

Note that, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting prize opening 36,
The starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switch 38a, and the gate switch 34a in the normal variable winning device 37 are equipped with magnetic detection coils to detect the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when metal comes close to the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (
(hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the gaming machine 10 and the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 etc. are microswitches having mechanical contacts. can be used.

Next, the configuration of the production control device 300 will be explained using FIGS. 4-5.
The production control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, uses an amusement chip (IC).
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying video on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melodies, sound effects, etc. from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It is equipped with

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of ROM (Programmable Read Only Memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe memory that can retain memory contents even when power is not supplied during a power outage.
The RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.). Note that a RAM providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the performance, and
It executes processes such as instructing the content of the output video to the DP 312, instructing the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lighting decorative lamps, controlling the drive of motors and solenoids, and managing performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 that stores character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read out from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYN is sent from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 for synchronizing the image on the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30.
C. A synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
The main control microcomputer 311 receives interrupt signals INT0 to INT0 to notify processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait signal to indicate that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. Signals such as WAIT are also input.

The production control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 using the LVDS (low amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the audio source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. In addition, an interrupt signal INT is sent from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
is now entered. The production control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is outputted from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the production control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives commands transmitted from the game control device 100. Via this command I/F 331, a production control command signal (production command ). Gaming microcomputer 111 of gaming control device 100
operates at DC5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the production control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, so the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

The production control device 300 also includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 including the display board 350) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided therein, is provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). The board presentation device 44 (
For example, a board performance movable body control circuit 334 is provided that drives and controls a movable accessory that enhances the performance effect in cooperation with the performance display on the display device 41. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340. Note that even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device equipped with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates a device for effect), and a frame effect movable body control circuit is provided to drive and control the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, a cross key 29 provided in the glass frame 15, and an initial position of the motor in the board production device 44. Performance accessory switch 47 (performance motor switch) that detects etc.
A function that detects the on/off state of the controller and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a function that detects the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 and sends a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311. A switch input circuit 336 having the function of inputting is provided.

The normal power supply section 410 of the power supply device 400 is the production control device 300 having the above configuration.
In order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by it, 32V DC to drive the motor and solenoids, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, 12V DC to drive the motor and LEDs, DC5 which becomes the power supply voltage of command I/F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Furthermore, as the main control microcomputer 311, 3.3V or 1.2V
When using an LSI that operates at low voltage such as
The production control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating 1.2V and 1.2V. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. In addition, in the form of output from the main control microcomputer 311, VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), sound source LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the production control device 300 includes a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
When N45 is connected and the production control device 300 is powered on, the cooling FAN 45 is driven.

In the following description, if the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they will simply be referred to as the special figure variable display game. In addition, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the decorative special figure variable display game. In addition, if you do not distinguish between a jackpot (first special result) and a small hit (second special result), simply hit (special result).
It is called. In addition, when the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a jackpot, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small winning, are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as special gaming states.

Note that a jackpot is a special result (first special result) that involves the operation of a conditional device, and a small hit is a special result (second special result) that does not involve the operation of a conditional device. The condition device is activated when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol fluctuation display game (stop display of the jackpot symbol).When the condition device is activated, for example, a jackpot condition occurs and a special electric accessory is activated. Variable winning device 38
A specific flag is set for continuously operating the accessory (meaning that the accessory continuous operating device is activated). When the conditional device is not activated, it means that the aforementioned flag is not set, as in the case of winning a small lottery, for example. Note that the "condition device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Also,
"Condition device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the continuous operation of electric accessories, and it has the same meaning in this specification. It is used as a term with

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by firing game balls (pachinko balls) from a ball launcher toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing its rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, and other direction changing members placed at various locations within the game area 32, and passes through the game starting gate 34 and the general prize opening 35. , the starting prize opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, or flowing into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and being discharged from the gaming area 32. Then, when game balls win in the general winning hole 35, starting winning hole 36, normal variable winning device 37, or special variable winning device 38, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning hole that won is distributed to the payout control device 200 ( The liquid is discharged from the dispensing unit controlled by the dispensing unit (see FIG. 4-4) onto the upper tray 21 or lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player adjusts the firing force and fires the game ball to the left side gaming area (so-called left-handed hitting), the starting prize opening 36, the general figure starting gate 34, the starting winning opening You can aim to win a prize in the general prize opening 35 arranged on the left side of 36, and by firing a game ball into the right side game area (so-called right-handed hitting), you can aim to win a prize in the general prize opening 35 located on the left side of 36.
, special variable winning device 38, and general winning slot 35.

A gate switch 34a consisting of a non-contact switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general figure starting gate 34 is provided in the normal figure starting gate 34, and
When the game ball hit inside passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern starting gate 34, the number of normal pattern starting memory is set to the upper limit number (for example, 4 balls). ), add the number of normal figures starting memory (+1
) and store one general pattern start memory in the RAM 111C. The stored number of starting prizes for common symbols is displayed on the common symbol pending display 58 of the collective display device 50. In addition, the normal figure starting memory stores a random value for determining a hit (random hit value) for determining the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a. It is supposed to be done.

Then, if there is a normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern fluctuation display game can be started, that is, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not being executed, and the normal pattern fluctuation display game wins and the normal pattern fluctuation winning device 37 is changed to the open state. If it is not in a winning state, the random number value for hit determination stored in the first stored normal pattern starting memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine whether the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit or a miss. Then, a process is performed to start the general figure fluctuation display game. When this random value for determining a hit matches the determination value, the general pattern fluctuation display game becomes a win and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100 presets a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns on the general pattern display 57 provided in the collective display device 50 over a predetermined variable time as a process for executing the normal pattern fluctuation display game. After performing a display during normal pattern fluctuation that is repeatedly displayed in the order given, a process is performed to display a normal pattern fluctuation display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed.
Note that the ordinary figure display 57 is constituted by the display device 41, and the ordinary identification information includes, for example, numbers, symbols,
It is also possible to use a character pattern or the like, and after displaying it in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, the display may be stopped and the result displayed.

When the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game is a win, the normal figure display 57 stops displaying a lighting pattern that is a special result mode, and the general electric solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member of the ordinary variable winning device 37. Performs control to open for a predetermined time. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes conversion control execution means that performs conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In addition, when the result of the ordinary figure fluctuation display game is a loss, control is performed to display a lighting pattern that corresponds to the result of a loss on the ordinary figure display 57.

In addition, the winning balls into the starting winning hole 36 and the winning balls into the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside, respectively.
The CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 stores the first starting memory, which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory), based on winnings in the starting winning hole 36, to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4
A predetermined upper limit number (for example, 1 piece) is stored in a second starting memory which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on winnings to the normal variable winning device 37. Based on the winnings in the starting winning hole 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, jackpot random numbers, special symbol random numbers, and each fluctuating pattern random number are extracted as starting memory information, respectively. The random number value is stored in the RAM 111C as a first starting memory and a second starting memory. The stored number of starting memories is displayed on the special drawing 1 pending display 53 and special drawing 2 pending display 54 for informing the number of starting winnings of the batch display device 50, as well as on the display device 41 of the center case 40. It is also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variable display device) based on the first starting memory, and performs the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 (first variable display device) based on the second starting memory. A special figure 2 variable display game is played on the second variable display device). When both the first starting memory and the second starting memory are stored, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 controls the special figure 1 variable display game ( In addition to controlling the execution of the first special figure variation display game), the special figure 2 variation is performed based on the second starting memory stored in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area). It serves as an execution control means for controlling the execution of the display game (second special figure variable display game). Then, in a state where the first starting memory and the second starting memory are stored, the execution control means is configured to change the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory from the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first starting memory. is also configured to be executed with priority.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing a variable display, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a jackpot, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes the special result mode (jackpot result mode) corresponding to the first special result. This results in a jackpot, resulting in a first special gaming state (so-called jackpot state).
In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is a special result mode (small hit result mode) corresponding to the second special result. This results in a small win, resulting in a second special game state (so-called small win state). In other words, special map 1
The display device 51 constitutes a first variable display means capable of displaying a first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on winning of a game ball to the starting winning hole 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 constitutes a second variable display means capable of displaying a second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on winning of game balls to the normal variable winning device 37.

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a jackpot game state (first special game state).
After the end of the game, control is performed to generate a gaming state (specific gaming state) in which the player can proceed with the game in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (high probability of winning, presence of public electricity support). It is possible to do so. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 constitutes a specific game state generation means.

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the display device 41
A decorative special figure variable display game is executed in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner. The decorative special figure 1 variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game, and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. be. Then, a variable display is performed as the corresponding special figure variable display game changes, and a display corresponding to the result is performed as the result mode in the corresponding special figure variable display game is derived.

That is, the display device 41 plays an ornamental variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) in which the ornament identification information is variably displayed in response to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The present invention serves as a decorative variable display means capable of displaying a decorative special figure variable display game. In addition, separate display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed, or the decorative special figure 2 variable display game may be displayed. The 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game may be displayed in separate display areas, or the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game may be displayed in the same display area. Also good.
Furthermore, the special figure fluctuation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 in the gaming machine 10.

FIG. 4-6 shows an example of the distribution rate in this embodiment.
FIG. 4-6(a) is an example of the distribution rate of the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 4-6(a), there are four types of results of the special figure fluctuation display game: jackpot, small hit, support hit, and loss. In this embodiment, the distribution rate of the jackpot is common between the special chart 1 and the special chart 2, but it may be different between the special chart 1 and the special chart 2. In addition, in Figure 4-6 (a), the distribution rate of the jackpot is the same when the probability setting value is “Setting 1”, “Setting 2”, and “Setting 3”. However, it may be different. In addition, in Figure 4-6 (a), the distribution rate of the jackpot is the same when the probability setting value is “Setting 4”, “Setting 5”, and “Setting 6”. However, it may be different.

Further, in FIG. 4-6(a), the distribution rates for small hits and support hits are the same regardless of the probability setting value, but they may be different. That is, in this embodiment, only the winning probability of the jackpot is changed by changing the probability setting value, and the probability of the small winning and the support winning is not changed.
In addition, the support hit can only be derived in the first specific game state where the general power support state is support A or B, which will be described later, in the special figure 1 variable display game. Since a support hit has the same derivation probability as a jackpot, it can give the impression that the probability of winning has doubled.
In addition, regarding small winnings, the distribution rate of special drawing 2 is higher than that of special drawing 1. As a result, there is a higher possibility that special drawing 2 will result in a small hit, and if it becomes a small hit, there is a high possibility that it will become the first special gaming state (jackpot) due to the flow into the specific area, so the special The special figure variation display game in FIG. 2 is more advantageous for the player.

Figure 4-6(b) is an example of the distribution ratio of jackpot types. For a jackpot, for example, as shown in Figure 4-6(b), the 3R jackpot A symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol (jackpot result mode), and the 3R jackpot B symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol (jackpot result mode). There are four types: jackpot B, 3R jackpot C in which the 3R jackpot C symbol is stopped and displayed, and 10R jackpot in which the 10R jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed.
In 3R jackpot A, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is 3, and after the special gaming state ends, the general power support state (specific gaming state) of support A is entered. In 3R jackpot B, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is 3, and after the special gaming state ends, the normal power support state of support B is entered. In 3R jackpot C, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is 3, and after the special gaming state ends, the normal power support state of support C is entered. In the 10R jackpot, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is 10 rounds, and after the special gaming state ends, the normal power support state of support C is entered.
Supports A to C have different conditions for ending the general power support state, and the general power support state ends when the conditions shown in FIG. 4-6(e) are met.

In Figure 4-6(b), the distribution rate of the jackpot type of the special figure 1 variable display game differs depending on the gaming state in which the special figure variable display game is executed, and in the case of the normal gaming state, 3R jackpot A ~ C is selectable. In the case of a specific gaming state in which general electricity support is provided, 3R jackpots B and C can be selected. Regarding the special figure 2 variable display game, only the 10R jackpot can be selected regardless of the gaming state. Note that the selection rates may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Figure 4-6(c) shows the distribution ratio of small winning types. Regarding the jackpot that occurs when a game ball flows into a specific area of the special variable winning device 38 (V winning) in the second special game state based on the small winning, the jackpot type is selected based on the type of the small winning.
If a game ball flows into a specific area in the second special game state based on 3R small win A, the normal power support state of support B will be entered after the first special game state of the second round ends. If a game ball flows into a specific area in the second special game state based on the 10R small win, the normal power support state of support C will be entered after the end of the first special game state of 9 rounds. When a game ball flows into a specific area in the second special game state based on 3R small hit B, the normal power support state of support C is entered after the first special game state of the second round ends. If a game ball flows into a specific area in the second special game state based on the 3R small win C, the state will become a state where there is no general power support after the first special game state of the second round ends.
In the special figure 1 variable display game, only 3R small hit A can be selected, and in the special figure 2 variable display game, 10R small hit, 3R small hit B and C can be selected. In addition, the distribution ratio may be different between the special map 1 and the special map 2.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with a so-called ceiling function as shown in FIG. 4-6(d). That is, when the number of times the game has been executed reaches the ceiling number (600 in this case), the special game state is not generated and the normal power support state of support C is entered. The number of times the game is executed is always counted regardless of the presence or absence of general power support when the probability is low, and the counting is interrupted when the probability is high. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the special symbol probability is always constant, it is constantly counted. In addition, the number of times the game is executed is the sum of the number of times the special figure 1 variable display game is executed and the number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

The timing to clear the counting result of the number of times the game has been executed is when the general power support state is triggered by reaching the ceiling number of times, and when the condition device is activated (first special game state). Note that the timing for clearing the count result of the number of game executions can be changed as appropriate, for example, when clearing the number of game executions is selected when operating the RAM initialization switch 112, or when the power is turned off instead of when clearing the RAM. It can also be used at the time of injection.

Further, when clearing the RAM, the measurement of the number of game executions may be cleared when the RAM is cleared without setting changes, and the measurement of the number of game executions may not be cleared when the RAM is cleared with setting changes. When the RAM is cleared without changing settings, for example, the power is turned on while the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on without turning on the setting key switch 152. In this manner, by not clearing the measurement of the number of game executions when clearing the RAM accompanied by a setting change, it is possible to make it difficult to determine that a setting change has been made.

FIG. 4-6(e) shows the conditions for ending the general power support state (specific gaming state).
In support A's general power support state, whether the number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game is 15 times, the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game is 15 times, or the number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure The general power support state will end when either of the following conditions is met: the total number of times the 2 variable display game has been executed is 15 times, or one small hit has been derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. It has become. Similarly, regarding the general power support status of support B and support C, the general power support state can be changed by executing the number of games shown in Figure 4-6 (e) or by deriving a small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game. The state is set to end.
In addition, Support C requires the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game 250 times, but in most cases, a jackpot or small hit is derived before this number of derivations is achieved, so it is virtually impossible to win the next jackpot. It can be said that public electricity support will continue until then.

FIG. 4-7 shows the operation mode of the special variable prize winning device 38 in the second special game state based on the small win. FIG. 4-7(a) shows the operation mode of the special variable prize winning device 38 in the second special game state based on the small winnings derived in the special figure 2 variable display game.
With the start of the second special gaming state (t11), the special variable winning device 38 is opened for 48ms (t11-t12) and then closed for 2960ms (t12-t14)
. After that, 48ms of opening is performed 19 times with 424ms of closing time in between (t14 to t16).
), the opening of the special variable prize winning device 38 is ended. In addition, when there is a specified number of prizes, the opening of the special variable prize winning device 38 ends at that point.
When the opening of the special variable winning device 38 is completed (t16), it becomes the remaining ball processing time for processing the game balls remaining in the special variable winning device 38 (t16 to t17). The remaining ball processing time is set to 1900 ms, but if there are remaining balls even after this time, the remaining ball processing time continues until the remaining balls disappear.
Thereafter, the ending period (t17 to t18) begins and the second special game state ends.
At the start of the ending period, an ending command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300.

A lever solenoid 3 that operates a lever member that changes the probability of a game ball flowing into a specific area.
8f is OFF for 100ms from the OFF state with the start of the second special gaming state (t11).
The state is set to N and the lever member is in a state that allows the flow into the specific area (t11 to t13).
.
Then, after the lever member is in the OFF state for 2900ms, making it difficult for the lever member to flow into the specific area (t13 to t15), it is turned ON again, and the lever member is in a state that allows the lever member to flow into the specific area. (t15).
Thereafter, when the remaining ball processing time ends and there are no remaining balls, the lever member is turned off and becomes in a state where it is difficult for the lever member to flow into the specific area (t17).
Regarding the specific area switch 38d that detects game balls that have flowed into the specific area, the detection of game balls that have flowed into the specific area is enabled with the start of the second special game state (t11), and the remaining ball processing time has ended. When there are no remaining balls, the detection of incoming game balls becomes invalid (t17).

In the second special game state based on the small winnings derived in this special figure 2 variable display game, the game balls can easily flow into the special variable winning device 38, and the game balls that have flowed into the special variable winning device 38 can be identified. It is also easy to enter the area, and it is possible to generate the first special gaming state in most cases.

FIG. 4-7(b) shows the operation mode of the special variable prize winning device 38 in the second special game state based on the small win derived in the special figure 1 variable display game.
With the start of the second special game state (t21), the special variable winning device 38 is opened for 1000ms (t21 to t23), and the opening of the special variable winning device 38 is completed.
When the opening of the special variable winning device 38 is completed (t23), it becomes the remaining ball processing time for processing the game balls remaining in the special variable winning device 38 (t23 to t24). The remaining ball processing time is set to 1900 ms, but if there are remaining balls even after this time, the remaining ball processing time continues until the remaining balls disappear.
Thereafter, an ending period (t24-t25) begins and the second special game state ends. At the start of the ending period, an ending command is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300.

A lever solenoid 3 that operates a lever member that changes the probability of a game ball flowing into a specific area.
8f is turned off for 100ms from the OFF state with the start of the second special gaming state (t21).
The state is set to N and the lever member is in a state of allowing flow into a specific area (t21 to t22).
, after that, it is turned off and the lever member becomes in a state that makes it difficult to flow into the specific area (t
22).
Regarding the specific area switch 38d that detects game balls that have flowed into the specific area, the detection of game balls that have flowed into the specific area is enabled with the start of the second special game state (t21), and the remaining ball processing time has ended. When there are no remaining balls, the detection of incoming game balls becomes invalid (t24).

In the second special game state based on the small winnings derived in this special figure 1 variable display game, it is difficult for game balls to flow into the special variable winning device 38, and the game balls that have flowed into the special variable winning device 38 are identified. It is also difficult to enter the area, and in most cases it is impossible to generate the first special gaming state.

Figure 4-8 shows a game with variable display of common symbols. As shown in FIG. 4-8(a), the probability of winning in the regular pattern fluctuation display game is constant regardless of the game state. The fluctuation time of the general figure fluctuation display game is 5000ms when there is no support for general electric power, and when there is support for general electric power, the fluctuation time is shorter than this, 4900ms for support A and B, and 4900ms for support C. In some cases, it is set to 200ms. In addition, the maximum count number of general electric power is set to 5, and if 5 game balls win by opening the normal variable winning device 37 based on a hit, the normal variable winning device 37 will be activated even before the opening time has elapsed. It's set to close.

As shown in FIG. 4-8(b), there are four types of results in the normal pattern fluctuation display game: a loss and a hit 1 to 3. The distribution of winning symbols is such that out of 65,521 random numbers, 1 is 65,321, 2 is 100, and 3 is 100, and the probability that 1 is selected is high. Further, the general figure display 57 of the collective display device 50 displays the result mode by turning on or off the three light emitters D4, D5, and D6.

The opening pattern of the normal variable winning device 37 when the normal figure variable display game is a hit is as follows:
There are three types of patterns H1 to H3, which are selected depending on the winning result and gaming status.
In a game state where there is no general power support, any of the winnings from 1 to 3 becomes the open pattern of pattern H1. When the general electricity support is support A or B, the opening pattern becomes pattern H1 when the winning number is 1, and the opening pattern is pattern H2 when the winning number is 2 or 3. If the general power support is support C, any of the hits 1 to 3 will be the open pattern of pattern H3.

Each opening pattern is shown in FIGS. 4-8(c) to (e).
As shown in FIG. 4-8(c), in the opening pattern of pattern H1, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is opened at the start of the winning state (t31), and closed after 36 ms have elapsed (t32). Thereafter, the winning state ends when 704 ms, which is the sum of the remaining ball processing time for processing the game balls remaining in the normal variable winning device 37, the ending period, and the return time, has elapsed (t33).
As shown in FIG. 4-8(d), in the opening pattern of pattern H2, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is opened at the start of the winning state (t41), and closed after 36 ms have elapsed (t42). Then, the closing time is 3000ms (t42 to t43), and the normal variable winning device 37 is opened again (t43). Thereafter, when the opening time of 1624 ms has passed, the normal variable winning device 37 is closed (t44), and the winning state ends when 704 ms, which is the sum of the remaining ball processing time, ending period, and return time, has elapsed (t45).
As shown in FIG. 4-8(e), in the opening pattern of pattern H3, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is opened at the start of the winning state (t51), and closed after 2800 ms have passed (t52). Thereafter, the winning state ends when 704 ms, which is the sum of the remaining ball processing time, ending period, and return time, has elapsed (t53).

Among such open patterns, pattern H3 is the most likely to win in the normal variable winning device 37, pattern H2 is next most likely to win, and pattern H1 is hardly likely to win.
Therefore, by assigning the open pattern as shown in Figure 4-8(b), support C is the most likely to win in the normal variable winning device 37, followed by supports A and B. It's easy to win, and without support you can hardly hope to win.
It should be noted that it is only necessary that it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 in the state of general power support (second state, third state) than in the state of non-general power support (first state), and the probability, fluctuation It may be possible to change one or more of the time, the open time, and the maximum count number of general electricity.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
Next, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be explained. FIG. 4-9 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in this embodiment.
The gaming states include a normal gaming state ST1, a first special gaming state ST2 based on the first special result (big hit), a second special gaming state ST3 based on the second special result (small hit), and a specific gaming state ST.
4. There is a remaining pending digestion state ST5.
In each game state, there is a performance mode that determines the performance mode of the game controlled by the performance control device 300, a main starting area that is the starting area that should be aimed mainly in the game state, and a type of special figure fluctuation display game that should be mainly executed. A certain main variable special figure and the firing direction of the game ball are determined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the starting winning hole 36 by hitting the left hand, and it is possible to aim to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 by hitting the right. In other words, it is possible for the player to select the target starting area according to his/her will. In addition, each game state is designed with the assumption that the game will be played mainly in either the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, and the player will play the game according to this design. As the game progresses, it is configured so that it is more advantageous for the player to play the game mainly with one of the special figure variable display games that is determined to be the main one in the design. In addition, in this specification, one special figure variation display game determined as the main one in each game state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the normal game state ST1, there is no general power support that improves the open time per unit time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 and makes it easier to win, and shortens the variable time of the special figure variable display game and the regular figure variable display game. There is no shortage of time. The main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, and the main starting area is the starting winning hole 36, and in order to aim at this starting winning hole 36, the firing direction is left-handed. Further, the performance mode that defines the performance mode is a normal stage.

The first special game state ST2 is a state in which there is no general electricity support and no time saving. In addition, the performance mode that defines the performance mode is the jackpot mode. In this first special game state ST2, the special variable winning device 38 is opened, so that the firing direction is right-handed.
In the second special game state ST3, power supply support and time saving may or may not be provided depending on the situation at the time of deriving the small hit. Basically, the state at the time of the small hit derivation is carried over, but when the special game state ST4 ending condition is met and the small win is derived, it becomes a small win.The general power support and time saving will end with the end of the special symbol fluctuation display game. Therefore, in this case, there will be no general electricity support or time saving. In addition, the performance mode that defines the performance mode is the small hit mode. In this second special game state ST3, since the special variable winning device 38 is opened, the firing direction is set to be right-handed, but right-handed firing may not be explicitly instructed.

The specific gaming state ST4 is a state that remains for a specified number of games after the first special gaming state ST2, after a support hit, or when the ceiling is reached, and improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable prize winning device 37. There is a state in which there is public electricity support. If you have public power support, you can also save time by shortening the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game.

This specific gaming state ST4 includes a first specific gaming state ST41 in which the state of general electricity support is support A or B, and a second specific gaming state ST42 in which the state of general electricity support is support C, There is.
In the first specific game state ST41, the main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, the main starting area is the starting prize opening 36, and the firing direction is set to the left in order to aim at this starting winning opening 36. There is. As shown in FIG. 4-3, it is possible to cause the game ball to flow into the normal pattern start gate 34 even when the ball is played left-handed, and the normal pattern fluctuation display game can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 4-8, if the result of the normal pattern variable display game is 1, the pattern H1 will be opened, so it is difficult to make a winning to the normal variable winning device 37. In this case, the display device 41 Instructions to hit right-handed are not given. However, a small right-handed instruction may be provided at the edge of the display area so that it is difficult for the player to recognize.
Further, when the winning number in the general pattern fluctuation display game is 2 or 3, the opening pattern becomes pattern H2, and opening is performed as shown in FIG. 4-8(d). In the opening of this pattern H2, after a short opening, a long opening is performed after a closing period of 3000 ms, and during the closing period of 3000 ms, a notification is made on the display device 41 to prompt a change to right-handed hitting. It has become so. As a result, it is possible to change the firing direction to right-handed shot until it is opened for a long time, and it is possible to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37.

That is, in the first specific gaming state ST41, it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than in the normal gaming state ST1 because there is an opening pattern of pattern H2, and as shown in FIG. 4-8(a). In this way, the execution time of the regular figure fluctuation display game is also shorter than in the normal game state ST1. Although it is easy to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 in this way, there is a gaming state in which the game is played by firing a game ball into an area different from the area where the normal variable winning device 37 is installed. be.

In the second specific game state ST42, the main variable special figure is the special figure 2 variable display game, the main starting area is the normal variable winning device 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at this normal variable winning device 37. has been done. Since the second specific gaming state ST42 is an open pattern of the pattern H3, it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 than in the normal gaming state ST1 or the first specific gaming state ST41, and as shown in FIG. 4-8 ( As shown in a), the execution time of the regular figure fluctuation display game is also shorter than that of the normal game state ST1 and the first specific game state ST41. This is a game state in which a game is played by shooting game balls into the area where the normal variable prize winning device 37 is provided.

The specific gaming state ST4 described above is more advantageous for the player than the normal gaming state ST1 because it is possible to execute the special symbol 2 variable display game in which there is general power support and small wins occur frequently. This is an advantageous situation.
Also, since it is easier to win in the normal variable winning device 37 in the second specific gaming state ST42 than in the first specific gaming state ST41, the second specific gaming state ST42 is easier than the first specific gaming state ST41. is in an advantageous situation.
In other words, regarding the ease of winning in the normal variable winning device 37, there are two states: the first state, which is the normal gaming state ST1, and the second state, which is the first specific gaming state ST41, in which winning is easier than the normal gaming state ST1. It is configured to be controlled in one of the following states: the third state, which is the second specific gaming state ST42, in which winning is easier than the first specific gaming state ST41.

The remaining pending state ST5 is a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory remaining when the specific game state ST4 ends can be executed.
In this remaining pending state ST5, there is no general power support, but there is a time saving that shortens the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display game. Since there is no power supply support, the firing direction is set to be left-handed so as to aim at the starting prize opening 36, but since it is a short period following the specific game state ST4, there is no need to clearly instruct left-handed firing. . Further, the average of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game in the remaining pending consumption state ST5 is shorter than the average of the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display game in the specific game state ST4.
The remaining hold consumption state ST5 mainly executes the special symbol 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory that mainly occurs in the specific game state ST4, so it is a state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST1. It is a state.

The transition of the gaming state is the derivation of the first special result (big hit), the derivation of the second special result (small hit),
This is done by deriving the support hit, ending the first special game state, ending the second special game state, playing the specified number of games, and reaching the ceiling.
When a jackpot is achieved in the normal gaming state ST1, the game shifts to a first special gaming state ST2. Further, when a jackpot is achieved in the specific gaming state ST4 or the remaining pending use state ST5, the game also shifts to the first special gaming state ST2.
After the first special gaming state ST2 ends, in the case of a jackpot with general power support, the general power support and time reduction will continue for a period until the conditions shown in Figure 4-6 (e) are met, and the specific game Transition to state ST4. The type of specific gaming state ST4 to be transitioned to differs depending on the type of jackpot; if the jackpot type is support A or B, the transition is to the first specific gaming state ST41, and if the jackpot type is support C, the transition is to the second specific gaming state The process moves to ST42.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot without general power support, if there is a second starting memory that is a remaining hold, it will move to the remaining hold extinguishing state ST5, and if there is no second starting memory that is a remaining hold, it will move to the normal gaming state ST5.
Move to 1. Incidentally, a jackpot without general power support is a jackpot based on 3R small hit C, and other jackpots are jackpots with general power support. That is, if the 3R small win C is derived, there is a high possibility that the advantageous state for the player will end.
Furthermore, when the ceiling is reached, the specific gaming state ST4 is entered without passing through the first special gaming state ST2.

In the specific game state ST4, the normal power supply support makes it easier for game balls to win in the normal variable winning device 37, so that the second starting memory can be generated, and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed. If the conditions shown in FIG. 4-6(e) are satisfied in this specific gaming state ST4, the general power support ends, and if there is a remaining hold that is the second start memory that occurred in the specific gaming state ST4, the remaining hold is The game enters the digested state ST5, and if there is no remaining reservation, the state shifts to the normal game state ST1.
In the case of the second specific game state ST42, the number of games that can be executed is large, and pattern H3 is opened in all winning types of the normal pattern variable display game, so it is easy to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37, The possibility that a jackpot or small win will be derived is higher than the possibility that the specified number of games will be played, and the possibility that the specific gaming state ST41 will continue after the first special gaming state ST2 is high.
On the other hand, in the case of the first specific gaming state ST41, the number of games that can be executed is small, and winnings in the normal variable prize winning device 37 can only be expected when pattern H2 is released, so there is a possibility that the specified number of games will be played. is higher than the possibility that a jackpot or small win will be derived in the first specific gaming state ST41, and there is a high possibility that the first specific gaming state ST41 will end and shift to the normal gaming state ST1.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the second starting memory is given priority over the first starting memory, but especially when a jackpot is achieved in the normal gaming state ST1, the second starting memory remains immediately after the start of the specific gaming state ST4. There is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game will be executed based on the first starting memory. This makes it possible to secure time for accumulating the second startup memory. In particular, specific gaming state S
The fluctuation time of the first special figure fluctuation display game at T4 is set to be a longer fluctuation time (for example, 100 s) than the fluctuation time of the second and subsequent times, so that time for accumulating the second starting memory can be secured. ing.

Further, in the first specific gaming state ST41, it is possible to derive a support hit, and when a support win is derived, the game moves to a second specific gaming state ST42 without passing through the first special gaming state ST2.
In the first specific gaming state ST4, the special figure 1 variable display game is the game to be executed mainly, and in the second specific gaming state ST42, the special figure 2 variable display game is the game to be executed mainly. That is, in the specific gaming state ST4, the game to be mainly executed is changed as a predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result, the specific game state S
The game at T4 does not become monotonous and can be made more interesting.
A game that should be played primarily is a game that allows the player to proceed with the game more advantageously or more efficiently than when playing a game that is not the game that should be played primarily. Being able to proceed with the game advantageously or efficiently for the player means, for example, that the expected value of the game value that can be acquired is large, that the number of games that can be executed per unit time is large, or that the game machine is designed at the design stage. For example, the game is intended to be played by someone who is expected to play it.

Note that in the first specific gaming state ST41 and the second specific gaming state ST42, it is sufficient that the games to be mainly executed are different, and in the first specific gaming state ST4, 1 is the special figure 2 variable display game as the game to be mainly executed. In the second specific game state ST42, the special figure 1 variable display game may be the game to be mainly executed.
Further, in the first specific gaming state ST41 and the second specific gaming state ST42, the ease of winning in the normal variable winning device 37 may be the same, except that the games to be executed are mainly different.
Furthermore, the second specific gaming state ST42 may shift to the first specific gaming state ST41, and the first specific gaming state ST41 may transition from the second specific gaming state ST41 to the second specific gaming state depending on the first transition condition (for example, a support win). Proceed to ST42 and meet the second transition condition (for example, playing the specified number of games)
Accordingly, the second specific gaming state ST42 may be shifted to the first specific gaming state ST41. Further, the specific gaming state ST4 may be provided with three or more states that differ in the ease of winning a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 and the game to be executed mainly, and the state may be changed to when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied.

The support hit of the gaming machine of this embodiment does not include the result of a small hit and a support hit, and the small hit and support hit are independent, and the support hit is the result of a loss and a support hit. It can also be said that.
By doing this, when moving from the first specific gaming state ST41 to the second specific gaming state ST42 due to a support win, there is no need to go through the second special gaming state ST3. It becomes possible to shift to the specific gaming state ST42, and the game can proceed with speedy development.

Furthermore, in the case of a small win and a support win, there is a possibility of winning a V prize in the second special gaming state ST3. In this case, after the first special game state ST2 of 3R, support B becomes (see FIG. 4-6(c)). On the other hand, if V does not win, support C will be more advantageous to the player than support B (see FIG. 4-6(a)), and a 10R jackpot will almost certainly occur. In other words, the game will turn out to be more advantageous if the player does not win the V prize, and there is a high possibility that the game will turn out to be disadvantageous for players who do not know this. However, by making it a miss and a support hit, it is possible to prevent such developments from occurring, and it is possible to make the game fair for all players.
Of course, the support hit can be both a small hit and a support hit, and may include both a small hit and a support hit, and a miss and a support hit.

It is possible to stay in the remaining pending state ST5 until the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory, which is the remaining pending, ends. After the remaining reservation consumption state ST5 ends, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the upper limit number of the second start memory is 1, the maximum number of remaining reservations is 1.
What is executed in the remaining pending consumption state ST5 is a special figure 2 variable display game in which the probability of winning a small win is higher than that of the special figure 1 variable display game, and again in the specific game state ST4 or the first special game state ST2.
This is a state in which there is a higher possibility of returning to a state advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state ST1.
The remaining pending state ST5 is a state in which the player feels discouraged immediately after the end of a state advantageous to the player such as the specific game state ST4 or the first special game state ST2, and the player is in a state where the player feels disappointed. A player can have a sense of expectation by performing a performance in which he is given a chance to execute one special figure variation display game with a high possibility of returning.

If a small win occurs in the normal gaming state ST1, specific gaming state ST4, or remaining hold extinguishment state ST5, a transition is made to the second special gaming state ST3.
When a game ball flows into a specific area in the second special gaming state ST3 (V winning), the state shifts to the first special gaming state ST2. When game balls flow into the special variable prize winning device 38, there is a possibility that they may flow into a specific area, and it is advantageous for the player to play many special figure 2 variable display games with a high probability of small winnings. Become. As shown in FIG. 4-7, the possibility of inflow into a specific area is determined by using a lever member provided inside the special variable prize winning device 38, which can control the inflow of game balls into a specific area, using a lever solenoid. 38f, the control is performed by switching between a state in which the game balls are allowed to flow into the specific area and a state in which the game balls are not allowed to flow into the specific area.

In the special figure 1 variable display game, the probability of a small hit being derived is low, and in the second specific game state ST3, it is difficult to enter the special variable prize winning device 38 or enter the specific area, so the first The possibility of shifting to special gaming state ST2 is low.
In the special figure 2 variable display game, there is a high probability that a small win will be derived, and in the second specific game state ST3, the operation mode is such that it is easy to enter the special variable prize winning device 38 or enter the specific area. There is a high possibility of transition to special gaming state ST2.

Further, if the game ball does not flow into the specific area in the second special gaming state ST3, the state shifts to the specific gaming state ST4, the remaining reservation extinguishing state ST5, or the normal gaming state ST1.
If the end condition of the specific gaming state ST4 is not satisfied, the process moves to the specific gaming state ST4. In addition, if the termination condition of the specific gaming state ST4 is satisfied and there is a remaining hold that is the second starting memory that occurred in the specific gaming state ST4, the state shifts to the remaining holding extinguishing state ST5. Also,
In the case of a small win in the normal gaming state ST1, or when the end conditions of the specific gaming state ST4 are satisfied and there is no remaining reservation, the game shifts to the normal gaming state ST1.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game in which identification information is displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, A game control means (game control device 100) that centrally controls the game, a starting prize opening 36 that can generate the right to execute the first game (special figure 1 variable display game) as a game by winning a prize, and a game ball that wins a prize. A normal variable prize winning device 37 which can be converted into a closed state in which it is impossible and an open state in which a game ball can win a prize, and which can generate the right to execute a second game (special figure 2 variable display game) as a game upon winning a prize. The game control means determines the ease of winning a game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 between a first state (normal game state ST1) and a second state (normal game state ST1) in which winning is easier than the first state ( a first specific gaming state ST41) and a third state (second state) in which winning is easier than the second state.
A specific gaming state ST42) is configured to be controlled in either state, and if the result of the game becomes a specific result (support hit) in the second state, the control is performed without going through the special gaming state. Third
In the second state and the third state, it is possible to make the game to be mainly executed different between the first game and the second game.
Therefore, with the occurrence of a support win that results in a specific result, in addition to the ease of winning in the normal variable winning device 37, the game to be played is also changed, creating a change in the game and improving the interest of the game. I can do it.

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game that fluctuates and displays identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a starting prize opening 36 that can generate the right to execute the first game as a game upon winning a prize, a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize, and an open state in which the game ball can win a prize. A normal variable winning device 37 that is convertible and capable of generating the right to execute a second game as a game upon winning, and the game control means controls the ease of winning a game ball to the normal variable winning device 37. It is configured to control in any one of a first state, a second state in which it is easier to win a prize than the first state, and a third state in which it is easier to win a prize than the second state; If the game result is a special result (jackpot), it is possible to enter the second state after the special gaming state ends, and in the second state, the game result becomes a specific result (support hit). , it is possible to enter the third state without going through the special game state, and in the second state it is possible to make the first game the main game to be played, and in the third state the second This means that it is possible to make the game the main game to be executed.
Therefore, with the occurrence of a support win that results in a specific result, in addition to the ease of winning in the normal variable winning device 37, the game to be played is also changed, creating a change in the game and improving the interest of the game. I can do it.

FIG. 4-10(a) shows the response when a new time saving (specific gaming state ST4) activation trigger occurs in each gaming state.
Here, a time saver, b time saver, and c time saver are all specific game states ST4, but a time saver is the specific game state ST4 after passing through the first special game state ST2, and b time saver is the one that has reached the specific game state ST4 through the first special game state ST2. By reaching , the player enters the specific gaming state ST4 without passing through the first special gaming state ST2, and c time saving means that the player enters the specific gaming state ST4 without passing through the first special gaming state ST2 due to the support hit. It is.

In the normal game state ST1, when an opportunity to activate the time saver a occurs due to a jackpot or a small win resulting in a V prize, the time saver a is activated. In the normal game state ST1, if an opportunity to activate b time saving occurs due to reaching the ceiling, b time saving is activated. Normal gaming state ST
In No. 1, since the support hit is not derived, there is no trigger for c time-saving operation, and the operation is disabled.

a By winning a jackpot or winning a small prize in the time-saving specific game state ST4, a
When a time saving activation trigger occurs, a new time saving is activated. a Time-saving specific game state ST
If an opportunity to activate b time saving occurs due to reaching the ceiling in step 4, the operation is switched to b time saving. When an opportunity to activate c time saving occurs as a result of the support hit being derived in the specific game state ST4 of a time saving, the operation is switched to c time saving. Note that the support hit can be derived only when the support is A or B.

b. By winning a jackpot or winning a small prize in the time-saving specific game state ST4, a.
When a time saving operation trigger occurs, the system switches to a new time saving mode and activates it. Since reaching the ceiling cannot occur in the b time saving specific game state ST4, b time saving in this case cannot be operated. In the specific game state ST4 of b time saving, the support hit is not derived, so the activation trigger of c time saving does not occur and it is disabled.

c By winning a jackpot or winning a small prize in the time-saving specific game state ST4, a.
When a time saving operation trigger occurs, the system switches to a new time saving mode and activates it. In the c time saving specific game state ST4, when the trigger for b time saving is triggered by reaching the ceiling, it is switched to b time saving and activated. In the c time saving specific game state ST4, the support hit is not derived, so the c time saving activation opportunity does not occur and the operation is disabled.

FIG. 4-10(b) shows the display mode of the game status display section 56 provided in the collective display device 50.
As described above, the game state display section 56 includes a first game state display section 56a that informs the player of the hitting method that is advantageous to the player (the hitting method that corresponds to the game state) between left-handed hitting (normal hitting) and right-handed hitting. and a second gaming state display section 56b that notifies that the player is in a time saving state (when the variable time reduction function is activated). The first game state display section 56a displays the firing direction by lighting or extinguishing the light emitters C6 and C7, and the second game state display section 56b displays the presence or absence of time saving by lighting or extinguishing the light emitter D7. It is supposed to be done.

In the normal gaming state ST1, the light emitters C6 and C7 are turned off to indicate that the player is playing left-handed.
The light emitter D7 is turned off to indicate that it is not in a time saving state.
In supports A and B which are the first specific gaming state ST41 of the specific gaming state ST4, the light emitting body C
6. Turn off C7 to indicate left-handed batting, and turn on light emitter D7 to indicate time saving mode.
In the first specific gaming state ST41 of the specific gaming state ST4, when supports A and B are in the normal winning state, the light emitters C6 and C7 are lit to indicate that the player is hitting right, and the light emitter D is turned on.
7 is lit to indicate the time saving state. However, the winning result is 1 and the pattern H1
In the case of an open pattern, the probability of winning is low, so the display device 41 does not clearly instruct the player to hit the ball to the right. If the winning result is 2 or 3 and the opening pattern is pattern H2, the display device 41 clearly instructs to hit the ball to the right.

In the support C which is the second specific gaming state ST42 of the specific gaming state ST4, the light emitting body C6,
C7 is lit to indicate that the player is in a right-handed batting state, and light emitter D7 is lit to indicate that the player is in a time saving state.
In the first special game state ST2 and the second special game state ST3, the light emitters C6 and C7 are lit to indicate that the player is hitting right, and the light emitter D7 is turned off to indicate that the player is not in the time saving state. In addition,
If a small hit occurs in the special figure 1 variable display game before the number of executions of the game reaches the specified number in the specific gaming state ST4, the time saving state will remain in the second special gaming state ST3, so the light emitting body D7 is lit to indicate the time saving state.
In addition, when a small hit is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal gaming state ST1 or the first specific gaming state ST41, the display device 41 clearly indicates the right-hand hit because the probability of winning is low. Not performed.

FIG. 4-11 shows an example of a mode of outputting a signal to the outside of the gaming machine.
As shown in FIG. 4-11(a), in the normal game state ST1, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal indicating whether the normal symbol fluctuation display game has a high probability is turned OFF. In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, since there is no probability variation in the normal symbol variation display game, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is always OFF.
The normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal indicating that the open time of the normal variable winning device 37 is extended is turned OFF, indicating that the open time of the normal variable winning device 37 is not extended. Further, the normal symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal indicating that the ordinary symbol variation display game is in the time saving state is turned OFF, indicating that the ordinary symbol variation display game is not in the time reduction state.
The winning easy state determination signal indicating the start of general electricity support is turned OFF, and the winning easy state signal indicating the state of general electricity support is undefined, indicating that it is not general electricity support.

Support A which is the first specific gaming state ST41 of the specific gaming state ST4 from the normal gaming state;
When B starts (t61), the normal electric accessory 1 opening extension state signal is turned ON, indicating that the opening time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is extended, and the normal symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal is also turned on. It is set to ON, indicating that the time saving state of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is in progress.
In addition, the winning easy state confirmation signal is kept ON for a certain period (for example, 32 ms) (t6
1 to t62), indicating that the winning easy state has started. In addition, the winning easy status signal is 01H
is output, indicating support A or B.
When the specific game state ST4 ends and returns to the normal game state ST1 (t63), the normal electric accessory 1 opening extension state signal is turned OFF, and the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned OFF. Further, the easy-to-win state signal is undefined.

The value of the easy-to-win state signal is indicated by a combination of on/off (hexadecimal) of four signals 1 to 4. For example, in this case, the winning easy state signal 1 is turned on and the winning easy state signals 2 to 4 are turned off, so that a signal of 01H is output. The other signals shown in Figure 4-11, the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, the normal electric accessory 1 open extended state signal, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the winning easy state confirmation signal, are one signal. Information is output by turning it on and off.

FIG. 4-11(b) shows a case where support C, which is the second specific gaming state ST42 of the specific gaming state ST4, is started from the normal gaming state ST1. It is basically the same as in FIG. 4-11(a), but the only difference is that 00H is output as the easy-to-win state signal, indicating support C.
That is, it is possible to determine whether the game is in the first specific gaming state ST41 (support A or B) or the second specific gaming state ST42 (support C) using an external device.

FIG. 4-12 shows an example of a mode of outputting a signal to the outside of the gaming machine.
As shown in FIG. 4-12(a), among the winning states in which the normal pattern variable display game is a win and the normal variable winning device 37 is opened, in the case of pattern H1, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON. The firing position designation signal 2 is turned off, and left-handed firing is designated for the external device. In the case of pattern H1, the open time of the normal variable winning device 37 is short and winning is hardly expected, so left-handed hitting is specified. Note that, as described above, the first gaming state display section 56a of the collective display device 50 indicates that the player is playing right-handed.
Further, in the case of pattern H2, firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned ON, and right-handed firing is designated to the external device.
As shown in FIG. 4-12(b), if it is support C which is the second specific gaming state ST42, if it is the second special gaming state ST3, and if it is the first special gaming state ST2, the firing Position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned on, and right-handed hitting is designated to the external device.

FIGS. 4-12(c) to (h) show the output mode of the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 when the small hit and the regular hit overlap.
FIG. 4-12(c) shows a case where the second special game state ST3 is started in a winning state in pattern H1. With the start of the hit state, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON, but the firing position designation signal 2 is kept OFF (t81). Thereafter, with the start of the second special game state ST3, the firing position designation signal 2 is turned ON (t82). Even after the winning state ends, the second special game state ST3 continues, so the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 remain ON (t83). Thereafter, with the end of the second special game state ST3, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned OFF (t84).

FIG. 4-12(d) shows a case where the second special game state ST3 is started in a winning state in pattern H2. With the start of the hit state, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned ON (t91). Even if the second special game state ST3 is started, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 remain ON (t92), and even if the winning state ends, the firing position is specified because the second special game state ST3 continues. Signals 1 and 2 remain ON (t93). Thereafter, with the end of the second special game state ST3, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned off (t94).

FIG. 4-12(e) shows a case where the winning state in pattern H1 is executed during the execution of the second special game state ST3. With the start of the second special game state ST3, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned ON (t101). Even if the winning state of pattern H1 is started, the second special game state ST3 continues, so the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 remain ON (t102). Even after the winning state ends, the second special game state ST3 continues, so the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 remain ON (t103). Thereafter, with the end of the second special game state ST3, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned off (t104).

FIG. 4-12(f) shows a case where the winning state in pattern H2 is executed during the execution of the second special game state ST3. With the start of the second special game state ST3, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned ON (t111), and even if the winning state of pattern H2 starts, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 remain ON ( t112). Even after the winning state ends, the second special game state ST3 continues, so the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 remain ON (t113). Thereafter, with the end of the second special game state ST3, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned off (t114).

FIG. 4-12(g) shows a case where a winning state in pattern H1 is started during execution of the second special gaming state ST3, and the winning state ends after the end of the second special gaming state ST3. With the start of the second special game state ST3, firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned ON (t121), and even if the winning state of pattern H1 has started, the second special game state ST3 continues, so the firing position is designated. Signals 1 and 2 remain ON (t122). When the second special game state ST3 ends, the firing position designation signal 1 is maintained in the ON state, but the firing position designation signal 2 is turned OFF, based on the fact that the winning state of the pattern H1 continues (t123). Thereafter, as the hit state ends, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off (t124).

FIG. 4-12(h) shows a case where a winning state in pattern H2 is started during execution of the second special gaming state ST3, and the winning state ends after the end of the second special gaming state ST3. With the start of the second special game state ST3, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned ON (t131), and even if the winning state of pattern H2 starts, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 remain ON ( t132). Since the winning state of pattern H2 continues even after the second special game state ST3 ends, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 remain ON (t133). Thereafter, as the hit state ends, the firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned off (t134).

Control of a gaming machine that plays such a game will be explained below. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be explained. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of the main processing shown in FIGS. 4-13 and 4-14, and the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 4-15, which is performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. The main processing starts when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in Figures 4-13 and 4-14, first, processing to disable interrupts (step Stack pointer setting processing (step X2) is performed to set a stack pointer that is the start address of the stack pointer. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (eg, D register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h or 01h as the upper one, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and firing of game balls is prohibited.

Thereafter, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and processing for setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, the game control device
A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from 00 to start normally.
is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the gaming control device 100 starts up first and sends a command to the sub-control device before the sub-control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) starts up, the sub-control device can avoid missing commands. That is, when the game control device 100 turns on the power, there is a predetermined delay for starting the main control means (the game control device 100) and waiting for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the performance control device 300, etc.). It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

Furthermore, the power-on delay timer measures time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (such as a RAM area or register that is not subject to validity determination). Thereby, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (step X8), and if a power outage has occurred (step wait until it is blocked.
Specifically, in step Determine if there is. If the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the set number of checks. If the power failure monitoring signal does not remain on for the number of checks, the process returns to determining whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, if the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of times of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54, which will be described later. In this way, by determining that a power outage has occurred if the power outage monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power outage due to noise, etc., and to appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power outage monitoring means that monitors the occurrence of a power outage during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power outage that occurs during a period in which the startup of the game control device 100 serving as the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the memory contents from the previous power cut are still retained, so backup processing will be performed in the event of a power outage. There's no need. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden on control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if a power outage has not occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10).
If the timer value is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power outage has occurred (step X8). Furthermore, if the timer value is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, if the waiting time has ended,
Access to readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM is permitted (step X11), and off data is output (set to no output state) to all output ports (step X12).

Next, set the serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) (step X13), and A process (step X14) of activating a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the clock generator 111 (clock generator) is performed. Note that the CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator within the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113.
11A is provided with a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that provides a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to a random number generation circuit.
Next, a RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, the RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM, regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure test area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure test area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X16), and if it is normal (step X16; Y),
Power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) where the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal
(Step X17). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), checksum calculation processing (step It is determined whether the checksums match (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y)
Since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20) and the process moves to step X21.

Further, if it is determined that the check data in the power outage inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), and if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step X19; N), Based on the state read in step X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the on state (step X21). If at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (step device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). When the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), a main abnormal error notification command is sent to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag set here is the probability setting flag that was set before the power outage occurred. In other words, if the power to the gaming machine is cut off and restarted while changing the probability setting value,
Since the operation of the gaming control device 100 is stopped, the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X25). After that, output the ON data of the security signal and output the OFF data of the signals other than the security signal (step X26).
, return to step X25.

Furthermore, if both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the on state (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). Then, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step
;N), a probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). This shifts to probability setting value change mode. Thereafter, a command for changing the probability setting is sent to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X30), and the process moves to step X31. The production control device 300 controls the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, and the speaker 1 based on receiving the command for changing the probability setting.
A notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is made by outputting audio from 9a and 19b.
On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), a process of clearing the probability setting value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the probability setting value area in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes "setting 1." After that, step X29,
After processing X30, the process moves to step X31.

Further, if at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (steps X22; N and ;N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the on state based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). Then, if the setting key switch 152 is not in the on state (step
), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

When it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the on state (step X43; N)
That is, if both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the OFF state, the process moves to step X41 to perform processing in the case of normal recovery from a power outage.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the on state (step
;Y), the process moves to step X44 and initialization processing is performed. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 constitutes an initialization operation section that can be operated from the outside, and the gaming control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation section. act as a means of change.

Further, when the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state (step X35; Y), a probability setting confirmation flag is set (step X36). This shifts to probability setting value confirmation mode. After that, the command for checking the probability setting is sent to the production control board (production control device 300)
(Step X37). In the production control device 300, based on receiving the command for checking the probability setting, the display on the display device 41, the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 are changed.
, the operation of the board presentation device 44, the output of audio from the speakers 19a and 19b, etc.
Notify that the probability setting value is being checked.

Then, in order to guarantee output of the security signal for 50 msec or more, a value corresponding to 128 msec is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change/confirmation process (step It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, 12
If the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 8 m seconds, the security signal is continuously outputted by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. In other words, even if the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 m seconds, the security signal will not be output for 128 m seconds after transitioning to the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode. Ru. Note that the value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 msec. However, after switching to probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode,
Since it is necessary to output a security signal for 0 msec, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 msec or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33). In step X33, the determination is not made based on the state read in step ). If it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the off state, the probability setting value is determined.
If the setting key switch 152 is not in the off state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (step Returning, if a power outage has occurred (step X34; Y), the process moves to step X55. If it is determined that a power outage has occurred in step In step X23, it is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, if the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33; Y), a process for prohibiting interrupts (step X38) is performed. From the time the interrupt is enabled (step X32) until the time the interrupt is disabled (steps X38, It will be done. In the timer interrupt processing, probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X122), which is processing regarding probability setting values, is performed. In other words, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability setting value is completed (or until a power outage occurs).
Next, a command to end the notification is sent to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X39). In the production control device 300, based on receiving the notification end command,
The notification in progress (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification that the probability setting value is being confirmed) is ended.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, if the probability setting checking flag is set. is the area to be initialized (e.g. power outage inspection area,
A power outage recovery process (step X41) is performed in which the initial value at the time of power outage recovery is saved in the checksum area and the area related to error/fraud monitoring. The probability setting confirmation flag is cleared in step X41.
Thereafter, a command at the time of power outage recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X42), and the process moves to step X47. In the case of this embodiment, in step Send commands. The command for specifying the screen can be used when both Tokuzu 1 and Tokuzu 2 are in normal processing (described later), that is, when they are waiting for a customer and are not in the execution of the Tokuzu variable display game or in the special game state. Sends the command for the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise sends the command for the recovery screen. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high probability number information command or the like may also be transmitted.

On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). In step Instead, the RAM area for game control (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared in step X44. Note that in step X44,
You may or may not clear the stack area and unused area.

Then, save the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (step X45)
. The areas to be initialized here are the customer waiting demonstration area and the area related to the setting of the performance mode. Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X46). In the case of this embodiment, in step A demonstration screen is displayed, and a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization using light and sound for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands,
It also transmits a performance number information command and a support number information command, which is information on the number of executions of the special symbol variable display game with public power support.

Next, a process of activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. A bit transposition pattern is a method of replacing the bit arrangement of extracted random numbers (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). This is a pattern that determines the By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken, and the secrecy of the random number can be improved. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Alternatively, the settings may be set arbitrarily by the user.

After that, the specified registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on.
The value of is extracted, and the corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the special pattern random number that determines the winning pattern of the special pattern, the random number (hit random number) that determines the winning pattern of the standard pattern, the winning pattern of the standard pattern) After saving it in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of the general pattern random number that determines the , (step X48), interrupts are permitted (step X49). CPU111A used in this embodiment
The random number generation circuit in the software is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, so by using this value as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers, it is possible to generate them by software. It is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers that are generated, making it difficult for players to obtain fraudulent random numbers.

Subsequently, initial value random number updating processing (step X50) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number, special symbol random number, hit random number, and common symbol random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. has been done. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock, and the special pattern random number, hit random number, and general pattern random number are the processing units of the program. CTC output that has the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing (a different CTC from the timer interrupt processing CTC (CTC0))
This is a "low speed counter" that is updated based on CTC2)). In addition, for special pattern random numbers, winning random numbers, and regular pattern random numbers, we adopt the so-called "initial value change method" that changes the starting value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random numbers go around. are doing. Note that each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter type by +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random type in which all values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the special pattern random number, hit random number, and regular pattern random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update processing in step X50, processing to disable interrupts (step X51)
and performs performance display editing processing (step X52). After performing processing to permit interrupts (step X53), it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (step X54), and if a power outage has not occurred (step (Step X5
Return to 0). That is, when a power outage has not occurred, initial value random number updating processing, performance display editing processing, and power outage monitoring are repeatedly performed. By enabling interrupts (step X49) before the initial value random number update process (step It is possible to avoid stressing the interrupt processing by having to wait for the initial value random number update processing.

Note that the initial value random number update process in step In order to avoid random number update processing from being executed, when performing initial value random number update processing in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts before updating and canceling interrupts.
If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in this embodiment, but only in the main process, there will be no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage that main processing is simplified.

On the other hand, if a power outage has occurred (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting off data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, save the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57).
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58).
Furthermore, after performing checksum calculation processing (step
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step X61), the game machine waits for the power to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power failure, the power supply can check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power failure has been correctly backed up. This can be determined at the time of re-input.

From the above, there is a main control means (gaming control device 100) that controls games in an integrated manner, and slave control means (payout control device 200, performance control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. ), the main control means includes a standby means (game control device) that sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the start-up of the main control means and waiting for the start-up of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100), and a power outage monitoring means (gaming control device 100) that monitors the occurrence of a power outage during the predetermined standby time.
Furthermore, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power outage monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power outage, and the power outage monitoring means (gaming control device 100) , it is determined that a power outage has occurred if the power outage monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (gaming control device 100) includes a RAM 111C that can store data,
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit.
A game control device 100) is provided, and the operating state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.
In addition, the main control means (gaming control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started at predetermined intervals. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4-15 is started.

When timer interrupt processing starts, register bank 1 is specified (step X1).
01). Switching to register bank 1 is equivalent to register saving processing in which the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in main processing) is transferred to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (eg, D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same process as step X4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step X103) is performed to receive inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, to read the status of each input port.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and if the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y), , probability setting change/confirmation process (step X122)
and completes the timer interrupt processing.
On the other hand, if both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirmation flag are not set (step Output processing (step X105) is performed to control the drive of actuators such as the solenoid 38f and general electric solenoid 37c). Note that when a firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main process, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the dispensing control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the firing permission signal is the first signal indicating the firing permission status as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (firing permission signal) indicating the firing permission status as seen from the payout control device is also a payout control signal. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. That is, two firing permission signals are output to the firing control device, and when both of them are permission to fire, the game ball is configured to be in a state where it can be fired.

Next, a payout command sending process (step
Random number update processing 2 (step X108) is performed. In the random number update process 1 (step X107), the initial values (start values) of the special pattern random numbers, hit random numbers, and regular pattern random numbers that are the targets of the initial value random number update process are updated. After that, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 3
7a, Monitoring whether or not normal signals are input from the winning opening switch 35a and the big winning opening switch 38a, setting prize balls, opening the front frame and glass frame, normal variable winning device 37, special variable winning A prize opening switch/state monitoring process (step X109) is performed to monitor errors such as unauthorized winning to the device 38.

Next, it is determined whether abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that in the special variable winning device 38, the number of game balls ejected from the special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball ejection port switch 38e) 38 (the number of game balls detected by the big prize opening switch 38a). Note that if abnormal discharge is occurring, an abnormal discharge flag is set. If abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process moves to step X116. In other words, the game is prevented from proceeding.

On the other hand, if abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), special pattern game processing (step X114), and performs segment LED editing processing (step X115) that drives the segment LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 that display the special figure fluctuation display game and display various information regarding the game so as to display desired content. conduct.

Next, a magnet tampering monitoring process (step board radio wave fraud monitoring processing (step Abnormal discharge monitoring processing (step X119) is performed. Furthermore, external information editing processing (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and performance display monitor control processing (step X121) for controlling the performance display device 153 are performed, and the timer interrupt processing is ended. do.

In this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (i.e., the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (i.e., the process of designating register bank 0) are performed on interrupt returns. (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines may require an instruction to execute a process for restoring an interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring register bank designation.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (step X112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be explained. In the special figure game process, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 3
It monitors the input of 7a, controls the entire processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game, and sets the display of special figures.

As shown in FIG. 4-16, in the special figure game process, first, starting port switch monitoring processing (step A1) is performed to monitor winnings of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a. In the starting port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 37 that serves as the starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as jackpot random numbers) are extracted and a special prize based on the winning is extracted. A game result preliminary determination is performed to determine the game result based on winnings in advance at a stage before the start of the figure variation display game.

Next, a big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning a prize opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball in the big winning a prize opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed. Then, a specific area switch monitoring process is performed to monitor the detection of game balls in the specific area 38h (step A3).

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step A4). Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A5). The value of the special figure game processing timer is “
0" (Step A5; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already expired, register the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. is set (step A6), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the table (step A7).
Then, a subroutine call is made in accordance with the special figure game processing number (step A8).

In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of variation of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the setting of the variation during the special figure variation display game are performed. Special figure normal processing (step A9) is performed to set information necessary for processing.
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "1", special figure fluctuation processing is performed to set the stop display time of the special figure and the information necessary to perform the process during special figure display. (Step A
10).

In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the playing result of the special figure variable display game is a jackpot, fanfare commands are set according to the type of jackpot, and the jackpot for each jackpot is set. Special figure display processing (step A11) that sets the fanfare time according to the opening pattern and the information necessary to perform the fanfare/interval processing.
)I do.

In step A8, if the special drawing game processing number is "3", set the opening time of the grand prize opening, update the number of openings, and set the information necessary to perform the process during the opening of the grand prize opening. Fanfare/interval processing (step A12) is performed.
In step A8, if the special drawing game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if it is the final round, an ending command is set, or a jackpot remaining slot is set. A big prize opening opening process (step A13) is performed to set information necessary for performing ball processing.

In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is the final round, the processing to set the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be ejected and the jackpot end processing are performed. Big winning hole remaining ball processing (step A14) to set the information necessary for the process.
I do.
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "6", a jackpot end process (step A15) is performed in which information necessary for performing the special figure normal process is set.

In step A8, if the special game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small winning process. Small win fanfare processing (step A16) is performed to set necessary information.
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hit process (step A
17).
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "9", there is a process to set the time for the remaining balls that won in the big prize opening to be discharged during the small hit process, and a small hit end process. A small hit remaining ball process (step A18) is performed to set the information necessary to carry out the process.
In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "10", a small hit end process (step A19) is performed in which information necessary for performing the special figure normal process is set.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A
20) Perform a symbol fluctuation control process (step A21) related to controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special symbol 1 display 51. After preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 display 52 (step A22), a symbol fluctuation control process related to controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special symbol 2 display 52 is performed (step A23). . Thereafter, a lever solenoid control process (step A24) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed, and the special figure game process is ended. On the other hand, in step A5, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A5;
N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process moves to step A20 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common process performed in the above-mentioned starting port switch monitoring process will be explained. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input to the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

As shown in FIG. 4-17, in the special figure starting switch common process, first, information regarding the number of winnings to the monitored starting opening switch of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is transmitted to the gaming machine. Loads the starting port signal output count, which is the number of outputs to the external management device of No. 10 (step A131), updates the loaded value by +1 (step A132), and determines whether the output count overflows (step A131). Step A133). If the output count does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM starting port signal output count area (step A134), and the process moves to step A135. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process moves to step A135. In this embodiment, values from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. If the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by updating by +1, and it is determined that the number of outputs has overflowed.

Next, out of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether the number of special symbols pending (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch is less than the upper limit value (step A135). If the number of reserved special drawings to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N
) ends the special figure starting port switch common processing.

In addition, if the number of reserved special figures to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of reserved special figures to be updated (the number of reserved special figures 1 or the number of reserved special figures 2) is updated by +1 ( Step A13
6) Save the target starting opening winning flag (step A137). Next, calculate the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the monitored start switch and the number of reserved special drawings (step A138), and save the jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process to the RWM jackpot random number storage area. (Step A139).

Next, extract the special symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored and prepare it (Step A1
40), save in the RWM special pattern random number storage area (step A141).
Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A145), and special figure reservation information determination processing (step A146) is performed.
Next, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting gate switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations (step A147), perform production command setting processing (step A148),
Finish the special figure starting port switch common processing.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the starting area of the starting prize opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, and extracts a predetermined random number, which becomes the right to execute the variable display game. It constitutes a start-up storage means that stores a predetermined number of items as a memory. In addition, the starting storage means (gaming control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on winnings of game balls into the first starting winning hole (starting winning hole 36) up to a predetermined number as the first starting memory. Various random numbers are memorized and extracted based on winnings of game balls to the second starting prize opening (normal variable winning device 37).
A predetermined number is stored as a second startup memory up to an upper limit.

[Special figure reservation information determination process]
Next, special figure reservation information determination processing (step A14) in the above-mentioned starting gate switch common processing
6) will be explained in detail. The special figure pending information determination process is a prefetch process that determines result-related information corresponding to the corresponding starting memory before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding starting memory.

As shown in FIG. 4-18, first, a jackpot determination process (step A154) is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. Then, if the determination result is a jackpot (step A155; Y), set a jackpot special symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (step A156), and step The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number prepared in A140 is acquired (step A157), and the process moves to step A168.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a jackpot (step A155; N), a small hit determination process (step A159) is performed to determine whether or not it is a small hit based on whether the jackpot random value matches the small hit determination value. conduct. Then, when the judgment result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a special symbol random number check table for small hit is set (step A161), and prepared in step A140 of the special symbol start switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (step A162), and the process moves to step A168.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), a support hit determination process (
Step A163) is performed. Then, if the determination result is not a support hit (step A164
;N) sets the stop symbol information of a miss (step A167), and moves to the process of step A168.
In addition, when the determination result is a support hit (step A164; Y), a special symbol random number check table for support hit is set (step A165), and prepared in step A140 of the special symbol start opening switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (step A166), and the process moves to step A168.
Incidentally, the support hit can be derived only when the gaming state is the first specific gaming state ST41, and here, the determination is made in consideration of the gaming state in which the special symbol variation display game based on the starting memory is executed.

Then, a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and performance command setting processing is performed (step A169). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A170) is performed to set special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, and a variation pattern setting process is performed to set a variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step A170). A171).
Thereafter, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to a first half variation number indicating a first half variation pattern and a second half variation number indicating a second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A172), and production command setting processing is performed. (Step A173), the special figure reservation information determination process is ended. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A170 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A171 are similar to the process executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure normal process.

Through the above processing, a pre-read symbol command containing the result of the special pattern variation display game based on the starting memory of the pre-read target and a pre-reading variation pattern command containing information on the variation pattern in the special pattern variation display game based on the starting memory are prepared. and transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (pre-reading result) of the result-related information (whether it is a jackpot or not and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory is controlled in advance before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, and in particular, by changing the decorative special symbol start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result-related information is provided to the player before the start timing of the special symbol variation display game. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting memory means (game controlling device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (for example, whether or not it will result in a special result). etc.) serves as a preliminary determination means. Furthermore, the timing to determine in advance the random value stored corresponding to the starting memory is not only at the time of starting winning when the starting memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be explained. As shown in FIG. 4-19, in the special figure normal process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 pending number (second starting memory number) is "0" (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 pending number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 pending number (first starting memory number) is "0" (step A305). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings 1 is "0" (step A305; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (step A309), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (step A309;N) sets a customer waiting demonstration flag in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A311), and a production command setting process (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A313), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A314). Then, the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316).
), the special figure normal processing ends. That is, when the special figure fluctuation display game can be started but the starting conditions are not met, the production control device 300 issues a customer waiting demonstration command that is waiting information.
It will be sent to you.
On the other hand, in step A309, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A309;
Y) moves to the process of step A313 without performing the processes of steps A310 to A312.

Also, in step A301, if the number of reserved special drawings 2 is not "0" (step A301;
N) prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the number of special figures 2 reservation (step A302
). Next, the production command setting process (step A303) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (
Step A304) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.
In addition, in step A305, if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is not "0" (step A305;
N) prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations (step A306
). Next, the production command setting process (step A307) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (
Step A308) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A308) in the above-mentioned special figure normal process will be explained. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 4-20(a), first, a special symbol 1 variation flag indicating the type of special symbol variation display game to be executed (here, special symbol 1) is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321). . Next, loss information and jackpot information are set in the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether the first special figure fluctuation display game is a jackpot by determining the jackpot random number, and the first special figure fluctuation display game is A process of setting loss information and small hit information in the small hit flag to determine whether it is a small hit or not, and a support hit to determine whether the first special symbol fluctuation display game is a support hit or not. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) is performed to set losing information and support hit information to the flag.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information)
323), special figure information setting processing (step A324) is performed to set special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern. As parameters, the game state, the number of pending games, the stopped symbol pattern number, the remaining number of general power support times, etc. are used. Next, a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table is prepared, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set (step A325).
). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) is performed to set a variation pattern that is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, and a variation start information setting process is performed to set information on the start of variation in the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure fluctuation processing is set as the processing number (step A328).
, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal related to the start of variation of special symbol 1 (for example, special symbol 1 fluctuating signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1 display 5
Set the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the flashing cycle timer (step A33).
3). Next, the initial value (here "0") is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure normal process will be explained. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is similar to the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 4-20(a). This is done for the 2-start memory.

As shown in FIG. 4-20(b), first, a special symbol 2 variation flag indicating the type of special symbol variation display game to be executed (here, special symbol 2) is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341). . Next, loss information and jackpot information are set in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether the second special figure fluctuation display game is a jackpot by determining the jackpot random number, and the second special figure fluctuation display game is A process of setting loss information and small hit information in the small hit flag to determine whether it is a small hit or not, and a support hit to determine whether the second special symbol fluctuation display game is a support hit or not. A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed to set losing information and support hit information to the flag.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information)
343), special figure information setting processing (step A344) is performed to set special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern. As parameters, the game state, the number of pending games, the stopped symbol pattern number, the remaining number of general power support times, etc. are used. Next, a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table is prepared, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set (step A345).
). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) is performed to set a variation pattern that is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, and a variation start information setting process is performed to set information on the start of variation in the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure fluctuation processing is set as the processing number (step A348).
, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal related to the start of variation of special symbol 2 (for example, special symbol 2 fluctuating signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2 display 5
Set the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the flashing cycle timer (Step A35).
3). Next, the initial value (here "0") is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a special figure variable display game execution control means that executes the special figure variable display game based on the starting memory stored in the starting memory means. The special figure fluctuation display game execution control means executes the first special figure fluctuation display game as the special figure fluctuation display game based on the first start memory, and executes the second special figure change display game as the special figure change display game based on the second start memory. A figure fluctuation display game will be executed.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 4-21 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of this embodiment.
In this special pattern 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A431), and if it is a jackpot (step A431; Y), the special pattern 1 special pattern random number storage area (reserved number Load the special pattern random number from 1) (step A432). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step A433), and a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A434). This process selects the jackpot type.

After that, a special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A435), and a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 display 51) and the halt symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437), the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is obtained, and the time reduction judgment data is obtained. The area is saved (step A438), and production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting a variation pattern scenario, which is information regarding the execution mode of the special gaming state, the performance mode after the special gaming state ends, and the transition of the variable selection table group after the special gaming state ends. . Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A455).

On the other hand, if the jackpot 1 flag is not a jackpot (step A431; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A440), and if it is a small hit (step A44).
0; Y) loads the special pattern random number from the special pattern 1 special pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A441). Next, set the special figure 1 small winning symbol table (step A442).
, acquire the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number and save it in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A443). Through this process, the type of small win is selected. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A444), the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A445), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A444). Prepare the corresponding decorative special command (Step A)
455).

In addition, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A440; N), it is determined whether the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (step A446), and if it is a support hit (step A44).
6; Y) loads the special pattern random number from the special pattern 1 special pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step A447). Next, set the symbol table per special figure support (step A448
), acquires the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number and saves it in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A449). This process selects the support type.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A450), and the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction judgment data area (step A450). Step A451), the production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A452), and a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A455).
In addition, if the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (step A446; N), the stop symbol number at the time of miss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A453), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. (Step A454), and prepare a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (Step A455). Through the above processing,
A stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is set.
Note that the support win can be derived only when the gaming state is the first specific gaming state ST41, so steps A446 to A4 are performed only when the gaming state is the first specific gaming state ST41.
52 processing may be performed.

After that, save the decorative special figure command in the decorative special figure command area (step A456),
Performance command setting processing (step A457) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the production control device 300. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (step A458), clear the special symbol 1 special symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (step A459), The special figure 1 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
FIG. 4-22 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of this embodiment. Note that the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, but is performed for the special figure 2.
In this special pattern 2 stop pattern setting process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A471), and if it is a jackpot (step A471; Y), the special pattern 2 special pattern random number storage area (reserved number Load the special symbol random number from (for 1) (step A472). Next, the special pattern 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step A473), and the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A474). This process selects the jackpot type.

After that, the special figure 2 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A475), and the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A476). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 2 display 52) and the halt symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A477), the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction judgment data is obtained. The area is saved (step A478), and production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and probability state is saved (step A479). These pieces of information are for setting a variation pattern scenario, which is information regarding the execution mode of the special gaming state, the performance mode after the special gaming state ends, and the transition of the variable selection table group after the special gaming state ends. . Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A495).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A471; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A480), and if it is a small hit (step A48
0; Y) loads the special pattern random number from the special pattern 2 special pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A481). Next, set the special figure 2 small winning symbol table (step A482).
, acquire the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number and save it in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A483). Through this process, the type of small win is selected. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A484), the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A485), and the stop symbol pattern is saved. Prepare the corresponding decorative special command (Step A)
495).

In addition, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A480; N), the stop symbol number at the time of miss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A493), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. (Step A494), and prepare a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (Step A495). Through the above processing, the stop symbols corresponding to the results of the special symbol variable display game are set.

After that, save the decorative special figure command in the decorative special figure command area (step A496),
Performance command setting processing (step A497) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the production control device 300. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (step A498), clear the special symbol 2 special symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (step A499), The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process ends.
In this way, when setting the stop symbols for each result, by using a common special symbol random number regardless of the result, the types of random numbers required can be reduced, and the specifications and programs of the gaming machine can be simplified. This reduces the burden of control.

[Special figure fluctuation processing]
FIG. 4-23 shows the special symbol fluctuation processing (step A10) in the special symbol game processing of this embodiment.
In this special symbol fluctuation processing, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag is prepared (step A601), and production command setting processing (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special pattern game processing timer area (step A604). That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a stop display time setting means for setting a stop display time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Next, it is determined whether general electricity support is in progress (step A605), and if general electricity support is not in progress (step A605; N), the process moves to step A612. In addition, if general electricity support is in progress (step A605; Y), the time reduction variation number 1 in the time reduction variation number 1 area is updated by -1 (step A609), and it is checked whether the time reduction variation number 1 has become 0. Determination is made (step A610).
If the time reduction variation number 1 is 0 (step A610; Y), a time reduction end setting process is performed to end general power support (step A611), and the process moves to step A612. Further, if the time reduction variation number 1 is not 0 (step A610; N), step A6
12.
That is, when the number of time reduction fluctuations 1 becomes 0, general electricity support is terminated. In addition, the number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game, the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the total number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 1 variable display game are counted, and The general electricity support may be terminated when the number of calls reaches a predetermined number of times.

After performing the production mode information check process (step A612), it is determined whether the remaining pending consumption state has ended (step A613). Here, the term "remaining hold extinguished state has ended" includes not only the case where the termination condition of the remaining hold extinguished state ST5 is satisfied, but also the case where there is no remaining hold at the end of the specific gaming state ST4.
If the remaining pending consumption state has not ended (step A613; N), step A616
to move to. Further, when the remaining pending consumption state has ended (step A613; Y), it is determined whether the result is a failure (step A614).
If the result is not a failure (step A614; N), the process moves to step A616.
If the result is a failure (step A614; Y), a signal regarding time-saving termination (for example,
The jackpot 2 signal is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A615), and the process moves to step A616.

In step A616, "2" related to the process during special figure display is set as the process number (step A616), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A61).
7). Furthermore, a signal related to the end of the variation of special symbol 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuating signal is turned off)
) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A618), and a signal related to the end of variation of special symbol 2 (for example, turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A619). A control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) is saved in the symbol confirmation number signal control timer area related to the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game to be output to the external information terminal (step A620). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the stoppage of fluctuation on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A621 ), as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the stoppage of fluctuation on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A622), the special figure changing process ends.

[Time-saving end setting process]
FIG. 4-24 shows the time saving end setting process (step A611) in the special figure fluctuation process. In this time saving end setting process, first, signals related to the end of time saving (for example, special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal OFF, special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, normal Symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, normal electric accessory 1 opening extension state signal OFF) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A632).

Next, save the number with no time saving in the game state display number area (step A633), and save the low probability of low probability & no time saving flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A63).
4) Save the special pattern low probability & no time saving flag in the special pattern game mode flag area (step A635).
Then, the time reduction variation number 1 area is cleared (step A636).
Thereafter, a signal related to the left-handed hitting instruction (for example, firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A638), and a right-handed hitting indication LED (for example, the first game status display section 56a ), save the number in the left-handed game state display number 2 area (step A639), save the normal base state information in the normal base state determination area (step A640), and set the time-saving end. Finish the process.

[Special figure display processing]
4-25 and 4-26 show special figure display processing (step A11) in the special figure game process of this embodiment.
In this special figure display process, first, the support hit flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the support hit flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A701). , clears the support hit flag 1 area and the support hit flag 2 area of RWM (step A702).
Next, the small hit flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the small hit flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A703), and the small win flag 1 area of the RWM is loaded. and clears the small hit flag 2 area (step A704).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A705), and the jackpot flag 1 area and jackpot flag of the RWM are loaded. 2 areas are cleared (step A706). Then, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A707), and if it is a jackpot (step A707; Y), it is a jackpot of the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 jackpot).
Test signals related to the start of (for example, condition device operation signal turned ON, accessory continuous operation device operation signal turned ON, special symbol 2 hit signal turned ON) are saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A710). ), a round number upper limit value table is set (step A711).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A707; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A708), and if it is a jackpot (step A708; Y), the first special Test signals related to the start of the jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) in the figure fluctuation display game (for example, turning on the condition device operation signal, turning on the accessory continuous operation device operation signal, and turning on the special symbol 1 hit signal) of the RWM. Save it in the test signal output data area (step A
709), and sets a round number upper limit value table (step A711).

Next, the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of this embodiment, “1
0" or "3") and save it in the RWM round number upper limit area (step A7).
12). Next, obtain the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information, and
It is saved in the round LED pointer area of the WM (step A713).

Next, a decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM and prepared (step A714), and a production command setting process (step A715) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command related to information that sets the probability of a winning result in a normal pattern fluctuation display game and a special pattern fluctuation display game to a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A716), and a production command setting process is performed. (Step A717) is performed. Next, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A718), and the production command setting process (step A719). This fanfare command constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the performance control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the big winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the regular symbol fluctuation display game and the special symbol fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A720). In the case of this embodiment, in step A720, the jackpot 2 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are saved as signals corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the probability state. In addition, each ON/OFF is determined by the big prize opening opening information and the probability state. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is O if it is a jackpot with a ball coming out (the jackpot opening information is other than jackpot opening information 1).
N, jackpot with no balls coming out (so-called sudden jackpot, etc.) Big winning opening opening information is Big winning opening opening information 1
), it will be ON if there is a jackpot in the time saving state, and OFF otherwise.
Further, the jackpot 3 signal is turned ON when it is a jackpot with a ball being rolled out, and turned OFF when it is a jackpot with no balls put out. In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, all jackpots have a payout.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the general pattern fluctuation display game and the special pattern fluctuation display game is set (step A721).
), the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A722). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A723). As a result, information on the probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the production mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, clear the area of the number of illegal winnings of the big winning hole of the big winning hole that corresponds to the big winning hole opening information (
Step A724), a flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area of the big winning opening corresponding to the big winning opening opening information (step A725). Thereafter, the fanfare/interval processing transition setting process 1 (step A726) for transitioning to the fanfare/interval processing is performed, and the special figure display processing is ended. That is, a special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variable prize winning device 38 into an open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variable display game or the second special figure variable display game. It constitutes a special game state generating means that generates a state.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A708; N), it is determined whether the probability state of the special symbol variation display game is a high probability state (step A727). In the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the special symbol probability is always constant, it is determined that it is not always in a high probability state (step A
727; N), it is determined whether there is a ceiling reached flag (step A728).
If there is a flag indicating that the ceiling has been reached (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A732 without performing processing related to starting general power support based on reaching the ceiling. The ceiling reached flag is set based on reaching the ceiling, and is cleared based on the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereby, when general power support is started based on reaching the ceiling, it is possible to prevent general power support based on reaching a new ceiling from being started until after the jackpot has passed.

If there is no ceiling reached flag (step A728; N), the value of the ceiling counter area is updated by +1 (step A729), and it is determined whether the ceiling has been reached (step A730).
If the ceiling has not been reached (step A730; N), the process moves to step A732.
If the ceiling has been reached (step A730; Y), the ceiling time reduction activation flag and the ceiling reached flag are set (step A731), and the process moves to step A732.

In step A732, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A732), and if it is a small hit (step A732; Y), it is determined that the small hit of the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure Turn on the test signal (for example, the special symbol 2-bit win signal) regarding the start of the 2-bit win)
) in the RWM test signal output data area (step A735), and step A7
36.
Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A732; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A733), and if it is a small hit (step A733; Y). saves the test signal (for example, turning on the special symbol 1 small hit signal) related to the start of the small hit (special symbol 1 small win) of the first special symbol fluctuation display game in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A734), the process moves to step A736.

Next, it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state (step A
736). In the game machine of this embodiment, since the special figure probability is always constant, it is determined that the probability is not always high (step A736; N), and the decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area and prepared ( Step A737) and effect command setting processing (step A738) are performed. Next, a small win fanfare command is prepared (step A739), an effect command setting process (step A740) is performed, and the process moves to step A741. This small win fanfare command also constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the performance control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Then, it is determined whether general electricity support is in progress (step A741), and if general electricity support is not in progress (step A741; N), small win fanfare medium process transition setting process ( Step A746) is performed to end the special figure display process.
If general power support is in progress (step A741; Y), it is determined whether the conditions for ending general power support are satisfied (step A743). In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the termination condition is that a small hit is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game.
If the general electricity support termination condition is not satisfied (step A743; N), the process of step A746 is performed and the special figure display process is ended. Furthermore, if the conditions for ending general electricity support are met (step A743; Y), a time-saving termination setting process is performed to terminate general electricity support (step A744), and a signal regarding the time-saving termination is sent to the external information output data area. It is saved (step A745), and the process of step A746 is performed to end the special figure display process.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A733; N), it is determined whether there is a ceiling time saving activation flag (step A751). If there is a ceiling time reduction activation flag (step A751; Y), the initial value of the ceiling time reduction number is saved in the time reduction variation number area 1 (step A752), and the process moves to support operation setting processing (step A756).
Here, 250 is saved in the time reduction variation number area 1 as an end condition based on the total number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.

Further, if there is no ceiling time saving activation flag (step A751; N), it is determined whether the loaded support hit flag 1 is a support hit (step A754). If it is not a support hit (step A754; N), a special figure normal process transition setting process (step A757) for moving to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure displaying process is ended.

On the other hand, if the support hit flag 1 indicates support hit (step A754; Y), the initial value corresponding to the time reduction judgment data is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area 1 (step A755).
, the process moves to support operation setting processing (step A756).
Here, 250 is saved in the time reduction variation number area 1 as an end condition based on the total number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game.
After carrying out the support operation setting process (step A756), a special figure normal process transition setting process (step A757) for moving to the special figure normal process is carried out, and the special figure displaying process is ended.

Note that the support win can be derived only when the gaming state is the first specific gaming state ST41, so steps A754 to A7 are performed only when the gaming state is the first specific gaming state ST41.
56 processes may be performed.
In addition, in the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322), a support hit may be determined only when the gaming state is the first specific gaming state ST41, or in the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) determines support hit without considering the game state, and performs general power support setting processing based on support hit only when the game state is the first specific game state ST41 in the special figure display process. Also good.

In the above process, the determination of whether or not the ceiling has been reached is made at the end of the special figure fluctuation display game (steps A727 to A731), and the special figure fluctuation display game in which winning the support and reaching the ceiling are the same. If this occurs, conditions for ending the specific gaming state ST4 are set based on reaching the ceiling (steps A751 to A756).

It is rare for reaching the ceiling and winning a support prize to occur in the same special symbol variable display game, and it would be a waste of control to always check this at the start of the special symbol variable display game. Therefore, by implementing the present embodiment, such wasteful processing becomes unnecessary, and the control at the start of the special figure variation display game can be simplified.

In addition, if you set a specific fluctuation pattern or result format based on winning the support or reaching the ceiling, if the winning of the support and reaching the ceiling occur in the same special pattern fluctuation display game, In this special figure variation display game, the variation pattern and result mode based on the support hit are selected at the start, but the specific game state ST4 is given at the end of the special figure variation display game.
The ending condition is not based on hitting the support, but on reaching the ceiling.
While the variation pattern and result mode are selected according to the support hit, there is a contradiction that the end condition of the given specific game state ST4 is based on reaching the ceiling. Since there is no change in the transition to state ST4, the player will not be dissatisfied.

If there is sufficient control at the start of the special figure variation display game, it is determined at the start of the special figure variation display game whether reaching the ceiling and winning the support hit occur in the same special figure variation display game. You can do it like this. If reaching the ceiling and winning a support prize occur in the same special figure variation display game, the variation pattern or result pattern of the special figure variation display game may be different from the one corresponding to the missed result or the one corresponding to reaching the ceiling. By making it a thing, you can avoid contradictions.

[Fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 4-27 shows the fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1 (step A726) in the special figure display process described above. In this fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1, first, "3", which is the process number related to fanfare/interval process, is set (step A791), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A792).

Next, save the signals related to the start of the jackpot (special gaming state) (for example, turn on the jackpot 1 signal (output for jackpot + small hit), turn on the jackpot 4 signal (output for jackpot)) in the external information output data area. (Step A793), signals related to the end of high probability & time saving (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, special symbol 2 Save the fluctuation time reduction state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal OFF, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal OFF) in the test signal output data area. (Step A794). After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step A795), and the number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A79).
6) Save the normal pattern low probability & no time saving flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A797).

Then, the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the high probability is set in order to turn off the gaming state display LED (for example, the third gaming state display section 56c) provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. The notification flag area is cleared (step A799), and the special pattern low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special pattern game mode flag area (step A800). Next, save the probability information command (low probability) in the power outage recovery transmission command area that saves the command output to the production control device 300 when the power outage is restored (step A801), and display special figure fluctuations that can be executed in a time-saving state. The time reduction variation number 1 area for managing the number of games is cleared (step A802). This ends the general power support and time saving state. Furthermore, the ceiling counter area is cleared (step A804), the ceiling time reduction activation flag area is cleared (step A805), and the ceiling reached flag area is cleared (step A806).
.

After that, save the production mode 1 number in the production mode number area (step A807),
Clear the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A808) and save the no-update code in the next mode transition information area (step A809). Then, the signal related to the right-handed batting instruction (for example, firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A
810), in order to light up the LED indicating that the player is playing right-handed (for example, the first gaming state display section 56a), the number indicating that the player is playing right-handed is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A811);
The fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1 ends.

[Support operation processing]
FIG. 4-28 shows the support activation process (step A756) in the above-mentioned special figure display process.
In this support operation setting process, first, a signal related to the start of time saving (for example, jackpot 2 signal and jackpot 3 signal are turned on) is saved in the external information output data area (step A821). Next, the timer initial value is saved in the time saving signal control timer area (step A822). Here, 128 ms is saved as the timer initial value. As a result, among the signals related to the start of time saving, the three jackpot signals are output for only a short time.

Next, turn on the signal related to the start of time reduction (for example, turn on the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal,
Special symbol 2 Turn on the fluctuation time reduction state signal, Normal symbol 1 Turn on the high probability state signal, Normal symbol 1
The fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned ON and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned ON) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A823).

Furthermore, the number with time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A824), and the high probability of normal drawings & flag with time saving is saved in the normal drawing gate mode flag area (step A82).
5) In order to maintain the probability status flag and set time saving, a special figure time saving flag is synthesized in the special figure game mode flag area (step A826).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed batting instruction (for example, firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A827), and a right-handed batting indication LED (for example,
In order to light up the first gaming state display section 56a), the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A828). Then, a performance mode information address table is set (step A829), and the address of the table corresponding to the performance mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A830). By acquiring the address of the corresponding table based on the performance mode transition information, a variable pattern scenario, which is information regarding the transition of the variable selection table group, is also acquired.

Next, as a process for saving information necessary for managing the production mode in the game control device 100, first, the production mode number of the production mode that will be set after the end of the special symbol fluctuation display game that has won the support is acquired. , is saved in the production mode number area (step A831). Furthermore, the number of rotations remaining in the performance of the production mode that is set after the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that became a support hit is acquired, and saved in the effect remaining rotation number area (step A832), and the special figure that became a support hit is obtained. The next mode transition information of the production mode set after the end of the variable display game is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A833). Based on the information saved here, the production mode and variable selection table group will change based on running the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times after the end of the special figure variation display game that won the support. .

After that, prepare a probability information command corresponding to the production mode number (step A834),
The command is saved in the power outage recovery transmission command area (step A835), and the production command setting process (step A836) is performed. Next, a production rotation number command corresponding to the newly set production remaining rotation number is prepared (step A837), a production command setting process (step A838) is performed, and a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number is prepared. Prepare (step A839), and perform production command setting processing (step A840).
Then, the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A841), the production mode transition information area is cleared (step A842), and the support operation setting process is ended.

[Jackpot end process]
FIG. 4-29 shows the jackpot end process (step A15) in the special figure game process of this embodiment.
In this jackpot ending process, first, it is determined whether it is a jackpot with no time saving (step A90).
0). A jackpot without time saving is a jackpot that shifts to the normal gaming state ST1 after the end of the first special gaming state ST2, and corresponds to a jackpot based on the 3R small win C.
If it is a jackpot with no time saving (step A900; Y), the process moves to step A916. In addition, if it is not a jackpot without time saving (step A900; N), a signal related to the start of time saving (for example, turning on the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A
901). Since the signal regarding the start of time saving is output during the jackpot, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area. Next, a signal regarding the start of low probability & time saving (for example, turn on the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, turn on the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal,
Normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is ON, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is ON) are saved in the test signal output data area (Step A90)
2).

Next, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step A903), and save the high probability of high probability & time saving flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A90).
4) Save the special figure time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A90)
5). Thereafter, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area (step A906). Here, the initial value according to the termination condition is saved in the time reduction variation number 1 area. Through the above processing, after the special game state ends, the general power support state and time saving state are entered. Further, by setting the initial value of the number of time saving fluctuations in the time saving fluctuation number area, the general electricity support state and the time saving state are ended by executing the special symbol fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times. That is,
After the end of the special game state, the game control device 100 sets the normal variable winning device 37 in a state where it is easy to win for a predetermined period of time (time saving state, general electricity support state).
It constitutes a specific game state generation control means that can generate.

After that, save the probability information command in the power outage recovery transmission command area (step A9).
10) Perform production command setting processing (step A911). Here, as probability information commands, there are a plurality of commands that further include information on production mode in either "with time saving" or "without time saving". Next, a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number 1 is prepared (step A914), and a production command setting process (step A915) is performed.

Next, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A918), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A917).
After that, signals related to the end of the jackpot (for example, jackpot 1 signal OFF, jackpot 3 signal OFF, jackpot 4 signal OFF) are saved in the external information output data area (step A9).
18), Signals related to the end of the jackpot (for example, turn off the condition device operation signal, turn off the accessory continuous operation device operation signal, turn off the special symbol 1 hit signal, turn off the special symbol 2 hit signal
) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A919). Next, the information in the probability fluctuation determination data area is cleared (step A920), the information in the round LED pointer area indicating the number of rounds of jackpot is cleared (step A921), and the information in the performance mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A922). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A923), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A924), and the jackpot termination process is ended.

[Specific area switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 4-30 shows the specific area switch monitoring process (step A3) in the special figure game process. In this specific area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether a small hit is occurring (step A41). The term "during a small hit" here refers to a period during which small hit processing and small hit remaining ball processing are performed. If this small hit is not occurring (step A41; N), the specific area switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the specific area switch 38d is valid only during the period when the small hit process and the small hit remaining ball process are being performed. Further, if a small hit is in progress (step A41; Y), it is determined whether the condition device is in operation (step A42).

If the conditional device is in operation (step A42; Y), the specific area switch monitoring process ends. If the conditional device is not in operation (step A42; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43). If there is no input to the specific area switch (step A43; N), the specific area switch monitoring process ends. Further, if there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43; Y), it is determined whether the detection valid period is such that detection by the specific area switch is treated as valid (step A44). If it is not the detection valid period (step A44; N), the specific area switch monitoring process ends. Also,
If it is within the detection valid period (step A44; Y), a specific area passage flag is set (step A45), and the specific area switch monitoring process is ended. Later, based on the presence of this specific area passage flag, processing for generating a first special game state will be performed.

[Small hit remaining ball processing]
FIG. 4-31 shows the process shown in the small hit remaining ball process (step A18) in the special figure game process. In this small hit remaining ball process, first, it is determined whether a remaining ball error is occurring (step A861). If a remaining ball error is occurring (step A861; Y), the process moves to step A863. If a remaining ball error is not occurring (step A861; N), it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A862; N), the small winning remaining ball process is ended. Moreover, when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862; Y), the process for ending the small winning from step A863 onwards is performed.

That is, the process for ending the small win is performed after all remaining balls in the special variable winning device 38 are ejected. However, if there is a remaining ball error in which the ejection cannot be confirmed even after a predetermined time has passed since the last game ball entered the special variable prize winning device 38, it is assumed that the time required for ejection has passed and the The process moves on to end the win. Of course, if there is a remaining ball error, the process may not proceed to end the small hit. Therefore, the process of step A861 may not be performed.

In the process for ending the small hit, first, it is determined whether the specific area has been passed (step A863). When the game ball enters and passes through the specific area 38h, the specific area switch 3
8d, and a specific area passing flag is set. Here, it is determined whether or not a specific area has been passed based on the presence or absence of this specific area passing flag. If the specific area has been passed (step A863; Y), the process moves to step A870 and a process for generating a special gaming state is performed. Further, if there is no passing through the specific area (step A863; N), the process moves to step A864 to end the second special game state and perform processing to enable execution of the special figure fluctuation display game.

In the process for ending the second special game state after step A864 and making it possible to execute the special figure fluctuation display game, 10, which is related to the small hit ending process, is set as the process number (step A
864), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A865). Next, save the small winning ending time in the special figure game processing timer area (step A866).
, Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the University of Japan winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (Step A
867). Then, the large winning opening count area is cleared (step A868), the small winning control pointer area is cleared (step A869), and the small winning remaining ball processing is completed.

On the other hand, if the specific area is passed (step A863; Y) and the process of generating the first special game state after step A870 is to be performed, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area and prepared (step A870), Performance command setting processing is performed (step A871).
Next, a V jackpot fanfare command is prepared (step A872), and production command setting processing is performed (step A873).

After that, save the signal regarding the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) in the external information output data area (
Step A874), Test signal output data area for test signals related to the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) (for example, condition device operating signal ON, accessory continuous operating device operating signal ON, special symbol 2 hit signal ON) (Step A875).

Then, save the jackpot number in the gaming status display number area (step A876), set the round number upper limit value table (step A877), and set the round number upper limit value (5 or 10) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information. ) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area (step A878). Furthermore, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step A879), and the initial value (here, 1) is saved in the round number area (step A880). The upper limit for the number of rounds is set to 5 or 10 rounds, but since the small winning action corresponds to the 1st round, by setting 1 as the initial number of rounds, the upper limit for the number of rounds will be 4 rounds or 9 rounds in the special game state. We are trying to make sure that the number of people is released.

Thereafter, 3, which corresponds to the fanfare/interval process, is set as the process number (step A881), and saved in the special figure game process number area (step A882). moreover,
Save the V jackpot fanfare time in the special game processing timer area (step A883
), performs the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (step A884),
The process moves to step A868.

[Small winning end processing]
FIG. 4-32 shows the small hit ending process (step A19) in the special figure game process of this embodiment.
In this small hit end process, first, it is determined whether support C, which is the second specific gaming state ST42, is in progress (step A930). If support C is in progress (step A930; Y)
If so, the process moves to step A937. If it is not in support C (step A930; N), it is determined whether it is in the normal pattern hit state (step A931). If it is not in the normal hit state (step A931; N), the signal related to the left-handed shot instruction (for example, firing position designation signals 1 and 2 are turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A932), and the signal related to the left-handed shot instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A932). In order to turn off the display LED (for example, the first gaming state display section 56a), the number in the left-handed playing state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A933), and the process moves to step A937.

On the other hand, if the normal pattern is in the winning state (step A931; Y), it is determined whether the opening pattern is pattern H1 (step A934). If the opening pattern is not pattern H1 (step A934; N), the process moves to step A937. If the opening pattern is pattern H1 (step A934; Y), the OFF state of the firing position designation signal 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A935), and the process moves to step A937.

Next, it is determined whether there is a ceiling time reduction activation flag (step A937). If there is no ceiling time reduction activation flag (step A937; N), the process moves to step A940. If there is a ceiling time reduction activation flag (step A937; Y), the initial value of the ceiling time reduction number is saved in the time reduction variation number 1 area (step A938). Here, 250 is set in the time reduction variation number 1 area as the time reduction variation number 1.
Then, support operation setting processing is performed (step A939), and the process moves to step A940.

Thereafter, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A940), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A941).
Furthermore, a signal regarding the end of the small hit (for example, turning off the special symbol 1 small hit signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A942), and a signal regarding the end of the small winning (for example, turning off the special symbol 1 small winning signal, Special symbol 2 small hit signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A943).
Subsequently, the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A944), the performance mode transition information area is cleared (step A945), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A946), the small winning ending process is ended.

Next, control by the production control device 300 will be explained. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the production control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 4-33 and a timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 4-33, in the main processing, the processing at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3) and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program from steps C1 to C7, loop processing is performed as main loop processing. In this loop process, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, an input signal (
A production button input process (step C9) is performed to create input information from the rising edge). Reading of inputs from the production button 25 and cross key 29 is performed within the timer interrupt process, and in this production button input process, processing for changing the content of the production, etc. is performed when there is an input from the production button 25 or cross key 29. .

Then, the settings for the changeable range of the LED and LCD brightness, volume, etc., and the settings of the LED by the player
A hall/player setting mode process is performed in which operations such as changing the screen, brightness of the liquid crystal display, and volume are accepted (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game.

Next, a received command check process (step C12) is performed to analyze and respond to the command from the gaming control device 100, and a performance display editing process (step C13) is performed to edit settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the performance. ) to set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the content to be drawn, and finally the drawing data is set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn is prepared within 0 seconds (approximately 33.3 milliseconds), the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether it is frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds), a V blank interrupt (1/6
0 second) is entered twice, it is determined that it is frame switching timing. Note that the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) at 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frame switching) at a timing later than 1/60 second. (switching) may also be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process in step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of audio from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and controls the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 including the panel decoration device 46 and the display board 350, etc. Decoration control processing (step C18), movable body control processing (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoids of the board production device 44, and board production setting processing (step C20) for controlling production are performed to clear the WDT. The process returns to step C8.

[Received command check processing]
FIG. 4-34 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this received command check process, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of commands received (step C201), It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of commands received is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. Further, if it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of commands received (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204).
), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether the copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206).
In this way, in this embodiment, commands are not directly analyzed in the received command buffer;
The content of the received command buffer is copied to a command area (RAM area for analysis), and command analysis is performed in the command area. As a result, in case a command is sent from the gaming control device 100 while the command is being analyzed, the command (data)
You can move it to make room. In addition, command analysis can be performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copying of commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. Furthermore, if it is determined that the copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands equal to the number of received commands has been completed (step C210). Then, if it is determined that the analysis of commands for the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N),
The process returns to step C207. Further, if it is determined that the analysis of commands equal to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is ended. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are analyzed all at once. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 4-35 shows the received command analysis process in the above-described received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated into MODE and the lower byte is separated into ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). If it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

Also, if it is determined in steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C2
34;N), the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
In step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of variable commands (step C235). The variation command is a command that instructs the variation pattern of the special figure. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of variable commands (step C235
;Y), variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Also, if it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of variable commands (
In step C235;N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237). The jackpot commands are commands that command operations related to the jackpot performance (such as displaying a fanfare screen and round screen), and commands that command operations related to the small win performance (displaying the fanfare screen and end screen, etc.). And M.O.
If it is determined that DE is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237; Y), jackpot command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Further, when it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of symbol commands (step C239). The symbol-related command is a command that instructs information regarding the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to use as the stop symbol of the special symbol). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of symbol-related commands (step C239; Y), symbol-related command processing (
Step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Also, if it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol-related commands (
In step C239;N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as pending number commands and error commands (step C241). Single-shot commands are commands that stand alone, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands. These one-shot type commands include a customer waiting demonstration command, a pending number command, a pattern stop command, a probability information type command, an error/invalid type command, a model specification command, etc. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C24
1; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Also, if it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (
In step C241;N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (step C243; Y), the prefetch symbol type command processing (step C2
44) to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of prefetch symbol-related commands (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch variable commands (step C245). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the read-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), the read-ahead variable command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends. Also, in step C245,
When it is determined that MODE is not within the range of look-ahead variable commands (step C245; N)
Then, the received command analysis process ends.

Note that the prefetch variation type command and the prefetch symbol type command are commands that include information necessary to execute the prefetch effect. A look-ahead performance (also called a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice performance) is whether or not a special figure change display game will be a jackpot when the special figure change display game corresponding to the unexecuted starting memory (pending) is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of the fluctuation pattern (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined degree of reliability, the display device 41 may display a decorative special symbol start memory display in a different manner from normal. This is a performance such as displaying a performance display. The prefetching commands (prefetching variation commands and prefetching symbol commands) are commands that inform you in advance of the fluctuation patterns and stop symbols that correspond to the starting memory that is the target of the prefetching effect, and are sent from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the production control device 300. Note that normal variable commands and symbol-related commands that are not pre-reading are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 at the start of the special figure variable display game.

Next, the effects of the game will be explained.
FIG. 4-36 shows an example of the performance in the normal game state ST1. Although the display contents are basically the same in other game states, it is also possible to not display some of the display contents depending on the game state. Further, the player can determine whether the normal gaming state ST1 or each other gaming state is present based on the displayed content.

As shown in FIG. 4-36(a), in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a first decorative game display section 81 for displaying a first decorative game among the decorative special figure variable display games is provided. In the first decorative game display section 81, the identification information is displayed in a variable manner in each of the variable display areas of the left variable display area 81a, the middle variable display area 81b, and the right variable display area 81c, and then stopped and displayed, thereby displaying the decorative special figure variable. Show games.

At the upper right of the display area of the display device 41, a second decorative game display section 82 is provided that displays a second decorative game of the decorative special figure variable display games. Similarly to the first decorative game displayed on the first decorative game display section 81, the second decorative game displayed on the second decorative game display section 82 has identification information in each of the left area, middle area, and right area. After displaying the variable, stop and display the result. The second decorative game display section 82 displays identification information (small symbols) that is relatively smaller than the identification information (large symbols) displayed on the first decorative game display section 81 .

Further, at the lower right part of the display area of the display device 41, a standby memory display section 83 is provided that displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory.
The standby memory display section 83 displays decorative special figure starting memory displays corresponding to the first starting memory and the second starting memory. In the normal game state ST1, since the game mainly proceeds with the special figure fluctuation display game based on the first start memory, the standby memory display section 83 displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory.
The decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the standby memory display section 83 has a one-to-one correspondence with the starting memory, and the leftmost decorative special figure starting memory display is the decorative special figure corresponding to the starting memory stored first. They are displayed in the order of memory so that they are displayed as a starting memory display, and each time they are used, they shift to the left. In addition, in the standby memory display section 83, there is a decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory (first starting memory) which is the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game, and the right to execute the special figure 2 variable display game. It is also possible to display both the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory (second starting memory).
Furthermore, in the standby memory display section 83, the pre-read results such as the result of the special figure variation display game and the variation pattern based on the starting memory can be suggested by the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory. It is possible.

On the left side of the standby memory display section 83, there is provided an active memory display section 84 that displays information regarding the starting memory corresponding to the special symbol variation display game that is currently being executed. The decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is transferred to the running memory display unit 84 at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game. Furthermore, in the running memory display section 84, the results and fluctuation patterns of the special figure variation display game currently being executed can be suggested by the display mode of the running memory display displayed on the running memory display section 84. It is possible.
At the upper left of the display area of the display device 41, there is a first starting memory number display section 85a that displays the first starting memory number (special figure 1 pending number) and a second starting memory number (special figure 2 pending number). A second starting memory number display section 85b for display is provided.

Furthermore, a background image 90 corresponding to the stage on which the user is currently staying is displayed in the display area. Each gaming state has at least one stage, and some gaming states include multiple stages. Each stage is associated with a background image 90 and BGM,
The background image 90 and BGM are changed to correspond to the transition of the stage accompanying the transition of the gaming state or the transition of the stage within the same gaming state. The stage constitutes one of the performance modes, and the transition of the stage corresponds to the transition of the performance mode from the first performance mode before the transition to the second performance mode after the transition.

FIG. 4-36(a) shows a state where the player is staying at the night stage among the multiple stages in the normal game state ST1. In this state, a night background image corresponding to the night stage in the normal gaming state ST1 is displayed as the background image 90, and BGM corresponding to the night stage is output.
Among the background images of this night, the images of the moon and stars are fixed images 90a that do not change or move, and the images of airplanes are dynamic images 90b that move continuously. The image is a variable image 90c whose color and shape can be changed at a predetermined timing.

When a new special figure fluctuation display game is started, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the waiting memory display section 83 shifts to the running memory display section 84, as shown in FIG. 4-36(b). At the same time as the performance is executed, the decorative special figure start memory display located other than the left end of the waiting memory display section 83 moves to the left within the waiting memory display section 83. Furthermore, the numerical value on the first starting memory number display section 85a changes. Further, the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 start varying display of the identification information. Furthermore, the dynamic display 90b of the background image 90 is configured to move over time.

The stage can be changed at a predetermined timing, and it is possible to perform a suggestive performance that suggests a stage transition, which is one of the performance modes.
4-36(a) and (b) show a state where the player is staying on the stage before the transition, and is in the first performance mode which is the performance mode before the transition. Here, the stage before transition is a night stage, and a background image 90 corresponding to the night stage is displayed. This background image 90 corresponds to the first image displayed in the first presentation mode.

When a suggestive effect suggesting a transition from this state to a second effect mode, which is a different stage, is started, first, a character forming a specific image 91 is displayed as shown in FIG. 4-36(c).
Here, the specific image 91 is displayed in front of the variable image 90c, and a part of the variable image 90c is hidden. Further, the specific image 91 is displayed so as to overlap with the rear side of the identification information that is displayed in a variable manner. The variable image 90c and the identification information are displays that tend to attract the player's attention, and by displaying the specific image 91 so as to overlap these displays, the specific image 91 can attract attention.

If there is no stage transition, the specific image 91 is displayed as shown in Figure 4-36(c), then gradually disappears and finally appears as shown in Figure 4-36(d). is completely erased, and the suggestive performance ends. In other words, in this case, it is a so-called false suggestion.
In addition, when there is a stage transition, after the specific image 91 is displayed as shown in FIG. 4-36(c), the character forming the specific image 91 is displayed as an additional image as shown in FIG. 4-36(e). Hold the brush that forms 91a and run it. As shown in FIG. 4-36(f), the night background image forming the first image disappears in the area where the brush has been stroked, and a substitute image 92 is displayed. Further, in a boundary portion 90d between the background image 90 that forms the first image and the alternative image 92, an image that does not belong to either image is displayed, so that it can be seen that they are different images.

Thereafter, the specific image 91 is erased as shown in FIG. 4-36(g). At this time, the specific image 91 is erased in an instant. Note that the character forming the specific image 91 may be erased by moving out of the screen.
Further, a suggested image 93 is displayed in the area where the alternative image 92 was displayed. Here, a background image 90 corresponding to a stage to which there is a possibility of transition as the second performance mode is displayed as a suggestion image 93, and this image constitutes predetermined information. This suggests a transition from the night stage to which the night background image corresponds to the daytime stage to which the daytime background image corresponds.
That is, in this case, a first suggestion effect is created in which the first image is displayed, the specific image 91 is displayed, and the suggestion image 93 suggesting a transition to the second presentation mode can be displayed. Furthermore, when transitioning from the state shown in FIG. 4-36(c) to the state shown in FIG. 4-36(d), the first image is displayed, the specific image 91 is displayed, and the suggestion image 93 is not displayed, and the first effect mode is selected. A second suggestion performance that can be performed is made.

By displaying the substitute image 92 while the specific image 91 is being displayed, the player will be able to pay attention to the action of the specific image 91, thereby increasing the interest of the game.
In addition, by displaying a suggestion image 93 that suggests a stage to which there is a possibility of transition after the specific image 91 is deleted, the player can clearly understand the suggestion image 92 and improve the game. You can improve your interest.
Further, in this example, the substitute image 92 and the suggested image 93 are displayed so as to overlap behind the identification information, the standby memory display section 83, and the running memory display section 84, which are being displayed in a variable manner. The identification information, the standby memory display section 83, and the active memory display section 84 are displays that tend to attract the player's attention, and by displaying the alternative image 92 and the suggestion image 93 so as to overlap these displays, the specific image 91 can attract attention.

Then, as shown in FIG. 4-36(h), the stage shifts to the second performance mode. Here, the stage has shifted to the daytime stage, and a daytime background image, which is the background image 90 corresponding to the daytime stage, is displayed instead of the background image 90 corresponding to the night stage, which forms the first image. This background image 90 corresponds to a second image displayed in the second presentation mode. Further, in this example, the daytime background image is displayed in common in the suggestion effect and the second effect mode, and it can be said that common predetermined information is displayed.
In the daytime background images shown in Figures 4-36(g) and (h), the images of clouds and mountains are fixed images 90a that do not change or move, and the images of the balloons move continuously. The image of the sun is a variable image 90c whose color and shape can be changed at a predetermined timing.

FIG. 4-37 shows the display timing of the specific image 91 and the stage transition timing.
The upper time chart in FIG. 4-37 shows the case where there is a stage shift, and the lower time chart shows the case where there is no stage shift.
The time from the start of erasure to the end of erasure (t105 to t106) of the specific image 91 in FIGS. 4-36(f) to (g) when there is a stage transition is the same as that in FIG. 4-36 (when there is no stage transition). The time is shorter than the time from the start to the end of erasing the specific image 91 (t103 to t104) in c) to (d).
Furthermore, when there is a stage transition, the time (t102 to t106) from the start of displaying the specific image 91 shown in FIG. 4-36(c) to the end of displaying the specific image 91 shown in FIG. 4-36(g) is as follows: A time longer than the time (t102 to t104) from the start of displaying the specific image 91 shown in FIG. 4-36(c) to the end of displaying the specific image 91 shown in FIG. 4-36(d) when there is no stage transition. It becomes.

Furthermore, this is the period from the start of display of the specific image 91 shown in FIG. 4-36(c) to the display of the second image in the second production mode shown in FIG. 4-36(h) when there is a stage transition. From the first period (t102 to t107), the specific image 91 disappears as shown in FIG. 4-36(d) from the start of display of the specific image 91 shown in FIG. 4-36(c) when there is no stage transition. The second period (t102 to t104), which is the period until the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 4-36(b), is shorter.

As a result, if there is no stage transition, the suggestion effect can be ended early, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting. Further, when there is no stage transition, the period for hiding a predetermined object in the display area is shorter than when there is a stage transition, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.
In the game machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4-36, a variable image 90c, which is an image of a planet as a predetermined object, is hidden by a specific image 91. Here, a part of the variable image 90c is hidden, but the entire variable image 90c may be hidden. The variable image 90c can perform effects by changing the display mode, and by shortening the period during which the variable image 90c is hidden when there is no stage transition, stage transitions that have low value for the player can be realized. The effect of the variable image 90c, which is more valuable to the player, can be given priority over the effect of , and the interest of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the variable image 90c forming a predetermined object may be used to suggest or notify the transition to the second presentation mode.
Further, the predetermined objects are not limited to the variable image 90c, but include the identification information of the first decorative game display section 81, the identification information of the second decorative game display section, the waiting memory display section 83, and the running memory display section 84. , a first start memory number display section 85a, a second start memory number display section 85b, etc.

Further, even in the period of FIGS. 4-36(c) to (g), the operation of the dynamic display 90b imitating an airplane continues in the background image 90 of the night stage displayed as the first image.
Furthermore, here, the suggestion image 92 and the background image 90 forming the second image displayed in the second production mode are the same background image 90 of the daytime stage, and as shown in FIGS. 4-36(f) to (h) The operation of the dynamic display 90b imitating a balloon continues even in the background image 90 of the daytime stage that is displayed as the suggestion image and the second image displayed in the period.

There is BGM corresponding to the night stage and day stage. In the first production mode shown in FIGS. 4-36(a) and (b), a night background image corresponding to the night stage forming the first image is displayed, and BGM corresponding to the night stage forming the first sound is displayed. Output.
In addition, in FIGS. 4-36(c) to (g) during which the suggestion effect is being executed, a night background image corresponding to the night stage forming the first image is displayed, and a second image is displayed as the suggestion image 92. A daytime background image corresponding to the daytime stage forming the predetermined information is displayed, and BGM corresponding to the night stage forming the first sound is output corresponding to the nighttime background image forming the first image. In the second performance mode shown in FIG. 4-36(h), since the second image and the daytime background image forming the predetermined information are displayed, the BGM corresponding to the daytime stage forming the second sound is output.
In other words, although the second image that constitutes the common predetermined information is displayed in the suggestive effect and the second effect mode, the BGM corresponding to the predetermined information and the second image is not output while the suggestive effect is being executed, and the second image is displayed in the second effect mode. In this aspect, common predetermined information and BGM corresponding to the second image are output.

As described above, by displaying the suggestion image 92 in the suggestion performance, it is possible to suggest the transition of stages, and for players who understand the game content, it is possible to quickly grasp the stages to which there is a possibility of transition. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
In addition, in the suggestion effect, the specific image 91 is displayed regardless of whether or not there is a stage transition, so it is possible to create expectations for the stage transition at the stage when the specific image 91 is displayed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 4-38(a), the display mode of the specific image 91 may indicate whether or not the stage will shift. Here, the suggestion is made based on the color of the specific image 91, but the suggestion may be made based on the type, shape, size, display position, etc. of the character. For example, it is also possible to display the specific image 91 in such a size that it overlaps all of the left variable display area 81a, middle variable display area 81b, and right variable display area 81c of the first decorative game display section 81.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4-38(b), whether or not the stage will shift may be suggested by the display mode of the additional image 91a. Here, the suggestion is made by showing a brush different from the brush as the additional image 91a, but the suggestion may be made by the type, shape, size, display position, movement method of the character, etc. of the additional image 91a. .

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4-38(c), whether or not the stage will shift may be indicated by the display mode of the boundary portion 90d. Here, a diagonal line is displayed as the boundary portion 90d, which is different from that shown in FIG. good. For example, the display color of the boundary portion 90d may be a color corresponding to a stage that indicates a transition. Further, the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 may be made to emit light in accordance with the display mode of the boundary portion 90d, for example, they may be made to emit light in the same color as the color of the boundary portion 90d. .
Further, the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 are positioned on the extension line of the boundary portion 90d, and are emitted according to the display of the boundary portion 90d, so that the boundary portion 90d extends beyond the area of the display device 41. It may be made to appear as if they are continuous.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4-38(d), the display mode of the suggestion image 93 may indicate whether or not the stage will shift. Although the case where the size of the suggestion image 93 is smaller than that in FIG. 4-38(c) is shown here, suggestions may be made based on the shape, size, position, etc. of the suggestion image 93. Further, suggestions may be made based on the shape, size, position, etc. of the substitute image 92.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4-38(e), instead of the post-transition background image 90 forming the second image, an image related to the post-transition background image 90 forming the second image is displayed as the suggestion image 93. You can do it like this. Here, a sun image related to a daytime background image corresponding to the daytime stage is displayed. This image of the sun constitutes predetermined information that is displayed in common with the suggestion image 93 and the daytime background image which constitutes the second image when the stage shifts to the daytime stage.
Furthermore, as shown in Figure 4-36 (h), when the image of the sun that constitutes the predetermined information is displayed, BGM corresponding to the daytime stage is output, but while the suggestive performance is being performed, the predetermined information is not displayed. The BGM of the corresponding daytime stage is not output, and the BGM corresponding to the night stage of the background image 90 forming the first image is outputted with priority.

Further, the suggestion image 93 may be a reduced version of the post-transition background image 90 that forms the second image, and the suggestion image 93 may be enlarged to become the background image 90 when the stage is transferred.
Further, the suggestion image 93 may change to another suggestion image 93, for example,
After displaying the first suggestion image 93, the display may change to the second suggestion image 93.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4-38(f), an image that is not included in the second image but is reminiscent of the second image or explains the second image may be displayed as the suggestive image 93. Here, the character "HIRU" which is not included in the background image 90 of the daytime stage of the second image, but which is reminiscent of or explains the daytime stage, is displayed as a suggestion image 93.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 4-36(g), FIGS. 4-38(e), and (f), after suggesting the transition to the daytime stage by the suggestion image 93, as shown in FIG. 4-38(g), There may be a case where the stage shifts to a stage other than the daytime stage. Here, the stage has shifted to the rain stage, and the background image 90 has changed to a rain background image.
Further, as shown in FIG. 4-38(h), a sun image related to the background image 90 of the daytime stage and a rain image related to the background image 90 of the rainy stage are displayed. It may also be possible to suggest migration.
The image of the sun constitutes predetermined information that is displayed in common with the suggestion image 93 and the daytime background image, which is the second image when the stage shifts to the daytime stage. Further, the rain image constitutes predetermined information that is displayed in common with the suggestion image 93 and the rain background image which constitutes the second image when moving to the rain stage.
While the suggestion effect is being executed, the daytime stage BGM or rain stage BGM corresponding to the display of these predetermined information is not output, and the BGM corresponding to the night stage of the background image 90 forming the first image is not output.
GM is output with priority.

Furthermore, in FIG. 4-36(f), the night background image displayed as the first image disappears in the area where the character forming the specific image 91 strokes the brush forming the additional image 91a, and the substitute image 92 is displayed. However, as shown in FIG. 4-39(a), the suggestion image 93 may be displayed without displaying the alternative image 92 even during the period when the specific image 91 is displayed.
Further, the specific image 91 may not be displayed in the suggestion effect.

In addition, although it is assumed that the stage always shifts when the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. 4-36(f), there may be cases where the stage returns to the original state shown in FIG. 4-36(b) and does not shift midway through.
For example, there may be cases in which the stage does not shift back from any of the states shown in FIGS. 4-36(e) to (g) to the state shown in FIG. 4-36(b). In this case, the process progresses to one of the stages shown in Figures 4-36(c), (e) to (g) and then returns to Figure 4-36(b). The possibility of returning to the state of -36(b) may be lowered, and the possibility of transitioning to the second presentation mode may be increased as the stage of suggestion presentation progresses.

In addition, the suggestion effect is not limited to the one described above, and may be anything that suggests whether or not the first effect mode should change to the second effect mode.
Furthermore, although the suggestion effect suggests whether or not the stage will shift, it may also suggest the high possibility of the stage shifting. For example, the first suggestion presentation may suggest that the second presentation mode is more likely than the second suggestion presentation. In addition, it has multiple types of different display modes as shown in FIGS. 4-38(a) to (d), and indicates the high possibility of switching from the first presentation mode to the second presentation mode depending on the executed display mode. You can also do it. Further, as the suggestion images 93 displayed in FIGS. 4-38(e), (f), and (h), a plurality of types of suggestion images 93 are provided corresponding to one production mode, and the displayed suggestion images 93 It is also possible to suggest the high possibility that the first presentation mode will change to the second presentation mode.

In addition, in the first suggestion effect, the suggestion image 93 is displayed after the specific image 91 is displayed with the first image displayed, but the display order is not limited to this, and within the period of the suggestion effect. It is sufficient if the first image, specific image 91, and suggestion image 93 are displayed.
In addition, in the second suggestion effect, the specific image 91 is displayed while the first image is being displayed, but the display order is not limited to this, and within the period of the suggestion effect, the first image and the specific image 91 are displayed. It is sufficient that the image 91 is displayed.

In addition, when the specific image 91 is erased without performing a stage transition as shown in FIG. 4-36(d), the state shown in FIG. 4-39(b) is changed from the state of FIG. 4-36(c) to An image that the character is disappointed in may be displayed and then erased. In addition, when the specific image 91 is erased when performing a stage transition as shown in FIG. 4-36(g), the state shown in FIG. 4-36(f) is changed to the state shown in FIG. 4-39(c). An image that pleases the character may be displayed and then erased. Alternatively, one of the erasing modes shown in FIGS. 4-39(b) and (c) may be executed, and the other erasing mode may be set to the erasing mode shown in FIG. 4-36. By using such an erasing mode, it is also possible to vary the manner in which the display of the specific image 91 is ended.

Further, the so-called false suggestion performance that is performed when there is a stage transition may or may not be performed depending on the type of stage being suggested. For example, if the stage suggests a transition to a stage with a higher possibility of a special result, it is possible to perform a false suggestion, and if the stage does not suggest the possibility of a special result or the stage has the same possibility of a special result, it is possible to perform a false suggestion. In the case of suggesting a transition to the stage of , the false suggestion may not be performed.
Furthermore, the stage transition may be performed periodically or irregularly. Then, in the case of suggesting a transition to a stage that transitions irregularly and the case of suggesting a transition to a stage that transitions regularly, in one case it is possible to perform a false suggestion, and in the other case, It is also possible not to carry out false suggestions. For example, when suggesting a transition to a stage that changes irregularly, it is possible to execute a false suggestion, but when suggesting a transition to a stage that changes regularly, it is possible to prevent the execution of a false suggestion. It's okay.
In addition, when suggesting a transition to a stage that transitions irregularly, and when suggesting a transition to a stage that transitions regularly, it is possible to perform a suggestive performance in one case, and in the other case, a suggestive performance is possible. You may choose not to execute it. For example, the suggestion effect may be made executable only when suggesting a transition to a stage that transitions irregularly, and may not be executed when transitioning to a stage that transitions periodically.

Further, for a plurality of stages, the order of transition of stages may be fixed or not fixed, or both cases may be included. Regarding stage transitions in a fixed order and stage transitions in an undetermined order, a suggestive effect may be performed for one stage transition, and a suggestive effect may not be performed for the other stage transition. For example, for stage transitions that occur in a fixed order, the destination stage is known, so there is no need to perform suggestive effects. For stage transitions in which the order is not determined, the destination stage may be suggested by suggestive performance.

Further, during the period in which the suggestion effect is being executed, the display mode of the decorative special symbol start memory display on the standby memory display section 83 and the running memory display on the running memory display section 84 may not be changed. Further, during the period in which the suggestion effect is being executed, the waiting memory display section 83 and the running memory display section 84 may be hidden.
Further, the first image and the second image may be displayed so as not to overlap with the decorative special symbol start memory display on the standby memory display section 83 or the running memory display on the running memory display section 84, or may be displayed while on standby. If it overlaps with the decorative special figure start memory display of the memory display section 83 or the running memory display of the running memory display section 84, the decorative special figure start memory display of the waiting memory display section 83 or the running memory display of the running memory display section 84. It may be arranged to be displayed later than the running memory display.

In addition, although the first image of the first production mode, the second image and predetermined image of the second production mode, and the suggestion image 93 and predetermined image of the suggestion production are used as the background image 90 corresponding to the stage, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the image may be displayed in a part of the display area. Furthermore, the first performance mode
The image and the specific image 91 may be displayed so that they do not overlap one after the other.
Furthermore, although both the first image and the second image were images of the same size as the background image 90,
The sizes may be different. For example, the second image may be larger than the first image to make it easier to understand the transition of the presentation mode.

In addition, although the first sound that can be output in response to the display of the first image and the second sound that can be output in response to the display of the second image or predetermined information are defined as BGM, any other sound may be used. Also good. For example, B
A specific sound or sound effect outputted over the GM may be used as the first sound or the second sound, or the voice of the dialogue uttered by the character may be used as the first sound or the second sound.

FIGS. 4-40 and 4-41 show a case in which the development of the reach state is suggested by a production similar to the above-mentioned suggestion production suggesting a stage transition. In the above example, the transition of the stage, which is one of the production modes, is suggested, but here, the transition of the reach state, which is one of the production modes, is suggested.
From the state where the variable display is being performed as shown in FIG. 4-40(a), the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left variable display area 81a and the right variable display area 81c as shown in FIG. 4-40(b). This is a normal reach, which is the first performance mode. In normal reach, a background image 90 corresponding to the current stage is displayed as the first image, and BGM corresponding to the current stage is output as the first sound. Of course, the first image and first sound for normal reach may be set.

Then, the suggestion effect is started as shown in FIG. 4-40(c). This suggestive performance suggests that the performance mode shifts from the first performance mode, normal reach, to the second performance mode, SP reach.
In this suggestion effect, first, a character forming a specific image 91 is displayed as shown in FIG. 4-40(c). Here, the specific image 91 is displayed in front of the variable image 90c, and a part of the variable image 90c is hidden.

If it does not develop into SP reach, the specific image 91 is displayed as shown in Figure 4-40(c), then gradually disappears as shown in Figure 4-40(d), and finally is completely erased, and the suggestive performance ends. In this case, after a predetermined period of time, the medium fluctuation display area 81b stops and the result mode is displayed in a stopped state, as shown in FIG. 4-40(e). Here, the winning results are stopped and displayed, but the jackpot results may also be stopped and displayed.

In addition, if there is a possibility of developing into SP reach, after the specific image 91 is displayed as shown in Figure 4-40(c), the specific image 91 is displayed as shown in Figure 4-40(f). The character holds and runs the brush forming the additional image 91a. As shown in FIG. 4-41(a), the night background image that was displayed as the first image disappears in the area where the brush was stroked, and a substitute image 92 is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 4-41(b), the specific image 91 is deleted, and a suggestive image 92 that suggests an SP reach that is likely to shift is displayed. The suggested image 92 here is a background image of the ocean, which is the background image 90 corresponding to the SP reach that may shift. This suggests that normal reach will develop into SP reach, and also suggests the types of SP reach that may develop.
Since the background image 90 of the normal reach, which is the first effect mode, is displayed even while the suggestion effect is being executed, the BGM of the first sound corresponding to the background image 90 is output. In addition, in FIG. 4-4(b), a background image 90 which is a second image corresponding to the second presentation mode is also displayed in the suggestion image 93 which is predetermined information, but a first image corresponding to the background image 90 of normal reach is also displayed. Sound BGM is output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 4-41(c), the suggestion image 93 is erased, the suggestion effect ends, and only the first image is displayed, and after a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 4-41(d), It develops into SP reach, which forms the second performance mode. Here, instead of the background image 90 corresponding to the normal reach forming the first image, a sea background image forming the background image 90 corresponding to the SP reach which is the second effect mode is displayed as the second image. Further, BGM corresponding to this SP reach is output as a second sound.
In the sea background image shown in Figure 4-41(d), the images of clouds and the sea are fixed images 90a that do not change or move, and the image of the ship is a dynamic image that moves continuously. 90b, and the image of the sun is a variable image 90c whose color and shape can be changed at a predetermined timing.
It should be noted that there may be cases where the state shown in FIG. 4-41(c) changes to the state shown in FIG. 4-40(e), and the result format is displayed as normal reach. Further, the state shown in FIG. 4-41(b) may be changed to the state shown in FIG. 4-41(d) without passing through the state shown in FIG. 4-41(c).

If the result is a jackpot, the jackpot result mode is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 4-41(e), and then the state shifts to a special game state. In addition, if the result is a loss, the result pattern of the loss is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 4-41(f), and then the background image 90 corresponding to SP reach is displayed as shown in FIG. 4-41(g). The screen returns to the background image 90 corresponding to the stage on which the user is staying.

Also, in the background image 90 of the night stage, which is displayed as the first image, even in the period spanning FIGS. 4-40(a) to (f), FIGS. 4-41(a) to (c), and (g), an airplane is The operation of the simulated dynamic display 90b continues.
Furthermore, here, the same suggestion image 92 as the background image 90 of the second image is used, and the suggestion image displayed in FIG. 4-41(b) and the second image in FIGS. 4-41(d) to (f) are Even in the background image 90 of the sea stage that is displayed as two images, the dynamic display 90b imitating a ship continues to operate. Therefore, during the period from the state shown in FIG. 4-41(b) to the state shown in FIG. 4-41(c) where the display is once terminated and then displayed again as shown in FIG. 4-41(d), Continuous changes continue, and the dynamic display 90b moves from the position shown in FIG. 4-41(b) to the position shown in FIG. 4-41(d).

FIG. 4-42 shows another example in which the development of the reach state is suggested by a production similar to the above-mentioned suggestion production suggesting a stage transition.
Figures 4-42(a) to (e) are similar to Figures 4-36(c) to (g), and Figure 4-42(e) is a suggestive image that suggests SP reach that may potentially transition. 92 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 4-42(f), the suggestion image 93 is erased, the suggestion effect ends, and only the first image is displayed, and after a predetermined period of time, as shown in FIG. 4-42(g), becomes normal reach. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 4-42(h), the SP reach develops where the second image is displayed.

In this case, the production mode before entering the reach state is the first production mode, the production mode that is SP reach is the second production mode, and the suggested production suggests that the first production mode will change to the second production mode. I can say that I am doing it.
In addition, when it becomes SP reach, it passes through normal reach, so it can be said that the performance mode before reaching the reach state constitutes the first performance mode, and the performance mode that is normal reach constitutes the second performance mode.
In addition, the presentation mode before entering the reach state is neither the first presentation mode nor the second presentation mode, and the production mode that is normal reach is the first presentation mode, and the production mode that is SP reach is the second presentation mode. It can be said that the suggested performance suggests that the first performance mode will be established and that the suggested performance will shift to the second performance mode before changing to the first performance mode.

In addition, in the above explanation, the stage and the reach state are mentioned as the production mode, but any production other than these may be used as long as it transitions from the first production mode to the second production mode. .
For example, one of the normal game state ST1, the first special game state ST2, the second special game state ST3, the specific game state ST4, and the remaining pending state ST5 is set as the first performance mode, and the other game state is set as the first performance mode. There may be two performance modes, and a suggestive performance regarding the transition of the gaming state may be performed.
In addition, the transition is not limited to when the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, but also during the error notification that notifies an error that has occurred in the gaming machine, or when the special figure fluctuation display game is not being executed and there is no memory of starting it. It may also be possible to make suggestions about the transition from these states to other states,
Suggestive performance may be performed that suggests a transition from the first performance mode to the second performance mode during error notification or while waiting for a customer.

Furthermore, it is also possible to make one of the left-handed game states and the right-handed game state into a first performance mode and the other a second performance mode, and to perform a suggestive performance regarding the shift in firing direction.
In addition, in the first special gaming state ST2 and the second special gaming state ST3, the above suggestion is given as a so-called promotion effect that suggests that the player is in a more advantageous state than the initially notified state or that the player is transitioning to a more advantageous state. It is also possible to perform a performance. In this case, it is suggested that the first presentation mode should be shifted to the second presentation mode that is advantageous for the player.
Further, a state in which the first image is displayed without displaying the second image in a part of the display area is defined as a first effect mode, and a state in which the second image is displayed without displaying the first image in a part of the display area. The state may be set to a second presentation mode, and a suggestive presentation may be performed that shifts from a state in which the first image is displayed to a state in which the second image is displayed.

In addition, in the above example, the transition from the first production mode to the second production mode in the same special figure variation display game was taken as an example, but the transition from the first production mode to the second production mode in a period spanning multiple special figure variation display games. It may be made to suggest that the transition to the presentation mode is made. For example, it may be suggested that after a plurality of games are executed from the first presentation mode, the transition to the second presentation mode is performed.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates an advantageous state for the player when the result of the game is a special result, the display means (display The production control means (production control device 300) controls the device 41) to display the first image on the display device, and the production control device changes the display mode from a first production mode in which the first image is displayed on the display device to a display mode in which the first image is displayed on the display device. It is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests whether or not to display a second image without displaying the second image. A first suggestion effect that can display a suggestion image 93 that suggests a transition to the mode, and a first suggestion effect that can display the first image, display the specific image 91, and set the first presentation mode without displaying the suggestion image 93. There is a possible second suggestion production, and the first suggestion production suggests that there is a higher possibility of transitioning to the second production mode than the second suggestion production and that the execution period is longer. Become.

Therefore, even if the game does not shift to the second performance mode, the suggested performance is executed, so that variations in the performance can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, by displaying the suggestion image 93, it becomes possible to suggest not only the transition of the performance mode but also the type of performance mode to be transitioned to, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, a player who is aware of the performance content of the gaming machine can quickly grasp the transitional performance mode from the suggestion image 93, and can improve the interest of the game. Further, since the suggestion image 93 is displayed after the specific image 91 is displayed, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the suggestion image 93. Also, the first suggestion is better,
By making the possibility of transitioning to the second production mode longer than the second suggestion production and making the execution period longer, the suggestion production can be finished quickly if there is no transition to the production mode.
By preventing meaningless performances from prolonging, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, the period from the display of the specific image 91 corresponding to the execution of the first suggestion effect to the transition to the second effect mode is made longer than the period during which the specific image 91 corresponding to the execution of the second suggestion effect is displayed. becomes.
Therefore, when there is no transition in the performance mode, the suggestive performance can be ended quickly, and by preventing a meaningless performance from prolonging, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates an advantageous state for the player when the result of the game is a special result, the display means (
The effect control means (effect control device 300) is capable of displaying a predetermined object (variable image 90c) on the display means, and the effect control means can display a predetermined object (variable image 90c) on the display means. In order to suggest whether or not to change from the first presentation mode in which the display means displays the first image to the second presentation mode in which the second image is displayed without displaying the first image on the display means, some or all of the predetermined objects are Suggestion performance accompanied by concealment can be executed, and in the suggestion performance, the period for concealing a predetermined object is different depending on whether the transition is not made to the second performance mode or when it is shifted to the second performance mode.
Therefore, since the period for hiding a predetermined object differs depending on whether or not to shift to the second performance mode, it is possible to increase the variety of performances and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the performance control means makes the period for hiding the predetermined object shorter in the case of not shifting to the second performance mode in the suggestive performance than in the case of shifting to the second performance mode.
Therefore, when there is no transition in performance mode, the period in which the predetermined object is hidden can be quickly ended, the performance using the predetermined object can be restarted early, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates an advantageous state for the player when the result of the game is a special result, the display means (
The effect control means includes an effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the display on the display device 41) and speakers 19a and 19b that can output audio. A first effect mode in which one sound can be output, a second sound can be output in response to display of predetermined information, and a first image is displayed without displaying the predetermined information, and the first image and the predetermined information. It is possible to shift to a suggestive effect that displays a , and a second effect that displays predetermined information without displaying the first image, and in the suggestive effect, it is possible to output the first sound without outputting the second sound. This means that
Therefore, while the suggestive performance is being executed, the output of the first sound gives the player the impression that the first performance mode is maintained, and it is possible to maintain the feeling of anticipation for the transition until the end of the suggestive performance, thereby increasing the interest of the game. can be improved.

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates an advantageous state for the player when the result of the game is a special result, the display means (
The production control means (production control device 300) controls display on the display device 41), and the production control device displays the first image on the display device from a first production mode in which the first image is displayed on the display device. The specific image 91
It is possible to perform a suggestive performance accompanied by the display of , and in the suggestive performance, the period for displaying the specific image 91 is different depending on whether the transition is not made to the second presentation mode or when it is shifted to the second presentation mode.
Therefore, since the period for displaying the specific image 91 differs depending on whether or not to shift to the second performance mode, it is possible to increase the variety of performances and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect control means makes the period for displaying the specific image 91 shorter in the case of not shifting to the second effect mode in the suggestive effect than in the case of shifting to the second effect mode.
Therefore, in the case where there is no transition of performance mode, the period for displaying the specific image 91 can be quickly ended, and by preventing a meaningless performance from prolonging, it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the game. .

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates an advantageous state for the player when the result of the game is a special result, the display means (
The production control means (production control device 300) controls display on the display device 41), and the production control device displays the first image on the display device from a first production mode in which the first image is displayed on the display device. The specific image 91
It is possible to execute a suggestive effect accompanied by the display of , and in the suggestive effect, the manner in which the display of the specific image 91 ends is different depending on whether the transition is not made to the second presentation mode or the case where the transition is made to the second presentation mode. This is what happened.
Therefore, since the manner in which the display of the specific image 91 is ended differs depending on whether or not to shift to the second performance mode, variations in the performance can be increased and the interest of the game can be improved.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment will be explained. Furthermore, basically,
It has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and hereinafter, parts having the same configuration will be given the same reference numerals and explanations will be omitted, and different parts will be mainly explained. The gaming machine of this modification differs in the execution mode of the suggestion performance.

From a state where variable display is being performed as shown in FIG. 4-43(a), a specific image 91 is displayed as shown in FIG. 4-43(b). In this suggestive effect, regardless of whether or not there is a stage transition, the character forming the specific image 91 holds the brush forming the additional image 91a as shown in Fig. 4-43(d), and ), the night background image displayed as the first image disappears in the area where the brush was stroked, and a substitute image 92 is displayed.

If there is no stage transition, the specific image 91, the substitute image 92, and the boundary portion 90d gradually disappear and are finally completely erased, as shown in FIG. 4-43(e).
On the other hand, if there is a stage shift, the specific image 91 is erased as shown in FIG. 4-43(f). At this time, the specific image 91 is erased in an instant. Note that the character forming the specific image 91 may be erased by moving out of the screen.
Furthermore, a suggestion image 93 is displayed in the area where the substitute image 92 was displayed, and the stage shifts to the background image 90 corresponding to the night stage forming the first image, as shown in FIG. 4-43(g). Instead, a daytime background image, which is a background image 90 corresponding to the daytime stage and which forms the second image, is displayed.

FIG. 4-44 shows the display timing of the specific image 91 and the stage transition timing.
The upper time chart in FIG. 4-44 shows the case where there is a stage shift, and the lower time chart shows the case where there is no stage shift.
In this suggestive effect, the time from the start of display of the specific image 91 shown in FIG. 4-43(b) to the end of erasure of the specific image 91 shown in FIG. 4-43(f) when there is a stage transition (t112 to t114 ) is calculated from the time (t112 to t116) from the start of displaying the specific image 91 shown in FIG. 4-43(b) to the end of erasing the specific image 91 shown in FIG. 4-43(e) when there is no stage transition. It is also a short time.

In this way, by making the display period of the specific image 91 shorter when there is a transition between stages, the display of the suggestion image 93 that is performed after the display of the specific image 91 can be performed earlier, and the suggestion effect can be improved. Since the above stages can be advanced quickly, the player's sense of anticipation can be sustained without interruption, and the interest in the game can be improved.
Furthermore, by making the display period of the specific image 91 longer when there is no transition between stages, it is possible to give a lingering effect to the performance, alleviating the player's sense of disappointment, and increasing the interest of the game. It is possible to prevent a decrease in Furthermore, it is possible to provide a period for the player to confirm that there is no stage shift, making it easier to understand the content of the performance.

Furthermore, the time from the start to the end of erasure (t113 to t114) of the specific image 91 in FIGS. 4-43(d) and (f) when there is a stage transition is the same as that in FIG. 4-43 when there is no stage transition. This time is shorter than the time from the start of erasure to the end of erasure (t115 to t116) of the specific image 91 in 43(d) and 43(e).
That is, the time during which the variable image 90c, which is an image of a planet forming a predetermined object, is hidden by the specific image 91 is shorter when there is a stage shift than when there is no stage shift.
Therefore, when there is a stage transition, the display of the variable image 90c is restarted at an early timing in addition to the display of the suggestion image 93, and a plurality of performances are combined to effectively produce the transition of the production mode. This makes it possible to create a very interesting state and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, it is the period from the start of display of the specific image 91 shown in FIG. 4-43(b) to the display of the second image in the second production mode shown in FIG. 4-43(g) when there is a stage transition. From the first period (t112 to t117), the specific image 91 disappears as shown in FIG. 4-43(e) from the start of display of the specific image 91 shown in FIG. 4-43(b) when there is no stage transition. The second period (t112 to t116), which is the period until the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 4-43(a), is shorter.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates an advantageous state for the player when the result of the game is a special result, the display means (display The effect control means (effect control device 300) is capable of displaying a predetermined object (variable image 90c) on the display means, and displays the first image on the display means. Concealing a part or all of a predetermined object in order to suggest whether or not the first presentation mode to be displayed becomes a second presentation mode in which a second image is displayed without displaying the first image on the display means. It is possible to perform a suggestive performance accompanied by the following, and in the suggestive performance, the period for concealing a predetermined object is made shorter when transitioning to the second presentation mode than when not transitioning to the second presentation mode. becomes.
Therefore, when there is a transition in performance mode, the performance using a predetermined object can be restarted at an early stage, the transition in performance mode can be effectively performed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates an advantageous state for the player when the result of the game is a special result, the display means (
The production control means (production control device 300) controls display on the display device 41), and the production control device displays the first image on the display device from a first production mode in which the first image is displayed on the display device. The specific image 91
It is possible to execute a suggestive effect accompanied by the display of , and in the suggestive effect, the period for displaying the specific image 91 is made shorter when transitioning to the second presentation mode than when not transitioning to the second presentation mode. That's what I did.
Therefore, when there is a transition in the performance mode, the stage of the suggestive performance can be advanced quickly, so that the player's sense of anticipation can be maintained without interruption, and the interest in the game can be improved. In addition, when there is no transition in performance mode, the player's sense of disappointment can be alleviated by giving the performance a lingering effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. Furthermore, it is possible to provide a period for the player to confirm that there will be no change in performance mode, making it easier to understand the content of the performance.

<Fifth embodiment>
The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 5-1 to 5-101. Note that the configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to fourth embodiments. Furthermore, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for components that perform the same functions as those in the first to fourth embodiments.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. Note that in the description of the gaming machine, front, rear, left, and right refer to the directions seen from the player during the game.

[Overview of gaming machine]
FIG. 5-1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.
The gaming machine 10 includes an opening/closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island equipment via a hinge 16 so as to be rotatable in opening and closing. The opening/closing frame includes a front frame 12 (body frame) and a glass frame 15 (front frame unit). Further, the left end of the opening/closing frame is a pivoted end that is attached to a hinge, and the right end is an open end that is opened by rotation. Note that the frame 11 and the front frame 12 constitute an outer frame unit 17.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 5-2) is disposed on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area that makes the game area 32 (see FIG. 5-2) formed on the game board 30 visible. Note that the cover glass 14 is shown as an example of a transparent member, and a plastic cover may be used instead of the cover glass 14. The glass frame 15 functions as a transparent member holding frame that holds a transparent member.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, by opening only the glass frame 15, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed. In addition, by opening the front frame 12 while the glass frame 15 is not open, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 5-3) etc. arranged on the back side of the game board 30. can do.

Various frame constituent members are arranged at the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14 .

Decorative devices 18a, 18b, and 18c are arranged at the upper center, right side, and left side of the glass frame 15, and are capable of emitting light according to the game state. The decoration devices 18a, 18b, and 18c house lighting members such as LEDs inside, and are presentation devices that perform light emission effects according to the game state. The lighting members disposed inside these decoration devices 18a, 18b, and 18c constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 5-4).

The decoration device 18a is a top unit that extends in the left-right direction of the gaming machine 10 at the upper part of the glass frame 15 (or the opening/closing frame) and projects obliquely upward and forward. The decoration device 18a has a substantially flat front portion 456 having various indications such as the model name. Although the decoration device 18a is fixed and does not operate in this embodiment, it is arranged so as to reduce the feeling of pressure on the player.
From the retracted initial position (normal position), it may be moved forward or moved in the vertical direction only when necessary.

The decoration device 18b is a projecting unit (front frame light emitting unit) that extends vertically on the right side of the glass frame 15 and projects forward. The decoration device 18c is a projecting projecting unit (front frame light emitting unit) that extends vertically on the left side of the glass frame 15 and projects forward. The decoration devices 18b and 18c emit light toward the player toward the center (inside) of the gaming machine 10, and the light leaks to the outside of the gaming machine 10 from a plurality of openings.

An upper speaker 19a is provided at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the bottom of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is disposed at the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and at the lower right corner of the front frame 12. These upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b are for emitting sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, etc. Note that the left and right upper speakers 19a are covered with right and left speaker decoration members 13, respectively.

An upper tray unit 20 having an upper tray 21 capable of storing game balls (game media) is attached to the lower part of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed into a box shape that is open at the top. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to the ball firing device.

The upper tray unit 20 includes a performance operation device that accepts input operations from players, a ball lending operation device that accepts input operations from players, and a decoration device 2 that performs lighting effects etc. according to the game state.
2 and.

The production operation device is an operation device including a production button 25, a cross key switch 28, and volume adjustment button switches 27e and 27f, and is located at the upper center of the upper tray unit 20 and on the left side thereof for easy operation by the player. It is provided. The production button 25 is arranged within the opening of the operation panel 26 so as to be surrounded by the operation panel 26. The operation panel 26 can reflect light by metal plating on the surface or by making the entire panel made of metal, and has, for example, a silver metallic luster. When the performance button 25 emits light, the light from the performance button 25 is reflected by the surrounding operation panel 26, and the light emission performance of the performance button 25 becomes effective.

The effect button 25 may include a built-in effect button switch 25a and a touch panel 25b provided on the surface.

The volume adjustment button switches 27e and 27f are provided on the upper left side of the operation panel 26 of the upper tray unit 20, and are used to increase or decrease (+-) the volume of the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b. The cross key switch 28 (cross key SW) is provided adjacent to the volume adjustment button switches 27e and 27f on the upper left side of the operation panel 26 of the upper tray unit 20, and adjusts, for example, the brightness of the performance LED. The cross key switch 28 may also be called a directional key switch, and may be a general type consisting of a plurality of (for example, four) switches arranged in the front, rear, left, and right directions. For example, in a predetermined state such as while waiting for a customer and/or during a game, the volume adjustment button switches 27e and 27f may be pressed to adjust the volume of the speakers 19a and 19b. A switch before or after the key switch 28 may be pressed to adjust the amount of light (brightness, luminance) of the performance LED, etc. Note that the volumes of the speakers 19a, 19b may be adjusted by pressing down the left or right switch of the cross key switch 28, without providing the volume adjustment button switches 27e, 27f.

When the player operates the performance operation device (particularly the performance button 25), a performance is performed in which the player's operation intervenes in the special figure fluctuation display game etc. displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 5-2). be able to. For example, it is possible to select a performance pattern (performance mode), or to execute a preview performance that foretells in advance the result of the variable display game corresponding to the starting memory. Incidentally, the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to a special figure variable display game.

Furthermore, the effect pattern may be changed not only while the variable display game is being executed, but also by the player operating the effect operation device while the variable display game is not being executed.

Note that the game state when the variable display game is executed consists of a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state occurs. In addition, special gaming states include, for example, a time-saving state as a specific gaming state, a state where the probability of a special result (e.g. jackpot) is high in a variable display game (variable probability state, variable probability state), jackpot state (
A special game state) and a small win game state (a small win state). In this way, the gaming machine 10 includes a plurality of gaming states with different probabilities of occurrence of special results, and the gaming control device 100 (gaming state selection means,
The setting means) can select (set) one gaming state from among the plurality of gaming states and set it as the current gaming state.

Here, the variable probability states (specific gaming states) include those that continue until the next jackpot occurs (loop type), those that continue until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number-of-time type, ST), and There is a type of lottery that continues until you win a lottery with a predetermined probability (fall lottery type).

Furthermore, whether or not to generate a variable probability state may not be determined based on the jackpot symbol random number, but instead the variable probability state may be generated whenever a jackpot occurs.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by a player when borrowing game balls, and is provided on the upper right side of the operation panel 26 of the upper tray unit 20. The ball lending operation device is the balance display section 2
7c, a ball rental button 27a, and a return button 27b. The balance display section 27c is a display area where the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed. The ball rental button 27a is a button operated by the player when borrowing game balls, and the return button 27b is used when ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. This is a button operated by the player.

The decoration device 22 houses lighting members such as LEDs inside, and is a device that performs lighting effects depending on the game state, and is provided in the upper tray unit 20. The lighting member disposed inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 5-4).

Below the glass frame 15 that includes the above-mentioned upper tray unit 20, etc., and at the bottom of the front frame 12, there is an operating handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launcher (not shown), and game balls can be stored. A lower plate unit 29 including a lower plate 23 and the like is provided. The lower tray unit 29 and the upper tray unit 20 are compatible in shape and are arranged side by side, one on top of the other in the vertical direction. By operating the upper tray operating section 27d of the upper tray unit 20, the game balls on the upper tray 21 can be caused to flow down to the lower tray 23.

The operation handle 24 is located at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the right lower speaker 19b. When the player rotates the operating handle 24, the ball firing device fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 into the game area 32 of the game board 30. The firing speed of the game ball fired from the ball firing device is set to become faster as the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launcher can change the launch force, which is the velocity (velocity) at which the game ball is launched into the game area 32, in accordance with the operation of the operating handle 24 by the player, and can be used in various launch modes with different launch forces. You can shoot game balls. The firing mode includes left-handed hitting (normal hitting) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32, and right-handed hitting in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 of the lower plate unit 29 is arranged below the upper plate unit 20 with a predetermined interval therebetween. The lower plate 23 has a ball hole that vertically passes through the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation part 23b for opening and closing the ball hole. When the player operates the opening/closing operation section 23b to open the ball ejection hole, the game balls stored in the lower tray 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball ejection hole.

In addition, on the back side of the front frame 12, there is a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices, an upper tank 448 that stores game balls supplied from a supply device (not shown) installed in the island facility, and a A payout device (payout unit) for paying out game balls that have flown down onto the upper tray 21 is arranged.

[Game board]
Next, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIG. 5-2. FIG. 5-2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 5-2, the game board 30 includes a flat game board main body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board body 30a. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball firing device into a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the direction of the game balls flowing down, and the fired game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case (front structure) 40 is attached that forms a window section that serves as a display area for a variable display game. Behind the window formed in the center case 40 is a production display device (variable display device) that displays a plurality of pieces of identification information in a variable manner (variable display).
A display device 41 is arranged. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the displayed content can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. Note that the display device 41 is not limited to one equipped with a liquid crystal display, and may be equipped with a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and each variable display area displays identification information (special symbols) and characters that produce a variable display game. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (a jackpot display, a fanfare display, an ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a game ball flowing down the game area 32.
An inlet 40a for guiding the ball into the warp passage 40e, and a stage portion 40b on which the game ball that has passed through the warp passage 40e can roll are provided. Since the stage part 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize opening 36, the game balls rolling on the stage part 40b can easily win in the starting winning opening 36.

An upper presentation unit 40c and a side presentation unit 40d are provided at the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The upper presentation unit 40c and the side presentation unit 40d constitute part of a board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 5-4) and a board presentation device 44 (see FIG. 5-4).

In the gaming area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (common symbol starting gate) 34 is provided. A gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 5-3) is provided inside the regular figure starting gate 34 to detect the game ball that has passed through the regular figure starting gate 34. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the regular figure starting gate 34, the regular figure variation display game is executed.

A general winning opening 35 is arranged in the gaming area 32 at the lower left of the center case 40, and a general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the gaming area 32 at the lower right of the center case 40. Winning of game balls into these general winning holes 35 is detected by winning hole switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 5-3) provided in the general winning holes 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, there is provided a starting winning opening (starting opening 1, first starting winning area) 36 that provides starting conditions for the special figure variable display game. Center case 40
In the gaming area 32 on the right side of the page, below the normal figure starting gate 34 is a normal variable winning device 37 (normal electric accessory, general electricity) equipped with a second starting winning opening (starting opening 2, second starting winning area). is provided. The normal variable prize winning device 37 includes a movable member (movable piece) 37b that converts into a state where game balls can easily flow in by rotating forward. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins in the starting winning hole 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, a special figure variable display game is executed as an auxiliary game. It should be noted that it is easier for a game ball to win in the starting prize opening 36 when the ball is hit to the left, and it is easier to win a game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 when the ball is hit to the right.

The movable member 37b is a so-called tongue-shaped ordinary electric accessory, and operates via the ordinary electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 5-3) when the result of the ordinary figure fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode. Then, it opens and changes to an open state (an easy winning state that is advantageous for the player) in which game balls easily flow into the normal variable winning device 37. If the movable member 37b is not in the open state (easy winning state), it will be in the closed state (not easy winning state, difficult winning state) in which it is difficult for game balls to flow into the normal variable winning device 37. In addition, in this embodiment, unlike the normal variable winning device 37, the starting prize opening 36 does not have a movable member (opening/closing member) and is always in an open state (open state). A configuration having the following is also possible.

In addition, the movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of easy-to-win states by shortening the fluctuation time of the general pattern fluctuation display game or making the winning probability of the general pattern fluctuation display game higher than usual, By making the occurrence time of the easy-to-win state longer than the easy-to-win state that occurs in the normal game state in which no game is performed, a time-saving state (general power support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific game state. Note that even in the variable probability state (excluding the latent variable state), the time saving state (general power support state) occurs overlappingly.

In the gaming area 32 to the right of the starting winning opening 36, there is an attacker that opens the lower winning opening by retracting from the front to the back side using the lower winning opening solenoid 38b (see Figure 5-3). A first special variable prize winning device 38 (special electric accessory) having an opening/closing door 38c of the same type is provided. The first special variable winning device 38 converts the big winning hole from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a gaming state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game, and By facilitating the flow of game balls into the jackpot, a predetermined gaming value (for example, the number of time reductions/variable probability after winning the prize ball or the jackpot) is given to the player. In addition, in the lower large winning hole, a lower large winning hole switch 38a (count switch) is disposed as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning hole. It should be noted that the first special variable winning device 38 makes it easier for game balls to win when the ball is hit to the right.

In the gaming area 32 above the normal variable winning device 37, there is an opening/closing door 39c that opens the top prize opening by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which it falls to the right by the top prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 5-3). A second special variable prize winning device 39 is provided. The second special variable winning device 39 converts the grand prize opening from a closed state (a closed state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game, By facilitating the flow of game balls into the jackpot, a predetermined gaming value (for example, the number of time reductions/variable probability after winning the prize ball or the jackpot) is given to the player. In addition, in the big winning a prize opening, the upper big winning a prize opening switch 39a (count switch) (refer FIG. 5-3) is arrange|positioned as a detection means to detect the game ball which entered the said big winning a prize opening. It should be noted that the second special variable winning device 39 makes it easier for game balls to win when the ball is hit to the right.

Inside the second special variable winning device 39, a specific area 72 (so-called V winning hole) is provided. A jackpot is determined when a game ball enters a specific area 72 (V winning hole) after the opening/closing door 39c is opened due to a small hit. The specific area 72 may be opened for a long time only during a small hit so that game balls can easily pass through. In addition, the game control device 100 is
Passage of the game ball to the specific area 72 (V winning) can be detected via a sensor (specific area switch 72a to be described later) etc., and when the V winning is detected, it is determined that the game will move to the jackpot state after the small winning ends, and Information (such as a specific area passing command) indicating that there is a V winning prize is transmitted to the production control device 300, which will be described later. Then, the performance control device 300 can notify the V winning prize on the display device 41 or the like.

That is, in this embodiment, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixing machine (1+2 type machine). In this embodiment, by opening the second special variable winning device 39 with a small hit,
A game ball wins a V prize in the specific area 72 (V winning hole) in the second special variable winning device 39, and a jackpot occurs.

When a game ball wins in the general winning hole 35, the starting winning hole 36, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38, 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 5-3) controls the winning hole. The number of prize balls according to the type of winning hole is discharged from the payout device to the upper tray 21. Further, in the lower gaming area 32, there is provided an exit opening 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a winning opening or the like. In addition, in the general winning hole 35, starting winning hole 36, normal variable winning device 37, special variable winning device 38, 39 and their vicinity, there are LEDs that can emit light when a game ball wins (a board decoration device described below). 46) are arranged.

In addition, outside the gaming area 32 and at the lower right corner of the game board main body 30a, special pattern variation display games (special pattern 1 variation display game, special pattern 2 variation display game) and regular pattern variation display games are executed. A batch display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display sections 51 to 60 that are composed of LED lamps (light emitting section, light emitting member) and display information such as the current gaming status.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure variation display section 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) for the variable display game, which is composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp), etc. The display section 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), the variable display section 53 for the normal figure variable display game (normal figure indicator, lamps D8, D10, D18), and the start (on hold) of each variable display game. Memory display unit for informing the number of stored numbers (special drawing 1 holding display 54, special drawing 2 holding display 55, general drawing holding display 56)
) and has. The special figure 1 reservation display 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12.
The special figure 2 reservation display 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. General figure hold display 56
is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a first game state display section 57 (a first game state indicator, a lamp) that informs that the player is playing right-handed (when he should play right-handed) or left-handed (normally playing). D7),
When the time saving state occurs, the second gaming state display section 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D17) lights up to notify the occurrence of the time saving state, and when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the jackpot probability state changes to the high probability state. The third game state display section 59 (third game state display, probability state display section, lamp D9) displays the number of rounds at the time of jackpot (the number of times the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are opened and closed). A round display section 60 (lamps D3 to D6) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which identification information (for example, the center segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (flashing). In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such segment type display parts.
It may be composed of an aggregate of multiple LEDs, and when performing a variable display, all LEDs provided as an indicator can be turned on or off (all LEDs blink at the same time), or cycled on (one of them). The light may be turned on and off in a predetermined order at predetermined intervals starting from one LED, or may be turned on and off (flashing) or cycled by a predetermined number of LEDs among a plurality of LEDs. Also on the regular figure display 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (flashing) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. In addition, the general map display 53 and the special map 1 display 5
1. Like the special figure 2 display 52, it can be configured as appropriate.

The lamp display device 75 includes lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) that perform a variable display (blinking) that repeatedly lights up and turns off as symbols (fourth special symbol, fourth symbol described later), and each special symbol variation. It has lamp display sections 3 to 6 (LEDs) for informing the number of stored games (starting (on hold)) to be displayed. Note that the lamp display device 75 is controlled by a production control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display units 1 and 2 blink at a predetermined blinking cycle (for example, 200 msec (milliseconds)) as a variable display. That is, switching between turning off and turning on the lamp display sections 1 and 2 is performed in a period that is one half of the blinking period (for example, 100 msec). While the fluctuation time of the variable display on the special figure 1 display 51, special figure 2 display 52, and general figure display 53 of the batch display device 50 is measured by the game control device 100, the lamp of the lamp display device 75 The fluctuation time of the display units 1 and 2 is measured by a production control device 300 (described later).

The lamp display parts 3 and 4 (special figure 1 holding LED 1, special drawing 1 holding LED 2) display the number of special drawings 1 holding (the number of first start memory) by the combination of the off state, the lighting state, and the blinking state. Similarly, the lamp display units 5 and 6 (special map 2 holding LED 1, special drawing 2 holding LED 2) display the number of special drawings 2 holding (second starting memory number) depending on the combination of off state, lighting state, and blinking state. do. The lamp display units 3 to 6 stop displaying the pending number when a jackpot occurs, but in cases other than the jackpot state (including when a reach described later is occurring on the display device 41), the display of the pending number is stopped. conduct.

Next, details of the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the regular pattern fluctuation display game, and the special pattern fluctuation display game will be explained.

In the game machine 10, a game is played by firing a game ball toward the game area 32 from a ball firing device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing its rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. placed at various places in the game area 32, and passes through the normal figure starting gate 34, the general prize opening 35, and the starting prize opening. 36, enter a prize or ball into the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, 39, or use the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32
and is discharged from the gaming area 32. When game balls win in the general winning hole 35, starting winning hole 36, normal variable winning device 37, or special variable winning device 38, 39, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the winning hole that won the prize enters the payout device. The liquid is discharged to the upper tray 21 through the medium.

The regular figure starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 5-3) that detects the game ball that has passed through the regular figure starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the regular figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the regular figure fluctuation display game is executed based on the judgment result of the random number value for hit determination extracted at this time.

A situation in which the general pattern fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, if the general pattern fluctuation display game is already being played and the relevant general pattern fluctuation display game has not finished, or if the result of the general pattern fluctuation display game is a win and it is normal. When the variable prize winning device 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the general pattern starting gate 34, if the basic pattern starting memory number (normal pattern pending number) is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added ( +1).

The normal figure starting memory (normal figure hold) stores a random value for determining a hit for determining the hit or miss of the general figure fluctuation display game, and when this random value for determining a hit matches the judgment value, When the general figure fluctuation display game becomes a hit, a specific result pattern (specific result) is derived.

The ordinary figure fluctuation display game is executed on the ordinary figure display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The ordinary figure indicator 53 is composed of an LED that indicates a hit when lit as ordinary identification information (ordinary figure) and indicates a miss when it is turned off. By blinking this LED, it is possible to detect fluctuations in the ordinary identification information. After a predetermined variable display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

If the random figure extracted at the time of passing through the ordinary figure starting gate 34 is a winning value, the ordinary symbol (ordinary figure) displayed on the ordinary figure display 53 stops in a winning state and becomes a winning state. At this time, by driving the normal solenoid 37c (see FIG. 5-3), the movable member 37b is changed to the open state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds x 2 times), and the normal variable prize winning device 37 is activated. Winning game balls is allowed.

Winning of the game ball to the starting prize opening 36 and winning to the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see Figure 5-3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see Figure 5-3). . The game ball that won the starting winning slot 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that wins the normal variable winning device 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 1 variable display game. It is detected as the starting winning ball of the variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit number.

At the time of detecting the starting prize ball of the special figure fluctuation display game, the jackpot random number, the jackpot symbol random number, each fluctuation pattern random number, etc. are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (part of the RAM) of the game control device 100 as special figure starting winning memory up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times at most). The number of stored special drawing starting winnings is displayed on the special drawing 1 holding display 54 and special drawing 2 holding display 55 for informing the starting winning number of the batch display device 50, and also on the display device 4.
It is also displayed on the display screen of 1.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the starting prize opening 36 or the first starting memory (special figure 1 starting memory, special figure 1 pending). . In addition, the game control device 100 controls the special pattern 2 variable display game on the special pattern 2 display 52 based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37 or the second starting memory (special pattern 2 starting memory, special pattern 2 pending). Execute.

In the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game), identification information ( This is done by displaying a predetermined result mode in a fixed manner after variably displaying special symbols (special symbols, special symbols).

In addition, in the display device 41, a decorative special figure variable display game is executed in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to each special figure variable display game.

In the decorative special symbol variable display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbols (identification information) consisting of the numbers and the like described above are displayed on the left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ), the fluctuating symbols are sequentially stopped after a predetermined period of time, and the result of the special symbol fluctuating display game is displayed. Furthermore, the display device 41 displays various effects such as the appearance of characters to increase interest. Furthermore, in the decorative special symbol variable display game, as another decorative special symbol (identification information), a fourth special symbol ( 4th symbol) changes. The variable display on the lamp display units 1 and 2 stops after a predetermined period of time from the start, with the light turned off in the case of a loss, and with the light turned on in the case of a jackpot or small win.

If a game ball enters the starting winning hole 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (if the jackpot random number at the time of winning detection is the jackpot value), as a result of the special figure variable display game. A specific result pattern (special result pattern) is derived depending on the displayed symbol, and a jackpot state (
special game state). Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state where numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

At this time, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 change the big winning hole from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the big winning hole solenoids 38b and 39b (see Figure 5-3). converted. That is, the big prize opening provided in the special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 is wide open for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this time the player has the privilege of being able to win many game balls. Granted.

When a game ball enters the starting winning hole 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 at a predetermined timing (when the jackpot random value at the time of winning detection is a small winning value), the result of the special figure variable display game A specific result mode (small hit result mode) is derived based on the displayed symbol, resulting in a small win state. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a small hit result mode. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used to determine the small hit, but the small win value (small hit judgment value) is different from the jackpot value (jackpot judgment value).

At this time, the special variable winning device 38, 39 converts the big winning hole from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined short time by energizing the big winning hole solenoids 38b, 39b (see FIG. 5-3). In addition, the total opening time of the big winning opening is shorter in the small winning state (small winning gaming state) than in the jackpot state (special gaming state), so in the small winning state the player can win more games than in the jackpot state. The value (number of pitches acquired) is low. In addition, in both the small winning state and the jackpot state, the big winning opening is in the open state, but the jackpot state may be called the first special gaming state, and the small winning state may be called the second special gaming state. For simplicity, in this embodiment, only the special variable winning device 39 (upper large prize opening) is converted to the open state in the small winning state, and in the jackpot state (including the jackpot state due to the V winning during the small winning). A configuration in which only the special variable winning device 38 (lower major winning opening) is converted to the open state will be described.

Here, the difference between a big hit and a small hit will be explained.

A jackpot is a special result that involves the operation of a conditional device, and a small hit is a specific result that does not involve the operation of a conditional device. The condition device is activated when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol fluctuation display game (stop display of the jackpot symbol).When the condition device is activated, for example, a jackpot condition occurs and a special electric accessory is activated. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning devices 38 and 39 is set. Furthermore, the activation of the conditional device means that the specific area 72
It may also mean that the game ball passed through (V winning). When the conditional device is not activated, it means that the above-mentioned specific flag is not set, as in the case of simply winning a small lottery, for example. However, as will be described later in this embodiment, if there is a V win during the small winning state, the conditional device will be activated. Note that the "condition device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. In addition, the “conditional device” is
This term is commonly used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and is also used herein with the same meaning. ing.

Specifically, in the case of a jackpot, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the jackpot flag, whereas in the case of a small hit, the special variable winning device is opened by setting the small winning flag. will be released.

In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or may be configured as the same display, but each special figure fluctuation display game is not executed at the same time. It is set as follows. In addition, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a starting memory of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When it becomes possible to execute the figure variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (special figure 2 pending priority extinguishment, special figure 2 priority variation).

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on separate display devices or separate display areas, or they may be executed on the same display. It may also be executed on the device or display area. In this case, the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may not be executed at the same time.

In addition, in the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the special figure variable display game.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36
a. The starting opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the big winning opening switches 38a and 39a in the normal variable winning device 37 are equipped with coils for magnetic detection, and when a metal comes close to the coil, a magnetic field is generated. Non-contact magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used that detect game balls using changing phenomena. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the gaming machine 10 and the main body frame open detection switch 64 (front frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (gaming frame) 12 etc. Microswitches with standard contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 5-3 is a block diagram of the gaming control system of the gaming machine 10. The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that centrally controls the game, and is a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110, the input section 120, and the output section 130; Consists of etc.

The CPU section 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that includes an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator and generates a reference clock for a CPU operating clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply unit 400 includes a normal power supply section 410 that includes an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V or DC 5V from a DC 32V voltage, and the like. , gaming microcomputer 11
It has a backup power supply section 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 1 in the event of a power outage, and a power outage monitoring circuit, and provides control signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power outage. The control signal generating section 430 generates and outputs a control signal generating section 430 and the like.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100,
The backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 may be configured to be provided on a separate board or integrated with the gaming control device 100, that is, on the main board. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when changing models, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 43 are installed on a power supply device 400 or a board separate from the main board, as in the embodiment.
By providing 0, it is possible to exclude it from replacement and reduce costs.

The backup power supply section 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source is the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is maintained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops to 17V or less, detects the occurrence of a power outage, changes the power outage monitoring signal, and generates a reset signal after a predetermined time. Output. Also, when the power is turned on or when a power failure is recovered, a reset signal is output after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the gaming control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. RAM
When the initialization switch 112 is pressed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated.
Based on this, the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RA in the payout control device 200
A process of forcibly initializing the information stored in M is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is read from the gaming microcontroller 1.
11 is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

Further, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 153. The setting key switch 153 is turned on by the operator's rotation operation, etc. to set the game conditions (game).
Make it possible to change the probability setting value (setting value) according to the setting related to the setting. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value change switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operator's operation. In this embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting the winning probability such as the jackpot probability or the small winning probability, but other game conditions (such as effects) other than the probability are also changed according to the probability setting value. It is possible. For example, the higher the probability setting value is, the higher the winning probability may be. The setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 constitute a setting changing means (setting changing device, setting means) that can change settings related to gaming conditions (probability setting values).
Note that another switch instead of the RAM initialization switch 112 may also serve as the setting value change switch, or a unique setting value change switch may be provided exclusively.

The setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the game machine 10, so that they are placed in a position where they cannot be operated (a position where they cannot be accessed) unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. be done. That is, general players cannot access and operate the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the gaming machine 10 is powered on (recovery from power outage, power restored), the gaming machine 10 sets the probability setting value according to the on/off state of the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to move to various states such as a setting variable state (setting change state, setting possible state, setting change mode) that can be changed (configurable), and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) that allows you to check the probability setting value. .

In this embodiment, the probability setting value is defined in six stages, for example, and probability setting value 1 (setting 1
), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5), and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). Generally, setting 1 is the most disadvantageous setting for the player, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting change process, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is pressed by the operator, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area changes to the setting value 0 (setting 1, probability setting value 1).
→ Setting value 1 (Setting 2, Probability setting value 2) → Setting value 2 (Setting 3, Probability setting value 3) → Setting value 3 (
Setting 4, probability setting 4) → Setting 4 (setting 5, probability setting 5) → Setting 5 (setting 6, probability setting 6) → Setting 0 (setting 1) → Setting 1 (setting 2) → It will be changed as follows. In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a setting value change switch. For convenience of explanation, work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to probability setting values 1 to 6 respectively during the setting change state (setting change mode), but the working setting values and probability setting values are the same. They may be treated as the same by aligning them within a numerical range (ie, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (setting the work setting value and the probability setting value to the same value).

Note that the probability setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 153 to a predetermined position instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value change switch). Further, the probability setting value is not limited to six levels. The display probability setting value corresponding to the selected working setting value of 0 to 5 is displayed by a performance display device 152 that is, for example, a 4-digit, 7-segment type (8-segment type if dot Dp is included) display. etc. will be displayed. Also, the front of the gaming machine (
For example, information regarding setting values such as display probability setting values (for example, a display in which probability setting values 1 to 6 can be read) may be displayed on the collective display device 50). In addition, on the front of the gaming machine (for example, the all-in-one display device 50), display probability setting values, etc. are displayed not only during the setting variable state or setting confirmation state, but also during the execution of game control (during execution of game processing described later). Information regarding setting values may also be displayed.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a.
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b and an RA that can be read and written at any time.
M (random access memory) 111c is provided.

The ROM 111b non-volatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control. The RAM 111c is used as a work area for the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control, and stores information related to games (gaming information), and retains the stored information even if a power outage occurs. It becomes a storage storage means that can hold data. An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the performance, the presence or absence of a ready-to-reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table used by the CPU 111a to determine a fluctuation pattern by referring to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored in the starting memory. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a loss fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second-half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as a second-half fluctuation group table and second-half fluctuation pattern selection table), and tables for determining the fluctuation pattern before reaching the reach state. It includes tables (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining first half variation patterns, which are patterns.

Here, reach (ready-to-reach state) refers to a display device that has a display state that can change, and that display device derives and displays multiple display results at different times, and that the multiple display results are predetermined. A gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous to the player when a special result mode occurs (special gaming state)
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed,
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device has progressed to the stage before the display results are derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode have not been met. This refers to the display mode that does not exist. For example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result aspect is complete (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Furthermore, the reach state is the display state at the point when the display control of the display device has progressed to the stage before the display results are derived and displayed, and is determined before the display results are derived and displayed. A display state in which at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, a decorative special figure variable display game displayed on a display device in response to a special figure variable display game may vary a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the variable display is to be stopped in the left, right, and middle order to display the result mode, the left and right variable display areas will display a state where the conditions for the special result mode are met (for example, The state in which the variable display stops with the same identification information is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas meet the conditions for the special result mode (for example, the same identification information (However, special result modes are excluded) may be set as a ready-to-win state, and the remaining variable display area may be displayed in a variable manner from the ready-to-reach state.

The reach state includes multiple reach performances, and the systems (types) of reach performances with different possibilities (different expectations) of deriving a special result mode (jackpot mode) are normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP
2 Reach), Special 3 Reach (SP3 Reach), and Premier Reach.
The expectation level (expected value) of the jackpot increases in the following order: No reach < Normal reach < Special 1 reach < Special 2 reach < Special 3 reach < Premier reach. Moreover, the reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in the special symbol variable display game (when it becomes a jackpot). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when the result is a loss). Therefore, a state in which a ready-to-win state occurs is a state in which there is a high possibility of a jackpot compared to a case in which a ready-to-reach state does not occur.

In addition, the expectation level of a performance (notice) indicates the probability of a jackpot if that performance is selected, and the selection rate of that performance when it is a jackpot and the selection rate of that performance when it is not a jackpot (when it is a loss). It can be calculated based on selection rate, etc.

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the performance control device 300, generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and display device, and operates the game machine. Controls the entire 10. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in the special figure fluctuation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a small hit symbol for determining a small win symbol. A symbol random number, a symbol random number per support to determine the time-saving symbol (stop symbol per support), which will be described later.
Random number generation circuit and oscillation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers etc. for determining variation patterns in special figure variation display games (including execution time of variation display games in various reach and non-reach variation displays) CPU1 based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from 113
It is provided with a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to 11a and a clock that provides the update timing of the random number generation circuit.

In addition, the CPU 111a uses the ROM 111b in processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game.
Any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the memory is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111a stores the game results (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state, and the number of starting memories. Based on the above, one of the variation pattern tables is selected and acquired from among the plurality of variation pattern tables. Here, CPU11
1a constitutes a fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

The payout control device 200 is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with the prize ball payout command (command and data) from the game control device 100, and dispenses the prize balls. Performs control for dispensing. Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit to pay out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the regular figure starting gate 34, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the first starting prize opening 36, and It is connected to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the 2 starting winning opening 37 (normal variable winning device), the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35, and the big winning opening switches 38a and 39a of the special variable winning opening 38 and 39, and these The high level supplied from the switch is 1
An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal of 1V and a low level of 7V and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V to 5V.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to a specific area switch 72a, a remaining ball outlet switch 73, and an out ball detection switch 74. Specific area switch 7
2a detects passage of the game ball (V winning hole) to the specific area 72 (V winning hole). The remaining ball discharge port switch 73 detects the game balls that have passed through the remaining ball discharge port for discharging the game balls from the special variable winning devices 38 and 39. The out ball detection switch 74 detects all the game balls that have been fired into the game area and finished the game (that is, all the game balls that have passed through the winning opening or the out opening 30b).

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126, and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the gate switch 34a, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switch 38a,
The detection signal 39a is input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , a detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality in a sensor or switch is detected are input to the second input port 123 .

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, detection signals from the specific area switch 72a, remaining ball outlet switch 73, and out ball detection switch 74 are input to the fourth input port 126.

The second input port 123 also receives a detection signal from a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 etc. of the gaming machine 10, and a detection signal for detecting a glass frame opening provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the gaming machine 10. A vibration sensor 6 that detects a switch 63, a signal from a main body frame open detection switch 64 (front frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), etc., and vibrations of the gaming machine 10.
A signal from 5 is input.

Further, the second input port 123 takes in a setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 153 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the gaming control device 100 to a test shooting test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12V is supplied to the proximity I/F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

The data held by the third input port 124 is transmitted to the enable signal CE by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to valid level). The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122, which will be described later.

The input unit 120 also includes a frame radio wave fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow signal. Overflow switch signal, touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, RAM initialization switch 1
A first input port 122 is provided for taking in signals from the game computer 12 and supplying them to the gaming microcomputer 111 via a data bus 140. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (that it is full). The frame radio wave fraud signal is a signal that is output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame) detecting radio waves, and the payout busy signal indicates whether the payout control device 200 is in a state where it can accept commands. This is a signal indicating whether or not.

In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111, etc., and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has the function of removing noise from.
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken in to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In other words, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and is also input directly to the output section 13.
0 ports. In addition, by outputting the reset signal RST directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the sight-fire test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the sight-fire test device is turned off. It is configured as follows.

Further, the configuration may be such that the reset signal RST can be output to the sight test equipment via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RST is applied to each port 122, 123 of the input section 120.
, 124, 126. Just before the reset signal RST is input, the gaming microcomputer 1
11 to each port of the output unit 130 must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because it is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the performance control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that this is one-way communication in which signals cannot be input from the production control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to a data bus 140 and sends data to inform a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) of special symbol information of a variable display game, a signal indicating a jackpot probability state, etc. via a relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine that is an actual machine (mass-produced and sold product) installed in a game parlor. Note that a detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a starting port switch, outputted from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be directly supplied to the test firing test device are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, so that, for example, when the gaming machine An error signal indicating an uncontrollable state is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

Note that the relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the sight test equipment, and a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal without going through the buffer. There is. The gaming microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
A chip enable signal CE outputted from 1 is also supplied, and signals of ports selectively controlled by the signal CE are supplied to the sight test equipment.

The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (normal electric solenoid) 37c that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the normal variable winning device 37, and a lower large winning opening solenoid 38b (large winning opening) that opens the first special variable winning device 38. Solenoid 1), upper large winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid 2) that opens the second special variable winning device 39, and a third valve that outputs opening/closing data of the lever solenoid 72b that operates the lever and opens the specific area 72. Two output ports 134 are provided.

Further, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting on/off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50; Turn on/off the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting off data.

The output unit 130 also includes a sixth output port 141 for outputting on/off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the performance display device 152; A seventh output port 142 is provided for outputting on/off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

The output unit 130 also outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to an external information terminal 71.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal 71 is equipped with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device installed in a game parlor (an information collection terminal, a game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and can transmit information regarding the game machine 10 to the outside. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 includes a general voltage solenoid 37 outputted from the second output port 134.
The first driver (drive circuit) 138a receives the opening/closing data signals of the big prize opening solenoids 38b, 39b, etc. and generates and outputs the solenoid drive signal, and the current supply for the collective display device 50 is output from the third output port 135. A second driver 138b outputs an on/off drive signal for the side segment line, and a third driver outputs an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136. 138c, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal to be supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137 to the external information terminal 71.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 includes a performance display device 152 output from the sixth output port 141.
The performance display segment driver 150a outputs an on/off drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the performance display device 152, which outputs an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current draw side of the performance display device 152 output from the seventh output port 142. A performance display digit driver 150b for output is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that it can drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. In addition, the batch display device 50
DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line. The third driver 138c that drives the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data with a current, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal via the digit line, thereby creating a collective display device. At 50, a power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence by a dynamic driving method and the LEDs are turned on. The performance display segment driver 150a that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the performance display digit driver 150b that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal via the digit line. In the performance display device 152, a power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence by a dynamic driving method and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with DC 12V to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134,
The first driver 138a and the like may be provided on the output section 130 of the gaming control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. Photo coupler 13
Reference numeral 9 is configured to enable mutual communication between the gaming microcomputer 111 and the inspection device 500 so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication. In addition, since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 like a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, 124, and 126 are not provided. do not have.

In this embodiment, the performance display device 152 includes a plurality of (four) 7-segment type (dot Dp
It consists of an 8-segment type display (LED lamp), and a performance display driver 1.
Although 50a and 150b are LED drivers, they are not limited to this.

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board),
It may also be provided at other locations. For example, the performance display device 152 can display a display probability setting value, an accessory ratio, a ball output rate, and the number of balls ejected.

Here, the number of ejected balls is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32 (also called the number of out balls)
This is the total of the number of game balls that passed through the winning opening (number of winnings) and the number of gaming balls that passed through the out opening 30b. The number of ejected balls is counted by the signal of the out ball detection switch 74, etc.
It can be obtained by In this embodiment, the winning openings include a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), and a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2).
), and special variable winning devices 38 and 39 (big winning opening).

The ball release rate is the ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of ejected balls (or the number of launched balls introduced into the game area 32), and is calculated by (number of balls acquired ÷ number of ejected balls) x 100 (%). Calculated. That is, the ball output rate is the number of balls acquired (total number of prize balls) per 100 balls ejected.

For example, the accessory ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by entering the winning slot in a predetermined period (for example, from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present), during the jackpot state. It is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (number of balls acquired by accessory) obtained by entering the big prize opening (= so-called continuous prize winning ratio). In addition, the accessory ratio may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (in the jackpot state and the small win state) obtained by entering the big winning hole out of the total number of winning balls (= big winning hole ratio). Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the big winning hole and the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning hole) (= commonly used so-called accessory ratio (total accessory ratio) ) is also fine.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 also has the function of a safety device. A safety device is a safety device that is activated when operating conditions (predetermined conditions) based on the number of safe balls and the number of ejected balls are established. This is a game stopping means (stopping means) that can generate a game stopping state (game impossible state, game prohibited state) in which games such as the above games cannot be executed. In the game stop state, a new special symbol fluctuation display game and a new regular symbol fluctuation display game cannot be started. With the safety device, it is possible to take appropriate measures against fraud in cases where the number of safe balls is abnormally high due to fraud, and it is also possible to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game.

In this embodiment, the safety device is software (program) in the gaming control device 100.
This is a function realized by , and is also called a complete function (or ending function, abort function). Of course, the safety device may be provided as hardware such as an electric circuit or a circuit board.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operating conditions of the safety device are (1) the number of differential balls indicating the difference between the number of safe balls and the number of ejected balls has reached the differential ball reference value (predetermined value), and (2) ) It is neither a big hit nor a small hit. The difference number of balls is the number of safe balls minus the number of ejected balls (number of difference balls = number of safe balls - number of ejected balls). In this way, the operating conditions for the safety device are two-stage conditions (1).
It consists of (2). Other operating conditions may be used; for example, condition (1) may be such that the number of safe pitches reaches a predetermined value. Furthermore, the condition (2) may be such that the special variable winning device is not operating or the big winning opening is not open.

In this embodiment, the number of safe balls is the total number of prize balls (number of acquired balls, balls put out) determined to be paid out in a predetermined period. If there is an error in the payout of prize balls (game balls), the total number of prize balls determined to be paid out is equal to the total number of prize balls actually paid out to the upper tray 21 via the payout device. However, the total number of prize balls actually paid out may be measured with a detection switch or the like and used as the safe number of balls. Further, the number of ejected balls (number of out balls) is the number of game balls ejected from the game area 32, and can be counted by counting the signal from the out ball detection switch 74.

Note that the number of fired balls, which is the number of fired balls launched and introduced into the game area 32, may be used instead of the number of ejected balls, and the difference number of balls may be the number of safe balls minus the number of fired balls. The number of game balls fired and the number of ejected balls can be collectively referred to as the number of balls used (difference number of balls = number of safe balls - number of balls used). The number of balls fired excludes foul balls that were fired by the ball launcher but did not reach the game area 32, and the difference number of balls is subtracted by -1 when one game ball is fired by the ball launcher, If one ball is produced, +1 will be added. A detection switch (detection sensor) for counting the number of fired balls may be provided at the entrance of the game balls to the game area 32, that is, near the upper end of the guide path for the fired game balls on the game board 30.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the production control device 300 (subboard) will be explained using FIG. 5-4. FIG. 5-4 is a block diagram of the performance control system of the gaming machine 10.

The production control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, uses an amusement chip (IC).
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying video on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , a sound source LSI 314 that controls sound output in order to reproduce various melodies, sound effects, etc. from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It is equipped with

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of ROM (Programmable Read Only Memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe memory that can retain memory contents even when power is not supplied during a power outage.
The RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.). Note that a RAM providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines display content, instructs the VDP 312 to output video content, and controls the sound source LSI 314.
It performs processing such as instructing the playback of sounds, lighting decorative lamps, controlling the drive of motors and solenoids, and managing performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 that stores character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read out from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYN is sent from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 for synchronizing the image on the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30.
C. A synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
The main control microcomputer 311 receives interrupt signals INT0 to INT0 to notify processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait signal to indicate that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal WAIT and the like are also input.

The production control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 using the LVDS (low amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the audio source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. Also, an interrupt signal INT is sent from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
is now entered. The production control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is outputted from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the production control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives commands transmitted from the game control device 100. Command I/F3
31, receive the decoration special figure reservation number command, decoration special figure command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 as a production control command signal (production command). . The gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 is DC5
Since the main control microcomputer 311 of the production control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

The production control device 300 also includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18, etc.) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided therein, and a game board 3
0 (including the center case 40)
A board performance movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling movable accessories (such as movable accessories that enhance the performance effect in cooperation with the performance display). Note that the board decoration device 46 includes the above-mentioned lamp display device 7.
5 may be included.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340. Note that a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the production button 25, a cross key switch 28, a volume adjustment Button switches 27e, 27f, performance accessories switch 47 (performance motor switch) that detects the initial position of the motor in the board performance device 44, etc.
It has a function of detecting the on/off state of and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311,
A switch input circuit 336 is provided that detects the state of a volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

The normal power supply section 410 of the power supply device 400 is the production control device 300 having the above-described configuration.
In order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by it, 32V DC to drive the motor and solenoids, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, 12V DC to drive the motor and LEDs, DC5 which becomes the power supply voltage of command I/F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, LED, and speaker.

Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, the DC- A DC converter is provided in the production control device 300. In addition, DC-
The DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. In addition, in the form of output from the main control microcomputer 311, VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), sound source LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the performance control device 300 includes a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
When N45 is connected and the production control device 300 is powered on, the cooling FAN 45 is driven.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be explained. Game control device 1
The CPU 111a of the gaming microcomputer 111 of No. 00 extracts a random value for determining the hit of a common figure based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the gate switch 34a provided in the common figure starting gate 34, and stores it in the ROM 111b. It compares it with the judgment value given and judges whether the game is successful or not.

Then, a common symbol variation display game is displayed on the common symbol display 53, in which the identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stopped. When the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the ordinary figure display 53, the general electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is held for a predetermined period of time (e.g. , 3 seconds x 2 times) The opening control is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes conversion control execution means that performs conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a loss, control is performed to display the result pattern of the loss on the normal pattern display 53.

In addition, the starting prize (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable display game is determined based on the starting memory. The random number value is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111b to judge whether the special figure 1 variable display game is a hit or a miss.

In addition, a starting memory is stored based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37, and based on the starting memory, a random number value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game is stored. is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether the special figure 2 variable display game is a hit or a miss.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (performance control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game to the production control device 300. Then, a special figure variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, in which the identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stopped. That is, the game control device 100 controls the starting winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 3) of the game ball flowing down the gaming area 32.
7) constitutes a game control means that controls the progress of the variable display game based on winnings.

In addition, the production control device 300 displays a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Furthermore, the performance control device 300 performs processing such as setting the performance state, outputting sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs, based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the performance control device 300 constitutes a performance control means that controls the performance related to games (variable display games, etc.).

Then, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a win, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and generates a special game state. let In the process of generating a special gaming state, the CPU 111a
For example, the opening/closing doors 38c, 39c of the special variable winning devices 38, 39 are opened by the big winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, and control is performed to enable the game balls to flow into the big winning opening.

Then, either a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) enter the grand prize opening, or a predetermined opening time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses after the opening of the grand prize opening. One round (R) is defined as opening the big prize opening until the above condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15, 11, or 2 times) (cycle game) I do. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a big winning opening/closing control means that controls opening/closing of the big winning opening when the stop result mode becomes a special result mode. Moreover, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a loss, control is performed to display the result mode of the loss on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result aspect of the special symbol fluctuation display game. High probability state (definite variable state) is
The probability of a winning result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than the normal probability state. In addition, even if a high probability state is achieved based on the result of either the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game Both become high probability states.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result aspect of the special symbol fluctuation display game. In the time saving state, the normal variable winning device 37 may be controlled to be in the time saving operation state, and the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time may be controlled to be in a time saving operating state. Since the open time is controlled to be substantially longer, it becomes a general power support state. In addition, even in high probability states (normal variable probability states) other than the latent probability variable state, power supply support is executed by redundantly switching to the time saving state.

In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time (special figure variation time) of the special figure variation display game can also be shortened than usual, and the time shortening variation of the special figure variation display game can also be executed.

In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal variable winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal power is opened) is greater than the first number of times it is opened (for example, two times) for one winning result of the general figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second number of openings to (for example, 4 times). In addition, in the time saving state, the probability of a winning result in the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability, normal pattern winning probability) is set to a high probability that is higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state. is possible.

In the short time state, the normal variable prize winning device 37 is brought into the open state by changing one or more of the normal figure fluctuation time, the normal figure stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power open time, and the common figure probability. Allow more time to convert than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable prize winning device 37 than in the normal game state in which no special games are played, and the number of executions of the special figure variable display game per unit time is higher than in the normal game state. Can be increased. Also,
It is also possible to set multiple types of time-saving states in which different things are changed. Further, the movable member 37b may be set not to be opened in the normal operating state (the normal figure probability is 0). Furthermore, when a win occurs, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities for the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
As mentioned above, the RAM initialization switch 112 and setting key switch 153 when the power is turned on
It shifts to four states (modes) depending on the on/off state of.

If the RAM initialization switch 112 and setting key switch 153 are turned on when the power is turned on, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting possible) in which the probability setting value (setting value) can be changed (settable) status, setting change mode) (see steps X30 to X39 in Figure 5-6 and Figure 5-17).

Next, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 153 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off, a transition is made to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (Fig. (See Steps X34 to X39 of 5-6 and Figure 5-17).

Furthermore, when the power is turned on, if the setting key switch 153 is off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is on, the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode) is entered, and the RAM initialization process (RAM clear mode) is entered. Processing) is executed and the RAM 111c is initialized (see steps X45 to X47 in FIG. 5-6).

When the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off when the power is turned on, the device shifts to a normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode) and is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
Control of a gaming machine that plays such a game will be explained below. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be explained. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main processing shown in FIGS. 5-5, 5-6, and 5-7, and the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 5-11, which is performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec). It consists of

[Main processing (gaming control device)]
First, the main processing will be explained. 5-5, FIG. 5-6, and FIG. 5-7 are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing by the gaming control device 100. The main processing starts when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 5-5, when the game control device 100 starts the main process, it first executes a process to prohibit interrupts (step X1). Further, stack pointer setting processing is executed to set a stack pointer which is the start address of the area where the values of registers and the like are saved when an interrupt occurs (step X2).

Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (step X4). For example, if the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a signal to stop firing and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the firing of game balls from the ball firing device is prohibited. ing. After that, the gaming control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X6).
That is, signals from the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Furthermore, the gaming control device 100 sets a power-on delay timer (step X7).
. By setting a predetermined initial value to the power-on delay timer, the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 2
A standby time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting until the program of 00 or the production control device 300 is started normally. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the gaming control device 100 starts up first and sends a command to the sub-control device before the sub-control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) starts up, the sub-control device can avoid missing commands. That is, when the game control device 100 turns on the power, there is a predetermined delay for starting the main control means (the game control device 100) and waiting for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the performance control device 300, etc.). It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

Furthermore, the power-on delay timer measures time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (such as a RAM area or register that is not subject to validity determination). Thereby, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Note that by reading the states of the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operations of the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 153 and RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the standby time has elapsed, the setting key switch 153 and RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated or the power turned on after the standby time has elapsed. It is necessary to continue operating the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 until the waiting time elapses. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, you can save the setting key switch 153 and RAM initialization switch 112 that were performed when the power was turned on without having to perform such troublesome operations.
It is possible to prevent a situation where an operation is not accepted.

When the power-on delay timer is set (step
8-X10).

When the power outage monitoring process is started, the gaming control device 100 first determines whether a power outage has occurred by reading the power outage monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and data bus. (Step X8). If a power outage has occurred (step X8;
Y), wait until the power to the gaming machine is shut off.

If a power outage has not occurred (step X8; N), the gaming control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (step Step X10). If the timer value is not 0 (step X10; N), that is,
If the standby time has not ended, the process returns to step X8.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power outage monitoring means that monitors the occurrence of a power outage during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power outage that occurs during a period in which the startup of the game control device 100 serving as the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the memory contents from the previous power cut are still retained, so backup processing will be performed in the event of a power outage. There's no need. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden on control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the timer value is 0 (step
Access to WM (read/write memory) is permitted (step X11), and off data is output (set to no output state) to all output ports (step X12).

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) (step X13).

Next, the gaming control device 100 generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
(ircuit) circuit (step X14). In addition, the CTC circuit is the gaming microcomputer 11.
It is provided in the clock generator in 1. The clock generator is an oscillation circuit 11
A frequency dividing circuit divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from 3, and supplies a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a and a random number generation circuit based on the frequency divided signal. and a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that provides a trigger for random number updating.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 reads the RAM (RAM 111c here) indicating an abnormality.
The M abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, a flag assuming an abnormality is set in a predetermined register.

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the value of the power failure test area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure test area check data (step X16). If it is normal (step X16; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure test area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure test area check data (step X17).

Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17), the game control device 100
;Y), execute checksum calculation processing to calculate the checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (for example, work area within the area) (step X18), and check whether the calculated checksum matches the checksum at power-off. It is determined whether or not (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y), the RAM is normal, and the RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality in the RAM is cleared (step X20). Thereafter, the process moves to step X21.

In addition, if it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), if the checksums do not match (step X19; N), the gaming control device 100 , without clearing the RAM abnormality flag, the process proceeds to step X21.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 11.
It is determined whether both switches No. 2 are on (step X21). Game control device 100
When both switches are on (step X21; Y), the controller shifts to a setting variable state (setting change mode) and executes the process of changing probability settings in steps X30 to X40.

When at least one of the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step
1c) Determine whether or not the RAM abnormality flag indicating the abnormality is set (step X2)
2). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (step
RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing), or step X44 and step X48~
Execute the normal power-up (power recovery) processing for the X51.

When the probability setting changing flag is set, the game control device 100 performs step
23;Y), a main abnormality error notification command is sent to the production control device 300 to notify that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) (step X24).
The production control device 300 that received the main abnormal error notification command is the game control device 100.
Notify that there is an abnormality.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 outputs the 7-segment display data (data for error display of "E1") when the game is stopped to the drivers 150a and 150b of the performance display device 152 in order to display it on the performance display device 152 ( Step X25). Then, on-data of a security signal is outputted to the external information terminal 71 to notify external devices (game hall internal management device (hall computer), information collection terminal, etc.) of an abnormality (step X26). Here, even if the information regarding the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals such as the jackpot signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in an off state. Thereafter, the process of step X25 and step X26 is repeated, and the process waits until the setting change operation (on operation of both the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is performed again, and the power is turned on. Note that while waiting by repeating the processing of step X25 and step X26, interrupts remain prohibited (step 11) cannot be executed, games (special figure variable display game, regular figure variable display game, round game, etc.) cannot be executed.

In this way, the settings change operation (setting key switch 153 and RAM initialization switch 11
If the probability setting changing flag is set even though both of the on operations (2) have not been executed, it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred and the processes of steps X24 to X26 are executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting change operation has not been performed. be.

On the other hand, even if the RAM abnormality flag is set (step The data is sent to the control device 300 (step In order to notify the RAM abnormality, security signal ON data is output to the external information terminal 71 (step X26).
. Note that, as described above, even if information regarding the jackpot remains in the RAM 111c, other signals such as the jackpot signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in an off state.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a power outage has occurred (step X27), and if a power outage has not occurred (step X27; N), the processes of step X25 and step X26 are repeated and the process waits. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power outage has occurred (step X27; Y), off data is output to all output ports (step Access is prohibited (step X29). After that, the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

When both the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (step , it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X30). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X30; Y),
Since it is unclear whether the probability setting value is correct, the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared and set to the initial value (for example, the lowest setting value "1") (step X31). A probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed is set (step X32). If the RAM error flag is not set (step X30; N)
, sets the probability setting changing flag without clearing the probability setting value (step X32).
Next, a command for changing the probability setting is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (step X33), and the process moves to step X37. In addition, the production control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the fact that the probability setting is being changed on the display device 41 or the like.

In the gaming control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 153 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step X21; N), the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), and the probability setting is If the changing flag is not set (step X23; N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 153 is on (step X34). When the setting key switch 153 is on (step X34; Y), R
The AM initialization switch 112 is turned off, and the probability settings are being checked (settings are being checked).
The process starts, and a probability setting confirmation flag indicating that the probability setting is being confirmed is set (step X35). Then, a command for checking the probability setting is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (step X36), and the process moves to step X37. In addition, the production control device 300 that has received the command to confirm the probability setting notifies the fact that the probability setting is being confirmed on the display device 41 or the like.

After step X33 or step X36, the gaming control device 100 executes the processing of steps X37 to X43 as common processing during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation.

The gaming control device 100 first saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output a security signal during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation (step X37). Note that the counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation process (Figure 5-17) described below, but if the probability setting change or probability setting confirmation ends early, , the counting of the remaining security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (step X119). The security signal is output for at least 50 ms during probability setting change and probability setting confirmation.

Next, the gaming control device 100 allows an interrupt (step X38). This makes it possible to execute timer interrupt processing (FIG. 5-11). Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch 153 is off (step X39). If the setting key switch 153 is on (step X39; N), it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (step X40). If a power outage has not occurred (step X40; N), the process returns to step X39. On the other hand, if a power outage has occurred (step X40; Y), the processing at the time of power outage occurrence in steps X63 to X69 is executed.

In this way, as long as the setting key switch 153 is on and a power outage has not occurred, the setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the probability setting value can be confirmed. The settings confirmation state (settings confirmation mode) continues.

On the other hand, if the setting key switch 153 is off (step X39; Y), the game control device 100 prohibits interruptions (step (Step X42). In addition, the production control device 300 that has received the command to end the notification ends the notification that the probability setting is being confirmed or the notification that the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether the probability setting has been changing so far (step X43). When the probability setting changing flag is set (step X43; Y), that is, when the probability setting has been changing so far, the RAM initialization process (described later) of steps X45 to X47 is executed. On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is not set (step
), that is, if the probability setting has been confirmed so far, the normal processing at power-on (power restoration) from step X48 onwards is executed.

When the setting key switch 153 is off (step X34), the game control device 100
;N), determine whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step X44)
. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step X44; Y), the RAM 11
1c, the RAM areas other than the probability setting value area for storing probability setting values are cleared to 0 (step X45). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0, except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. At this point, the aforementioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared. Further, the acquired game ball number area that stores the acquired game ball number, which is the number (total) of prize balls acquired within a predetermined time period (here, within one timer interrupt), is also cleared to 0. Then, the safety device operating flag area that stores the safety device operating flag indicating whether or not the safety device (described above) is operating is also cleared to 0 (safety device operating flag = 0), and the safety device is not activated. It will be canceled. In addition, in step X45, whether you clear the RAM with a setting change (step X43; Y) or clear the RAM without a setting change (step The device is deactivated, but may be limited to one side.

In addition to the probability setting value area, this section also includes configurations in which the stack area and unused area are not cleared, and a performance display work area (part of the outside work area) related to performance information and its display (performance display). ) and the stack area (stack area outside the area) are also possible.
The performance information is derived based on the number of prize balls obtained by winning, and includes, for example, ball output rate, base value (ball output rate in normal gaming state), role object ratio, number of balls ejected, etc. be.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (step X46). Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (step X47), and the process moves to step X52.

On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (step The initial value at the time of power restoration (at the time of power restoration) is saved in the area to be initialized as power restoration processing (step X48). Additionally, the aforementioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared here. Note that, unlike when initializing the RAM, the safety device operating flag area is not cleared when the power is turned on normally. Also, here,
The ceiling counter area in which the ceiling counter value indicating the number of times the special figure variable display game has been executed in a state other than the probability variable state is stored does not need to be cleared so as not to be disadvantageous to the player. Next, a command at the time of power outage recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special game processing etc. described later is transmitted to the production control device 300 (production control board) (step X4
9), the process moves to step X50.

Note that the RAM initialization command sent in the process of step X47 and step
The commands sent at the time of power outage restoration in the process of 9 include a model specification command that indicates the type of gaming machine, a decoration special map 1 reservation number command and a decoration special map 2 reservation number command that shows the number of reservations for special drawings 1 and 2. ,
A probability information command that indicates the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) or the presence or absence of a time saving state, a production number information command that indicates the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed in a predetermined production mode, and a fact that the power has been turned on. Contains the power failure recovery command shown.

Furthermore, the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of power outage recovery include a setting value information command (probability setting value information) indicating setting value information (setting information) that is information on the probability setting value (setting value) of the gaming machine 10. commands). The game control device 100 only needs to send the setting value information command to the production control device 300 once when the power is restored (turned on), and from then on, the production control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control the performance.

Note that the RAM initialization commands also include a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). The production control device 300 that received the RAM initialization command, for example,
A customer waiting demonstration is displayed on the display device 41, and the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the speakers 19a, 19 are displayed.
RAM initialization (RAM clear) is announced with the sound b for 30 seconds. Further, the commands at the time of power restoration include a screen designation command that designates the display contents of the screen of the display device 41. In addition, the screen designation command may be a customer waiting demonstration command when both special drawings 1 and 2 are being normally processed (when neither fluctuating nor winning), and otherwise may be a recovery screen command.

Next, it is determined whether the safety device is in operation (step X50). For example, if "1" indicating that the safety device is in operation is saved in the safety device in operation flag area as the safety device in operation flag, it can be determined that the safety device is in operation (safety device Active flag = 1). Then, if the safety device is in operation (step ), the process moves to step X52. If the safety device is not in operation (step X50; N), the process directly proceeds to step X52.

Then, the information (value) of the flag register is saved (PUSHed) to the stack area within the area (step ) is executed (step X53). Thereafter, the information in the flag register is restored (POP) (step X54).
In addition, except when the game is stopped due to a RAM error (steps If you set the counter and turn on the power while pressing the count continuation switch, there is no need to initialize (clear) the safety device information.

In addition, as described later, when transitioning to safety device information initialization processing, the stack pointer is moved from the stack area in the area related to game control to the area related to safety device information, performance information, and performance display (display of performance information). Switch to outside stack area. At that time, since there is a possibility that the flags in the flag register (especially the zero flag) may change when the stack pointer for game control is saved in the stack pointer storage area of the RAM 111c, the information in the flag register is saved in advance in step X52. put. Each of the 8 bits in the flag register is 0 or 1.
It is a flag that takes the value of . Regarding the flag register, please refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-23.
Those disclosed in Publication No. 3299, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-94101, etc. can be used.

Next, the gaming control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (step X55). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, the bit transposition pattern of the hardware random numbers generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. In addition, in this embodiment, the random number generation circuit generates a jackpot random number, a winning pattern random number (jackpot pattern random number, small winning pattern random number, support winning pattern random number, etc.), a regular pattern winning random number, as random numbers that are updated only by hardware. , and generate fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3. These random numbers are
A so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operating clock may be used.

A bit transposition pattern is a method of replacing the bit arrangement of extracted random numbers (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). This is the pattern that defines the

In this embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken, and the secrecy of the random number can be improved. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Alternatively, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

Next, the gaming control device 100 prohibits interruptions (step X56), and determines whether the game is stopped (step X57). If the safety device is activated or if a strong error 2 (described later) occurs that requires stopping the game (special figure fluctuation display game, regular figure fluctuation display game, round game, etc.), the game is stopped. It can be determined that there is.

If the game is not stopped (step Execute performance display editing processing to calculate performance information such as (step X5
9). Here, performance information (accessory object ratio, ball payout rate, etc.) may be calculated. Furthermore, if there is an abnormality in the performance display work area (part of the work area outside the area) related to performance information and its display (performance display), this may be cleared. After that, the flag register information is restored (POP
) (step X60), and interrupts are permitted (step X61). In addition to the case where no error has occurred, a weak error (described later) or a strong error 1 (which is an error other than strong error 2)
(described later) has occurred, the game is not stopped, and the processing of steps X58 to X60, including performance display editing processing, etc., is executed. Note that a configuration is also possible in which the processes of steps X58 to X60 are not executed when a weak error or strong error 1 occurs.

As described later, when moving to the performance display editing process, the stack pointer is moved from the stack area within the area related to game control to the area outside the area related to safety device information, performance information, and performance display (display of performance information). Switch to stack area. At that time, when saving the stack pointer for game control in the stack pointer storage area of the RAM 111c, the flag of the flag register (
In particular, since there is a possibility that the zero flag may change, the information in the flag register is saved in advance in step X58.

On the other hand, when the game is stopped (step X57; Y), the game control device 100 permits an interruption without executing performance display editing processing or the like (step X61). In other words, when a safety device is activated or a strong error 2 occurs, the performance display editing process (especially the base value calculation process during the performance display editing process) is not executed, so performance information such as the base value is It is not newly calculated and does not change. It should be noted that even if the strong error 2 occurs, a configuration is also possible in which the game is not stopped and the performance display editing process or the like is executed. Furthermore, by allowing interrupts, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 5-11) can be executed.

In this embodiment, errors are classified into three types: weak error, strong error 1, and strong error 2. In addition, the production control device 300 that has received the error/fraud type command sets error notifications of different strengths corresponding to the weak error, strong error 1, and strong error 2 in the error/fraud setting process (step S156). It can be executed by

For example, the performance control device 300 controls the volume of the error notification sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, or the brightness (brightness) of the LED (performance LED of the board decoration device 46 or frame decoration device 18) that emits light for error notification. ) may be increased in the order of weak error<strong error 1≦strong error 2. Note that the loudspeaker volume or the brightness of the LED for the strong error 1 and the strong error 2 may be the same. In addition, when a weak error occurs, the performance control device 300 sets the volume of the notification sound to the volume (lower than the maximum volume) adjusted in the hall/player setting mode processing (step S11), 2, the volume of the notification sound may be set to the maximum volume.

A weak error is a shot ball out error in which a shot ball out switch signal is generated in response to a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal is generated in response to the lower tray 23 becoming full. Including overflow errors like. In the case of a weak error, the external information signal is not output to the external information terminal 71 (see FIG. 5-59). Further, the weak error may include a switch abnormality error and a payout abnormality error in which a status signal indicating a payout abnormality is generated.

Strong error 1 is a frame opening error related to frame opening, and includes a glass frame opening error and a main body frame opening error (front frame opening error). In the case of strong error 1, a door/frame open signal (step X505) is output as an external information signal to the external information terminal 71 (see FIG. 5-59).

Strong error 2 is a fraud-related error related to fraud, and it is preferable to stop the game, and includes magnet fraud, board radio wave fraud, frame radio wave fraud, vibration fraud, abnormal discharge error, V passing error, big prize opening fraud, and general error. Including electronic fraud. In the case of strong error 2, a security signal (step X522) is output as an external information signal to the external information terminal 71 (see FIG. 5-59). Further, the strong error 2 may include a remaining ball error. When the strong error 2 has occurred, the games (special figure variable display game, regular figure variable display game, round game, etc.) are stopped, and it can be determined that the game is being stopped (step X57). In addition, when strong error 2 occurs, the same games as when the safety device is activated include special pattern fluctuation display games, regular pattern fluctuation display games, round games (games during jackpots or small wins), etc. It is possible to generate a game stop state (game disabled state, game prohibited state) in which the game cannot be executed.

After step X61, game control device 100 determines whether a power outage has occurred (step X62). If a power outage has not occurred (step X62; N), step
The process returns to step 56. As a result, the loop processing of steps X56 to X62 is repeated until a power outage occurs. Then, until a power outage occurs, performance information such as the base value will be repeatedly displayed in the performance display editing process (step Can calculate.

Note that the repeating cycle of the loop process is considerably shorter than the interrupt cycle of the timer interrupt (a predetermined time cycle, for example, 4 msec), so the performance display editing process is executed many times during the interrupt cycle. Therefore, when a game ball wins or a change in the number of ejected balls (a game ball enters the out port 30b), performance information such as the base value can immediately change.

When a power outage occurs (step ). Thereafter, power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in power failure inspection area 1 (step X65), and power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in power failure inspection area 2 (step X66). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process is executed to calculate the checksum at the time of power-off of the RWM (step X67), and the calculated checksum is further saved (step X68). Finally, a process is executed to prohibit access to the RWM (step X69), and the game machine waits until the power is turned off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power failure, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power failure has been correctly backed up. This can be determined at the time of reinsertion.

As described above, the main processing has been explained. For example, when the setting key switch and the RAM initialization switch are turned on during the processing of steps X56 to X62, the same determination processing as step X21 is performed, and Similarly, by setting the probability setting changing flag, it may be possible to switch to the setting variable state (setting change mode) any number of times while the gaming machine 10 is activated.

[Example of RAM area configuration]
FIG. 5-8 is a diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 111c of the gaming microcomputer 111. As shown in FIG. 5-8, an in-area work area, an unused area, an in-area stack area, an unused area, an out-of-area work area, an unused area, and an out-of-area stack area are arranged from the start address of the RAM 111c. Unused area between the work area inside the area and the stack area inside the area (stack area for game control, stack area for inside the area), and unused area between the work area outside the area and the stack area outside the area (stack area for outside the area) There may be no area.

The in-area work area (game control work area) of the RAM is a work area for game control that is read and written by the in-area program and read by the out-area program. The work area within the area is
In addition to the probability setting value area, test signal output data area, random number area, switch control area, segment area, power failure test area 1, power failure test area 2, checksum area, etc. The safety device activation flag area shown, and one timer interrupt (for example, 4m
sec) includes an acquired game ball number area that stores the number of acquired game balls acquired as prize balls within sec).

The out-of-area work area of RAM is an area that is read and written by an out-of-area program and read by an in-area program. The out-of-area work area includes a safety device counter area that stores the safety device counter value (number of difference balls + initial value) corresponding to the number of difference balls, and safety device operation information that stores safety device operation information corresponding to the state of the safety device. The area includes an old operation information area for storing old operation information, and is capable of storing safety device information related to the safety device. The safety device counter area (3 byte size) is basically not read by the program within the area, but when transmitting the safety device counter value or information on the number of difference balls to the production control device 300 with the difference ball command, It may also be read and referenced by programs within the area. In this embodiment, the safety device counter value is a value obtained by adding a predetermined initial value (100,000) to the number of difference balls in proportion to the number of difference balls (safety device counter value = number of difference balls + 100,000). However, the safety device counter value is not limited to this as long as it is associated with the number of difference balls and indicates the number of difference balls.

Further, the extra-area work area includes a performance display work area related to performance information and performance display, and is capable of storing performance information, information related to performance display, and the like. In addition, the out-of-area work area may store information related to test signals and information related to error monitoring. In addition,
In the extra-area work area, there is a safety device-related work area related to safety device information (including the safety device counter area, safety device operation information area, and old operation information area), and performance display work related to performance information and performance display. The regions may be clearly divided and arranged, or may be arranged in a mixed manner.

The out-of-area stack area is shared between processing related to performance information and performance display and processing related to safety devices. Further, the extra-region stack area is also used when performing processing related to test signals and processing related to error monitoring.

Note that the in-area program (in-area processing program) and the out-area program (out-of-area processing program) are distinguished by being arranged in the ROM 111b with an unused area in between. The programs in the ROM area consist of a game control program, game control data, etc., and include a main program corresponding to the main process (Figures 5-5 to 5-7) and an interrupt process corresponding to the timer interrupt process described later. Contains programs. A subroutine of the main program or interrupt processing program may be an out-of-area program. The out-of-area programs in the ROM include a safety device information initialization program that corresponds to safety device information initialization processing, a performance display editing processing program that corresponds to performance display editing processing, and an out-of-area integration processing program that corresponds to out-of-area integration processing that will be described later. including.

[Safety device information initialization process]
Next, details of the safety device information initialization process (step X53) in the main process will be explained. FIG. 5-9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of safety device information initialization processing. In the safety device information initialization process, the safety device counter area, safety device operation information area, and old operation information area are initialized or cleared, and safety device information such as the safety device counter value, safety device operation information, and old operation information is initialized. Set to value (initial information). Note that the safety device operation information is information indicating the current state, and the old operation information indicates the previous state (mainly before one interrupt).

The gaming control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer storage area of the outside work area (step X71), and sets the stack pointer as the value of the outside stack area (stack area for outside area). An address value indicating the beginning is set (step X72). As a result, the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used is switched from the in-area stack area to the out-of-area stack area.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves the information (value) of the register to the stack area outside the area (P
USH) (step X73). The registers to be saved may be only the registers to be protected (registers used in the safety device information initialization process), or all general-purpose registers may be saved. To save all general-purpose registers, save (PUSH) both register bank 0 and register bank 1.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 saves the initial value (100,000) in the safety device counter area, and the safety device counter value becomes the initial value (step X74). When the number of difference balls decreases from 0, such as when a jackpot does not occur, the safety device counter value (=number of difference balls + initial value) may be smaller than the initial value, so the initial value is set larger than 0. However, it can be any number other than 100,000. In addition, in this way, when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), the safety device counter value is initialized (cleared) so as not to be disadvantageous to the player, but if the special figure fluctuation display game is executed in a state other than the probability fluctuation state. The ceiling counter value indicating the number of times the power has been reset does not need to be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored unless the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on. Then, safety device non-operation information (value 0) corresponding to the non-operation state (normal state) of the safety device is saved as safety device operation information in the safety device operation information area (step X75). Furthermore, safety device non-operation information (value 0) is saved in the old operation information area as old operation information (step X76).

Next, the gaming control device 100 restores the saved register (step X77), loads it from the stack pointer storage area to set the stack pointer (step X78), and ends the safety device information initialization process. The set stack pointer indicates the address of the stack area within the area.

In the safety device information initialization process described above, when information is written directly to the RAM without using registers, the registers are not saved/restored. In this case, since registers are not saved to RAM, stack pointer related processing (steps X71, X72, X73, X77,
X78) is also no longer necessary. Furthermore, saving/restoring the flag register (steps X52 and X54) before and after the safety device information initialization process is no longer necessary.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the safety device counter value is 0 to 189999 (safety device counter = 0 to 189999), the safety device operation information is the non-operation state (operation advance notice) where the safety device is not activated (normal). safety device non-operation information (value 0) corresponding to the safety device status, activation warning status, or normal status that is not activated. When the safety device counter value is 190000 to 194999 (safety device counter = 190000 to 194999), the safety device activation information is the safety device activation notification information (value 1) corresponding to the activation notification state that foretells the activation of the safety device. Become.

Also, the safety device counter value is 195000 which is the counter reference value (safety device counter =
195000) and the game is not in a state where the game can be stopped, the safety device activation information is the safety device activation warning information (value 2) corresponding to the activation warning state that warns the activation of the safety device.
becomes. In this case, even if the difference ball number (= safe ball number - ejected ball number) reaches the difference ball standard value of 95,000, it is still a jackpot or a small hit, so the above condition (1) is met, but the condition ( This corresponds to the case where 2) is not satisfied and the operating conditions for the safety device are not satisfied.

Furthermore, when the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 (safety device counter = 195,000) and the game is stopped, the safety device activation information corresponds to an operating state in which the safety device is operating (operating state). Safety device operating information (value 3). In this case, the number of difference balls reaches the standard value of difference balls of 95,000, and it is neither a jackpot nor a small hit, so the above condition (1
This corresponds to a case where the operating conditions for the safety device are satisfied by both of ) and (2) being satisfied.

[Performance display editing process]
Next, details of the performance display editing process (step X59) in the main process will be explained. FIG. 5-10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of performance display editing processing.

The gaming control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer storage area of the outside work area (step X81), and sets the stack pointer as the value of the outside stack area (outside stack area). An address value indicating the beginning is set (step X82). As a result, the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used is switched from the in-area stack area to the out-of-area stack area.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves (PUSH) register information (values) for both register bank 0 and register bank 1 to the outside stack area (step X83).
Here, it is preferable to save all general-purpose registers. Then, a validity judgment is executed to determine the validity of the performance display work area among the work areas outside the area, and if the work area is not valid and is abnormal, the performance display work area is initialized (including initial value setting). (Step X8
4).

In the validity determination, if the value stored in the performance display work area is an impossible value in terms of design or deviates from the design value (outside a predetermined range), it can be determined that the value is not valid. For example, it is determined whether a specific value (for example, 5Ah) is stored in the performance display RAM initialized flag indicating that the performance display work area has been initialized, and division is used to calculate the base value. Determine whether the number that manages the progress of processing is within a predetermined range, determine whether the value of the switch counter is within the range of the number of monitored switches or less, and determine the display period management number that indicates the current display period. is within the range of the number of periods (0 to 3), and it is determined whether the total section number indicating the current total section is within the range of the number of sections (0 to 4). In this manner, in the validity determination, it is preferable to determine whether the value of the area used as a pointer to the data table is within a predetermined range. This can prevent the program from running out of control due to obtaining a value outside the range. Furthermore, since the validity is determined for each performance display editing process, it is effective.

In addition, since the validity judgment is executed every time the performance display editing process is executed, if the performance display work area is invalid, it can be initialized immediately, and abnormal performance display (abnormal base value etc.) can be prevented as much as possible.

Furthermore, when initializing the performance display work area (including initial value setting), areas other than the stack pointer storage area are initialized to protect the stack pointer storage area. Note that although the stack area outside the area is not initialized in this embodiment, it may be initialized. Even when the extra-area stack area is initialized, the values of registers saved in the extra-area stack area are protected and not initialized. The initialization of the performance display work area is performed separately from the initialization of the intra-area work area (gaming control work area) and the intra-area stack area (gaming control stack area), so the intra-area work area and has no effect on the stack area within the area.

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether it is the timing to switch the aggregation interval for aggregating the data (normal number of out balls, normal number of prize balls, etc.) that is the basis for calculating the base value (ball output rate). (Step X85). A counting interval is set for the total number of out pitches (total number of ejected pitches, total number of outs) from the time the power is turned on, and each time the total number of out pitches reaches a plurality of predetermined numbers (for example, 600
00)) the aggregation interval is switched.

For example, the switching timing of the counting period is the timing when the total number of out balls since the power is turned on reaches a predetermined number of 300, 60,300, 120,300, 180,300, etc. That is, the width of the aggregation section is basically 60,000 excluding the first aggregation section, the first aggregation section = 0 to 300 items, the second aggregation section = 300 to 60,300 items, and the third aggregation section = 60,300 to 120,300 pieces, 4th tally section = 120,300 to 180,300 pieces, 5th tally section = 180,300 to 240,300 pieces, etc. Aggregation section numbers indicating the first to fifth aggregation sections are 0 to 4, respectively, and the aggregation section number is maintained at 4 for the sixth and subsequent aggregation sections. Note that the current total section number is stored in the performance display work area.

The game control device 100, when it is time to switch the total period (step X85;
Y), the aggregation interval switching setting is performed (step X86). In the aggregation interval switching settings, the total out counter counts the total number of out pitches (total number of outs), and the normal number of out pitches (normal number of outs), which is the number of out pitches (ejected pitches) within each aggregation interval. You can clear the normal out counter and the normal award pitch counter, which counts the total number of award pitches (or the number of acquired pitches) in each aggregation section, or clear the final base value (or latest base value) of each aggregation section. value) to the base value storage area of the adjacent aggregation interval.

If it is not the switching timing of the total period (step X85; N), the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not there is a switch input to the input port to be monitored (step X87). In this embodiment, the input ports to be monitored are the third input port 124 and the fourth input port 126 (see FIG. 5-3).

Here, the switch rising edge information (copied in step X713 in FIG. 5-64) that has been copied to the performance display work area for each input port to be monitored is checked. There is an 8-bit area for storing copied switch rising edge information for each input port to be monitored. If the information on the rising edge of the switch for all input ports to be monitored is all 0, it can be determined that there is no input, and in other cases, it can be determined that there is input. Note that as switch rising edge information, unless masked during copying, the bit corresponding to the switch for which a new input (detection) occurred in the input processing (step X103) is set to 1, and corresponds to a switch for which there is no new input. bit is set to 0.

When the input port to be monitored has a switch input (step ). The target switches here are the lower large winning port switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper large winning port switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, the starting port 1 switch 36a of the first starting winning port 36, Starting port 2 switch 37a of the second starting winning port 37 (normal variable winning device), winning port switch 35a of the general winning port 35 (left winning port switch, right winning port switch), out ball detection switch 74, etc., game balls The base value (or ball payout rate) can be changed by detecting this.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not the target switch is within the valid period (step X89). In addition, if a big prize opening fraud or a power transmission fraud occurs and winnings to the big winning opening or the second starting winning opening 37 are invalid, that is, the big winning opening switches 38a, 39a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a are not valid. There are cases. In addition, the first starting prize opening 36 and the out ball detection switch 7
There are also switches such as 4 that are always active.

The game control device 100, when the target switch is within the valid period (step X89; Y)
, determine whether there is an input to the target switch corresponding to the switch counter (step
90). If it is not the valid period of the target switch (step X89; N) or if there is no input to the target switch (step X90; N), the process moves to step X98.

When the target switch has an input (step X90; Y), the gaming control device 100 clears the input information (1 bit) of the bit corresponding to the target switch (step (Step X92). The normal base state (low base state) is a period in which the base value can be calculated and updated, and is the normal gaming state in this embodiment.

When the game control device 100 is in the normal base state (normal gaming state) (step By adding, the number of regular prize balls, which is the total number of prize balls within the total period, is updated (step X93). Next, by adding 1 when the target switch is the out pitch detection switch 74, the normal out pitch count (
The number of normal outs and the number of balls normally ejected are updated (step X94). Next, when the target switch is the out ball detection switch 74, the total number of out balls (total number of outs, total number of ejected balls) is updated by adding 1 (step X95).

In addition, in this embodiment, the out ball detection switch 74 detects all the game balls ejected from the game area 32 (that is, all the game balls that have passed through the winning opening or the out opening 30b). Not only the game ball that entered the out hole 30b, but also the winning holes (first starting winning hole 36, second starting winning hole 36,
A game ball that enters the starting winning hole 37, the big winning hole, or the general winning hole 35) is guided to the out ball detection switch 74 through a passage (not shown), and is detected.

If the gaming control device 100 is not in the normal base state, which is the normal gaming state (step X95). Therefore, in a high base state that is not a normal base state (second gaming state, time saving state, variable probability state, or special gaming state), the number of normal prize balls and the number of normal out balls are not updated, and the number of normal prize balls and the number of normal out balls are not updated. The base value calculated from the number (normal number of award pitches ÷ normal number of out pitches) is not updated and does not change. Note that it is also possible to eliminate the determination process regarding the normal base state in step X92, and to make the base value updateable (changeable) as the ball payout rate in all gaming states.

Next, the gaming control device 100 updates the switch counter by +1 in order to change the target switch to the next one in the next performance display editing process (step X96). Note that due to the loop processing in the main process, the performance display editing process is executed at much shorter time intervals (for example, several microseconds) than the interrupt cycle of the timer interrupt (predetermined time cycle, for example, 4 msec).
). Therefore, during the interrupt period, the performance display editing process is repeatedly executed, and the switch counter (e.g., 0 to 7) covers all switch bits (e.g., bits 0 to 7) for each monitored input port. . Also, the switch counter is updated to 0 after the final value (eg, 7), and the switch input begins to be checked for the next monitored input port. For example, the input of the switch is first checked with respect to the third input port 124 and then the input of the switch is checked with respect to the fourth input port 126.

On the other hand, when there is no switch input to all monitored input ports (step
(Step X97). Note that the input port to be monitored may not have switch input from the beginning. On the other hand, even if some or all of the monitored input ports initially have switch inputs, after the switch inputs have been checked for all monitored input ports, the inputs of the target switches where the inputs were Since the information has been cleared (step X91), there is no switch input to all monitored input ports.

In the base value calculation process, the base value is the ratio of the number of normal award pitches to the number of normal out pitches, and is calculated as the number of normal award pitches divided by the number of normal out pitches. Therefore, when a ball enters the starting winning hole (starting winning hole 36, normal variable winning device 37), big winning hole, or general winning hole 35, the winning hole to which the prize ball is given as the first step. switches 35a, 36a, 37a, 38a
, 39a, the number of normally awarded pitches is updated and changed, and the base value changes, and as a second step, the number of normally out pitches is updated and changed by the input (detection) of the out pitch detection switch 74. The base value changes. In other words, when one game ball enters the winning hole, 2
The base value will change (will be affected) at each step. When a ball enters the out port 30b opened on the game board 30, the number of out balls is updated and changed by the input (detection) of the out ball detection switch 74, and the base value also changes. On the other hand, when a ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 34, the number of normal award balls and the number of normal out balls are not updated and do not change depending on the ball entering, so the base value is also maintained unchanged. Ru. Even if a ball enters the normal pattern starting gate 34, the number of normal prize balls is not updated because no prize balls are awarded.

Regardless of whether or not there is a change, the base value is output as a performance display to the performance display device 152 through the processing of steps X224 to X230 of the output processing. However, if the safety device is activated and the game is stopped, or if a strong error 2 occurs and the game is stopped,
The performance display device 152 outputs off data and turns off.

As a special example, the base value calculation may be executed only during the real-time value display period in which the real-time value (bL.) of the base value is displayed, and in this special example, the calculation of the base value may be performed until the real-time value display period arrives. The number of normal award pitches and the number of normal out pitches are updated, but the base value is not calculated and does not change.

After step X96 or step X97, the gaming control device 100 restores the saved register (step X98), loads it from the stack pointer storage area and sets the stack pointer (step X99), and ends the performance display editing process. . The set stack pointer indicates the address of the stack area within the area.

In addition, in FIG. 5-10, the process of step X97 is executed immediately after step A configuration in which base value calculation processing is performed immediately after updating is also possible.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained. FIG. 5-11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by a CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the gaming control device 100 first specifies register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (step X101), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a predetermined register (step X102). . By switching from register bank 0 used in main processing to register bank 1 at the start of timer interrupt processing,
This is equivalent to saving the registers used in main processing. Note that when timer interrupt processing is started, interrupts are automatically disabled.

Next, the gaming control device 100 receives input from various sensors and switches, receives signals,
That is, input processing for reading the status of each input port is executed (step X103). Next, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirmation flag, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (step X104). When the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (step X104; Y), a probability setting change/confirmation process for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (step X105).

When the game control device 100 is not changing the probability settings or checking the probability settings (step Output processing for performing drive control, LED drive control (light emission control), etc. is executed (step X106). Note that when a firing stop signal is output in the process of step X5 in the main process, a firing permission signal can be output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permission state.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process that outputs the command (such as a payout command) set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200 (step X107). After that, it is monitored whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switches 38a, 39a, and error monitoring (front frame and glass frame A prize opening switch/state monitoring process is executed to check (whether or not the opening is open, etc.) (step X108).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the game is stopped (step X109
). It can be determined that the game is being stopped when a safety device is activated or when a strong error 2 that requires stopping the game occurs.

When the game is not stopped (step X109; N), the game control device 100 performs special figure game processing (step
Step X112) and segment LED editing processing (step X113) are executed. Thereafter, the processing from step X114 onwards is executed. In addition to the case where no error occurs at all, the special figure game process (step
0), accessory game processing (step X111), common figure game processing (step X112), and segment LED editing processing (step X113).

In the segment LED editing process, a plurality of segment LEDs constituting the collective display device 50
Settings related to driving a part of (memory display section, round display section, etc.: LED lamps D3 to D7, D11 to D17), etc. are executed. Note that another part of the collective display device 50 (variable display section: L
Settings related to driving the ED lamps D1, D2, D8, D10, D18) are executed in the symbol variation control process (steps A16, A18, C15). Settings related to driving another part of the collective display device 50 (probability state display section: LED lamp D9), etc. are executed in the power outage recovery process (step X48) and the like.

When the game is stopped (step X109; Y), the game control device 100 performs special figure game processing (step
Step X112) and the segment LED editing process (step X113) are not executed, and the process proceeds to step X114 and subsequent steps. In this way, when the safety device is activated or when the strong error 2 occurs and the game is stopped, the special figure game process (step X110) and the general figure game process (step X112) are not executed, so the special figure Pending number (step A136
, A532) and the number of reserved ordinary figures (steps C107, C318) do not change. On the other hand, if a weak error or strong error 1 occurs, the game is not stopped and the special figure game process (step
0) and the general map game process (step
136, A532) and the number of reserved ordinary figures (steps C107, C318) can be changed by updating by +1 (when a reservation occurs) or updating by -1 (when a reservation is exhausted).

In addition, depending on the type of error such as weak error, strong error 1, and strong error 2, special figure game processing (step X110), accessory game processing (step X111), general figure game processing (step X112), and segment LED A configuration is also possible in which some of the editing processing (step X113) is executed and the others are not executed. For example, if strong error 2 occurs,
Only the segment LED editing process may be executed.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 transmits safety device activation information corresponding to the state of the safety device to the performance control device 300 as a production command, and executes safety device related processing that can set a safety device operating flag (step X114). ). Then, a magnet fraud monitoring process is executed to check the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (step X115). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) is executed to check the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 of the game board to determine whether there is any abnormality (step X116).

After that, the gaming control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process that monitors fraud due to vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (step X117). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process for monitoring abnormal discharge from the big prize opening is executed (step X118). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the special variable winning device is activated based on inputs from the big winning port switches 38a and 39a, the specific area switch 72a (V winning port switch), and the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 in the special variable winning devices 38 and 39. No. 39 is monitored for abnormal discharge, and when abnormal discharge occurs, an abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set. In addition, the big prize opening switches 38a and 3 of the special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39
The game ball that has passed through 9a passes through the specific area switch 72a (V winning port switch) or the remaining ball discharge port switch 73 and is discharged.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes external information editing processing to set signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (step X119). Then, as in step X109 and the like, it is determined whether the game is stopped (step X120).

When the game is not stopped (step X120; N), the game control device 100 saves the flag register to the stack area within the area (step External integration processing for controlling the display of the device 152 and the like is executed (step X122). Thereafter, the flag register is restored (step X123), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. When the safety device is not operating and the strong error 2 has not occurred, the game is not stopped, and the processing of steps X121 to X123 including the out-of-area integration processing etc. is executed.

In addition, as will be described later, when moving to the outside-area integration process, the stack pointer is switched from the in-area stack area related to game control to the out-area stack area. At this time, since there is a possibility that the flags in the flag register (particularly the zero flag) may change when the stack pointer for game control is saved in the stack pointer storage area of the RAM 111c, the flag register is saved in advance in step X121.

On the other hand, when the game is stopped (step X120; Y), the game control device 100 ends the timer interrupt process without executing the outside-area integration process or the like. That is, when a safety device is activated or a strong error 2 occurs, the out-of-area integration process is not executed, so the safety device counter value is not updated and the display contents of the performance display such as the base value are not updated. This makes it possible to omit unnecessary control while the game is stopped.

Note that, unlike the above, even if strong error 2 occurs, the game is not stopped and the special figure game process (step X110), accessory game process (step X111), and general figure game process (step
112) and a configuration in which segment LED editing processing (step X113) is executed. Further, even if a strong error 2 occurs, a configuration is also possible in which out-of-area integration processing or the like is executed.

Furthermore, when returning from timer interrupt processing, the interrupt disabled state and register bank specification are automatically restored, but depending on the CPU used, interrupts may be enabled after external information editing processing. It is also possible to perform processing to return the register bank designation to register bank 0.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output processing (step X106) in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 5-11) will be explained. FIG. 5-12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of output processing.

The gaming control device 100 first resets the output port 135 by outputting off data to the output port 135 (segment output port) (see FIG. 5-3) that outputs segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50. (Step X201). Subsequently, OFF output data is set for all solenoids (big prize opening solenoids 38b, 39b, lever solenoid 72b, general electric solenoid 37c) (step X202). Then, as in step X109 and the like, it is determined whether the game is stopped (step X203). It can be determined that the game is being stopped when a safety device is activated or when a strong error 2 that requires stopping the game occurs.

The game control device 100, when the game is not stopped (step (Step X204)
. Then, data is output to the solenoid output port 134 (step X205). If the game is stopped (step X203; Y), nothing is done, the process moves to step X205, and off data (step X202) is output to the solenoid output port 134. As a result, when the game is in the stopped state, the operation of all solenoids is stopped, and the big prize opening, the specific area 72, the normal variable prize winning device 37, etc. are closed, and the game is in the closed state. In this way, in the game stop state, the big prize opening is closed and round games (games during jackpots or small wins) cannot be executed.

Then, the gaming control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 by +1 in the range of 0 to 3 (it adds only 1, but after 3 it becomes 0). (updated) (step X206). Furthermore, digit output data to the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (step X207). Then, the acquired digit output data and external information data are combined (step X208), and the combined data is output to the digit output/external information output port 136 (step X209).
.

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets off data as segment output data to the segment line (step X210). Then, output data prohibiting firing is set (step X211). Furthermore, as in step X203 and the like, it is determined whether the game is stopped (step X212).

When the game is not stopped (step Set the output data (step X214) and transfer the loaded segment output data to output port 1 for segment output.
35 (step X215). Note that this segment area may be included in the intra-area work area (game control work area).

In this way, when the game is not stopped, each time the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3, a new digit line is selected and the 8 segments of the digit that this digit line connects are Segment output data is output to the line. Digits 0 to 3 (digits 0 to 3) are selected sequentially, and a dynamic drive method (dynamic lighting control) is applied to the collective display device 50.
is realized.

On the other hand, when the game is stopped (step X212; Y), the game control device 100 performs off data (step
0) is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step X215). As a result, when the game is stopped when the safety device is activated or when strong error 2 occurs,
The collective display device 50 is turned off. As a result, the special symbol variation display game and the regular symbol variation display game cannot be executed in the game stop state. The player who looks at the collective display device 50 can recognize that the game is stopped, that a safety device has been activated, or that a strong error 2 (fraud error) has occurred.

Next, the gaming control device 100 loads and synthesizes the external information data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (step Step X217), and the finally synthesized data is output to the external information/launch permission signal output port 137 (Step X218). Here, if the game is not stopped, the output data is to allow firing (step X214), and if the game is stopped, the output data is to prohibit firing (stopping firing) (step X211). This results in
In the game stop state when the safety device is activated or strong error 2 occurs, firing of game balls from the ball launcher is prohibited, but if the game is not in the game stop state, The firing of game balls from the ball firing device is permitted. It should be noted that even in the game stop state, it is possible to permit the shooting of game balls from the ball firing device and not prohibit shooting (stopping the shooting).

Next, the gaming control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the data to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. The combined data is output (step X219). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the sight test equipment is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step X220).

Next, the gaming control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device, and outputs the data to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The synthesized data is output to (step X221). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the sight-firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step X222). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and combined, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step X223).

Next, the gaming control device 100 resets the output port 141 by outputting off data to the output port 141 (segment output port 2) that outputs segment data of the performance display device (LED) 152 (step X224). Next, the value of digit counter 2 for sequentially scanning the digit lines of performance display device 152 is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3 (only 1 is added, but after 3 it is updated to 0) (step X225 ). Furthermore, digit output data to the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of digit counter 2 is acquired (step
226). Then, the acquired digit output data is output to the output port 142 (digit output port 2) (step X227).

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not the game is stopped, as in step X203 and the like (step X228). If the game is not stopped (step X228; N),
Segment output data is loaded from the performance display device segment area in the RAM 111c corresponding to the value of digit counter 2 (step X229). The performance display device segment area is included in a performance display work area related to performance information and its display (performance display). Then, the loaded segment output data is output to the output port 141 (segment output port 2) for the performance display device 152 (step X230), and then the output process is ended.

On the other hand, when the game is stopped (step X228; Y), the game control device 100 ends the output process without executing the processes of step X229 and step X230. Therefore, when the safety device is activated and the game is stopped, or when the strong error 2 occurs and the game is stopped, the segment output data of the performance display device segment area is sent to the output port 141.
Therefore, the off data of step In this case, the value of digit counter 2 is 0 to 3.
When the performance display device 152 goes around in the range of It can be recognized that the device has been activated or that a strong error 2 (illegal error) has occurred.

In addition, even if strong error 2 occurs, the game is not stopped, and step X229 and step
A configuration in which processing of 0 is executed is also possible.

[Winning port switch/condition monitoring processing]
Next, details of the prize opening switch/state monitoring process (step X108) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 5-11) will be explained. FIG. 5-13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning opening switch/state monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first clears the acquired game ball number area included in the intra-area work area to 0 (step X301). As a result, the acquired game ball number area becomes an area for storing the acquired game ball number, which is the number (total) of prize balls acquired within one interruption (within a predetermined time period). In addition,
The number of game balls acquired is equal to the increase in the number of safe balls within one interruption. Then, the winning hole monitoring table 1 corresponding to the big winning hole switch 39a in the big winning hole (special variable winning device 39) is prepared (step X302). Then, fraud & winning monitoring processing is executed to monitor whether there is any illegal winning in the winning hole of the University of Tokyo even though the winning hole is not open and to detect a normal winning (step X303).

After that, the gaming control device 100 prepares the winning hole monitoring table 2 corresponding to the lower big winning hole switch 38a in the lower big winning hole (special variable winning device 38) (step X304). Then, fraud & winning monitoring processing is executed to monitor whether there is any illegal winning in the lower winning opening even though the lower winning opening is not open and to detect a normal winning (step X305).

Then, the gaming control device 100 prepares a winning port monitoring table corresponding to the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37 (step X306). Then, a fraud & winning monitoring process is executed to monitor fraudulent winnings and detect normal winnings (step X307).
. Next, a winning port monitoring table for a winning port switch that allows winning at any time and does not require fraud monitoring is prepared (step X308). The winning port switch that allows you to win at any time is the starting port 1 switch 36a.
and 35 general prize openings.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a winning number counter update process to update the winning number (
Step X309). Then, a status scan counter is updated to sequentially designate which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals whose status should be monitored is to be monitored this time (step X310). The state scan counter is updated in the range 0 to 3.

After that, the gaming control device 100 prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (step X311). Then, a gaming machine status check process is executed to determine whether an error has occurred or not (step X312).

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, it is determined that the status is based on the abnormality detection signal output due to an occurrence such as a disconnection of the switch connector (switch abnormal error ) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (shoot ball out error) based on the shot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal (overflow error) is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, the status is based on the abnormal payout status signal (abnormal payout error). monitoring is set. In this way, the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 monitors weak errors.

Next, the gaming control device 100 prepares the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 for setting the status to be monitored according to the value of the status scan counter (step X313). Then, a gaming machine status check process is executed to determine whether an error has occurred or not (step X314).

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status (glass frame open error) can be monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch. is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 1, monitoring of the status (body frame opening error, front frame opening error) based on the signal output from the body frame opening detection switch is set. Additionally, if the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status based on frame radio fraud signals (frame radio fraud) is set, and if the value of the status scan counter is 3, monitoring of the status based on touch switch signals is set. is set.

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the value of the state scan counter is 0 (step X315). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step X315; N), the process moves to step X317.

Furthermore, if the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step A payout busy signal check process is executed to set the payout busy signal flag (step X316), and the process proceeds to step X317.

Note that the process of step X316 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated every timer interrupt is 0, so it is executed once every four timer interrupts. In other words, if a timer interrupt occurs every 4ms, step X will occur every 16ms.
316 processing will be performed.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a V passage timing monitoring process to monitor whether or not the game ball has passed the specific area switch 72a at an inappropriate timing (step X317).
. In the V passing timing monitoring process, if the detection signal of the specific area switch 72a is generated at an inappropriate timing, a V passing error is determined.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a remaining ball monitoring process to monitor whether or not there are any game balls remaining in the specific area switch 72a (step X318), and ends the winning opening switch/state monitoring process.

The V passage timing monitoring process and the remaining ball monitoring process in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process are necessary for a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed machine (1+2 type machine) like this embodiment, and are not required for a normal 1 type pachinko machine. It may not be necessary for the machine.

[Fraud & prize monitoring processing]
FIG. 5-14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of fraud and winning monitoring processing. The fraud & winning monitoring process is executed in steps X303, X305, and X307 in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG. 5-13.

Fraud & winning monitoring processing is performed using the lower large winning opening switch 38a in the special variable winning device 38, the upper large winning opening switch 39a in the special variable winning device 39, and the winning opening switch (starting port 2 switch 37a) in the normal variable winning device 37. ). Regarding the second starting prize opening (normal variable winning device 37) and the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38, 39), it is easy to commit fraud by forcibly opening the opening/closing member, inserting game balls, and paying out the prize balls. Therefore, in addition to detecting winnings, fraud is also monitored.

The gaming control device 100 first checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch to be monitored for errors (step X321), and determines whether or not it is in the fraud monitoring period (step X322). For example, the fraud monitoring period is a period in which the winning slot switch that is subject to error monitoring does not originally detect game balls. This is a period other than the gaming state.

Then, if it is the fraud monitoring period, the gaming control device 100 (step X322; Y
), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323). If there is no input to the target winning a prize opening switch (step X323; N), target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332). In addition, if there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; Y), the target fraudulent winning number is updated by +1 (step X324),
It is determined whether the number of fraudulent winnings after addition is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent winnings to be monitored (for example, 5 winnings) (step X325).

The reason why the judgment number is set to 5 is that, for example, when the grand prize opening that is in the open state is changed to the closed state, the game ball gets caught in the door member of the big prize opening, and the game ball has passed the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent cases such as winning a prize or noise in the signal from being judged as fraudulent, and to prevent it from being easily judged as an error even though it is not fraudulent.

Then, the game control device 100, if the number is not equal to or greater than the determined number, (step X325; N
), prepare a winning slot monitoring table for the target winning slot switch (step X330). In addition, if the number is equal to or greater than the determined number (step
ms) (step X327).

Next, the gaming control device 100 prepares the target fraud occurrence command as a performance command (
Step X328), and furthermore, a fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent flag (step X329). Then, compare the prepared fraud flag with the value of the target fraud flag area (
Step X340).

On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period, the gaming control device 100 (step X322; N)
, prepares a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch (step X330), and executes winning number counter update processing for setting prize balls (step X331). Details of the win number counter update process will be described later.

Then, the gaming control device 100 loads the target notification timer update information (step X3
32), it is determined whether updating of the notification timer is permitted (step X333). If updating of the notification timer is not permitted (step X333; N), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, if updating of the notification timer is permitted (step X333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step X334). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is 0.
is set to .

Updating of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch to be monitored for error is the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the normal variable winning winning device 37. In addition, if there are two winning opening switches in one special variable winning device (big winning opening), update of the notification timer is permitted if one winning opening switch is subject to error monitoring, and If the winning port switch is on the other side, it will not be allowed. As a result, regarding fraudulent notifications for one special variable winning device, the notification timer will be updated twice as often, and the specified time (for example, 60
This prevents the time from running out at half the time (000ms).

After that, the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (step X335), and if the value is not 0 (step X335; N), that is, if the time is not up, End the fraud & prize monitoring process. Furthermore, if the value of the notification timer is 0 (step An unauthorized winning cancellation flag is prepared as a flag (step X337). Then, it is determined whether or not this is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338).

If the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X33), the game control device 100
8; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winnings monitoring process, the target number of fraudulent winnings is cleared (step X339).

In addition, after the process of step
If the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step X340; Y), the gaming control device 100 ends the fraud & winning monitoring process. Further, if the value of the prepared fraud flag and the target fraud flag area do not match (step X340;
N), save the prepared fraud flag in the target fraud flag area (step X341), and execute production command setting processing (step X342). Thereafter, the fraud and prize monitoring process is ended.

Through the above processing, a fraud occurrence command is sent to the production control device 300 when fraud occurs, a fraud cancellation command is sent to the production control device 300 when fraud is canceled, and the start and end of fraud notification is set. The Rukoto.

[Winning number counter update process]
FIG. 5-15 is a flowchart showing the procedure for updating the winning number counter. The winning number counter update process is executed in step X309 of the winning opening switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG. 5-13 and step X331 of the fraud & winning monitoring process shown in FIG.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the game is stopped (step X351).
). It can be determined that the game is being stopped when a safety device is activated or when a strong error 2 that requires stopping the game occurs.

When the game is not stopped (A2201; N), the gaming control device 100 obtains the number of winning opening switches to be monitored from the winning opening monitoring table (A2202), and determines whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch. Determine (A2203). In the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, the number of winning balls, the address of the winning number counter area 1, the address of the winning number counter area 2, etc. are defined for each winning opening switch to be monitored. If there is no input (A2203;
N), updates the table address to the address of the next record (step X365), and determines whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X366).

On the other hand, if there is an input to the target prize opening switch (step
Add the number of prize balls corresponding to the target winning opening switch to the number of won game balls (step X355),
The value after addition is saved in the acquired game ball number area (step X356). As a result, the number of acquired game balls stored in the acquired game ball number area is updated for each prize opening switch, and the number of acquired game balls is finally equal to the number (total) of prize balls acquired within one interrupt. Become.

The acquired game ball number area is located in the work area within the area, and is written in the winning number counter update processing program (part of the area program), and is written in the winning number counter update processing program (part of the area program), and is written in the winning ball confirmation processing program (part of the outside area program), which will be described later. ) only reads it. Note that even if input is made to all the winning opening switches at the same time, the total value of prize balls is less than 255 (1 byte), so the upper limit is not checked for the number of acquired game balls.

Next, the gaming control device 100 loads the value of the target number of winnings counter area 1 (step X357), and updates the loaded value by +1 (step X358). Furthermore, it is determined whether an overflow occurs due to the updated value (step X359). The winning number counter area 1 has a size of 2 bytes (0 to 65535).

If no overflow has occurred, the gaming control device 100 performs step X359.
;N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step X360). After the process of step X360 is completed or if an overflow occurs (step
9; Y), the value of the target prize winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X361).

After that, the gaming control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (step X362), and determines whether an overflow occurs due to the updated value (step X363). If no overflow occurs (step X363; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step X364). The winning number counter area 2 is 1 byte (0
~255) in size.

After completing the process of step X364, or when an overflow occurs (step X363; Y), the gaming control device 100 updates the table address to the address of the next record (step X365). Then, it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X366).

If the gaming control device 100 has not finished monitoring all the switches (step
6; N), the process returns to step X353 in which it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target winning a prize opening switch. Further, when monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X366; Y), the winning number counter updating process is completed. As a result, the processes of steps X353 to X366 are repeated until monitoring of all switches is completed, and the number of won game balls, which is the number (total) of prize balls obtained within one interrupt, is obtained, and the number of winning game balls within one interrupt is obtained. Based on the winnings in each winning opening (each winning area), the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated to store winning information.

If the game is being stopped (step X351; Y), the game control device 100 does nothing and ends the winning number counter update process. As a result, in the game stop state, the detection of game balls with the prize opening switch is disabled, the number of acquired game balls is not updated, and the number of winnings counter area 1
and 2 is not updated, winning information is not stored and prize balls are not obtained (not paid out).
. Note that the payout of prize balls based on winning information stored before entering the game stop state (that is, when the detection of game balls with the winning opening switch is effective) continues even in the game stop state.

Note that the winning number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out prize balls, and the payout command has not yet been sent. Winning data corresponding to the winning balls that do not exist is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 constitutes a prize ball command counter capable of storing information regarding prize ball commands.

The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (planned number of payouts) generated by winning into the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). Winning data corresponding to prize balls that are used in the area and for which the main prize ball signal generation process has not been performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main prize ball signal counter that can store information regarding the main prize ball signal.

These winning number counter areas each have a winning number counter set for each winning hole according to the number of winning balls (for example, 3 winning balls, 2 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls). An area is provided, and the count number in the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by 1 based on a winning in the winning opening. In other words, it is possible to store information on winnings in units of winnings in the winning opening. Note that the number of winnings counter area 1 (2 bytes) is the number of winnings counter area 2 (1 byte).
Bytes), a larger area is allocated so that more winning data can be stored. This is because, while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, transmission of the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200, which is the destination, and more unsent messages may be sent. This is because data may be accumulated.

[Game machine status check process]
FIG. 5-16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of gaming machine status check processing. The gaming machine status check process is executed at steps X312, X314, etc. in the winning opening switch/state monitoring process shown in FIG. 5-13.

The gaming control device 100 first obtains the state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (step X371). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming state. The relationship between the status monitoring table and the status scan counter is as described in the winning opening switch/status monitoring process.

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the signal to be checked is on (
Step X372). If the signal to be checked is not on (step X372; N),
That is, when the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step X373), and a state off command to be checked is obtained and prepared (step X3).
74). Furthermore, the target state OFF monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X375). The status off flag indicates a normal status for error-related signals, and indicates a no-touch status for touch switch signals.

On the other hand, if the signal to be checked is on (step
2; Y), prepares a state-on flag as a state flag (step X376), obtains and prepares the target state-on command (step X377). Further, the comparison value of the target state-on monitoring timer is acquired (step X378). The status-on flag indicates an abnormal or invalid status for error-related signals, and indicates a touched status for touch switch signals.

When the process of step X375 or step X378 is completed, the gaming control device 100
It is determined whether the value of the target signal control region matches the acquired signal state (step X379). If they match (step X379; Y), the process moves to step X382. If they do not match (step X379; N), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (step X380), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step X381).

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (step X3
82). Furthermore, it is determined whether the updated value of the status monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the corresponding timer comparison value (step X383). If the updated value of the status monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (step X383; N), the gaming machine status check process is ended.

On the other hand, if the value of the updated state monitoring timer is greater than or equal to the corresponding timer comparison value (step X383; Y), the gaming control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by -1, and (Step X384). Furthermore, it is determined whether the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (step X385). If they match (
Step X385; Y), the game machine status check process is ended.

On the other hand, if the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step X385; N), the game control device 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area (step X386). Finally, a performance command setting process for setting a performance command is executed (step X387), and the game machine status check process is ended.

The production command here is either a state-off command or a state-on command. If the state on command is an error command, the production control device 300 is made to start error notification. As the state-on command that causes the production control device 300 to start error notification, there are commands that correspond to payout errors (included in weak errors) related to payout of game balls such as shot ball out error, overflow error, and payout abnormal error. There are commands corresponding to frame opening errors (included in strong error 1) such as glass frame opening error and body frame opening error, and commands corresponding to frame radio wave fraud errors (included in strong error 2).

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (step X105) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 5-17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing. In the probability setting change/confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (step X401). The probability setting value here is stored in a probability setting value area included in the intra-area work area of the RAM 111c.

When the probability setting value is within the normal range, the gaming control device 100 performs step X401;
), sets probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value (step X402), and outputs it to the performance display device 152 via the drivers 150a and 150b (step X404).
If the probability setting value is not within the normal range (step X401; N), the off data is set as the probability setting value display data (step
0a and 150b (step X404).

Here, the probability setting value display data is data of the probability setting value for display displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. In addition, in order to prevent confusion among hall personnel such as game hall managers and staff, if the probability setting values are different but the jackpot probability (and small winning probability) is the same, the display probability setting value will be changed to the jackpot probability ( and small winning probability). That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same jackpot probability (and small win probability).

Next, the gaming control device 100 updates the security signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (step X405). The security signal control timer is 128 ms (predetermined time) set in step X37. Next, the on-data of the security signal is sent to the external information terminal 7 to notify an abnormality to an external device (such as a game hall internal management device (hall computer)).
1 (step X406). Note that at this point, other signals such as the jackpot signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in an OFF state.

After that, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X407). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X407; N), that is, if the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting changing/confirming process is ended without doing anything.

When the probability setting changing flag is set, the game control device 100 performs step
407; Y), that is, when the probability setting is being changed, it is determined whether or not this is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X408). If this is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X408; Y), the probability setting change/confirmation process ends. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being updated unintentionally if the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

If it is not the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (step X408; N), the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the RAM initialization switch 112 (step X409). If there is no input to the RAM initialization switch (step X409; N), the probability setting change/confirmation process ends.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is input, the gaming control device 100 performs step X.
409;Y), update the working setting value in the working setting value area (RAM 111c or register) by +1 within the possible range, and update the probability setting value in the probability setting value area by +1 in accordance with the working setting value. Update (step X410). Thereby, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by one. Thereafter, the probability setting change/confirmation process ends. Note that when entering the setting change mode, a value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 from the probability setting value subtracted value) may be stored. Note that if the working setting value is 5 (probability setting value 6) and is updated by +1, the working setting value can be returned to 0 (probability setting value 1). Therefore, the probability setting values 1 to 6 can be repeatedly updated by +1 and switched. Further, the possible range of the work setting value is, for example, 0 to 1 or 0 to 5 in the case of a multi-step setting where there are a plurality of probability setting values, but is only 0 in the case of a single-step setting. In the case of multi-stage setting, the working setting value and probability setting value are updated to different values each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, but in the case of single-stage setting, they remain the same even if updated. Yes (updated to the same value).

Also, every time the probability setting value is updated by +1 or when the gaming state is switched to a setting variable state, etc., a command (setting value information command) that informs the production control device 300 of the setting value can be sent. good. Similarly, a test signal may be output to an external sight test device every time the probability setting value is updated by +1 or when the gaming state is switched to a variable setting state or the like. In addition, it is preferable to cancel these transmissions and outputs when there is an abnormality such as a main abnormality in the gaming control device 100. In addition, when there is a change in the game state such as a variable probability state, a time saving state, or a jackpot state, or at the start of a special figure fluctuation display game, a command (setting value information command) that informs the production control device 300 of the setting value is sent. Alternatively, the test signal may be output to an external sight-fire test device.

In the above, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated in response to the update of the working setting value every time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, but the working setting value of the RAM 111c The probability setting value (working setting value) that is being changed is stored in the area, and when the setting key switch 153 is turned off and the setting changing work is completed (step X39; Y).
, the value corresponding to the work setting value in the work setting value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. In this way, if a power outage occurs while changing the settings (step
; Y) It is possible to prevent a situation in which the probability setting value (probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) used for game control, performance control, etc. is changed to an unintended value.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (step X110) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be explained. FIG. 5-18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure game processing. In the special figure game processing, the inputs of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process regarding the special pattern variable display game is controlled, and the display of the special pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a starting port switch monitoring process for monitoring winnings of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a (step A1). In the starting port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the normal variable winning device 37 that serves as the starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as jackpot random numbers) are extracted, and a special figure variable display is performed based on the winning. A game result preliminary determination is performed to determine the game result based on winnings in advance at a stage before the start of the game. Note that details of the starting port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Subsequently, a specific area switch monitoring process is executed to monitor the winning (ball) of the game ball to the specific area 72 (V winning hole) (step A2). Note that details of the specific area switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a top prize winning opening switch monitoring process (step A3
). In the superior prize opening switch monitoring process, the detection of game balls by the count switch (the superior prize winning opening switch 39a) provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the special figure game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
(step A4). By updating the special figure game processing timer by -1, the timer is counted by the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing. Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the special figure game processing timer is 0 (step A5). If the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (step A5
;N), the process moves to step A15.

If the special figure game processing timer is 0 (step A5; Y), the game control device 100
That is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is set in the register (step A6). Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the special figure game sequence branch table (step A7). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made based on the special figure game processing number, and a game branching process corresponding to the special figure game processing number is executed (step A8).

If the game processing number is "0" in step A8, the game control device 100 monitors the start of variation of the special figure variation display game, sets the start of variation of the special figure variation display game, sets the effect, The special figure normal process is executed to set information necessary for performing the special figure fluctuation process (step A9). In addition, the details of the special figure normal processing will be described later.

If the game processing number is "1" in step A8, the game control device 100 sets a special figure stop display time, a special figure displaying process, and sets information necessary for performing special figure display processing. Processing during figure variation is executed (step A10). For example, in the process during special symbol fluctuation, necessary information such as the symbol stop command indicating the stop of the special symbol and the stop display time corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern are set, and the processing number "2" related to the process during special symbol display is set. Set and save in the special game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "2" in step A8, the gaming control device 100 executes a special figure displaying process to set information necessary for transitioning to a jackpot state or a small win state ( Step A11). For example, in special figure display processing, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a jackpot, conditional device operation information indicating that the conditional device is operating is set in the conditional device operation information area, and special figure normal processing is performed. Set the corresponding processing number "0" and save it in the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit, set the necessary information such as the small hit fanfare command and the time before opening of the small hit, set the processing number "3" related to the process before opening of the small hit, and display the special figure. Save in the game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variable display game is a failure, a process number "0" related to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

If the game processing number is "3" in step A8, the gaming control device 100 executes the small winning release preprocessing (step A12). For example, in the small hit opening preprocessing, the opening time of the big winning opening due to the small winning (small winning opening time, for example 1.6 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area, and the opening time of the big winning opening due to the small winning is saved in the special game processing timer area, and the opening time of the big winning opening due to the small winning is saved in the special drawing game processing timer area, and the opening time of the big winning opening due to the small winning is saved in the special game processing timer area. The on-data is saved, a small hit opening command is set as a performance command, a processing number "4" related to the small winning opening process is set, and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "4" in step A8, the gaming control device 100 executes the small winning opening process (step A13). For example, in the small hit opening process, the small hit remaining ball processing time (for example, 3.0 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "5" related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set, and the special figure Save in the game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "5" in step A8, the game control device 100 executes the small hit remaining ball processing (step A14). For example, in the small winning remaining ball process, the process number "0" related to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

When the processing based on the special figure game processing number is completed, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A15),
A symbol variation control process related to the special figure 1 display 51 is executed (step A16). After preparing a special figure 2 variation control table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A
17) Execute the symbol variation control process related to the special figure 2 display 52 (step A18). Next, a lever solenoid control process (step A19) is executed to control the opening operation of the lever solenoid 72b so as to open the lever solenoid 72b during a small hit, and the special symbol game process is ended.

[Start switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 5-19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting port switch monitoring process.

The gaming control device 100 first prepares a winning monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (step A101), executes a hard random number acquisition process (step A102), and there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36. It is determined whether or not (step A103). When there is no winning in the starting winning hole 36 (step A103; N), the processing from step A109 onwards is executed. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36 (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the game is in a right-handed gaming state (step A104).

If the game control device 100 determines that the game is not in a right-handed game state (step A104
;N), execute the processing from step A107 onwards. On the other hand, if the game state is to hit right (step A104; Y), a right hit instruction notification command is prepared as a performance command (step A105), and a performance command setting process is executed (step A106). In the production command setting process, the production command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the production command is transmitted to the production control device 300.

In other words, if it is in the general power support state (time saving state), a right-hand hitting instruction notification command is prepared and the production command setting process is executed regardless of the probability state (high probability state/low probability state) of the variable display game. . In the case of this embodiment, it is easier for left-handed players to win into the starting winning hole 36,
Normally, you cannot win a prize in the variable prize winning device 37 unless you hit right-handed. Further, unless the ball is hit right-handed, the game ball will not pass through the normal pattern starting gate 34. Therefore, in the general power support state (time saving state), right-handed players are more advantageous than left-handed players, but if there is a prize in the starting prize hole 36 during the general power support state (i.e., during the general power support state) ), a right-handed hitting instruction notification command is sent to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 sends a notification (warning) instructing the right-handed hitting to the display device 41 etc. by displaying a right-handed hitting instruction. Execute with.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information on hold by the starting winning hole 36 (starting hole 1) (step A107), and then executes the special figure starting hole switch common process (step A108). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process is executed (step A109).
110), it is determined whether there is a prize in the second starting prize opening (step A111). Second
When there is no winning in the starting winning opening (step A111; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.

On the other hand, if there is a winning in the second starting winning opening (step A111), the gaming control device 100
;Y), whether or not the normal electric accessory (normal variable prize winning device 37) is in operation, that is,
It is determined whether or not the normal variable winning device 37 is activated and is in an open state in which a winning of game balls is possible (step A112). If the normal electric accessory is in operation (step A112; Y)
, the process moves to step A114.

On the other hand, if the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112;
N), it is determined whether public electricity fraud is occurring (step A113). Normal variable prize winning device 37
If the number of fraudulent winnings is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent winnings (for example, 5 winnings), it is determined that public electricity fraud is occurring. In the normal variable winning device 37, game balls cannot be won in the closed state, and game balls can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there are game balls that win in the closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of fraudulent winnings (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud is occurring.

If the normal electricity fraud is not occurring (step A113; N), the gaming control device 100 prepares a table for setting the information of reservation by the second start winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) (
Step A114), the special figure starting port switch common process is executed (step A115), and the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, in step A113, it is determined that a power grid fraud is occurring (
Also when it is determined that step A113; Y), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second starting memory is prevented from occurring any more.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common processing (step A108, step A115) in the starting port switch monitoring process will be explained. FIG. 5-20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common process. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

The gaming control device 100 first outputs information regarding the number of winnings to the monitoring target starting port switch of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a to the external management device of the gaming machine 10. Load the number of times the starting port signal is output (step A131),
The loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step A133). If the output count does not overflow (step A
133;N), and save the updated value in the starting port signal output frequency area of RWM (step A
134), the process moves to step A135. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process moves to step A135. In this embodiment, values from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. If the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by updating by +1, and it is determined that the number of outputs has overflowed.

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets the number of special symbols pending (the number of starting memories) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a to an upper limit value (here, 4) is determined (step A135). When the number of reserved special figures to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start opening switch common process is ended. Also, if the number of reserved special drawings to be updated is less than the upper limit (here 4) (step A
135;Y) updates the number of reserved special drawings to be updated (the number of reserved special drawings 1 or the number of reserved special drawings 2) by +1 (step A136), and saves the starting opening winning flag of the object (step A137).

Next, the gaming control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch and the number of reserved special symbols (step A138), and inputs the jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process into the RWM. Save in the jackpot random number storage area (step A139). next,
The jackpot symbol random number of the special symbol variation display game that is started by the detection of the monitoring target starting port switch is extracted and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A140). Subsequently, the small winning symbol random number of the special symbol fluctuation display game that is started by the detection of the monitoring target starting port switch is extracted and saved in the small winning symbol random number storage area (step A141). Further, a random number of symbols per support for determining a time-saving symbol is extracted, and the random number of symbols per support is saved in a random number storage area of symbols per support of the RWM (step A142).

In addition, in this embodiment, since the jackpot is surely generated by the V winning after the small hit as described above, it is not necessary to use the small winning symbol random number, and step A141 is an option and does not need to be executed. Moreover, since there is no small hit result in the special figure 1 variable display game, if the starting port switch to be monitored is the starting port 1 switch 36a, it is not necessary to extract the small winning pattern random number.

In addition, the small hit pattern random number, the support hit pattern random number, and the jackpot pattern random number are the stop symbols at the time of a small hit in the special pattern 1 stop pattern setting process (step A323) and the special pattern 2 stop pattern setting process (step A333), which will be described later. number, stop symbol number at support hit, or stop symbol number at jackpot, small hit stop symbol pattern corresponding to these stop symbol numbers, support hit stop symbol pattern,
Or it is used to determine the jackpot stop symbol pattern.

In this embodiment, in order to avoid confusion, the small hit symbol random number, the support hit symbol random number, and the jackpot symbol random number are each provided independently, but in order to reduce the random number storage area of the RWM,
By sharing two random numbers (common random numbers), small hit symbols (stop symbol number at small hit, small hit stop symbol pattern), support winning symbols (stop symbol number at support hit, support hit stop symbol pattern)
, the jackpot symbols (stop symbol number at jackpot, jackpot stop symbol pattern) may be distributed. In other words, when determining small winning symbols, the range of common random numbers is divided and assigned to each small winning symbol, and when determining support winning symbols, the range of common random numbers is divided and assigned to each supporting symbol. Alternatively, when determining jackpot symbols, the range of common random numbers may be divided and assigned to each jackpot symbol.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves the variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the variable pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A143), and specifies that the result of the variable display game (game result) can be determined in advance. Executes figure pending information determination processing (pre-determination processing, pre-reading processing) (
Step A144). In the special pattern pending information determination process, stop pattern information (jackpot stop pattern, small hit stop pattern, time-saving stop pattern) based on the saved jackpot random number and hit pattern random number (jackpot pattern random number, small win pattern random number, support hit pattern random number), etc. , the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the missed stop symbol), and the look-ahead variation corresponding to the first half variation number (number of pre-reach variation) and second half variation number (number of variation after reach) based on the saved variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3. Set pattern commands as production commands. Then, a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch and the number of special figure reservations is prepared as a production command (step A145).
, executes the production command setting process (step A146), and ends the special figure start opening switch common process. In this way, the game control device 100 constitutes a preliminary determination means that can determine the result of the variable display game in advance, before the variable display game based on the starting memory is executed.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the starting winning hole 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, which becomes the right to execute the variable display game. It constitutes a start-up memory means for storing up to a predetermined number of start-up memories. Also,
The starting storage means (gaming control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning hole (starting winning hole 36), with a predetermined number as the upper limit, as a first starting memory. , various random numbers extracted based on winnings of game balls into the second starting winning hole (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as a second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

[Specific area switch monitoring processing]
Next, details of the specific area switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 5-21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of specific area switch monitoring processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is a small hit (step A201).
. If the special figure game processing number is "4" or "5", it can be determined that a small hit is occurring. When a small hit is in progress (step A201; Y), it is determined whether or not the condition device is in operation (step A202). If the condition device operation information indicating that the condition device is in operation is set, it can be determined that the condition device is in operation.

When the conditional device is not in operation (Step A202; N), the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the specific area switch 72a (Step A203). When there is an input to the specific area switch 72a (step A203; Y), that is, when there is a winning (V winning) in the specific area 72, conditional device operation information indicating that the conditional device is in operation is sent. The information is saved in the conditional device operation information area (step A204), and the specific area switch monitoring process is ended.

When there is no small hit (Step A201; N), when the condition device is operating (Step A202; Y), or when there is no input to the specific area switch 72a (Step A203).
;N), the specific area switch monitoring process ends without doing anything.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (step A9) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 5-22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure normal processing.

First, the game control device 100 is in the process of processing the accessory game processing described later, and
It is determined whether the remaining ball counter of the big prize opening is 0 (step A301). If the accessory item is not normally being processed or if the remaining ball counter in the big winning hole is not 0 (step A301
;N), the special figure fluctuation display game is not started and the process moves to step A316.

The game control device 100 is processing the accessory normally, and the remaining ball counter of the big prize opening is 0.
In this case (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the number of special drawings 2 pending (second starting memory number) is 0 or not (step A302). When the number of reserved special drawings 2 is 0 (step A302
;Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved special drawings 1 (first starting memory number) is 0 (step A30
7). Then, if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is 0 (step A307; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (step A312), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (
Step A312; N) sets a customer-waiting demonstration flag in the customer-waiting demo flag area (
Step A313).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as a performance command (
Step A314), performs production command setting processing (step A315), and performs step A3
The process moves to step 16. On the other hand, in step A312, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A312; Y), "0" related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A316), and in the special figure game process number area. Save the processing number (step A317),
The fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A318). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A319), and the special symbol normal processing is ended.

In addition, the game control device 100, if the number of reserved special drawings 2 is not 0 (step A302; N)
, executes special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A303), prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 2 reservation number command) corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reservations as a production command (step A304), Performance command setting processing is executed (step A305). Then, the special figure fluctuation process transition setting process of the special figure 2 is executed (step A306), and the special figure normal process is ended.

In the special figure 2 special figure fluctuation process transition setting process, set "1" as the process number, save the process number in the special figure game process number area, clear the customer waiting demo flag area, and set the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag. Save the changing flag in the area.

In addition, the game control device 100, if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is not 0 (step A307; N)
, executes special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A308), prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command (decoration special figure 1 reservation number command) corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations as a production command (step A309), Performance command setting processing is executed (step A310). Then, the special figure fluctuation process transition setting process of the special figure 1 is executed (step A311), and the special figure normal process is ended.

In the special figure fluctuation process transition setting process for special figure 1, set "1" as the process number, save the process number in the special figure game process number area, clear the customer waiting demo flag area, and set the special figure 1 variation control flag. Save the changing flag in the area.

In this way, by checking the number of reserved special figures 2 before checking the number of reserved special figures 1, if the number of reserved special figures 2 is not 0, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A303) is executed. It will be done. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game will be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game (special figure 2 pending priority consumption). In other words, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the game control device 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory into the variable display game based on the first start memory. It serves as a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game. In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game is to be executed in priority to the special figure 2 variable display game, the determination in step A302 is changed to the special figure 1
It is only necessary to determine whether the number of reservations≠0.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A308) in the special figure normal process will be explained. FIG. 5-23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special symbol 1 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the variation symbol discrimination area (step A321). Next, a jackpot flag 1 setting process is executed to set loss information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a jackpot (step A).
322). Details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) regarding the special figure 1 variable display game (step A323). In the special pattern 1 stop symbol setting process, save the stop symbol number at the time of loss, support hit, or jackpot, and the loss stop symbol pattern, support hit stop symbol pattern, or jackpot stop symbol pattern that corresponds to this stop symbol number. do. The stop symbol number at the time of a support hit or a jackpot is determined corresponding to the support hit symbol random number and the jackpot symbol random number, respectively.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes a special figure information setting process that sets special figure information that is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern (step A324).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is set (step A325).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) that is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (step A3
26). Next, the game control device 100 executes a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game (step A327), and ends the special figure 1 variation start process. In the variation start information setting process, a variation time value corresponding to a variation pattern (variation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as a production command, and production command setting processing is performed. In addition, in the fluctuation start information setting process, the number of reserved special symbols related to the special symbol type (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) of the special symbol variable display game to be started from now is updated by -1 (decreased by 1).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step A303) in the special figure usual process will be explained. FIG. 5-24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is similar to the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 5-23. This is done as a target.

The game control device 100 first selects the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2).
The special figure 2 variation flag indicating 2 is saved in the variation symbol discrimination area (step A331). Next, a jackpot flag 2 setting process is executed to set loss information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether the special figure 2 variable display game is a jackpot or not (step A332). .

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) regarding the special figure 2 variable display game (step A333). Furthermore, special figure information setting processing is executed to set special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern (step A334). Next, a special figure 2 variable pattern setting information table is prepared, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variable pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game is set (step A335).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (step A336). Finally, a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (step A337), and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended.

[Jackpot flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be explained. FIG. 5-25 is a flowchart showing the procedure for setting the jackpot flag 1.

The gaming control device 100 first saves the loss information in the jackpot flag 1 area and the support hit flag 1 area (step A341). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special drawing 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1), prepare it (step A342), and clear the special drawing 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the reservation number 1) to 0. (Step A343). Note that the reserved number 1 is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) regarding the special figure starting memory whose consumption order is the first (in this case, the first among the special figures 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process is executed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (step A3
44).

If the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A344) is a jackpot (step A345; Y), the gaming control device 100 overwrites and saves the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A341. (Step A346), jackpot flag 1
Finish the setting process.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A345) is not a jackpot (step A345; N), it is optionally determined whether the special figure fluctuation display game is a support hit based on the acquired jackpot random value. A support hit determination process is executed (step A347), and it is determined whether or not the result of the determination is a support hit (step A348). In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used for the determination of the support hit (in other words, the same random number value is used for the support hit determination and the jackpot determination). Here, the support hit (time-saving hit) of the special figure fluctuation display game is the time-saving result (specific result) that enters the time-saving state from the next special figure fluctuation display game, and in response to this time-saving result, The production control device 300 can display time-saving symbols on the display device 41 as a result of stopping the decorative special symbol variable display game.

If the special figure fluctuation display game is a support hit (step A348), the game control device 100
;Y), the support hit information is overwritten and saved in the support hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A341 (step A349), and the jackpot flag 1 setting process is ended.
On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation display game is not a support hit (step A348; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is ended without saving the support hit information in the support hit flag 1 area.

As described above, in this embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is one of "big hit", "support hit (time-saving hit)", and "miss", and there is no "small hit". Incidentally, steps A347 to A349 are provided as options, and they may be omitted and "support hit (time saving win)" may not be provided in the result of the special figure 1 variable display game. It is also possible to provide a "small win" in the result of the special figure 1 variable display game.

In the jackpot flag 1 setting process, the support hit information is saved in the support hit flag 1 area, but since the jackpot and the support hit do not overlap, the support hit information may be saved in the jackpot flag 1 area.

[Jackpot flag 2 setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A332) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be explained. FIG. 5-26 is a flowchart showing the procedure for setting the jackpot flag 2. This process is similar to the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 5-25, but is performed on the second starting memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the loss information in the jackpot flag 2 area, the small hit flag 2 area, and the support hit flag 2 area (step A351). Next, load the jackpot random number from the RWM special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for reserved number 1) and prepare it (step A352
), clear the special drawing 2 jackpot random number storage area (for pending number 1) to 0 (step A353)
. Note that the reserved number 1 is an area that stores information (random numbers, etc.) regarding the special figure starting memory whose consumption order is the first (in this case, the first among the special figures 2). Thereafter, a small hit determination process is executed to determine whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value (step A354).

If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A354) is a small hit (step A355; Y), the gaming control device 100 overwrites the small hit information in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A351. and save (step A356), jackpot flag 2
Finish the setting process.

On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation display game does not have a small hit (step A3
55; N), based on the obtained jackpot random value, execute a support hit determination process to determine whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game is a support hit (step A357), and the result of the determination is that it is a support hit. It is determined whether or not (step A358). In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number value is also used for the determination of the support hit (in other words, the same random number value is used for the support hit determination and the jackpot determination). Here, the support hit (time-saving hit) of the special figure fluctuation display game is the time-saving result (specific result) that enters the time-saving state from the next special figure fluctuation display game, and corresponding to this specific result, The production control device 300 can display time-saving symbols on the display device 41 as a result of stopping the decorative special symbol variable display game.

If the special figure fluctuation display game is a support hit (step A358), the game control device 100
;Y), the support hit information is overwritten and saved in the support hit flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A351 (step A359), and the jackpot flag 2 setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the support hit determination process (step A357) is not a support hit (step A358; N), it is optionally a jackpot depending on whether the prepared jackpot random value matches the jackpot determination value. A jackpot determination process may be executed to determine whether or not it is (step A360). If the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A360) is a jackpot (step A361; Y), the gaming control device 100 overwrites and saves the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A351. (Step A362), the jackpot flag 2 setting process ends. On the other hand, if the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A360) is not a jackpot (step A361; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is ended while the loss information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area.

As described above, in this embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is one of "small hit", "support hit (time-saving hit)", and "miss", but as an option, the special figure 2 variable display game results in A configuration in which a "jackpot" is provided as a result of the two-variable display game is also possible.

In addition, in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, the small hit information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area and the support hit information is saved in the support hit flag 2 area, but since the jackpot, support hit, and small win do not overlap. , the small win information and the support win information may be saved in the jackpot flag 2 area.

[Jackpot determination process]
Next, details of the jackpot determination process (steps A344, A360) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, the jackpot flag 2 setting process, etc. will be explained. FIG. 5-27 is a flowchart showing the procedure of jackpot determination processing. In addition, the jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special figure pending information determination process and the like.

The game control device 100 first sets an upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A
371), sets a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value (step A372), and determines whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A373). Note that a jackpot means that the jackpot random number matches the jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the jackpot random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit of the jackpot judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit of the jackpot judgment value, , it is determined that it is a jackpot. The upper limit determination value may be different between a low probability state (a normal probability state other than a variable probability state) and a high probability state (a variable probability state).

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (Step A373; Y), the gaming control device 100 sets a loss (other than jackpot) as the judgment result (Step A375),
The jackpot determination process ends.

The game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit determination value (step A374). If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A37
4; Y), a loss (other than a jackpot) is set as the determination result (step A375). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit determination value (step A374; N), a jackpot is set as the determination result (step A376). Once the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Small hit determination processing]
Next, details of the small hit determination process (step A354) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process will be explained. FIG. 5-28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of small hit determination processing. In addition, the small hit determination process is a process common to the small hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special figure pending information determination process and the like.

The game control device 100 first sets the small hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (step A381), and determines whether the value of the target (special figure 2) jackpot random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value. is determined (step A382). Note that a small hit means that the jackpot random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is greater than or equal to the small hit lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit, which is the upper limit of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined that there is a small hit. The small hit upper limit determination value may be different between a low probability state (normal probability state other than a variable probability state) and a high probability state (variable probability state).

Naturally, in order to avoid the result of the same special figure fluctuation display game being both a small hit and a jackpot, the range of the small hit judgment value (between the small hit lower limit judgment value and the small hit upper limit judgment value) is the same as the above-mentioned jackpot judgment value. The value ranges (between the lower limit judgment value and the upper limit judgment value) do not overlap. Note that in this embodiment,
Although the small hit random number is not provided independently and the jackpot random number is used to determine the small win, it is also possible to provide a unique small hit random number.

If the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special figure 2) is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A382; Y), the game control device 100 sets a loss as the judgment result (step A384).
, the small hit determination process ends.

In addition, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A382; N), the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the jackpot random number of the target (special figure 2) is greater than the small hit upper limit judgment value. It is determined whether or not (step A383). If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (Step A383; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (Step A38
4). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A383
;N), a small hit is set as the determination result (step A385). After setting the determination result, the small hit determination process ends. In addition, in this embodiment, the small hit probability is 1/8 (=12.5
%), the small hit lower limit determination value and the small hit upper limit determination value are set, but the small hit probability may be any other value.

[Support hit determination process]
Next, details of the support hit determination process (steps A347, A357) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, the jackpot flag 2 setting process, etc. will be explained. FIG. 5-29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of support hit determination processing. Note that the support hit determination process is a process common to the support hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in the special map reservation information determination process and the like.

The game control device 100 first sets a support hit upper limit judgment value corresponding to the probability setting value (
Step A391). Next, the lower limit judgment value of the support hit judgment value is set (step A392).
, determine whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A393)
. Note that a support hit means that the jackpot random number matches the support hit determination value corresponding to the probability setting value and the gaming state. The support hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit of the support hit judgment value, and the support hit upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit of the support hit judgment value. If the following is true, it is determined that support has been achieved. Note that the support upper limit determination value may be different between a low probability state (normal probability state other than a variable probability state) and a high probability state (variable probability state).

Naturally, in order to avoid the result of the same special symbol fluctuation display game being both a support hit and a jackpot, or a support hit and a small hit, the range of support hit judgment values (lower limit judgment value for support hit and upper limit judgment value for support hit) is set. (between) does not overlap with the ranges of the above-mentioned jackpot determination value and small hit determination value. In addition, in this embodiment, a jackpot random number is also used for determination of a support hit without providing a unique support hit random number, but a configuration in which a unique support hit random number is provided is also possible.

If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the support hit lower limit judgment value (
Step A393; Y), and set a failure (other than support hit) as the judgment result (Step A393; Y).
395), the support hit determination process ends.

Furthermore, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the support hit lower limit determination value (step A393; N), the game control device 100 determines whether the target jackpot random number value is greater than the support hit upper limit determination value. (Step A394). When the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the support hit upper limit determination value (step A394; Y), a loss (other than support hit) is set as the determination result (step A395). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the support hit upper limit determination value (step A394; N), support hit is set as the determination result (step A396). Once the determination result is set, the support hit determination process ends.

In the support hit determination process, support hit determination (time saving determination) is performed by lottery using jackpot random numbers. In support hit judgment (time saving judgment) as a lottery, when the jackpot random number matches the support hit judgment value (time saving judgment value), a support hit result (time saving result, specific result) is obtained as a judgment result and time saving is set. Ru. The support hit determination value is different from the jackpot determination value and the small hit determination value.

In addition, in order to add variety, the probability of winning per supporter (range of supporter hit judgment value ÷ range of jackpot random number) may be varied for each probability setting value, or for simplicity, the winning probability for each supporter may be different for each probability setting value. The winning probability may be the same. Setting 1 (or low setting side) is easier to win as a supporter,
You can set the probability of winning per support so that setting 6 (or the high setting side) is less likely to win per support, thereby mitigating the disadvantage of low settings, or conversely, setting it so that it is difficult for the high setting side to win per support. It may be adjusted to match the expectations of players who expect it to be easy to win through support. Further, the probability of winning per supporter may be changed monotonically from setting 1 to setting 6, or may not be monotonous, such as changing every two stages of setting. The winning probability for each supporter may be made different between the even number setting and the odd number setting to improve the player's interest in estimating the probability setting value.

Further, the probability of winning a support hit may be made different between low probability jackpot probability (other than in a variable probability state) and medium probability (in a probability variable state) to give a sharp difference, or it may be the same for the sake of simplicity. It will be easier to win when the probability is low (other than when the probability is variable), and it will be difficult to win when the probability is high (when the probability is variable).
You can set the winning probability for each supporter to alleviate the disadvantages of low probability, or conversely,
This may be tailored to the expectations of players who expect it to be easy to win even with a high probability of winning. for example,
The probability of winning per supporter may be set so that the supporter will win only during low probability (the probability of winning per supporter is zero during high probability) to alleviate the disadvantage during low probability.

Further, the winning probabilities per support may be made different between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game to add contrast, or they may be the same for the sake of simplicity. For example, in order to increase the number of support wins in the general power support state (time saving state or variable probability state), the probability of winning a support hit in the special chart 2 variable display game may be made larger than that in the special chart 1 variable display game. Conversely, in order to improve the interest of the game in the normal gaming state, the probability of winning per support in the special figure 1 variable display game may be made larger than in the special figure 2 variable display game. In short, the probability of winning a support in one of the special pattern 1 variable display game and the special pattern 2 variable display game is set to zero, and the probability of winning a support in the other special pattern variable display game is set to zero. may occur.

When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a support hit result (time saving result), in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) or the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A333),
A time-saving symbol (time-saving symbol number, time-saving symbol pattern) is set as a stopping symbol (stopping symbol number, stopping symbol pattern), and the time-saving state starts from the next special symbol variation display game. That is,
In this case, the time suddenly becomes short without going through a jackpot (sudden time short). In addition, in this case, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the time-saving symbol is sent to the production control device 300, and the display device 4
1, the performance control device 300 displays a time-saving symbol (decorative time-saving symbol) also as a decorative stop symbol.

The time-saving symbol displayed on the display device 41 is, for example, a symbol with only the left symbol and the middle symbol.
1, 1, 3" etc. There are no restrictions on time-saving symbols as long as they are decided in advance, but there are regular patterns such as "1, 2, 3" where the numbers are lined up in order or "1, 3, 1" where only the left and right symbols are aligned. However, it is preferable that it is easy for players to remember. A plurality of time-saving symbols may be prepared, and the number of times the special symbol variation display game in which the time-saving state continues (time-saving frequency) may be determined for each time-saving symbol.

The lamp display parts 1 and 2 of the lamp display device 75 emit light in a specific manner as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) in the case of a time-saving result (time-saving symbol), unlike in the case of a jackpot result or a small hit result. do. For example, the lamp display parts 1 and 2 may emit light in a warm color such as red in the case of a jackpot result or a small win result, and a neutral color such as green or blue in the case of a time-saving result (time-saving symbol). It may emit light in a color or a cool color (that is, a color other than a warm color). Moreover, in the case of a miss, the light is turned off. Therefore, when a time-saving symbol is displayed as a stop symbol, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that a jackpot has occurred, and it becomes easier for the player to understand that he has won in time-saving.

In addition, if the number of times of the special figure fluctuation display game that is executed after the end of the jackpot state (excluding the number of times in the variable probability state) reaches a predetermined number (so-called ceiling number of times, time-saving ceiling), even if you do not win the support hit. Enter a time-saving state (play time). At this time, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a loss, the lamp display sections 1 and 2 are turned off, and if the result is a small hit or a jackpot, they emit light in a warm color. At this time, if it is not a small hit or a jackpot, the lamp display parts 1 and 2 may emit light in a cool color as the fourth symbol in order to make it easier for the player to recognize that the game will enter a time-saving state. . The predetermined number of times (ceiling number of times) is, for example, 500 times. In this case, a losing symbol (a time-saving symbol may be used) or a small winning symbol (if it is a small winning without a V winning) is displayed as a stop symbol on the special symbol display device or the display device 41, and the next special symbol variation display game is displayed. It enters into a time saving state. In this case, the time-saving symbols displayed on the display device 41 include, for example, "3, 3, 5" with only the left symbol and the middle symbol ("1, 1,
3" is also acceptable).

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be explained. FIG. 5-30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step A401). When the jackpot flag 1 indicates a jackpot (step A401; Y), a jackpot pattern random number is loaded from the special figure 1 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A402). Next, special map 1
Set the jackpot symbol table (step A403), acquire the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number, and save it in the RWM special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A4
04). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table (step A405), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 display 51) and the halt symbol on the display device 41. Then, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired, and saved in the RWM special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (step A407), the fanfare information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired, and the fanfare information Save in the area (step A408). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
It is saved in the time reduction determination data area (step A409). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time reduction state after the end of the jackpot (with or without time reduction), and is used in the later-described special chart 1 jackpot end process and special chart 2 jackpot end process. Next, save production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (or stop symbol number, symbol A described later) (step A
410). Thereafter, the process moves to step A420.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A401
;N), optionally, it is determined whether support hit flag 1 indicates support hit (step A411). When the support hit flag 1 indicates a support hit (step A411; Y), a random number is loaded from the special pattern 1 support symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A412),
A symbol table per special figure support is set (step A413). Then, with reference to the special pattern 1 support symbol table, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded random number is obtained and saved in the special pattern 1 stop symbol number area (step A414). Subsequently, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A415). After that, the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction determination data area (step A416), and the production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A417). Thereafter, the process moves to step A420.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A401
;N), and if the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (step A411; N), save the stop symbol number at the time of miss in the special pattern 1 stop symbol number area (step A418), and save the miss stop symbol pattern. Save in the stop symbol pattern area (step A419). Thereafter, the process moves to step A420. In addition, if the process related to the support hit (steps A347 to A349) is not executed in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A401; N), steps A411 to A417 are not executed and step Proceed to A418.

After steps A410, A417, and A419, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 1 command as a production command in the decorative special figure 1 command area. (Step A420). Through the above processing, the stop symbols corresponding to the results of the special figure 1 variable display game are set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes the production command setting process (step A421
). Thereby, the decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the production control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number in the test signal output data area (step A422), and saves the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number in the test signal output data area (step A422), and saves the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number in the special pattern 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1).
is cleared to 0 (step A423). After that, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended. In addition, by the above-mentioned symbol fluctuation control process, the stop symbol (jackpot symbol, time-saving symbol, losing symbol, etc.) corresponding to the halt symbol pattern or the halt symbol number is displayed on the special symbol 1 display 51.
is executed.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
Next, details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be explained. FIG. 5-31 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the small win flag 2 is a small win, that is, whether small win information is saved in the small win flag 2 area (step A431). When the small hit flag 2 indicates a small hit (step A431; Y), a jackpot pattern random number is loaded from the special figure 2 jackpot pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A432). Next, special map 2
Set the jackpot symbol table (step A433), acquire the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number, and save it in the RWM special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A4
34). This process selects the type of special result.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball wins a V prize by opening the second special variable winning device 39 when a small hit occurs, and a jackpot occurs immediately after the small hit, so the special figure 2 variable display game does not win a small hit. (Even if the small hit flag 2 indicates a small hit), the jackpot symbol random number is loaded. However, a configuration is also possible in which the small winning symbol random number (step A141) is loaded and the stop symbol number corresponding to the small winning symbol random number is acquired. In this configuration, when winning a V prize (step A203 in FIG. 5-21; when the result is Y), the jackpot symbol random number may be loaded, the stop symbol number may be obtained, and the processing from steps A437 to A440 may be executed. .

After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 jackpot stop symbol information table (step A435), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 2 display 52) and the halt symbol on the display device 41. In addition, in the case of a small hit, the special pattern 2 small hit stop pattern information table may be used instead of the special pattern 2 small hit stop pattern information table. Then, obtain the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number and save it in the RWM special pattern 2 round number upper limit value information area (step A4
37), obtain the fanfare information corresponding to the stopped symbol number and save it in the fanfare information area (step A438). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
It is saved in the time reduction determination data area (step A439). The time reduction determination data includes information on the presence or absence of a time reduction state after the end of the jackpot (with or without time reduction), and is used in the later-described special chart 1 jackpot end process and special chart 2 jackpot end process. Next, production mode transition information corresponding to the stopped symbol pattern (or the stopped symbol number, symbols B to G to be described later) is saved (step A410). Thereafter, the process moves to step A451.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A431
;N), it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot, that is, whether jackpot information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step A441). If the jackpot flag 2 indicates a jackpot (step A441; Y), the process moves to steps A432 and subsequent steps, but using the special pattern 2 jackpot symbol table and the special pattern 2 jackpot stop pattern information table, which are different from the case of a small hit, good.

The game control device 100 determines that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A441; N).
, it is determined whether the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A442). When the support hit flag 2 indicates a support hit (step A442; Y), a random number is loaded from the special pattern 2 support pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A443), and the special pattern 2 support pattern table is loaded. is set (step A444). Then, referring to the special figure 2 support symbol table, the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded random number is obtained and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A445). Next, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A446), and the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is obtained and saved in the time reduction judgment data area. (Step A447).
After that, the production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A448).
), the process moves to step A451.

When the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A431; N), the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A441; N), and the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (step A442; N), the stop symbol number at the time of miss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A449), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A450). Thereafter, the process moves to step A451.

In addition, in this embodiment, since a "jackpot" is not provided as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the process of step A441 is an option and does not need to be executed. That is, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a small hit (step A431; N), without executing step A441,
The process may proceed to step A442.

After steps A440, A448, and A450, the game control device 100 prepares a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern, and saves the decorative special figure 2 command as a production command in the decorative special figure 2 command area. (Step A451). Through the above processing, the stop symbols corresponding to the results of the special figure 2 variable display game are set.

After that, the game control device 100 executes the production command setting process (step A452
). The decorative special figure 2 command is transmitted to the production control device 300.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number in the test signal output data area (step A453), and saves the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number in the test signal output data area (step A453), and saves the symbol data corresponding to the stopped symbol number in the special pattern 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1).
is cleared to 0 (step A454). Moreover, when the small winning pattern random number (step A141) is extracted, the special figure 2 small winning pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) may be cleared to 0.
After that, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is ended. In addition, by the above-mentioned symbol fluctuation control process,
A stop display of a stop symbol (a jackpot symbol, a time saving symbol, a losing symbol, etc.) corresponding to the stop symbol pattern or the stop symbol number is executed on the special symbol 2 display 52.

In this way, the game control device 100 executes the special drawing 1 variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the starting prize winning port 36, and the game control device 100 executes the special drawing 1 variable display game as the variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the normal variable prize winning device 37. The variable display game execution means executes the special figure 2 variable display game as a variable display game. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting process (steps A324, A334) in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process will be explained. FIG. 5-32 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process. In this embodiment, the probability state (low probability/high probability, with/without shortened time) does not directly affect the distribution of fluctuations, but the production mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. As for the performance mode, one performance mode is set from a plurality of performance modes depending on the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special symbol variation display game, etc. Incidentally, the fluctuations may be directly distributed based on the probability state, the presence or absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special symbol fluctuation display game, etc.

The game control device 100 first sets the first half variation group selection pointer table (step A461), and acquires the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the production mode information (step A462). Next, set the first half variation group selection offset table (
Step A463), the offset data corresponding to the target number of reserved special symbols (number of reserved special symbols 1 or number of reserved special symbols 2) and the stopped symbol pattern is acquired (step A464).

Next, the gaming control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data (step A465), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area (step A466). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of reservations, and the performance mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. This fluctuation distribution information 1 is
This is a table pointer for sorting out the first half fluctuation (variation before the start of reach).
Used later to select variable groups. However, although it depends on the specifications of the model, when there is a large number of reservations, the fluctuation time is shortened only in the case of a loss, so in cases other than a loss, the number of reservations does not affect the distribution of first-half fluctuations. Note that a fluctuation group contains multiple fluctuation patterns, and when determining a fluctuation pattern, first select a fluctuation group, and then select one fluctuation pattern from this fluctuation group. ing.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the second half variation group selection pointer table (step A467) and acquires the second half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the production mode information (step A468). Next, set the second half variation group selection offset table (
Step A469), obtain the offset data corresponding to the target special symbol reservation number and stop symbol pattern (step A470).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the second half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data (step A471), saves the value obtained by the addition in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step A472), and Finish the information setting process. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stopped symbol, the number of reservations, and the production mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This variation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing second half variations (types of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a variation group.
However, only in the case of a loss, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of holds (when the number of holds is large, the reach occurrence rate becomes low). does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the variation pattern setting process (steps A326, A336) in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process will be explained. FIG. 5-33 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation pattern setting process.

The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game until reaching the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half fluctuation pattern is set, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

The gaming control device 100 first sets a variable group selection address table (step A481), obtains the address of the latter half variable group table corresponding to the variable distribution information 2,
Prepare (step A482), load variable pattern random number 1 from the target variable pattern random number 1 storage area (for pending number 1), and prepare (step A483). In this embodiment,
The structure of the second half fluctuation group table differs depending on whether it is a win or a loss. in particular,
The size for winning is 1 byte, and the size for losing is 2 bytes. The occurrence rate of hits is lower than the occurrence rate of misses, and 1 byte is sufficient, so from the viewpoint of saving data capacity, the size of hits is set to 1 byte. Therefore, at the time of winning, the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1
Only the lower values of are used. In addition, the occurrence rate of misses is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and because we want to create more diverse effects, the size of misses is set to 2 bytes.

Then, the gaming control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a loss (step A484), and if it is a loss (step A484; Y), performs a 2-byte distribution process (step A485). , the process moves to step A487. Moreover, if it is not an outlier (step A484; N), distribution processing (step A486) is performed, and the process moves to step A487.

Next, the gaming control device 100 acquires the address of the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the distribution, prepares it (step A487), and stores the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area ( Variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the pending number 1) and prepared (step A488). Then, the distribution process is executed (step A489), and the second half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the second half variation number area (step A490). Through this process, the second half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (step A491).
), the table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step A
492). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table (first half variation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is obtained and prepared (step A493), and the variation pattern is selected from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the pending number 1). Random number 3 is loaded and prepared (step A494). After that, the distribution process (step A495) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is obtained, and it is saved in the first half variation number area (step A496).
, the variation pattern setting process ends. Through this process, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 10
0 constitutes a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte distribution processing]
Next, details of the 2-byte distribution process (step A485) in the fluctuation pattern setting process will be explained. FIG. 5-34 is a flowchart showing the procedure for 2-byte distribution processing. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The gaming control device 100 first checks whether the leading data of the selection table (the latter half variable group table prepared in step A482) is a code for no distribution (ie, "0") (step A501). Here, the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, but the second half fluctuation group table defines only the second half fluctuation selection table whose second half fluctuation pattern is "no reach". For variable group tables (for example, some variable group tables for cases where the result is an error), there is no need for sorting, so a sorting value of "0", that is, a code for no sorting, is specified at the beginning. .

Then, if the first data of the selection table (second half variable group table) is a code with no distribution (step A502; Y), the gaming control device 100 updates the data to the address corresponding to the distribution result ( Step A507), the 2-byte distribution process ends. On the other hand, if the first data in the selection table (second half variation group table) is not a code with no distribution (step A502; N), the first distribution value specified in the selection table (second half variation group table) is obtained. (Step A503).

Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value obtained in step A503 from the random value prepared in step A483 (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step A504).
), it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A505).
. Then, if the new random value is not smaller than "0" (step A505; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A506), the process moves to step A503, and the subsequent Perform processing. That is, the next distribution value specified in the selection table (second half variation group table) is obtained (step A503), and then a new distribution value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value from the random value determined in the previous step A505. A random number value is calculated (step A504), and it is determined whether the new calculated random number value is smaller than "0" (step A505).

The above process is executed until it is determined in step A505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A505; Y). As a result, any one of the second-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one second-half variation selection table defined in the selection table (second-half variation group table). Then, in step A505, if it is determined that the new random value is smaller than "0" (step A505; Y), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A507), and 2-byte distribution processing is performed. end.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the distribution process (steps A486, A489, A495) in the variation pattern setting process will be explained. FIG. 5-35 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the distribution process. The distribution process includes selecting the second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2, or selecting the first half variation selection table (second half variation selection table) based on the variation pattern random number 3. This process is for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

The gaming control device 100 first selects the top of the target selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in step A482, the second half variation selection table prepared in step A487, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A493). It is checked whether the data is a no-distribution code (ie, "0") (step A511). Here, the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and first half variation pattern (first half variation number). In the case of a selection table that stores a distribution value of , but does not require distribution, a distribution value of "0", that is, a code indicating no distribution, is defined at the beginning.

Then, if the first data of the target selection table (the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is a code with no distribution (step A512; Y), the gaming control device 100 determines the distribution result. is updated to the address of the data corresponding to (step A51 step A517), and the distribution process ends. On the other hand, the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table)
If the first data is not a no-distribution code (step A512; N), the first distribution value specified in the target selection table (second-half variation group table, second-half variation selection table, or first-half variation selection table) is Acquire (step A513).

Continuing, the game control device 100 performs step A483, step A488, and step A4.
A new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value obtained in step A513 from the random value prepared in step 94 (value of variable pattern random number 1, variable pattern random number 2, and variable pattern random number 3) (step A514), Determine whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (
Step A515). Then, if the new random value is not smaller than "0" (step A
515;N), after updating the address to the next distribution value (step A516), the process moves to step A513 and the subsequent processes are performed.

That is, the next distribution value specified in the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table) is obtained (step A513).
Then, a new random number is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random number determined in the previous step A515 (step A514), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number is smaller than "0". (Step A515). The above process is executed until it is determined in step A515 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A515; Y). As a result, at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), or first half variation pattern (first half variation number) specified in the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table, first half variation selection table) Any one of the second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number), or first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from among the variation numbers).

Then, if the gaming control device 100 determines in step A515 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A515; Y), it updates the address to the data corresponding to the distributed result (step A517). ), the distribution process ends.

[Fluctuation start information setting process]
Next, details of the variation start information setting process (steps A327, A337) in the special figure 1 variation start process and the special figure 2 variation start process will be explained. FIG. 5-36 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the variable display game to be started is the special figure 2 variable display game (step A521). If the variable display game to be started is not the special figure 2 variable display game but the special figure 1 variable display game (step A521; N), clear the random number storage area of the target variable pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (step A522). . Next, a first half variation time value table is set (step A523), and a first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is obtained (step A524). Furthermore, a second half fluctuation time value table is set (step A5
25), obtain the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number (step A526).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (step A527), and saves the added value (total fluctuation time value) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A528). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A529), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared as a production command (step A530), and production command setting processing is performed. (Step A53
1). Next, the number of special symbols on hold corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag indicating the starting variation symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is updated by -1 (step A532), and the random number corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is stored. The area address is set (step A533). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A534), the free area after the shift is cleared (step A535), and the fluctuation start information setting process is ended.

First, when the variable display game to be started is the special figure 2 variable display game (step A521; Y), the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit or a jackpot. It is determined (step A536). When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit or a jackpot (step A536; Y), the process from step A522 onward is executed in the same way as when the variable display game to be started is the special figure 1 variable display game. . Note that, unlike this embodiment, even when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a support hit, the configuration may be such that the processing from step A522 onwards is executed.

When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is neither a small hit nor a jackpot (step A536; N), that is, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a loss, after the jackpot ends, the game control device 100 Save the variation time value (total variation time value) corresponding to the number of special figure 2 variations (the number of executions of the special figure 2 variation display game) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A53
7).

Therefore, the variable time value of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 in the case of a small hit or jackpot
The variable time value of the variable display game is a time value that is set by the allocation (lottery) and is not fixed, while the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game in the case of a loss is determined by the number of times the special figure 2 variable changes after the end of the jackpot. This is a fixed time value set to . That is, the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game is controlled by the rotation speed. In addition, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the variable time value of the special figure 2 variable display game in the case of a small hit or a jackpot is also a fixed time value.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 issues a variable command (MODE, AC) corresponding to the variable time value.
TION) as a production command (step A538), and executes the processing from step A531 onwards.

In addition, when the support status (support mode, general electricity release pattern) related to the mode (content) of general electricity support is variable as in the modification example described below, the fluctuation time value is the number of times the special figure 2 changes after the end of the jackpot. In addition to this, it may also be set corresponding to the support state.

Through the above processing, information regarding the start of the special figure variable display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as a determination device that determines various random numbers stored in the startup storage device (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means that can determine a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in a variable display game based on the determination information in the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special symbol variation display games. to set detailed performance contents in the decorative special figure variable display game. Information related to the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decorative special figure reservation number command that includes information on the starting memory number (number of reservations), a decorative special figure command that includes information on stop symbols, and a change in the special figure fluctuation display game. Examples include variable commands that include information regarding patterns, and the commands are transmitted to the production control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the production control device 300 can proceed efficiently.

[Special figure fluctuation processing]
Next, details of the special figure fluctuation processing (step A10) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 5-37 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure fluctuation processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 variation is in progress (the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed) (step A601). When the special figure 2 is not changing, that is, when the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 changing display game is being executed) (step A601; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A602).

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 is changing (step A601; Y), the game control device 100 determines whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit or a jackpot (step A6
03). If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit or a jackpot (step A6
03;Y), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A602). The display time (stop display time) is the display time of the stop symbols (stop display) that are the results of the variable display game. In addition, unlike this embodiment, even when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a support hit, the configuration may be such that the process moves to step A602.

If the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is not a small hit or a jackpot, the game control device 100
That is, in the case of a loss (step A603; N), the number of changes in the special figure 2 after the end of the jackpot (
Set the display time corresponding to the number of executions of the special figure 2 variable display game (step A604)
.

Therefore, the display time of the special figure 1 variable display game and the display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the case of a small hit or jackpot are non-fixed times based on the stop symbol pattern set in the lottery, while The display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in this case is fixedly set for each special figure 2 variable number of times (the number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is executed) after the end of the jackpot. In addition, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the case of a small hit or a jackpot is also set fixedly.

In addition, as described below, when the support state (support mode, general power release pattern) regarding the mode (content) of general power support is variable, the display time (stop display time) is the special figure 2 after the jackpot ends.
It may be set in accordance with not only the number of fluctuations but also the support state.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the display time set in step A602 or step A604 in the special figure game processing timer area (step A605). Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in general power support (in a time saving state) (step A60).
6). If general electricity support is not in progress (step A606; N), the process moves to step A613. If it is under general power support (step A606; Y), it is determined whether it is a variation of the special figure 1 variation display game (step A607). If it is a variation of the special figure 1 variation display game (step A607; Y), the process moves to step A610.

When the game control device 100 is a variation of the special figure 2 variation display game (step A607;
N), the time reduction variation number 2 is updated by -1 (decreased by 1) (step A608), and it is determined whether the time reduction variation number 2 is 0 (step A609). Time reduction variation number 2 is 0
If so (Step A609; Y), a time saving end setting process for setting the end of time saving is executed (Step A612).

The game control device 100 determines that the number of time reduction fluctuations 2 is not 0 (Step A609; N)
, the time reduction variation number 1 is updated by -1 (decreased by 1) (step A610), and it is determined whether or not the time reduction variation number 1 is 0 (step A611). If the time reduction variation number 1 is not 0 (step A611; N), the process moves to step A613. On the other hand, if the time reduction variation number 1 is 0 (step A611; Y), a time reduction end setting process for setting the end of time reduction is executed (step A612). Thereafter, a production mode information check process to be described later is executed (step A613).

After that, the game control device 100 executes the special figure display process transition setting process (step A
614). In the special figure display process transition setting process, the process number "2" related to the special figure display process is set, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area, and the change in the special figure 1 display 51 is stopped. The stop flag is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area, and the stop flag related to the variation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area. After that, the special figure fluctuation processing is ended.

[Time-saving end setting process]
Next, details of the time saving end setting process (step A612) in the special figure fluctuation process will be explained. FIG. 5-38 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the time saving termination setting process.

The gaming control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the time-saving end in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A621). Here, the signal regarding the time-saving end is the off data of the jackpot 2 signal. As a result, a signal regarding time-saving termination is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71.

In addition, in the normal game state, because the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 is very short or the winning probability of the normal pattern variable display game is very low, there is no winning in the normal variable winning device 37 and the second starting memory is Does not occur. Therefore, at the end of the time saving, the second starting memory (special figure 2 starting memory,
When the special figure 2 pending) remains as the remaining pending, the on-data output of the jackpot 2 signal is continued (no inconvenience will occur even if done in this way), and the special figure fluctuation display game related to the last remaining pending When the variable display stops, the off data of the jackpot 2 signal (signal related to time saving end) may be output to an external device.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves the signal regarding the time saving end in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A622). As a result, a signal regarding the time-saving end is outputted to the sight-fire test device as a test signal. The signals related to the time reduction end here are, for example, off data of the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, off data of the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal,
These are the off data of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal, the off data of the normal electric accessory 1 opening extension state signal, and the off data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal. Then, the number with no time saving is saved in the game state display number area of the RWM (step A623), the low probability low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the general pattern game mode flag area of the RWM (step A624), and the RWM special Save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the figure game mode flag area (step A62
5).

Next, the gaming control device 100 clears the time reduction variation number 1 area of the RWM where the time reduction variation number 1 is stored (step A626), and clears the time reduction variation number 1 area of the RWM where the time reduction variation number 2 is stored.
The time reduction variation number 2 area is cleared (step A627). Then, the signal regarding the left-handed batting instruction is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A628), and the number indicating the left-handed batting state is saved in the game status display number 2 area of the RWM (step A629).

Thereafter, the normal base state information is saved in the normal base state determination area of the RWM (step A630). Here, the normal base state information is a value indicating the normal gaming state, which is the period for calculating the base value (ball payout rate in the normal gaming state). Thereafter, the time saving end setting process is ended.

In this way, by executing the time-saving end setting process, the time-saving state (state with low probability of special drawings and normal electricity support) can be appropriately changed from the normal gaming state (state with low probability of special drawings and no normal electricity support)
It can be moved to

[Production mode information check process]
Next, details of the performance mode information check process (step A613) in the special figure fluctuation process will be explained. FIG. 5-39 is a flowchart showing the procedure of production mode information check processing.

The gaming control device 100 first determines whether the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A641). If the next mode transition information is a no-update code (step A
641;Y) ends the production mode information check process. In this case, the production mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game has been executed, and for example, a production mode that continues until the next jackpot is selected.

In addition, if the next mode transition information is not a no-update code (step A641; N), the game control device 100 reduces the number of remaining rotations of the effect by -1, which is the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game can be executed until the change of the effect mode. It is updated (step A642), and it is determined whether the number of rotations remaining for the effect has become 0 (step A643). Here, the number of remaining rotations of the effect is updated by -1 only if the main special figure variable display game is executed this time, but it is also updated by -1 if it is a non-main variable display game. Configuration is also possible.

Depending on the gaming state and the like, one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is determined as the main variable display game. For example, the main fluctuating display game (main fluctuating display game) is the one that is executed more frequently between the special figure 1 fluctuating display game and the special diagram 2 fluctuating display game, and the non-main fluctuating display game (secondary fluctuating display game) Game) is special map 1
This is the one that is not frequently executed between the variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. In addition, the game control device 100 and/or the production control device 300 may store information (special figure 1 or special figure 2) indicating the main variable display game according to the game state etc.

If the number of rotations remaining in the performance is not 0 (step A643; N), the performance mode information check process is ended. In addition, if the remaining number of rotations of the effect becomes 0 (step A643
;Y), that is, if the production mode is to be transferred from the next special figure fluctuation display game, a production mode information address table is set (step A644), and the address of the table corresponding to the next mode transfer information is obtained (step A645). ).

Then, the game control device 100 acquires the production mode number of the production mode to be transferred, and RW
Save it in the production mode number area in M (step A646), obtain the production remaining rotation number (initial value) of the production mode to be transferred, save it in the production remaining rotation number area in RWM (step A647), The next mode transition information of the production mode to be transitioned to is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area in the RWM (step A648).

In addition, when changing the production mode due to the end of the time saving state (time reduction variation number 1 or 2 = 0), the number of remaining production rotations (initial value) of the production mode to be transitioned to is set to the specified remaining number of reservations (for example, 4 to 2). 9). The number of remaining reservations is the number of special figure 2 reservations (remaining reservations) that are consumed after the end of the time saving state, and is the number of times the special symbol 2 changes after the end of the time saving state. The remaining reserve is generated by winning a prize in the normal variable winning device 37, which is released by winning a common symbol during the time saving state. In this way, the remaining hold extinguishment mode (FIG. 5-54) can be set as a corresponding production mode while the remaining hold (special figure 2 hold, special figure 2 start memory) is being used up.

Alternatively, if the production mode is to be shifted when the release of the normal variable winning device 37 that is released by hitting a common figure during the time saving state (corresponding to the latter half release described later) is completed, the production remaining rotation of the production mode to be shifted to is completed. The number (initial value) may be set to the number of special drawings 2 reserved at that time. As a result, after the normal variable winning device 37 that is released by winning a normal figure during the time saving state has finished releasing, and the special figure 2 is pending, the mode after the normal electricity release is completed (Fig. 5-71A ) can be set. Furthermore, in this case, the remaining number of production rotations (initial value) of the production mode to be transitioned to when the time saving state ends (time reduction variation number 1 or 2 = 0) is set to a predetermined value (for example, from 6 to the number of time reduction times) according to the number of time reduction times. subtracted value) to set the mode before the end of utility power release (Figure 5-71A).

Furthermore, when switching the production mode due to the end of the time saving state (time reduction variation number 1 or 2 = 0), the number of remaining production rotations (initial value) of the production mode to be transitioned to is set to the number of special figure 2 reservations at that time or It may be set to a predetermined number below the number of reserved special figures 2. In this way, the production mode that corresponds to the number of reserved special figures 2 at the end of time saving or the predetermined number of remaining reserves (special figure 2 pending, special figure 2 starting memory) is the mode for extinguishing the remaining reserves generated during time saving (figure 2). 5-71B) can be set. Change the number of remaining rotations (initial value) of the production mode that changes after the time saving mode is changed to the number of remaining rotations (initial value) from the specified number of remaining reservations (for example 10) to the number of remaining reservations that have been consumed in the time saving mode. It can be set to a subtracted value (excessive hold count). In this way, the excess reservation consumption mode (FIG. 5-71B) can be set as a performance mode after the remaining reservation consumption mode during time reduction.

Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a probability information command (including probability state information, time saving information, and performance mode information) corresponding to the newly set performance mode number as a performance command (step A649). ), it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command field upon power outage recovery (step A650). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the transmission command field at power failure recovery (step A650; Y), that is, if the probability information command has not changed, the production mode information check process is ended.

Further, if the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the transmission command area when power is restored (step A650; N), save the prepared probability information command in the transmission command area when power is restored (step A651), A production command setting process for setting the probability information command as a production command is executed (step A652).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares an effect rotation number command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation number as an effect command (step A653), and executes an effect command setting process (step A654). Thereby, the production control device 300 can acquire the number of rotations remaining for the production. Next, a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number 2 is prepared as a production command (step A655), and production command setting processing (step A656) is executed. Thereby, the production control device 300 can acquire the number of times of time reduction fluctuation 2. Note that the game control device 100 may similarly prepare the time reduction variation number 1 as a production command and execute the production command setting process.

Next, when the new production mode number is acquired in step A646, the game control device 100 determines whether the new production mode is a left-handed batting mode (step A65).
7) If it is not the left-handed hitting mode (step A657; N), the production mode information check process is ended. In addition, if the mode is for left-handed hitting (step A657; Y), a left-handed hitting instruction notification command is prepared as a production command (step A658), a production command setting process is executed (step A659), and production mode information is Finish the check process.

In addition, in the above, regardless of the determination result (step A643) as to whether or not the remaining number of production rotations is 0, the production rotation number command is updated to correspond to the updated production remaining rotation number (step A642). Number of time reduction fluctuations 1 and 2 (step A608, step A61)
The time reduction variation number command corresponding to 0) may also be prepared as an effect command, and the effect command setting process may be executed.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, details of the special figure display process (step A11) in the special figure game process will be explained. FIG. 5-30 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure display processing. FIG. 5-40 shows the first half of the special figure display process, and FIG. 5-41 shows the second half of the special figure display process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not what has been executed this time is the variation of the special figure 1 (step A701). That is, it is determined whether the display of the stopped symbols (stopped display) is related to the special symbol 1 variable display game. If what was executed this time is the variation of special map 1 (step A701; Y), the jackpot flag 1 is loaded (step A702), the jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (step A703), and the loaded jackpot flag 1 is It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot (step A704).

If the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot, the gaming control device 100 performs step A
704; Y), the conditional device operation information indicating that the conditional device is in operation is saved in the conditional device operation information area (step A705), and the process moves to step A706. If the loaded jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A704; N), the process moves to step A711.

Then, the game control device 100 executes the special figure normal process transition setting process (step A7
06). In the special pattern normal process transition setting process, 0 is set as the process number related to the special pattern normal process, the process number is saved in the special pattern game process number area, and the variable pattern discrimination flag area is cleared.
After that, the special figure displaying process is ended.

On the other hand, if what was executed this time is the variation of special figure 2 (step A701; N), the game control device 100 loads the jackpot flag 2 (step A707) and clears the jackpot flag 2 area (step A708). ). It is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A709). Jackpot flag 2 is set when it is a jackpot (step A70
9; Y), the conditional device operation information indicating that the conditional device is in operation is saved in the conditional device operation information area (step A700), and the process moves to step A706. jackpot flag 2
If it is not a big hit (step A709; N), that is, if it is a small hit or a miss, the process moves to step A711.

In addition, in this embodiment, since a "jackpot" is not provided as a result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the processes of steps A707 to A710 are optional and do not need to be executed. That is, after step A701, the process may proceed to step A711.

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not the special symbol is currently in a high probability state (in a variable probability state) (step A711). If the special figure is not high probability (step A711; N), it is determined whether there is a ceiling reached flag indicating that the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed has reached the ceiling (time saving ceiling) ( Step A712).

If there is no ceiling reached flag (step A712; N), the gaming control device 100
Update the ceiling counter value in the RWM ceiling counter area by +1 (increase by 1) (Step A
7113). Then, whether or not the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game (including the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game) has been executed in a state other than the probability variable state (i.e., the ceiling counter value) has reached the ceiling number of times. is determined (step A714). For example, the ceiling number of times is 500 times. When the ceiling number of times has been reached (step A714; Y), the ceiling time reduction activation flag indicating that the ceiling time reduction will occur and the ceiling reached flag indicating that the ceiling number of times has been reached are set (
on) (step A715). Note that a configuration in which the ceiling time reduction activation flag and the ceiling reached flag are combined into one flag is also possible.

Note that the ceiling reached flag is cleared when a jackpot occurs, but is not cleared unless a jackpot occurs. Therefore, once the ceiling has been reached, if the time saving cycle ends without hitting the jackpot, the ceiling reached flag will remain set (on).
After that, the ceiling time reduction will not occur, and the ceiling counter value will not be updated.

On the other hand, when the special symbol is in a high probability state (in a variable probability state), the gaming control device 100 controls the
111; Y), if there is a ceiling reached flag (step A712; Y), if the ceiling has not been reached (step A714; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A716). ).

Next, the game control device 100 determines that the small hit flag 2 indicates a small hit (step A71).
6; Y), prepare a small win fanfare command as a production command (step A71
7) Execute production command setting processing (step A718). Then, load the decorative special figure 2 command from the decorative special figure 2 command area as a production command and prepare it (step A7
19) Execute production command setting processing (step A720). Thereafter, the small hit opening pre-processing transition setting process is executed (step A721), and the special figure displaying process is ended.

In the small hit pre-release process transition setting process, set 3 as the process number related to the small hit pre-release process, save the process number in the special figure game process number area, and set the small hit pre-release time (for example, 300 m
s) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. In addition, the signal regarding the start of the small winning game (
For example, the jackpot 1 signal is turned on (output for jackpot and small win)) and is saved in the external information output data area.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit, that is, if it is a loss (step A716; N), the game control device 100 determines whether there is a ceiling time reduction activation flag indicating that a ceiling time reduction will occur. (Step A722). If there is a ceiling time reduction activation flag (step A722; Y), the initial value of the ceiling time reduction number (the number of time reductions due to ceiling time reduction) is saved in the time reduction variation number 1 area and the time reduction variation number 2 area (step A723). As mentioned above,
The initial values of the number of time reduction fluctuations 1 and the number of time reduction fluctuations 2 (for example, 704 times and 700 times) in the case of ceiling time reduction are saved here. The initial value may be determined by lottery. Next, support operation setting processing is executed to generate a time saving state due to ceiling time reduction (step A7).
27), the special figure normal process transition setting process is executed (step A728), and the special figure displaying process is ended. In the special figure normal process transition setting process, a process number "0" related to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

If there is no ceiling time reduction activation flag indicating that a ceiling time reduction occurs (step A722; N), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the support hit flag 2 indicates a support hit (step A724). Then, if the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (step A724;
N), it is determined whether the support hit flag 1 indicates a support hit (step A725).

When either the support hit flag 1 or the support hit flag 2 indicates a support hit (step A724; Y or step A725; Y), the game control device 100 sets the initial value corresponding to the time reduction determination data to the time reduction variation number. The data is saved in one area and two areas of the number of time reduction fluctuations (step A726). The initial values of the time reduction variation number 1 and time reduction variation number 2 (for example, 34 times and 30 times, or 104 times and 100 times) in the case of the above-mentioned support result (sudden time reduction) are as follows.
It will be saved here. Next, in order to generate a time-saving state (sudden time-saving) due to the time-saving symbol, a support operation setting process is executed (step A727), a special figure normal process transition setting process is executed (step A728), and a special figure displaying process is executed. finish.

In addition, the time reduction judgment data is used in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) and the special figure 2
In the stop symbol setting process (step A333), it is set corresponding to the stop symbol number, so the initial value (i.e. the number of time savings) in the case of a support hit result is determined by lottery using random numbers of support hit symbols. .

If both the support hit flag 1 and the support hit flag 2 are not support hit (step A724; N and step A725; N), the game control device 100 does not execute the support operation setting process that sets the time saving, and sets the special figure. The normal process transition setting process is executed (step A728), and the special figure display process is ended.

As described above, in the special figure display processing, time saving settings such as setting the number of time reductions (that is, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations) are executed regarding ceiling time reduction and sudden time reduction. In addition, regarding the time saving due to the jackpot, that is, the time saving starting from the end of the jackpot state, time saving settings such as setting the number of time saving times are executed in the jackpot ending process.

In addition, since the special figure display process is executed when the special figure game processing timer to which the stop display time (step A605) is set reaches 0 (steps A5, A11), the special figure fluctuation display game is stopped. It will be executed when displaying the results ends (or when it ends: including when it ends or just before it ends). Therefore, when the display of the stop result of the special figure variation display game ends (if the next special figure variation display game starts, it is approximately equal to the start time), the time reduction variation number (steps A723, A726) is set. , a time reduction state due to ceiling time reduction and sudden time reduction starts.

[Support operation setting process]
Next, details of the support operation setting process (step A727) in the special figure display process will be explained. FIG. 5-42 is a flowchart showing the procedure of support operation setting processing.

The gaming control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the time saving start in the external information output data area (step A731). As a result, when the ceiling time is shortened by reaching the ceiling number of times and the time is suddenly started to be shortened by the time-saving symbol (support hit), a signal regarding the time-saving start is output as external information to the external information terminal 71 and eventually to an external device (such as a hall computer). Here, the signal related to the time saving start is the ON data of the jackpot 2 signal. Then, the timer initial value (for example, 128 msec) is saved in the time saving signal control timer area (step A732). This timer initial value becomes the time for outputting three jackpot signals by external information editing processing to be described later.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves the signal regarding the time saving start in the test signal output data area (step A733). As a result, at the start of ceiling time reduction and sudden time reduction, a signal related to the start of time reduction is output as a test signal to the sight-fire test device. The signals related to the time saving start here are, for example, ON data of the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, ON data of the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal, ON data of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, and normal symbol 1 variation. These are the ON data of the time reduction state signal and the ON data of the normal electric accessory 1 opening extension state signal. and,
Save the number with time saving in the game status display number area (step A734), save the high probability of normal drawings & the flag with short time saving in the normal drawing game mode flag area (step A735), and save the special figure in the special drawing game mode flag area. The time saving flag is synthesized (step A736). continue,
A signal related to the right-handed hitting instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A737), and a number indicating the right-handed hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A738).

After that, the game control device 100 sets the production mode information address table according to ceiling time reduction or sudden time reduction (step A739), and special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing (step A323).
) or obtain the address of the table corresponding to the production mode transition information set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A333) (step A740), and set the production mode number (production mode number) of the production mode based on the table. It is acquired and saved (step A741).
With this, it is possible to select the production mode that changes to the ceiling time reduction and the sudden time reduction start.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires and saves the number of rotations remaining in the production mode (initial value) based on the table (step A742). For example, the number of rotations remaining for presentation (initial value) is the number of time reductions (initial value of time reduction variation number 1 or time reduction variation number 2). Thereby, for example, the same performance mode can be continued until the time saving ends.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 acquires and saves next mode transition information, which is information about transition to the next mode from the production mode during ceiling time reduction or sudden time reduction, based on the table (step A743). Then, a probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag and the newly set production mode number is prepared as a production command (step A744), and the prepared probability information command is saved in the power outage recovery transmission command area ( step A745),
A production command setting process for setting the probability information command as a production command is executed (step A746). Here, the probability information command includes information on the probability state, the presence or absence of time saving (general electric power support), and the performance mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a production rotation number command corresponding to the production remaining rotation number as a production command (step A747), and executes production command setting processing (step A748). Then, time reduction variation number commands corresponding to the time reduction variation number 1 and time reduction variation number 2 (in this case, the initial value of the time reduction number) are prepared as production commands (step A749), and production command setting processing is executed. (Step A750).

After that, the game control device 100 clears the time reduction determination data area (step A75).
1) Clear the performance mode transition information area (step A752) and end the jackpot end process. Also, here, since the ceiling time reduction has been activated, the ceiling time reduction activation flag area in which the ceiling time reduction activation flag is stored may be cleared.

[Accessory game processing]
Next, details of the accessory game process (step X111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be explained. FIG. 5-43 is a flowchart showing the procedure of accessory game processing. In the accessory game processing, the entire processing related to the jackpot state is controlled.

The game control device 100 first executes a lower prize winning opening switch monitoring process (step B1
). In the lower large winning a prize opening switch monitoring process, the detection of game balls by the count switch (lower large winning a prize opening switch 38a) provided in the special variable winning device 38 is monitored.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the accessory game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
(step B2). By updating the accessory game processing timer by -1, the timer is counted for the interrupt cycle (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing. Note that the minimum value of the accessory game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the accessory game processing timer is 0 (step B3). If the accessory game processing timer is not 0 (step B3
;N), the accessory game process ends.

When the accessory game processing timer is 0 (step B3; Y), the game control device 100
That is, when the time is up or the time has already expired, the accessory game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the accessory game processing number is set in the register (step B4). Furthermore, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the accessory game process number is obtained using the accessory game sequence branch table (step B5). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made based on the accessory game processing number, and a game branching process corresponding to the accessory game processing number is executed (step B6).

If the game processing number is "0" in step B6, the gaming control device 100 executes the accessory normal processing that performs settings for starting a jackpot, etc. (step B7). For example, in the accessory game normal processing, in a predetermined case, the processing number "1" related to the fanfare mid-processing is set and saved in the accessory game processing number area. The details of the accessory normal processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 5-44.

If the game processing number is "1" in step B6, the game control device 100 executes the fanfare process (step B8). For example, in the process during fanfare, a process number "2" related to the process during interval is set and saved in the accessory game process number area.

If the game processing number is "2" in step B6, the gaming control device 100 executes the process during the interval (step B9). For example, in interval processing, the number of rounds is updated by +1, the lower prize opening opening time is saved in the accessory game processing timer area, the on data is saved in the lower prize opening solenoid output data area, and the round command is executed. Set as a performance command, set the process number "3" related to the jackpot opening process, and save it in the accessory game process number area.

If the game processing number is "3" in step B6, the gaming control device 100 sets an interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if it is the final round; A jackpot opening process is executed to set information necessary to perform the jackpot remaining ball process (step B10). For example, in the jackpot opening process, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command are set, and a process number "4" related to the jackpot remaining ball process is set and saved in the accessory game process number area.

If the game processing number is "4" in step B6, the gaming control device 100 performs a process of setting a time for ejecting the remaining balls in the jackpot if the jackpot round is the final round; A jackpot remaining ball process is executed to set information necessary for the jackpot end process (step B11). For example, in the jackpot remaining ball process, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the accessory game processing timer area, and the process number "2" related to the process during the interval is set and saved in the accessory game processing number area. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the accessory game processing timer area, and the processing number related to the jackpot end processing is "
5" and save it in the accessory game processing number area.

If the game processing number is "5" in step B6, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot end process that sets information necessary for executing the accessory normal process (step B12). For example, in the jackpot end process, based on the time reduction judgment data that includes information on the presence or absence of a time reduction state after the end of the jackpot (with or without time reduction), necessary information such as the general electricity support state (hour reduction state) after the end of the jackpot state is determined. Set the information, set the processing number "0" related to the accessory game processing number, and save it in the accessory game processing number area.

[Usual processing of accessories]
Next, details of the accessory normal processing (step B7) in the aforementioned accessory game processing will be explained. FIG. 5-44 is a flowchart showing the procedure of accessory normal processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the condition device is in operation (step B
301). When the conditional device operation information is saved in the conditional device operation information area (steps A204, A645, A650), that is, the jackpot flag 1 or the jackpot flag 2
There is jackpot information, or there is a prize in the specific area 72 (V winning opening)
2a, V winning), it can be determined that the conditional device is in operation. If the conditional device is not in operation (step B301; N), the accessory normal processing is ended.

When the conditional device is in operation (step B301; Y), the gaming control device 100 saves the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information in the round number upper limit value area (
Step B302). Next, the round LED output pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is saved in the round LED output pointer area (step B303), the probability information command (normal) is prepared as a production command (step B304), and the production command is set. Processing is executed (step B305).

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a fanfare command corresponding to the fanfare information as a production command (step B306), and executes production command setting processing (
Step B307). Then, a decorative special pattern command (decorative special pattern 1 command or decorative pattern 2 command) is loaded from the decorative special pattern command area of the special pattern that has become a jackpot or small hit this time, and prepared as a production command (step B308). Performance command setting processing is executed (step B309).

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 saves the signal corresponding to the condition device operation information in the external information output data area (step B310), and saves the signal corresponding to the condition device operation information in the test signal output data area (step B310). B311). Then, the initial value is saved in the round number area (step B312). The initial value is 0 when the condition device is activated due to jackpot information, and 1 when the condition device is activated due to winning in the specific area 72 (V winning).
It is.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the process transition setting process during fanfare (step B313), and ends the accessory normal process. For example, in the fanfare mid-process transition setting process, "1" is set as the process number related to the fanfare mid-process, the process number is saved in the accessory game processing number area, and the fanfare time is saved in the accessory game processing timer area. .

In the fanfare mid-process transition setting process, the gaming control device 100 stores a time reduction variation number 1 area where the time reduction variation number 1 is stored, a time reduction variation number 2 area where the time reduction variation number 2 is stored, and a time reduction variation number 2 area where the time reduction variation number 2 is stored. Clear the ceiling counter area where the ceiling counter area is stored, the ceiling time reduction activation flag area where the ceiling time reduction activation flag is stored, and the ceiling reached flag area where the ceiling reached flag is stored. In addition, the regular pattern low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the general pattern game mode flag area, and the special pattern low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special pattern game mode flag area. The ceiling counter area where the ceiling counter value indicating the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed in a state other than the probability fluctuation state is cleared here when a jackpot occurs, but as mentioned above, it is normally It does not need to be cleared when the power is restored (RAM initialization switch 112 is not on).

Furthermore, in the fanfare mid-process transition setting process, the game control device 100 turns on signals related to the start of the jackpot (special gaming state) (for example, turns on the jackpot 1 signal (outputs for jackpot and small hit), turns on the jackpot 4 signal (outputs for jackpot and small hit), (output)) in the external information output data area. Then, a signal regarding the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, turn off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, turn off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, turn off the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal,
Special symbol 2 Turn off the variable time shortening state signal, Normal symbol 1 Turn off the high probability state signal, Normal symbol 1
Save the variable time shortening state signal off and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal off) in the test signal output data area.

[Jackpot end process]
Next, details of the jackpot end process (step B12) in the above-mentioned accessory game process will be explained. FIG. 5-45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of jackpot termination processing.

The gaming control device 100 first determines whether or not the time reduction determination data (steps A409, A439) is data with time reduction (step B401). The data with time reduction indicates that the time reduction state (general power support state) will be entered after the end of the jackpot state. Data indicating no time saving indicates that the time saving state (general power support state) does not occur after the end of the jackpot state.

When the time reduction determination data is data indicating no time reduction, the gaming control device 100 executes the jackpot end setting process 1 in order to transition to the normal gaming state after the jackpot ends (step B402).
If the time reduction determination data is data indicating that there is a time reduction, jackpot end setting processing 2 is executed in order to shift to a time reduction state (general power support state) after the end of the jackpot (step B403).

The game control device 100 sets the production mode information address table (step B404).
), acquires the address of the table corresponding to the production mode transition information (steps A410, A440) set in the stop 1 symbol setting process or the stop 2 symbol setting process (step B405),
The performance mode number (performance mode number) of the performance mode set after the end of the jackpot state is acquired and saved (step B406). This allows you to select the production mode to which you want to transition after the jackpot ends.

Next, the game control device 100 obtains and saves the remaining rotation number of effects (initial value) of the effect mode that is set after the end of the special game state (step B407). For example, the number of rotations remaining for production (initial value) is the number of time reductions (initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations), or the total number of times of time reduction and the prescribed number of remaining reservations (for example, 10 times). Thereby, for example, after the jackpot ends, the same performance mode can be continued until the time saving ends or until all the special symbol 2 variable display games related to the remaining reservation are executed.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 acquires and saves next mode transition information, which is information on transition to the next mode of the production mode set immediately after the end of the jackpot state (step B409).
. Then, a probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag and the newly set production mode number is prepared as a production command (step B409), and the prepared probability information command is saved in the transmission command area when power is restored ( Step B410), Execute production command setting processing to set the probability information command as a production command (Step B411)
. Here, the probability information command includes information on the probability state after the end of the jackpot state, the presence or absence of time saving (general electricity support), and production mode.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a production rotation number command corresponding to the production remaining rotation number as a production command (step B412), and executes production command setting processing (step B413). Then, a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the number of time reduction variations (in this case, the initial value is the number of time reductions, for example, 5 times or less or 99 times) is prepared as a production command (step B414), and production command setting processing is executed. (Step B415).

After that, the game control device 100 clears the production mode transition information area (step B41).
6), execute the accessory normal process transition setting process (step B417), and end the jackpot end process. In the role item normal processing transition setting process, in order to transition to the role item normal processing, the processing number related to the role object normal processing is set to "0", the process number is saved in the role object game processing number area, and the condition device operation information is set. Clear the area and clear the time reduction judgment data area.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (step B402) in the jackpot end process will be explained. FIG. 5-46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot end setting process 1.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the external information output data area (step B421), and saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (step B422). For example, as the external information output to the external device via the external information terminal 71, the off data of jackpot 1 signal, the off data of jackpot 2 signal, the off data of jackpot 3 signal, and the off data of jackpot 4 signal are output as external information. Save to data area.
Jackpot end setting process 1 is a process when there is no time reduction after the jackpot state ends, so jackpot 2
Turn off the signal. The normal number is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area as display data on the second gaming state display section 58 (lamp D17) of the collective display device 50 (step B423).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the low probability flag in the regular pattern game mode flag area (step B424), and saves the special pattern no time saving flag in the special pattern game mode flag area (step B425). Then, clear the time reduction variation number area (step B426).
, save the number in the left-handed state in the game state display number 1 area as display data on the first game state display section 57 (lamp D7) of the collective display device 50 (step B427), and end the jackpot end setting process 1. .

[Jackpot end setting process 2]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (step B403) in the jackpot end process will be explained. FIG. 5-47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of jackpot end setting process 2.

The game control device 100 first saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the external information output data area (step B431), and saves a signal regarding the end of the jackpot in the test signal output data area (step B432). For example, as external information to be output to an external device via the external information terminal 71, off data of jackpot 1 signal, off data of jackpot 3 signal, and off data of jackpot 4 signal are saved in the external information output data area. Then, the signal related to the start of time saving is saved in the external information output data area (step B433), and the signal related to the start of time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step B434). Jackpot end setting process 2
is the process when entering the time saving state (general power support state) after the end of the jackpot state,
As a signal related to the start of time saving, the ON data of the jackpot 2 signal is saved in the external information output data area (in this embodiment, the jackpot 2 signal is output from the jackpot state, so the ON state of the jackpot 2 signal continues. form).

Next, the game control device 100 displays the second game state display section 58 (lamp D) of the collective display device 50.
17), save the number in the time saving mode in the game state display number 2 area (step B435), and save the high probability flag in the general game mode flag area (step B436).
), save the special figure time-saving medium flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step B437)
.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game has become a jackpot after the time saving has ended, that is, whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game related to the remaining reservation has become a jackpot (step B438). When the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a jackpot, or when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a jackpot during the time saving state (step B438; N), a stop symbol pattern (or a stop symbol) is placed in the time reduction variation number area. Save the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (time reduction number) corresponding to the numbers and symbols A to F (described later) (step B439), and step B44
Execute the processing from step 1 onwards. Here, the initial value of the number of times of time reduction fluctuations (number of times of time reductions) becomes the initial value of the number of times of time reduction fluctuations 2 (first predetermined number of times described below). In addition, in step B439, in addition to the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (time reduction number) for the number of time reduction fluctuations 2, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations 1 (a second predetermined number of times to be described later) is also saved. For example, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations 1 may be the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations 2, plus the maximum value (for example, 4) of the number of reserved special symbols 1 (first starting memory number).

When the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a jackpot after the time saving ends, that is, when the special figure 2 variable display game related to the remaining reservation becomes a jackpot (step B438
;Y), the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (number of time reductions, here 99) is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area (step B440). Here again, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (number of time reductions) is
This becomes the initial value of the time reduction variation number 2 (first predetermined number of times described later). In addition, in step B440, in addition to the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (time reduction number) for the number of time reduction fluctuations 2, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations 1 (a second predetermined number of times to be described later) is also saved. For example, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations 1 may be the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations 2, plus the maximum value (for example, 4) of the number of reserved special symbols 1 (first starting memory number).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 generates a support state (support mode, normal power release pattern) which is a state (mode) of normal power support, corresponding to a stopped symbol pattern (or a stopped symbol number, symbols A to G described below). The type is saved in the support status area (step B441). Note that the process of step B441 is an option, and is executed when the support state regarding the mode (content) of general electricity support is variable, as in a modified example described later.

Next, the game control device 100 displays the first game state display section 57 (lamp D) of the collective display device 50.
The number in the right-handed game is saved in the game state display number 1 area as the display data of 7) (step B442), and a right-handed game instruction notification command is prepared as a production command (step B44).
3), execute the production command setting process (step B444), and end the jackpot end setting process 2.

[Puzu game processing]
Next, details of the common map game process (step X112) in the timer interrupt process will be explained. FIG. 5-48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the Fuzu game process. In the general figure game processing, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the general figure variable display game is controlled, the display of the general figure is set, etc.

The gaming control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process of monitoring input from the gate switch 34a (step C1). For more information on the gate switch monitoring process, see
This will be explained later.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 executes a general power winning switch monitoring process that monitors the input from the starting port 2 switch 37a (step C2). Details of the general electricity prize switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 updates the general game processing timer by -1 if it is not 0 (1
(step C3). Note that the minimum value of the general figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the regular game processing timer has become 0 (step C4).

If the value of the game processing timer is 0 (step C4; Y
), that is, when the time is up or the time has already expired, the standard game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the standard game process number is set in the register (step C5).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the general game process number based on the set standard game sequence branch table (step C6).
Then, a subroutine call is made based on the general game process number, and a game branching process corresponding to the general game process number is executed (step C7).

If the game processing number is "0" in step C7, the game control device 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the general pattern fluctuation display game, and sets the fluctuation start of the general pattern fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, A normal pattern normal process is executed in which information necessary for performing the process during normal pattern fluctuation is set (step C8). The details of the ordinary drawing processing will be described later.

Furthermore, if the game processing number is “1” in step C7, the gaming control device 100
A process during normal pattern fluctuation is executed to set information necessary for performing the process during normal pattern display (step C9). For example, in the process during general figure fluctuation, in order to move to the process during general figure display, in addition to setting "2" as the game process number and saving in the general figure game process number area, the general figure display time is Save in processing timer area.

Furthermore, if the game processing number is “2” in step C7, the gaming control device 100
If the result of the general map fluctuation display game is a hit, the general map display process is executed to set the general power open time and the information necessary to perform the general map winning process (step C10). . For example, in the general pattern display process, if the result of the general pattern fluctuation display game is a win, in order to move to the general pattern winning process, set "3" as the game processing number and enter the general pattern game processing number area. On the other hand, in case of a loss, in order to move to normal processing, set " as the game processing number.
0" and save it in the general game processing number area.

In addition, if the game processing number is "3" in step C7, the gaming control device 100 performs a general operation such as setting information necessary to continue the process during a normal game or to perform the process of remaining normal balls. A process during drawing is executed (step C11). For example, in the normal game winning process, after setting is made to open the normal variable prize winning device 37 a predetermined number of times, in order to move to the general ball remaining ball process, "4" is set as the game processing number. Save in the Fuzu game processing number area.

In addition, if the game processing number is "4" in step C7, the game control device 100 executes the remaining ball processing for the general electric current, which sets the information necessary to perform the general drawing per end processing (step C7). C12). For example, in the process of remaining spheres on a general map, in order to move to the end process for a general map, in addition to setting "5" as the game processing number and saving it in the general game processing number area, the general game ending time is Save in processing timer area.

In addition, if the game processing number is "5" in step C7, the game control device 100 executes a normal pattern per end process that sets information necessary for performing the normal pattern normal process (step C8). (Step C13). For example, in the common pattern winning end process, in order to proceed to the normal pattern processing, "0" is set as the game process number and saved in the general pattern game processing number area.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal pattern fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal pattern by the normal pattern display 53 (step C14). Thereafter, a symbol fluctuation control process for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol) by the ordinary symbol display 53 is executed (step C15), and the ordinary symbol game process is ended.

On the other hand, if the value of the general game processing timer is not 0 (step C
4; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the processing from step C114 onwards is executed.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 5-49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step C1 in the general game process shown in FIG. 5-48.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (
Step C101). Then, if there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step C10
1; Y), it is determined whether or not the player is in a right-handed gaming state (step C102). The gaming states for hitting right are a jackpot state and a time saving state (general power support state). If the game state is to play right-handed (step C102; Y), the process moves to step C105. If the game state is not to play right-handed (step C102; N), a left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as a production command (step C103), and production command setting processing is executed (step C104). The production control device 300 that has received the left-handed hitting instruction notification command executes a notification (warning) instructing the left-handed hitting on the display device 41 or the like by displaying a left-handed hitting instruction.

Next, the gaming control device 100 acquires the number of regular symbols on hold and determines whether the number of regular symbols on hold is less than the upper limit (1 in this embodiment) (step C105). If the number of reserved symbols is less than the upper limit (step C105; Y), the game control device 100 determines whether the symbol fluctuation display game is changing (being executed) or is in the state of hitting a symbol. Determine (step C106)
. When the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not changing or in the normal pattern hitting state (step C106;
N), the number of reserved ordinary drawings is updated by +1 (step C107). In this way, the number of reserved symbols is updated by +1 only when the general pattern fluctuation display game is not changing or in the state of hitting a common pattern. is not substantially accumulated and momentarily becomes 1 just before the start of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (the number of normal patterns held is substantially 0).

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 calculates the address of the winning random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved symbols (step C108). Then, a winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (step C109), a winning pattern random number is extracted and saved in the winning pattern random number storage area (A7710), and the gate switch monitoring process is ended.

On the other hand, if the game control device 100 has no input to the gate switch 34a (step C1
01; N), when it is determined that the number of reserved ordinary drawings is not less than the upper limit (step C105; N)
, or when the normal pattern fluctuation display game is changing or in the normal pattern winning state (step C1
06;Y), the gate switch monitoring process ends.

[Public power switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the general prize switch monitoring process (step C2) in the general figure game process will be explained. FIG. 5-50 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the general electricity prize switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the normal pattern winning is in progress, that is, whether the normal pattern fluctuation display game is in a winning state and the normal variable prize winning device 37 is performing the opening operation a predetermined number of times. (Step C201). Then, if the normal pattern is being hit (step C201; Y
), it is determined whether there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step C202). If there is an input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step C202; Y), the count number of the general power counter is updated by +1 (step C203).

Next, the gaming control device 100 determines that the count number of the updated general electricity counter is the upper limit (for example,
10) is reached (step C204). Then, when the count reaches the upper limit (step C204; Y), a winning end pointer value (for example, 2) is loaded from the normal pattern per end pointer area in the RWM, and Save in the control pointer area (step C205).

Finally, the general computer game processing timer is cleared (step C206), and the general computer winning switch monitoring process is ended. That is, if there is a general winning amount equal to or greater than the upper limit during the normal winning state, the winning end value is saved in the normal drawing processing control pointer area at that point, and the normal variable winning device 37 closes. The winning state of the common map ends midway.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the game control device 100 is not hitting the normal pattern (step C201
;N), if it is determined that there is no input to the starting port 2 switch 37a (step C202;N
), or if it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit (step C204
;N), the general electricity prize switch monitoring process ends.

[Usual processing of ordinary drawings]
Next, details of the normal pattern processing (step C8) in the general pattern game process will be explained. FIG. 5-51 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of ordinary drawing processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of reserved symbols is 0 (step C3).
01). If the number of reserved symbols is not 0 (step C301; N), the winning random number is loaded from the RWM's random number storage area per symbol (for the number of pending 1), and the random number is loaded from the RWM's random number storage area per symbol.
Load the winning symbol random number from (for the pending number 1) and clear the random number storage area per common symbol (for the pending number 1) and the random number storage area per common symbol (for the pending number 1) to 0 after loading (step C302)
. In addition, the probability of winning in the general pattern fluctuation display game is higher than usual (in the normal pattern high probability) (
In other words, it is determined whether the current state is in a high probability state (in a high probability state), that is, in a time saving state (general power support state) (step C303). In addition, in this embodiment, the range of the winning random number is 0 to 25.
0, the probability of hitting a normal figure in high probability is 251/251, and the probability of hitting a common figure in low probability is 0/251. It should be noted that the probability of winning a normal figure in low probability may be a value larger than 0% (for example, 2/251 (0.8%)) without being limited to this.

If the probability of the normal pattern is not high (step C303; N), the game control device 100 sets a low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower limit judgment value during the low probability of the normal pattern (step C30).
4) If the probability is medium to high for ordinary figures (step C303; Y), a high probability lower limit judgment value (here 0), which is the lower limit judgment value for high probability for ordinary figures, is set (step C305), and step C306
Shift to processing.

The gaming control device 100 determines whether the winning random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (here, 251) (step C306). In addition, the upper limit judgment value here is common to the average pattern with high probability and the average pattern with low probability. If the winning random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (step C306; Y), that is, if it is a loss, the process moves to step C308. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit determination value (step C306; N), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step C307).

If the winning random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step C307; Y
), that is, in the case of a loss, the loss information is saved in the hit flag area (step C3
08). Furthermore, the off-stop symbol number is set as the ordinary symbol stop symbol number (step C30).
9), the losing symbol information is saved in the normal symbol stop symbol information area (step C310), and the process moves to step C314.

If the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step C307; N
), that is, in the case of a win, the win information is saved in the win flag area (step C311).
, set a winning stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded winning symbol random number (step C312),
The hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the regular symbol stop symbol information area (step C313), and the process moves to step C314. In addition, here, the winning stop symbol (
Although there is only one type of pattern per ordinary figure, there may be several types in a modified example described later.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (step C314), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (step C315),
After shifting the random number storage area per common figure (step C316) and clearing the free area after the shift to 0 (step C317), the number of pending common figures is updated by -1 (step C318).

That is, with the execution of the general pattern variation display game regarding the oldest standard pattern reservation number 1, the rankings of the standard pattern reservation numbers 2 to 4 that are pending after the standard pattern reservation number 1 are moved up one by one.
Through this process, the value for the number of reserved ordinary figures 1 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared to 0, and the number of reserved ordinary figures is decremented by 1 to become zero.

After that, the gaming control device 100 loads information on the support state (support mode, general power release pattern) (step C319). Note that the process in step C319 is optional;
This is executed when the support state, which is the state (aspect) of general electricity support, is variable, as in a modification described later.

Next, the game control device 100 sets a fixed normal pattern fluctuation time (for example, 200 msec) and saves it in the normal pattern game processing timer area (step C320). In addition, when the support state (support mode, general power release pattern), which is the state (aspect) of general power support, is variable as in the modification example described later, the variable general power supply fluctuation time corresponding to the support state is set. and save it in the general game processing timer area. Then, the normal figure fluctuation process transition setting process is executed (step C321
), the normal processing ends. In addition, the normal figure fluctuation process transition setting process will be described later.

In addition, when the number of regular symbols pending is 0, the gaming control device 100 (step C301; Y
), and sets "0" as the processing number for transitioning to normal processing (step C322).
, the process number is saved in the general game process number area (step C323). Thereafter, the flag during the unauthorized monitoring period is saved in the unauthorized monitoring period flag area (step C324), and the regular processing is terminated.

[General map fluctuation process transition setting process]
FIG. 5-52 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for setting the transition to the process during normal pattern fluctuation. The ordinary figure fluctuation process transition setting process is executed in step C321 in the ordinary figure normal process.

First, the game control device 100 sets "1" as the processing number for transitioning to the normal pattern fluctuation processing.
is set (step C331), and the process number is saved in the general game process number area (step C332).

Thereafter, the game control device 100 sends a signal regarding the start of the normal symbol fluctuation display game (normal symbol 1
A fluctuating signal (ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step C333), and a fluctuating flag indicating that the general pattern fluctuation display game is changing is saved in the general pattern fluctuation control flag area (step C334). . Then, the initial value of the blinking control timer, which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the common figure display, is saved in the common figure blinking control timer area (step C335), and the initial value (here, 0) is saved in the common figure fluctuation symbol number area. (step C336). Thereafter, the general figure fluctuation process transition setting process is ended.

[Processing during normal map fluctuation]
Next, details of the process during normal pattern fluctuation (step C9) in the general pattern game process will be explained. FIG. 5-53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal pattern fluctuation process.

The game control device 100 first sets the process number to "2" as a setting process for transitioning to the normal game display process (step C401), and saves the process number in the general game process number area (step C402). ). Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets the normal pattern display time (normal pattern stop time, for example, 48 msec.
c) is saved in the general game processing timer area (step C403).

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the ordinary symbol (turns off the signal during fluctuation of the ordinary symbol 1) in the test signal output data area (step C404). Then, a stop flag indicating that the ordinary figure fluctuation display game is being stopped is saved in the ordinary figure fluctuation control flag area (step C405), and the ordinary figure fluctuation processing is ended.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, details of the normal pattern display process (step C10) in the general pattern game process will be explained. FIG. 5-54 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal figure display process.

The game control device 100 first loads the hit flag (hit information or loss information) set in the normal pattern processing (step C501), and clears the hit flag area of RWM (
Step C502). Then, it is determined whether or not winning information is set in the loaded winning flag (step C503).

If the winning information is set in the winning flag, the gaming control device 100 performs step C
503; Y), sets the process setting table during winning (step C504), obtains the winning start pointer value (here 0) corresponding to the normal pattern stop symbol information, and saves it in the control pointer area during normal pattern winning ( Step C505). In addition, the winning end pointer value corresponding to the normal pattern stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the normal pattern winning ending pointer area (step C506). Then,
The general power open time (for example, 3000 msec) corresponding to the general pattern stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the general pattern game processing timer area (step C507). Through the above processing, the opening mode of the normal variable prize winning device 37 during the time saving state is set, and for example, it can be opened twice. In addition,
There is only one type of normal pattern stop symbol (symbol per normal pattern) for a hit, and the hit start pointer value, hit end pointer value, and general power release time are fixed, but the general power support is fixed as in the modification example described below. When the support state (support mode, power release pattern) is variable, set the winning start pointer value, hit end pointer value, and power release time corresponding to the support state and save it in the power map processing timer area. You may do so.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets “3” as the processing number for transitioning to the normal pattern per process.
” (step C508) and save the process number in the general game process number area (step C509). After that, save the signal related to the hit of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (turn on the normal symbol 1 hit signal) and the signal related to the start of normal electric power operation (turn on the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal) in the test signal output data area. (Step C510). Further, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the general electric solenoid, ON data is saved in the general electric solenoid output data area (step C511).

Furthermore, the gaming control device 100 clears the information in the normal power count area that stores the number of wins to the normal variable winning device 37 (step C512), and clears the information in the normal power count area that stores the number of wins to the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal power fraud monitoring period. (Step C)
513). Finally, a flag specifying the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is saved in the regular electricity fraud monitoring period flag area (step C514).

If the winning information is not set in the winning flag (step C503; N), the gaming control device 100 sets "0" as the processing number for transitioning to the normal pattern processing (step C515), and then performs the processing. The number is saved in the general game processing number area (step C516).
After that, the flag during the unauthorized monitoring period is saved in the utility power unauthorized monitoring period flag area (step C5).
17), the process during normal map display ends.

[Medium processing per ordinary map]
Next, details of the normal pattern winning process (step C11) in the general pattern game process will be explained. FIG. 5-55 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for the process of winning a common map.

The gaming control device 100 first loads and prepares the control pointer for winning a normal pattern (step C601), and sets the value of the loaded medium control pointer for a winning pattern to the upper limit of the control pointer for controlling a winning pattern (hit end pointer value). ) is reached (step C602).

Then, if the value of the control pointer during a normal pattern does not reach the value of the medium per normal pattern control pointer upper limit value area (hit end pointer value), the gaming control device 100 (step C602;
N), the average control pointer is updated by +1 (step C603). Furthermore, the normal power operation transition setting process is executed (step C604), and the process during normal drawing is ended. Note that details of the normal power operation transition setting process will be described later.

In addition, when the value of the control pointer during a normal pattern reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area (hit end pointer value) per normal pattern (step C602; Y), the game control device 100 performs the process in step C603. Without executing the process of updating (+1) the processing control pointer area during normal drawing, the normal power operation transition setting process is executed (step C604), and the processing during normal drawing ends.

[Normal power operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the general power operation transition setting process (step C604) in the normal map per process will be explained. FIG. 5-56 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal power operation transition setting process. The normal power operation transition setting process is a process for controlling the drive of the normal power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched depending on the value of the control pointer.

The game control device 100 first branches the process depending on the value of the control pointer (normal pattern per hit control pointer) (step C611). Note that here, the control pointer uses the value before being updated in step C603. An example of a control pointer is shown in Figure 5-73 below. If the value of the control pointer is an even number, the process moves to step C612 to control the blockage of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the weight after the blocking of the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is The time (Puten interval time, for example, 60000 msec) is saved in the Plot game processing timer area (Step C612). In addition, when the support state (support mode, general power release pattern) related to general power support is variable as in the modification example described later, the wait time (general power interval time) may be set in accordance with the support state. .

Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets off data in the general power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the general power solenoid 37c (step C613), and ends the general power operation transition setting process.

In addition, if the value of the control pointer is an odd value, the game control device 100 moves to the process of step C614 and controls the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, so the normal variable winning device 100 corresponding to the control pointer The general power open time, which is the open time of the winning device 37, is saved in the general power game processing timer area (step C614). The normal power release time here may be the same as the value set in step C507 (for example, 3000 msec). Further, in order to turn on the general electric solenoid 37c, ON data is set in the general electric solenoid output data area (step C61).
5) End the normal power operation transition setting process.

Furthermore, if the value of the control pointer is the hit end pointer value, the gaming control device 10
0 sets "4" as the processing number (step C616) in order to proceed to step C616, end the open control of the normal variable prize winning device 37, and execute the general electric field remaining ball processing (step C12), The process number is saved in the general game process number area (step C617).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the general ball remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the general game processing timer area (step C618). After that, the general electric solenoid 37
In order to set c to OFF, off data is saved in the general power solenoid output data area (step C619), and the general power operation transition setting process is ended. In addition, when the support state (support mode, general power release pattern) regarding general power support is variable like the modification mentioned later, the general power remaining bulb processing time may be set corresponding to the support state.

[Permanent electricity remaining bulb processing]
Next, the details of the remaining electric ball process (step C12) in the general figure game process will be explained. FIG. 5-57 is a flowchart showing the procedure for processing remaining power bulbs.

The game control device 100 first sets the process number "5" related to the normal game ending process (step C701), and saves the process number in the general game process number area (step C702).
. Thereafter, the fugu ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the fugu game processing timer area (step C703). In addition, when the support state (support mode, general power release pattern) regarding general power support is variable like the modification mentioned later, the general power map ending time may be set corresponding to the support state.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of the operation of the normal variable prize winning device 37 (turns off the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal) in the test signal output data area (step C70
4). Subsequently, the normal power count area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step C705), and furthermore, the normal winning control pointer area is cleared (step C706). Thereafter, the end pointer area per ordinary symbol is cleared (step C707), and the ordinary symbol remaining ball processing is ended.

[Full drawing termination process]
Next, details of the normal pattern winning end process (step C13) in the general pattern game process will be explained. FIG. 5-58 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the normal drawing termination process.

The game control device 100 first sets the process number "0" related to the normal game process (step C801), and further saves the process number in the general game process number area (step C80).
2). After that, the signal regarding the end of the winning of the normal symbol fluctuation game (turn off the signal during normal symbol 1 hit)
is saved in the test signal output data area (step C803).

Furthermore, the gaming control device 100 saves a flag (fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variable prize winning device 37 in the power grid fraud monitoring period flag area (step C80).
4) After that, the normal map per end processing is completed.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step X119) in the timer interrupt process will be explained. 5-59 and 5-60 are flowcharts showing the procedure of external information editing processing. FIG. 5-59 shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 5-60 shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, the monitoring results in the payout command sending process (step X107), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step X108), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step Based on this information, processing is performed to create information to be output to external devices such as information collection terminals and game hall internal management devices, and to sight-firing test equipment, and to set the information in output buffers.

The game control device 100 first determines whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (
Step X501). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (step X501; N)
, determine whether a main body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (step X
502). If the main body frame opening error is not occurring (step X502; N), the off data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step Save (step X504).

When the game control device 100 is experiencing a glass frame opening error (step X501;
Y), or if a main body frame opening error is occurring (step X502; Y), save the ON data of the door/frame opening signal in the external information output data area (step Save the on data in the test signal output data area (step X506
).

After step X504 and step X506, if the security signal control timer is not 0, the gaming control device 100 updates it by -1 (step ) is determined (step X508). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) when data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value change switch), etc. Main processing step X46). Then, the security signal control timer starts counting from the time when the RAM is initialized.

If the security signal control timer is not 0 (step X50), the gaming control device 100
8; N), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X509), and the process moves to step X510. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

When the security signal control timer is 0 (step X50), the gaming control device 100
8; Y), it is determined whether or not magnet fraud is occurring (step X510). Note that if there is a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, it can be determined that magnet fraud is occurring. If magnet fraud is not occurring (step X510; N), it is further determined whether or not board radio wave fraud is occurring (step X511). Note that if there is a detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62, it can be determined that board radio wave fraud is occurring.

If board radio wave fraud is not occurring (step X511; N), the gaming control device 100 further determines whether or not frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X512). If there is a frame radio fraud signal, it can be determined that frame radio fraud is occurring. If frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (step
Step X513). In addition, if the winning opening switch/state monitoring process saves the fraudulent winning occurrence flag regarding the big winning opening in the fraud flag area, it can be determined that the big winning opening fraud is occurring. If the big winning prize opening fraud is not occurring (step X513; N), it is further determined whether or not the general electricity fraud is occurring (step X514). In addition, when the fraudulent winning occurrence flag regarding the second starting winning opening of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the fraudulent flag area by the winning opening switch/state monitoring process, it can be determined that the normal electricity fraud is occurring.

If the general electricity fraud is not occurring (step X514; N), the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not vibration fraud is occurring (step X515). Note that if there is a detection signal from the vibration sensor 65, it can be determined that vibration fraud is occurring. If a vibration violation is not occurring (step X515; N), it is determined whether an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step X516). Note that when the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (step X118), it can be determined that an abnormal discharge error is occurring.

If the game control device 100 is not experiencing an abnormal discharge error (step X516; N)
, it is determined whether a V passing error is occurring (step X517). If the detection signal of the specific area switch 72a is generated at an inappropriate timing, it can be determined that a V passing error is occurring. If a V passing error is not occurring (step X517; N), it is determined whether a remaining ball error, which is an error related to a remaining ball, is occurring (step X518). If the remaining ball error is not occurring (step X518; N), it is determined whether the safety device is in operation based on the safety device in operation flag (step X519). If the safety device is not in operation (step X519; N), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error is occurring (step X520).

If a switch abnormality error such as disconnection of the switch connector is not occurring (step X520; N), the gaming control device 100 saves the off data of the gaming machine error state signal in the test signal output data area (step X521). If a switch abnormality error is occurring (step X520; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X523).

On the other hand, if magnet fraud is occurring (step X510; Y), the gaming control device 100
, If board radio wave fraud is occurring (step X511; Y), if frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X512; Y), if large prize opening fraud is occurring (step X513;
Y), when power supply irregularity is occurring (step X514; Y), when vibration irregularity is occurring (step X515; Y), when an abnormal discharge error is occurring (step X516;
Y), when a V passing error is occurring (step X517; Y), when a remaining ball error is occurring (step X518; Y), when the safety device is operating (step X51
9; Y), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X522), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X523). By setting the security signal to ON data, the security signal is output as external information to an external device (such as a hall computer) via the external information terminal 71. In this embodiment, the safety device is in operation when the safety device activation flag=1.

In this way, when the safety device is in operation (step X519; Y), the security signal is turned on and output to an external device such as a hall computer (step X522).
), the person in charge of the amusement park, the attendant, etc. can recognize that the safety device is in operation. In addition to a configuration in which a security signal is continuously output to an external device while the safety device is in operation, a configuration in which a security signal is output for one pulse (e.g. 256 ms) to an external device when the safety device is activated is also possible. It is. Also, in place of the security signal or in combination with the security signal,
External information may be provided exclusively for the safety device, and the dedicated external information may be output to the external device while the safety device is in operation.

Furthermore, if the safety device is in operation (step Ru. Note that a configuration is also possible in which the test signal (gaming machine error state signal) corresponding to the fact that the safety device is in operation is not output. Further, a test signal other than the gaming machine error state signal may be output to the sight test device.

After step X521 and step X523, the gaming control device 100 executes a starting opening signal editing process for editing the winning signal of the starting opening (step X524). Next, main prize ball signal editing processing is executed to set information regarding the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out (step A pattern confirmation number signal editing process to be output to the device is executed (step X526).

Next, the gaming control device 100 updates the time saving signal control timer by -1 if it is not 0 (step X527), and determines whether the time saving signal control timer is 0 (step X528).
If the time-saving signal control timer is 0 (step The information is saved in the information output data area (step X529), and the external information editing process is ended.

In this way, when the ceiling time is shortened by reaching the ceiling number of times and the time is suddenly shortened by the time-saving symbol (support hit), the ON data of the jackpot 3 signal is transmitted to the game hall internal management device (hall computer).
The information is outputted to an external device such as via an external information terminal 71. Here, the ON data of the jackpot 3 signal is output during the timer initial value (for example, fixed time of 128 msec) set in the time saving signal control timer area in step A732 of the support operation setting process described above. Conventional jackpot 1 to 4 signals were output during jackpot etc., but the output of jackpot 3 signal is
The output was made for a fixed time (for example, 128 msec), which was much shorter than the period of a jackpot or the like. Therefore, the external device (such as a hall computer) can recognize that a time reduction has occurred due to a ceiling time reduction due to reaching the ceiling number of times or a sudden time reduction due to a time reduction symbol, without confusing it with a jackpot or a time reduction following a jackpot.

As mentioned above, the jackpot 2 signal is sent to the external device continuously for a long time during the jackpot state and in the time-saving state following the jackpot state (the time-saving state due to the jackpot, the first specific gaming state, and the first time-saving state). Output as external information. The above-mentioned three jackpot signals with a short fixed time (for example, 128 msec) are used as external information indicating the occurrence of a time-saving state (second specific gaming state, second time-saving state) due to ceiling time reduction or sudden time reduction. It is output to the external device separately from the external information (long time jackpot 2 signal) shown, and is not confused by the external device.

In addition, as another configuration, the three jackpot signals may be output for a fixed time only at the start of time reduction in either the ceiling time reduction or the sudden time reduction. In addition, in order to distinguish between the occurrence of a ceiling time reduction and the sudden occurrence of a time reduction, in one time reduction, a jackpot 3 signal and a jackpot 4 signal are generated for a fixed time at the start of the time reduction.
Both signals may be output, and in the other time saving mode, only three jackpot signals may be output. For example, three jackpot signals and four jackpot signals may be output for the ceiling time reduction, and only three jackpot signals may be output for the sudden time reduction (the reverse is also possible). In addition, in order to distinguish between the occurrence of a ceiling time reduction and the sudden occurrence of a time reduction, when the time reduction starts, a jackpot 3 signal (or jackpot 4 signal) is output for the ceiling time reduction,
Four jackpot signals (or three jackpot signals) may be output for sudden time reduction. In this way, the three jackpot signals and the four jackpot signals may be combined as appropriate to distinguish between the occurrence of a ceiling time reduction and the sudden occurrence of a time reduction so that an external device can recognize it.

[Transmission of external information or test signal]
FIG. 5-61 is a time chart showing how external information or test signals are transmitted.

Figure 5-61(a) shows the last special symbol variation display game in the previous time-saving state (the special symbol variation display game that reaches the number of time-savings), when the ceiling number is reached or the time-saving symbol stops, and the next special symbol This shows a case where a time saving state occurs after the variable display game (a time saving state due to a ceiling time saving or a sudden time saving).

In this case, in this embodiment, the timing at which the previous time saving state ends is the timing at which the time saving end setting process (step A612, FIG. 5-37) is executed within the special figure fluctuation process, that is, the timing when the previous time saving state ends This is the timing at which the variable display of the figure variable display game stops. In addition, the timing at which the later time saving state (ceiling time saving or sudden time saving) starts is the timing when the time saving variation number (steps A723, A726) is set in the special figure display processing, that is, the timing when the previous special figure variation display This is the timing at which the display of the game stop result ends (approximately the timing at which the next special figure variation display game starts if it starts).

In addition, at the timing when the variable display of the previous special figure variable display game stops, the off data of the jackpot 2 signal is sent to the external information output data area as a signal related to the time saver end by the time saving end setting process in the special figure changing process. It is set and output to an external device (such as a hall computer) (step A621), and a variable time reduction status signal (
Off data of special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal, normal symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal) is set in the test signal output data area and output to the test shooting test device. (Step A622). Therefore, the jackpot 2 signal as external information and the variable time shortening state signal as a test signal are turned off after the timing at which the variable display of the previous special symbol variable display game stops (after the previous time shortening ends).

Furthermore, at the timing when the display of the stop result of the above-mentioned special figure fluctuation display game ends, the on data of the jackpot 2 signal is set in the external information output data area as a signal regarding the start of time saving by the support activation setting process, and the external device (Hall computer, etc.) (Step A731), as well as a variable time reduction state signal (special symbol 1) as a signal related to the start of time reduction.
On data of the fluctuation time reduction state signal, special symbol 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal) is set in the test signal output data area and output to the test firing test device (step A733 ). Therefore, the jackpot 2 signal as external information and the fluctuation time reduction state signal as a test signal are turned on after the timing when the display of the stop result of the previous special symbol fluctuation display game ends.

In this way, when the special figure fluctuation display game where the time saving ends (the previous special figure fluctuation display game) reaches the ceiling number of times or stops at the time saving symbol, it is clear that the time saving has ended once. become. In addition, the output of external information (jackpot 2 signal) and test signals (fluctuating time reduction status signal, etc.) is turned off for the display time (stop display time) of the stop result (stop symbol), which saves time. When restarting, the ON state of the external information and test signal output can be clearly identified.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 5-61(b), in conventional gaming machines, at the timing when the display of the stop result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game ends, the time saving end setting process is performed in the special figure display process to save time. ends. In the time saving end setting process, the off data of the jackpot 2 signal is set in the external information output data area as a signal regarding the time saving end and is output to an external device (such as a hall computer), and the fluctuating time shortening state is output as a signal regarding the time saving end. Signal off data and the like are set in the test signal output data area and output to the sight firing test device.

For this reason, in conventional gaming machines, the jackpot 2 signal as external information and the fluctuation time shortening state signal as a test signal are turned off after the timing when the display of the stop result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game ends. However, due to the support activation setting process at this timing, the jackpot 2 signal and the fluctuation time reduction state signal immediately turn on, so they will not actually turn off (
remains on). Therefore, unlike the present embodiment, in the conventional gaming machine, it is not clear that the time saving has once ended, and when the time saving is restarted, it is unclear whether the output of external information or the test signal is on.

[Safety device related processing]
Next, details of the safety device related process (step X114) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 5-11) will be explained. FIG. 5-62 is a flowchart showing the procedure of safety device related processing. The safety device related process is an intra-area process and is executed as part of the above-mentioned intra-area program.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the safety device is in operation based on the safety device in operation flag in the safety device in operation flag area included in the intra-area work area (step X601). If the safety device operating flag=1, it can be determined that the safety device is operating.
If the safety device is in operation (step X601; Y), the safety device related process is ended.

When the safety device is not in operation (step X601; N), the gaming control device 100 loads the safety device operation information from the safety device operation information area included in the outside work area (step It is determined whether or not is the value of the old operation information area (step X603). If the safety device operation information is the value of the old operation information area (step
3; Y) Since there is no change in the safety device activation information, the process moves to step X609 without setting (sending) the production command.

If the safety device operation information is not the value in the old operation information area (step A safety device activation related command table in which information and commands are associated is set (step X604), and a command (ACTION section) corresponding to the safety device activation information is acquired (step X605). Then, it is determined whether there is no command definition (step X606). In the safety device activation related command table, the command corresponding to the safety device non-activation information (value 0) is not defined (because there is no command), so the safety device activation information is the safety device non-activation information (value 0). In this case, it can be determined that the command is not defined. If there is no command definition (step X606; Y), the process moves to step X609 without setting (sending) the production command.

If there is a command definition (step
. Safety device activation information is safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2),
If the safety device is operating information (value 3), it can be determined that a command is defined. Then, a performance command setting process for setting (sending) a performance command is executed (step X608).
Note that the production command consists of a MODE section and an ACTION section. In addition, in the safety device activation related command table, a command corresponding to the safety device non-activation information (value 0) is defined to omit the judgment in step It may be possible to set (send) commands related to device operation.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the safety device activation information is safety device activation information (value 3) (step X609). The safety device activation information is the safety device activation information (value 3).
) (step X609; N), the safety device related process is ended. On the other hand, if the safety device operation information is the safety device operation information (value 3) (step X609; Y
), "1" indicating that the safety device is in operation is saved in the safety device in-operation flag area as a safety device in-operation flag (step X610), and then the safety device-related processing is ended.
Note that if the safety device operating information (value 3) is saved in step X744 (described later) in the previous timer interrupt process, the result of step X609 will be "Y" in the next timer interrupt process.

As described above, when the safety device activation information changes to safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), or safety device activation information (value 3), the safety The device operation related commands include safety device operation information in part (ACTION part), and the production control device 3
00. Safety device activation-related commands correspond to the activation warning state when the ACTION part is safety device activation warning information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), and safety device activation information (value 3). The operation warning command corresponds to the operation warning state, and the operation warning command corresponds to the operation state.

When the production control device 300 receives the operation notice command, the display device 41 displays an operation notice display 511 (for example, the words "Soon to be discontinued") in the operation notice state of the safety device.
can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility that the game will be stopped, to urge the player to end the game, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged unintentionally. Furthermore, it is possible to give a surprise to those committing fraud and encourage them to stop the fraud.

By receiving the activation warning command, the production control device 300 can display an activation warning display 512 (for example, the words "The game will be discontinued after winning") on the display device 41 in the activation warning state of the safety device. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in advance that the game will be stopped after the end of the small win or the jackpot, and to warn the player that he or she will be disadvantaged, such as the consecutive winnings being stopped. Incidentally, a continuous win is, for example, a continuation of a jackpot state and a specific gaming state without passing through the normal mode (or normal gaming state). Additionally, the activation warning state can give a surprise to those committing fraud and encourage them to stop the fraud.

By receiving the in-operation command, the production control device 300 can display an in-operation display 513 (for example, the characters "stopped") on the display device 41 in the operating state (in-operation state) of the safety device. Therefore, it is possible to prevent new players (customers) from using the gaming machine 10,
If someone is committing fraud, they can be stopped.

In addition, when the safety device operation information does not change and is maintained at 0, 1, 2, 3 (0 → 0, 1 → 1
, 2→2, 3→3 (no change), the safety device activation related command is sent to the performance control device 300.
is not sent to. 190 after the safety device counter value reaches 190000 to 194999.
Even when the value is less than 000 and the safety device activation information changes from 1 to 0 (change from 1 to 0), safety device activation related commands are not sent without command definition. Note that changes in the safety device operation information from 2 to 1 or from 3 to 2 (changes from 2 to 1, 3 to 2) are eliminated by the difference ball confirmation process and the safety device operation monitoring process, which will be described later.

When the safety device operation information changes from 0 to 1 (change from 0 to 1), an operation notice command among the safety device operation related commands is transmitted to the production control device 300. When the safety device activation information changes from 1 to 2 (change from 1 to 2), an activation warning command among the safety device activation related commands is transmitted to the production control device 300. When the safety device activation information changes from 2 to 3 (at the time of change from 2 to 3), an in-operation command among the safety device activation related commands is transmitted to the production control device 300. Note that when the safety device activation information changes from 2 to 3, the result of step 1, the safety device is activated (step X601; Y), and in the subsequent timer interrupt processing steps X604 to X610
Commands related to safety device activation will not be sent.

Furthermore, the fact that the safety device activation information directly changes from 1 to 3 (the change itself from 1 to 3)
is removed by the difference ball confirmation process and safety device operation monitoring process described later, but the safety device operation information may change instantaneously from 1 → 2 → 3 (2 is an instantaneous value and as described below) (no activation warning condition occurs). This change from 1 to 2 to 3 corresponds to the fact that the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 and shifts from the operation notice state to the operation state when there is neither a jackpot nor a small win. Then, in response to the transition from the safety device activation notice state to the activation state, an in-operation command is transmitted to the production control device 300 as a safety device activation related command (steps X605, X607).

[Outside area integration processing]
Next, details of the out-of-area integration process (step X122) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 5-11) will be explained. FIG. 5-63 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure for out-of-area integration processing. The extra-area integration process is an extra-area process and is executed as part of the above-mentioned extra-area program.

The gaming control device 100 first saves the stack pointer in the stack pointer storage area of the outside work area (step An address value indicating the beginning is set (step X702). As a result, the stack pointer indicating the stack to be used is switched from the in-area stack area to the out-of-area stack area.

Next, the gaming control device 100 saves (PUSH) register information (values) for both register bank 0 and register bank 1 to the outside stack area (step X703).
. Here, it is preferable to save all general-purpose registers. And performance display device 152
Performance display device control processing is executed to perform display control, etc. (step X704). Subsequently, a difference ball confirmation process (step X705) is executed in which the number of difference balls (safety device counter value) is updated and safety device operation information is set corresponding to the number of difference balls (safety device counter value). Next, a safety device operation monitoring process for monitoring the operation of the safety device is executed (step X706).

After that, the gaming control device 100 restores the saved register (step X707), loads it from the stack pointer storage area, and sets the stack pointer (step X708).
, the performance display editing process ends. The set stack pointer indicates the address of the stack area within the area.

[Performance display device control processing]
Next, details of the performance display device control process (step X704) in the out-of-area integration process (FIG. 5-63) will be explained. FIG. 5-64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of performance display device control processing. The performance display device control process is an out-of-area process and is executed as part of the above-mentioned out-of-area program.

The game control device 100 first executes a validity determination to determine the validity of the performance display work area, and if it is invalid and abnormal, initializes the performance display work area (including initial value setting). Execute (step X711). The processing at step X711 is similar to the processing at step X84 in FIG. 5-10.

In addition, since the validity determination is executed every time the performance display device control process is executed, if the performance display work area is not valid, it can be initialized immediately, and abnormal performance display (abnormal base Display of values, etc.) can be prevented as much as possible.

Furthermore, when initializing the performance display work area (including initial value setting), areas other than the stack pointer storage area are initialized to protect the stack pointer storage area. Note that although the stack area outside the area is not initialized in this embodiment, it may be initialized. Even when the extra-area stack area is initialized, the values of registers saved in the extra-area stack area are protected and not initialized. The initialization of the performance display work area is performed separately from the initialization of the intra-area work area (gaming control work area) and the intra-area stack area (gaming control stack area), so the intra-area work area and has no effect on the stack area within the area.

Subsequently, the gaming control device 100 executes an initial display timer update process (step X71).
2). In the initial display timer update process, all blinking control (initial display control) that blinks all the LEDs of each digit of the performance display device 152 for about 5 seconds when the performance display starts (after the power is turned on)
Update the timer for

Next, the gaming control device 100 copies the switch rising edge information of the input port for which the base value is to be calculated to the performance display work area (step X713). The switch rising edge information is acquired through input processing and stored in the intra-area work area (particularly the switch control area) (step X103). As described above, in this embodiment, the input ports (input ports to be monitored) that are the targets of base value calculation are the third input port 124 and the fourth input port 126. The copied switch rising edge information is used in the performance display editing process (Figure 5-10).

In addition, even if a game ball is detected, it does not directly change the number of normal prize balls or the number of normal out balls, and the rising edge information (bit) of the switch that is not subject to base value calculation is copied with cleared ( mask). For example, the gate switch 34a or the specific area switch 72
Copy the information such as a and the remaining bulb outlet switch 73 in a cleared state. This results in
In the performance display editing process, the process related to these switches (at least the clearing process in step X91) can be omitted.

In addition, the number of normal out balls is temporarily determined by the switches 35a, 36a, 37a, 38a,
39a, if it is updated by the input (game ball detection) itself at the gate switch 34a, the specific area switch 72a, or the remaining ball ejection port switch 73, the out ball detection detects all the game balls ejected from the gaming area 32. The switch 74 is redundantly updated, and the base value is calculated to be an incorrect value. In addition, the number of normal prize balls is updated by the input (game ball detection) itself at the gate switch 34a, the specific area switch 72a, or the remaining ball outlet switch 73, which overlaps with the switch of the prize opening and allows game balls to pass through. If this happens, the winning opening switch will be redundantly updated, and the base value will be calculated to be an incorrect value.

Next, the game control device 100 executes performance display device display processing (step X714)
. In the performance display device display process, segment output data (display data and lighting pattern data regarding the base value) corresponding to the base value to be displayed on the performance display device 152 is set in accordance with the type of display period and various other conditions. For example, the real-time value display period BL, the 1st previous display period B1, the 2nd previous display period B2, and the 3rd previous display period B3 are provided as display periods, and in each display period, the real-time value during measurement of the base value is displayed. , previous aggregation interval, 2
Segment output data corresponding to the base value measured in the previous aggregation interval or the three previous aggregation interval may be set.

Next, the gaming control device 100 updates the timer for switching the display period, and determines whether it is the timing to switch the display period (step X715). If it is the display period switching timing (step X715; Y), the display period switching setting is executed (step X716), and the performance display device control process ends. Game control device 100
If it is not the display period switching timing (step X715; N), the performance display device control process is ended without executing the display period switching setting.

In the display period switching setting, the display period information is switched as follows: BL→B1→B2→B3→BL→... Further, an initial value of a timer for period switching (for example, an initial value corresponding to a predetermined period of 5 seconds) is set.

[Difference ball confirmation process]
Next, details of the difference ball confirmation process (step X705) in the out-of-area integration process (FIG. 5-63) will be explained. FIG. 5-65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the difference ball confirmation process. The difference ball confirmation process is an out-of-area process and is executed as part of the above-mentioned out-of-area program. In the difference ball confirmation process, a safety device counter value (number of difference balls + 100,000) indicating the number of difference balls is updated, and safety device operation information indicating the state of the safety device is updated.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the safety device is in operation based on the safety device in operation flag in the safety device in operation flag area included in the intra-area work area (step X721). If the safety device is in operation (step X721; Y), the difference ball confirmation process is immediately ended, and the safety device counter value and safety device activation information are not updated. In addition, in this embodiment, if the extra-area integrated processing program (program related to the safety device) included in the extra-area program is not executed while the game is stopped, and the safety device is activated and the game is stopped. In this case, the out-of-area integration process including the difference ball confirmation process is not executed (step X120; Y), so the process of step X721 may be omitted. Note that step X721
If there is no processing, the safety device activation flag area becomes an area that is read and written by programs within the area and is not read by programs outside the area (an area that is not accessed).

When the safety device is not in operation (step
It is determined whether or not (step X722). When the old operation information is 2 or more (step X722; Y), the difference ball confirmation process is ended and the safety device counter value and the safety device operation information are not updated.

When the old operation information is less than 2 (step X722; N), the game control device 100
It is determined whether there is an input to the out ball detection switch 74 based on the switch rising edge information of the switch control area (intra-area work area) regarding the fourth input port 126 (step X723). When there is an input to the out ball detection switch 74 (step X723;
Y), it is determined whether the safety device counter value is 0 (step X724). If the safety device counter value is not 0 (step X724; N), the safety device counter value, which is the value in the safety device counter area, is updated by -1 (decreased by 1) (step X725). Therefore, in response to the input to the out ball detection switch 74 increasing the number of ejected balls by 1,
The number of difference balls (=number of safe balls - number of ejected balls) and thus the safety device counter value (=number of difference balls + 100,000) will be decreased by 1 and updated. Next, the number of acquired game balls is loaded from the number of acquired game balls area included in the intra-area work area (step X726).

The game control device 100 performs step X7 when there is no input to the out ball detection switch 74.
23; N) or when the safety device counter value is 0 (step X724; Y), the safety device counter value is maintained without being updated by -1 and the number of acquired game balls is loaded (step .

Next, the game control device 100 loads the safety device counter value of the safety device counter area included in the outside work area (step X727), and adds the number of acquired game balls to the safety device counter value (step X728). The number of game balls acquired is the number of prize balls acquired within one interruption (total), that is, the increase in the number of safe balls within one interruption, so in Steps number of balls) and safety device counter value (= number of difference balls + 10
10,000) will be updated and increased by the number of acquired game balls.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets the safety device counter value to the counter reference value (195000
) or more (whether the safety device counter≧195000 or not) is determined (step X729). When the safety device counter value is equal to or higher than the counter reference value (195000) (step X729; Y), the upper limit value (195000 ) (step X730), and the upper limit value is saved in the safety device counter area as the value after addition (step X731). Note that the safety device counter value exceeds the upper limit value in step X728 and becomes 19.
It may be 5000+α. Here, α is less than the maximum value of the number of game balls acquired (acquired within one interruption), and is smaller than, for example, the total value of prize balls when all winning a prize opening switches are input at the same time.

On the other hand, if the safety device counter value is less than the counter reference value (195000) (step Save to area (step X731). In this way, the safety device counter value in the safety device counter area is updated to the added value (including the value limited to the upper limit value).

In addition, by limiting the safety device counter value to the upper limit value 19500, the range (number of bytes or number of bits) of the safety device counter area becomes clear, which is convenient for developing a game control program.

Next, the gaming control device 100 sets an operation information number (here, 0 to 2) corresponding to the safety device counter value (step X732). Safety device counter value from 0 to 189999, 1
Corresponding to each of the safety device counter values of 90000 to 194999 and the safety device counter value of 195000, the operation information number is “0” indicating the non-operation state (normal state) of the safety device.
, is set to "1" indicating an operation warning state, and "2" indicating an operation warning state. Note that the operation information number is not set to "3", which indicates an operating state in which the safety device is in operation.

Next, the game control device 100 loads the current safety device operation information from the safety device operation information area included in the outside work area and saves it to the old operation information area (step X73
3). Then, it is determined whether the old operation information is 2 and the operation information number is 1 (old operation information=2 and operation information number=1) (step X734). If the old operation information = 2 and the operation information number = 1 (step X734; Y), the safety device operation information "2" (loaded value) is maintained without saving the operation information number in the safety device operation information area. Then, the difference ball confirmation process ends. This prevents the safety device activation information from changing from "2" to "1" (prevention of change from 2 to 1). Then, since the old operation information is 2, the difference ball confirmation process after the next timer interrupt ends immediately, and the safety device counter value and the safety device operation information are not updated. Safety device activation information “2” is maintained.

On the other hand, if the old operation information is not 2 or the operation information number is not 1 (step The information is saved in the device operation information area and the safety device operation information area is updated (step X735). Thereafter, the difference ball confirmation process is ended. Even if "2" indicating the activation warning state is saved in the safety device activation information area, if there is neither a jackpot nor a small hit, "2" indicating the activation state of the safety device will be saved instantly in the safety device activation monitoring process later. 3" is saved in the safety device activation information area, and no activation warning condition occurs.

In this way, in the difference ball confirmation process, the safety device counter value of 0 to 189999, 1
Corresponding to each of the safety device counter values of 90,000 to 194,999 and the safety device counter value of 195,000, the safety device operation information is "", which indicates the non-operation state (normal state) of the safety device.
"0" (safety device non-operation information), "1" (safety device operation advance notice information) indicating an operation warning state, and "2" (safety device operation warning information) indicating an operation warning state.

The change pattern (including the maintenance pattern) from the old safety device operation information (old operation information in step X733) to the updated new information (step X735) is 0→0, 0→1, 1→0,
1→1, 1→2, or 2→2, and as described above, a change from 2→1 is prevented (step X734).

In addition, the gaming control device 100 sends a difference ball command indicating the updated safety device counter value (step X731) or a difference ball command indicating the updated number of difference balls (=safety device counter value - 100,000). It may be transmitted to the production control device 300 (sub board), and the production control device 300 may display the safety device counter value or the number of difference balls on the display device 41 or the like. In that case, in the difference ball confirmation process, even if the old operation information in the old operation information area is 2 (safety device activation warning information) (step X722), the safety device counter value is updated, and in step
29 and step X730 are omitted so that the safety device counter value is not limited to the upper limit value 19500. However, in response to a safety device counter value of 195,000 or more, the safety device activation information is set to “2” (safety device activation warning information) indicating an activation warning state.

The difference ball confirmation process has been described above, and step X726 of the difference ball confirmation process is performed by a first It constitutes a counting means. Steps X723 to X725 of the difference ball confirmation process constitute a second counting means capable of counting the number of used game media (for example, the number of fired balls or the number of ejected balls). Step X728 of the difference ball confirmation process constitutes a calculation means capable of calculating a calculation value (for example, a safety device counter value or a difference number of balls) based on the number of payouts and the number of used balls.

[Safety device operation monitoring processing]
Next, details of the safety device operation monitoring process (step X706) in the out-of-area integration process (FIG. 5-63) will be explained. FIG. 5-66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of safety device operation monitoring processing. The safety device operation monitoring process is an out-of-area process and is executed as part of the above-mentioned out-of-area program.

The game control device 100 first determines whether the safety device operation information is 2 or more (safety device operation information≧2) (step X741). If the safety device activation information is 2 or more (
step
Step X742). Here, whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit can be determined based on the game processing number (special figure game processing number, accessory game processing number), for example. The game processing number is stored in the game processing number area (special figure game processing number area, accessory game processing number area) of the intra-area work area.

For example, if the game processing number is from the jackpot fanfare game processing number to the jackpot ending game processing number, it can be determined that the jackpot is in progress. In this embodiment, if the accessory game processing number is 1 to 5, it can be determined that the jackpot has been hit. For example, if the game processing number of the small winning start (or small winning fanfare (only if it exists)) is the game processing number of the small winning remaining ball processing (or the ending of the small winning (only if it exists)), then the small winning will occur. It can be judged as medium. In this embodiment, if the special figure game processing number is 3 to 5, it can be determined that the small hit is in progress. It should be noted that it may be determined that a small hit is occurring from the time when a small winning symbol is derived, or it may be determined that a jackpot is occurring from the time that a jackpot symbol is derived. In the case where a jackpot occurs due to a V win during a small win, it may be determined that the jackpot is occurring from the time when the V win occurs.

The game control device 100 performs a step X742;N when there is neither a small hit nor a big hit.
), the current safety device operation information is loaded from the safety device operation information area included in the outside work area and saved in the old operation information area (step X743). Then, save the safety device operation information (value 3) in the safety device operation information area and update the safety device operation information area (
Step X744).

On the other hand, if the safety device activation information is "0" or "1" smaller than 2 (step
;N), or if a jackpot or a small win is in progress (step

As described above, in the activation warning state where the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set and the safety device is activated (condition (1) is met and condition (2) is not satisfied), a jackpot or When the small hit ends and there is no longer a small hit or jackpot (if condition (2) is met), the safety device activation information is set to the safety device activation information (value 3) (safety device activation information 2 → 3). change) (step X744). This sets the safety device activation flag to “1”.
'' (step It is possible to generate a stop state (game-disabled state, game-prohibited state).

By activating the safety device and disabling the game, it is possible to take appropriate countermeasures against fraud when the number of differential balls or the number of safe balls is large, and by suppressing the number of differential balls or the number of safe balls, It may also be possible to suppress people's addiction to gaming.

Note that even if the safety device counter value of 195,000 is reached and the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set (steps X732, X735 of the difference ball confirmation process), if there is neither a jackpot nor a small hit (step ;N), the safety device activation information will instantly switch from the safety device activation warning information (value 2) to the safety device activation information (value 3) (step X7
44). That is, in this case, before the activation warning command is sent to the production control device 300, the safety device activation warning information (value 2) in the safety device activation information area is overwritten with the safety device activation information (value 3). It will be deleted. Therefore, when the safety device counter value reaches 195000 when there is neither a jackpot nor a small hit, the activation warning state that warns the activation of the safety device does not occur, and the safety device is activated immediately after and the game is stopped (playing is not possible). state, game prohibited state) occurs. Note that this corresponds to the safety device activation information changing instantaneously from 1 to 2 to 3 as described above (2 is an instantaneous value and no activation warning condition occurs), but it also provides a warning that the safety device will be activated. In response to the transition from the activation warning state to the activation state in which the safety device is activated,
The operating command is transmitted to the production control device 300 as a safety device operation related command (steps X605, X607).

In addition, if the safety device activation information (value 3) is set and the safety device has already activated and the game is in a stopped state, the out-of-area integration process will not be executed (step X120;
Y), the safety device activation information is maintained at the safety device activation information (value 3), and the game halt state is continued.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the safety device counter value of 195000 is reached and the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set either before or after the V winning during the small winning, after the jackpot due to the V winning ends. In step X744, the safety device operating information (value 3) is set to stop the game (a jackpot will occur). However, as another example, if the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set before the V-win during a small win, the safety device activation information (value 3) is set immediately after the small win ends and the game is stopped. state (no jackpot occurs), and if the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set after a V win during a small win, the safety device activation information (value 3) is set after the jackpot due to a V win ends. The game may be stopped (a jackpot will still occur). As another example, even if the safety device activation warning information (value 2) is set either before or after the V-win during a small win, the safety device activation information (value 3) is set immediately after the small win ends. You can set it to stop playing (no jackpots will occur).

[Control of production control device]
Below, the control (processing) that the production control device 300 executes using the production control program will be described.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, details of the main processing executed by the production control device 300 will be explained. FIG. 5-67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the production control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (performance microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on.

When execution of the main process is started, the production control device 300 first prohibits interruptions (
Step S1). Next, initial settings of the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are executed (step S2
, S3), and allow interrupts (step S4). When the interrupt is permitted, the gaming control device 1
The command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from 00 becomes executable.

Next, the production control device 300 allows generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 etc. (step S5), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (step S6). and,
The initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step S7).

Subsequently, the production control device 300 clears the WDT (watchdog timer) (step S8). The WDT is activated by the CPU initialization (step S2) described above, and is activated by the CPU3.
11 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period has elapsed, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the production control device 300 executes an RTC reading process to read time information from the RTC (real-time clock) 338 (step S9).

In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined period (for example, every two hours), and there is no need to read the time information every time the process moves to step S9. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the RTC reading process is executed only once when the production control device 300 is powered on (that is, the gaming machine 10 is powered on) (by changing the position of the RTC reading process, for example, step S3 and step (may be executed during S4). Performance control device 300
sets a timer (clocking means) that measures time in the timer area in the RAM, and only once when reading time information from the RTC 338 at a predetermined period or when the power is turned on.
When the time information is read from the RTC 338, the time timer (clocking means) may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC 338. The production control device 300 may execute various processes using a timer. In this way, the number of times the time is read from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

Next, the performance control device 300 detects an operation signal of the performance button 25 by the player (a signal from the performance button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), and changes the performance content (setting) according to the detected signal. A production button input process is executed (step S10). Next, a hall/player setting mode process is executed to accept operations such as changing the brightness and volume of LEDs and liquid crystals (display device 41, etc.) by the person in charge of the game hall (gaming parlor), the players, etc. (step S11). ). In the hole/player setting mode process, the player can customize the performance according to the performance points described later.

Next, the production control device 300 executes production point control processing for adding and clearing production points (step S12). In the production point control process, processing is performed in which production points are added when a production or operation that is subject to addition of production points is executed, and
In order to carry over performance points to the next game, at the end of a game or when a game is stopped (when stopped), for example, information including performance point information is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark), which is a two-dimensional code. will be displayed. For example, the production control device 300 can display a QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in hall/player setting mode processing or safety device processing (when receiving an active command).

Next, the production control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating random numbers such as production random numbers (step S13), analyzes the received command received from the gaming control device 100, and performs a corresponding received command check process. Execute (step S14). Note that details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 5-68.

Next, the performance control device 300 executes a customer waiting demo editing process that edits and controls the content of the customer waiting demo displayed on the display device 41 (step S15), and changes the power saving state of the gaming machine 10 while waiting for a customer. A power saving control process is executed to control (step S16).

Next, the production control device 300 updates various data according to the content to be displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer, etc. The effect display editing process is executed (step S17). The drawing data set at this time is set on the VDP31 within a frame period of 1/30 seconds (approximately 33.3 msec).
2 can complete the drawing, the image on the display device 41 can be updated without any problem. Then, the preparation for drawing to the display frame buffer is completed, and drawing command preparation completion setting is executed (step S18).

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether it is frame switching timing (step S19). If it is not the frame switching timing (step S19; N), repeat the process of step S19 until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (step S19; Y), instruct the display device 41 to draw the screen. (Step S20). Since the frame period of this embodiment is 1/30 seconds, for example, if periodic V blanking (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame period), frames are switched. . Note that the image may not be updated every 1/60 seconds, but the interval may be further increased.

Further, the production control device 300 executes a sound control process to control the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b (step S21).

Further, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process to control the decoration devices (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) including LEDs and the like (step S22). In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process to control a performance device (board performance device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (step S23). In the movable body control process, for example, an accessory motion effect that drives a motor is set.

Then, when the production control device 300 finishes the process of step S23 described above, the production control device 300 performs step S
Return to step 8. Thereafter, the processes of steps S8 to S23 are repeated.

[Received command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check process (step S14) in the above-described main process (FIG. 5-67) will be explained with reference to FIG. 5-68. FIG. 5-68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the number of commands received in order to check the number of commands received from the gaming control device 100 (step S101). Then, it is determined whether the number of commands received is not 0 (step S102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the gaming control device 100 (step S102; N), there is no command to be analyzed, so the received command check process ends.

On the other hand, if the number of received commands is not 0, that is, if a command is received from the gaming control device 100 (step S102; Y), the production control device 300 converts the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area into the command After subtracting the number of receptions (step S10
3) Copy the contents of the received command buffer in the RAM to the command area for analysis (step S104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer to the command area. Furthermore, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, the production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds by 1) in the range of 0 to 31 (step S105). The receive command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31, and here the received commands are read out in order of index and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the reception command buffer corresponding to the read command reading index is cleared.

The production control device 300 determines whether copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step S101 has been completed (step S106), and if the copying has not been completed (step S106; N). , repeats the processing of steps S104 to S106.

When the production control device 300 receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the received command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. The received command buffer can store 32 commands, but the received commands are analyzed separately in a command area for analysis. Then, when the content of the received command is copied to the command area for analysis, the received command buffer and command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, by always securing a free area in the received command buffer without directly analyzing it, it is possible to prepare for receiving a large amount of commands.

Subsequently, when the copying is completed (step S106; Y), the production control device 300 loads the received command content in the command area for analysis (step S107), and executes a received command analysis process to analyze the content. Execute (step S108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 5-69. Furthermore, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (step S109). After that, it is determined whether the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step S101 has been completed (step S110), and if the analysis has not been completed (step S110; N), steps S107 to The process of S110 is repeated. If the analysis is completed (step S110; Y), the received command check process ends.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis process (step S108) in the above-described received command check process (FIG. 5-68) will be described with reference to FIG. 5-69. FIG. 5-69 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as a MODE section and the lower byte as an ACTION section (ACT section) (step S121). Game control device 1
The command sent from 00 to the production control device 300 is the MODE section (MODE command)
and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted successively from a MODE section indicating the type of command. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are configured in the order of MODE part and ACTION part.

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE section is within the normal range (step S122). That is, it is determined whether the MODE section indicating the type of command has a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE section is within the normal range (step S122; Y), it is similarly determined whether the ACTION section is within the normal range (step S123). That is, it is determined whether the ACTION part indicating the content of the command (specific performance instructions, etc.) has a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content). If the ACTION part is within the normal range (step S123; Y), it is further determined whether the ACTION part is a correct combination for the MODE part (step S124). That is, it is determined whether the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (step S124; Y), command processing according to the command system is executed in steps S125 and subsequent steps.

The production control device 300 first determines whether the value of the MODE section is within the range of the variable command (step S125). Incidentally, the variable command is a command that instructs a variable pattern of a special decorative symbol, and includes, for example, a variable command. If the MODE section represents a variable command (step S125; Y), variable command processing is executed (step S126), and the received command analysis process ends.

If the MODE section does not represent a variable command (step S125; N), the production control device 300 then determines whether the MODE section is within the range of a winning command (step S127). In addition, the winning commands are commands that command operations related to the performance during jackpots and small wins (displaying fanfare screens and round screens, etc.).For example, the fanfare command to command the fanfare screen, the round screen These include a round command for commanding, an interval command for commanding an interval screen, and an ending command for commanding an ending screen. If the MODE section represents a winning command (step S127; Y), the winning command processing is executed (step S128), and the received command analysis process ends.

If the MODE section does not represent a winning command (step S127; N), the production control device 300 then determines whether the MODE section is within the range of a symbol command (step S129). Note that the symbol-related commands include, for example, a decorative special figure 1 command and a decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. If the MODE section represents a symbol-related command (step S129; Y), symbol-related command processing is executed (step S130).
, ends the received command analysis process.

If the MODE section does not represent a symbol-based command (step S129; N), the production control device 300 then determines whether the MODE section is within the range of a single-shot command (step S131). If the MODE part represents a single-shot command (step S131
;Y), one-shot command processing is executed (step S132), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

If the MODE part does not represent a single-shot type command (step S131; N), the production control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part is within the range of a prefetch symbol type command (
Step S133). The prefetch symbol type command includes, for example, a prefetch stop symbol command. If the MODE section represents a prefetch symbol type command (step S133; Y
), executes prefetch symbol-related command processing (step S134), and ends the received command analysis processing.

If the MODE section does not represent a prefetch symbol-related command, the production control device 300 (
Step S133; N), then it is determined whether the MODE section is within the range of the prefetch variable command (step S135). The lookahead variation command includes, for example, a lookahead variation pattern command. If the MODE part represents a look-ahead variable command (step S
135; Y), executes prefetch variable command processing (step S136), and ends the received command analysis processing.

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not represent a prefetch variable command (step S135; N), the production control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process ends. Also,
If the MODE part is not in the normal range (step S122; N), if the ACTION part is not in the normal range (step S123; N), or if the ACTION part is not the correct combination for the MODE part (step S124; N), the received command Finish the analysis process.

[Single command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 5-70, details of the one-shot command processing (step S132) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 5-69) will be described. FIG. 5-70 is a flowchart showing the procedure of one-shot command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (step S141). If the MODE section represents a model specification command (step S141; Y), a model setting process for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (
Step S142), the one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE section does not represent a model specifying command (step S141; N), the production control device 300 then determines whether the MODE section represents a RAM initialization command (step S143). If the MODE section represents a command for RAM initialization (step S143; Y), RAM initialization setting processing is executed to notify RAM initialization, etc. (step S144), and the one-shot command processing is ended. .

If the MODE section does not represent a RAM initialization command (step S143; N), the production control device 300 then determines whether the MODE section represents a power failure recovery command (step S145). . For example, power failure recovery commands include a power failure recovery command and a recovery screen command. If the MODE section represents a power failure recovery command (step S145; Y), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (step S146), and the one-shot command processing is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a power failure recovery command (step S145; N), the production control device 300 then determines whether the MODE section represents a customer waiting demonstration command (step S147). If the MODE section represents a customer waiting demonstration command (step S147; Y), a customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (step S148), and the one-shot command process is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent the customer waiting demonstration command (step S147; N), the production control device 300 then determines whether the MODE section represents the decoration special map 1 pending number command (step S147; N). S149). Then, when the MODE section represents the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (step S149; Y), special figure 1 reservation information setting processing is executed (step S150).
), ends one-shot command processing.

If the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (step S149; N), the production control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command. (Step S151). Then, when the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 2 reservation number command (step S151; Y), the special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (step S151; Y).
152), the one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 pending number command (step S151; N), the production control device 300 then determines whether the MODE part represents the probability information command (step S153). ). If the MODE section represents a probability information command (step S153; Y), probability information setting processing is executed (step S154), and the one-shot command processing ends.

If the MODE section does not represent a probability information command (step S153; N), the production control device 300 then determines whether the MODE section represents an error/invalid command (step S155). . In addition, examples of error/illegal commands include the unauthorized occurrence command, unauthorized release command, status off command, status on command, magnet unauthorized notification command (magnetic error command), and panel radio unauthorized notification command (panel radio error command). be. As the fraud occurrence command, there is a command indicating the occurrence of a fraudulent prize based on the signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switches 38a and 39a. The unauthorized release command is a command that indicates unauthorized release. In the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step X108), the occurrence of fraudulent winnings and the cancellation of fraudulent winnings are monitored, and a fraud occurrence command and a fraudulent cancellation command can be transmitted. As a state on command,
Generation of a shot ball out switch signal (shot ball out error), generation of an overflow switch signal (overflow error), generation of a dispensing abnormality status signal (dispensing abnormality error), and generation of a signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63. (Glass frame opening error),
There is a command that indicates the generation of a signal (body frame opening error, front frame opening error) from the body frame opening detection switch 64 (front frame opening detection switch). Further, the status off command indicates that no error has occurred. When there is a detection (magnet fraud) from the magnetic sensor switch 61, a magnet fraud notification command is transmitted in the magnet fraud monitoring process (step X115). When there is a detection (radio wave fraud) from the board radio wave sensor 62, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X11) is performed.
In step 6), a board radio wave unauthorized notification command is transmitted.

If the MODE section represents an error/invalid command (step S155;
Y), executes error/fraud setting processing to notify or cancel notification of errors or fraud (step S156), and ends the one-shot command processing. In error/invalid setting processing, for example,
Generating an error or fraud notification sound, causing LEDs for presentation provided in the gaming machine 10, such as the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, to emit light in a predetermined manner, or displaying an error on the display device 41, etc. Set it like this.

If the MODE section does not represent an error/invalid command (step S155; N), the production control device 300 then outputs a production mode switching command (set in special figure display processing, etc.). ) is determined (step S157). If the MODE section represents a command for switching the production mode (step S157; Y), production mode switching setting processing is executed (step S158), and the one-shot command processing is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a command for switching the performance mode (step S157; N), the production control device 300 then determines whether the MODE section indicates an out pitch number command indicating the number of out pitches. Determination is made (step S159). If the MODE section represents the number of out pitches command (step S159; Y), the process when receiving the number of out pitches is executed (step S160), and the single-shot command processing is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent an out pitch count command (step S159; N), the production control device 300 then determines whether the MODE section represents a count command (big winning opening count command). (Step S161). When the MODE section represents a count command for the big prize opening switch (step S161; Y), count information setting processing is executed (step S162), and the single-shot command processing is ended.

If the MODE section does not represent a count command (step S161; N), the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents a setting value information command (probability setting value information command) (step S163). The setting value information command is included in the command at the time of power failure recovery in step X49 of FIG. 5-6 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step X47. If the MODE section represents a set value information command (step S163; Y), a set value reception process is executed (step S164), and the one-shot command process is ended. In the setting value reception process, the setting value (probability setting value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM, and necessary processing is executed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting value information command (step S163; N), the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents a setting change command (step S165). As a setting change command, for example, the command while changing the probability setting (
There is step X33). If the MODE part represents a setting change command, then (
Step S165; Y), a setting change type information setting process is executed (step S166), and the one-shot type command process is ended. In the setting change information setting process, the content of the setting change command is stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command indicating that the probability setting is being changed is received, in the setting change information setting process, a setting changing indication is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting is being changed.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting change command, the production control device 300 (
Step S165; N), it is determined whether the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command (
Step S167). An example of a setting confirmation command is a command for confirming probability settings (step X36). If the MODE section represents a setting confirmation command (step S167; Y), a setting confirmation information setting process is executed (step S168), and the one-shot command process is ended. In the setting confirmation information setting process, the content of the setting confirmation command is stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when a command indicating probability setting confirmation is received, in the setting confirmation information setting process, a setting confirmation display is displayed on the display device 41 to notify the player that the setting confirmation is in progress.

If the MODE section does not represent a setting confirmation command, the production control device 300 (
Step S167; N), it is determined whether the MODE section represents a safety device related command (step S169). Examples of safety device related commands include safety device activation related commands (step X607). When a difference ball command including difference ball information such as a safety device counter value and the number of difference balls is sent from the gaming control device 100 to the production control device 300, this difference ball command is included in the safety device related commands. good. If the MODE section represents a safety device-related command (step S169; Y), safety device-related processing related to the safety device is executed (step S170), and the single-shot command processing is ended. In safety device-related processing, the contents of safety device-related commands are stored, and processing corresponding to the commands is executed.

In the safety device-related processing, information included in the safety device-related command can be displayed on the display device 41 as processing corresponding to the command. For example, when a safety device activation related command is received as a safety device related command, the safety device activation information (safety device activation notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 1), safety device activation warning information included in the ACTION part of the safety device activation related command) Safety device-related display (operation notice display 511) corresponding to information (value 2), safety device activation information (value 3))
, an operation warning display 512, and an operation-in-progress display 513) are displayed on the display device 41. Also, for example,
When a difference ball command is received as a safety device related command, the display device 41 displays the number of difference balls.
to be displayed.

To display the number of difference balls (= safety device counter value - 100,000), the entire range of values (for example, 0 to 100,000 or -100,000 to +100,000) is displayed on the display device 41 in response to the received difference ball command. It may be displayed, or only values within a predetermined range (for example, 90,000 to 100,000 after the operation notice state) may be displayed. Alternatively, the difference number of balls itself may be displayed,
The number of difference balls may be indirectly displayed in the form of the number of game balls (number of game media) remaining until the safety device is activated (stopped).

Note that the difference ball command may be notified (transmitted and received) in correspondence with the number of difference balls that changes in units of 1. For example, the number of difference balls indicated by the difference ball command is between 0 and 100,000 or between -100,000 and +100,000, and can be changed by one in the same way as the actual number of difference balls. A difference ball command may be transmitted every time the safety device counter value and thus the number of difference balls is updated (step X731).

Further, the difference ball command may be notified (transmitted and received) in accordance with the number of difference balls that changes in a predetermined unit. For example, the number of difference balls indicated by the difference ball command can be changed in units of 1000, and is 0 (=
Actual number of difference balls 0-999), 1000 (=actual number of difference balls 1000-1999), 2000
(=actual number of difference balls 2000 to 2999), ..., 100,000 (=actual number of difference balls 100,000). In this case, in order to reduce the chances of transmitting the difference ball command, the difference ball command may be transmitted every time the safety device counter value and thus the number of difference balls is updated in units of 1000 (step X731). Further, the number of difference balls indicated by the difference ball command may have a value on the negative side.

If the MODE section does not represent a safety device related command (step S169; N), the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (step S171). In addition, the pattern stop command includes, for example, a pattern stop command for special pattern 1 (decoration special pattern 1 stop command) and a pattern stop command for special pattern 2 (decoration special pattern 2 stop command). If the MODE section represents a command to stop the symbol (step S171
;Y), the production control device 300 next determines whether the command of the MODE section is a normal command (step S172).

If the command of the MODE section is a normal command (step S172; Y), the production control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special symbol (step S173), and sets the game state flag after all the symbols have stopped. is set to the normal state (step S174), and the one-shot command processing is ended. In the process of step S174, as an example, the gaming status flag is set to the normal status, but depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the gaming status flag may be set to ``fluctuating'', ``during jackpot'', or ``during small winning''. A flag is set.

On the other hand, if the MODE section does not represent a symbol stop command (step S171; N)
Or, if the command of the MODE section is not normal (step S172; N), the production control device 300 ends the single-shot command processing.

In addition, the production control device 300 may execute processing for commands not shown in FIG. 5-70 in single-shot command processing. For example, the performance control device 300 receives a time reduction variation number command, a performance rotation number command, a hitting method instruction notification command (a left-handed hitting instruction notification command, a right-handed hitting instruction notification command), etc. from the gaming control device 100, and receives the commands. You may perform the corresponding processing. The production control device 300 can obtain the remaining number of variations in the time-saving state from a time-reduction variation number command (time-reduction variation number), and can obtain the remaining number of production rotations in each production mode from the production rotation number command, etc. Performances can be set based on the remaining number of fluctuations in the game, the number of rotations remaining in each performance mode, etc. The performance control device 300 displays a hitting method instruction display (left-handed hitting instruction display or right-handed hitting instruction display) that instructs (suggests) how to play in response to a hitting method instruction notification command (left-handed hitting instruction notification command or right-handed hitting instruction notification command). ) can be displayed (notified) on the display device 41 or the like.

[Ahead design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 5-71, details of the prefetch symbol-related command processing (step S134) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 5-69) will be described. FIG. 5-71 is a flowchart showing the procedure of prefetch symbol-related command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest pending information is information on special figure 1 pending (special figure 1 starting memory), for example, if the latest received decoration special figure pending number command is the number of decorative special figure 1 pending. It is determined whether it is a command (step S181). If the latest pending information is information on special pattern 1 pending (step S181; Y), save the prefetch symbol type command (prefetch stop pattern command) in the special pattern 1 prefetch pattern command area corresponding to the number of special symbols 1 pending ( Step S182
).

If the latest reservation information is not information of special figure 1 reservation (step S18), the production control device 300
1; N), that is, if the most recently received decorative special figure pending number command is the decorative special figure 2 pending number command, the pre-read symbol type command (pre-read stop symbol command) is sent to the special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 reserved number. 2. Save in the prefetch symbol command area (step S183).

After step S182 and step S183, the production control device 300 sets a prefetch variable command reception wait flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a prefetch variable command (step S184). This is because the pre-read symbol type command and the pre-read variable type command are set, so the pre-read variable type command is transmitted from the game control device 100 following the pre-read symbol type command. Thereafter, the prefetch symbol-related command processing ends.

[Look-ahead variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 5-72, details of the prefetch variable command processing (step S136) in the above-mentioned received command analysis processing (FIG. 5-69) will be described. FIG. 5-72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of prefetch variable command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first issues a prefetch variation command (prefetch variation pattern command).
It is determined whether or not it is waiting for reception of (step S191). If the aforementioned prefetch variable command reception wait flag (step S194) is set, it can be determined that the prefetch variable command is waiting to be received. If the read-ahead variable command is not waiting to be received (step S191; N), the read-ahead variable command process ends. If the read-ahead variable command is waiting to be received (step S191; Y), the read-ahead variable command reception wait flag is cleared (step S192).

Next, the production control device 300 (sub board) displays the latest pending information pattern (special figure 1 or special figure 2)
A prefetch variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of reservations is set (step S193), and an intra-sub prefetch variation command MODE part is obtained in correspondence with the MODE part of the prefetch variation command (step S194). Next, a look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (step S
195), the intra-sub prefetch variation command ACT portion corresponding to the ACTION portion (ACT portion) of the prefetch variation command is obtained (step S196).

Next, the production control device 300 determines whether both the converted MODE section and ACT section (that is, the intra-sub prefetch variation command MODE section and ACT section) are other than 0 (step S197). Note that if it is a normal (valid) command, it will be converted to a value other than 0. MO after conversion
If both the DE part and the ACT part are other than 0 (step S197; Y), the MODE after conversion
The converted command consisting of the part and the ACT part is the latest pending information, and the look-ahead variation command area corresponding to the number of holds (Special Figure 1 Look-Ahead Variation Command Area or Special Figure 2 Look-Ahead Variation Command Area)
(step S198). Then, a prefetch command consistency check process is executed (step S199), and it is determined whether the combination of the MODE section and the ACT section after conversion is normal (step S200).

Note that the first half fluctuation time corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of suspensions when the suspension variable display game is started. When the pending variable display game starts, if there are no other pending events, the first half of the variation will be longer, and if a new pending event occurs and the number of pending events is large, the first half of the variation will be shorter. Therefore, even if the time value of the first half variation changes, the MODE part of the received prefetch variation command is converted into the sub intra-prefetch variation command MODE part so that the internal commands of the production control device 300 can be handled in the same way.

Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reservations, the second half fluctuation corresponding to the intra-sub prefetch fluctuation command ACT part does not depend on the number of reservations. However, since there are different types of leeches of the same strain,
If the ACT part (second half variation value) of the look-ahead variation command is not converted, the production control device 30
If 0 is used as is, there will be too many numbers and it will be difficult to check. For example, in normal reach,
There are different types, such as normal reach - 1 stop off and normal reach + 1 stop off.
Therefore, the ACT part indicating the reach of the same system is added to the same intra-sub look-ahead variation command ACT.
By converting the command into a copy, the number can be reduced and the burden of check processing such as prefetch command consistency check processing can be reduced.

Next, if at least one of the MODE section and ACT section after conversion (that is, the sub-intra-prefetch variation command MODE section and ACT section) is 0 (step S1
97; N), or if the combination of the MODE section and the ACT section after conversion is not normal (step S200; N), it is determined that there is an abnormality in the command after conversion, and the prefetch variable command processing is terminated.

If the combination of the MODE section and the ACT section after conversion is normal (step S200; Y), the production control device 300 loads pending information to be prefetched (latest pending information) from the prefetched variation command area (step S201). ), executes a pre-read lottery process regarding the latest pending pre-read effect (step S202). Examples of the look-ahead performance include a continuous preview performance (including a chance look-ahead performance), a look-ahead zone performance, and a pending change notice. Subsequently, it is determined whether or not a look-ahead effect of the latest suspension (a suspension change notice, etc.) will occur (step S203).
When the latest pending look-ahead effect occurs (step S203; Y), point information corresponding to the selected look-ahead effect is set (step S204).

Next, the performance control device 300 determines whether the prefetched performance (pending change notice, etc.) that occurs is a performance that will start immediately (step S205). If the prefetch effect to be generated is an effect that starts immediately (step S205; Y), a display corresponding to the selected prefetch effect is set (step S206). If the pre-read effect to be generated is not an effect that starts immediately (step S205; N), a display corresponding to the pre-read effect at the time of hold shift (when moving the hold display, when the number of holds is reduced) is set and saved (step S205; N). S207). Then, the prefetch variable command processing ends. In addition, the look-ahead performance is a performance that informs the expectation of a jackpot (the expectation of a special result) by foretelling information suggesting the result (gaming result) of the variable display game before the variable display game stops. However, information indicating the set probability setting value (1 to 6) may be broadcast. That is, the performance control device 300 can perform a pre-read performance such as changing the pending display (icon) of the pre-read target based on the jackpot expectation level and probability setting value.

On the other hand, if the latest pending pre-reading effect does not occur (step S2
03;N), the prefetch variable command processing is immediately terminated.

[Design-related command processing]
Next, details of the symbol-related command processing (step S130) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 5-69) described above will be explained with reference to FIG. 5-73. FIG. 5-73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of symbol-related command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 executes the received design-related command (decoration special figure 1 command or decoration special figure 2 command).
The special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the command) is set (step S211). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, the MODE part and ACTION part of the symbol-related commands (
The symbol type corresponding to the combination (ACT section) is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (step S212). Here, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes between special map 1 and special map 2, MO
The symbol type is set for each DE using a table. In addition, in this embodiment, the symbol types include a losing symbol, a jackpot symbol A of special symbol 1, a jackpot symbol B to F of special symbol 2, a jackpot symbol G in remaining reservation (special symbol 2 reservation), and a time-saving symbol ( It corresponds to the support pattern) etc.

[Variable command processing]
Next, details of the variable command processing (step S126) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 5-69) will be described with reference to FIG. 5-74. FIG. 5-74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of variable command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 determines the special figure type (special figure 1) of the received variable system command (variable command).
Or, it is determined whether the special figure 2) is unconfirmed (step S221). When the special figure type is undetermined (step S221; Y), the variable command process is ended. If the special symbol type is not determined (step S221; N), the combination of the received variable type command and symbol type command is checked (step S222), and it is determined whether the variable type command and the symbol type are inconsistent. (Step S223). Here, inconsistency means that there is a contradiction in performance, such as when a symbol-related command of a jackpot symbol is received even though a variable-related command of a loss is received. If the variable type command and symbol type are inconsistent (step S223
;Y), the variable command processing ends.

If the variable type command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step S2), the production control device 300
23; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (variation command) (step S224), and a variation production setting process is executed to set a variation production that is a production that is being varied (step S225). Note that there are multiple effects for the same variable command. continue,
The special figure is changing is set to the gaming status flag indicating the gaming status (P machine status) (step S226).
, if the number of pre-read performances such as continuous performances is not 0, it is updated by -1 (step S227).

[Variable effect setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 5-75, details of the variable effect setting process (step S225) in the above-described variable command process (FIG. 5-74) will be described. FIG. 5-75 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable performance setting process executed by the performance control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether the variation pattern type is a non-reach variation (a variation that does not result in a ready-to-reach state) (step S231). If the variation pattern type is a non-reach variation (step S231; Y), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, and setting information (setting value) is created. is set (step S232), and the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the number of reservations of the special symbol type is obtained (step S233). In the case of non-reach fluctuations, the larger the number of reservations, the shorter the fluctuation time, so the address of the table corresponding to the number of reservations is obtained.

If the variation pattern type is not a reach-less variation (step S2), the production control device 300
31; N), that is, in the case of fluctuation with reach, the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special symbol type, production mode, symbol type, and setting information (setting value). is set (step S234), and the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variable command (variable command) and the variation pattern type is obtained (step S235).

After step S233 and step S235, the production control device 300 performs a lottery of previews that appear during the first half fluctuation (before reach) (step S236). Next, a second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special symbol type, production mode, symbol type, and setting information (setting value) is set (step S237), and the variable command Obtain the address of the second half notice distribution group table corresponding to the ACT part (step S2
38), a lottery is performed for previews that appear during the second half fluctuation (reach) (step S239). Thereafter, the contents of the variable effect corresponding to the MODE part and ACT part of the variable command (variable command) are determined (step S240). In addition, you can see the fluctuation time and main reach contents from the fluctuation command.

Next, the performance control device 300 determines the content of the performance (preview performance) corresponding to the lottery result of the preview (step S241). Thereafter, the stop symbols of the decorative special symbol variable display game are determined in accordance with the content of variable effects such as reach effects and preview effects (step S242). Here, the decorative stop symbols are specifically determined, such as determining the looseness in the case of a missed symbol.

Next, the performance control device 300 performs display settings for a variable performance (step S243), and performs display settings for a preview performance (step S244). Subsequently, a display setting for a reduction in reservation corresponding to the special figure type is performed, and, for example, a display (display of a reservation shift) in which the reservation display corresponding to the decorative special figure that changes this time is decreased is set (step S245). Subsequently, an audio number that determines the performance mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the performance mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (step S246). The decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting parts (decoration LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emission mode (color of each LED, light emission timing, etc.) determined by the decoration number. .

Note that it is also possible to set the voice number and decoration number based not only on the contents of the performance but also on setting information (setting values). In this way, the player can enjoy inferring the setting information (setting value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emission mode of the decorative device, that is, the light emission mode of the decorative light emitting section (LED).

Next, the production control device 300 performs display settings for the decorative special symbol variation corresponding to the special symbol type (step S247), and displays a fourth special symbol in addition to the above-mentioned first to third special symbols that vary on the display device 41. Display settings for the fourth symbol variation regarding the symbol (fourth symbol, identification information) are performed (step S24
8). Note that the fourth symbol variation may be displayed on the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LEDs) of the above-mentioned lamp display device 75 provided in addition to the display device 41, or may be displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. Good too.

[Hit command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 5-76, details of the winning command processing (step S128) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 5-69) will be described. FIG. 5-76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of winning command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first determines whether the MODE part of the received winning command represents a fanfare (step S251). When the MODE part of the winning command represents fanfare (step S251; Y), that is, when the winning command is a jackpot fanfare command or a small winning fanfare command, a fanfare effect setting process is executed to set the fanfare effect. (Step S252). In addition, in response to the jackpot fanfare command or the small win fanfare command, a hitting instruction (left hitting instruction or right hitting instruction) may be displayed (notified) on the display device 41 or the like. Note that the fanfare command includes information about the upper limit of the number of rounds for this jackpot. Subsequently, the game state flag indicating the current game state (P machine state) of the game machine 10 is set to fanfare in progress (step S253), and the winning command processing is ended. In addition, the round number upper limit value can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol-related command (decoration special command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

If the MODE part of the received winning command does not represent a fanfare (step S251; N), the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the winning command represents a round (step S254). ). When the MODE section indicates a round (step S254; Y), that is, when the winning command is a round command or a small winning opening command, the production control device 300 executes the round production setting process and sets the current gaming machine. 1
The game state flag indicating the game state of 0 (P machine state) is set to be in round (step S25).
5, S256), the hit type command processing is ended.

If the MODE part of the received winning command does not represent a round (step S25
4;N), the performance control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the winning command represents an interval (step S257). When the MODE section represents an interval (step S257; Y), that is, when the winning command is an interval command, the production control device 300 executes the interval production setting process and sets the current gaming state of the gaming machine 10 (P
The game status flag indicating the machine status is set to ``in interval'' (steps S258 and S259).
), the hit command processing ends.

If the MODE part of the received hit command does not represent an interval (step S
257;N), the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the winning command represents an ending (step S260). If the MODE section indicates an ending (step S260; Y), that is, if the winning command is an ending command, the production control device 300 executes an ending production setting process for setting an ending production, and changes the current game. The game state flag indicating the game state of the machine 10 (P machine state) is set to "ending" (steps S261, S262), and the winning command processing is ended.

In addition, when the MODE part of the received winning command does not represent an ending (step S260; N), the production control device 300 ends the winning command processing without executing any process.

[Safety device]
Below, aspects of the performance-related device (display aspect, light emission aspect, operation aspect) etc. according to the state of the safety device or the safety device counter value (number of difference balls + initial value) will be explained. The performance-related device is a device that can perform a performance, and includes, for example, a display device 41, a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18, etc.) consisting of a performance LED, etc., and an operable movable accessory ( Movable body, board presentation device 44
, frame production device, etc.).

[Aspects of performance equipment]
FIG. 5-77 is a table showing aspects of performance-related devices depending on the state of the safety device. As shown in FIG. 5-77, the mode of the performance device changes depending on the state of the safety device or the value of the safety device counter (and thus the number of difference balls).

As explained in the safety device information initialization process (Figure 5-9), when the safety device counter value is between 0 and 189999 (the difference in the number of balls is -100000 and 89999), the state of the safety device is in the inactive state ( (operation notice state, operation warning state, or normal state without operation state). Further, when the safety device counter value is between 190,000 and 194,999 (the difference in the number of balls is between 90,000 and 94,999), the state of the safety device becomes an operation warning state that foretells the operation of the safety device. In addition, when the safety device counter value is 195,000 (the number of balls difference is 95,000), the state of the safety device is an activation warning state that warns that the safety device is activated, or an activation state that the safety device is activated (operating state). become.

When the safety device counter value is 195,000 and there is a jackpot or a small win, the safety device enters the activation warning state, and when the safety device counter value is 195,000 and there is neither a jackpot nor a small win. the safety device is activated. Therefore, if the safety device becomes activated before a jackpot or small win occurs, a game stop state (game disabled state, game prohibited state) occurs immediately, and an activation warning state does not occur.
On the other hand, the activation warning state can occur when the safety device counter value reaches 195,000 during a jackpot or a small win. Then, when the jackpot or small win ends and it is no longer a jackpot or a small win, the safety device shifts from the activation warning state to the activation state (operating state).

When the safety device counter value is 0 to 194999 (difference in number of balls is -100000 to 94999), that is, when the safety device is in the inactive state or the activation warning state, the state of the gaming machine (gaming state) is The player is playing a game or waiting for a customer (waiting for a customer). In addition, when the safety device counter value is 195,000 (the number of difference balls is 95,000) and the state of the safety device is in the activation warning state, the state of the gaming machine is in the middle of a small hit or a big hit, and the machine is safe. When the device counter value is 195,000 (the difference in the number of balls is 95,000) and the safety device is in the operating state, the gaming machine is in a gaming stopped state (playing disabled state, gaming prohibited state). . In addition,
Even when strong error 2 occurs, the same game stop state can occur.

In the game stop state, special pattern fluctuation display games, regular pattern fluctuation display games, round games (games during jackpots or small wins), etc. cannot be executed as games. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5-15 (winning number counter update process), when the game is in a stopped state (step The winning opening (prize) will be invalidated. In addition, as shown in FIG. 5-12 (output processing), when the game is in a stopped state (step 37 etc. are closed and the game is in a stopped state (step .
In addition, in the game stop state, not only cannot the special pattern fluctuation display game or the regular pattern fluctuation display game be continued, but also it is not possible to start a new special pattern fluctuation display game or a new regular pattern fluctuation display game. However, in the game stop state, the payout command transmission process (step X107) is not stopped, so the payout of prize balls due to winnings that occurred before the game stop state continues.
It should be noted that it is also possible to configure the game ball to not stop firing in at least one of the game stop state when the safety device is activated and the game stop state when strong error 2 occurs. be.

In addition, as shown in Figure 5-59 (external information editing process), if the game is stopped when the safety device is activated (step X519; Y), an external information signal is sent to an external device such as a hall computer. A security signal is output (step X522), and a gaming machine error status signal is output as a test signal to the sight test device (step X523). Furthermore, in at least one of the game stop state when the safety device is activated and the game stop state when strong error 2 occurs, the test signal (gaming machine error state signal) is configured not to be generated. It is also possible to do so.

In the non-operating state of the safety device, the display device 41 does not display any safety device-related display related to the safety device. As an exception, if the machine is waiting for a customer, the specific model display 67 (for example, the words "Complete Function Equipped") or the like may be used to indicate that the model is equipped with a safety device. Thereby, the player who sees the specific model display 67 can recognize that the gaming machine 10 has a safety device (complete function).

In the safety device activation warning state, the display device 41 displays an activation warning display 511 (for example, the words "Soon to be discontinued") as a safety device related display (or safety device activation information display). In order to effectively display the operation notice display 511, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 is changed depending on the game state, such as while waiting for a customer or during a variable display (during execution of a special figure variable display game). It's okay. In the safety device system process (step S170) of the single-shot command process (FIG. 5-70), the production control device 300 issues an operation notice command corresponding to the operation notice state as a safety device operation related command at the start of the operation notice state. Since the operation notification display 511 is received, it is possible to display the operation notice display 511 on the display device 41.

In this way, by displaying the operation notice display 511, it is possible to inform the player in advance of the possibility that he or she will not be able to play the game, so it is possible to urge the player to end the game, and to prevent the player from playing the game as intended. This will prevent you from being disadvantaged. Further, by displaying the operation notice display 511, it is possible to give a surprise to the person who is committing fraud, so that the person who is committing fraud can be urged to stop the fraud. Furthermore, it is possible to change the display mode of the operation notice display 511 depending on the gaming state (for example, while waiting for a customer, during a variable display), thereby making it possible to perform an effective notice display.

In the activation warning state of the safety device, the display device 41 displays an activation warning display 512 (for example, the words "The game will be discontinued after winning") as a safety device-related display (or safety device activation information display). In the safety device system processing (step S170) of the single-shot command processing (FIG. 5-70), the production control device 300 issues an activation warning command corresponding to the activation warning state as a safety device activation related command at the start of the activation warning state. Since the signal is received, the operation warning display 512 can be displayed on the display device 41.

In the operating state of the safety device, that is, in the game halted state, the display device 41 displays an operating display 513 (for example, the words “Stopped”) as a safety device-related display (or safety device operating information display). In the safety device system processing (step S170) of the single-shot command processing (FIG. 5-70), the production control device 300 receives an in-operation command corresponding to the operation state as a safety device operation related command at the start of the operation state. Therefore, it is possible to display an in-operation display 513 on the display device 41.
In addition, the production control device 300 displays an operation notice display 511 that warns of the operation of the safety device, an operation warning display 512 that warns of the operation of the safety device, and an in-operation display 513 that indicates that the safety device is in operation on the display device 41. (display means), etc. (display means).

Furthermore, the display device 41 is capable of displaying an error message when the game is stopped when the safety device is activated. For example, since payout continues even when the game is stopped, a payout error regarding the payout of game balls (game media) may occur, but the display device 41 can notify the occurrence of the payout error by displaying an error. In addition, in the game stop state when strong error 2 has occurred, an error display of a payout error may be displayed on the display device 41 in order to make hall personnel and players aware of the occurrence of a payout error. ,
In order to avoid confusion with the strong error 2, the display device 41 may not be able to display a payout error (weak error) error display.

In the case of the game stop state, unlike the case of the non-operation state, the operation notice state, or the operation warning state, all the light emitting parts (LEDs) of the collective display device 50 and the performance display device 152 are turned off (all lights are turned off).
. In addition, in the game stop state, the light emitting part (LE) of the collective display device 50 and the performance display device 152 is
D) may all be lit (all lit).
Further, in the game stop state, the ball lending button 27a remains valid, and when the player operates it to borrow a game ball, the game ball may be paid out from the payout device to the upper tray 21.

In addition, in the game stop state, the effect control device 300 that has received the active command turns off all the effect LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10, such as the LEDs of the decoration devices (frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, etc.). Either the lights are off (all lights off) or all lights are on (all lights on). However, while an error is occurring, some or all of the performance LEDs may be lit in red.
In addition, in the game stop state, the performance control device 300 may stop the audio output from the speakers 19a and 19b to make the sound silent, or may perform the hall/player setting mode processing (step S11) of the main processing (FIG. 5-71). ), the brightness of the presentation LED and liquid crystal (display device 41, etc.) and the volume of the speakers 19a and 19b may be disabled and set to default brightness and volume. Furthermore, if the game stop state starts while the movable accessory (movable object, board presentation device 44, frame presentation device, etc.) is in operation, the performance control device 300 may return the movable accessory to the initial position. .

As another example, in the game stop state, various game processing timers such as the special figure game processing timer, the accessory game processing timer, the general figure game processing timer, etc. are stopped, but the collective display device 5
0 may continue to be displayed when the game is stopped without turning off. Further, if the collective display device 50 is in a fluctuating display at the start of the game stop state, it may be turned off after the fluctuating display ends. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the variable display on the batch display device 50 from ending suddenly. Further, in the game stop state, the performance display device 152 may continue displaying.

Note that when the power to the gaming machine 10 is cut off (off) and then turned on again, the safety device counter area, safety device operation information area, etc. are changed by the safety device information initialization process (Figure 5-9). It is initialized (steps X74 to X76). Therefore, in this case, safety device activation information such as safety device activation advance notice information (value 1), safety device activation warning information (value 2), and safety device activation information (value 3) is erased, so the display device The safety device related displays (operation notice display 511, operation warning display 512, operating display 513, etc.) in 41 may be erased and hidden.
Additionally, if the power to the gaming machine 10 is cut off (off) while the safety device is operating and the power is turned on again with the RAM initialization switch 112 on, the main processing (Figure 5-6) The RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X45). Therefore, in this case, since the safety device operating flag area is cleared to 0, the gaming machine 10 returns from the gaming stopped state to the gaming ready state.

[Example 1 of screen transition]
5-78 and 5-79 are examples (Example 1) of screen transition diagrams showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order.
After the power is turned on, the gaming machine 10 is waiting for a customer (customer waiting state), and the display device 41 becomes a customer waiting screen as shown in FIG. 5-78(a). Here, a model name display 90 (for example, the characters "P Tiger Tiger") is displayed on the display device 41. Since the game has not started at this point, the safety device counter value is the initial value (100,000). After that, when the operating handle 24 is rotated, a game ball is fired from the ball launcher, and the game ball is sent to the starting winning hole 36 (first starting winning hole) or the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning hole). When a prize is won, a special figure fluctuation display game is executed.

Thereafter, in FIG. 5-78(b), the safety device counter value decreases from the initial value (100,000) to 99920. Since the total number of prize balls does not increase significantly until a jackpot occurs, the number of difference balls (= number of safe balls - number of ejected balls) tends to decrease by the number of ejected balls, and the safety device counter value (number of difference balls + initial value) also tends to decrease. In addition, when the difference ball command indicating the safety device counter value or the number of difference balls is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300, the production control device 300 transmits the safety device counter value or the number of difference balls (the number of difference balls (counter value - initial value) may be displayed on the display device 41.

FIG. 5-78(b) is a display screen during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game. A first decorative game display section 81 for displaying a first decorative game among the decorative special figure variable display games is provided in the center of the display area of the display device 41. In the first decorative game display section 81, the identification information is displayed in a variable manner in each of the variable display areas of the left variable display area 81a, the middle variable display area 81b, and the right variable display area 81c, and then stopped and displayed, thereby displaying the decorative special figure variable. Show games.

At a predetermined location in the display area of the display device 41 (in the case of the present embodiment, the upper right corner), a second decorative game display section 82 is provided that displays a second decorative game of the decorative special figure variable display games.
Similarly to the first decorative game displayed on the first decorative game display section 81, the second decorative game displayed on the second decorative game display section 82 has identification information in each of the left area, middle area, and right area. After displaying the variable, stop and display the result. The second decorative game display section 82 displays identification information (small symbols) that is relatively smaller than the identification information (large symbols) displayed on the first decorative game display section 81 .

In addition, in a predetermined part of the display area of the display device 41 (in the case of the present embodiment, the lower part), there are standby memory display sections 83a and 83b that display a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory, and currently running memory display sections 83a and 83b. An in-execution memory display section 84 is provided which displays information regarding the starting memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game.
A first standby memory display section 83a provided on the right side of the running memory display section 84 displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory. The decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the first standby memory display section 83a has a one-to-one correspondence with the first starting memory, and the leftmost decorative special figure starting memory display is stored first in the first starting memory. They are displayed in the order of memory so that the corresponding decorative special figure start memory display is displayed, and each time they are consumed, they move to the left. And special map 1
At the start of the variable display game, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the first standby memory display section 83a is shifted to the running memory display section 84.

A second standby memory display section 83b provided on the left side of the running memory display section 84 displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory. The decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the second standby memory display section 83b has a one-to-one correspondence with the second starting memory, and the rightmost decorative special figure starting memory display is stored first in the second starting memory. They are displayed in the order of memory so that the corresponding decorative special figure start memory display is displayed, and each time they are consumed, they move to the right. And special map 2
At the start of the variable display game, the decorative special figure start memory display at the right end of the second standby memory display section 83b moves to the running memory display section 84.

In addition, in the standby memory display sections 83a and 83b, the pre-read results such as the result of the special figure variation display game and the variation pattern based on the starting memory are suggested by the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory. Is possible.
In addition, in the running memory display section 84, the results and variation patterns of the special figure variation display game currently being executed can be suggested by the display mode of the running memory display displayed on the running memory display section 84. It is possible.

At a predetermined location in the display area of the display device 41 (upper left in the case of this embodiment), there is a first starting memory number display section 85a that displays the first starting memory number (special figure 1 pending number), and a second starting memory number display section 85a. Memory number (special map 2
A second starting memory number display section 85b that displays the number of pending items) is provided.
Further, a variation number display section 86 is provided at a predetermined location in the display area of the display device 41 (in the case of the present embodiment, the upper right corner) for displaying the number of times the special symbol variation display game has been executed after the power is turned on or after the end of the jackpot. It will be done. Here, "2G" is displayed indicating that the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed after the power is turned on is two. In addition, in the case of a model that can generate a variable probability state, in order to make it easier to recognize that the number of times approaching the ceiling is reached, the special symbol fluctuation display will be displayed after the power is turned on or after the jackpot ends, excluding the number of times in the variable probability state. The number of times the game has been executed may be displayed on the variable number display section 86.

In addition, a special figure 1
A status display section 87 is provided that displays the status of the variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game (whether running or stopped). The status display section 87 is divided into left and right areas, in which the status of the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed in the left area, and the status of the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed in the right area. Here, the special figure 1 variable display game is running (fluctuating) and the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped, so the symbol "○" is displayed in the left area and the symbol is displayed in the right area. "×"
is displayed. In addition, the symbol "○" may be displayed blinking to perform a fourth symbol variation as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol).
Furthermore, it is also possible to provide display sections other than the display sections 81 to 87 at predetermined locations in the display area of the display device 41. Specifically, for example, a mode display section that displays the current production mode may be provided.

After that, many jackpots occur, and in Figure 5-78(c), the safety device counter value becomes 189993 (difference number of balls = 89993), and the warning start value 190000 (difference ball number) at which the safety device activation warning state starts. =90000). Here, a specific gaming state (time saving state) is entered after the jackpot ends or when the ceiling number of times is reached, and correspondingly, a right-hand hitting instruction display 91 is displayed that instructs the player to play right. .

After that, in FIG. 5-78(d), the second starting memory increases due to a right-handed winning in the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning hole), and the number of special drawings 2 reserved is "4" (special winning opening). The number of reservations in FIG. 1 is "0"). Here, a prize ball is obtained by winning a prize in the normal variable winning device 37, and the safety device counter value is 190009, which is larger than the advance notice start value 190000 (safety device counter value ≧ 190000), and correspondingly, As a safety device-related display, an operation notice display 511 (“Soon to be discontinued”) is displayed, which foretells the operation of the safety device.
Note that the operation notice display 511 may be an expression other than "The operation will be discontinued soon." Further, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 is not limited to a mode in which all the operation notices are displayed at once, but may be in a mode in which they are not displayed at once (scroll display, etc.). In addition, in the operation notice state, the operation of the safety device is not only notified by the operation notice display 511, but also by the sound from the speakers 19a, 19b, the lighting of the LED for production, etc. good.

In this way, by foretelling the operation of the safety device using the operation notice display 511, etc., and informing the player in advance that there is a possibility that the game will be stopped, it is possible to urge the player to end the game. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged unintentionally. Further, by forewarning the operation of the safety device using the operation notice display 511 or the like, it is possible to give a surprise to a person who is committing fraud, and therefore it is possible to urge him or her to stop the fraud.

In this embodiment, the operation preview display 511 is displayed so as not to overlap with other displays or other image objects. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the operation notice display 511 from reducing the visibility of other displays or other image objects. Here, other displays and other image objects include displays on the display sections 81 to 87, etc., a right-handed hitting instruction display 91, a character image (not shown), and the like.
Note that the operation notice display 511 may be an animation display (swinging display, scrolling display, blinking display, etc.). As a result, even if the operation notice display 511 is displayed so as not to interfere with (do not overlap) other displays or other image objects, the player can
You can increase your chances of noticing 11. In addition, in order to make the operation notice display 511 stand out (in order to increase the possibility that the player notices the operation notice display 511), the operation notice display 511 is placed near a display that is easy for the player to pay attention to (for example, the right-hand hitting instruction display 91). may be displayed.
In addition, when displaying the operation notice display 511 so as to overlap with other displays or other image objects, in order to make the operation notice display 511 stand out (to increase the possibility that the player will notice the operation notice display 511). , the operation preview display 511 may be displayed on a layer closer to the front than other displays or other image objects.

Thereafter, when the player stops operating the operating handle 24 to take a break or the like, the firing of the game balls ends. Then, as the second starting memory is digested, the special figure 2 pending number becomes "0" as shown in FIG. 5-78(e). Here, since the safety device counter value is 190055, which is larger than the advance notice start value of 190000, the operation advance notice display 511 ("Soon to be discontinued") continues to be displayed.
Thereafter, when the special figure 2 variable display game being executed in FIG. 5-78(e) ends, the identification information is stopped and displayed on the decoration game display sections 81 and 82, as shown in FIG. 5-78(f). , the running memory display displayed on the running memory display section 84 disappears, and both the left and right areas of the status display section 87 become "x". Here, since the safety device counter value remains at 190055, the operation notice display 511 continues to be displayed.

Thereafter, the gaming machine 10 becomes waiting for a customer (customer waiting state), and the display device 41 becomes a customer waiting screen as shown in FIG. 5-79(a). While waiting for a customer, the safety device counter value is maintained at 190055, so the operation notice display 511 (“Soon to be discontinued”) continues to be displayed.
As described above, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 may change depending on the game state, such as while waiting for a customer or during a variable display (during execution of a special figure variable display game). For example, in this embodiment, the display size of the operation notice display 511 displayed while waiting for a customer is made larger than the display size of the operation notice display 511 displayed during the variable display. This allows the operation notice display 511 to be displayed appropriately and effectively. That is, in a state where there is a high possibility that the safety device will be activated soon and the game will be stopped, by displaying the activation notification display 511 conspicuously while waiting for a customer, a new player can use the gaming machine 10. This can be effectively prevented.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 5-79(a), the operation notice display 511 is placed on the front side of the display on the customer waiting screen (here, the model name display 90 ("P Tiger Tiger")). It is displayed in layers. As a result, by displaying the operation notice display 511 in a large size while waiting for a customer, the operation notice display 511 can be displayed so as to overlap with the display on the customer waiting screen (i.e., other displays or other image objects). Even if there is, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the visibility of the operation notice display 511 (hidden by other displays or other image objects, making it difficult to see).
The display mode of the operation notice display 511 while waiting for a customer (display mode that makes the operation notice display 511 stand out) may be such as increasing the display size or displaying it on a layer closer to the front than other displays or other image objects. For example, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and may be an animation display (swinging display, scrolling display, blinking display, etc.). Further, as in this embodiment, it is possible to display conspicuously by combining a plurality of these modes, or it is also possible to display conspicuously by using any one of these modes.

Thereafter, when the player resumes playing after a break, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 returns to the display mode during the variable display, as shown in FIG. 5-79(b).
After that, many jackpots occur without going through the normal mode due to continuous winning, etc., and in Figure 5-79 (c), the safety device counter value becomes 194500 (difference number of balls = 94500), and the safety device can start operating. It is approaching the counter reference value of 195,000.
In addition, when the safety device counter value or the difference ball command indicating the number of difference balls is sent from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300, the production control device 300 will control the safety device counter value to be lower than the advance notice start value 190000. It can be determined whether the counter has reached a predetermined value (for example, 194,500) that is slightly smaller than the counter reference value of 195,000. Therefore, the production control device 300
When the safety device counter value reaches this predetermined value, the operator may be notified that the safety device is about to start operating by changing the display mode of the operation notice display 511 (for example, by blinking).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 5-79(c), when the decorative special figure start memory display is displayed on the standby memory display parts 83a and 83b (when there is an unexploited start memory), the performance control When the safety device counter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 194500), the device 300 changes the display mode of part or all of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby memory display sections 83a and 83b. (for example, by flashing), it may be possible to notify that the unused starting memory will be wasted due to the game being stopped due to the activation of the safety device.

Further, when the safety device counter value is equal to or higher than a predetermined value (for example, 194500), in order to prevent the player from getting excited, the production control device 300 displays the standby storage display section 83a,
It may be possible to prohibit the execution of a pre-reading effect such as a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed in 83b according to the degree of expectation of a small hit result or a jackpot result.
On the other hand, even if the safety device counter value is greater than or equal to a predetermined value (for example, 194500),
A preview effect regarding the currently running special figure variation display game (for example, by changing the display mode of the running memory display displayed on the running memory display section 84, the currently running special figure variation display game may be a small hit) There is no need to prohibit execution of performances that suggest the level of expectation of a result or a jackpot result.
In addition, the timing to prohibit the execution of a look-ahead effect (pending change notice, etc.) is not the timing when the safety device counter value reaches a predetermined value (for example, 194500), but the timing when the safety device counter value reaches the predetermined value (for example, 194500), but the timing when the safety device counter value reaches the predetermined value (for example, 194500). (the timing when the advance notice start value is reached) may be used.
Note that if the power to the gaming machine 10 is cut off (off) and then turned on again before the safety device is activated, the safety device activation information is updated by the safety device information initialization process (Figure 5-9). Since the area is initialized and the safety device activation notice information (value 1) is deleted, in this case, the operation notice display 511 is no longer displayed.

After that, the safety device counter value becomes the counter reference value 195000 (number of difference balls = difference ball reference value 95000), and if there is neither a jackpot nor a small hit, the safety device becomes activated (operating state) and the gaming machine 10 immediately enters the game stop state. When the operating state of the safety device starts, the display device 41 first indicates that the operating state of the safety device has started (the safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value), as shown in Figure 5-79(d). An activation movie 514 is displayed to inform you that the target has been reached. A performance display 515 is also displayed to notify that the safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value.

After that, when the activation movie 514 ends, as shown in FIG. 5-79(e), an in-operation display 513 (“stopped”) that informs that the safety device is in operation is displayed as a safety device-related display. Is displayed. Here, a manufacturer name display 516 indicating the manufacturer name of the gaming machine 10 and an explanation display 517 indicating how to display the menu screen 93 are also displayed. continues to be displayed.
In this embodiment, the display size of the in-operation display 513 is made larger than the display size of the operation notice display 511 (the operation notice display 511 displayed during the fluctuation display (see FIGS. 5-79(b) and (c))). are doing. Thereby, the in-operation display 513 can be displayed appropriately and effectively, so that it is possible to effectively notify that the safety device is in operation (playing stopped state). That is, by displaying the in-operation display 513 in a large size, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from using the gaming machine 10. Note that the display mode of the in-operation display 513 (display mode that makes the in-operation display 513 stand out) is not limited to a mode that increases the display size, and may, for example, be an animation display (oscillating display, scroll display, blinking display, etc.). It may also be possible to do so.
In this way, the in-operation display 513 notifies the player that the game is in a stopped state in which no games (particularly new games) can be played, thereby encouraging the player not to use the game machine 10. Furthermore, if there is someone who is committing fraud, the operation display 513 can prompt the user to stop the fraud.

Note that when the game is stopped, if the decorative special figure variable display game is being executed (variably displayed) on the decorative game display sections 81 and 82, the decorative special figure variable display game is forcibly executed. finish. Alternatively, the operation movie 514 or the like may be displayed on a layer closer to the display layer of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game, and the decorative special figure fluctuation display game may be continued in a state where it cannot be visually recognized.

As described above, the display device 41 can display an error message when the game is stopped when the safety device is activated. For example, in FIG. 5-79(d) and FIG. 5-79(e), as a payout error display to notify a payout error regarding the payout of game balls, a shot ball out error corresponding to a shortage of game balls before payout is notified. A ball out error display 92a (for example, the words "Ball out error") and an overflow error display 92b (for example, the words "Overflow error") that notify an overflow error corresponding to the lower tray 23 being full are displayed. It is displayed on the display device 41. Here, it is assumed that a payout error related to the payout of prize balls due to a winning that occurred before the game stopped state continues to occur when or after the game stops. Then, the payout error displays such as the out-of-ball error display 92a and the overflow error display 92b may be erased when the corresponding payout error is resolved.
In this way, even if the game is stopped when the safety device is activated, by notifying the occurrence of a payout error, it is possible to avoid disadvantages or inconveniences to players, hall personnel, etc.
In addition, the game control device 100, the performance control device 300, the display device 41, etc. cooperate to constitute a notification means that can notify an error.

In addition, if an error or fraud other than a payout error (frame opening error, magnet fraud, etc.) occurs when the game is stopped or afterward, it may cause disadvantage or inconvenience to players and hall personnel. In order to avoid this, an error display may be displayed to notify the user of the error or fraud. Further, even if an error (particularly a payout error) or fraud occurs, if the safety device counter value reaches the counter reference value 195,000, the safety device is activated and the game can be stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, the payout error display is displayed so as not to overlap with the in-operation display 513 (“stopping”), but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the payout error display may be displayed so as to overlap with the in-operation display 513, and in that case, the in-operation display 513 is displayed on a layer closer to the front than the payout error display so that the in-operation display 513 stands out. Alternatively, the payout error display may be displayed in operation display 5 so that the payout error display is conspicuous.
It may be displayed on a layer closer to this side than 13.
Further, the in-operation display 513 may be displayed in a larger display size than the payout error display so that the in-operation display 513 stands out, or the payout error display may be displayed on the in-operation display 513 so that the in-operation display 513 stands out. It may be displayed in a larger display size. Further, in order to make the payout error display more noticeable, it is possible to display the corresponding payout error display and not display the in-operation display 513 until the payout error is resolved.

In addition, error displays such as a payout error display can be displayed on the display device 41 together with the operation warning display 511 ("The winning will end soon") even in the operation warning state. ”) can be displayed on the display device 41. At that time, in order to make the error display more conspicuous, the error display may be displayed in a larger display size than the operation notice display 511 and the operation warning display 512, or the operation notice display 511
It may also be displayed on a layer closer to this side than the operation warning display 512 and overlaid thereon.

When an error (particularly a payout error) occurs while the game is stopped, in addition to notifying the occurrence of the error by displaying the error, the error will be notified by sound from the speakers 19a and 19b and lighting by the LED for effect. The occurrence may be notified. Notification of the error by light emission of the performance LEDs is performed when some or all of the performance LEDs are in a specific light emission mode (
This is done by emitting light (for example, red), and for example, the LED of the frame decoration device 18 (
Only the LEDs on the frame may emit light in a specific light emission mode, only the LEDs of the board decoration device 46 (LEDs on the game board 30) may emit light in a specific light emission mode, or both the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration may emit light in a specific light emission mode. Device 4
Both LEDs of 6 may emit light in a specific light emitting manner.

In addition, an error that notifies the occurrence of an error (especially a payout error) in the game stop state and in a state other than the game stop state (playing or waiting for a customer, non-operating state, operation notice state, operation warning state) The notification mode (error notification method) may be the same or may be different. By making the error notification mode the same in the game stop state and the state other than the game stop state, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the error is the same. In addition, by making the error notification mode different between the game stop state and the state other than the game stop state, it becomes easier for the player to recognize whether the game is in the stop state or not, and furthermore, each state (play stop state, It becomes possible to notify the occurrence of an error in an error notification mode suitable for a state other than a game stop state. Incidentally, an error such as a payout error or an irregularity may be notified by sound from the speakers 19a, 19b, lighting of an LED for effect, etc., without displaying an error message on the display device 41.

In a configuration in which the error notification mode is different between the game stop state and the state other than the game stop state, for example, when a shot ball out error occurs, in the game stop state, the ball out error display 92a and the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b are The error may be notified by sound, and in a state other than the game stop state, the error may be notified by the out-of-ball error display 92a and the lighting of the performance LED. In addition, in this configuration, for example, in the event that an overflow error occurs, the overflow error display 92b, speaker 19a, The error may be notified by the sound from the speaker 19b, and the output mode (volume and pitch) of the sound from the speakers 19a and 19b may be made different between the game stopped state and the state other than the game stopped state. Furthermore, in this configuration, when the game is stopped, an error may be notified by the light emission of one of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, and in a state other than the game stop state, the error may be notified by the light emission of the other one. good.

Also, if the safety device counter value decreases after the safety device counter value reaches the advance notice start value of 190,000 (the number of differential balls is 90,000) and the safety device is in the operation notice state (if the number of differential balls decreases). In this case, the operation notice display 511 (“It will be discontinued soon”) may be hidden by erasing it.
Specifically, for example, when the safety device counter value reaches 190,000 and then decreases to 189,000, the operation notice display 511 may be hidden. When the safety device counter value or the difference ball command indicating the number of difference balls is transmitted from the gaming control device 100 to the production control device 300, the production control device 300 determines that the safety device counter value is 189000 based on the difference ball command. If it is determined that there is, the operation notice display 511 is hidden. Alternatively, the safety device activation related commands sent in the safety device related process (Figure 5-69) include an activation notice command corresponding to the activation warning state, an activation warning command corresponding to the activation warning state, and an in-operation command corresponding to the activation state. In addition, an inactive command corresponding to the inactive state is provided, and when the safety device counter value is 189000, the gaming control device 100 transmits the inactive command to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 The activation notice display 511 may be hidden when a non-activation command is received.

[Screen transition example 2]
FIG. 5-80 is another example (example 2) of a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in chronological order. In example 1 shown in FIGS. 5-78 and 5-79, the operating state is entered without going through the operating warning state, but in example 2 shown in FIG. 5-80, the operating state is entered through the operating warning state. Let me explain the case.

After Figure 5-79(b), many jackpots occur, and in Figure 5-80(a), the safety device counter value is 194278, which is larger than the advance notice start value 190000, so the operation notice display 511 ( The message "This service will be discontinued soon" continues to be displayed. Here, the special figure 1 variable display game results in a jackpot, and the jackpot symbol "333" is displayed as a decoration stop symbol in the decorative game display sections 81 and 82. Incidentally, here, the jackpot result may be a special figure 2 variable display game. Moreover, the result here may be a small hit result instead of a big hit result.

Thereafter, when the jackpot state starts, the first round of the jackpot round game (game during the jackpot) is executed, as shown in FIG. 5-80(b). In the case of a small winning round game, a V winning occurs here, and a jackpot state due to the V winning starts from the next second round. In the jackpot state, the jackpot is opened, so a right hit instruction display 91 is correspondingly displayed on the display device 41 together with a jackpot round performance. Here, a large number of prize balls (number of acquired balls, number of safe balls) are obtained by entering the big winning hole, and the safety device counter value increases to 194,318, but the counter standard value of 195,000 is not reached. Therefore, the operation notice display 511 (“It will be discontinued soon”) continues to be displayed. In this embodiment, the operation notice display 511 is displayed so as not to overlap with the round effect so as not to be a hindrance, but the operation notice display 511 may be displayed so as to overlap with the round effect.

After that, when the safety device counter value reaches the counter reference value 195000 during a jackpot, the safety device is not activated yet and enters the activation warning state, and the activation notice display 511 is erased as shown in Figure 5-80(c). , an operation warning display 512 (“The game will be discontinued after the winning ends”) is displayed on the display device 41. In this embodiment, the display size of the operation warning display 512 is set larger than the display size of the operation notice display 511 (the operation notice display 511 displayed during the variable display). Thereby, the possibility that the safety device will operate (the possibility that a game stop state will occur) can be suggested more effectively than the operation notice display 511. Note that the display mode of the operation warning display 512 (display mode that makes the operation warning display 512 stand out) is not limited to a mode that increases the display size, but includes, for example, an animation display (oscillating display, scrolling display, blinking display, etc.). It may be an aspect. Further, in this embodiment, the operation warning display 512 is displayed so as not to overlap with the round effect so as not to be a hindrance, but the operation warning display 512 may be displayed so as to overlap with the round effect.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 5-80(d), a jackpot ending effect is performed. Here, the safety device counter value remains at the counter reference value 195,000, but since the jackpot is in progress, the operation warning display 512 continues to be displayed. In this embodiment, the operation warning display 512 is displayed so as not to overlap with the ending effect so as not to get in the way, but the operation warning display 512 may be displayed so as to overlap with the ending effect. In addition, the ending performance in the activation warning state is different from the ending performance in states other than the activation warning state (non-activation state, activation warning state), and because it occurs immediately before the safety device is activated, the safety device is not activated (stopped). It is also possible to create a special ending that suggests the following. The same applies when the small winning ending effect is executed in the operation warning state.
In this way, the activation warning display 512 notifies the player in advance that the game will be stopped after the small win or jackpot ends, thereby warning the player that he or she will be disadvantaged, such as the continuous winnings being stopped. be able to. Further, the activation warning display 512 can surprise the person committing fraud and urge him or her to stop the fraud.

Thereafter, when the ending time elapses and the jackpot ending performance ends (that is, the jackpot state ends), the safety device becomes activated (operating state) and the game machine 10 enters the game stop state. The same applies when the small winning state ends.
When the operating state of the safety device starts, the display device 41 first indicates that the operating state of the safety device has started (the safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value), as shown in FIG. 5-80(e). An activation movie 514 is displayed to inform you that the target has been reached. A performance display 515 is also displayed to notify that the safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value. That is, the production control device 300 also starts displaying the operating movie 514 and the performance display 515 in response to receiving the operating command.
After that, when the operation movie 514 ends, as shown in FIG. 5-80(f), an operation display 513 ("discontinued") that informs that the safety device is operating is displayed as a safety device-related display. It is displayed on the display device 41. Here, a manufacturer name display 516 showing the name of the manufacturer of the gaming machine 10 and an explanation display 517 showing how to display the menu screen 93 are also displayed, and even after the operation movie 514 ends, the performance display 515 continues. is displayed.

In this embodiment, the display size of the in-operation display 513 is set larger than the display size of the operation warning display 512. As a result, it can be effectively suggested that the safety device is in operation (the game is in a stopped state), so it is possible to effectively prevent the player from using the gaming machine 10. Note that the display mode of the in-operation display 513 (display mode that makes the in-operation display 513 stand out) is not limited to a mode that increases the display size; for example, an animation display (swinging display,
(scrolling display, blinking display, etc.) may also be used.

As mentioned above, the safety device-related displays are the activation warning display 511 ("The game will stop soon"), the activation warning display 512 ("The game will stop after the hit ends"), and the active display 513.
(“Discontinued”) has a different display format because the display size increases in this order and the text itself is different. Note that the display mode may include not only the display size, display position, display color, font, etc., but also the text itself to be displayed.
Further, the operation advance notice display 511, the operation warning display 512, and the operation-in-progress display 513 have something in common. Specifically, the character string "Hateme" is common, and the character string may be displayed in the same color or font.
In this way, although the operation advance notice display 511, operation warning display 512, and operation-in-progress display 513 have different overall display modes, they have common parts, so they can be easily distinguished from displays other than safety device-related displays. It is possible to distinguish.

[Example of different operation notice displays depending on the gaming status]
FIG. 5-81 is a diagram illustrating an operation notice display 511 that is displayed in accordance with a gaming state other than waiting for a customer (waiting for a customer).
As described above, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 may change depending on the gaming state. In the examples shown in Figures 5-78 to 5-80, the gaming states are Waiting for a customer (Figure 5-79(a)) and a gaming status other than waiting for a customer (Fluctuating display (Figure 5-78(d)). ), (e), Figure 5-79 (b), (c)), stopped display (Figure 5-78 (f), Figure 5-80 (a)), special game state (Figure 5-80 (b) ))) and the operation notice display 511 (“It will be discontinued soon”) are different in display mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there are multiple gaming states other than waiting for a customer, such as a normal gaming state, a time-saving state, a variable probability state, and a special gaming state. The display mode of the operation notice display 511 may be made different depending on the state, the probability change state, and the special game state. This makes it possible to appropriately and effectively display the operation notice display 511 even when the player is not waiting for a customer (during a game).
Note that in FIGS. 5-81(a) to (d), the safety device counter value is a value (for example, 190055) that is larger than the advance notice start value 190000 and smaller than the counter reference value 195000.

FIG. 5-81(a) is a display screen of the display device 41 in the normal gaming state (normal mode).
In the normal game state, the number of prize balls (number of acquired balls, number of safe balls) is not obtained by winning a prize, so there is a low possibility that the safety device will be activated and the game will be stopped. Therefore, the operation preview display 511 in the normal gaming state is displayed in a display mode that does not interfere with other displays such as variable displays. In the example shown in FIG. 5-81(a), the operation notice display 511 is displayed in small vertical writing at the left end of the display screen so as not to interfere with other displays.
In addition, in the normal gaming state, in order to make the operation notice display 511 stand out (in order to increase the possibility that the player will notice the operation notice display 511), a display that is easy for the player to notice (for example, when the player hits left-handed) is displayed. An operation notice display 511 may be displayed near the left-handed hitting instruction display).

FIG. 5-81(b) is a display screen of the display device 41 in the time saving state (time saving mode). The display screen shown in FIG. 5-81(b) is the same as the display screen shown in FIG. 5-79(b).
In the time saving state, it is easier to get prize balls due to power supply support than in the normal gaming state, and there is also a higher possibility of hitting the jackpot and increasing the number of safe balls than in the normal gaming state, so the safety device is more likely than in the normal gaming state. is likely to work. Therefore, the operation notice display 511 in the time saving state is displayed more conspicuously than the operation notice display 511 in the normal gaming state, and the possibility that the safety device will be activated (the possibility that the game stop state will occur) is displayed in a normal gaming state. This can be more effectively suggested than the operation notice display 511.
In addition, in the time saving state, in order to make the operation notice display 511 stand out (in order to increase the possibility that the player notices the operation notice display 511), the display near the display that is easy for the player to pay attention to (for example, the right-hand hit instruction display 91) is An operation notice display 511 may be displayed.

FIG. 5-81(c) is a display screen of the display device 41 in a variable probability state (variable probability mode).
In the variable probability state, there is a higher possibility that the number of safe pitches will increase due to a jackpot than in the time saving state, so there is a higher possibility that the safety device will operate than in the time saving state. Therefore, the operation notice display 511 for the variable probability state is displayed more conspicuously than the operation notice display 511 for the time-saving state, and indicates the possibility that the safety device will operate (the possibility that the game will stop). This can be suggested more effectively than the preview display 511.
In addition, in the probability change state, in order to make the operation notice display 511 stand out (in order to increase the possibility that the player will notice the operation notice display 511), the vicinity of the display that is easy for the player to pay attention to (for example, the right hit instruction display 91) An operation notice display 511 may be displayed.

FIG. 5-81(d) is a display screen of the display device 41 in a special game state (during a jackpot or a small win).
In the special game state, the number of safe balls increases due to the opening of the big prize opening, so there is a higher possibility that the safety device will operate than in the variable probability state. Therefore, the special game state activation notice display 511 is displayed more conspicuously than the operation notice display 511 for the variable probability state, and the possibility that the safety device will operate (the possibility that the game stop state will occur) is displayed in a variable state. This can be suggested more effectively than the operation notice display 511.
In addition, in the special game state, in order to make the operation notice display 511 stand out (in order to increase the possibility that the player will notice the operation notice display 511), the display that is easy for the player to pay attention to (for example, the right hit instruction display 91) is An operation notice display 511 may be displayed nearby.

In FIG. 5-81(d), a round effect is being executed as in FIG. 5-80(b), but the display mode of the operation notice display 511 is different from FIG. 5-80(b). Specifically, the special game state operation notice display 511 shown in FIG. 5-80(b) is displayed in the same display manner as the time saving state operation notice display 511 (FIG. 5-81(b)). On the other hand, the operation notice display 511 for the special game state shown in FIG. 5-81(d) is displayed in a different display form from the operation notice display 511 for the time saving state.
That is, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 in the special game state may be the same as or different from the display mode of the operation notice display 511 in the time saving state. The same applies to other game states.

As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 5-81, the display size of the operation notice display 511 is large and easily noticeable in the order of normal game state < time saving state < variable probability state < special game state. In addition, in order to make the operation notice display 511 stand out in the order of normal gaming state < time saving state < variable probability state < special gaming state, the display mode (color, font, etc.) other than the display size is different depending on these gaming states. Good too.
In this way, by making the operation notice display 511 stand out in the order of normal gaming state < time saving state < variable probability state < special gaming state, the activation of the safety device can be effectively announced when the player is not waiting for a customer (during a game). becomes possible.

[Example of operation notice display before and after reach]
FIG. 5-82 is a diagram illustrating an operation notice display 511 displayed before and after the reach during the variable display.
As shown in FIG. 5-82, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 may be changed before reaching the reach and after reaching the reach. This makes it possible to appropriately and effectively display the operation notice display 511 during the variable display.
FIG. 5-82(a) shows the display screen of the display device 41 before entering the ready-to-reach state. The display screen shown in FIG. 5-82(a) is the same as the display screen shown in FIG. 5-79(b), but shows the state before the decorative special symbol reaches the ready state.

FIG. 5-82(b) is a display screen of the display device 41 in the N reach state.
When the ready-to-reach state starts, the left symbol (the decorative special symbol displayed in the left variable display area 81a) and the right symbol (the decorative special symbol displayed in the right variable display area 81c) temporarily stop (for example, swing fluctuation). . As the reach effect, characters such as "reach" may be displayed on the display device 41, or sounds such as "reach" may be output from the speakers 19a and 19b.
The operation notice display 511 is displayed before the reach so as not to interfere with the temporarily stopped left symbol or right symbol, and furthermore, so as not to disturb the SP reach effect that may be executed after this. It is displayed in a different display mode from that shown in FIG. 5-82(a)). Here, the operation notice display 511 has been moved to the left end of the display screen and is displayed vertically in a smaller size than before the reach.
Note that at this stage, the SP reach effect (display of a movie, movement of movable characters, etc.) is not being executed, so the operation notice display 511 is the pre-reach operation notice display 511 (Figure 5-82). The same display mode as (a)) may be used. That is, the operation notice display 511 in the N reach state is the same display size and the same display position (between the first decorative game display section 81 and the first and waiting memory display section 83a) as the operation notice display 511 before reach. They may be displayed in the same display direction (horizontal writing).

FIG. 5-82(c) is a display screen of the display device 41 in the SP reach state.
When the state of N reach develops to SP reach, the SP reach effect is executed. Here, the left symbol and the right symbol are reduced and moved to the upper left corner and the upper right corner of the display screen, respectively, and a movie (moving image) is displayed large in the center of the display screen as SP reach effect. Moreover, as SP reach performance, the upper performance unit 40c, which is a movable accessory, moves downward from the initial position and is placed in an operating position in front of the display screen.

In the example shown in FIG. 5-82, the activation notice display 511 is already displayed before reaching (FIG. 5-82 Although it is displayed in a display mode different from (a)), it is not limited thereto. For example, the operation notice display 511 may be displayed for the first time in the SP reach state (FIG. 5-82(c)) in a display mode different from that before reach. Alternatively, the operation notice display 511 is displayed in a different display mode from before the reach, from the start of the N reach until the start of the SP reach (for example, just before it develops into the SP reach), in accordance with the SP reach effect. may be done.

[Example of operation notice display while waiting for customers]
FIG. 5-83 is a diagram illustrating an operation notice display 511 displayed in response to the customer waiting screen.
The performance control device 300 performs the customer waiting demo editing process (step S15), the hall/player setting mode process (step S11), etc., so that the performance control device 300 can perform the customer waiting demo editing process (step S15), the hall/player setting mode process (step S11), etc. (a) Stop screen → (b) Player settings screen → (c) Customer waiting demo movie screen → (d) Model name display screen → (e) Alert display screen → (a) Stop The display may be switched cyclically in the order of time screen → (b) player setting screen → (c) customer waiting demo movie screen, and so on. Note that the customer waiting screen is not limited to these screens, and may include, for example, a game explanation screen that explains the contents of games and performances, and a manufacturer display that displays the logo of the manufacturer of the gaming machine 10. It is also possible to provide a screen or the like. Then, as shown in FIG. 5-83, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 may be changed while waiting for a customer. This makes it possible to appropriately and effectively display the operation notice display 511 while waiting for a customer.

The stop screen in Figure 5-83(a) is the customer waiting screen that is first displayed when the stop display time has elapsed after the decorative stop symbol "378" is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-79(f). It is. The customer waiting screen is displayed on the display device 41 when the customer waiting demonstration flag is set (step A313) and the customer waiting demonstration command is sent to the performance control device 300 (step A314, step S147). As shown in FIG. 5-79(f), a stop screen with no apparent change is displayed. Note that the appearance may also be changed by, for example, erasing the display in the variation number display section 86 from FIG. 5-79(f).
In the example shown in FIG. 5-83(a), decorative stop symbols are displayed on the decorative game display sections 81 and 82, and the operation notice display 511 is displayed so as not to interfere with the decorative stop symbols.

The player setting screen shown in FIG. 5-83(b) is a customer waiting screen that is displayed after the stop screen is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 20 seconds). On the player setting screen, a volume adjustment image 88a, which is a meter image for volume adjustment, and a light amount adjustment image 88b, which is a meter image for light amount adjustment (brightness adjustment), are displayed. In the hall/player setting mode process (step S11), the volume of the speakers 19a, 19b is adjusted according to the operation of the volume adjustment button switches 27e, 27f, the meter in the volume adjustment image 88a rises or falls, and the cross In response to the operation of the key switch 28, the brightness of the performance LED and liquid crystal (display device 41, etc.) is adjusted, and the meter in the light amount adjustment image 88b is raised or lowered.
In the example shown in FIG. 5-83(b), the volume adjustment image 88a and the light intensity adjustment image 88b are displayed on the stop screen (displays on display sections 81 to 87, etc.) and on the front side of the operation notice display 511. It is displayed superimposed on the display on the stop screen and the operation notice display 511.

The customer waiting demo movie screen shown in FIG. 5-83(c) is a customer waiting screen that is displayed after the player setting screen is displayed for a predetermined period of time. On the customer waiting demo movie screen, a customer waiting demo movie 89 is displayed, and here, the customer waiting demo movie 89 with a moving cherry blossom pattern is displayed. In addition, here, the display on the stop screen and the player setting screen (decorative stop symbols, etc.) is erased and hidden, and the operation notice display 511 is displayed in consideration of the visibility of these displays. Therefore, the operation notice display 511 is made larger than the operation notice display 511 displayed on the stop screen in FIG. 5-83(a) or the player setting screen in FIG. 5-83(b). The display mode has changed.
In the example shown in FIG. 5-83(b), the operation preview display 511 is displayed in front of the customer waiting demo movie 89 and superimposed on the customer waiting demo movie 89.

The model name display screen in FIG. 5-83(d) is a customer waiting screen that is displayed after the customer waiting demo movie screen is displayed for a predetermined period of time. On the model name display screen, the model name of the gaming machine 10 (for example, the model (official name) "P Tiger Tiger") is displayed as a model name display 90. Further, on the model name display screen, in order to notify players etc. that the gaming machine 10 is a model with a safety device (a model equipped with a complete function), a specific model display 67 is displayed as a complete function equipped display. (For example, the words "Complete Function Equipped") may be displayed.
In the example shown in FIG. 5-83(d), the operation notice display 511 is displayed in front of the model name display 90 and the specific model display 67, overlapping the model name display 90. In the example shown in FIG. 5-83(d), the operation notice display 511 does not overlap the specific model display 67, but the operation notice display 511 may be displayed overlapping the specific model display 67. Further, the specific model display 67 may also be displayed on the customer waiting demo movie screen shown in FIG. 5-83(c).
Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 5-83(d), the operation notice display 511 has the same display format (display size and (color, font, display position, etc.), but may be displayed in a different display mode.

The attention display screen in FIG. 5-83(e) is a customer waiting screen that is displayed after the model name display screen has been displayed for a predetermined period of time. After the warning display screen is displayed for a predetermined period of time, the stop screen shown in FIG. 5-83(a) is displayed. Note that the display time of each customer waiting screen may be the same or different.
A warning display 68 is displayed on the warning display screen to warn the player against getting addicted to the game. The operation notice display 511 may be displayed on a layer on the front side of the attention-calling display 68, or may be displayed on a layer on the back side.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 5-83(e), a specific model display 67 is also displayed. This specific model display 67 may be displayed on the same layer as the alert display 68, or may be displayed on a different layer. In the example shown in FIG. 5-83(e), the operation notice display 511 does not overlap with the attention display 68 or the specific model display 67, but they may overlap.
Furthermore, in the example shown in Figure 5-83(e), the display position of the operation notice display 511 is different from the display position of the operation notice display 511 displayed on the model name display screen (Figure 5-83(d)). Yes, but the same is fine. That is, the operation notice display 511 displayed on the attention display screen may be displayed in the same display manner as the operation notice display 511 displayed on the model name display screen, or may be displayed in a different display manner.

As described above, while waiting for a customer, the display mode of the operation notice display 511 can be changed to other displays other than the operation notice display 511 or the display states of other image objects, that is, the type of customer waiting screen that can be cyclically switched ( The screen may be different depending on the stop screen, player setting screen, customer waiting demo movie screen, model name display screen, alert display screen). Furthermore, while waiting for a customer, the specific model display 67 may display that the gaming machine 10 is a model equipped with a safety device (a model equipped with a complete function).

[Example of screen while checking settings]
FIG. 5-84 is a diagram illustrating a display screen of the display device 41 in a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode).
FIG. 5-84(a) is the first display screen displayed after entering the setting confirmation state. In response to entering the settings confirmation state, the production control device 300 displays a settings confirmation display 545 (e.g. characters “Settings confirmation”) on the display device 41 to notify that the settings are being confirmed (step S168). In addition, the production control device 300 displays, together with the setting confirmation display 545, characters such as "setting history list" and an image imitating the operation section (in this case, the production button 25) to prompt a predetermined operation (press operation). An operation promotion image 546 is displayed on the display device 41. The operation promotion image 546 prompts the player to operate the operation section, and may be an image imitating the cross key switch 28.

FIG. 5-84(b) is a display screen that is switched from FIG. 5-84(a) when the operation unit is operated. The production control device 30 displays the setting history list 548 on the display device 41 in response to the operation of the operation unit while the display screen shown in FIG. 5-84(a) is displayed. The setting history list 548 displays whether settings have been changed or confirmed in order from past to present, and the probability setting value at the time of setting change or setting confirmation and the duration of the changed probability setting value are displayed. Displayed. In addition, the production control device 300 displays an image imitating the operation unit (production button 25) along with the setting history list 548, and an operation that prompts an operation (press operation) to return to the screen of FIG. 5-84(a). The display device 41 displays a promotion image 546 and an operation promotion image 547 which is an image imitating the operation section (production button 25) and which prompts an operation (swipe operation) to scroll the setting history list 548 and view past history. indicate. Note that the operation promotion image 546 and the operation promotion image 547 here may be ones imitating the cross key switch 28.

Furthermore, in the setting history list 548, a predetermined mark (here, ☆) is displayed on the same line in association with the probability setting value so that the probability setting value in the case that the suspension is canceled due to activation of the safety device is recognized. has been done. As a result, hall personnel can use high probability setting values (for example, 5, 6) that increase the probability of winning, such as the jackpot probability or small hit probability, to ensure that a large number of balls (a large number of safe balls) are rolled out as intended. It can be confirmed whether or not the safety device has been activated (stopped). The results of the confirmation can then be used to change the probability settings in the future.

[Example 1 of specific model display]
FIG. 5-85 is a diagram illustrating an example (Example 1) of the specific model display 67 (complete function installed display) that is displayed other than video. In FIG. 5-85, the specific model display 67 is displayed by printing, printing, painting, or the like. Note that in FIG. 5-83, the specific model display 67 is displayed as an image on the display screen of the display device 41.

FIG. 5-85 shows the integrated display device 50 provided on the game board 30 and its surroundings. Around the LED lamps D1 to D18 of the collective display device 50, specifications regarding the specifications of the gaming machine 10 are displayed. Specification displays include jackpot probability display 66a "1/300" and "1/200" at low probability in settings 1 (lowest setting) and setting 6 (highest setting), number of prize balls shown 66b "3 & 2 & 10 & 14", round Upper numerical limit display 66c "3, 6, 9", model (official name) display 66d "P Tiger Tiger", and in the case of a model with a probability variable state, display 66e indicating whether there is a limit regarding probability variable jackpots. (here "No limit") is displayed.

In the display 66b of the number of prize balls, there is a starting prize opening 36, a normal variable winning device 37, a general prize opening 35,
And the number of prize balls of the special variable prize winning device 39 is displayed in a recognizable order, for example, 3, 2, 10, 14.
The limit regarding variable probability jackpots means that the number of continuous variable jackpots is limited to a predetermined limit number (one jackpot can cause a predetermined limit number of jackpots (number of consecutive wins). Become).

In FIG. 5-85, the specific model display 67 indicates that the game machine 10 is a model with a safety device (a model equipped with a complete function), for example, by printing, printing, or painting, etc., as "Equipped with a complete function." The characters are always displayed in a fixed manner. The specific model display 67 is always displayed even when the power to the gaming machine 10 is cut off, and is not always displayed as an image on a specific screen as shown in FIG. 5-83. Therefore, the specific model display 67 is always easily recognized by the player, and is therefore more convenient for the player than the specific model display 67 displayed as an image. The specific model display 67 is associated with the display 66d, such as displayed near the display 66d of the model (official name) of the gaming machine 10, in order to give an impression that the gaming machine 10 is a model with a safety device. may be displayed.

In the example shown in Figure 5-85, the specific model display 67 by printing, printing, painting, etc. is the same character string "Complete function equipped" (same display content) as the specific model display 67 by video in Figure 5-83. However, it is not limited to this, and a different character string (different display content) may be used. For example, if the character string of the specific model display 67 in FIG. 5-85 is shortened by partially omitting "Complete Function" or the like, the area around the collective display device 50 with little free space can be effectively utilized.

[Example 2 of specific model display]
FIG. 5-86 is a diagram illustrating an example (Example 2) of the specific model display 67 (complete function installed display) that is displayed other than video. In FIG. 5-86 as well, the specific model display 67 is displayed by printing, printing, painting, or the like.

In FIG. 5-86, the specific model display 67 is displayed on the substantially flat front portion 456 of the decoration device 18a (top unit). Note that the decoration device 18a projects obliquely upward and forward at the top of the glass frame 15 (or the opening/closing frame). On the front part 456, a model name display 456a indicating the model name (here, "Tiger Tiger") is provided by printing, printing, painting, or the like. The model name display 456a may be different from the model name display 90 displayed as an image on the display screen in display format and display content, and in the model name display 456a, the letter "P" is omitted and it is not a model (official name). It's okay. Further, on the front part 456, a character 456b that is related to the model name and can also appear on the display screen of the display device 41 is provided by printing, painting, or the like.
The specific model display 67 is provided, for example, near the end of the front portion 456 and near the character 456b by printing, printing, or painting.

The front portion 456 may be fixed to the decoration device 18a at all times, or may be detachable from the decoration device 18a for convenience and may be replaced depending on the model. Further, a sheet or film on which a model name display 456a, a character 456b, and a specific model display 67 are fixedly displayed by printing or the like can be inserted into the front part 456, and the sheet or film is inserted from the front using a transparent member (transparent plastic, etc.). It may be something that can be visually recognized through. The sheets and films are convenient because they can be replaced depending on the model.

[Other configuration examples]
In order to simplify the control of the performance control device 300, unlike in FIG. The display format may be changed (same size or same font). Also, unlike in FIG. 5-82, the operation notice display 511 may be displayed in the same manner during the variable display, and unlike in FIG. 5-83, the operation notice display 511 may be in the same display manner while waiting for a customer. Good too.

Furthermore, the warning start value (190000 in the above example) at which the safety device activation warning state starts, that is, the timing at which the activation warning display 511 starts to be displayed may be changed depending on the gaming state and the like. For example, in a gaming state where jackpots are likely to occur, the activation notice display 511 may start to be displayed at a smaller notice start value than in the normal gaming state in the general power support state (variable probability state, time saving state) so that the notice can be given at an earlier timing. good.
In addition, a switch is provided on the back of the game machine 10 to turn on and off the safety device (complete function) by operation by a person involved in the hall, and the game control device 100 is safe only when the switch connected to the game control device 100 is turned on. The device may be activated.

[Menu screen]
5-87 and 5-88 are examples of a menu screen and an item screen corresponding to an item selected on the menu screen.
For example, when the performance button 25 is operated while the customer waiting screen is displayed, the performance control device 300 displays a menu screen 93 on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 5-87(a). The menu screen 93 is displayed on a layer closer to the front than the customer waiting screen (for example, the frontmost layer). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 5-87(a), the model name display 90 ("P Tiger Tiger") displayed on the model name display screen of the customer waiting screen is overlapped with the model name display 90. A menu screen 93 is displayed on the front side.

On the menu screen 93, five items can be selected: "Customize", "Smartphone linkage", "Volume/light intensity", "Game explanation", and "Back". The selection is made using the effect button 25 and the upper surface of the effect button 25 (touch panel 25b). Specifically, the touch panel 25b functions as a cursor key, and the production button 25 functions as a determination key.
That is, the player operates the touch panel 25b (swipe operation) to display the menu screen 9.
By placing the cursor on a desired item among the plurality of items in 3 and operating (pressing) the production button 25 while the cursor is on the desired item, the desired item can be selected. There is.

The item on which the cursor is placed is displayed larger than other items (items on which the cursor is not placed). That is, FIG. 5-87(a) shows a state in which the cursor is placed on "smartphone linkage", and when the production button 25 is operated in this state, "smartphone linkage" is selected and the production control device is activated. 300 starts processing corresponding to "smartphone linkage".
The menu screen 93 includes a starting menu screen 93a (see Figure 5-87(a)) where the "Smartphone linkage" item is set to "Smartphone linkage start", and an end menu screen 93a (see Figure 5-87(a)) where the "Smartphone linkage" item is set to "Smartphone linkage end". There is a menu screen 93b (see FIG. 5-87(b)).

The player operates the effect button 25 to call up the menu screen 93, for example, at the start and end of the game.
When the player calls up the menu screen 93 at the start of the game (for example, while the machine name display screen is being displayed while waiting for a customer), the start menu screen 93a is displayed as shown in FIG. 5-87(a). . When "smartphone link start" is selected on this start menu screen 93a, the production control device 300 starts accumulating the player's game history information. In this embodiment, as game history information, a history of game results such as the number of fluctuations and the number of jackpots, and a history of game results such as mission accomplishment, content acquisition, production point acquisition, etc. are accumulated, but the game history information to be accumulated may be at least one of the history of game results, the history of game results, and other history.

When the player calls up the menu screen 93 again at the end of the game (for example, while the stop screen is being displayed while waiting for a customer), the end menu screen 93b is displayed as shown in FIG. 5-87(b). . That is, when the menu screen 93 is called up with "smartphone link start" selected on the start menu screen 93a, the end menu screen 93b is displayed on the display device 41. When "Smartphone linked end" is selected on the end menu screen 93b, the production control device 300 displays a code screen 94 as shown in FIG. 5-87(c). Similarly to the menu screen 93, the code screen 94 is also displayed on a layer closer to the front (for example, the frontmost layer) than other displays and other image objects.

On the code screen 94, two items can be selected: "End/delete interlocking" and "Back". When the player selects "End/Delete Linkage" on the code screen 94, the game history information accumulated this time (for example, accumulated between "Start Smartphone Linkage" is selected and "End Smartphone Linkage" is selected) (gaming history information) is deleted and the start menu screen 93a is displayed, or the display of the menu screen 93 and code screen 94 is ended. When the player selects "Return" on the code screen 94, the game history information accumulated this time is not deleted, and the exit menu screen 93b is displayed.
On the code screen 94, similarly to the menu screen 93, the item on which the cursor is placed is displayed larger than other items (items on which the cursor is not placed). That is, FIG. 5-87(c) shows a state in which the cursor is placed on "End/Delete Linkage".

Further, a two-dimensional code (here, a QR code (registered trademark)) is displayed on the code screen 94. When a player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the code screen 94 with the camera of a camera-equipped information terminal such as a smartphone or mobile phone, the information terminal accesses a server outside the gaming hall and displays the currently accumulated games. History information is stored on the server. That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a player can use an interlocking service (cooperation service) such as a so-called smartphone interlocking service (mobile interlocking service).

Note that the timing at which the effect button 25 is operated to call up the start menu screen 93a is not limited to the start of the game. Further, the timing at which the production button 25 is operated to call up the start menu screen 93a is not limited to when waiting for a customer.
Further, the timing at which the effect button 25 is operated to call up the end menu screen 93b is not limited to the end of the game. Further, the timing at which the production button 25 is operated to call up the end menu screen 93b is not limited to when waiting for a customer.

The menu screen 93 can also be displayed when the safety device is activated.
As described above, when the operating state of the safety device starts, the display device 41 first indicates that the operating state of the safety device has started (when the safety device counter value reaches the counter value), as shown in FIG. An operation movie 514 is displayed to notify that the reference value has been reached. A performance display 515 is also displayed to notify that the safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value. Note that, when displaying the performance display 515, the production control device 300 may output a sound effect (for example, the sound of "picon") from the speakers 19a and 19b.

Thereafter, when the operating movie 514 ends, an operating display 513 ("stopping") is displayed, as shown in FIG. 5-88(b). Here, a manufacturer name display 516 and an explanation display 517 are also displayed, and even after the operation movie 514 ends, the performance display 515 continues to be displayed. This performance display 515 is erased (hidden) after a certain period of time has elapsed. That is, the display time of the performance display 515 is set longer than the display time of the operation movie 514.

Thereafter, when the effect button 25 is operated, a menu screen 93 is displayed.
Specifically, if an activation state occurs and the production button 25 is operated while "Smartphone link start" on the start menu screen 93a is not selected, the operation is performed as shown in FIG. 5-88(c). A starting menu screen 93a is displayed. When "smartphone link start" is selected on the start menu screen 93a, accumulation of game history information is started, and a game performance in which the safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value is stored. Next, in response to memorizing the game results or in response to operating the performance button 25 again, the end menu screen 93b is displayed as shown in FIG. 5-88(d). . When "smartphone link termination" is selected on the termination menu screen 93b, a code screen 94 is displayed as shown in FIG. 5-88(e).

On the other hand, if an activation state occurs and the effect button 25 is operated while "Smartphone link start" on the start menu screen 93a is selected, the end time A menu screen 93b is displayed. Here, the operating state occurs when "Smartphone link start" on the start menu screen 93a is selected (that is, while the game history information is being accumulated), and then the production button 25 is operated, so it is safe. The game performance that the device counter value reached the counter reference value has already been stored (accumulated) before the relevant operation. Then, when "smartphone linkage end" is selected on the exit menu screen 93b, a code screen 94 is displayed as shown in FIG. 5-88(e).

After that, when "End link/delete" is selected on the code screen 94, the game history information accumulated this time is deleted and the start menu screen 93a is displayed as shown in FIG. 5-88(c). Alternatively, the display of the menu screen 93 and code screen 94 is finished, and the screen returns to the screen shown in FIG. 5-88(b). Further, when "Return" is selected on the code screen 94, the game history information accumulated this time is not deleted, and the exit menu screen 93b is displayed as shown in FIG. 5-88(d).

The production control device 300, in response to receiving an in-operation command, or in response to “smartphone link start” on the start menu screen 93a being selected during the operation state,
For example, performance points are added as a game result that the safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value (step S12). At this time, the number of points to be added may be greater than the number of points added by normal performance. This can reduce the player's discomfort caused by the game being stopped. Information on performance points is encoded and incorporated into a two-dimensional code, so it is stored in an external server. In addition, although the information on the production point becomes the discontinuation information that indirectly indicates the discontinuation, the discontinuation information itself may be encoded and incorporated into the two-dimensional code. Thereby, a player can access an external server using an information terminal or the like at any time and display information on performance points and discontinuation information based on the occurrence of an operating state on the information terminal. Therefore, the player can show off to others the performance point information and the stoppage information obtained by the activation (stoppage) of the safety device, and feel satisfied.

Also, if "Smartphone link start" is selected on the start menu screen 93a during the activation state, production points will be added, so for example, other players other than the player who caused the activation state Information on performance points and discontinuation information based on the occurrence of an operating state can be provided. For example, a player who was playing on the gaming machine 10 when the operating state occurred
After finishing the game and leaving the gaming machine 10, another player operates the performance button 25 of the gaming machine 10 and selects "Start Smartphone Link" and "End Smartphone Link" on the menu screen 93. By making a selection, it is possible to obtain information on production points and discontinuation information based on the occurrence of the operating state. Therefore, by showing the information acquired here to others and boasting about it, the other players can advertise the game parlor or the like.
Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed since the activation state occurred, the production button 2
5 (operation for calling up the menu screen 93), the menu screen 93 may not be displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the performance control device 300 can display the menu screen 93 and the code screen 94 on the display device 41 for allowing the player to select one item from among a plurality of items. A common menu screen 93 is displayed when the game is in the active state (gaming stopped state) and when it is not in the working state (game stopped state). In addition, a common code screen 94 is displayed when the game is in the active state (gaming stopped state) and when it is not in the working state (game stopped state).
That is, the menu screen 93 lists a plurality of items, and the menu screen 93 (see Figure 5-88) is displayed when the safety device is activated, and the menu screen 93 is displayed when the safety device is not activated. The menu screen 93 (see FIG. 5-87) is the same screen on which all the same items are displayed as the plurality of items.
In addition, the code screen 94 lists multiple items, and the code screen 94 (see Figure 5-88) is displayed when the safety device is activated, and the code screen 94 is displayed when the safety device is not activated. The code screen 94 (see FIG. 5-87) is the same screen on which all the same items are displayed as the plurality of items.

Similar to the menu screen 93 that is displayed when the safety device is not activated, the menu screen 93 that is displayed when the safety device is activated is a layer ( For example, the topmost layer). Therefore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 5-88(c) and (d), the display is superimposed on the in-operation display 513 ("stopping"), the performance display 515, and the payout error displays 92a and 92b, and is displayed on the front side of these displays. A menu screen 93 is displayed. Further, depending on the display mode of the menu screen 93 (display position, display size, etc.), the menu screen 93 may be displayed on the manufacturer name display 516 and in front of the manufacturer name display 516.

In addition, the code screen 94 that is displayed when the safety device is in an activated state is similar to the code screen 94 that is displayed when the safety device is not in an activated state. It is displayed in a layer (for example, the frontmost layer). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 5-88(e), the display is superimposed on and in front of the operating display 513 (“stopped”), the performance display 515, the manufacturer name display 516, and the payout error displays 92a and 92b. A code screen 94 is displayed on the side.

When "Customize" is selected on the menu screen 93, a customization screen 95 is displayed for the player to customize the performance of the game. On this customization screen 95, it is possible to customize, for example, the performance mode, BGM output from the speakers 19a and 19b during the performance, and the like.
In addition, when "volume/light intensity" is selected on the menu screen 93, the volume and light intensity (brightness)
A volume/light intensity adjustment screen will be displayed for the player to adjust. On this volume/light intensity adjustment screen, for example, the volume of the speakers 19a, 19b, the LED for presentation, the liquid crystal (display device 41, etc.)
The brightness can be adjusted.

During the operating state (game stop state), the game performance is not executed, so it is useless for the player to customize the game performance. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 5-88(c) and (d), on the menu screen 93 that is displayed when it is in the operating state, "Customize" is displayed in an inoperative state (for example, gray display). , you can move the cursor to "Customize" by operating the touch panel 25b (it will be displayed larger than other items), but even if you operate the production button 25 with the cursor hovering over "Customize", the corresponding No operations are accepted (that is, the customization screen 95 is not displayed).

In addition, as described above, in the game stop state, the performance control device 300 does not execute the hall/player setting mode process (step S11) of the main process (FIG. 5-71), and the performance LED and liquid crystal (display The brightness of the device 41, etc.) and the volume of the speakers 19a and 19b may be configured so that they are not adjustable and are set to default brightness and volume, and here, it is assumed that this is the configuration.
Therefore, it is useless for the player to adjust the volume or brightness while the game is in the active state (game is stopped), so as shown in Figures 5-88(c) and (d), On the menu screen 93 displayed, "Volume/Light Intensity" is displayed in a disabled manner (for example, gray display), and it is possible to move the cursor to "Volume/Light Intensity" by operating the touch panel 25b (other ), but even if you operate the production button 25 with the cursor placed on "Volume/Light Intensity", the operation will not be accepted (that is, the Volume/Light Intensity adjustment screen will not be displayed). It has become.

FIG. 5-89 is a timing chart illustrating the relationship between the display on the display device 41 and the effect button 25.
As mentioned above, in the game stop state, the production control device 30 that has received the active command
0 means that all of the performance LEDs are turned off (all turned off) or all of them are turned on (all turned on). however,
In the game stop state, there is a possibility that the effect button 25 is operated in order to display the menu screen 93. Therefore, when all the performance LEDs are turned off when the game is stopped, the performance button 25 is exceptionally turned on (light emitted), and the performance LEDs other than the performance button 25 are turned off.
The light may be turned off. In addition, when all the performance LEDs are turned on when the game is stopped, the brightness of the performance button 25 is set to be the same as the brightness during normal times (for example, during a game), and the brightness of the performance LEDs other than the performance button 25 is adjusted. The brightness may be set lower than normal brightness (or brightness in power saving mode).

Further, while the operation movie 514 is being displayed, the operation of the effect button 25 is disabled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5-89(a), the effect button 25 may be turned off while the actuation movie 514 is displayed, and may be turned on when the actuation movie 514 ends. Further, while the operation movie 514 is being displayed, the operation of the effect button 25 is disabled, so the menu screen 93 cannot be called up. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 5-88(a) and 5-89(a), while the operation movie 514 is being displayed, the explanation display 517 is not displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 5-89(a), at the same time as the operation movie 514 ends (the display of the operation display 513 starts), the explanation display 517 starts to be displayed, the effect button 25 is switched to the enabled state, Although the production button 25 is switched to a lit state, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, as shown in FIG. 5-89(b), the explanation display 517 may be started to be displayed after the in-operation display 513 is started.

That is, the timing to start displaying the in-operation display 513 and the timing to start displaying the explanation display 517 may or may not be the same.
Further, the timing to start displaying the in-operation display 513 and the timing to switch the effect button 25 to the valid state may or may not be the same.
Further, the timing to start displaying the in-operation display 513 and the timing to switch the effect button 25 to the lighting state may or may not be the same.
Furthermore, the timing to start displaying the explanation display 517 and the timing to switch the effect button 25 to the valid state may or may not be the same.
Further, the timing to start displaying the explanation display 517 and the timing to switch the effect button 25 to the lighting state may or may not be the same.
Further, the timing of switching the production button 25 to the valid state and the timing of switching the production button 25 to the lighting state may or may not be the same.
Furthermore, the timing at which the display of the operating movie 514 ends and the timing at which the display of the operating display 513 starts may or may not be the same.

FIG. 5-90 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the display on the display device 41 and the effect button 25 when the effect button 25 is in a valid state while the operation movie 514 is displayed.
In the example shown in FIG. 5-89, the operation of the effect button 25 is disabled while the activation movie 514 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, as shown in FIG. 5-90, the operation of the effect button 25 may be valid even while the operation movie 514 is being displayed.
If the effect button 25 is enabled while the operation movie 514 is displayed, an explanation display 517 is displayed while the operation movie 514 is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 5-90(a) and (b). Then, the effect button 25 is turned on. Thereby, while the operation movie 514 is displayed, the user can be prompted to operate the performance button 25 by the explanation display 517 and the light emission of the performance button 25.

Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 5-90(c), the presentation button 25 may be turned on while the operation movie 514 is displayed, so that the explanation display 517 is not displayed. Thereby, it is possible to prompt the user to operate the performance button 25 by emitting light from the performance button 25 while the operation movie 514 is being displayed.
Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 5-90(d), while the operation movie 514 is displayed, even if the effect button 25 is in the valid state, the effect button 25 is not turned on and the explanation display 517 is not displayed. You may also do so.
In the example shown in FIG. 5-90(d), the timing for switching the effect button 25 to the lighting state is the same as the timing for starting the display of the in-operation display 513, but it does not have to be at the same time.
Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 5-90(c) and (d), the timing to start displaying the explanation display 517 is the same as the timing to start displaying the in-operation display 513, but it is not the same time as the timing to start displaying the in-operation display 513. Good too.
Furthermore, in the examples shown in FIGS. 5-90(b), (c), and (d), the timing at which the display of the operating display 513 starts is the same as the timing at which the display of the operating movie 514 ends. , not necessarily at the same time.

If the effect button 25 is enabled while the operation movie 514 is displayed, and the effect button 25 is operated while the operation movie 514 is displayed, the operation movie 51 is activated.
The menu screen 93 may be displayed while 4 is being displayed, or the menu screen 93 may be displayed after the operation movie 514 ends. If the effect button 25 is operated while the actuation movie 514 is displayed and the menu screen 93 is displayed after the actuation movie 514 ends, in response to the operation of the effect button 25 while the actuation movie 514 is displayed, A predetermined sound may be output or a predetermined display may be performed.

FIG. 5-91 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the operation of the safety device and the menu screen 93.
For example, as shown in FIG. 5-91(a), if the safety device is activated while the menu screen 93 (start menu screen 93a, end menu screen 93b) is displayed, the production control device 300 terminates the display of the menu screen 93 in response to receiving the active command.

Alternatively, for example, as shown in FIG. 5-91(b), if the safety device is activated while the menu screen 93 (start menu screen 93a, end menu screen 93b) is displayed, the production control The device 300 interrupts the display of the menu screen 93 in response to receiving the operating command, and resumes displaying the menu screen 93 in response to the end of the operating movie 514 (or the start of display of the operating display 513). It may be restarted. At this time, since the menu screen 93 is in the operating state when the display resumes, the menu screen 93 that is displayed in response to the end of the operating movie 514 is different from the menu screen 93 that would be displayed in the operating state (for example, A menu screen 93) is displayed in which the display mode of "Customize" and "Volume/Light Intensity" is in an operation disabled mode.

Note that if the display of the menu screen 93 is interrupted in response to receiving an active command, the display of the menu screen 93 may be resumed in response to the operation of the production button 25. .
Further, the menu screen 93 may continue to be displayed even while the operation movie 514 is being displayed. In that case, the menu screen 93 displayed on the display device 41 is changed from the menu screen 93 displayed when the operating state is not in response to receiving the operating command to the menu screen displayed when the operating state is You may switch to 93.

5-92 to 5-94 are diagrams illustrating the relationship between the operation of the safety device and the item screen corresponding to the item selected on the menu screen 93.
For example, as shown in Figures 5-92(a) and (b) and Figure 5-94(a), one item is selected on the menu screen 93, and the item screen corresponding to the one item is displayed. When the safety device is activated, the production control device 300 terminates the display of the item screen in response to receiving the activation command.

In the examples shown in Figures 5-92(a) and (b) and Figure 5-94(a), items that can be selected during the activation state (items that remain valid even after activation; here, "smartphone linkage" and "gaming explanation") is selected, as well as when an item that cannot be selected during the activation state (invalid item after activation; in this case, "Customize" and "Volume/Light Intensity") is selected, the item screen will be displayed at the start of the activation state. Although the display has ended, the display is not limited to this.
Specifically, as shown in Figures 5-93(a) and 5-94(b), for example, an item that can be selected during the operating state (an item that is valid even after the operation) is selected, and the selected If an activation state occurs while the item screen corresponding to the item is displayed, the production control device 300 interrupts the display of the item screen in response to receiving the activation command, and The display of the item screen may be restarted in response to the end of the movie 514 (or the start of display of the in-operation display 513).
Alternatively, as shown in Figure 5-93(b) and Figure 5-94(c), for example, an item that can be selected during the activation state (an item that is valid even after activation) is selected, and the corresponding item is selected. If an operating state occurs while an item screen is being displayed, the production control device 300 may continue displaying the item screen even if it receives an in-operation command.

In FIG. 5-92(a), before the activation state occurs, "Customize", which is an item that cannot be selected during the activation state (an item that is invalid after activation), is selected, and the customization screen 95 is displayed as the item screen. Although the case in which it is displayed is shown as an example, the same applies when "volume/light intensity" is selected.
In addition, in Figures 5-92(b), 5-93(a), and (b), before the operating state occurs, "Game explanation", which is an item that can be selected during the operating state (an item that is valid even after the operating state), is displayed. '' is selected and the game explanation screen 96 is displayed as the item screen, but the same applies to the case where ``smartphone linkage'' is selected.

FIG. 5-95 is a diagram illustrating the menu screen 93 displayed while the operation movie 514 is displayed.
While the operation display 513 is displayed, that is, after the operation movie 514 ends, the only sound that can be output from the speakers 19a and 19b is the error sound. On the other hand, while the operation movie 514 is being displayed, various sounds such as BGM for the operation movie, sound effects, and an error sound for notifying the occurrence of an error can be output from the speakers 19a and 19b. Therefore, even if the production control device 300 is in the operating state (gaming stopped state), while the operating movie 514 is being displayed, the performance control device 300 executes the hall/player setting mode processing (step S11) of the main processing (FIG. 5-71). The brightness of the performance LED and liquid crystal (display device 41, etc.) and the volume of the speakers 19a and 19b can be adjusted, and even in the operating state, a volume/light amount adjustment screen is displayed while the operating movie 514 is being displayed. It may be possible. Further, the menu screen 93 may be displayed while the operation movie 514 is being displayed, and "volume/light amount" may be selected on the menu screen 93.

Specifically, for example, if the production button 25 is operated while the activation movie 514 is displayed, the display mode of "volume/light intensity" is disabled, as shown in FIG. 5-95(a), for example. Displays the start menu screen 93a (or end menu screen 93b), which is not the mode but the normal mode (operation effective mode), and displays the volume/light intensity adjustment screen when the "volume/light intensity" is selected. You can do it like this.

Furthermore, while the activation movie 514 is being displayed, a customization screen may be displayed so that the player can customize the aspects of the activation movie 514 (BGM, characters, etc.). Specifically, for example, if the production button 25 is operated while the activation movie 514 is being displayed, the display mode of "Customize" is changed to the operation disabled mode, as shown in FIG. 5-95(b), for example. Instead, the normal mode of the start menu screen 93a (or the end menu screen 93b) may be displayed, and if the "customize" is selected, the customization screen 95 may be displayed.
Furthermore, when the production button 25 is operated while the operation movie 514 is being displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. (or the end menu screen 93b) may be displayed.

Note that on the menu screen 93 and code screen 94, the display mode of the item on which the cursor is placed is not limited to displaying it larger than other items, but can be changed as appropriate.
For example, the display mode may be such that the item is displayed in a different color from other items.
In addition, items displayed in an operation-disabled manner can be moved with the cursor, but are not limited to items where the operation cannot be accepted even if the effect button 25 is operated with the cursor aligned. For example, an item displayed in an operation-disabled manner may not even be able to be moved with a cursor.
Further, the operation means operated to display (call up) the menu screen 93 are as follows:
The present invention is not limited to the production button 25, and may be, for example, the cross key switch 28.
Further, the operating means operated to select one item from among the plurality of items displayed on the menu screen 93 is not limited to the touch panel 25b and the effect button 25, and may be, for example, the cross key switch 28.

Further, the items provided on the menu screen 93 are not limited to "customization", "smartphone linkage", "volume/light intensity", "game explanation", and "back". For example, "gaming history" may be provided as an item that can be selected (valid) both before and after the safety device is activated, or it can be selected (valid) before the safety device is activated but not after it is activated. Items that are not allowed (invalid) include “BGM” and “
An "auto button" or the like may also be provided.
Further, the code displayed on the code screen 94 is not limited to a two-dimensional code such as a QR code (registered trademark), but may be a one-dimensional code such as a barcode, for example. Furthermore, the items provided on the code screen 94 are not limited to "end/delete interlocking" and "return".

Furthermore, the display modes may be different between "smartphone linkage" (smartphone linkage start) on the start menu screen 93a and "smartphone linkage" (smartphone linkage end) on the end menu screen 93b. Specifically, for example, the font color of “Start” in “Smartphone link start”,
The font color of "End" in "Smartphone link end" may be different. This makes it possible for the player to recognize at a glance whether smartphone linkage has started or ended.
In addition, in this embodiment, as items listed on the menu screen 93, there are items (such as "customize" and "volume/light intensity") that can be selected when not in the operating state, but cannot be selected when in the operating state. Conversely, an item may also be provided that cannot be selected when it is not in the operating state, but can be selected when it is in the operating state.

FIG. 5-96 is a diagram illustrating a menu screen 93 that is provided with items that cannot be selected when the device is not in the active state, but can be selected when the device is in the active state.
For example, to commemorate that the safety device has become activated, that is, that the safety device counter value has reached the counter reference value, the player displays the screen on which the in-operation display 513 (“discontinued”) is displayed. (or the screen on which the operating movie 514 is displayed) may be photographed. Therefore, an item "commemorative photo" for taking the photo is provided on the menu screen 93, and in response to the selection of the "commemorative photo", an image for the commemorative photo (for example, an image showing the name of the game parlor, an A background image, video, etc. dedicated to the current state may be displayed for a predetermined period of time.

Before the activation state occurs, even if the player instructs the gaming machine 10 to display an image for commemorative photography, there is a possibility that it will be useless. Therefore, in the operating state, as shown in FIG. 5-96(a), for example, a starting menu screen 93a in which the display mode of "commemorative photo" is the normal mode (operation effective mode) is displayed as the menu screen 93. (or menu screen 93b at the time of termination) is displayed, but if it is not in the operating state, as shown in FIG. The start menu screen 93a (or end menu screen 93b) may be displayed (eg, gray display) so that the "commemorative photo" cannot be selected.

Alternatively, even before the activation state occurs, if the activation warning state is present, it is unlikely that the player's instruction to display a commemorative image to the gaming machine 10 will be in vain. Therefore, in the operation warning state, the menu screen 93 displays the start menu screen 93a (or the end menu screen 93b) in which the display mode of "commemorative photo" is the normal mode, and When "commemorative photo" is selected, an image for commemorative photo may be displayed on the display device 41 together with the actuation movie 514 or the in-action display 513 after the activation state occurs.

Furthermore, even before the activation state occurs, in the activation warning state, the player is more likely to instruct the gaming machine 10 to display an image for a commemorative photo than in the non-activation state. is also less likely to be wasted. Therefore, when the operation notice state is in progress, the menu screen 93 displays the following information.
If the start menu screen 93a (or end menu screen 93b) in which the display mode of "commemorative photo" is the normal mode is displayed, and "commemorative photo" is selected during the operation notice state or the operation warning state, After the activation state occurs, an image for commemorative photography may be displayed on the display device 41 together with the activation movie 514 or the activation display 513.
Furthermore, in response to the selection of "commemorative photo", in addition to (or instead of) displaying the image for the commemorative photo for a predetermined period of time, the manufacturer name display 516, explanation display 517, etc. are hidden for a predetermined period of time. You can also use it as

[Power outage recovery and operation display]
FIG. 5-97 is a diagram illustrating an in-operation display 513 displayed when the power is restored.
As described above, except when the game is stopped due to RAM abnormality (steps X25 to X26), when the power is turned on, safety device information (safety device counter value, etc.) is unconditionally initialized (cleared).
On the other hand, when initializing the RAM (when power is turned on with RAM clear), the safety device operation is canceled by clearing the safety device activation flag area to 0; however, when power is normally turned on (when RAM is cleared) The safety device activation flag area is not cleared when the power is turned on without Therefore, if a power outage occurs while the safety device is in operation and the safety device is restored (normal power is turned on), the device will remain in an active state (gaming stopped state) even after restoration. Therefore, in this case, after the power outage recovery screen is displayed (or while the power outage recovery screen is being displayed, or in place of the power outage recovery screen), the operating display 513 (“discontinued”) is displayed.

Specifically, if it is determined that the safety device is in operation (step X50; Y) in the normal power-on processing (steps X44, steps A command indicating that the safety device is in operation is transmitted to the production control device 300 (step X51).
Then, in response to receiving the command to activate the safety device, the production control device 300 displays the in-operation display 513 as shown in FIG. 5-97(a) without displaying the in-operation movie 514. indicate. At this stage, the safety device activation flag area has not been cleared (safety device activation has been canceled) and the game is in a stopped state. In order to cancel this game stopped state, the RAM initialization in steps It is necessary to perform processing (RAM clear processing). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 5-97(a), when the production control device 300 receives a command indicating that the safety device is in operation, it displays the in-operation display 513, but also displays the performance display 515 and explanation display 517. Do not show. Further, in this case, even if the effect button 25 is operated, the menu screen 93 does not need to be displayed.

In this way, when the power is restored during the operating state (when a command to activate the safety device is received), the production control device 300 displays the operating display 5 without displaying the operating movie 514.
13 (the performance display 515 and the explanation display 517 are not displayed) to inform the hall personnel that the game is in the operating state (gaming stopped state).
On the other hand, at the start of the operating state (when an operating command is received), the operating movie 514
After this is displayed, an in-operation display 513, a performance display 515, and an explanatory display 517 are displayed to notify those involved in the hall that the game is in an operating state (gaming stopped state).
Since the commands received are different when the power is restored during the operating state and when the operating state is started, the production control device 300 changes the notification mode for notifying that the operating state is in the operating state when the power is restored during the operating state. and the start of the operating state. By making the notification mode when the power is restored during the operating state different from the notification mode when the operating state starts, it is possible to confirm that the safety device is in the operating state even though the safety device information has been cleared. can be suggested.

Note that the notification mode when the power is restored during the operating state may be different from the notification mode at the start of the operating state. That is, the notification mode when the power is restored during the operating state is to display the operating movie 514 and then display the operating display 513 (result display 515 and explanation display 5).
17 may not be displayed), or a mode may be adopted in which the in-operation display 513, performance display 515, and explanation display 517 are displayed without displaying the operation movie 514.

In addition, in response to receiving the command indicating that the safety device is in operation, the production control device 300 displays an in-operation display 513 and turns on the RAM initialization switch 112, as shown in FIG. 5-97(b). A prompting display 518 (for example, the words "Please clear RAM") may be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to urge the hall personnel etc. to clear the RAM and release the activation of the safety device (game stop state).

Further, the command transmitted to the production control device 300 when the power is restored during the operating state and the command transmitted to the production control device 300 at the start of the operating state may be the same command. Specifically, for example, the gaming control device 100 transmits an in-operation command at the start of the operating state, and in addition to the command for the safety device in operation when the power is restored during the operating state.
Alternatively, an active command may be sent. In this case, the notification mode when the power is restored during the operating state may be the same as or different from the notification mode at the start of the operating state.

[Safety equipment and external information]
FIG. 5-98 is a timing chart illustrating the relationship between the operation of the safety device and the security signal and external information.
As shown in FIG. 5-59, if the safety device is in operation (step X519; Y), a security signal is output to the external device.
In addition, as mentioned above, the jackpot 2 signal is continuously transmitted to the external device for a long time during the jackpot state and in the time-saving state following the jackpot state (the time-saving state due to the jackpot, the first specific gaming state, and the first time-saving state). Output as external information.
Therefore, for example, as shown in Figure 5-98, if the safety device starts operating while external information (Jackpot 2 signal, etc.) is being output, the external information will continue to be output even while the safety device is operating. It's okay. At this time, a security signal based on the operation of the safety device may be output in addition to the external information, as shown in FIG. 5-98.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 5-98, a security signal based on the activation of the safety device is output to the external device for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a security signal may be output to an external device for one pulse (e.g. 256 ms) when the safety device is activated, or a security signal may be continuously output to the external device while the safety device is activated. .
Furthermore, if a power outage occurs while outputting external information, the outputting of the external information may be interrupted and resumed after the power is restored.

[Initial operation of safety device and movable body]
The performance control device 300 performs an initial operation of the movable accessory when the gaming machine is powered on, in order to confirm the operation of the movable accessory.
As mentioned above, when the power is restored during the operating state, the game is in a stopped state, and in order to cancel this stopped game state, it is necessary to initialize the RAM. The initial movement of the movable accessory is performed when the RAM is initialized, so if the initial movement of the movable accessory is performed when the power is restored during the operating state, it will be performed twice: once when the power is restored during the operating state and when the RAM is initialized. The initial operation will be performed, which is wasteful.
Therefore, even when the power is turned on, when the power is restored during the operating state, the initial operation of the movable accessory may not be performed as an exception.

FIG. 5-99 is a flowchart illustrating the initial operation setting process. This initial operation setting process is executed, for example, in the movable body control process (step S23) of the main process (FIG. 5-67) of the production control device 300.
In the initial operation setting process, the production control device 300 first determines whether a command at the time of RAM initialization has been received (step S301). The command for initializing the RAM is sent in step X47 of the main process (FIG. 5-6). If a command for initializing the RAM is received (step S301; Y), the initial operation flag is saved (step S304), and the initial operation setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the command for initializing the RAM has not been received (step S301; N), it is determined whether the command for restoring the power outage has been received (step S302). The command at the time of power restoration is sent in step X49 of the main process (FIG. 5-6). If the command for power restoration has not been received (step S302; N), the initial operation setting process is ended.
On the other hand, if a command for power restoration is received (step S302; Y), it is determined whether a command for safety device activation has been received (step S303). A command indicating that the safety device is in operation is sent in step X51 of the main process (FIG. 5-6). If a command indicating that the safety device is in operation is received (step S303; Y), the initial operation setting process is ended.

On the other hand, if the command indicating that the safety device is in operation has not been received (step S303; N), the initial operation flag is saved (step S304), and the initial operation setting process is ended.
The production control device 300 executes the initial operation process after the initial operation setting process is completed. In this initial motion process, if the initial motion flag is saved, a process for causing the movable accessory to perform an initial motion is performed. Therefore, if the initial action flag is not saved in the initial action setting process, the initial action of the movable accessory is not executed.

That is, when a command for initializing the RAM is received (step S301; Y),
The initial motion of the movable accessory is executed.
In addition, if a command for power outage recovery is received but a command for safety device activation is not received (step S303; N), that is, if a power outage is restored with the safety device not activated, , the initial motion of the movable accessory is executed.
On the other hand, if a command for power restoration is received and a command for safety device activation is also received (
Step S303; Y), that is, when the power is restored after a power outage while the safety device is operating, the initial operation of the movable accessory is not performed.

[Operating status and power saving status]
The gaming machine 10 shifts to a power saving state (power saving mode) when a certain period of time has elapsed without any game being played. Further, the gaming machine 10 is configured not to shift to the power saving state while in the operating state (playing stopped state).
The performance control device 300 is a power saving device that reduces the power supplied to the performance devices (display devices 41, speakers 19a, 19b, decoration devices, movable accessories, and other performance devices) so that they are driven with less power consumption. It has a function. Specifically, for example, when a power saving start command indicating the start of a power saving state is received from the gaming control device 100, the power saving function is turned on and the power consumed in various production devices is reduced. On the other hand, upon receiving a power saving cancellation command indicating the end of the power saving state from the gaming control device 100, the power saving function is turned off and the amount of power supplied to the various performance devices returns to the normal amount of supply. Further, for example, when an in-operation command is received from the gaming control device 100, the power saving function is turned on, and the power consumed by the various production devices is reduced. That is, the power saving function is turned on when transitioning to the power saving state, and the power saving function is also turned on when transitioning to the operating state.

Power consumption is set to decrease in the order of normal state, which is neither a power saving state nor an operating state>power saving state>operating state. In other words, when the power saving function is turned on in response to receiving an active command (when the power saving function corresponding to the operating state is turned on), the power consumption corresponds to the reception of the power saving start command. The power consumption is set to be lower than the power consumption when the power saving function is turned on (when the power saving function corresponding to the power saving state is turned on).

During the operating state, the game control device 100 turns off all the LEDs (collective display device 50, etc.) controlled by the game control device 100. In addition, as described above, the production control device 300 that has received the operating command either turns off all the LEDs (performance LEDs) controlled by the production control device 300 (all lights off) or lights them all (all lights on). ). That is, during the operating state, the performance LEDs are all turned off or all turned on.
Further, during the power saving state, some or all of the performance LEDs are lit with lower brightness than in a normal state that is neither a power saving state nor an operating state.

Therefore, when all of the performance LEDs are turned off during the operating state, the power consumption in the operating state is lower than the power consumption in the power saving state.
On the other hand, when all of the performance LEDs are lit during the operating state, the performance LEDs are turned on with the brightness reduced so that the power consumption in the operation state is less than the power consumption in the power saving state.
Turn on all D lights.
In this way, by making the appearance of the presentation device (particularly the presentation LED) different between when it is in the power saving state and when it is in the operating state, it is possible for hall personnel and players to know whether it is in the power saving state or the operating state. becomes easier to recognize. In addition, since the operating state (game stop state) consumes less power than the power saving state, it gives the impression that the gaming machine 10 is "dark" when the safety device is operating, giving the impression that it is "dark" at a glance. It is possible to make the player recognize that the gaming machine 10 is in a stopped state, and it is possible to effectively prevent new players (customers) from using the gaming machine 10.
Note that the brightness of the liquid crystal (display device 41, etc.) in the power saving state may be lower than that of the liquid crystal (display device 41, etc.) in a normal state that is neither a power saving state nor an operating state.
Further, the brightness of the liquid crystal (display device 41, etc.) in the operating state may be lower than that of the liquid crystal (display device 41, etc.) in a normal state that is neither a power saving state nor an operating state. In addition, the brightness of the liquid crystal (display device 41, etc.) in the operating state is compared to the brightness of the liquid crystal (display device 41, etc.) in the power saving state.
The brightness may be lowered than that of .

FIG. 5-100 is a flowchart illustrating power saving mode processing. This power-saving mode process is a process for transitioning to a power-saving state (power-saving mode). For example, in the special figure normal process (Figure 5-22), when the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 and the number of reserved special figures 1 is is 0 (step A307; Y). In FIG. 5-22, illustration of the power saving mode process is omitted.

In the power saving mode process, the gaming control device 100 first determines whether or not the power saving state flag is saved (step A801). If the power saving state flag has not been saved (step A801; N), that is, if the power saving state (power saving mode) is not present, it is determined whether the safety device is in operation (step A802). For example, if "1" indicating that the safety device is in operation is saved in the safety device in operation flag area as the safety device in operation flag, it can be determined that the safety device is in operation (safety device Operating flag = 1
). If the safety device is in operation (step A802; Y), the power saving mode process ends. That is, the power saving state (power saving mode) does not occur during the operating state.

On the other hand, if the safety device is not in operation (step A802; N), the normal game process number is checked (step A803), and it is determined whether the normal game process is in progress (step A804). If the normal map processing is not in progress (step A804; N), the power saving mode processing is ended.
On the other hand, if the ordinary drawing is being processed (step A805; Y), it is checked whether the number of pending ordinary drawings is 0 (step A806). If the number of reserved ordinary drawings is not 0 (step A806; N)
In this case, end the power saving mode processing.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved ordinary cards is 0 (step A806; Y), information regarding the error state of the gaming machine 10 is acquired (step A807), and it is determined whether the gaming machine 10 is not in an error state. (Step A808). If the gaming machine 10 is in an error state (step A808
;N), the power saving mode process is ended.
On the other hand, if the gaming machine 10 is not in an error state (step A808; Y), the touch detection signal of the operating handle 24 is checked (step A809), and it is determined whether there is a change in the touch state (step A810). ). If there is a change in the touch state of the operating handle 24 (step A810; Y), the power saving mode process is ended.

On the other hand, if there is no change in the touch state of the operation handle 24 (step A810; N), a power saving start command is prepared (step A811), and a production command setting process is performed (
Step A812). As a result, a power saving start command is transmitted to the production control device 300.
Next, the power saving state flag is saved (step A813), and the power saving mode processing is ended. This causes a transition from a normal state that is neither a power saving state nor an operating state to a power saving state (power saving mode).

Note that the processes in steps A809 and A810 may be repeated multiple times (for example, for 10 minutes). Specifically, the gaming machine 10 is not in an error state (step A808; Y
), the process of steps A809 and A810 is performed a specified number of times, and if it continues to be determined that there is no change in the touch state of the operation handle 24 (step A810; N), the process moves to step A811, If there is a change in the touch state of the operation handle 24 before the number of executions of steps A809 and A810 reaches the specified number of times (step A810
;Y), the power saving mode process may be terminated.

Further, if the power saving state flag is saved (step A801; Y), that is, if the power saving state (power saving mode) is selected, the touch detection signal of the operation handle 24 is checked (step A814), and the touch detection signal is checked (step A814). Determine whether there is a change in the state (step A81
5). If there is no change in the touch state of the operation handle 24 (step A815; N), the power saving mode process is ended.

On the other hand, if there is a change in the touch state of the operation handle 24 (step A815; Y), a power saving cancellation command is prepared (step A816), and a production command setting process is performed (
Step A817). As a result, a power saving cancellation command is transmitted to the production control device 300.
Next, the power saving state flag is cleared (step A818), and the power saving mode processing is ended. This causes a transition from the power saving state (power saving mode) to a normal state which is neither a power saving state nor an operating state.

FIG. 5-101 is a flowchart illustrating the power saving function setting process. This power saving function setting process is a process for turning on/off the power saving function of the production control device 300, and is executed, for example, in the power saving control process (step S16) of the main process (FIG. 5-67) of the production control device 300. be done.
In the power saving function setting process, the production control device 300 first determines whether the power saving function ON flag is saved (step S401). If the power saving function ON flag has not been saved (step S401; N), that is, if the power saving function is off, it is determined whether an active command has been received (step S402).

When an operating command is received (step S402; Y), the power saving function ON flag is saved (step S403), and the power saving function corresponding to the operating state is turned on (step S4).
04), the power saving function setting process ends. As a result, the amount of power supplied to various production devices will be reduced.
This is the supply amount in the operating state (<supply amount in the power saving state).
On the other hand, if the operating command has not been received (step S402; N), it is determined whether a power saving start command has been received (step S405).

If the power saving start command has not been received (step S405; N), the power saving function setting process ends.
On the other hand, when the power saving start command is received (step S405; Y), the power saving function is turned on.
The flag is saved (step S406), the power saving function corresponding to the power saving state is turned on (step S407), and the power saving function setting process is ended. As a result, the amount of power supplied to various performance devices is the amount of power supplied in the power saving state (<the amount of power supplied in the normal state, neither in the power saving state nor in the operating state).
become.

Further, if the power saving function ON flag is saved (step S401; Y), that is, if the power saving function is on, it is determined whether a power saving cancel command has been received (step S408).
If the power saving cancel command has not been received (step S408; N), the power saving function setting process is ended.
On the other hand, if the power saving cancellation command is received (step S408; Y), the power saving function is turned on.
The flag is cleared (step S409), the power saving function is turned off (step S410), and the power saving function setting process is ended. As a result, the amount of power supplied to the various performance devices returns to the normal supply amount (the amount of power supplied in a normal state that is neither a power saving state nor an operating state).

As shown in Figure 5-100 (power saving mode processing), the power saving cancellation command can be sent only when the power saving state is in effect (when the power saving state flag is saved), and it cannot be sent during the operating state. . Therefore, when the power saving cancel command is received, the power saving function corresponding to the power saving state is in the on state, but the power saving function corresponding to the operating state is in the off state. Therefore, in step S410, the power saving function corresponding to the power saving state is turned off.
In this embodiment, the power saving state flag and the power saving function ON flag are cleared by a power outage (power cutoff), but the present invention is not limited to this.
Further, in this embodiment, the power saving function of the production control device 300 is turned off due to a power outage (power cutoff), but the present invention is not limited to this.

[effect]
The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that can execute a game, and has a game stopping means (safety control) that can generate a game-disabled state (game stop state, operating state) in which the game cannot be played when a predetermined condition is satisfied. (gaming control device 100)) and a display control means (production control device 300) capable of displaying a menu screen 93 including a plurality of items on the display device 41, and capable of displaying the menu screen 93 including a plurality of items before the game is disabled. The menu screen 93 and the menu screen 93 that can be displayed in the game-disabled state have the same plurality of items, and any one of the plurality of items can be displayed on the menu screen 93 that can be displayed before the game-disabled state occurs. Although it is selectable in , it is not selectable on the menu screen 93 that can be displayed in a game-disabled state.

For example, if there is an item that can be selected before the game is disabled, but cannot be selected when the game is disabled, the menu screen on which the item is displayed is displayed before the game is disabled. In order to display a menu screen in which the item is not displayed in the game-disabled state, it is necessary to create a menu screen for before the game-disabled state occurs and a menu screen for the game-disabled state.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if there is an item that is selectable before the game-disabled state occurs but is not selectable in the game-disabled state, the difference between before the game-disabled state and the game-disabled state is Since the same menu screen 93 is displayed for the listed items, there is no need to create a menu screen for before the game cannot be played and a menu screen for the game cannot be played, and development costs can be reduced. .
In addition, by deliberately showing items that cannot be selected in the game-disabled state on the menu screen 93 that can be displayed in the game-disabled state, it is possible to suggest to the player that the game is not in the game-disabled state. In particular, by making items for setting game effects (such as "customization" and "volume/light intensity") unselectable even though they are displayed, it becomes impossible to play, i.e., the game cannot be restarted. It is possible to suggest to the player that this is the case. Therefore, the menu screen 93 not only has the original function of presenting items to the player, but also has the function of suggesting to the player whether or not the game is disabled (play cannot be restarted).
In this way, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can display an effective menu screen 93 suitable for displaying in the game-disabled state while suppressing development costs.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that can execute a game, and has a game stopping means that can generate a game-disabled state (game stopped state, activated state) in which the game cannot be played when a predetermined condition is satisfied. (safety device (gaming control device 100)) and display control means (production control device 300) capable of controlling the display device 41, and the display control means responds to the occurrence of a game-disabled state by: It is possible to display a first notification image (operating movie 514) that notifies the occurrence of a game-disabled state, and then display a second notification image (in-operation display 513) that notifies the occurrence of a game-disabled state. In addition, the menu screen 93 can be displayed in response to the operation of the operation means (production button 25) by the player, and the operation of the operation means is disabled while the first notification image is displayed. Therefore, while the second notification image is being displayed, the operation of the operating means is valid.

Therefore, the menu screen 93 can be displayed while the second notification image is being displayed, but the menu screen 93 cannot be displayed while the first notification image is being displayed. Therefore, the visibility of the first notification image that is displayed first among the first notification image and the second notification image that notify the occurrence of the game-disabled state decreases (it becomes difficult to see because it is obstructed by the menu screen 93). Since this can be prevented, the occurrence of the game-disabled state can be effectively notified by the notification image.
Note that the first notification image is not limited to a movie (moving image), and may be a still image.
Further, when the safety device is activated, for example, a notification image may be displayed on the display device 41 or the like to notify that "the safety device was activated yesterday" on the next day.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that can execute a game, and has a game stopping means that can generate a game-disabled state (game stopped state, activated state) in which the game cannot be played when a predetermined condition is satisfied. (safety device (gaming control device 100)) and display control means (production control device 300) capable of displaying the menu screen 93 on the display device 41, and the display control means is configured to control the game while the menu screen 93 is displayed. If a disabled state occurs, the display of the menu screen 93 is forcibly terminated.

That is, if a game-disabled state occurs while the menu screen 93 is being displayed, the display of the menu screen 93 is forcibly terminated, so that the currently displayed menu screen 93 can be hidden at a timing not intended by the player. This can indicate to the player that a game-disabled state has occurred.
For example, when displaying a notification image that notifies the occurrence of a game-disabled state, the display of the menu screen 93 may be forcibly terminated, reducing the visibility of the notification image (because the menu screen 93 is obstructing the display). This makes it possible to effectively notify the occurrence of a game-disabled state using the notification image.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the display control means is controlled by the operation means (
A menu screen 93 is displayed in response to the operation of the production button 25), and when the operating means is operated after the display of the menu screen 93 is forcibly terminated, the menu screen 93 is redisplayed.

Therefore, the player can call up the menu screen 93 even during the game stop state. For example, if you can use the smartphone-linked service by calling up the menu screen 93, you can use the smartphone-linked service even when the game is stopped.
Since game history information (history of game results, history of game results, etc.) can be stored in an external server, the interest in the game is improved.
Note that the menu screen 93 may be redisplayed even if there is no operation of the operating means after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display of the menu screen 93 was forcibly terminated.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the menu screen 93 displayed before the game-disabled state occurs and the menu screen 93 displayed after the game-disabled state occur are the same screen, but the display mode is are different.
Therefore, depending on the display mode of the menu screen 93, it is possible to suggest to the player or the like whether the situation is before the game-disabled state occurs or after the game-disabled state occurs.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that can execute a game, and has a game stopping means that can generate a game-disabled state (game stopped state, activated state) in which the game cannot be played when a predetermined condition is satisfied. (safety device (gaming control device 100)) and a notification means (display device 41) capable of notifying the occurrence of a game-disabled state. The notification mode of the notification means differs depending on when the problem occurs and when the problem is recovered.

Therefore, depending on the notification mode of the notification means, it is possible to suggest to the player etc. whether the game is disabled or the power is restored after a power failure occurs during the gaming disabled state.
In the present embodiment, the occurrence of the game-disabled state is notified in different notification modes by displaying on the display device 41, but the present invention is not limited to this. The occurrence of the unavailable state may be notified. That is, the notification means capable of notifying the occurrence of the game-disabled state is not limited to the display device 41, and may be any other production device other than the display device 41. Further, the notification means may be one effect device or a plurality of effect devices.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that can execute a game, and has a game stopping means that can generate a game-disabled state (game stopped state, activated state) in which the game cannot be played when a predetermined condition is satisfied. (safety device (gaming control device 100)) and a movable performance device (movable accessory (movable body, board performance device 44, frame performance device, etc.)) that performs a predetermined performance operation, and the movable performance device includes:
An initial operation is performed when the power is turned on, and if a power outage occurs and the power is turned on while the game is disabled, the initial operation is exceptionally not performed.

Power is turned on due to a power outage while gaming is not possible (power is turned on without clearing RAM)
In this case, the game is not allowed to play even after the power is turned on, and in order to cancel the game not allowed state, it is necessary to turn on the power again (power on with clearing the RAM). Since the initial operation of the movable performance device is performed when the power is turned on again, there will be no inconvenience even if the initial operation of the movable performance device is omitted when the power is turned on after a power outage occurs while the game is disabled. . In addition, by omitting the initial operation of the movable performance device when a power outage occurs and the power is turned on while the game is disabled, it is possible to immediately perform the process to release the game disabled state, making it easier to use. is good.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine that can execute a game, and has a game stopping means that can generate a game-disabled state (game stopped state, activated state) in which the game cannot be played when a predetermined condition is satisfied. (Safety device (gaming control device 100)), it is possible to generate a power saving state (power saving mode), and the power consumption during the occurrence of the game disabled state is lower than the power consumption during the occurrence of the power saving state.
Specifically, it is possible to generate a power saving state in which the power supplied to the performance devices (display device 41, speakers 19a, 19b, decorative devices, movable accessories, etc.) is reduced, and while the game is disabled,
The power supplied to the performance device is reduced, and the power consumption in the game-disabled state is lower than the power consumption in the power-saving state.

Therefore, power can be saved not only during the power saving state but also during the gaming disabled state.
Further, since the power consumption is different between the game-disabled state and the power-saving state, the aspect of the gaming machine 10 as a whole (for example, the light emitting mode) is different between the game-disabled state and the power-saving state. Therefore, the gaming machine 10
Depending on the overall aspect, it is possible to suggest to the player etc. whether the game is in a non-playable state or a power saving state.
In addition, since power consumption is lower in the game-disabled state than in the power-saving state, it gives the impression that the gaming machine 10 in the game-disabled state is ``dark'' to those who look at it, making it obvious that the game machine 10 is in the game-disabled state at a glance. This can effectively prevent new players (customers) from using the gaming machine 10.

The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is capable of executing a game, and is capable of generating a game-disabled state (game stop state, game prohibited state) in which the game cannot be executed when a predetermined condition (operating condition) is satisfied. (for example, a safety device), and a notification means (for example, a game control device 100, a presentation control device 300,
display device 41 etc.).

In such a gaming machine 10, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the number of differential balls or the number of safe balls is large, it is possible to disable the game and take appropriate measures against fraud. By suppressing this, it may be possible to prevent players from becoming absorbed in the game. Moreover, it is possible to notify an error even in a game-disabled state in which a game cannot be executed, so that appropriate fraud countermeasures can be taken while preventing any disadvantage or inconvenience to players, hall personnel, etc.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine that can execute games under a predetermined condition (
A game stop means (e.g., a safety device) that can generate a game-disabled state (game stop state, game-prohibited state) in which the game cannot be played due to the establishment of operating conditions), and a notice display (e.g. Display control means (for example, production control device 300) capable of displaying an operation notice display 511) on a display means (for example, display device 41). The display control means changes the display mode of the preview display depending on the gaming state (for example, while waiting for a customer, during a variable display).

In such a gaming machine 10, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when the number of differential balls or the number of safe balls is large, it is possible to take appropriate countermeasures against fraud by disabling the game, and also to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game. There is a possibility that it can be done. A notice display (for example, an operation notice display 511) notifies the player in advance of the possibility that he or she may not be able to play the game, urges the player to end the game, and prevents the player from being unintentionally disadvantaged. can. Further, the preview display can give surprise to those committing fraud and encourage them to stop the fraud. Further, by changing the display mode of the preview display depending on the gaming state (for example, waiting for a customer, changing display), the preview display can be effectively displayed.

The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment also includes a payout control means (for example, a payout control device 200) capable of paying out game media, and the number of game media (game balls) paid out in a predetermined period or the number of game media (game balls) paid out in a predetermined period. A first counting means (for example, difference ball confirmation processing of the game control device 100) capable of counting the number of payouts (for example, the total number of prize balls for a predetermined period), which is the number of game media determined to be played. The game machine 10 also includes a second counting means (for example, a difference ball confirmation process of the game control device 100) capable of counting the number of game media used in a predetermined period (for example, the number of balls fired or the number of balls ejected). and an out ball detection switch 74). Furthermore, the gaming machine 10 includes a calculation means (for example, difference ball confirmation processing of the game control device 100) that can calculate a calculation value (for example, a safety device counter value or a difference number of balls) based on the number of payouts and the number of used balls. Be prepared. When the calculated value reaches the standard value (e.g. counter standard value, difference ball standard value), the game stopping means (such as a safety device) stops under a predetermined condition (
It is possible to generate a game-disabled state if the operating conditions) are satisfied. The display control means (for example, the performance control device 300) displays a predetermined display (for example, the in-operation display 513) indicating that the game is not allowed.
can be displayed on the display means.

In such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to generate a game-disabled state based on a calculation value based on the number of game media paid out and the number of game media used (for example, the number of balls fired or the number of balls ejected), and the game is disabled. Since it is possible to display a predetermined display (for example, the in-operation display 513) indicating the status, fraud countermeasures can be effectively taken, and it is also possible to effectively prevent players from becoming addicted to the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the calculated value (for example, the safety device counter value or the number of difference balls) reaches a predetermined value (notice start value) smaller than the reference value, the display control means displays the notice. (For example, an operation notice display 511) can be displayed on the display means. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify in advance that the game will be disabled.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the calculated value (for example, the safety device counter value or the number of differential balls) reaches the reference value but the predetermined condition (operating condition) is not satisfied, the display control means (for example, the effect The control device 300) can display on the display means a display (for example, an operation warning display 512) that is different from a predetermined display (for example, an in-operation display 513) and a notice display (for example, an operation notice display 511). Therefore, it is possible to notify the player in advance that the game will be stopped after a predetermined condition is met (for example, after the completion of a small win or a jackpot), thereby warning the player that he or she will be disadvantaged.

<Sixth embodiment>
The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 6-1 to 6-41. Note that the configurations other than those described below may be the same as those in the first to fifth embodiments. Furthermore, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for components that perform the same functions as those in the first to fifth embodiments.

<First embodiment>
FIG. 6-1 is a front view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, and FIG. 6-2 is a front perspective view of the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIGS. 6-1 and 6-2, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be rotatable in opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 6-3) is stored in a storage section (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 including a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

A display board 350 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is provided on the glass frame 15 at a position behind the cover glass 14. The display board 350 can see through the game board 30 and can display a predetermined display. Although the game machine of this embodiment is configured with a light guide plate on which an image appears by introducing light from the side edge, it may also be configured with a transparent liquid crystal display device or an EL display device.
When the display board 350 is not displaying a predetermined display, it is transparent and does not obstruct the visibility of the game board 30 at the rear. Then, when a predetermined display is displayed on the display board 350,
The visibility of the rear game board 30 is reduced in the predetermined display portion. In this state, the rear game board 30 may be visible through the predetermined display, or the rear game board 30 may be invisible due to the predetermined display.

At the top of the glass frame 15, a model name display section 16 for displaying the model name of the gaming machine 10, etc. is provided.
In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration, presentation, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are set in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)) and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15. Furthermore, when an abnormality occurs, the content of the abnormality is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a lamp for reporting an abnormality in dispensing may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the bottom of the glass frame 15, there is an upper tray (storage tray) 21 for supplying game balls to a batted ball firing device (not shown), and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. An upper plate ball outlet 22 and the like are provided for outflow. Further, on the upper edge of the upper plate 21, there is provided a production button 25 that includes a production button switch 25a (see FIG. 6-5) for receiving a press operation input from a player. The production button 25 also has a built-in drive source that vibrates the production button 25. That is, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment has a vibration function that makes a predetermined notification by vibrating the performance button 25. Note that the production button 25 can be converted from the normal state (the state shown in FIGS. 6-1 and 6-2) to the protruding state (the state in which the top surface (pressing surface) of the production button 25 is higher than in the normal state). It may be configured as follows.

At the lower part of the front frame 12, there are provided a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls put out when the upper tray 21 is full, a handle 24 of a batted ball firing device, and the like. Furthermore, front frame 1
A keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15.

Further, on the right side of the production button 25, there is a lending button (ball lending button) 27a that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a lending button 27a for ejecting a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A return button (ejection button) 27b that is operated to operate the balance, a balance display device (balance display section) 27c that displays the balance of the prepaid card, and an upper tray operation lever that is operated to cause the game balls in the upper tray 21 to flow down to the lower tray 23. 27d, a mobile terminal holder 28 for placing a mobile terminal such as a smartphone owned by a player is provided. Further, to the left of the production button 25, a volume adjustment button 27e, a cross key 29, etc. are provided.
In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 24, the ball firing device fires game balls supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. . In addition, when the player operates the production button 25 or the cross key 29, the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 6-3). You can perform performances, etc.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be explained using FIG. 6-3. FIG. 6-3 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 6-3, the game board 30 includes a flat game board body that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body is made of wood or synthetic resin, and the front side of the game board body is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and outer peripheral walls (guide rails) 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. A gaming area 32 is provided. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball firing device into a game area 32 surrounded by an outer peripheral wall 31. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the direction of the game balls flowing down, and the fired game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

At approximately the center of the game area 32, a center case 40 is attached that forms a window that serves as a display area for a variable display game. A display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information is arranged behind a window portion formed in the center case 40.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured of a device having a display screen, such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode ray tube). The area on the display screen where images can be displayed (display area) can display still images and videos as performance images, such as characters that produce multiple identification information (special symbols) or a special symbol variation display game. Information regarding the game, such as a background image that enhances the presentation effect, is displayed. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special symbol variable display game corresponding to the special symbol variable display game is played. Furthermore, images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

The center case 40 includes a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 into the center case 40, and a warp flow path forming member 614 that forms a warp flow path for guiding game balls flowing down the game area 32 into the center case 40, and a warp flow path forming member 614 that allows the game balls that have passed through the warp flow path to roll. A possible stage section 620 is provided. Since the stage part 620 of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting prize opening 36, the game balls rolling on the stage part 620 can easily win in the starting winning opening 36.
Further, the upper and lower parts of the center case 40 are provided with a board presentation device 44 that performs a game presentation by operating. The lower presentation device 44a provided at the lower part of the center case 40 is operable between the lower part of the center case 40 and a position closer to the center of the display device 41 than this position.
The upper presentation device 44b provided at the upper part of the center case 40 is operable between the upper position of the center case 40 and a position closer to the center of the display device 41 than this position. Moreover, the above-mentioned presentation device 44b includes a rotating operating member 44c imitating a propeller.
It is possible to perform effects also by the movement of the movement member 44c.
That is, the lower presentation device 44a constitutes a first movable accessory having an operable first movable member,
The upper performance device 44b constitutes a second movable accessory having a second movable member that can be operated.

In the gaming area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (common symbol starting gate) 34 is provided. A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 6-4) is provided inside the regular figure starting gate 34 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the regular figure starting gate 34. When the game ball hit into the game area 32 passes through the regular figure starting gate 34, the regular figure fluctuation display game is executed.

Three general winning holes 35 are arranged in the gaming area 32 on the lower left of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged in the gaming area 32 on the right side of the center case 40. The winning of game balls into these general winning holes 35 is detected by the winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 6-4) provided in the general winning hole 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a starting prize opening 36 (first starting prize area) is provided which provides a starting condition for the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game). The game ball that has won the starting prize opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 6-4).

On the right side of the center case 40, a normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area) is provided that provides starting conditions for the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game). The winning game ball in the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 6-4).
The normal variable prize winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b, and this movable member 37b normally maintains a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which game balls cannot enter. When the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a predetermined result, the general variable prize winning device is operated in an inverted “C” shape by the general electric solenoid 37c (see Fig. 6-4) as a driving device. 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which game balls can easily flow into the player.
It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 allows the game ball to win even when the movable member 37b is in the closed state, and may be in a state where it is more difficult to win the game ball in the closed state than in the open state.

In the lower right gaming area 32 of the center case 40, there is provided a special variable prize winning device (big prize opening) 38 that can be converted into a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variable display game. There is. The special variable prize winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening/closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, and when opened, game balls can flow into the upper prize winning opening. Convert to state. The special variable winning device 38 converts the grand prize opening from a closed state to an open state depending on the result of the special figure variable display game, and facilitates the flow of game balls into the grand prize opening, thereby providing a reward to the player. A predetermined gaming value (prize ball) is given. A game ball that has won a prize in the special variable winning device 38 is detected by a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 6-4).

Inside the grand prize opening (winning area), there is a specific area where game balls can flow in, and a lever solenoid 38f (Figure 6-4 A lever member is provided which is actuated by (see). A specific area switch 38d (see Figure 6-4) that can detect the inflow of game balls is provided in the specific area, and based on the detection of game balls by the specific area switch 38d, an advantageous area for the player is displayed. A state occurs (in this embodiment, a special game state occurs). The game balls that have flowed into the specific area are discharged to the outside of the special variable prize winning device 38.

Furthermore, inside the big prize opening, there is provided a residual ball discharge port switch 38e (see FIG. 6-4) that detects game balls that are discharged to the outside of the special variable prize winning device 38 without flowing into a specific area. There is. The number of game balls detected by the big winning hole switch 38a provided inside the big winning hole (the number of game balls flowing into the big winning hole) and the game detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball outlet switch 38e By matching the number of balls (the number of game balls ejected from the grand prize opening), it can be confirmed that all the game balls in the upper prize winning hole have been ejected, and basically until this confirmation is completed, new The grand prize opening will no longer be opened.

In the gaming area 32 below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a is provided for collecting game balls that do not win the winning opening or the like. In addition, outside the gaming area 32, the gaming board main body 80
In the lower right corner of is the special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game)
Also provided is a collective display device 50 that executes a general figure fluctuation display game.

The batch display device 50 is a special figure 1 display device (first special figure variation display section) for the special figure 1 variation display game.
51 and special figure 2 variable display special figure 2 display device for the game (second special figure variable display section) 52, and special figure 1
It is provided with a special figure 1 pending display 53 for informing the starting memory number of the variable display game and a special figure 2 pending display 54 for informing the starting memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game.

The collective display device 50 also includes a round display section 55 that displays the number of rounds at the time of a jackpot (the number of times the special variable winning device 38 is opened and closed), and a gaming state display section 5 that displays the gaming state of the gaming machine 10.
6. This game state display section 56 includes a first game state display section 56a that informs the player of the way of hitting that is advantageous to the player (the way of hitting that corresponds to the game state) between hitting to the left (normal hitting) and hitting to the right.
, a second gaming state display section 56b that notifies that the time saving state is in effect (when the variable time saving function is activated).
A third gaming state display section 56c is provided to notify that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the special symbol probability is always constant, the third gaming state display section 56c is not used.
Furthermore, the collective display device 50 includes a regular figure display 57 for the regular figure fluctuation display game, and a regular figure pending display 58 for informing the starting memory number of the regular figure fluctuation display game.

FIG. 6-4 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, which is a main control device (main board) that centrally controls the game, and has a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110, the input section 120, and the output section 130. .

The CPU section 110 is a gaming microcomputer (CP) called an amusement chip (IC).
U) 111, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that includes an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator and generates a reference clock for a CPU operating clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with DC32V, DC12V, and DC5 generated by the power supply device 400.
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as V, is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC-DC generator that generates a DC voltage of 32V from a 24V AC power source.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a converter or a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from a DC32V voltage, and a gaming microcomputer 1.
a backup power supply section 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM of 11 in the event of a power outage;
It has a power outage monitoring circuit and includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power outage monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the gaming control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power outage.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the gaming control device 100, but the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are configured on a separate board or integrated with the gaming control device 100, that is, the main It may also be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when changing models, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board separate from the power supply device 400 or the main board, as in this embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to remove it from replacement and reduce costs.

The backup power supply section 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is provided by the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data stored in the RAM is maintained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. That is, the gaming control device 100 can store and retain information regarding the game even if a power outage occurs and the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and after the power is restored, the game can be restarted based on the stored information. It serves as a game information storage and holding means.
The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and when it drops to 17V or less, detects the occurrence of a power outage, changes the power outage monitoring signal, and generates a reset signal after a predetermined time. Output. Also, when the power is turned on or when a power failure is recovered, a reset signal is output after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the gaming control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. will be held. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and an RA that can be read and written at any time.
M (random access memory) 111C is provided.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores unchanging information for game control (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.), and the RAM 111C serves as a work area for the CPU 111A and a storage area for various signals and random numbers during game control. used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the performance, whether or not a ready-to-win state occurs, etc. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a loss fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table that is selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second-half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as a second-half fluctuation group table and second-half fluctuation pattern selection table), and tables for determining the fluctuation pattern before reaching the reach state. It includes tables (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining first half variation patterns, which are patterns.

Here, reach (ready-to-reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays multiple display results at different times, and the multiple display results are predetermined. A gaming state in which the gaming state is advantageous to the player when a special result mode occurs (special gaming state)
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed,
This is a display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device has progressed to the stage before the display results are derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode have not been met. This refers to the display mode that does not exist. For example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result aspect is complete (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Furthermore, the reach state is the display state at the point when the display control of the display device has progressed to the stage before the display results are derived and displayed, and is determined before the display results are derived and displayed. A display state in which at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, a decorative special figure variable display game displayed on a display device in response to a special figure variable display game may vary a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the variable display is to be stopped in the left, right, and middle order to display the result mode, the left and right variable display areas will display a state where the conditions for the special result mode are met (for example, The state in which the variable display stops with the same identification information is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas meet the conditions for special result mode (for example, the same The state of identification information,
However, it is also possible to make the remaining variable display area (excluding the special result mode) into a ready-to-reach state, and to display the remaining variable display area in a variable manner from this ready-to-reach state.

This reach state includes multiple reach performances, and the reach performances with different possibilities of deriving special results (different expected values) include normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 Reach) and Premier Reach are set. The expected values are: No reach < Normal reach < Special 1 reach < Special 2 reach < Special 3 reach <
The prices increase in order of premier reach. Moreover, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in the special symbol variable display game (when it becomes a jackpot). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when the result is a loss). Therefore, a state in which a ready-to-win state occurs is a state in which there is a higher possibility of a jackpot than in a case in which a ready-to-reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the production control device 300, generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and display device, and operates the game machine. Controls the entire 10. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining the hit in the special pattern fluctuation display game, a special pattern pattern random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a fluctuation pattern ( Random number generation to generate variable pattern random numbers to determine the execution time of variable display games in various reach and non-reach variable displays), random number to generate winning random numbers to determine hits in general figure variable display games, etc. circuit, and a clock generator that generates a clock that provides a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111A uses the ROM 111B in processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game.
Any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the memory is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A calculates the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game (big hit, small hit, or miss), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state (low probability state or high probability state), Based on the starting memory number and the like, one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. Here, CPU111A
constitutes fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

The payout control device 200 is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit according to the prize ball payout command (command and data) from the game control device 100 to release the prize balls. Performs control for dispensing. Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit to pay out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, The winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, the big winning opening switch 38a in the special variable winning device 38, the gate switch 34a in the normal figure starting gate 34, the specific area switch 38d arranged in the special variable winning device 38 and remaining bulb outlet switch 38
e. It is connected to an out ball detection switch 32a that detects all the game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been fired into the game area 32 and finished the game, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 11V. An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided which inputs a negative logic signal such as 7V and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V to 5V. Proximity I
/F121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so the sensor or proximity switch lead wires may be improperly shorted, the sensor or switch may be removed from the connector, or the lead wires may be cut and left floating. It is configured to be able to detect such abnormal conditions and output an abnormality detection signal.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, third input port 124, or fourth input port 126, and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the big winning port switch 38a, and the gate switch 34a are input to the second input port 123. . Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, detection signals from the specific area switch 38d, remaining ball outlet switch 38e, and out ball detection switch 32a are input to the fourth input port 126. Also, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121,
A detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality in a sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 .

The third input port 124 also includes a detection signal from a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 etc. of the gaming machine 10, a detection signal from a vibration sensor 65 for detecting vibrations of the gaming machine 10,
A detection signal from a glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the gaming machine 10 and a detection signal from a main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 etc. of the gaming machine 10 are also input. It has become so.

Further, the third input port 124 receives a signal from the setting key switch 152 that detects the operation of the setting key operation section. The setting key operation section has a keyhole into which the setting key is inserted.
The configuration is such that the corresponding setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position (predetermined state) only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor that can detect when it is turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is turned to the second position, and turns on when it is not turned to the second position. In some cases, it is turned off.

The RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation section are operation sections for selecting from a plurality of probability setting values to which probability values of special results in the special figure fluctuation display game are assigned, and these operation sections are operated. By doing this, you can select a probability setting value that is assigned a probability value that will result in a special result in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value will be used in the game. There is. Here, six probability setting values, "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", are prepared.

When selecting the probability setting value, turn the setting key on the setting key operation section to the second position and press R.
By turning on the power of the gaming machine while operating (pressing) the AM initialization switch 112, the probability setting value change mode is enabled in which the probability setting value can be changed. You can change the probability setting value by pressing (press). The selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153 for displaying the calculated base value and accessory ratio. Specifically, the performance display device 153 displays information on the probability setting value while performing operations related to the probability setting value (while in the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode); The calculated base value and accessory ratio are now displayed.

In addition, the setting key of the setting key operation section is turned to the second position (RAM initialization switch 11
By turning on the power of the gaming machine in step 2 (no operation), the currently selected probability setting value is displayed on the performance display device 153, but the probability setting value confirmation mode is entered in which the probability setting value cannot be changed. Note that the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key operation section cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 is in an open state.
The performance display device 153 is a 7-segment type display, and is adapted to display the probability setting value as a number from 1 to 6. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode that allows the probability setting value to be recognized may be used. In addition, other types of display devices such as liquid crystal display devices may be used,
The probability setting value may be indicated by the lighting mode, emitted light color, etc. of one or more LEDs.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the outputs to the second input port 123 and the outputs to the fourth input port 126 (excluding the detection signal of the out-ball detection switch 32a) are connected to the main board 100.
The light is also supplied from the relay board 70 to a test firing test device (not shown). Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37
The detection signal a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12V is supplied to the proximity I/F 121 from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

The data held by the second input port 123 is transmitted to the enable signal CE by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122, which will be described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave fraud signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided in the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave), a payout busy signal (a signal output from the payout control device A signal indicating whether or not 200 is in a state where it can accept commands), a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (full)), a touch switch signal (based on the input of a touch switch provided on the handle 24) A first input port 122 is provided for taking in signals (signals) and supplying them to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has the function of removing noise from.
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In other words, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
The signal is input directly to the reset terminal provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output section 130. Furthermore, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the sight-fire test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the sight-fire test device is turned off. It is configured as follows. Further, the configuration may be such that the reset signal RESET can be output to the sight test equipment via the relay board 70. Note that the reset signal RESET is applied to each port 122, 123,
124 and 126 are not supplied. The data set in each port of the output section 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent system malfunction. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the performance control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. Note that this is one-way communication in which signals cannot be input from the production control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to a data bus 140 and sends data to inform a test shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown) of special symbol information of a variable display game, a signal indicating a probability state of a jackpot, etc. via a relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced and sold product) installed in a game parlor. Note that the detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a starting port switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor 61, panel radio sensor 62, and vibration sensor 65 that cannot be directly supplied to the test firing test device are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, such as the The signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test device via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the machine cannot control the game. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the sight test equipment, and a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal without going through the buffer. There is. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test device.

Further, the output section 130 is provided with a second output port 134 connected to the data bus 140. The second output port 134 is used to open the special variable winning device 38, the large winning hole solenoid (big winning hole solenoid 1) 38b, the lever solenoid 38f, which operates the lever member in the special variable winning device 38, and the normal variable winning device 37. Opening general electric solenoid 37
This is a port for outputting the operation data of c and the display data of the performance display device 153 that displays the currently selected probability setting value.
Further, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting on/off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50; Turn on/off the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting off data.

The output unit 130 also outputs information regarding the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 7.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for output to 1. The external information terminal board 71 is equipped with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device installed in a game parlor (an information collection terminal, a game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.), and can transmit information regarding the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 includes a first driver ( Drive circuit) 138a, third output port 1
A second driver 138b outputs an on/off driving signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 outputted from the fourth output port 136, and a collective display device 5 outputted from the fourth output port 136.
A third driver 138c outputs an on/off drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of 0.
, a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71, and a display data signal of the performance display device 153 output from the second output port 134. a fifth driver 138e that receives the signal, generates a drive signal, and outputs the drive signal.
is provided. Note that data is transmitted from the second output port 134 to the fifth driver 138e by serial communication.

The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that it can drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. The fifth driver 138e has a power supply voltage of D to be able to drive the performance display device 153 that operates at 5V.
C5V is supplied from power supply device 400.
Further, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50 includes DC1
2V is supplied. The third driver 138c that drives the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to display data with a current, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal via the segment line, thereby achieving a dynamic drive system. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are turned on.
The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V.
In addition, the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the gaming control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. Photo coupler 13
Reference numeral 9 is configured to enable mutual communication between the gaming microcomputer 111 and the inspection device 500 so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication. In addition, since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 like a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, 124, and 126 are not provided. do not have.

Note that, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36,
The starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, the big winning opening switch 38a, and the gate switch 34a in the normal variable winning device 37 are equipped with magnetic detection coils to detect the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when metal comes close to the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (
(hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 etc. of the gaming machine 10 and the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 etc. are microswitches having mechanical contacts. can be used.

Next, the configuration of the production control device 300 will be explained using FIG. 6-5.
The performance control device 300 includes a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 made of an amusement chip (IC) like the gaming microcomputer 111, and a main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. It is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 that controls the output of sound to reproduce various melodies, sound effects, etc. from the speakers 19a and 19b.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
A program ROM 321 consisting of ROM (Programmable Read Only Memory), a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and an Fe memory that can retain memory contents even when power is not supplied during a power outage.
The RAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, time, etc.). Note that a RAM providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the performance, and
It executes processes such as instructing the content of the output video to the DP 312, instructing the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lighting decorative lamps, controlling the drive of motors and solenoids, and managing performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 that stores character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read out from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYN is sent from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311 for synchronizing the image on the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30.
C. A synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
The main control microcomputer 311 receives interrupt signals INT0 to INT0 to notify processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait signal to indicate that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. Signals such as WAIT are also input.

The production control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 using the LVDS (low amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the audio source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. In addition, an interrupt signal INT is sent from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
is now entered. The production control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is outputted from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the production control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives commands transmitted from the game control device 100. Via this command I/F 331, a production control command signal (production command ). Gaming microcomputer 111 of gaming control device 100
operates at DC5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the production control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, so the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

The production control device 300 also includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 including the display board 350) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided therein, is provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). The board presentation device 44 (
For example, a board performance movable body control circuit 334 is provided that drives and controls a movable accessory that enhances the performance effect in cooperation with the performance display on the display device 41. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340. Note that even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device equipped with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates a device for effect), and a frame effect movable body control circuit is provided to drive and control the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a production button switch 25a built in the production button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, a cross key 29 provided in the glass frame 15, and an initial position of the motor in the board production device 44. Performance accessory switch 47 (performance motor switch) that detects etc.
A function that detects the on/off state of and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a function that detects the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the production control device 300 and sends a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311. A switch input circuit 336 having the function of inputting is provided.

The normal power supply section 410 of the power supply device 400 is the production control device 300 having the above configuration.
In order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by it, 32V DC to drive the motor and solenoids, a display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, 12V DC to drive the motor and LEDs, DC5 which becomes the power supply voltage of command I/F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Furthermore, as the main control microcomputer 311, 3.3V or 1.2V
When using an LSI that operates at low voltage such as
The production control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating 1.2V and 1.2V. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. In addition, in the form of output from the main control microcomputer 311, VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), sound source LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the production control device 300 includes a cooling FA that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10.
When N45 is connected and the production control device 300 is powered on, the cooling FAN 45 is driven.

In the following description, if the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they will simply be referred to as the special figure variable display game. In addition, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as the decorative special figure variable display game. In addition, if you do not distinguish between a jackpot (first special result) and a small hit (second special result), simply hit (special result).
It is called. In addition, when the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a jackpot, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small winning, are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as special gaming states.

Note that a jackpot is a special result (first special result) that involves the operation of a conditional device, and a small hit is a special result (second special result) that does not involve the operation of a conditional device. The condition device is activated when a jackpot occurs in the special symbol fluctuation display game (stop display of the jackpot symbol).When the condition device is activated, for example, a jackpot condition occurs and a special electric accessory is activated. Variable winning device 38
A specific flag is set for continuously operating the accessory (meaning that the accessory continuous operating device is activated). When the conditional device is not activated, it means that the aforementioned flag is not set, as in the case of winning a small lottery, for example. Note that the "condition device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or may be a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Also,
"Condition device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for the continuous operation of electric accessories, and it has the same meaning in this specification. It is used as a term with

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by firing game balls (pachinko balls) from a ball launcher toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing its rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, and other direction changing members placed at various locations within the game area 32, and passes through the game starting gate 34 and the general prize opening 35. , the starting prize opening 36, the normal variable winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 38, or flowing into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and being discharged from the gaming area 32. Then, when game balls win in the general winning hole 35, starting winning hole 36, normal variable winning device 37, or special variable winning device 38, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of winning hole that won is distributed to the payout control device 200 ( (see FIG. 6-4), the liquid is discharged onto the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player adjusts the firing force and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left-handed hitting), so that the player can enter the starting prize opening 36 or the left side of the starting winning opening 36. You can aim to win in the general winning opening 35 provided, and by firing the game ball into the right side gaming area (so-called right-handed hitting), you can enter the regular winning gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, and the special variable winning device 38. , it is possible to aim for a prize in the general prize opening 35.

A gate switch 34a consisting of a non-contact switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general figure starting gate 34 is provided in the normal figure starting gate 34, and
When the game ball hit inside passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal pattern starting gate 34, the number of normal pattern starting memory is set to the upper limit number (for example, 4 balls). ), add the number of normal figures starting memory (+1
) and store one general pattern start memory in the RAM 111C. The number of memorized numbers of starting prizes for common symbols is displayed on the common symbol pending display 58 of the collective display device 50. In addition, the normal figure starting memory stores a random value for determining a hit (random hit value) for determining the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a. It is supposed to be done.

Then, if there is a normal pattern start memory and the normal pattern fluctuation display game can be started, that is, the normal pattern fluctuation display game is not being executed, and the normal pattern fluctuation display game wins and the normal pattern fluctuation winning device 37 is changed to the open state. If it is not in a winning state, the random number value for hit determination stored in the first stored normal pattern starting memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine whether the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a hit or a miss. Then, a process is performed to start the general figure fluctuation display game. When this random value for determining a hit matches the determination value, the general pattern fluctuation display game becomes a win and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

In addition, the game control device 100 presets a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns on the general pattern display 57 provided in the collective display device 50 over a predetermined variable time as a process for executing the normal pattern fluctuation display game. After performing a display during normal pattern fluctuation that is repeatedly displayed in the given order, a process is performed to display a normal pattern fluctuation display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed.
Note that the ordinary figure display 57 is constituted by the display device 41, and the ordinary identification information includes, for example, numbers, symbols,
It is also possible to use a character pattern or the like, and after displaying it in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, the display may be stopped and the result displayed.

When the result of the ordinary figure fluctuation display game is a win, the ordinary figure display 57 stops displaying a lighting pattern that is a special result mode, and the ordinary electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member of the ordinary variable prize winning device 37 is activated. Control is performed to open for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1648 ms). That is,
The game control device 100 constitutes conversion control execution means that performs conversion control of the conversion member (movable member). In addition, when the result of the ordinary figure fluctuation display game is a loss, control is performed to display a lighting pattern that corresponds to the result of a loss on the ordinary figure display 57.

In addition, the winning balls into the starting winning hole 36 and the winning balls into the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside, respectively.
The CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 stores the first starting memory, which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory), based on winnings in the starting winning hole 36, to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4
A predetermined upper limit number (for example, 1 piece) is stored in a second starting memory which is a starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on winnings to the normal variable winning device 37. Based on the winnings in the starting winning hole 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, jackpot random numbers, special symbol random numbers, and each fluctuating pattern random number are extracted as starting memory information, respectively. The random number value is stored in the RAM 111C as a first starting memory and a second starting memory. The stored number of starting memories is displayed on the special drawing 1 pending display 53 and special drawing 2 pending display 54 for informing the number of starting winnings of the batch display device 50, as well as on the display device 41 of the center case 40. It is also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 performs the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variable display device) based on the first starting memory, and performs the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 2 display 52 (first variable display device) based on the second starting memory. A special figure 2 variable display game is played on the second variable display device). When both the first starting memory and the second starting memory are stored, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game.

That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 controls the special figure 1 variable display game ( In addition to controlling the execution of the first special figure variation display game), the special figure 2 variation is performed based on the second starting memory stored in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37 (second starting winning area). It serves as an execution control means for controlling the execution of the display game (second special figure variation display game). Then, in a state where the first starting memory and the second starting memory are stored, the execution control means is configured to change the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory from the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first starting memory. is also configured to be executed with priority.

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing a variable display, a predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a jackpot, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes the special result mode (jackpot result mode) corresponding to the first special result. This results in a jackpot, resulting in a first special gaming state (so-called jackpot state).
In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 is a special result mode (small hit result mode) corresponding to the second special result. This results in a small win, resulting in a second special game state (so-called small win state). In other words, special map 1
The display device 51 constitutes a first variable display means capable of displaying a first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on winning of a game ball to the starting winning hole 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 constitutes a second variable display means capable of displaying a second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on winning of game balls to the normal variable winning device 37.

In addition, the game control device (game control means) 100 is in a jackpot game state (first special game state).
After the end of the game, control is performed to generate a gaming state (specific gaming state) in which the player can proceed with the game in a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (high probability of winning, presence of public electricity support). It is possible to do so. That is, the game control device (game control means) 100 constitutes a specific game state generation means.

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the display device 41
A decorative special figure variable display game is executed in which a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner. The decorative special figure 1 variable display game on the display device 41 includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game that corresponds to the special figure 1 variable display game, and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game that corresponds to the special figure 2 variable display game. be. Then, a variable display is performed as the corresponding special figure variable display game changes, and a display corresponding to the result is performed as the result mode in the corresponding special figure variable display game is derived.

That is, the display device 41 plays an ornamental variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) in which the ornament identification information is variably displayed in response to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The present invention serves as a decorative variable display means capable of displaying a decorative special figure variable display game. Note that separate display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. In addition, gaming machine 1
The special figure fluctuation display game may be executed only with the display device 41 without providing the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

FIG. 6-6 shows an example of the distribution rate in this embodiment.
FIG. 6-6(a) is an example of the distribution rate of the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 6-6(a), there are four types of results of the special figure fluctuation display game: jackpot, small hit, support hit, and loss. In this embodiment, the distribution rate of the jackpot is common between the special chart 1 and the special chart 2, but it may be different between the special chart 1 and the special chart 2. In addition, in Figure 6-6(a), the distribution rate of the jackpot is the same when the probability setting value is “Setting 1”, “Setting 2”, and “Setting 3”. However, it may be different. In addition, in Figure 6-6(a), the distribution rate of the jackpot is the same when the probability setting value is “Setting 4”, “Setting 5”, and “Setting 6”. However, it may be different.

Further, in FIG. 6-6(a), the distribution rates for small hits and support hits are the same regardless of the probability setting value, but they may be different. That is, in this embodiment, only the winning probability of the jackpot is changed by changing the probability setting value, and the probability of the small winning and the support winning is not changed.
In addition, regarding the small winnings, the distribution rate of special map 2 is higher than that of special map 1. As a result, there is a higher possibility that special drawing 2 will result in a small hit, and if it becomes a small hit, there is a high possibility that it will become the first special game state (jackpot) due to the flow into the specific area, so the special The special figure fluctuation display game in FIG. 2 is more advantageous for the player.

Figure 6-6(b) is an example of the distribution ratio of jackpot types. For a jackpot, for example, as shown in Figure 6-6(b), the 10R jackpot A symbol is stopped and displayed as the jackpot symbol (jackpot result pattern), and the 10R jackpot B symbol is stopped and displayed as the 10R jackpot symbol. There are two types of jackpot B.
In 10R jackpot A, the number of rounds in the special game state is 10 rounds, and after the special game state ends, it becomes a general power support state with an upper limit of 250 games. In 10R jackpot B, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is 10 rounds, and after the special gaming state ends, there is no general power support.
In Figure 6-6(b), the distribution ratio of the jackpot type is different between special chart 1 and special chart 2. In addition, it may be made to differ depending on whether the game state in which the special figure fluctuation display game is executed is a normal game state or a specific game state.

Figure 6-6(c) shows the distribution ratio of small winning types. Regarding a jackpot that occurs when a game ball flows into a specific area of the special variable winning device 38 in the second special game state based on a small win, the jackpot type is selected based on the type of the small win. If a game ball flows into a specific area in the second special game state based on the small win A (V winning), a general power support state with an upper limit of 250 games will be entered after the end of the first special game state. If a game ball flows into a specific area in the second special game state based on small win B, there will be no general power support after the first special game state ends. Note that the distribution rate may be the same for special map 1 and special map 2.
In other words, 10R jackpot A and small win A produce a specific special result that makes the state (second state) of general power support after the end of the special gaming state, and 10R jackpot B and small win B result in the end of the special gaming state. Later, a non-specific special result is obtained that makes the state non-supportive (first state).

Figure 6-6(d) shows the winning probability of the regular pattern fluctuation display game. If the general electricity support state is not present, the probability is low, and if the general electricity support state is, the probability is high.
It should be noted that it is only necessary that it is easier to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 in a state in which general electricity is supported (second state) than in a state in which general electricity is not supported (first state), and the probability, variable time, opening time Alternatively, one or more of the general electric power maximum count numbers may be changed.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of this embodiment is equipped with a so-called ceiling function as shown in FIG. 6-6(e). That is, when the number of times the game has been executed reaches the ceiling number (959 in this case), the special game state is not generated and the general power support state is established with an upper limit of 250 games. The number of times the game is executed is always counted regardless of the presence or absence of general power support when the probability is low, and the counting is interrupted when the probability is high. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the special symbol probability is always constant, it is constantly counted. In addition, the number of times the game is executed is the sum of the number of times the special figure 1 variable display game is executed and the number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

The timing to clear the counting result of the number of times the game has been executed is when the general power support state is triggered by reaching the ceiling number of times, and when the condition device is activated (first special game state). Note that the timing for clearing the count result of the number of game executions can be changed as appropriate, for example, when clearing the number of game executions is selected when operating the RAM initialization switch 112, or when the power is turned off instead of when clearing the RAM. It can also be used at the time of injection.

Further, when clearing the RAM, the measurement of the number of game executions may be cleared when the RAM is cleared without setting changes, and the measurement of the number of game executions may not be cleared when the RAM is cleared with setting changes. When the RAM is cleared without changing settings, for example, the power is turned on while the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on without turning on the setting key switch 152. In this manner, by not clearing the measurement of the number of game executions when clearing the RAM accompanied by a setting change, it is possible to make it difficult to determine that a setting change has been made.

[Game state transition diagram (game flow)]
First, the transition (transition) of the game state by the game control of the game control device 100 will be explained. FIG. 6-7 is a diagram illustrating a game state transition diagram (game flow) showing the transition of the game state in this embodiment.
The gaming states include a normal gaming state ST1, a first special gaming state ST2 based on the first special result (big hit), a second special gaming state ST3 based on the second special result (small hit), a specific gaming state ST4, and a remaining hold. There is a digestive state ST5.
In each game state, there is a performance mode that is controlled by the performance control device 300 and determines the performance mode of the game, a main starting area that is the starting area that should be aimed mainly in the game state, and a type of special figure fluctuation display game that should be mainly executed. A certain main variable special figure and the firing direction of the game ball are determined.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the starting winning hole 36 by hitting the left hand, and it is possible to aim to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 by hitting the right. In other words, it is possible for the player to select the target starting area according to his/her will. In addition, each game state is designed with the assumption that the game will be played mainly in either the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, and the player will play the game according to this design. As the game progresses, it is constructed so that it is more advantageous for the player to play the game mainly with one of the special figure variable display games that is determined to be the main one in the design. In addition, in this specification, one special figure variation display game determined as the main one in each gaming state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

In the normal game state ST1, there is no general power support that improves the open time per unit time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 and makes it easier to win, and shortens the variable time of the special figure variable display game and the regular figure variable display game. There is no shortage of time. The main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game, and the main starting area is the starting winning hole 36, and in order to aim at this starting winning hole 36, the firing direction is left-handed. Further, the performance mode that defines the performance mode is a normal stage.

The first special game state ST2 is a state in which there is no general electricity support and no time saving. In addition, the performance mode that defines the performance mode is the jackpot mode. In this first special game state ST2, the special variable winning device 38 is opened, so that the firing direction is set to the right.
In the second special game state ST3, power supply support and time saving may or may not be provided depending on the situation at the time of deriving the small hit. Basically, the state at the time of the small hit derivation is carried over, but when the small win is derived when the end conditions of the specific game state ST4 are met, the small win becomes a small hit.Due to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game, the general power support and time saving will end. Therefore, in this case, there will be no general electricity support or time saving. In addition, the performance mode that defines the performance mode is the small hit mode. In this second special game state ST3, the special variable winning device 38 is opened, so that the firing direction is set to the right.

The specific gaming state ST4 is a state that stays for a specified number of games after the first special gaming state ST2, and there is a general power support that improves the open time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 and makes winning easier. state.
If you have public power support, you can also save time by shortening the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game. In addition, the main variable special figure is a special figure 2 variable display game, and the main starting area is the normal variable prize winning device 37.
In order to aim at this normal variable winning device 37, the firing direction is set to the right. The specific gaming state ST4 is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state ST1 because it mainly executes the special symbol 2 variable display game in which there is general power support and small wins occur frequently. It is what you do.

The remaining pending state ST5 is a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory remaining when the specific game state ST4 ends can be executed.
In this remaining pending state ST5, there is no general power support, but there is a time saving that shortens the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation display game. Since there is no power supply support, the firing direction is set to be left-handed so as to aim at the starting prize opening 36, but since it is a short period following the specific game state ST4, there is no need to clearly instruct left-handed firing. .
The remaining hold consumption state ST5 mainly executes the special symbol 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory that mainly occurs in the specific game state ST4, so it is a state that is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state ST1. It is a state.

The transition of the gaming state is the derivation of the first special result (big hit), the derivation of the second special result (small hit),
This is done by deriving the support hit, ending the first special game state, ending the second special game state, playing the specified number of games, and reaching the ceiling.
When a jackpot is achieved in the normal gaming state ST1, the game shifts to a first special gaming state ST2. 1st
After the special gaming state ST2 ends, the first special result is 10R jackpot A with power supply support state.
If so, the state is such that there is general power support and time saving for a period until the end condition of the general power support state is satisfied, and the state shifts to the specific gaming state ST4. In addition, if the first special result is 10R jackpot B without power supply support state, if there is no second starting memory, it will shift to the normal gaming state ST1, and if there is second starting memory, it will shift to the remaining pending consumption state ST5. do.
When a jackpot is achieved in the specific gaming state ST4 or the remaining pending state ST5, the game also moves to the first special gaming state ST2, and then changes to the specific gaming state ST4.
Furthermore, if the support is won or the ceiling is reached, the game enters the specific game state ST4 without passing through the first special game state ST2.

In the specific game state ST4, the normal power supply support makes it easier for game balls to win in the normal variable winning device 37, so that the second starting memory can be generated, and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed. If the termination conditions for the general power support state are met in this specific gaming state ST4, the general power support ends, and if there is a remaining hold, which is the second starting memory that occurred in the specific gaming state ST4, the remaining hold extinguishing state ST5 will occur. , if there is no remaining reservation, the game shifts to the normal gaming state ST1.

It is possible to stay in the remaining pending state ST5 until the special symbol 2 variable display game based on the second starting memory, which is the remaining pending, ends. In this remaining pending state ST5, the specific game state ST
It is designed to perform a series of performances that are continuous with 4. After the remaining pending state ST5 ends, the state shifts to the normal gaming state ST1.

If a small win occurs in the normal gaming state ST1, specific gaming state ST4, or remaining hold extinguishment state ST5, a transition is made to the second special gaming state ST3.
If a game ball flows into a specific area in the second special gaming state ST3 (V winning), the first
A transition is made to the special gaming state ST2. When game balls flow into the special variable winning device 38, there is a possibility that they may flow into a specific area, and it is advantageous for the player to play many special figure 2 variable display games with a high probability of small winnings. Become. The probability of the game ball flowing into the specific area is determined by operating a lever member provided inside the special variable prize winning device 38 that can control the inflow of game balls into the specific area using a lever solenoid 38f. Control is performed by switching between a state where the inflow of game balls into a specific area is allowed and a state where the inflow of game balls into a specific area is disabled.

Further, if the game ball does not flow into the specific area in the second special gaming state ST3, the state shifts to the specific gaming state ST4, the remaining reservation extinguishing state ST5, or the normal gaming state ST1.
If the end condition of the specific gaming state ST4 is not satisfied, the process moves to the specific gaming state ST4. In addition, if the termination condition of the specific gaming state ST4 is satisfied and there is a remaining hold that is the second starting memory that occurred in the specific gaming state ST4, the state shifts to the remaining holding extinguishing state ST5. Also,
If the end conditions of the specific gaming state ST4 are satisfied and there is no remaining reservation, the game shifts to the normal gaming state ST1.

Control of a gaming machine that plays such a game will be explained below. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be explained. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of the main processing shown in FIGS. 6-8 and 6-9, and the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 6-10, which is performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. The main processing starts when the power is turned on. In this main processing, as shown in Figures 6-8 and 6-9, the process of disabling interrupts (step Stack pointer setting processing (step X2) is performed to set a stack pointer that is the start address of the stack pointer. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (eg, D register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h or 01h taken as the upper one, and the first 00h is set in step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step X5). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and firing of game balls is prohibited.

Thereafter, the states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 152 are read (step X6), and processing for setting the power-on delay timer (step X7) is performed. In the process of step X7, by setting a predetermined initial value, the game control device
Waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from 00 to start normally.
is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the gaming control device 100 starts up first and sends a command to the sub-control device before the sub-control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) starts up, the sub-control device can avoid missing commands. That is, when the game control device 100 turns on the power, there is a predetermined delay for starting the main control means (the game control device 100) and waiting for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the production control device 300, etc.). It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

Furthermore, the power-on delay timer measures time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (such as a RAM area or register that is not subject to validity determination). Thereby, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (step X8), and if a power outage has occurred (step wait until it is blocked.
Specifically, in step Determine if there is. If the power failure monitoring signal is on, it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the set number of checks. If the power failure monitoring signal does not remain on for the number of checks, the process returns to determining whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, if the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of times of checks, it is determined that a power failure has occurred. The same applies to steps X34 and X54, which will be described later. In this way, by determining that a power outage has occurred if the power outage monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power outage due to noise, etc., and to appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power outage monitoring means that monitors the occurrence of a power outage during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power outage that occurs during a period in which the startup of the game control device 100 serving as the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the memory contents from the previous power cut are still retained, so backup processing will be performed in the event of a power outage. There's no need. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden on control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if a power outage has not occurred (step X8; N), the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X9), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0 (step X10).
If the timer value is not 0 (step X10; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of determining whether a power outage has occurred (step X8). Furthermore, if the timer value is 0 (step X10; Y), that is, if the waiting time has ended,
Access to readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM is permitted (step X11), and off data is output (set to no output state) to all output ports (step X12).

Next, set the serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111, in this embodiment, used for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) (step X13), and A process (step X14) of activating a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the clock generator 111 (clock generator) is performed. Note that the CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator within the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a frequency dividing circuit that divides the frequency of the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113.
11A is provided with a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that provides a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to a random number generation circuit.
Next, a RAM abnormality flag is set (step X15). Here, the RAM abnormality flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register on the premise that there is an abnormality in the RAM, regardless of whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure test area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure test area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X16), and if it is normal (step X16; Y),
Power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) where the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal
(Step X17). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X17; Y), a checksum calculation process (step It is determined whether the checksums match (step X19). If the checksums match (step X19; Y)
Since there is no abnormality in the RAM, the RAM abnormality flag is cleared (step X20) and the process moves to step X21.

Further, if it is determined that the check data in the power outage inspection area is not normal data (step X16; N or step X17; N), and if it is determined that the checksums do not match (step X19; N), Based on the state read in step X6, it is determined whether both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the on state (step X21). If at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X22). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (step device 300) (step X24).

On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step X22; N), it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23). When the probability setting changing flag is set (step X23; Y), a main abnormal error notification command is sent to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X24). The probability setting flag set here is the probability setting flag that was set before the power outage occurred. In other words, if the power to the gaming machine is cut off and restarted while changing the probability setting value,
Since the operation of the gaming control device 100 is stopped, the process of step X24 is performed.
Next, the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped is output to the fifth driver 138e via the second output port 134 (step X25). After that, output the ON data of the security signal and output the OFF data of the signals other than the security signal (step X26).
, return to step X25.

Furthermore, if both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the on state (step X21; Y), it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27). Then, if the RAM abnormality flag is not set (step
;N), a probability setting changing flag is set (step X29). This shifts to probability setting value change mode. Thereafter, a command for changing the probability setting is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X30), and the process moves to step X31. The production control device 300 controls the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, and the speaker 1 based on receiving the command for changing the probability setting.
A notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is made by outputting audio from 9a and 19b.
On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is set (step X27; Y), a process of clearing the probability setting value (step X28) is performed. As a result, 0 is set in the probability setting value area in the RWM, and the probability setting value becomes "setting 1." After that, step X29,
After processing X30, the process moves to step X31.

Further, if at least one of the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the off state (step X21; N) and neither the RAM abnormality flag nor the probability setting changing flag is set (steps X22; N and step ;N), it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the on state based on the state read in step X6 (step X35). Then, if the setting key switch 152 is not in the on state (step
), it is determined whether the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the on state based on the state read in step X6 (step X43).

When it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is not in the on state (step X43; N)
That is, if both the setting key switch 152 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are in the OFF state, the process moves to step X41 to perform processing in the case of normal recovery from a power outage.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the on state (step
;Y), the process moves to step X44 and initialization processing is performed. That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 constitutes an initialization operation section that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation section. act as a means of change.

Further, when the setting key switch 152 is in the ON state (step X35; Y), a probability setting confirmation flag is set (step X36). This shifts to probability setting value confirmation mode. After that, the command for checking the probability setting is sent to the production control board (production control device 300)
(Step X37). In the production control device 300, based on receiving the command for checking the probability setting, the display on the display device 41, the LED of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 are changed.
, the operation of the board presentation device 44, the output of audio from the speakers 19a and 19b, etc.
Notify that the probability setting value is being confirmed.

Then, in order to guarantee output of the security signal for 50 msec or more, a value corresponding to 128 msec is saved in the security signal control timer area (step X31). The security signal is output in the probability setting change/confirmation process (step It is output in the process (step X120). Therefore, 12
If the probability setting value change mode or the probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 8 m seconds, the security signal is continuously outputted by the external information editing process (step X120) of the timer interrupt process. In other words, even if the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode ends in less than 128 m seconds, the security signal will not be output for 128 m seconds after transitioning to the probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode. Ru. Note that the value saved in the security signal control timer area in step X31 is not limited to the value corresponding to 128 msec. However, after switching to probability setting value change mode or probability setting value confirmation mode,
Since it is necessary to output a security signal for 0 msec, it is necessary to save the value corresponding to 50 msec or more.

Then, the interrupt is permitted (step X32), and it is determined whether the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33). In step X33, the determination is not made based on the state read in step ). If it is determined in step X33 that the setting key switch 152 is in the off state, the probability setting value is determined.
If the setting key switch 152 is not in the off state (step X33; N), it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (step Returning, if a power outage has occurred (step X34; Y), the process moves to step X55. If it is determined that a power outage has occurred in step In step X23, it is determined that the probability setting changing flag is set.

On the other hand, if the setting key switch 152 is in the off state (step X33; Y), a process for prohibiting interrupts (step X38) is performed. From the time the interrupt is enabled (step It will be done. In the timer interrupt processing, probability setting change/confirmation processing (step X122), which is processing regarding probability setting values, is performed. In other words, the main process is on standby until the change or confirmation of the probability setting value is completed (or until a power outage occurs).
Next, a command to end the notification is sent to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X39). The production control device 300 ends the notification being executed (notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed or notification that the probability setting value is being confirmed) based on receiving the notification termination command. .

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40), and if the probability setting changing flag is not set (step X40; N), that is, if the probability setting checking flag is set. is the area to be initialized (e.g. power outage inspection area,
A power outage recovery process (step X41) is performed in which the initial value at the time of power outage recovery is saved in the checksum area and the area related to error/fraud monitoring. The probability setting confirmation flag is cleared in step X41.
Thereafter, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure game processing number is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X42), and the process moves to step X47. In the case of this embodiment, in step Send a command. The command for specifying the screen is when both Tokuzu 1 and Tokuzu 2 are in normal processing (described later), that is, when they are waiting for a customer and are not in the execution of the Tokuzu variable display game and are not in a special game state. Sends the command for the customer waiting demo screen, otherwise sends the command for the recovery screen. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a high probability number information command or the like may also be transmitted.

On the other hand, if the probability setting changing flag is set (step X40; Y), the RAM area other than the probability setting value is cleared to 0 (step X44). In step Instead, the RAM area for game control (work area and stack area) is cleared to 0. Therefore, the probability setting changing flag is cleared in step X44. Note that in step X44,
You may or may not clear the stack area and unused area.

Then, save the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (step X45)
. The areas to be initialized here are the customer waiting demonstration area and the area related to the setting of the presentation mode. Then, a command for initializing the RAM is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X46). In the case of this embodiment, in step In addition to displaying a demonstration screen, a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization using light and sound for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands,
It also transmits the performance number information command and the support number information command, which is information on the number of executions of the special symbol variable display game with public power support.

Next, a process of activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X47). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Further, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. A bit transposition pattern is a method of replacing the bit arrangement of extracted random numbers (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). This is the pattern that defines the By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. Note that the bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Alternatively, the settings may be set arbitrarily by the user.

After that, the specified registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on.
The value of is extracted, and the initial value (start) of the corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, the special pattern random number that determines the winning pattern of the special pattern, the random number that determines the winning pattern of the regular pattern (hit random number)) value) in a predetermined area of RWM (step X48), and then enables interrupts (step
49). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, so this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to obtain illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, initial value random number updating processing (step X50) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in this embodiment, the jackpot random number, special symbol random number, and hit random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or faster than the CPU operating clock, and the special symbol random number and hit random number are the same as the timer interrupt processing, which is the processing unit of the program. The CTC output that becomes the period (
This is a "low speed counter" that is updated based on a CTC (CTC2) that is different from the CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing. In addition, for the special pattern random numbers and the hit random numbers, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the starting value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random numbers go around. Note that each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter type by +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random type in which all values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the special pattern random number and hit random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.
In addition, in this embodiment, since there is no random number (winning pattern random number) that determines the winning pattern of the normal pattern, there is only one type of winning pattern of the normal pattern, but by providing a winning pattern random number, the winning pattern of the normal pattern may be selected from among multiple types.

After the initial value random number update processing in step X50, processing to disable interrupts (step X51)
and performs performance display editing processing (step X52). After performing processing to permit interrupts (step X53), it is determined whether a power outage has occurred (step X54), and if a power outage has not occurred (step (Step X5
Return to 0). That is, when a power outage has not occurred, initial value random number updating processing, performance display editing processing, and power outage monitoring are repeatedly performed. By enabling interrupts (step X49) before the initial value random number update process (step It is possible to avoid stressing the interrupt processing by having to wait for the initial value random number update processing.

Note that the initial value random number update processing at step In order to avoid random number update processing from being executed, when performing initial value random number update processing in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts before updating and canceling interrupts.
If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in this embodiment, but only in the main process, there will be no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage that main processing is simplified.

On the other hand, if a power outage has occurred (step X54; Y), a process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X55) and a process of outputting off data to all output ports (step X56) are performed.
After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X57).
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X58).
Furthermore, after performing checksum calculation processing (step
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step X61), the game waits until the gaming machine is powered off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power failure, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power failure has been correctly backed up. This can be determined at the time of re-input.

From the above, there is a main control means (gaming control device 100) that controls games in an integrated manner, and slave control means (payout control device 200, performance control device 300, etc.) that performs various controls according to instructions from the main control means. ), the main control means includes a standby means (game control device) that sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the start-up of the main control means and waiting for the start-up of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100), and a power outage monitoring means (gaming control device 100) that monitors the occurrence of a power outage during the predetermined standby time.
Furthermore, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power outage monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power outage, and the power outage monitoring means (gaming control device 100) , it is determined that a power outage has occurred if the power outage monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (gaming control device 100) includes a RAM 111C that can store data,
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that initializes data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit.
A gaming control device 100) is provided, and the operating state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.
In addition, the main control means (gaming control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be explained. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started at predetermined intervals. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 6-10 is started.

When timer interrupt processing starts, register bank 1 is specified (step X1).
01). Switching to register bank 1 is equivalent to register saving processing in which the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in main processing) is transferred to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (eg, D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same process as step X4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step X103) is performed to receive inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, to read the status of each input port.

Next, it is determined whether the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104), and if the probability setting changing flag or the probability setting checking flag is set (step X104; Y), , probability setting change/confirmation process (step X122)
and completes the timer interrupt processing.
On the other hand, if both the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirmation flag are not set (step Output processing (step X105) is performed to control the drive of actuators such as the solenoid 38f and general electric solenoid 37c). Note that when a firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main process, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This firing permission signal is output to the firing control device via the dispensing control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the firing permission signal is the first signal indicating the firing permission state as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (firing permission signal) indicating the firing permission state as seen from the payout control device is also a payout control signal. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two firing permission signals are output to the firing control device, and when both of them are permission to fire, the game ball is configured to be in a state where it can be fired.

Next, a payout command sending process (step
Random number update processing 2 (step X108) is performed. In the random number update process 1 (step X107), the initial values (start values) of the special symbol random numbers and hit random numbers that are the targets of the initial value random number update process are updated. After that, it is monitored whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a, setting the prize ball, and adjusting the front frame and glass frame. Winning port switch/state monitoring processing (step X109
)I do.

Next, it is determined whether abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110). Abnormal discharge means that in the special variable winning device 38, the number of game balls ejected from the special variable winning device 38 (the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the remaining ball ejection port switch 38e) is the same as that of the special variable winning device 38. 38 (the number of game balls detected by the big prize opening switch 38a). Note that if abnormal discharge is occurring, an abnormal discharge flag is set. If abnormal discharge is occurring (step X110; Y), the process moves to step X116. In other words, the game is prevented from proceeding.

On the other hand, if abnormal discharge is not occurring (step X110; N), special pattern game processing (step X114), and performs segment LED editing processing (step X115) that drives the segment LEDs provided in the gaming machine 10 that display the special figure fluctuation display game and display various information regarding the game so as to display desired content. conduct.

Next, a magnet tampering monitoring process (step board radio wave fraud monitoring processing (step Abnormal discharge monitoring processing (step X119) is performed. Furthermore, external information editing processing (step X120) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and performance display monitor control processing (step X121) for controlling the performance display device 153 are performed, and the timer interrupt processing is ended. do.

In this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (i.e., the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (i.e., the process of designating register bank 0) are performed on interrupt returns. (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines may require an instruction to execute a process for restoring an interrupt-disabled state or a process for restoring register bank designation.

[Special figure game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (step X112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be explained. In the special figure game process, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 3
It monitors the input of 7a, controls the entire processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game, and sets the display of special figures.

As shown in FIG. 6-11, in the special figure game process, first, starting port switch monitoring processing (step A1) is performed to monitor winnings of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a. In the starting port switch monitoring process, the starting winning port 36 and the normal variable winning device 3 which forms the second starting winning port
When a game ball wins in 7, various random numbers (jackpot random numbers, etc.) are extracted, and the game result pre-determination is performed to determine the game result based on the winning in advance before the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the winning. Make a judgment.

Next, a big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning a prize opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball in the big winning a prize opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed. Then, a specific area switch monitoring process is performed to monitor the detection of game balls in the specific area 38h (step A3).

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step A4). Note that the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A5). The value of the special figure game processing timer is “
0" (Step A5; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already expired, register the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to in order to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. is set (step A6), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is obtained using the table (step A7).
Then, a subroutine call is made in accordance with the special figure game processing number (step A8).

In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the start of variation of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the setting of the variation during the special figure variation display game are performed. Special figure normal processing (step A9) is performed to set information necessary for processing.
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "1", special figure fluctuation processing is performed to set the stop display time of the special figure and the information necessary to perform the process during special figure display. (Step A
10).

In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the playing result of the special figure variable display game is a jackpot, fanfare commands are set according to the type of jackpot, and the jackpot for each jackpot is set. Special figure display processing (step A11) that sets the fanfare time according to the opening pattern and the information necessary to perform the fanfare/interval processing.
)I do.

In step A8, if the special drawing game processing number is "3", set the opening time of the grand prize opening, update the number of openings, and set the information necessary to perform the process during the opening of the grand prize opening. Fanfare/interval processing (step A12) is performed.
In step A8, if the special drawing game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if it is the final round, an ending command is set, or a jackpot remaining slot is set. A big prize opening opening process (step A13) is performed to set information necessary for performing ball processing.

In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is the final round, the processing to set the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be ejected and the jackpot end processing are performed. Big winning hole remaining ball processing (step A14) to set the information necessary for the process.
I do.
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "6", a jackpot end process (step A15) is performed in which information necessary for performing the special figure normal process is set.

In step A8, if the special game processing number is "7", in order to set the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small winning process. Small win fanfare processing (step A16) is performed to set necessary information.
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hit process (step A
17).
In step A8, if the special figure game processing number is "9", there is a process to set the time for the remaining balls that won in the big prize opening to be discharged during the small hit process, and a small hit end process. A small hit remaining ball process (step A18) is performed to set the information necessary to perform the process.
In step A8, when the special figure game processing number is "10", a small hit end process (step A19) is performed in which information necessary for performing the special figure normal process is set.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A
20) Perform a symbol fluctuation control process (step A21) related to controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special symbol 1 display 51. After preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 display 52 (step A22), a symbol fluctuation control process related to controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol by the special symbol 2 display 52 is performed (step A23). . Thereafter, a lever solenoid control process (step A24) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed, and the special figure game process is ended. On the other hand, in step A5, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" (step A5;
N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process moves to step A20 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common process performed in the above-mentioned starting port switch monitoring process will be explained. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a or the starting port 2 switch 37a.

As shown in FIG. 6-12, in the special figure starting port switch common process, first, starting port 1 switch 36
a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, the number of outputs of the starting port signal, which is the number of times information regarding the number of winnings to the monitoring target starting port switch 37a, is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10 is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output number area of the RWM (step A134), and the process moves to step A135. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process moves to step A135. In this embodiment, values from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. If the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by updating by +1, and it is determined that the number of outputs has overflowed.

Next, out of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether the number of special symbols pending (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starting port switch is less than the upper limit value (step A135). If the number of reserved special drawings to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135; N
) ends the special figure starting port switch common processing.

In addition, if the number of reserved special figures to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of reserved special figures to be updated (the number of reserved special figures 1 or the number of reserved special figures 2) is updated by +1 ( Step A13
6) Save the target starting opening winning flag (step A137). Next, calculate the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the monitored start switch and the number of reserved special drawings (step A138), and save the jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process to the RWM jackpot random number storage area. (Step A139).

Next, extract the special symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored and prepare it (Step A1
40), save in the RWM special pattern random number storage area (step A141).
Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A145), and special figure reservation information determination processing (step A146) is performed.
Next, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting gate switch to be monitored and the number of special figure reservations (step A147), perform production command setting processing (step A148),
Finish the special figure starting port switch common processing.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the starting area of the starting prize opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37, and extracts a predetermined random number, which becomes the right to execute the variable display game. It constitutes a start-up storage means that stores a predetermined number of items as a memory. In addition, the starting storage means (gaming control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on winnings of game balls in the first starting winning hole (starting winning hole 36) up to a predetermined number as the first starting memory. Various random numbers are stored and extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37).
A predetermined number is stored as a second startup memory up to an upper limit.

[Special figure reservation information determination process]
Next, special figure reservation information determination processing (step A14) in the above-mentioned starting gate switch common processing
6) will be explained in detail. The special figure pending information determination process is a prefetch process that determines result-related information corresponding to the corresponding starting memory before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding starting memory.

As shown in FIG. 6-13, first, a jackpot determination process (step A154) is performed to determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. Then, if the determination result is a jackpot (step A155; Y), set a jackpot special symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (step A156), and step The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number prepared in A140 is acquired (step A157), and the process moves to step A168.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a jackpot (step A155; N), a small hit determination process (step A159) is performed to determine whether or not it is a small hit based on whether the jackpot random value matches the small hit determination value. conduct. Then, when the judgment result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a special symbol random number check table for small hit is set (step A161), and prepared in step A140 of the special symbol start switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (step A162), and the process moves to step A168.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), a support hit determination process (
Step A163) is performed. Then, if the determination result is not a support hit (step A164
;N) sets the stop symbol information of a miss (step A167), and moves to the process of step A168.
In addition, when the determination result is a support hit (step A164; Y), a special symbol random number check table for support hit is set (step A165), and prepared in step A140 of the special symbol start opening switch common process. The stop symbol information corresponding to the special symbol random number is acquired (step A166), and the process moves to step A168.

Then, a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting port switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A168), and performance command setting processing is performed (step A169). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A170) is performed to set special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, and a variation pattern setting process is performed to set a variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step A170). A171).
Thereafter, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to a first half variation number indicating a first half variation pattern and a second half variation number indicating a second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A172), and production command setting processing is performed. (Step A173), the special figure reservation information determination process is ended. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A170 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A171 are similar to the process executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure normal process.

Through the above processing, a pre-read symbol command containing the result of the special pattern variation display game based on the starting memory of the pre-read target and a pre-reading variation pattern command containing information on the variation pattern in the special pattern variation display game based on the starting memory are prepared. and transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (pre-reading result) of the result-related information (whether it is a jackpot or not and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory is controlled in advance before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, and in particular, by changing the decorative special symbol start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result-related information is provided to the player before the start timing of the special symbol variation display game. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting memory means (game controlling device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (for example, whether or not it will result in a special result). etc.) serves as a preliminary determination means. Furthermore, the timing to determine in advance the random value stored corresponding to the starting memory is not only at the time of starting winning when the starting memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be explained. As shown in FIG. 6-14, in the special figure normal process, first, it is determined whether the special figure 2 pending number (second starting memory number) is "0" (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 pending number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 pending number (first starting memory number) is "0" (step A305). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings 1 is "0" (step A305; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has started (step A309), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (step A309;N) sets a customer-waiting demonstration flag in the customer-waiting demo flag area (step A310).

Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A311), and a production command setting process (step A312) is performed. Next, "0" related to the special figure normal process is set as the process number (step A313), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A314). Then, the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A315), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A316).
), the special figure normal processing ends. That is, when the special figure fluctuation display game can be started but the starting conditions are not met, the production control device 300 issues a customer waiting demonstration command that is waiting information.
It will be sent to you.
On the other hand, in step A309, if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A309;
Y) moves to the process of step A313 without performing the processes of steps A310 to A312.

Also, in step A301, if the number of reserved special drawings 2 is not "0" (step A301;
N) prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the number of special figures 2 reservation (step A302
). Next, the production command setting process (step A303) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (
Step A304) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.
In addition, in step A305, if the number of reserved special drawings 1 is not "0" (step A305;
N) prepares a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the number of special figure 1 reservations (step A306
). Next, the production command setting process (step A307) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (
Step A308) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A308) in the above-mentioned special figure normal process will be explained. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 6-15(a), first, a special symbol 1 variation flag indicating the type of special symbol variation display game to be executed (here, special symbol 1) is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A321). . Next, loss information and jackpot information are set in the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether the first special figure fluctuation display game is a jackpot by determining the jackpot random number, and the first special figure fluctuation display game is A process of setting loss information and small hit information in the small hit flag to determine whether it is a small hit or not, and a support hit to determine whether the first special symbol fluctuation display game is a support hit or not. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A322) is performed to set losing information and support hit information to the flag.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information)
323), special figure information setting processing (step A324) is performed to set special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern. As parameters, the game state, the number of pending games, the stopped symbol pattern number, the remaining number of general power support times, etc. are used. Next, a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table is prepared, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set (step A325).
). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) is performed to set a variation pattern that is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, and a variation start information setting process is performed to set information on the start of variation in the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure fluctuation processing is set as the processing number (step A328).
, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A329).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal related to the start of variation of special symbol 1 (for example, special symbol 1 fluctuating signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1 display 5
Set the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the flashing cycle timer (step A33).
3). Next, the initial value (here "0") is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (step A334), and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure normal process will be explained. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is similar to the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 6-15(a). This is done for the 2-start memory.

As shown in FIG. 6-15(b), first, a special symbol 2 variation flag indicating the type of special symbol variation display game to be executed (here, special symbol 2) is saved in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (step A341). . Next, loss information and jackpot information are set in the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether the second special figure fluctuation display game is a jackpot by determining the jackpot random number, and the second special figure fluctuation display game is A process of setting loss information and small hit information in the small hit flag to determine whether it is a small hit or not, and a support hit to determine whether the second special symbol fluctuation display game is a support hit or not. A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed to set losing information and support hit information to the flag.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information)
343), special figure information setting processing (step A344) is performed to set special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern. As parameters, the game state, the number of pending games, the stopped symbol pattern number, the remaining number of general power support times, etc. are used. Next, a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table is prepared, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game is set (step A345).
). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) is performed to set a variation pattern that is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game, and a variation start information setting process is performed to set information on the start of variation in the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.

Next, "1" related to the special figure fluctuation processing is set as the processing number (step A348).
, the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A349).
Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal related to the start of variation of special symbol 2 (for example, special symbol 2 fluctuating signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2 display 5
Set the initial value (here, 100 ms) of the flashing cycle timer (Step A35).
3). Next, the initial value (here, "0") is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (step A354), and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended.

That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a special figure variable display game execution control means that executes the special figure variable display game based on the starting memory stored in the starting memory means. The special figure fluctuation display game execution control means executes the first special figure fluctuation display game as the special figure fluctuation display game based on the first start memory, and executes the second special figure change display game as the special figure change display game based on the second start memory. A figure fluctuation display game will be executed.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 6-16 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A323) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of this embodiment.
In this special pattern 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A431), and if it is a jackpot (step A431; Y), the special pattern 1 special pattern random number storage area (reserved number Load the special pattern random number from (for 1) (step A432). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step A433), and a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A434). This process selects the jackpot type.

After that, a special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A435), and a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 display 51) and the halt symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A437), the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is obtained, and the time reduction judgment data is obtained. The area is saved (step A438), and production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting a variation pattern scenario, which is information regarding the execution mode of the special gaming state, the performance mode after the special gaming state ends, and the transition of the variable selection table group after the special gaming state ends. . Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A455).

On the other hand, if the jackpot 1 flag is not a jackpot (step A431; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A440), and if it is a small hit (step A44).
0; Y) loads the special pattern random number from the special pattern 1 special pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A441). Next, set the special figure 1 small winning symbol table (step A442).
, acquire the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number and save it in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A443). Through this process, the type of small win is selected. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A444), the performance mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A445), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A444). Prepare the corresponding decorative special command (Step A)
455).

In addition, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A440; N), it is determined whether the support hit flag 1 is a support hit (step A446), and if it is a support hit (step A44).
6; Y) loads the special pattern random number from the special pattern 1 special pattern random number storage area (for reserved number 1) (step A447). Next, set the symbol table per special figure support (step A448
), acquires the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number and saves it in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A449). This process selects the support type.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A450), and the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction judgment data area (step A450). Step A451), the production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A452), and a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A455).
In addition, if the support hit flag 1 is not a support hit (step A446; N), the stop symbol number at the time of miss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (step A453), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. (Step A454), and prepare a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (Step A455). Through the above processing,
A stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is set.

After that, save the decorative special figure command in the decorative special figure command area (step A456),
Performance command setting processing (step A457) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the production control device 300. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (step A458), clear the special symbol 1 special symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (step A459), The special figure 1 stop symbol setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 6-17 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process of this embodiment. Note that the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, but is performed for the special figure 2.
In this special pattern 2 stop pattern setting process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A471), and if it is a jackpot (step A471; Y), the special pattern 2 special pattern random number storage area (reserved number Load the special pattern random number from 1) (step A472). Next, a special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step A473), and a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A474). This process selects the jackpot type.

After that, the special figure 2 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A475), and the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A476). The stop symbol pattern is for setting the stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 2 display 52) and the halt symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A477), the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stopped symbol number is obtained, and the time reduction judgment data is obtained. area (step A478), and save production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and probability state (step A479). These pieces of information are for setting a variation pattern scenario, which is information regarding the execution mode of the special gaming state, the performance mode after the special gaming state ends, and the transition of the variable selection table group after the special gaming state ends. . Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A495).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A471; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A480), and if it is a small hit (step A48).
0; Y) loads the special pattern random number from the special pattern 2 special pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A481). Next, set the special pattern 2 small winning symbol table (step A482).
, acquires the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number and saves it in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A483). Through this process, the type of small win is selected. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A484), the production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A485), and the stop symbol pattern is Prepare the corresponding decorative special command (Step A)
495).

Further, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A480; N), it is determined whether the support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A486), and if it is a support hit (step A48
6; Y) loads the special pattern random number from the special pattern 2 special pattern random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A487). Next, set the special pattern 2 support symbol table (step A488
), acquires the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded special symbol random number and saves it in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A489). This process selects the support type.

After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A490), and the time reduction judgment data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the time reduction judgment data area (step A490). Step A491), saves production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (Step A492), and prepares a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (Step A495).
In addition, if the support hit flag 2 is not a support hit (step A486; N), the stop symbol number at the time of miss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A493), and the miss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. (Step A494), and prepare a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (Step A495). Through the above processing,
A stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is set.

After that, save the decorative special figure command in the decorative special figure command area (step A496),
Performance command setting processing (step A497) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the production control device 300. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (step A498), clear the special symbol 2 special symbol random number storage area (for reserved number 1) to 0 (step A499), The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process ends.
In this way, when setting the stop symbols for each result, by using a common special symbol random number regardless of the result, the types of random numbers required can be reduced, and the specifications and programs of the gaming machine can be simplified. This allows the control burden to be reduced.

[Special figure fluctuation processing]
FIG. 6-18 shows the special symbol fluctuation processing (step A10) in the special symbol game processing of this embodiment.
In this special symbol fluctuation processing, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag is prepared (step A601), and production command setting processing (step A602) is performed. Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special pattern game processing timer area (step A604). That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a stop display time setting means for setting a stop display time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

Next, it is determined whether general electricity support is in progress (step A605), and if general electricity support is not in progress (step A605; N), the process moves to step A612. In addition, if it is under general power support (step A605; Y), set the number of time reduction changes in the time reduction change number area by -1.
It is updated (step A609), and it is determined whether the number of time reduction fluctuations has become 0 (step A609).
610).
If the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (step A610; Y), a time reduction end setting process is performed to end general electricity support (step A611), and the process moves to step A612.
Further, if the number of time reduction fluctuations is not 0 (step A610; N), step A612
to move to.

After performing the production mode information check process (step A612), it is determined whether the remaining pending consumption state has ended (step A613). Here, the term "remaining hold extinguished state has ended" includes not only the case where the termination condition of the remaining hold extinguished state ST5 is satisfied, but also the case where there is no remaining hold at the end of the specific gaming state ST4.
If the remaining pending consumption state has not ended (step A613; N), step A616
to move to. Further, when the remaining pending consumption state has ended (step A613; Y), it is determined whether the result is a failure (step A614).
If the result is not a failure (step A614; N), the process moves to step A616.
If the result is a failure (step A614; Y), a signal regarding time-saving termination (for example,
The jackpot 2 signal is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A615), and the process moves to step A616.

In step A616, "2" related to the process during special figure display is set as the process number (step A616), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A61).
7). Furthermore, a signal related to the end of the variation of special symbol 1 (for example, a signal during special symbol 1 variation is turned off)
) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A618), and a signal related to the end of variation of special symbol 2 (for example, turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A619). A control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) is saved in the symbol confirmation number signal control timer area related to the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game for output to the external information terminal (step A620). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the stop of fluctuation on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A621 ), as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the stoppage of fluctuation on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A622), the special figure changing process ends.

[Time-saving end setting process]
FIG. 6-19 shows the time saving end setting process (step A611) in the special figure fluctuation process. In this time saving end setting process, first, signals related to the end of time saving (for example, special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal OFF, special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, normal Symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, normal electric accessory 1 opening extension state signal OFF) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A632).

Next, save the number with no time saving in the game state display number area (step A633), and save the low probability of low probability & no time saving flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A63).
4) Save the special pattern low probability & no time saving flag in the special pattern game mode flag area (step A635).
Then, the time reduction variation number area is cleared (step A636), the signal related to the left-handed batting instruction (for example, firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A638), and the right-handed batting instruction is displayed. In order to turn off the LED (for example, the first gaming state display section 56a), save the number in the left-handed playing state in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A6).
39), save the normal base state information in the normal base state determination area (step A640)
), the time reduction variation number update process ends.

[Special figure display processing]
6-20 and 6-21 show the special figure display process (step A11) in the special figure game process of this embodiment.
In this special figure display process, first, the support hit flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the support hit flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A701). , clears the support hit flag 1 area and the support hit flag 2 area of RWM (step A702).
Next, the small hit flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the small hit flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A703), and the small win flag 1 area of the RWM is loaded. and clears the small hit flag 2 area (step A704).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process are loaded (step A705), and the jackpot flag 1 area and jackpot flag of the RWM are loaded. 2 areas are cleared (step A706). Then, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A707), and if it is a jackpot (step A707; Y), it is a jackpot of the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 jackpot).
Test signals related to the start of (for example, condition device operation signal turned ON, accessory continuous operation device operation signal turned ON, special symbol 2 hit signal turned ON) are saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A710). ), a round number upper limit value table is set (step A711).

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A707; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A708), and if it is a jackpot (step A708; Y), the first special Test signals related to the start of the jackpot (special figure 1 jackpot) in the figure fluctuation display game (for example, turning on the condition device operation signal, turning on the accessory continuous operation device operation signal, and turning on the special symbol 1 hit signal) of the RWM. Save it in the test signal output data area (step A
709), and sets a round number upper limit value table (step A711).

Next, the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM (step A712). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A713).

Next, a decorative special figure command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM and prepared (step A714), and a production command setting process (step A715) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command related to information that sets the probability of a winning result in the regular pattern fluctuation display game and the special pattern fluctuation display game to a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A716), and a production command setting process is performed. (Step A717) is performed. Next, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A718), and the production command setting process (step A719). This fanfare command constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the performance control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

Next, the big winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the regular symbol fluctuation display game and the special symbol fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A720). In the case of this embodiment, in step A720, the jackpot 2 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are saved as signals corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the probability state. In addition, each ON/OFF is determined by the big prize opening opening information and the probability state. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is O if it is a jackpot with a ball coming out (the jackpot opening information is other than jackpot opening information 1).
N, jackpot with no balls coming out (so-called sudden jackpot, etc.) Big winning opening opening information is Big winning opening opening information 1
), it will be ON if there is a jackpot in the time saving state, and OFF otherwise.
Further, the jackpot 3 signal is turned ON when it is a jackpot with a ball being rolled out, and turned OFF when it is a jackpot with no balls put out. In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, all jackpots have a payout.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of winning in the general pattern fluctuation display game and the special pattern fluctuation display game is set (step A721).
), the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A722). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A723). As a result, information on the probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the performance mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

Then, clear the area of the number of illegal winnings of the big winning hole of the big winning hole that corresponds to the big winning hole opening information (
Step A724), a flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area of the big winning opening corresponding to the big winning opening opening information (step A725). Thereafter, fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A726) for shifting to fanfare/interval processing is performed, and the special figure display processing is ended. That is, a special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variable prize winning device 38 into an open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure variable display game or the second special figure variable display game. It constitutes a special game state generating means that generates a state.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A708; N), it is determined whether the probability state of the special symbol fluctuation display game is a high probability state (step A727). In the gaming machine of this embodiment, since the special symbol probability is always constant, it is determined that it is not always in a high probability state (step A
727; N), it is determined whether there is a ceiling reached flag (step A728).
If there is a flag indicating that the ceiling has been reached (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A732 without performing processing related to starting general power support based on reaching the ceiling. The ceiling reached flag is set based on reaching the ceiling, and is cleared based on the occurrence of a jackpot. Thereby, when general power support is started based on reaching the ceiling, it is possible to prevent general power support based on reaching a new ceiling from being started until after the jackpot has passed.

If there is no ceiling reached flag (step A728; N), the value of the ceiling counter area is updated by +1 (step A729), and it is determined whether the ceiling has been reached (step A730).
If the ceiling has not been reached (step A730; N), the process moves to step A732.
If the ceiling has been reached (step A730; Y), the ceiling time reduction activation flag and the ceiling reached flag are set (step A731), and the process moves to step A732.

In step A732, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A732), and if it is a small hit (step A732; Y), it is determined that the small hit of the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure Turn on the test signal (for example, the special symbol 2-bit win signal) regarding the start of the 2-bit win)
) in the RWM test signal output data area (step A735), and step A7
36.
Also, if the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A732; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A733), and if it is a small hit (step A733; Y). saves the test signal (for example, turning on the special symbol 1 small hit signal) related to the start of the small hit (special symbol 1 small win) of the first special symbol fluctuation display game in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A734), the process moves to step A736.

Next, it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is a high probability state (step A
736). In the game machine of this embodiment, since the special pattern probability is always constant, it is determined that the probability is not always high (step A736; N), and the decorative special pattern command is loaded from the decorative special pattern command area and prepared ( Step A737) and effect command setting processing (step A738) are performed. Next, a small win fanfare command is prepared (step A739), and an effect command setting process (step A740) is performed. This small win fanfare command also constitutes special game state start information transmitted to the performance control device 300 at the start of the special game state.
Then, a small win fanfare medium process transition setting process (step A741) for transitioning to the small win fanfare medium process is performed, and the special figure display process is ended.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A733; N), it is determined whether there is a ceiling time saving activation flag (step A751). If there is a ceiling time reduction activation flag (step A751; Y), the initial value of the ceiling time reduction number is saved in the time reduction variation number area (step A752), and the process moves to support operation setting processing (step A756).
Here, 250 is saved as an end condition based on the total number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game in the time reduction variation number area.

Further, if there is no ceiling time saving activation flag (step A751; N), it is determined whether the loaded support hit flag 2 is a support hit (step A753). If it is not a support hit (step A753; N), it is determined whether the loaded support hit flag 1 indicates a support hit (step A754). If it is not a support hit (step A754; N), a special figure normal process transition setting process (step A757) for moving to the special figure normal process is performed, and the special figure displaying process is ended.

On the other hand, if the support hit flag 2 indicates a support hit (step A753; Y) or if the support hit flag 1 indicates a support hit (step A754; Y), the initial value corresponding to the time reduction judgment data is changed to the time reduction variation. It is saved in the number of times area (step A755), and the process moves to support operation setting processing (step A756).
Here, 250 is saved as an end condition based on the total number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game in the time reduction variation number area.
After carrying out the support operation setting process (step A756), a special figure normal process transition setting process (step A757) for moving to the special figure normal process is carried out, and the special figure displaying process is ended.

In the above process, the determination of whether or not the ceiling has been reached is made at the end of the special figure fluctuation display game (steps A727 to A731), and the special figure fluctuation display game in which winning the support and reaching the ceiling are the same. If this occurs, conditions for ending the specific gaming state ST4 are set based on reaching the ceiling (steps A751 to A756).

It is rare for reaching the ceiling and winning a support prize to occur in the same special symbol variable display game, and it would be a waste of control to always check this at the start of the special symbol variable display game. Therefore, by implementing the present embodiment, such wasteful processing becomes unnecessary, and control at the start of the special figure variation display game can be simplified.

In addition, if you set a specific fluctuation pattern or result format based on winning the support or reaching the ceiling, if the winning of the support and reaching the ceiling occur in the same special pattern fluctuation display game, In this special figure variation display game, the variation pattern and result mode based on the support hit are selected at the start, but the specific game state ST4 is given at the end of the special figure variation display game.
The ending condition is not based on hitting the support, but on reaching the ceiling.
While the variation pattern and result mode are selected according to the support hit, there is a contradiction that the end condition of the given specific game state ST4 is based on reaching the ceiling. Since there is no change in the transition to state ST4, the player will not be dissatisfied. In particular, if the ending condition based on reaching the ceiling is set to be more advantageous for the player, the player will not be dissatisfied.

If there is enough control at the start of the special figure variation display game, it is determined at the start of the special figure variation display game whether reaching the ceiling and winning the support hit occur in the same special figure variation display game. You can do it like this. If reaching the ceiling and winning a support prize occur in the same special figure variation display game, the variation pattern or result pattern of the special figure variation display game may be different from the one corresponding to the missed result or the one corresponding to reaching the ceiling. By making it the same, it is possible to avoid contradictions. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, such a contradiction does not occur because a specific fluctuation pattern or result pattern is not set based on hitting a support or reaching a ceiling.

[Fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 6-22 shows the fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1 (step A726) in the above-described special figure display process. In this fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1, first, "3", which is the process number related to fanfare/interval process, is set (step A791), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A792).

Next, save the signals related to the start of the jackpot (special gaming state) (for example, turn on the jackpot 1 signal (output for jackpot + small hit), turn on the jackpot 4 signal (output for jackpot)) in the external information output data area. (Step A793), signals related to the end of high probability & time saving (for example, special symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, special symbol 2 Save the fluctuation time reduction state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal OFF, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal OFF) in the test signal output data area. (Step A794). After that, the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step A795), and the number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A79).
6) Save the low probability low probability & no time saving flag in the low probability game mode flag area (step A797).

Then, the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the high probability is set in order to turn off the gaming state display LED (for example, the third gaming state display section 56c) provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. The notification flag area is cleared (step A799), and the special pattern low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special pattern game mode flag area (step A800). Next, save the probability information command (low probability) in the power outage recovery transmission command area that saves the command output to the production control device 300 when the power outage is restored (step A801), and display special figure fluctuations that can be executed in a time-saving state. The time reduction variation number area for managing the number of games is cleared (step A803). This ends the general power support and time saving state. moreover,
The ceiling counter area is cleared (step A804), the ceiling time reduction activation flag area is cleared (step A805), and the ceiling reached flag area is cleared (step A806).

After that, save the number of production mode 1 in the production mode number area (step A807),
Clear the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A808) and save the no-update code in the next mode transition information area (step A809). Then, the signal related to the right-handed batting instruction (for example, firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A810).
), in order to light up the right-handed game display LED (for example, the first game status display section 56a), the number indicating the right-handed game status is saved in the game status display number 2 area (step A811), and during the fanfare/interval. The process transition setting process 1 ends.

[Support operation processing]
FIG. 6-23 shows the support activation process (step A756) in the above-described special figure display process.
In this support operation setting process, first, a signal related to the start of time saving (for example, turning ON the jackpot 2 signal and the jackpot 3 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A821). Next, the timer initial value is saved in the time saving signal control timer area (step A822). Here, 128 ms is saved as the timer initial value. As a result, among the signals related to the start of time saving, the three jackpot signals are output for only a short time.

Next, turn on the signal related to the start of time reduction (for example, turn on the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal,
Special symbol 2 Turn on the fluctuation time reduction state signal, Normal symbol 1 Turn on the high probability state signal, Normal symbol 1
The fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned ON and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned ON) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A823).

Furthermore, the number with time reduction is saved in the game state display number area (step A824), and the high probability of normal drawings & flag with time saving is saved in the normal drawing gate mode flag area (step A82).
5) In order to maintain the probability status flag and set time saving, a special figure time saving flag is synthesized in the special figure game mode flag area (step A826).
Next, a signal related to the right-handed hitting instruction (for example, firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A827), and the right-handed hitting indication LED (for example, the first game status display section 56a) is turned on. In order to turn on the light, the number in the right-handed game state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A828). Then, a performance mode information address table is set (step A829), and the address of the table corresponding to the performance mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A830). By acquiring the address of the corresponding table based on the performance mode transition information, a variable pattern scenario, which is information regarding the transition of the variable selection table group, is also acquired.

Next, as a process for saving information necessary for managing the production mode in the game control device 100, first, the production mode number of the production mode that will be set after the end of the special symbol fluctuation display game that has won the support is acquired. , is saved in the production mode number area (step A831). Furthermore, the number of remaining rotations of the performance of the production mode set after the end of the special figure fluctuation display game that became a support hit is acquired, and is saved in the effect remaining rotation number area (step A832), and the special figure that became a support hit is obtained. The next mode transition information of the production mode set after the end of the variable display game is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A833). Based on the information saved here, the production mode and variable selection table group will change based on running the special figure variable display game a predetermined number of times after the end of the special figure variable display game that won the support. .

After that, prepare a probability information command corresponding to the production mode number (step A834),
The command is saved in the power outage recovery transmission command area (step A835), and the production command setting process (step A836) is performed. Next, a production rotation number command corresponding to the newly set production remaining rotation number is prepared (step A837), a production command setting process (step A838) is performed, and a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number is prepared. After preparation (step A839), production command setting processing (step A840) is performed.
Then, the time reduction determination data area is cleared (step A841), the production mode transition information area is cleared (step A842), and the support operation setting process is ended.

[Jackpot end process]
FIG. 6-24 shows the jackpot end process (step A15) in the special figure game process of this embodiment.
In this jackpot termination process, first, the time reduction judgment data set based on the type of special result that triggered the execution of the current special gaming state is changed to the time saving state (state with power supply support) after the end of the special gaming state. ), it is determined whether the data is data with time saving set (step A901).
If the data is not data with time saving (Step A901; N), jackpot end setting processing 1 is performed (Step A902), and if the data is data with time saving (Step A901; Y), jackpot end setting processing 2 is carried out (Step A903). . Then, a performance mode information address table is set (step A904), and the address of the table corresponding to the performance mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (when the stop symbols are set) is acquired (step A905). The performance mode transition information also includes a variable pattern scenario that is information regarding the transition of the variable selection table group.

Next, as a process for saving information necessary for managing the performance mode and managing the variable selection table group in the game control device 100, first, the performance mode number of the performance mode to be set after the end of the special game state is acquired. and save it in the production mode number area (step A906). Furthermore, the number of remaining rotations of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is obtained and saved in the remaining number of production rotations area (step A907), and the transition to the next mode of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is performed. Acquire information and save it in the next mode transition information area (step A908
). Based on the information saved here, the performance mode and the variable selection table group are changed based on executing the special figure variable display game a predetermined number of times after the end of the special game state.

After that, prepare a probability information command corresponding to the production mode number (step A909),
The command is saved in the power outage recovery transmission command area (step A910), and the production command setting process (step A911) is performed. Here, as probability information commands, there are a plurality of commands that further include information on production mode in either "with time saving" or "without time saving".
Next, prepare a production rotation speed command that corresponds to the newly set production remaining rotation speed (
Step A912) and effect command setting processing (step A913) are performed.
Next, a time reduction variation number command corresponding to the time reduction variation number is prepared (step A914), and a production command setting process (step A915) is performed.

Next, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A916), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A917).
After that, signals related to the end of the jackpot (for example, jackpot 1 signal OFF, jackpot 3 signal OFF, jackpot 4 signal OFF) are saved in the external information output data area (step A9).
18), Signals related to the end of the jackpot (for example, turn off the condition device operation signal, turn off the accessory continuous operation device operation signal, turn off the special symbol 1 hit signal, turn off the special symbol 2 hit signal
) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A919). Next, the information in the time reduction judgment data area is cleared (step A920), the information in the round LED pointer area indicating the number of rounds of jackpot is cleared (step A921), and the information in the production mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A922). Then, the information in the special figure game mode flag save area is cleared (step A923), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A924), and the jackpot termination process is ended.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
FIG. 6-25(a) shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A902) in the jackpot end process described above. In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal regarding the end of time saving (for example, turning off the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A931). Next, a signal related to the end of time reduction (for example, special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is turned OFF, special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, normal symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is turned OFF) OFF, normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A932).

Next, save the number with no time saving in the game state display number area (step A933), and save the low probability of low probability & no time saving flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A93).
4) Save the no time saving flag in the special game mode flag area (step A935)
. Thereafter, the time reduction variation number area is cleared (step A936), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is ended.
Through the above processing, after the special game state ends, a state with no time saving (a state without general electricity support) is established.

[Jackpot end setting process 2]
FIG. 6-25(b) shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A903) in the jackpot end process described above. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of time saving (for example, turning on the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A941). Since the signal regarding the start of high probability is output during the jackpot, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area. Next, a signal related to the start of time reduction (for example, special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is turned on, special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is turned on, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on, normal symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is turned on) is turned on and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A942).

Next, save the number with time saving in the game state display number area (step A943), and save the high probability of high probability & time saving flag in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A944).
, the time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A945). Thereafter, the initial value of the number of time reduction fluctuations (here, 250) is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area (step A946), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended.

Through the above processing, the time saving state (state with general electricity support) is entered after the special gaming state ends. Furthermore, by setting the initial value of the number of times of time-saving fluctuations (250 here) in the time-saving fluctuation number area, the time-saving state is ended by executing the special figure fluctuation display game a predetermined number of times (250 times here).
That is, after the end of the special gaming state, the gaming control device 100 can generate a specific gaming state (time saving state, general electricity support state) that puts the normal variable winning device 37 in a state where winning is easy for a predetermined period of time after the special gaming state ends. It constitutes a specific game state generation control means.

[Specific area switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 6-26 shows the specific area switch monitoring process (step A3) in the special figure game process. In this specific area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether a small hit is occurring (step A41). The term "during a small hit" here refers to a period during which small hit processing and small hit remaining ball processing are performed. If this small hit is not occurring (step A41; N), the specific area switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the specific area switch 38d is valid only during the period when the small hit process and the small hit remaining ball process are being performed. Further, if a small hit is in progress (step A41; Y), it is determined whether the condition device is in operation (step A42).

If the conditional device is in operation (step A42; Y), the specific area switch monitoring process ends. If the conditional device is not in operation (step A42; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43). If there is no input to the specific area switch (step A43; N), the specific area switch monitoring process ends. If there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43; Y), a specific area pass flag is set (step A44), and the specific area switch monitoring process is ended. Later, based on the existence of this specific area passage flag, processing for generating a first special game state will be performed.

[Small hit remaining ball processing]
FIG. 6-27 shows the small hit remaining ball process (step A18) in the special figure game process. In this small hit remaining ball process, first, it is determined whether a remaining ball error is occurring (step A861). If a remaining ball error is occurring (step A861; Y), the process moves to step A863. If a remaining ball error is not occurring (step A861; N), it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A862; N), the small winning remaining ball process is ended. Moreover, when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A862; Y), the process for ending the small winning from step A863 onwards is performed.

That is, the process for ending the small win is performed after all remaining balls in the special variable winning device 38 are discharged. However, if there is a remaining ball error in which the ejection cannot be confirmed even after a predetermined period of time has passed since the last game ball entered the special variable prize winning device 38, it is assumed that the time required for ejection has passed and the The process moves on to end the win. Of course, if there is a remaining ball error, the process may not proceed to end the small hit. Therefore, the process of step A861 may not be performed.

In the process for ending the small hit, first, it is determined whether the specific area has been passed (step A863). When the game ball enters and passes through the specific area 38h, the specific area switch 3
8d, and a specific area passing flag is set. Here, it is determined whether or not a specific area has been passed based on the presence or absence of this specific area passing flag. If the specific area has been passed (step A863; Y), the process moves to step A870 and a process for generating a special gaming state is performed. Further, if there is no passing through the specific area (step A863; N), the process moves to step A864 to end the second special game state and perform processing to enable execution of the special figure fluctuation display game.

In the process for ending the second special game state after step A864 and making it possible to execute the special figure fluctuation display game, 10, which is related to the small hit ending process, is set as the process number (step A
864), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A865). Next, save the small winning ending time in the special figure game processing timer area (step A866).
, Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the University of Japan winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (Step A
867). Then, the large winning opening count area is cleared (step A868), the small winning control pointer area is cleared (step A869), and the small winning remaining ball processing is completed.

On the other hand, if there is a passage through a specific area (step A863; Y) and the process of generating the first special game state after step A870 is performed, a command is loaded from the decorative special figure command area and prepared (step A870), Performance command setting processing is performed (step A871).
Next, a V jackpot fanfare command is prepared (step A872), and production command setting processing is performed (step A873).

After that, save the signal regarding the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) in the external information output data area (
Step A874), the test signal regarding the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 2 hit signal is ON) is output to the test signal output data area. (Step A875).

Then, save the jackpot number in the gaming status display number area (step A876), set the round number upper limit value table (step A877), and obtain the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information. Save in the round number upper limit area (step A878
). Furthermore, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step A879), and the initial value (here, 1) is saved in the round number area (step A880). The upper limit of the number of rounds is set to 10 rounds, but since the small winning action corresponds to the first round, the initial value of the number of rounds is 1.
By setting , nine rounds are opened in the special game state.

Thereafter, 3 for the fanfare/interval process is set as the process number (step A881), and saved in the special figure game process number area (step A882). moreover,
Save the V jackpot fanfare time in the special figure game processing timer area (step A883
), performs the fanfare/interval process transition setting process (step A884),
The process moves to step A868.

[Small winning end processing]
FIG. 6-28 shows the small hit ending process (step A19) in the special figure game process of this embodiment.
In this small hit end process, first, it is determined whether general electricity support is in progress (step A931). If general electricity support is in progress (step A931; Y), the process moves to step A937. If general power is not supported (step A931; N), save the signal related to the left-handed firing instruction (for example, turn off firing position designation signal 1) in the test signal output data area (step A932), and turn on the right-handed firing indication LED. In order to turn off the light (for example, the first gaming state display section 56a), the number in the left-handed playing state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A933), and the process moves to step A937.

Next, it is determined whether there is a ceiling time reduction activation flag (step A937). If there is no ceiling time reduction activation flag (step A937; N), the process moves to step A940. If there is a ceiling time reduction activation flag (step A937; Y), the initial value of the ceiling time reduction number is saved in the time reduction variation number 1 area and the time reduction variation number 2 area (step A938). Here, 250 is set in the time reduction variation number area.
Then, support operation setting processing is performed (step A939), and the process moves to step A940.

Thereafter, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A940), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A941).
Furthermore, a signal regarding the end of the small hit (for example, turning off the special symbol 1 small hit signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A942), and a signal regarding the end of the small winning (for example, turning off the special symbol 1 small winning signal, Special symbol 2 small hit signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A943).
Subsequently, the fluctuating symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A944), the performance mode transition information area is cleared (step A945), and the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A946), the small winning ending process is ended.

Next, control by the production control device 300 will be explained. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the production control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 6-29 and a timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 6-29, in the main processing, the processing at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3) and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power failure occurrence detected flag and the like are cleared.

After performing the processing at the start of the program from steps C1 to C7, loop processing is performed as main loop processing. In this loop process, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, an input signal (
A production button input process (step C9) is performed to create input information from the rising edge). Reading of inputs from the production button 25 and cross key 29 is performed within the timer interrupt process, and in this production button input process, processing for changing the content of the production, etc. is performed when there is an input from the production button 25 or cross key 29. .

Then, the settings for the changeable range of the LED and LCD brightness, volume, etc., and the settings of the LED by the player
A hall/player setting mode process is performed in which operations such as changing the screen, brightness of the liquid crystal display, and volume are accepted (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game.

Next, a received command check process (step C12) is performed to analyze and respond to the command from the game control device 100, and a performance display editing process (step C13) is performed to edit settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the performance. ) to set the end of preparation for the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the content to be drawn, and finally the drawing data is set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn is prepared within 0 seconds (approximately 33.3 milliseconds), the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether it is frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds), a V blank interrupt (1/6
0 second) is entered twice, it is determined that it is frame switching timing. Note that the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily as appropriate. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) at 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated (frame switching) at a timing later than 1/60 second. (switching) may also be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process in step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step C15 that it is frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, a sound control process (step C17) that controls the output of audio from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), and controls the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 including the panel decoration device 46 and the display board 350, etc. Decoration control processing (step C18), movable body control processing (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoids of the board presentation device 44, and board presentation setting processing (step C20) for controlling presentation are performed to clear the WDT. The process returns to step C8.

[Received command check processing]
FIG. 6-30 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this received command check process, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of commands received (step C201), It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). If it is determined that the number of commands received is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process ends. Further, if it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of commands received (step C203).

Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204).
), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether the copying of commands for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206).
In this way, in this embodiment, commands are not directly analyzed in the received command buffer;
The content of the received command buffer is copied to a command area (RAM area for analysis), and command analysis is performed in the command area. As a result, in case a command is sent from the gaming control device 100 while the command is being analyzed, the command (data)
You can move it to make room. In addition, command analysis can be performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the copying of commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. Furthermore, if it is determined that the copying of commands for the number of commands received has been completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and received command analysis processing (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands equal to the number of received commands has been completed (step C210). Then, if it is determined that the analysis of commands for the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N),
The process returns to step C207. Further, if it is determined that the analysis of commands equivalent to the number of received commands has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is ended. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are analyzed all at once. Note that this embodiment has a configuration in which up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 6-31 shows the received command analysis process in the above-described received command check process. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated into MODE and the lower byte is separated into ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). If it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

Further, if it is determined in step C232 and step C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C2
34;N), the received command analysis process ends.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
In step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of variable commands (step C235). The variation command is a command that instructs the variation pattern of the special figure. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of variable commands (step C235
;Y), variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Also, if it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of variable commands (
In step C235;N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237). The jackpot commands are commands that command operations related to the jackpot performance (such as displaying a fanfare screen and round screen), and commands that command operations related to the small win performance (displaying the fanfare screen and end screen, etc.). And M.O.
If it is determined that DE is within the range of jackpot commands (step C237; Y), jackpot command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Further, when it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of symbol commands (step C239). The symbol-related command is a command that instructs information regarding the symbol of the special symbol (for example, what to use as the stop symbol of the special symbol). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of symbol-related commands (step C239; Y), symbol-related command processing (
Step C240) is performed to end the received command analysis process.

Also, if it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol-related commands (
In step C239;N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of single-shot commands such as pending number commands and error commands (step C241). Single-shot commands are commands that stand alone, unlike commands that make sense in combination, such as symbol commands and variable commands. These one-shot type commands include a customer waiting demonstration command, a pending number command, a pattern stop command, a probability information type command, an error/invalid type command, a model specification command, etc. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C24
1; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is ended.

Also, if it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (
In step C241;N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch symbol type command (step C243; Y), the prefetch symbol type command processing (step C2
44) to end the received command analysis process.

If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of prefetch symbol-related commands (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch variable commands (step C245). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the read-ahead variable command (step C245; Y), read-ahead variable command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process ends. Also, in step C245,
When it is determined that MODE is not within the range of look-ahead variable commands (step C245; N)
Then, the received command analysis process ends.

Note that the prefetch variation type command and the prefetch symbol type command are commands that include information necessary to execute the prefetch effect. A look-ahead performance (also called a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice performance) is whether or not a special figure change display game will be a jackpot when the special figure change display game corresponding to the unexecuted starting memory (pending) is subsequently executed. In order to notify the player in advance of the fluctuation pattern (or what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) with a predetermined degree of reliability, the display device 41 may display a decorative special symbol start memory display in a different manner from normal. This is a performance such as displaying a performance display on the screen. The prefetching commands (prefetching variation commands and prefetching symbol commands) are commands that notify in advance the fluctuation patterns and stop symbols corresponding to the starting memory that is the target of the prefetching effect, and are sent from the game control device 100 at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted to the production control device 300. Note that normal variable commands and symbol-related commands that are not pre-reading are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 at the start of the special figure variable display game.

Next, the effects of the game will be explained.
FIG. 6-32 shows an example of the performance on the normal stage in the normal game state ST1. Although the display contents are basically the same in other game states, it is also possible to not display some of the display contents depending on the game state.

As shown in FIG. 6-32(a), in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a first decorative game display section 81 for displaying a first decorative game among the decorative special figure variable display games is provided. In the first decorative game display section 81, the identification information is displayed in a variable manner in each of the variable display areas of the left variable display area 81a, the middle variable display area 81b, and the right variable display area 81c, and then stopped and displayed, thereby displaying the decorative special figure variable. Show games.

At the upper right of the display area of the display device 41, a second decorative game display section 82 is provided that displays a second decorative game of the decorative special figure variable display games. Similarly to the first decorative game displayed on the first decorative game display section 81, the second decorative game displayed on the second decorative game display section 82 has identification information in each of the left area, middle area, and right area. After displaying the variable, stop and display the result. The second decorative game display section 82 displays identification information (small symbols) that is relatively smaller than the identification information (large symbols) displayed on the first decorative game display section 81 .

Further, at the lower left of the display area of the display device 41, a first display section 91a, a second display section 91b, a third display section 91c, and a fourth display section 91d, which are areas for displaying effects, are arranged side by side. It is being Furthermore, a fifth display section 92, which is an area for displaying effects, is provided at the lower right of the display area of the display device 41.

Further, at the lower right part of the display area of the display device 41, a standby memory display section 83 is provided that displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory.
The standby memory display section 83 displays decorative special figure starting memory displays corresponding to the first starting memory and the second starting memory. In the normal game state ST1, since the game mainly proceeds with the special figure variation display game based on the first start memory, the standby memory display section 83 displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory.
The decorative special figure starting memory display displayed on the standby memory display section 83 has a one-to-one correspondence with the starting memory, and the leftmost decorative special figure starting memory display is the decorative special figure corresponding to the starting memory stored first. They are displayed in the order of memory so that they are displayed as a starting memory display, and each time they are used, they shift to the left. In addition, in the standby memory display section 83, there is a decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory (first starting memory) which is the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game, and the right to execute the special figure 2 variable display game. It is also possible to display both the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory (second starting memory).
Furthermore, in the standby memory display section 83, the pre-read results such as the result of the special figure variation display game and the variation pattern based on the starting memory can be suggested by the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory. It is possible.

On the left side of the standby memory display section 83, there is provided an active memory display section 84 that displays information regarding the starting memory corresponding to the special symbol variation display game that is currently being executed. The decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is transferred to the running memory display unit 84 at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game. Furthermore, in the running memory display section 84, the results and fluctuation patterns of the special figure variation display game currently being executed can be suggested by the display mode of the running memory display displayed on the running memory display section 84. It is possible.
At the upper left of the display area of the display device 41, there is a first starting memory number display section 85a that displays the first starting memory number (special figure 1 pending number) and a second starting memory number (special figure 2 pending number). A second starting memory number display section 85b for display is provided.
Further, at the upper center of the display area of the display device 41, a game state display 86 indicating the game state is displayed, and here it is shown that the game is in the normal game state ST1.

When a new special figure fluctuation display game is started, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the waiting memory display section 83 shifts to the running memory display section 84, as shown in FIG. 6-32(b). At the same time as the performance is executed, the decorative special figure start memory display located other than the left end of the waiting memory display section 83 moves to the left within the waiting memory display section 83. Furthermore, the numerical value on the first starting memory number display section 85a changes. Further, the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 start varying display of the identification information.

Depending on the selected variation pattern, as the special figure variation display game progresses, the same identification information becomes temporarily stopped in the left variation display area 81a and the right variation display area 81c as shown in FIG. 6-32(c). Sometimes. The production may further develop and become SP reach.

When the predetermined variation time ends, the result mode is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 6-32(d). Here, the result is a failure, and the failure result form is displayed as the result form. If the result is a jackpot or a small win, the corresponding result format will be displayed. Further, when the result is a hit, a losing result is displayed, but a result corresponding to a win may be displayed.
When the predetermined stop display time for displaying the result mode has elapsed, the special figure fluctuation display game ends, and the running memory display displayed on the running memory display section 84 is erased.

In addition, from the state where the fluctuation display is being performed as shown in Figure 6-32 (e), the identification information is temporarily stopped as shown in Figure 6-32 (f), and as shown in Figure 6-32 (g). It is also possible to derive a result as shown in FIG. 6-32 (h) by executing a pseudo-continuation in which the variable display is performed again at one time or more.

Next, specific effects will be explained. The specific performance is a performance that includes a plurality of performances, and as shown in FIG. 6-33, the first display section 91a displays the character "Super", and the second display section 91b displays the character "Nuki". This includes an effect that displays the word "full" on the third display section 91c, and an effect that displays the word "open" on the fourth display section 91d.
The effect of displaying characters on each display section constitutes a ranking effect in which a ranking is determined for each, and the first ranking effect that displays the character "super" on the first display section 91a has the highest ranking, The second ranking effect that displays the character "Nuki" on the second display section 91b has the second highest ranking. Furthermore, the third ranking effect that displays the word "all" on the third display section 91c has the third highest ranking, and the fourth ranking effect that displays the word "open" on the fourth display section 91d has the highest ranking. low. That is, the order of ranking is first-rank performance, second-rank performance, third-rank performance, and fourth-rank performance.

The corresponding display sections are arranged in accordance with the ranking, and when all the ranking presentations are executed, a character string of "Cho-Nuki Zenkai" is formed. This character string is one of the lines used in the story that is the subject of the game machine, and is a unique character string.

In a specific performance, the higher the ranking performance is executed, the higher the possibility of a special result, and the higher the probability that a performance with a high probability of a special result will be executed, etc., which is advantageous to the player. It is designed to suggest or notify that an event is likely to occur.
In addition, when a ranking presentation of a certain rank is executed, all ranking presentations lower in rank than the ranking presentation are executed. Therefore, the higher the number of ranking effects performed, the higher the possibility of a special result, or the higher the possibility of a special result being executed. It can also be said that

While the variable display is being performed as shown in FIG. 6-33(a), a notification display 87 is displayed as shown in FIG. 6-33(b), which is an effect to notify that a ranking effect will be executed. be done. The notification display 87 here is for notifying that the fourth rank effect will be executed, and the characters "open", which are the characters corresponding to the fourth rank effect, are displayed together with the effect image. Then, as shown in FIG. 6-33(c), the fourth ranking effect is executed and the word "open" is displayed on the fourth display section 91d.
After that, as shown in FIG. 6-33(d), as a notification display 87 notifying that the third ranking performance will be executed, the characters "ALL", which are the characters corresponding to the third ranking performance, are displayed together with the effect image. Then, as shown in FIG. 6-33(e), the third ranking effect is executed and the word "all" is displayed on the third display section 91c.

Next, as shown in FIG. 6-33(f), as a notification display 87 notifying that the second ranking effect will be executed, the character "Nuki", which is the character corresponding to the second ranking effect, is displayed together with the effect image. Then, as shown in FIG. 6-33(g), the second ranking effect is executed and the character "Nuki" is displayed on the second display section 91b.
Then, as shown in FIG. 6-33 (h), as a notification display 87 notifying that the first ranking performance will be executed, the character "Super", which is the character corresponding to the first ranking performance, is displayed together with the effect image. Then, as shown in FIG. 6-33(i), the first ranking effect is executed and the character "Super" is displayed on the first display section 91a.

Further, when all of the first to fourth ranking effects are executed, an additional effect as shown in FIG. 6-33(j) is executed. If only some of the ranking effects are executed, no additional effects will be executed, and by executing this additional effect, it will be clearly announced that all of the first to fourth ranking effects have been executed.

In the example shown in Figure 6-33, an example was shown in which the ranking performances are executed in order from the lowest rank to the lowest, but for the first to third ranking performances, the ranking performances that are lower in rank than the own rank have not been executed yet. It is possible to execute it even in the state.
While the variable display is being performed as shown in FIG. 6-34(a), a notification display 87 is displayed as shown in FIG. 6-34(b), which is an effect to notify that a ranking effect will be executed. be done. The notification display 87 here is for notifying that the third ranking effect will be executed, and the characters "all" corresponding to the third ranking effect are displayed together with the effect image. Then, as shown in FIG. 6-34(c), the third ranking effect is executed and the word "all" is displayed on the third display section 91c.

At this time, the fourth ranking performance, which is lower in rank than the third ranking performance, has not yet been executed, and the fourth display section 91d corresponding to the fourth ranking performance notifies that the fourth ranking performance will be executed. An image 88 is displayed.
By arranging the first to fourth display sections 91a to 91d according to the ranking of the ranking performance, it becomes clear at a glance that the ranking performance has been executed from an intermediate ranking, and the player feels a sense of discomfort that is different from normal. It is possible to make the player feel strongly about the game, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

After that, as shown in FIG. 6-34(d), as a notification display 87 notifying that the fourth ranking performance will be executed, the character "open", which is the character corresponding to the fourth ranking performance, is displayed together with the effect image. Then, as shown in FIG. 6-34(e), the fourth ranking effect is executed and the word "open" is displayed on the fourth display section 91d.
Furthermore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 6-34(f), as a notification display 87 notifying that the second ranking performance will be executed, the character "Nuki", which is the character corresponding to the second ranking performance, is displayed as an effect. This is displayed together with the image, and as shown in FIG. 6-34(g), the second ranking effect is executed and the character "Nuki" is displayed on the second display section 91b.
Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 6-34(h) and (i), a plurality of ranking effects may be executed at once.

Note that it is also possible to perform the first ranking performance or the second ranking performance from a state where the ranking performance is not being executed. In this case as well, an image 88 notifying that a ranking performance will be executed is displayed on the display section corresponding to a ranking performance that is lower in rank than the executed ranking performance, and these ranking performances will be executed later.
In addition, if a second ranking performance or a third ranking performance is executed from a state where no ranking performance has been executed, after all of the ranking performances that are lower in rank than the executed ranking performance or after the executed ranking performance is executed. Along with all of the ranking presentations with lower rankings, ranking presentations with higher rankings than the executed ranking presentations are executed.

Further, although the image 88 notifying the execution of the ranking performance as shown in FIG. 6-34(c) is displayed, it may not be displayed.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 6-34(d), a notification display 87 is displayed to notify that the lower ranking effect will be executed after the higher ranking effect has been executed. However, the notification display 87 may be omitted and only the ranking presentation may be performed.
Further, as shown in FIG. 6-34(b), after the notification display 87 about the higher rank performance is performed, the lower rank performance is simultaneously executed in addition to the higher rank performance. Also good.

FIG. 6-35 shows another example of how the ranking effect is executed.
As shown in FIG. 6-35(a), an effect such as rotating the reels is performed on the fifth display section 92, and as shown in FIG. 6-35(b), a "stock ” is stopped, a ranking effect is executed as shown in FIG. 6-35(c).
Here, the fourth ranking effect is executed and the word "open" is displayed on the fourth display section 91d. Of course, first to third ranking effects may be executed.
Furthermore, the execution mode shown in FIG. 6-35 and the execution mode shown in FIGS. 6-33 and 6-34 may be combined, and in a series of specific effects, the execution mode shown in FIGS. 6-33 and 6-34 may be combined. When the ranking effect is executed after the notification display 87 notifying that the ranking effect is to be executed as shown, the display of "stock" on the fifth display section 92 as shown in FIG. It is also possible to have a mixture of times in which the ranking effect is executed after the ranking effect is displayed.

Note that among the results that are stopped and displayed on the fifth display section 92, there are various displays other than the "stock" display that informs that the ranking effect will be executed. For example, a look-ahead effect that suggests or informs a look-ahead result by changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display in the standby memory display section 83 by displaying the "change" display in a stopped state, or a memory display during execution. In some cases, an effect is performed in which the storage display during execution of the section 84 is changed to suggest or inform about the special symbol variable display game that is being executed.
Furthermore, a plurality of types of "stock" and "change" displays with different fonts and colors may be provided to suggest or notify the number of ranking performances to be performed, the stage of change in the starting memory display, etc.
For example, there are three types of "stock": black, red, and gold, and if it is black, it suggests that one ranking effect should be executed, and if it is red, it suggests that two or more ranking effects should be executed. If it is gold, it may be possible to notify that four ranking effects will be performed.

Figure 6-36(a) shows the execution pattern of the ranking performance.
Pattern 1 is a pattern in which the fourth rank performance, which is the lowest rank, is executed in the order of the third rank performance, the second rank performance, and the first rank performance. This pattern 1 includes four patterns that progress to one of the first to fourth times and end.
Pattern 2 is a pattern that starts from the third ranking performance. In this pattern 2, the execution of the 4th rank performance, which is lower in rank than the 3rd rank performance, is confirmed when the first run is performed, so it includes 3 patterns that progress to any of the 2nd to 4th runs and end. There is.

Pattern 3 is a pattern that starts from the second ranking performance. In this pattern 3, the execution of the 3rd and 4th rank performances, which are lower in rank than the 2nd rank performance, is confirmed when the first run is performed, so the process progresses to either the 3rd or 4th run and ends. Contains two patterns.
Pattern 4 is a pattern starting from the first ranking performance. In this pattern 4, when the first ranking performance is performed, the execution of the second ranking performance, the third ranking performance, and the fourth ranking performance, which are lower in rank than the first ranking performance, is determined, so the pattern progresses to the fourth time and ends. Contains only

Patterns 1 to 4 are patterns in which one ranking effect is executed each time, but there are also patterns in which a plurality of ranking effects are executed at once, as shown in patterns 5 to 20. In these patterns 5 to 20, ranking effects to be executed each time are determined based on the execution order shown in patterns 1 to 4.
In this embodiment, the higher the number of executions of ranking effects, the higher the reliability of a special result. However, even if the number of executions is the same, a pattern in which many ranking effects are executed at the same time is more reliable of a special result. The degree may be increased.

FIG. 6-36(b) shows an example of the content that is suggested or notified based on the number of executed ranking effects.
The reach types include N reach with low reliability, which has the highest possibility of a special result, SP1 reach, which has higher reliability than N reach, SP2 reach, which has higher reliability than SP1 reach, and SP2 reach. There are SP3 reach, which has higher reliability than SP3 reach, and premier reach, which has higher reliability than SP3 reach, and the minimum type of reach to be executed is indicated by the number of ranking effects executed.
The larger the number of executions of ranking presentations, the more reliable reaches will be executed, and the more reliable the special results will be.

Basically, the content of the subsequent reach effects will be different depending on whether all of the first to fourth ranking effects are executed or if only some of the ranking effects are executed (the reach effect changes depending on the number of executions) (different types and distribution rates) may shift to the same reach effect.
Even if the same reach effect develops, if all of the 1st to 4th ranking effects are executed, additional effects are performed and then the reach effect develops, but if only some of the ranking effects are executed, It develops into reach performance without additional performance. Therefore, even if the same reach effect develops, the variation time of the special figure variation display game will also be different. As a result, even when performing the same reach effect, the players' impressions will be different, and they will be able to feel a high degree of reliability, which will improve the interest of the game.

Note that additional effects may or may not be performed for each of the patterns listed in FIG. 6-36(a). For example, as shown in FIG. 6-36(c), even if the number of executions of the same rank effect is the same, the reliability may be higher when the additional effect is executed.
Further, it may be arranged such that the greater the number of executed ranking effects, the higher the possibility of executing additional effects.
Further, when the additional effect is executed, the reach effect may be higher than a predetermined reliability (for example, SP2 reach or higher).
In addition, if the number of executions is 4, which is the case where all of the first to fourth ranking effects have been executed, the additional effects will be executed, and if only some of the ranking effects are executed, the additional effects will be executed at a predetermined rate. It may also be executable.
Further, the additional effect may be executed when the number of executions is a predetermined number or more (for example, three or more).

In addition, the ranking effect can be executed at any time while the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, for example,
At the start of fluctuation, the period until N reach is reached, during N reach, during SP1 reach, and during SP2 reach. Furthermore, in the case of a pseudo-continuation, a ranking effect may be executed in each re-variation effect.

According to the above-described specific performance, the ranking performance is not only performed sequentially from the lowest rank, but also from intermediate stages, making it possible to provide a highly interesting performance.
If the ranking effect is simply executed in order from the lowest level, the player will not have any sense of anticipation in the initial stage of the effect where the ranking is low and the reliability is not very high, and the player will just have to wait for the effect to progress to a higher stage. However, by providing a case where the game is executed from an intermediate stage as in the present embodiment, the player will have a sense of anticipation for the ranking effect each time, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that patterns other than the pattern shown in FIG. 6-36(a) can also be set. For example, it may include a pattern in which performances are executed in the order of third rank performance, fourth rank performance, first rank performance, and second rank performance. In the case of this pattern, the execution of the fourth rank performance is determined when the third rank performance is executed, and the execution of the second rank performance is then determined when the first rank performance is executed.

Moreover, although the specific effect is performed in one special figure variable display game, the specific effect may be performed in a plurality of special figure variable display games. For example, a special symbol variation display game to be previewed may be set based on the pre-reading result, and the specific effect may be started from a special symbol variation display game that precedes the special symbol variation display game.

Also, a first display section 91a, a second display section 91b, a third display section 91c, and a fourth display section 91d.
The characters displayed on the screen may be displayed in a lighter color, and the characters may be clearly displayed based on the execution of the corresponding ranking effect.
Further, the ranking effect is not limited to the effect of displaying characters. Any type of performance may be used as long as it performs multiple types of performances with determined rankings.

In addition, after all of the ranking performances that correspond to ranks lower than the executed ranking performances of the predetermined ranking are executed, or together with all of the ranking performances that are lower than the ranking performances of the predetermined ranking, the ranking performances corresponding to the ranking performances of the predetermined ranking are supported. However, it is also possible to execute a ranking effect corresponding to a higher rank than the rank effect of the predetermined rank before executing all the rank effects lower than the rank effect of the predetermined rank. .
As for the rank performance which is lower in rank than the rank of the executed rank performance and which has not yet been executed, it is sufficient to execute it by the end of the specific performance currently being executed.

In addition, in the above example, only the first character string "Super-Nuki Zenkai" is displayed, but in addition to this character string, another four-character second character string may also be displayed.
Further, it may be suggested or notified that there is a higher possibility of a special result when the second character string is displayed than when the first character string is displayed.
Further, a specific performance may be performed in a special game state, and information regarding a special result may be suggested or announced. For example, it may be suggested or notified that the higher the number of executions of the ranking performance, the higher the possibility that the specific gaming state ST4 will be reached after the special gaming state ends.

In addition, a unique character string was created by arranging all the characters of the corresponding ranking effect according to the height of the ranking, but even if only some of the characters of the ranking effect were lined up, a unique character string was formed, and further characters They may be arranged to form other unique character strings.
For example, in the above example, the string "full throttle" is also a unique string, and furthermore, "
It can be said that it forms another unique character string by becoming ``Cho-nuki-zen-kai''.
Moreover, although all the ranking effects are effects in which characters are displayed, there may be a ranking effect in which characters are displayed and a ranking effect in which effects other than characters are displayed.

Also, a first display section 91a, a second display section 91b, a third display section 91c, and a fourth display section 91d.
are arranged along the left-right direction, and the first display section 91a at the left end corresponds to the first ranking effect with the highest rank, and the second display section 91b, third display section 91c, and fourth display section 91d correspond in that order. Although the production rank is lowered, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, it is assumed that the fourth display section 91d at the right end corresponds to the first ranking production with the highest ranking,
The rankings of the ranking effects corresponding to the third display section 91c, the second display section 91b, and the first display section 91a may be lowered in this order.
Further, the direction in which they are lined up is not limited to the left-right direction, but may be the up-down direction or other directions. Further, instead of being lined up in a straight line, they may be lined up along a curve or a circle.
Alternatively, the display units may be arranged in a non-aligned manner, such as by arranging one display unit at each of the four corners of the display area.

In addition, a first display section 91a is an area for displaying all of the ranking effects on the display means.
, the second display section 91b, the third display section 91c, and the fourth display section 91d are set to be arranged according to the ranking, but it is also possible to set the areas displayed on the display means to be arranged according to the ranking for a part of the ranking effect. good.
For example, the second display section 91b, the third display section 91c, and the fourth
The display sections 91d are arranged in accordance with the ranking, but the first display section 91 corresponding to the first ranking effect
a may be displayed at a position unrelated to the arrangement of the second display section 91b, third display section 91c, and fourth display section 91d.

Also, a first display section 91a, a second display section 91b, a third display section 91c, and a fourth display section 91d.
is not limited to being placed at a fixed display position in the display area, but may be one whose display position and size change.
For example, the display position may vary depending on the progress of a specific performance or other performance.
Furthermore, it may be possible to move while a specific performance is being executed, and in this case, it may be possible to move in a line while maintaining the state of lining up according to the ranking of the corresponding ranking performance, or to move in a line according to the ranking of the corresponding ranking performance. It may be arranged to move randomly regardless of the ranking.
The moving route when moving in a single line while maintaining the state of lining up according to the ranking of the corresponding ranking effect may be a predetermined route (for example, a circular route) or a random route. good.

Also, a first display section 91a, a second display section 91b, a third display section 91c, and a fourth display section 91d.
is not limited to displaying characters, but any display may be used as long as it can indicate that the corresponding ranking effect has been executed. Furthermore, a first display section 91 is provided on the display device 41.
a, instead of providing the second display section 91b, the third display section 91c, and the fourth display section 91d, these display sections may be configured by a display means different from the display device 41. Further, it may be configured by a lamp or an LED.

From the above, a gaming machine that can execute a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generate a state advantageous to the player is equipped with a performance control means (performance control device 300) that controls the performance of the game, and is capable of controlling the performance. The means is capable of executing a specific performance including a plurality of types of ranking performances, each of which has a determined ranking, and each ranking performance is in a state where a ranking performance of a lower rank than the ranking of the ranking performance has not yet been executed. However, if there is a ranking performance that is lower than the ranking of the executed ranking performance and has not yet been executed, it is possible to identify all of the ranking performances that have not yet been executed. This means that it is executed by the end of the performance.
Therefore, unlike a performance that is simply performed in order from the lowest ranking, the specific performance changes, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, after executing all of the ranking presentations corresponding to a lower ranking than the executed ranking presentation of the predetermined ranking, or together with all of the ranking presentations lower than the ranking presentation of the predetermined ranking, This means that it is now possible to perform a ranking effect corresponding to a higher ranking.
Therefore, after the low ranking performance that was promised to be executed is executed, the higher ranking performance is performed, giving a sense of security to the player and not only giving the player a sense of security but also making it possible to determine up to which ranking the performance will be executed. It is possible to make it easier to understand whether there is a player in the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the display means (display device 41
), and the performance control means includes an area (first display section 91a, second display section 91b, third display section 91c, fourth display section 91d) for displaying part or all of the ranking performance on the display means.
This means that the settings are made so that they are arranged in order.
Therefore, it is possible to easily understand which order of performance is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the effect control means can execute an effect of displaying characters on the display means as a ranking effect, and by arranging the characters of the corresponding ranking effect according to the ranking, a unique character string is formed.
Therefore, it is possible to easily understand up to which order the performance has been executed.
In addition, if all the characters of the ranking effect are arranged to form a unique character string, it can be easily recognized that the ranking effect of all the rankings has been executed, which can improve the interest of the game. .

Furthermore, if there is a ranking performance that has a lower ranking than the executed ranking performance and has not been executed yet, the performance control means controls that the ranking performance that has not yet been executed is executed. This means that it is possible to suggest or inform.
Therefore, it becomes easier to understand that the execution is promised, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the performance control means can execute additional performance when a predetermined number of ranking performances have been performed.
Therefore, the player comes to expect that the ranking effect will be executed a predetermined number or more, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the result derivation process for ultimately deriving either the first result or the second result will be explained. The result derivation indication suggests or informs that it is more advantageous for the player if the first result is derived than if the second result is derived.
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, in the first special game state ST2, character X, which is an ally character, and characters A to D, which are enemy characters, race, and the result in which character X wins is set as the first result. It is notified that the specific gaming state ST4 will be entered after the end of the special gaming state ST2, and the result that character I have to.

In addition, in the result derivation performance, to show the race results, a selection effect will be executed in which character X, an ally character, and one of the enemy characters A to D compete for first and second place. It has become. Selection effects corresponding to each enemy character are prepared, and one of these effects is selected and executed.
A reliability level, which is a high probability that the first result will be derived, is set for each selection effect. That is, each of the selected performances is set with a first reliability that is a unique reliability. The first reliability is defined by the rate at which the first result is derived in each selection performance. The first reliability is the lowest for the selection performance corresponding to character A, and increases in the order of character B, character C, and character D. That is, in the selection performance corresponding to character A, character X has the highest possibility of losing, and character B, character C, and character D have a higher possibility of winning in this order.

Figure 6-37 shows an example of result derivation.
In this example, as shown in FIG. 6-37(a), the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed in the normal gaming state ST1, and as shown in FIG. 6-37(b), the first special result (jackpot) is derived, and then the first special game state ST2 is started.
With the start of the first specific gaming state ST2, the result derivation appearance is started, and first, when some or all of the multiple types of selection effects are selected in the result derivation appearance, the first result can be derived. A suggestive effect suggesting the second reliability level, which is a high degree of sex, is executed.

In this suggestion effect, characters participating in the race are shown as a running table as shown in FIG. 6-37(c), and it is shown that a selection effect corresponding to the enemy character shown here can be selected.
Note that all of the selection effects are shown here assuming that all enemy characters will participate in the race, but some of the selection effects may be selected assuming that some of the enemy characters will participate in the race. It may be possible to indicate that it is possible.

The order of characters in the race list is based on the probability that the first result in which character This suggests a second reliability level, which is a high reliability level.
In the entry table, the high level of second reliability is shown as the result of a hypothetical vote to predict which character will win the race, and here, character C has the most votes, is the most popular, and will win the race. This suggests that the probability of winning the race is high, and the probability of winning the race decreases in the order of Character A, Character X, Character B, and Character D.
In other words, if the selection effect corresponding to character C is selected, the first one in which character X wins
Character A,
This suggests that the first result in which character X wins is more likely to be derived in the selection performance corresponding to character B and character D in this order, and the second reliability becomes higher in this order.

The second reliability is determined by determining the rate at which the first result is derived in each selection performance for each of the race list patterns that can be selected in the suggestion performance shown in Figure 6-41, and arranging them in order of popularity. It is set by this. When the selection rate of each pattern in the race list and the rate at which the first result is derived for each selection performance in each pattern of the race list are combined, the reliability of each selection performance is the first result unique to the selection performance. 1 reliability.

Furthermore, by displaying character X, which is an ally character, in the entry table, character X's popularity becomes the standard, making it easier to understand the second reliability. That is, it is suggested that the more popular an enemy character is than character X, the higher the possibility that character X will be defeated in the corresponding selection presentation, and the lower the possibility that the first result will be derived. Furthermore, it is suggested that the less popular an enemy character is than character X, the higher the possibility that character X will win in the corresponding selection presentation, and the higher the possibility that the first result will be derived.
Furthermore, if character X is ranked high in popularity, there is a high possibility that character X will win, which suggests that there is a high possibility that the first result will be derived.

Further, when a selection effect corresponding to a character whose popularity is lower than the popularity order of character X, which is the standard, is executed, a notification effect to notify that fact can be executed.
The notification effects include effects such as vibrating the effect button 25, effects that output a specific sound,
Examples include effects that display a specific image, effects that cause LEDs to emit light in a specific manner, effects that operate the board effect device 44, and the like.
Note that even when a selection effect corresponding to a character whose popularity is higher than the popularity order of character X, which is the standard, is executed, a notification effect may be executed to notify that effect.
Further, when indicating the selected selection performance, the height of the second reliability may be suggested or reported by indicating the popularity order in the race list.

In this way, by setting the first reliability specific to the character and the second reliability in the result derivation during execution, the first result in the race is determined by taking both reliability into consideration. A game feature of guessing the high probability of being derived is brought about.
In the result-derived appearance of this embodiment, the selection effect corresponding to the character shown as the most popular is most often executed, and the first reliability is determined based on the first reliability of the most popular character.
It is possible to estimate the possibility that the result will be derived.
In addition, if a character that is the second most popular or lower is selected, the second reliability increases, so it can be inferred that the first result is likely to be derived, and furthermore, depending on the first reliability of the selected character, We can estimate how likely that is.

After performing the suggestive effect, the race starts as shown in Figure 6-37(d), and as the race progresses as shown in Figure 6-37(e), as shown in Figure 6-37(f). The selection performance begins. Here, the selection effect corresponding to character C has been selected, and a notification that the selection effect corresponding to character C has been selected and a first reliability specific to the selection effect corresponding to character C are notified. .
Here, character C is more popular than character When the selection effect corresponding to the character is selected, a notification effect to notify the user of the selection is executed.
Then, as shown in Figure 6-37(g), a performance is performed in which character X, which is an ally character, and character C, which is an enemy character, compete, and a performance is performed to notify the result as shown in Figure 6-37(h). It will be done. Here, it is shown that character X wins by reaching the goal first, and it is announced that the first result in which character X wins is derived, as shown in FIG. 6-37(i).
When the first result is derived and the first special gaming state ST2 is completed, the state becomes a specific gaming state ST4 as shown in FIG. 6-37(j).

In addition, if the second result is derived, it is shown that the enemy character is defeated by reaching the goal first in the stage of Figure 6-37 (h), and the character is defeated in the stage of Figure 6-37 (i). It is announced that a second result in which X is defeated has been derived. Thereafter, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 or the remaining pending use state ST5.

Although character X, which is an ally character, is displayed as a reference in the entry table of the suggestion effect, it is also possible to display only the enemy character without indicating the reference.
Further, although the reference character is character X, which is an ally character, other characters may be used as the reference, or a character with a specific ranking (for example, the third most popular) may be used as the reference.

An example of the result derivation is also shown in Figures 6-38 and 6-39.
In this example, as shown in FIG. 6-38(a), a second special result (small win) is derived in the special figure fluctuation display game executed in the specific gaming state ST4.
In addition, in the gaming machine of this embodiment, the ready-to-win state is not generated in the special figure fluctuation display game in the specific gaming state ST4. As a result, the game in the specific game state ST4 can be made to have a sense of speed, and by the first special game state ST2 occurring continuously in a short period of time, a rapid increase in the number of balls held is realized, and the game speed is improved. I'm trying to improve my interest.

In this example, the second starting memory exists during the execution of the special symbol fluctuation display game that results in the second special result, and at this point, the special symbol based on the second starting memory is based on the pre-read result for the second starting memory. The effect control device 300 grasps that the result of the figure fluctuation display game is a first special result or a second special result, and a specific special result that is a result of entering a specific gaming state ST4 after the end of the special gaming state. There is.

A second special game state ST3 is started with the derivation of the second special result, and as shown in FIG. ) is displayed.
Further, when a game ball flows into a specific area of the special variable winning device 38, a notification effect 94 is performed to notify the player of this fact.

When the first special game state ST2 is started based on the game ball flowing into the specific area of the special variable winning device 38 in the second special game state ST3, the result derivation is started. When selecting the contents of the result derivation, it is possible to select the contents in consideration of the existence of the second starting memory which is the specific special result.
The progress of the result derivation is the same as the case shown in Figure 6-37, and a suggestion effect showing the entry list is performed as shown in Figure 6-38 (c), and as shown in Figure 6-38 (d). The race will begin.
When the race progresses as shown in FIG. 6-38(e), a selection effect is started as shown in FIG. 6-38(f). Here, the selection performance corresponding to character A is selected, and a notification that the selection performance corresponding to character A has been selected and a first reliability specific to the selection performance corresponding to character A are notified. .

Furthermore, since the selection effect corresponding to character A has the lowest first reliability, "Warning!!" is displayed as the effect display 97 suggesting that the second result is likely to be derived. It will be done.
In the gaming machine of this embodiment, if the first special gaming state ST2 ends and the specific gaming state ST4 is entered, there is a high probability of a small win and the first special gaming state ST2 is returned to. The more this cycle is repeated, the more gaming value can be acquired.
If the first special gaming state ST2 does not move to the specific gaming state ST4 after the end of the first special gaming state ST2, if there is a second starting memory that is remaining pending, it moves to the remaining pending extinguishing state ST5, and the special figure 2 fluctuation based on the second starting memory If the small win or jackpot can be pulled back in the display game, the above cycle can be returned to, and if the small win or jackpot cannot be pulled back, the above cycle will be interrupted by shifting to the normal gaming state ST1. In addition,
If there is no remaining reservation, the game will move to the normal gaming state ST1 without passing through the remaining reservation extinguishing state ST5. Since only one second starting memory can be stored, it is a one-shot game in the remaining hold extinguishment state ST5, which is a disadvantageous situation for the player.
From this kind of gameplay, the player has a strong interest in whether or not to move to the specific gaming state ST4 after the end of the first special gaming state ST2, and the first result is derived in the result derivation. Players have strong expectations for this.
However, the selection performance corresponding to character A has the lowest first reliability, and there is a high possibility that the above cycle will be interrupted. Therefore, an effect display 97 indicating that there is a high possibility that the second result will be derived is performed to arouse the player's fear and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, if the first result in which character X wins in the selection performance corresponding to character A is derived, the first result in which character
It is assumed that the result will be certain. The effect display 97 that suggests that there is a high possibility that the second result will be derived also indicates that if the first result is derived, it will be a specific derivation mode.
If the existence of the second starting memory that provides a specific special result is known when selecting the content of the result derivation output, it is possible to set the result derivation output that will be the specific derivation mode.
That is, the specific derivation mode indicates a pre-read result regarding the starting memory, and in the special figure fluctuation display game that is executed after the end of the first special game state ST2 that is being executed, the first special result or the second special result At the same time, it is notified that a specific special result that becomes a specific gaming state ST4 will be derived after the end of the special gaming state.

By doing this, the selection performance corresponding to character A with the lowest first reliability will either end the above cycle and become a very disadvantageous situation for the player, or the above cycle will continue and This is a turning point in whether or not this will be a very advantageous situation in which the execution of the first special game state ST2 two more times is almost certain.
As a result, even if a selection performance with a low first reliability is selected, it is possible to attract the player's interest and create a sense of expectation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the selection performance, as shown in FIG. 6-38(g), a performance is performed in which character X, which is an ally character, and character A, which is an enemy character, compete against each other. Here too, the display of "Warning!!", which is the effect display 97 that suggests that the second result is likely to be derived, continues, and if the first result is obtained, it is indicated that the specific derivation mode is selected. .
In this example, as shown in Figure 6-38 (h), character You will be notified that the results have been derived.
Furthermore, it is announced that the player has acquired a "winning stock" which means that the first result will be derived in the next result-derived appearance.

When the first result is derived and the first special gaming state ST2 ends, the first special gaming state ST2 becomes specific gaming state ST4 as shown in FIG. 6-38(j), and the existing second starting memory is A special figure 2 variable display game based on is executed. Even during the execution of this special figure 2 variable display game, a stock display 95 indicating that "winning stock" has been acquired is displayed. That is, the stock display 95 notifies that the specific derivation mode has been reached.
Then, as shown in FIG. 6-39(a), a second special result (small win) is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. The stock display 95 continues even in the display of this result mode.
That is, the stock display 95 can be displayed over a period in which the results are stopped and displayed in the special symbol variation display game based on the starting memory that is the target of pre-reading by the advance determination means.
In addition, here, since there is one second starting memory, the number of special figure fluctuation display games that display the stock display 95 is one game, but if a plurality of second starting memories can be stored, the advance determination means It is possible to continuously display a plurality of special figure variation display games over a period in which the results are stopped and displayed in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory that is the target of pre-reading.

As shown in FIG. 6-39(b), the stock display 95 is continued even during execution of the second special game state ST3 accompanying the derivation of the second special result.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 6-39(c), even in the suggestion performance in the result derivation appearance in the first special gaming state ST2, which was started based on the inflow of game balls into the specific area of the special variable winning device 38, Stock display 95 continues.
That is, the stock display 95 can be displayed over the special game state based on the special result derived in the special symbol variation display game based on the starting memory that is the target of pre-reading by the advance determination means.

While the races shown in FIGS. 6-39(d) to (h) are being executed, an effect display 96 of "Victory likely!?" is displayed, indicating that the first result in which character X wins in the race is derived. The first result is that we, Character X, win.
After that, as shown in FIG. 6-39(i), it is announced that the first result in which character Then, the specific game state ST4 is entered.

Note that the stock display 95 may be continued even while the races shown in FIGS. 6-39(d) to (h) are being executed or while the race results are being displayed as shown in FIG. 6-39(i). That is, the stock display 95 may be continued for the entire period of the first special gaming state ST2.
Furthermore, in the special figure fluctuation display game shown in FIG. 6-39(j), it may be displayed that the specific gaming state ST4 is entered after acquiring "winning stock", and this specific gaming state ST4 Even in the first special gaming state ST2 and second special gaming state ST3, which are transitioned to when a small hit or jackpot occurs, the first special gaming state ST2 and second special gaming state are transitioned to after acquiring "winning stock". It may be possible to display that it is ST3. These displays also notify that the specific derivation mode has been reached, and may be the same display as the stock display 95 or may be a different display from the stock display 95.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, small hits occur frequently when transitioning to the specific gaming state ST4, and control is performed so that game balls can easily flow into the specific area in the second special gaming state ST3. Therefore, it is almost certain that the first special gaming state ST2 will be reached after passing through the second special gaming state ST3.
Therefore, due to the existence of the second starting memory that provides a specific special result, the first special game state ST
If the winning stock is acquired in 2, the first special game state ST2 is almost guaranteed to be played two more times.
In this way, the first special game state ST2 a total of three times and the specific game state ST4 between them constitute a very advantageous state for one set of players, and the specific performance continues over the period of this one set. You may also do this by doing so. This specific performance also serves as a notification that the specific derivation mode has been reached, and may be the same display as the stock display 95 or may be a different display from the stock display 95.
Furthermore, notification that the specific derivation mode has been reached may be continued even after one set of periods have elapsed. In this case, it indicates that there is a history of a specific derivation mode, and this notification may be continued until returning to the normal gaming state ST1, or the notification may be continued until the normal gaming state ST1 is returned.
You may continue even if you return to . The display in this case may be the same as the stock display 95 or may be a different display from the stock display 95.

Here, depending on the look-ahead result for the second starting memory stored at the time of FIG. 6-39(a), the result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the second starting memory is the first special result or If it is known that it is a special result and a specific special result that will result in a specific gaming state ST4 after the end of the special gaming state, the selection performance corresponding to character A is performed again and the first result is derived. It is also possible.
In the selection performance shown in Figure 6-39, it is announced that the first result has been determined, and the fact that the selection performance corresponding to character A is selected here also means that the next result derivation performance will be performed. However, it is guaranteed that the first result will be derived, and the series will be confirmed, making for a very interesting production.

In addition, in the first special game state ST2, which is executed based on the so-called first hit in which a special result is derived in the normal game state ST1, the selection effect corresponding to character A having the lowest first reliability is not selected. Also good.
In the case of the normal gaming state ST1, since the second starting memory does not exist, it is clear that the specific derivation mode based on the pre-read result for the second starting memory is not selected. Therefore, if a selection performance corresponding to character A is performed, it becomes clear that the first result will not be obtained, and there is a risk that the interest in the game will decrease. Therefore, in this case, the selection effect corresponding to character A may not be selected.
Of course, the selection performance corresponding to character A may also be selectable in the first special game state ST2 based on the first win. In this case, it may be a performance in which it is certain that the second result will be derived, or the first result may be derived but not treated as a specific derivation mode, so that the specific gaming state ST4 is prevented. However, it is not guaranteed that the first result will be derived even in the next result-derived appearance, and it may be possible to prevent the acquisition of "win stock".

In addition, in the case of a specific derivation mode, it is determined that the first result in which character By comparison, it may be suggested that there is a high possibility that character X will win the first result in the next result-derived appearance.
In addition, according to the specific derivation mode, in the special figure fluctuation display game that is executed after the end of the first special game state ST2 that is being executed, the first special result or the second special result and the specific game state after the end of the special game state Although it is assumed that the specific special result ST4 will be derived, it will be notified that the first special result or the second special result will be derived in the special figure fluctuation display game that is executed after the end of the first special game state ST2 that is currently being executed. It is also possible to suggest or notify only what will happen.

Moreover, although the specific derivation mode is such that the first result is derived with the selection effect corresponding to the character having the lowest first reliability, the present invention is not limited to this.
A specific derivation mode may be such that the first result is derived by a selection effect corresponding to a specific character regardless of the first reliability.
Further, a specific derivation mode may be such that the first result is derived with a specific effect regardless of the type of selection type.

In addition, if a second result is derived in which character Although it is assumed that the system notifies the player that the game will not move to the specific game state ST4, it may be possible to make a transition to the specific game state ST4 as an indication that the game will not move to the specific game state ST4.
In addition, if a second result is derived in which character Therefore, it may be suggested or notified that there is a second starting memory that is a non-specific special result as a pre-read result for the second starting memory.
That is, after the first special gaming state ST2 ends, the state shifts to a specific gaming state ST4, and a small hit or jackpot occurs, but after the first special gaming state ST2 based on the small winning or jackpot ends, the specific gaming state ST4 It may also be possible to suggest or notify that the transition will not be made.

An example of the result derivation is also shown in Figure 6-40.
In this example, the second special result (small win) is derived in the specific gaming state ST4 as shown in FIG. 6-40(a), and the second special result is derived as shown in FIG. 6-40(b). The accompanying second special game state ST3 is executed, and game balls are flowing into a specific area of the special variable winning device 38.
Then, as shown in FIG. 6-40(c), the first special game state ST2 is started based on the game ball flowing into the specific area of the special variable winning device 38, and the result derivation/display is executed.

The progress of the result derivation is the same as that shown in Figure 6-37, and the suggestion effect showing the entry table is performed as shown in Figure 6-40 (c), and the result is shown in Figure 6-40 (d). The race will begin.
As the race progresses, a selection effect is started as shown in FIG. 6-40(e). Here, the selection effect corresponding to character B is selected.
After that, as shown in Figure 6-40(f), when Character X and Character B compete against each other, as shown in Figure 6-40(g), another enemy character, Character D, The character enters the scene, and the selection effect is changed to a competition between character X and character D, as shown in FIG. 6-40(h).
Then, as shown in Figure 6-40(i), character X wins by reaching the goal first, and as shown in Figure 6-40(j), the first result in which character X wins is You will be notified that it has been derived.

In this way, it is possible to change to another selection effect while the selection effect is being executed. In this embodiment, the second reliability of the selection performance after the change is higher than the second reliability of the selection performance before the change. Furthermore, the first reliability of the selection performance after the change is made higher than the first reliability of the selection performance before the change.
In the example shown in FIG. 6-40, in the suggestion effect shown in FIG. 6-40(c), it is shown that character D is lower in popularity than character B and has a higher second reliability. Furthermore, character D has a higher first reliability than character B.
Thereby, it is possible to give the player the impression that the possibility that the first result will be derived by changing the selection effect is increasing. Furthermore, even when a selection effect corresponding to a character with a low first reliability level is being executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the selection effect will be changed to a selection effect corresponding to a character with a high first reliability level, and the game can improve the interest of

Note that when there is a change in the selection effect, the first result may always be derived, or the second result may be derived in some cases.
Further, the second reliability of the selection performance after the change may be lower than the second reliability of the selection performance before the change.
Further, the first reliability of the selection performance after the change may be lower than the first reliability of the selection performance before the change.

Figure 6-41 shows the race list patterns that can be selected in the suggestion performance.
Patterns 1 to 6 are patterns in which character X, which is a standard ally character, is the third most popular. The third confidence level, which is the probability that the first result suggested by selecting these patterns, is 10% for patterns 1 and 2, 15% for patterns 3 and 4, and 15% for patterns 5 and 6. 20%. Since the selection performance corresponding to the most popular character is executed most frequently, the third reliability is dependent on the first reliability of the selection performance corresponding to the most popular character.
Patterns 7 to 12 are patterns in which character X, the standard ally character, is the second most popular, which suggests that the first result is more likely to be derived than patterns 1 to 6. . The third reliability suggested by the selection of patterns 7 to 12 is 30% for patterns 7 and 8, 35% for patterns 9 and 10, and 40% for patterns 11 and 12. Since the selection performance corresponding to the most popular character is executed most frequently, the third reliability is dependent on the first reliability of the selection performance corresponding to the most popular character.

Pattern 13 is a pattern in which character X, which is a standard ally character, is the second most popular character, and character D, which has the highest first reliability specific to the selection performance, is the most popular character. Furthermore, pattern 14 is a pattern in which character X, which is an ally character, is the most popular. The third reliability level suggested by the selection of this pattern is 100%. That is, when this pattern is selected, the first result is that character X always wins.
In pattern 15, character X, which is a standard ally character, is the fifth most popular. This pattern is a pattern that looks strange at first glance compared to other patterns, and is a pattern that players can easily recognize, and the third reliability level suggested by the selection of this pattern is 100%. It has become. Furthermore, when this pattern 15 is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-38, a specific derivation mode is set in which character X wins in the selection performance corresponding to character A, and the next result derivation performance is It is also guaranteed that character X will win.
In this way, it is possible to change the reference position shown in the suggestion performance, and it is possible to suggest or notify the possibility that the first result will be derived in the result derivation performance based on the reference position. There is.

In addition, by providing a first reliability level, a second reliability level, and a third reliability level as reliability levels that indicate the high possibility that the first result will be derived, it is possible that the first result will be derived. It becomes possible to estimate the level of sexual ability from various viewpoints, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
The first reliability is a reliability specific to each selection performance defined by the rate at which the first result is derived in each selection performance.
As shown in Figure 6-37(f), when a selection effect is executed, the first reliability level is indicated by a display showing the relative height for each selection effect, but it is also possible to display a specific numerical value. You can do it like this. Further, it may be made known in advance as information about the gaming machine.

The second reliability is the high probability that the first result will be derived for each selection performance when each selection effect is executed in the result-derived appearance for which the participation table is shown by showing the participation table. It is. Although the entry list shows the order of second reliability based on popularity, specific numerical values may be displayed on the entry list.
Further, as shown in FIG. 6-37(f), when the selection effect is executed, the second reliability may be shown in addition to or in place of the first reliability.
When the second reliability is shown together with the first reliability, for example, when pattern 6 is selected as the entry list, the display when the selection effect corresponding to character C is selected and the selection corresponding to character A Comparing the display when the effect is selected, the display shows that character C is higher than character A in terms of the display of the first reliability level, but the display shows that character A is higher in the display of the second reliability level. The display shows that character C is higher than character C.

The third reliability is the high possibility that the first result will be derived in the result-deriving appearance for which the race list is shown by showing the race list. Although it is possible for the player to understand based on the pattern of the entry table, specific numerical values may also be displayed.
In other words, the entry table is a reliability display that suggests or informs the reliability, which is the probability that the first result will be derived.

The result derivation shown above is performed during the execution of the first special gaming state ST2, and it is notified that the derivation of the first result will lead to a specific gaming state ST4, and the derivation of the second result will notify that the specific gaming state ST4 will be entered. Although the notification is made that the state will not be in ST4, the present invention is not limited to this.
The derivation of the first result may indicate that the specific gaming state ST4 will be reached, and may also include a case where the specific gaming state ST4 is not achieved even if the first result is derived.
Further, it may be made to suggest that the specific gaming state ST4 will not be achieved by deriving the second result, and may include a case in which the specific gaming state ST4 is reached even if the second result is derived.

In addition, special results with different numbers of executable rounds are provided in the first special gaming state ST2, and the number of executable rounds is not clearly notified when deriving the special results, and the number of executable rounds is not clearly notified in the first special gaming state ST2 or the second special gaming state. The number of executable rounds may be suggested or announced based on the results of the result derivation in ST3. In this case, when the first result is derived, it is suggested or announced that there are more executable rounds or more obtainable game balls than when the second result is derived.

Also, based on the type of special result, a probability state in which the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game after the end of the first special game state ST2 will be the first special result is set as a normal probability state and a high probability state higher than the normal probability state. Probability setting means is provided to set the probability state to either state, and the probability state to be set is not clearly notified when deriving the special result, and the probability state is set to either state. A probability state set based on the result may be suggested or announced. In this case, if the first result is derived, it is suggested or announced that a high probability state will be reached.

Further, the result derivation may be performed during the execution of the special figure variation display game, and the content regarding the special figure variation display game may be suggested or notified based on the result.
For example, the result of the special figure variation display game being executed may be suggested or announced based on the result of the result derivation. In this case, if the first result is derived, it will be suggested that there is a higher possibility of a special result or a support hit than if the second result is derived, or it will be announced that a special result or a support win will be achieved. do.
Further, by deriving the first result, it may be suggested or announced that the result of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is a specific special result, and by deriving the second result, it may be executed. It may be suggested or announced that the result of the special figure fluctuation display game in the middle is a non-specific special result.
Furthermore, reaching the ceiling may be suggested or notified based on the results of the result derivation.
In this case, it is suggested or announced that the ceiling will be reached when the first result is derived.

Further, the occurrence of a ready-to-win state or the development of a ready-to-win state in the special symbol variation display game that is being executed may be suggested or notified based on the result of the result derivation. In this case, it is suggested or notified that when the first result is derived, there is a higher possibility that the reach state will be reached or the reach state will develop than when the second result is derived.
Furthermore, it is also possible to use the look-ahead results, for example, if the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is in the reach state, and there is a special figure fluctuation display game in the start memory that is in the reach state. can suggest or notify the occurrence of both reach states by using a specific derivation mode.
In addition, based on the look-ahead result, the result derivation is started from a special figure change display game that is earlier than the special figure change display game based on the starting memory that is the subject of advance notice, and the result derivation appearance is executed over multiple special figure change display games. In this way, the pre-reading result may be suggested or notified.

Also, based on the type of special result, a probability state in which the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game after the end of the first special game state ST2 will be the first special result is set as a normal probability state and a high probability state higher than the normal probability state. A probability setting means is provided for setting the probability to either state, and a falling lottery means is provided for performing a falling lottery for shifting to the normal probability state for each special symbol fluctuation display game when the probability state is high, and the result derivation/display is performed. The winning of the falling lottery may be suggested or announced based on the result. In this case, when the second result is derived, it is suggested or announced that the player has won the falling lottery.
Further, depending on the result of the result derivation, it may be suggested or notified that the presentation mode such as the background will shift to a different presentation mode.
Further, the probability setting value may be suggested or notified based on the result of the result derivation.

From the above, a gaming machine that can execute a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generate a state advantageous to the player is provided with a performance control means (performance control device 300) that controls the performance of the game, and is capable of controlling the performance. The means is capable of performing a result derivation or derivation that ultimately derives either the first result or the second result, and the first result is derived more than the second result is derived. It is intended to suggest or notify that it is advantageous for the player, and it is possible to perform a selection performance selected from a plurality of types in the result derivation performance, and for each selection performance, a first result is derived. A reliability level (first reliability level) is set, which is the high probability that the selection effect is likely to occur, and the selection effect with the lowest reliability among the multiple types of selection effects is executed to derive the first result. In the case of a specific derivation mode, it is suggested or notified that the first result is likely to be derived in the result derivation performed later than when the specific derivation mode is adopted. That is what I did.

Therefore, it is possible to suggest or notify not only the result of the executed result-derived game but also the result-derived game that will be executed later, thereby improving the interest of the game.
In addition, it is possible to increase expectations for the selection effects that have low reliability, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the specific derivation mode is selected in the result derivation performance, the effect control means continues to notify that the specific derivation mode has been reached even after the result derivation performance ends.

Therefore, the player can easily understand that a specific derivation mode has been reached, which is a rare case in which the first result is derived by the selection performance with the lowest first reliability, thereby improving the interest of the game. can do.

In addition, there is a starting memory means (gaming control device 100) capable of storing a starting memory, which is the right to execute the game based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning area, along with a random value up to a predetermined upper limit number, and It can be converted into a closed state and an open state in which game balls can win, and the state of the normal variable winning device 37 forming the starting winning area and the normal variable winning device 37 can be changed to the first state (no general power support). state) and a second state where it is easier to win a prize than the first state (state with general electricity support)
and a normal variable prize winning device control means (gaming control device 100) that controls in any of the following states, and the special result is a non-specific special result (10R jackpot) that is set to the first state after the end of the special gaming state. B, small win B), and a specific special result (10R jackpot A, small win A) that becomes the second state after the special gaming state ends, and the result of the game being executed can generate a specific special result. If so, the first result is derived in the result derivation process.

Therefore, since the first result suggests or informs that the player will be in an advantageous situation, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The performance control means also includes a preliminary determination means (gaming control device 100) that determines the random number value before the game corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means is executed, and the effect control means includes:
If it is known that there is a starting memory that can execute a game that derives a special result based on the determination by the advance determination means, it is possible to use a specific derivation mode.

Therefore, since it is indicated that a special result will be derived later according to the specific derivation mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A special game that is advantageous to the player when a game is executed based on the winning of a game ball in the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) and the result of the game is a special result. In a gaming machine capable of generating a state, a normal variable winning device 37 which can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot win a prize and an open state in which a game ball can win a prize, and which forms a starting winning area and a normal variable winning device 37, is used. The state of the device 37 is controlled to be either a first state (state where there is no power support) or a second state (state where there is power support) in which it is easier to win a prize than the first state. It is equipped with a normal variable prize winning device control means (game control device 100) and a performance control means (performance control device 300) that controls the performance of the game, and for special results, it is set to the first state after the special game state ends. There are non-specific special results (10R jackpot B, small win B) and specific special results (10R jackpot A, small win A) that become the second state after the end of the special gaming state. It is possible to perform a result derivation output that derives either the first result or the second result in a special game state, and it is more likely that the first result is derived than the second result. It is possible to perform a selection performance selected from a plurality of types in the result derivation performance, and a first result is derived for each selection performance. A mode in which a reliability level (first reliability level) that is a level of possibility is set, and a selection effect with the lowest reliability suggested among multiple types of selection effects is executed to derive a second result. In this case,
This means that it is suggested or notified that the special game state being executed is based on the derivation of a non-specific special result.

Therefore, the performance in the special game state can be made highly interesting, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, the gaming machine is capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a state advantageous to the player, and includes a performance control means (performance control device 300) that controls the performance of the game, and the performance control means: It is possible to perform a result derivation that ultimately derives either the first result or the second result, and it is better for the player if the first result is derived than if the second result is derived. It suggests or informs that it is advantageous, and it is possible to perform a selection performance selected from multiple types in the result derivation performance, and for some or all of the multiple types of selection performance, the result derivation that is being executed. This means that it is possible to execute a suggestive performance that suggests a high possibility (second reliability) that the first result in the performance will be derived.

Therefore, in addition to the first reliability specific to each selected performance, it is possible to grasp the second reliability, which is the reliability of each selected performance in the currently executed result derivation. It is possible to understand which selection performance will create a feeling of expectation when selected in the performance, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control means is capable of executing a suggestive effect that suggests, along with a criterion, the high possibility that the first result will be derived in the result-inducing effect being executed, for some or all of the plurality of types of selected effects. Yes, and when the selected selection effect is shown, if the probability of deriving the first result shown in the suggestion effect for the selection effect is higher than the standard, notify that fact. This means that the notification effect can be executed.

Therefore, the player can understand that the first result is highly likely, and can improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the performance control means is capable of changing the position of the reference for the plurality of selection performances that are the targets of suggestion in the suggestion performance.

Therefore, it is possible to change the range targeted by the notification effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect control means suggests a high possibility that the first result in the result-deriving appearance is derived based on the position of the reference for the plurality of selection effects that are the targets of suggestion in the suggestion effect in the result-deriving appearance. This means that it is possible.

Therefore, in addition to the high reliability of each selection performance, it is possible to suggest the high reliability of the result-derived performance itself, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the performance control means can change to another selected performance while the selected selection performance is being executed.

Therefore, even after the first selection is made, it is possible to create a sense of expectation that the selection presentation will be changed to one that is more likely to result in the first result, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the high possibility that the first result shown in the suggestion performance for the selection performance after the change will be derived is the high possibility that the first result shown in the suggestion performance before the change will be derived. It will be higher than that.

Therefore, when a change is made, the sense of expectation increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the embodiment described above, and may be used, for example, with other pachinko gaming machines, arranged ball gaming machines, mahjong ball gaming machines, etc. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use game balls. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to slot machines that use medals, but includes all slot machines such as slot machines that use game balls, for example. Furthermore, the configurations of the above-described modifications can be applied in combination as appropriate.

Further, the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative in all respects and should be considered not to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

10 Game machine 12 Front frame 30 Game board 32 Game area 41 Display means (display device)
100 Game control device (game control means)
300 Performance control device (performance control means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that can execute a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generate a situation advantageous to the player,
Equipped with performance control means for controlling the performance of the game,
The performance control means is
It is possible to perform a result derivation for deriving either the first result or the second result in a state advantageous to the player;
It is possible to perform a selection performance selected from a plurality of types in the result derivation performance,
A reliability level is set for each of the selection effects, which is a high probability that the first result will be derived;
If the selection effect having the predetermined reliability among the plurality of types of selection effects is executed and a specific derivation mode is reached in which the first result is derived, in the result derivation performed later, the A gaming machine characterized in that there is a high possibility that the first result will be derived.

Images